ne ae ne Pa Pane ye ; eat oe ee eer Re at pins ¥ Cn ! 7 , ~ Scie : > Sere g = 5S Ses g pha ik opt Bi ae i £6 % HN j j A Payin dda 2 @ fa = aera seed o : = PEL AS nee eee ean WE, ore Seen Serato ee ee oS ~ tar Ce es = oe = ee Rg ety icine ee Cu i e =", © S = toe =< ees : S 3 2 Se oes Sg ee a a — Pa = a NES Pets eo ees é . eee Saute : py ‘i ie i. WAGE a A " : ig ')s R un F he ot Nae ule i A ; ty ay ANNUAL REPORT BOARD OF REGENTS SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, THE OPERATIONS, EXPENDITURES, AND CONDITION OF THE INSTITUTION iwkay 2 tesS - —— > o> oe WASHINGTON: GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFIC3, I8-9'03 Firty-Frrst CONGRESS, FIRST SESSION. Concurrent resolution adopted by the House of Representatives May 27, 1890, and by the Senate, June 17, 1890. Resolved by the House of Representatives (the Senate concurring), That there be printed of the Report of the Smithsonian Institution and National Museum for the years ending June 30, 1888, and June 30, 1889, in two octavo volumes for each year, 16,000 copies; of which 3,000 copies shall be for the use of the Senate, 6,000 for the use of the House of Representatives, and7,000 for the use of the Smithsonian Institution. IL LETTER FROM THE SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, ACCOMPANYING The annual report of the Board of Regents of that Institution to the end of June, 1888. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, Washington, D. C., July 1, 1888. To the Congress of the United States: In accordance with section 5593 of the Revised Statutes of the United States, I have the honor, in behalf of the Board of Regents, to submit to Congress the annual report of the operations, expenditures, anc con- dition of the Smithsonian Institution for the year ending June 30, 1888. J have the honor to be, very respectfuily, your obedient servant, S. P. LANGLEY, Sceretary of Smithsonian Institution. Hon. JOHN. J. INGALLS, President of the Senate, pro tem. Hon. JOHN G. CARLISLE, Speaker of the House of Representatives. lil ANNUAL REPORT OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION TO THE END OF JUNE, 1888. SUBJECTS. 1. Proceedings of the Board of Regents for the sessions of January and March, 1888. 2. Report of the Executive Committee, exhibiting the financial affairs of the Institution, including a statement of the Smithson fund, and re- ceipts and expenditures for the year 1887—88. 3. Annual report of the Secretary, giving an account of the operations and condition of the Institution for the year 1887-83, with statistics of exchanges, ete. 4. General appendix, comprising a selection of miscellaneous memoirs of interest to collaborators and correspondents of the Institution, teachers, and others engaged in the promotion of knowledge. The report of the National Museum for the year 1887-88 will be pub- lished in a separate volume. XV CON LiwN TS. Page. Resolution of Congress to print extra copies of the Report..........-.....--. If Letter from the Secretary, submitting the Annual Report of the Regents to COMGIERS cocoon ssq6cs coonee canes ScoSctp. os néat Usetooesebde sosedboeso soeSce III General subjects of the Annual Report...--. aE ees ar eee ae eae ae ed a IV Contentsvof the Keport..--2)---)---- seine Peed eo SN be ce ree A Ae ec Vv List of Illustrations ..--- jose SE CHC SE oa Sass See serie Sec atesee VIII Members ex officio of the TD SO Poss see Sr eo Ne Se eee Se Fea 1X Recentsomine SnuvhsOnitanMNStibUblO Ny Sessile, soso oes elaie see Coes Seem soe ax JOURNAL OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS ..--- Bee sie sere XI Suaedmneevine namularyal lS88 oo japoieyye eee cites ene eae nee se ere XI Special meeting, March 27, 1888.-.........-. Aba GoBe Bee a Sea aace XVII REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE Gonmurnan for the year onan June 30, 1888... XXI Condimionotuhesundesinlyel. LesSie ee «seen aac eecte ances cere eee ee XXI RC COlpUSpOT UN OMY Cala tec seins Gace kos | onsite e crete 'etassis ial s Snel eice ainiee ween NEXT PROMI bUTES HOM LUO OAT. cia) jel acts ys sto eae Wea ese raacss cece eee DOU alOsHANGne-PAVMOEN LS 2. s.25. cases 5 coe cess cose ne cee cic eee cyoeree aethe XX Appropriation for mternabional/ exchanges... .-.- -. - 22 ceeeceecon sos cee XXII Details of expenditures of same .----- --- a heinetaiserciciejoe siejsatersicie aerate toes XXII Appropriation for North American Ethnology.-.-.-.-....-...----.-------- XXIII Details of expenditures of same ..--.---- Leone eee UES ancients OS Se OLY: Appropriation for Smithsonian Buiiding repairs ....-.......-..---..----- XXV WetallstomexpenaiUuUres OMBAMC ooo ac cet eee Sots sce cece cisccimscayeces =r XXV Appropriations tor the National Museum)... 5. -- 22222. sen-sse. so-e ce cece X XV Weal sO MexXpPeNdLWEES Ob SAMOL = = cscs cs < sisicie ssc ee Fe cece emese aeeveate XXVI GOnermlestnNM DLVies nee eri oe celsers oro win selsisen sate casetec cues aanoes Bie PEXOXOX Incomerayallable torn Gnsuine Weary 2 Sec. oc. hes Se ctce rlmcleceeeees ec ne, KOR ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS relative to the Smithsonian Institution, National Museum, etc., for 1886, 1887, and 1888.-........-.. Slates Seca eye aio OORT REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. (REM OMG SONTAN SING TEDW RLON, <2 2 <)ci.c sl ois mjc cise ismaielc mtn: ne sins: cicels c's nie «olin 1 OMNI TORY ROMA TIC weaves fare Seiciaier see) cieriS is s/c ied sais os. 2-2 seen a ee ee eee eee eee 21 Explorations in natural history of the islands of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 21 ‘Poblications = 225.2. ks yas mea sae nee oe ee ee eee eee eee 21 Classés:of: publicationys2%3 s2./sa5.cse ajc ne Seine eee eee eee eee 21 Hxpense of contributions tothe Annual Report =... .22--- .2---seeess. see. 22 The science record unsatistactory, from delaiy~22s.e- eee eee eee 23 Act of Congress restricting i uabralbivoemet ten ees een eae 23 Publications of the Museum and Bureau of Ethnology..-.--.-.-..---- 24 Distribution of publicabhionsssss-s 2 oeee See eee ee 24 Rules and conditions of distribution....- oe Soa oeeeeee Sere 25 Hconomy-of publicationidemanded s-s5 eee seen sees eee 25 Proposed restriction of the Miscellaneous Collections..........- 26 Exchange system of the Institution 22-4. 4----2 ass = eee 26 Needfor more expeditians transmission-e-= = s=ssee- eee eee eee eee 27 Iixtension of the service for the Government.......-....-.-.------- 27 Oxricin-of this'service inw867, sesseeeee ees oo eee eeeeee eee ae 27 Relative costof thisservices:_ = = ses see a 28 - Increased-appropriations desiredyes-- ess ss2se ee eee eeeeeeeee 29 Causes of delay in foreign recelptsi.2o.22-csese ooo ae ee eee 30 Tabular statement of exchanges for the fiscal year..-..---- an annie = 31 Hstimated cost of- fast freight. e225 -22-- ee eee: eee eee 32 Preparation of new exchange lists of scientific periodicals..---.---- 33 Hxperienced) biblioeraphers | consulitedmss-jese seeee eee eee 34 Additional titles of periodicals furnished’ 2-2....- 2.222 -sose oe eee ee 35 library of the Institutions s:-22..250 ose eee ee eee eee Sects 37 Extent of deposit in the Library of Congress...-.......-.--c------ 37 Resignation of former librarian and appointment of new one.....-.- 38 New regulations for the Library.-.-.-. Te et sO Cee Sue ac Rae oe 39 4 CONTENTS. VII Page. Publications—Continued. Library of the Institution—Continued. Annual accessions deposited mainly in the Library of Congress.... -- 40 Total additions of books during the fiscal year.......-..--..-.....-- 40 Some of the more important accessions ....-...- eases Phe AP Saree ae Al OOO ICale patkesse= ceca Aa. = Sebi psoessocejbe SEtiehae RBAOSE ESaen SHEE 42 Collechionstof living animals)..22.52-222:-------.5-- Ava steisee Sterate eaeeies 42 Bill introduced in Senate for zoologica] park..--.....--.-.----.-----.-- 43 Favorable reception of the project by the press of the country ..----.- 44 Art and miscellaneous subjects....- Si ASG ORS ISO aS eis are a cet 45 JATHE COMI GUIIOI Ss on epepacic SEES SBOE CS Onsale wet or ee eee are 45 AGH O MMe i On rOOMs LOL SClON bILlG WOU s.soocs + <5 sen cn -~ ances sic ce : 46 NOM ETA CC HUME RUN Meer tat te ta amen nee ey cao ape ciss onic cern oes ease ase 47 AUMETIGAN EU STOLI CAA SSOCI A MOMS jcceece aoe eecisicc conc ceccts ses one. = 47 Highth centenary of the University of Bolopna-..-.....-...:---..---- 47 Cranistangesulscripblonss. so --— sees seen ss taisecce Behe est maar Hectares a3 48 Privilege of the floor of the House of Representatives...-.-..---..--.- 48 IVECEPUIOM aera tes rea oe. ee ae Sinise nee Seer eo ee eee 46 HNP LOVES Oleh NOP UM SUIUUbLOM sm sen tacts woes scree on siesis ecle = eo aioe 48 NERDS Cisse NATIT ON AT OMIUSINIMS: Saije iis cte enc ieye recto piatnalcnisiacte ale cleieis se sie a> 49 General considerations: -.-.---.------.-- Neo nee ne Stain sais ieete ee emia se 48 InsuLUclencyrot present DUldING: 25. ces5cc2- =~ sce oo tas AMA Se 50 Extent of the collections .----.-.--.-.-- SEA SES IS SE eter aera Sere 51 Papilamstabement ofsammial imCreas@s. 22-2222 e222 see ee cisioe ele he ele 52 Accessions received from the Departments of Government .-...----..----- 53 Lectures, and meetings in the Museum lecture hall...--.--.------- Sess 54 Poaneanionale wOrmotthem Museums ccise os J2-0 oe ae cine isicisa is siers = eeice ie 55 Pubiications of the Museum-..--..... CEASERS Re eC OES po EE nee SeEnoe = 56 ANdduinousio ches Muscuml Wibrary case c=-2'scee es cece] eta =o amie se 56 Collections made by the Museum during the year --....--- eee ee earn oie 57 Participation in the Minneapolis Exhibition..-........-..---. ie Crea C 58 Acf authorizing participation in the Cincinnati Exhibition........------- 59 Objections to the dispersion of Museum collections at frequent exhibitions . 61 BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY ...-- et Nae Oe Sater Bee eae ee eae eee 62 piveldiswoubkse = - esos sce see 2 epson aoe cs ese eRe eee 62 Mound explorations .---- See Sete eb ante e sce cis See os senses 2 62 General tieldystudieseesmo-co- csc osc cce scene saaees Janes se peaee aialeicets 64 Office -work=.2222.-42 22 =< Smee IS Me oN f SIN. By Sa dre eel Peat ates ne Sra, n aloes 69 mIMeMIshC researches =. s 54 - ses. ons secoece Ee ae eece REE OO rS 69 3ibliographies of North American languages in preparation .....----- 71 orci aga ies OIG CIE | 3 CoG eneGe Seed BEE BeOraLo COD eebIsBoceane 72 Publications of the Bureau...-...---- A) 38 Shee ae ere ae are DOSER OI Oc 74 LEAGUE 2 SN ie HE Sooo Be cesTeae 75 Chief-Justice Morrison R. Waite; Chancellor.._....:---.---------..----<- 75 Prof.S. F. Baird, Secretary ........---- fae fe ell cag ee ee RE A ar Ci Prof. Asa Gray, Regent.-.---. Rie aS Gee Rie ae gee eter eee 89 mene LN Ren MENG MONG a) sacs oc sel ay- Se ee (sin ae ~ Seren Samels secs se 91 be Ohatles had, Curator 2-2-2522. ..2.-.--- epee oe ae en eters See eae 91 CDRS ety Ta cies 55 Sie CA oe ee ea 92 RPEENDI< 10 REFORT OX THH SECRETARY .....-222- .-s-06 wecees eensee ee = 95 I. Programme of organization of the Smithsonian Institution .-.-..------ 95 Il. Smithsonian publications of the year.-..-......----.----------------- 99 III. Report of Curator of international exchanges -.---..---------------- 103 IV. Circulars respecting periodicals .......-----.- Pe EO Rene ae le 117 V. Organization of the Smithsonian Library ..--------- Perce mele Vill CONTENTS, GENERAL APPENDIX. I. RECORD, OF SCIENCH KOR 1887 AND, 1888) ..2-.2 222. -5:.5. eccaasume seers ASTRONOMY, Oy Williaa Cy WaIMlOCks \omraa seers cine ieee eres eae teetel Geoloryby, Wi J McGee s2..05 ce se2 semen e ote ae ee eee ee North American Paleontology, by Henry S. Williams. ..--......-.....---- Hetropraphiy,.by, Georee Merrill 2. «ocmeeestee eee eae eaiae eae eee earn Meteorolooy, by, ClevelandvAb De) = sere a.ce cette eae anette fag eee Chemistry, by: bs Ws Clarke: cscs/<.0 sseaee seeaey este eee eee eee Mineralooy, by Edward's. Dana 252 -2-se---\s ees eee eee ieee eee Botany, by) Basin o wlton ys. csc slecse seo cerns aces aocins Se ie eee Anthropolosy, by Otis, T: Masons ....22- 5-252. sa ce eee eee et ee eee ie MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS 22) ..2 -5 o3-98- ee eee eee ya eee eee eee eee ree Chronology of the Human Period, by J. Woodbridge Davis .----.---.---- Were the Osages, Mound-builders? by J. F. Snyder ...-.. ...--...---..--. The progress of Science as exemplified in the art of Weighing and Meas- uring, by Williameaitiarkm ess 2se0.- 1 ses s)eel oe eis eee eee eee eee Determination of the mean Density of the Earth by means of a pendulum (OUI HOC ARUN AO eA NOS NVR emer beeeen cece sdoccs coosdcchescdbocensccspoac Amerriques, Amerigho Vespucci, and America, by Jules Marcou.......---- Progress of Oriental Science in America, during 182%, by Cyrus Adler... - 1 — BIOGRAPHICAL, MEMOIRS mctecnlcnccs = tect eee Reo eee ee eee Scere spencer, Bairdhibyahobertaiidowa\ ess o-eeeeeee see ee eee ee seen eee Memorial meeting of Washington Societies. .......-..-. by iGarricksMalleng, =... ec. secs eae eee er ee eee Ne AVA All iE cite Shred BE VIKA Ao rience aoe Seo CL bys WilliamvE Dall ccs eee Seeee no eee ieee nee eee ee by John: W. Powell 22222... 5- Sata. ae eee ee ee Asa Gray, by James i Danae. - acme cero aioe eel see eae ee by: William:G.-Farlow- 3. s2..ysnocteies snack ee eee Listiof his writings;5 = 262.) -..snss eee more eees ete eee LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. Article on Meteorology. He. 4. Curves showing wind currents... c=-- == Saeee er ee SnPAsacs Kiga2. Isotherms - ::..2= eee asses eee ee 3,113. 46 Portraits of the Jate Chancellor, and of the Secretary ...--....- 440.15 MotalkexpenditUNecsyes occ ssels vases Sean see e ac eae PO EEO Ae eS OL OA ibalancemmexpended unera0 1SSSt es eres eeeseeieeee aise eee 4, 809. 23 The cash received from sales of publications, repayments for freight, etc., is to be credited on the items of expenditure above as follows: IROStA REY een ceeeee ee eee ten co cece cone meee eee $3. 80 LINGO KR S Sane eee Se OSG oe See os aes ebb so ntes Loge 61.56 Smmithsoniane Contribublang = eee eee eee eee 124. 40 MiscellanecousiColllections 255552 -4esecs eee eee 337. 67 Reponisees=-ossae- SR Ae eee eae oe ako aLere- 19. 68 Exchantes ooce os scoot cee seeier Coe oe eee eee 205. 75 $752. 86 The net expenditure of the Institution for the year was therefore $38,793.91, or $752.86 less than the total expenditure, $39,546.77, above given. In addition to the aggregate of salaries, above stated at $18,430.08, the sum of $4,289.98 was paid as salaries for services rendered in con- nection with the subjects of building ($1,240), exchanges ($1,050), library ($1,200), and reports ($799.98), and makes a part of the charges reported under those heads. All the moneys received by the Smithsonian Institution from interest, Sales, refunding of moneys temporarily advanced, or otherwise, are deposited with the Treasurer of the United States to the credit of the Secretary of the Institution, and all payments are made by his checks on the Treasurer of the United States. INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES. Appropriated by Congress for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1888, “ for expenses of the system of international exchanges between the United States and foreign countries under the direction of the Smithsonian In- stitution, including salaries or compensation of all REDS) employés,” (sundry civil ‘act; approved! March 3. 1887)—o-2 sess 2s ee ee oe oe eee 2 OOON00 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE, XXIII Hapenditures during 1887-88. Salaries or compensation: 1 curator (part of year), at $175 per month....... $598. 39 1 clerk, twelve months, at $150 per month ....... 1,800.00 1 clerk, twelve months, at $100 per month ...-..- 1, 200. 00 1 clerk, eight months, at $75 per month.....-..-. 600. 00 1 clerk, six months, at $75 per month.-..-.-...... 450. 00 1 clerk, eight months, at $65 per month.......... 520.00 1 clerk, twelve months, at $60 per month...-.-.. 720. 00 1 clerk, six months, at $60 per month ............ 360. 00 i clerk, eight months, at $60 pez month... .---- 480. 00 1 clerk, four months, at $60 per month -......--.. 240. 00 1 clerk, four months, at $55 per month...-......- 220. 00 1 copyist, four moaths, at $40 per month....-...- 160, 00 ARGO Ppt PCOIA cates cone eeccieiec soir ss ielc esi e =e 40. 65 1 packer, nine months, at $75 per month.....-... 675. 00 1 packer, five months, at $50 per month ...--.-.-- 250. 00 1 messenger, nine months, at $20 per month...--- 180. 00 1 laborer, two months, at $40 per month-.--.....- 80. 00 acent (Germany) One yeat).s- 225-2 a.5 22256 - 1, 000. 00 1 agent (England), one year......-..--..--.'.-.-. 500. 00 Total salaries and compensation..........-.....-...:--- $10, 074. 04 BRN OMN Geren ae sia is Ce cictset = cis a sdictelsvasjsicials ceeiw'ale eee ee 924. 54 aCe DOES etnies ote eaisia ors aemeiere icicle eelsiehs amas eevee 527. 00 UNM Opiate ioe ee ate sis/a cereals ons cits mais Se ieee cece eae 230.50 HZOSUNO Cer eee eres cle) x's ercia's! cicys bwishe a cinic'e, Meee oeleee es Seen eee 100. 00 IBIMGIMOURS CONS hareeae fo saree se micas ano since SS'scie s eicjerese Sie are 88. 00 WD SHSINUA PSpeee sae case se aoe dss Sure we adie sree ele de Seis ees) =. Smee 5 ia: Mo halle eMC eye (e -.2/\ate stele wield eee eaicl eatats aot aay rasa na Ones Balanceunexpended July, 5 188825.) csn-cce seme os cece sce Obe 50. 17 NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. An appropriation of $40,000 was made by Congress for the fiseal year ending June 30, 1888, for the prosecution of ethnological researches under the direction of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. The actual conduct of these investigations has been placed by the See- retary in the hands of Maj. J. W. Powell, Director of the Geological Survey. Theabstracts of expenditures and balance sheets for this appro- priation have been exhibited to us; the vouchers for the expenditures, after approval by theSecretary, are paid by the disbursing clerk of the Bureau of Ethnology and transmitted to the accounting officers of the Treasury Devartment for settlement. The balance available to meet outstanding liabilities on the Ist of July, 1888, as reported by the official disbursing agent, is $7,847.08, XXIV REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. The following is a classified statement of all expenditures made dur- ing the last fiscal year from this appropriation : Classification of expenditures (A). Salaries and compensation per year, viz: dvethnologist ($3,000), : 2 2.-...--6¢--25 tes dae sce sone ooenose ee nan Veen yovol araichish (CPE (NO) ls Meme eee cmeaconeAcGnn oe coo aouy osascelsanaso 4, 800. 00 Dethnolocists (Pl800) 228. jeans ee eiee caste oa eleenie =e peter eee 3, 600. 00 S MRSS E tla oysntsast (Galle) sheene Goosocecic tdon beecds seaosocses 4, 500. 00 ATPASES ALM e UMM OLOSISbS) (Aly 00)) parse ariel nel eee er aero 4, 800. 00 Massistamiethamolomiste (pL, OOO) casera eater te eel a ele lear 1, 000. 00 ivassistant ethnuolocist ($720) 222-2. Sees seen ee eee aa ee 720, 00 MMOM ETERS WOON cast doe sas coe cee ecco sa) amcle se eee Sain eerste eee eects 720. 00 TCO) ON ATS) Hel COLO) ne eee eee ea ened ea A Se ee A eeaao soe 720. 00 Devhunolociciassistants, (600). = 20 222 - Saco scents ie ie eee re 1, 200. 00 BICOPVIStS! (HOON)! So ears hek aac Seats aac eee eo atseaale eee 1, 800. 00 ISmessenven (S600) saceecie= 22 = wsteleyecmis oe = Since oe ee eee ene a ae 600. 00 itranslator ($480)... > cot 252 a ceeo es seee ee eee eae eee eee eee 480. 00 HM COpMist (HBO) tas aacers cetaee Geses cae eser aatesast eels nenlen Serta 300. 00 28, 240. 00 Unelassified and paid by day..--- et eee piers eee eee Sree eee eee 598. 33 Total salaries and compensation.....---...---- 6S AS ee en ee $28, 838. 33 Hi ravic bn zOxp CNSES\ ac te sec oasis ayecs or Sen sels escent eee Eee 3, 637. 66 ALANS Portail ONlOLaprOpenyyesseee sass easels eel aoe eee eee 444,91 OTN GMSMUSICMCEY Ses5 ponb ence caanoo ossona soso Sabo oRde nd0055 Soco0eco 2805 242. 06 Hieldisuppliesandexpensesia-as-- cee aces. = oe = ae ee erie eee eee 2,431. 04 Rieldimaterial=s.2 2 .ce-cseres senses + css Sele ae Pe ce eee ee eee 391. 06 IMS HRUM OD US Saas 2 Ses, cle clap eteratelnisiess nierehass Siclotere a reieiais ett elem eon ereteres 32. 50 Haboratory material ..-..... Me ora a Giat hie Sine mosis Si ae eerste Ree eee eee 42. 67 Photoorap ii cama tenia ease steer selene are seal cee sete oie ener 116.17 BOOKS AD GMMADS feo. vaies Sects = seers See eee eee oe eee eee eee eee: 181. 00 Statonenywandedrawine tm apenials see selec areice kas eee a et tae et 9. 10 Ml Mstrations for -ré porte asecee . cs cct, ook see seus sem aacoisine tmeieeeheeeere ae 926. 30 Goods fonmistnilp iron bo mlundians asec see eee oe eons eee 511.30 Onicestirmiune ds scisses ante ce Acces cee con eee ote eens eee eee eee 85. 00 Olfieersuppliessandorepains ve 2. assem ece eee eee eee ee eee eee 18. 62 Correspondence. ese seisee re ais pee aise Ses eC roe oe Sete eae 6. 49 Speclmenstaa=e cane em as a et ae eee ee Me eR or ay B o5G5 Gace 844.95 38, 719. 16 Bonded railroad accounts settled by Treasury Department. .-.---.----- ss 74 Lotakexpenditure s2226...2s.coies soe see ce do eet eae eee Eee $38, 719. 90 Classification of expenditures (B). Sicn-lancuace and! pichure-wiribine) se sssecr se oasis ela ne alee eee ee 5, 053. 51 Exploration of mounds, eastern portion of United States.........-.----. 8, 208. 83 Researches in archeology, southwestern portion of United States ....---- 8, 901. 04 Researches—language of North Americans Indians ..-.-..----..--------- OxGsir 2 Explorations of ruins, New Mexico, and ethnological collections. ..---. -- 1, 417.56 OmMiGe Servis ss ook es be ee ae ee Dae Se ee eee 3, 436. 77 REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTER, XXV HUTS POU Mone Olle ecoeusc samen sclcicsslsciec slcncicise Salieeelesiees soars oe $926. 30 COTTE SOS Sa Gase echoes Bose s05 odu0 GoSsee GEE Bec e SUaSbO ead bIee 298. 99 Golleciions mint es pEGhMen See aretha cr yaa lo ve cicine sia feel.) sinc cisine cieees cies 844. 95 38,719. 16 Bonded railroad accounts settled by Treasury Department ..........---- .74 NO aE XSPEM UUM Omeey ae ere sey see ee oct ee oan Gacwale occloss Bote w ccm «i H38, 719. 90 SUMMARY, July 1, 18387: Balance on hand of appropriation for 1886—87..-..........--..----. 6, 553. 08 Amount credited to appropriation by disallowance by Comptroller... 13. 90 Appropriation by Congress ‘for the purpose of continuing ethnolog- ical researches among the American Indians, under the direction of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employés” (sundry civil act of March 3}, ley NSS Sace cud bOs RasoCe BIC CES Hee ee Ses tee ere eerie 40, 000. 00 Total available for the year ending June 30, 13888..........-...-- 46, 566. 98 Expended during the year ending June 30, 1828..-...........-.- 38, 719. 90 July 1, 1858: Balance to meet outstanding liabilities... .....- ..-.-..22.-2-c-----% $7, 847. 08 SMITHSONIAN BUILDING REPAIRS. Appropriation by Congress ‘‘for urgent and necessary repairs to central and western portions of the Smithsonian Institution Building” (sundry CIMle ACPO MVIEC HAS OOM) occa ces cicacte Since Soe ae csc ee a seel eanereoes 15, 000. 00 Expenditures : Cut-stone, brick, metal, carpenters’, and miscellaneous WOH Sese tS eg aut aS ae ae ae aie eae See $9, 800, 00 Tron-work ...... Belg OOS OPE CaCI ea eR 1, 848. 00 Steam-fitters’, laborers’, and day work.............--..--: 466. 30 PiCiM NW ALON TANGsC RS DI PCS +s -icc sea ems nceawi somo ctsaee 147. 58 eT i Re pet to oes = So iay -- eee eee eee eee 46, 556. 98 Smithsoniambuildine repairse. =. -s--se sees ea 14, 868. 20 Preservation of collections: cle Oe AEA SOS ESS a ROE Ie Per At rerisocmtsaci 1.96 NBR iioss See. dees cowie sca ase eke eonee ee coterie 5, 991.17 ISSR eos sR s See cece Os onli eticeite oc See eee 116, 000. 00 —— 121,993.13 Preservabion) ALMOLY-- <2): ss 0 ea ais 5 os See lne ee oe eee eee 46.14 Hurnmiture-san detexpunesies.ossee see oo ee ance eee ene eee 42, 854. 85 Heating, lighting; set's. 2 sta.-c- tes oe oe cee eee eee 12, 391.73 - 290, 711. 03 Motaliae sean sees see eee ace See eaten eee See ee eee eee $295, 067. 03 The committee has examined the vouchers for payments: made from the Smithsonian income during the year ending June 30, 1888, all of which bear the approval of the Secretary of the Institution, and a cer- tificate that the materials and services charged were applied to the pur- poses of the Institution. REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. XXXII The committee has also examined the accounts of the National Mu- seum, and find that the balances above given correspond with the cer- tificates of the disbursing officers of the Interior and Treasury Depart- ments. The quarterly accounts current, the vouchers, and journals have been examined and found correct. Statement of regular income from the Smithsonian fund, to be available for use in the year ending June 30, 1889. Bal aniCeOUshangeUN GOO wl ocotas nce selacic s ce cs stesc-csceasis Saecs scsi Sets $4, 809, 23 interest due and receivablewulycl, 188855. 2... ve cecccae cece s Soe sce 21, 090. 00 Interest due and receivable January 1, 1883. ........--.-.--.-.---------- 21,090, 00 Motal available for year endine Juneis0, 1889... 2.2. 5... oo ne $46, 989. 23 Respectfully submitted. JAMES CO. WELLING, M. C. MEIGs, of Executive Committee. WASHINGTON, December 6, 1888. “ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS RELATIVE TO THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, NATIONAL MUSEUM, ETC. (In continuation from previous reports. ) [Ferty-ninth Congress, first session, 1885-’36. } SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. JOINT RESOLUTION (No. 2) filling existing vacancies in the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution. Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the existing vacancies in the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution of the class ‘ other than Members of Congress,” shall be filled by the re-appointment of John Maclean, of New Jersey; Asa Gray, of Massachusetts ; Henry Coppée, of Pennsylvania, and the appointment of Montgomery C. Meigs, of the city of Washington, vice William T. Sherman, whose term has expired and who is no longer a citizen of Washington. (Approved, December 26, 1885. Forty-ninth Congress, first session. Statutes, 1885-86.) INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES. NAVAL OBSERVATORY: For payment to Smithsonian Institution for freight on observatory publications sent to foreign countries, one hun- dred and thirty-six dollars. (Legislative, executive, and judicial appropriation act. Approved July 31, 1886, chapter 827.) WAR DEPARTMENT.—For the transportation of reports and maps to foreign countries, through the Smithsonian Institution, one hundred dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved August 4, 1886, chapter 902.) INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION: For ex- penses of the system of international exchanges between the United States and foreign countries, under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary em- ployés, ten thousand dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved August 4, 1886, chapter 902.) NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. NoRTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION: For the purpose of continuing ethnological researches among the American H. Mis. 142——111 XXXII XXXIV ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS, Indians, under the direction of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institu- tion, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employés, forty thousand dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved August 4, 1886, chapter 902.) NATIONAL MUSEUM. HEATING AND LIGHTING THE NATIONAL MUSEUM.—For expense of heating, lighting, and electrical and telephonic service for the National Museum, eleven thousand dollars. PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM.— For the preservation, exhibition, and increase of the collections received from the surveying and exploring expeditions of the Government, and from other sources, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employés, one hundred and six thousand five hundred dollars. FURNITURE AND FIXTURES OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM.—For cases, furniture, and fixtures required for the exhibition and safe-keeping of the collections of the National Museum, including salaries or compen- sation of all necessary employés, forty thousand dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved August 4, 1886, chapter 902.) NATIUNAL Museum: For expense of heating, lighting, and electrical and telephonic service, six hundred and thirty-one dollars and sixty- seven cents. Preservation of collections, eighteen hundred and eighty-three and prior years, one hundred and forty-nine dollars and sixteen cents. (Act to supply deficiencies. Approved August 4, 1886, chapter 903.) JOINT RESOLUTION (No. 35), accepting from Julia Dent Grant and William H. Vanderbilt objects of value and art presented by various foreign Governments to the late General Ulysses 8. Grant. Whereas Julia Dent Grant and William H. Vanderbilt, by deed of trust executed on the tenth day of January, eighteen hundred and eighty-five, presented to the United States certain swords, medals, paintings, bronzes, portraits, commissions, and addresses, and objects of value and art presented by various Governments in the world to General Ulysses 8S. Grant as tokens of their high appreciation of his illustrious character as a soldier and a statesman: Therefore, Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the United States ac- cept, with grateful acknowledgments, the said property and articles, more fully described in the schedule attached to said deed of trust, to be held by the United States and preserved and protected in the. city of Washington for the use and inspection of the people of the United States. SEC. 2. That the said property and articles be placed under the cus- tody of the Director of the National Museum; and he is hereby di- rected to receive the same for safe-keeping therein. (Approved August 5, 1886. Forty-ninth Congress, first session. Statutes, 1885-36.) ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. XXXV [ Forty-ninth Congress, second session, 1886-1837. ] SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. JOINT RESOLUTION (No. 5) appointing James B. Angell a member of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution. Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the existing vacancy in the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution of the class ‘other than mem. bers of Congress,” shall be filled by the appointment of James B. Angell, of the State of Michigan, in place of John Maclean, deceased. (Approved January 19, 1887. Forty-ninth Congress, second session, Statutes, 1886—37.) SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION: For urgent and necessary repairs to cen- tral and western portions of the Smithsonian Institution building, fif- teen thousand dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved March 3, 1887, chapter INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES. INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION: For ex- penses of the system of international exchanges between the United States and foreign countries, under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary em- ployés, twelve thousand dollars. NAVAL OBSERVATORY : For payment to Smithsonian Institution for freight on Observatory publications sent to foreign countries, one hun- dred and thirty-six dollars. (Legislative, executive, and judicial appropriation act. Approved March 3, 1887, chapter 392.) NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION: For the purpose of continuing ethnological researches among the American Indians, under the direction of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Insti- tution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employés, forty thousand dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved March 3, 1887, chapter 362.) NATIONAL MUSEUM. HEATING AND LIGHTING THE NATIONAL MUSEUM: For expense of heating, lighting, and electrical and telephonic service tor the National Museum, twelve thousand dollars. PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM: For the preservation, exhibition, and increase of the collections from the surveying and exploring expeditions of the Government, and from other sources, including salaries or compensation of all necessary em- ployees, one hundred and sixteen thousand dollars. FURNITURE AND FIXTURES OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM: For cases, furniture, fixtures, and appliances required for the exhibition and safe- keeping of the collections of the National Museum, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employees, forty thousand dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act. ‘Approved March 3, 1887, chapter 362.) XXXVI ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. HISTORICAL MANUSCRIPTS. COMMISSION TO REPORT ON HISTORICAL VALUE OF MANUSCRIPTS, Erc.: That the Secretary of State, the Librarian of Congress, and the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, and their successors in office, are hereby constituted a commission whose duty it shall be to report to Congress the character and value of the historical and other mannu- scripts belonging to the Government of the United States, and what method and policy should be pursued in regard to editing and publish- ing the same, or any of them. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved March 3, 1887, chapter 362.) MINNEAPOLIS EXPOSITION. JOINT RESOLUTION (No.19.) authorizing the several Executive Departmenis of the poems to loan to the Minneapolis Industrial Exposition certain articles for e€xD1vit. Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That it is desirable, in any way consistent with existing laws and without risk to Government property or expense to the National Treasury, to encourage the effort being made for the open- ing and holding of a grand industrial and educational exposition of the Northwest, at the city of Minneapolis, in the State of Minnesota, and the interests of the whole northwestern section of our country demand it be made an unqualified success; and it be, and is hereby, approved that the heads of the several Executive Departments shall, in whatever respects they may in their judgment see convenient and proper, loan any articles or material suitable to such purpose: Provided, That such loan be made entirely on the responsibility of said Minneapolis Lndus- trial Exposition, and shall not be of material needed for use in either - Department, and shall not in any way interrupt the daily routine of duty or order in any branch of the Government, and shall be returned to the proper Department, in good order, within one month after the close of the exposition: And provided further, That before any such loan shall be made the proper head of the Department shall require and re- ceive a good and sufficient bond, by or in behalf of such exposition, for the safe return thereof as aforesaid,and to indemnify and save harmless the Government of the United States, or any Department thereof, from any liability or expense on account thereof, or on account of this reso- lution. Approved, March 3, 1887. [Fiftieth Congress, first session, 1887-88. ] SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. JOINT RESOLUTION (No. 4.) appointing Andrew D. White a member of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution. Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the existing vacancy in the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution of the class “ other than members of Congress,” shall be filled by the appointment of An- drew D. White, of the State of New York, in place of Asa Gray, de- ceased. (Approved, February 15, 1888.) — ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. XX XVII NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. For North American Ethnology, Smithsonian [nstitution, forty-nine dollars and nine cents. (Urgent deficiency act. Approved March 30, 1888, chapter 47.) NATIONAL MUSEUM. Cuap. 124,—AN ACT to purchase of the widow and children of the late Genera} James Shields certain swords. Whereas the State of [linois and the State of South Carolina, after the war with Mexico, each presented to the late General James Shields a sword, in consideration of gallant and meritorious services rendered by him in said war; and Whereas he has left surviving him a widow and three minor children, with but limited means of support, and said swords, though costly and valuable, can not be divided and apportioned between said children, and their value is needed for the education and support of said children ; Therefore, Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary of War be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed to purchase of said widow and children said swords, at their actual cost, not to exceed the sum of ten thousand dollars, to be paid for out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, and when so purchased the same to be depos- ited with the other military archives of the nation, in some public place at the National Museum. (Approved, April 19, 1888, chapter 124.) CINCINNATI EXPOSITION. AN ACT making an appropriation to enable the several Executive Departments of the Government and the Bureau of Agriculture and the Smithsonian Institution, jncluding the National Museum and Commission of Fish and Fisheries to partici- pate in the Centennial Exposition of the Ohio Valley and Central States, to be held at Cincinnati, Ohio, from July fourth to October twenty-seventh, eighteen hundred and eighty-eight. Whereas the States which comprise the Northwest Territory and the adjacent States will hold at Cincinnati, Ohio, from July fourth to Octo- ber twenty-seventh, eighteen hundred and eighty-eight, a centennial exposition commemorative of the organization of the Northwest Terri- tory, under the ordinance of seventeen hundred and eighty-seven, in which exposition all the States and Territories of the United States and the General Government lave been invited to participate, the object being in said exposition to present a panorama of the nation’s resources and present state of progressive development by an exhibition of the products of agriculture, of the various industries and fine arts; also the results of advancement made in the sciences; the whole illustrating the opportunities secured to and the possibilities which wait upon the citi- zens of this Republic; and Whereas the citizens of the Ohio Valley and the several States adja. cent thereto have made suitable and adequate preparation and arrange- ments for holding said exposition, and are desirous—and it being fit and proper—that the several Executive Departments of the Government, the Department of Agriculture, the Smithsonian Institution, including the National Museum and Commission of Fish and Fisheries, should participate in said exhibition: Therefore, XXXVIII ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. Be it enacted ,by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the head of each of the several Executive Departments of the Government, the Commissioner of Agriculture, and the Smithsonian Institution, including the National Museum and Commission of Fish and Fisheries, under the direction of the President of the United States, be. and they are hereby authorized and directed to prepare and make suitable exhibits at the said Centen- nial Exposition of the Ohio Valley and Central States, to be held at Cincinnati, beginning on the fourth of July and closing October twenty- seventh, eighteen hundred and eighty-eight. That there shall be appointed a committee of Congress composed of ten members, five to be appointed by the President of the Senate and five by the Speaker of the House of Representatives. Said committee is authorized and directed to visit said exposition and make such report to Congress in that behalfias they may deem needful and proper: Pro- vided, That the President may in the exercise of his discretion allow such documents, and exhibits as relate to early settlement at Marietta, Ohio, and the establishment of civil government in the territory north- west of the Ohio River, to be taken to Marietta, and exhibited during the time from July fifteenth to nineteenth, eighteen hundred and eighty- eight, inclusive, under such restrictions and custody as he may direct. That to enable the several Executive Departments of the Govern- ment, the Department of Agriculture and the Smithsonian Institution, including the National Museum and the Commission of Fish and Fish- eries, to participate in said exposition, to be held as aforesaid, there is hereby appropriated, out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, one hundred and forty-seven thousand seven hundred and fifty dollars, apportioned as follows: For the War Department, seven thousand one hundred and fifty del- lars. For the Navy Department, fifteen thousand dollars. For the State Department, two thousand five hundred dollars. For the Treasury Department, seven thousand five hundred dollars. For the Interior Department, thirty-six thousand one hundred dol- lars. For the Department of Agriculture, twenty thousand dollars. Tor the Post-Office Department, five thousand dollars. For the Department of Justice, two thousand dollars. For the Smithsonian Institution, including the Commission of Fish and Fisheries, fifty thousand dollars. For expenses of the committee of Congress, two thousand five hun- dred dollars. That the President may, if in his judgment it shall be deemed neces- sary and expedient in order to secure the best results with greatest economy, transfer a part of the fund hereby apportioned to one Depart- ment or Bureau to another Department or Bureau. The term Bureau wherever used herein shall be construed to include the Agricultural Department, the Smithsonian Institution, and Commission of Fish and Fisheries. That the President of the United States is hereby authorized to de- tail an officer of the pay department of the Army or Navy to disburse the fand appropriated by this act. . The payments on account of expenses incurred in carrying out and into effect the provisions hereof shall be made on itemized vouchers ap- proved by the representative of the Department incurrivg the liability, and a person to be designated by the President to make final audit of ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. XX XIX said accounts: Provided, That payment of the expenses incurred by the committee of Congress shall be made on vouchers approved by the chairman of said committee. That the head of each of said Executive Departments and of the De- partment of Agriculture, Smithsonian Institution, and Commission of Fish and Fisheries shall, from among the officers or employees thereof, appoint a suitable person to act as representative of such Department or Bureau, and said representative shall, under the direction and con- trol of the head of the Department or Bureau, supervise the preparation and conduct of the exhibits herein provid: d for. That no officer or employee appointed as aforesaid shall be paid extra or additional compensation by reason of services rendered in virtue of such employment; but nothing herein shall be so construed as to pre- vent the payment ‘of the just and reasonable expenses of any commit- tee, officer, or employee appointed or employed under and by virtue of the provisions of this act. That all articles imported from the Republic of Mexico or the Domin- ion of .Canada for the purpose of being exhibited at said exposition shall be admitted free of duty, subject, however, to such conditions and regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury may impose and prescribe. Approved, May, 28, 1888. JOINT RESOLUTION (No. 30) declaring the true intent anil meaning of the act approved May twenty-eighth, eighteen hundred and eighty-eight. Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That itis the true intentand meaning of the act of Congress approved May twenty eighth, eighteen hundred and eighty-eight, by the President of the United States, entitled ‘* An act making appropriation to enable the several Executive Departments of the Government, and the Bureau ot Agriculture, and the Smithsonian Institution, including the National Museum and the Commission of Fish and Fisheries, to participate in the Centennial Exposition of the Ohio Valley and Central States, to be held at Cincinnati, Ohio, from July fourth to October seventh, eighteen hundred and eighty-eight,” that the President of the United States may, in his discretion m: ike an order directing that any documents, papers, maps not original, books or other exhibits which properly and pertinently relate to the establishment of civil government in the territory northwest of the Ohio River, may be sent upon an executive order from any of the several Departinents in said act named, or from the exhibits now at Cincinnati, and that the appropriation of money in said act to defray the expenses of such ex- hibits, may be made applicable, in so far as the President of the United States may direct, to the payment of the expenses of the care, trans- portation to and return of suchexhibits from Marietta. And the same shall be paid from such fund heretofore set apart for each Department as the President may order. Nor shall anything in said act be so con- strued as to prevent the purchase of suitable materials, and the em- ployment of proper persons, to complete or modify series of objects, and classes of specimens, when in the judgment of the head of any Depart- ment such purchase or employment, or both is necessary in the proper preparation and conduct of an exhibit. Nor to authorize the removal from their places of deposit in Washington of any original paper or document or laws or ordinances whatever. Approved, July 16, 1888. XL ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS JOINT RESOLUTION (No. 57), authorizing the exhibits made by the Government at the Centennial Exposition of the Ohio Valley and Central States, at Cincinnati, Ohio, to remain at said exposition until and inciuding the fifteenth day of Novem- ber, eighteen hundred and eighty-eight. Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives uf the United States of America in Congress assembled, That authority is hereby granted to continue until and including November fifteenth, eighteen hundred and eighty-eight, the exhibits made by the Government at the Centennial Exposition of the Ohio Valley and Central States, at Cincinnati, Ohio, under authority of the act approved May twenty-eighth, eighteen hun- dred and eighty-eight. (Approved October 20, 1838 ) INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES. NAVAL OBSERVATORY.—For payment to Smithsonian Institution for freight on Observatory publications sent to foreign countries, one hundred and thirty-six dollars. ; (Legislative, executive, and judicial appropriation act. Approved July 11, 1885, chapter 615.) UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.—For the purchase of neces- sary books for the library, and the payment for the transmission of public documents through the Smithsonian exchange, five thousand dlollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved October 2, 1888, chapter 1069.) INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES, SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION: For ex- penses of the system of international exchanges between the United States and foreign countries, under the direction of the Smithsonian | Institution, including saiaries or compensation of all necessary em- ployees, fifteen thousand dollars. WAR DEPARTMENT.—Transportation of reports and maps to foreign countries: For the transportation of reports and maps to foreign coun- tries through the Smithsonian Institution, one hundred dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act, approved October 2, 1883, chapter 1069.) NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. NortH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY: For the purpose of continuing ethnological researches among the American Indians, under the diree- tion of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employees, forty thousand dollars. NATIONAL MUSEUM. Under the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution as Director of the National Museum. NATIONAL MUSEUM, HEATING AND LIGHTING: For expense of heat- ing, lighting, and electrical and telephonic service for the National Museum, twelve thousand dollars. PRESERVATION OF COLLECTIONS OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM: For the preservation, exhib.tion, and increase of the collections from the surveying and exploring expeditions of the Government, and from other sources, including salaries or compensation of all necessary em- ployees, one hundred and twenty-five thousand dollars. . ——— ACTS AND RESOLUTIONS OF CONGRESS. XLI FURNITURE AND FIXTURES OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM: For cases, furniture, fixtures, and applianees required for the exhibition and safe-keeping of the collections of the National Museum, ineluding salaries or compensation ef all necessary employees, forty thousand dollars. That the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution shall submit to Congress at its next session a detailed statement of the expenditures of the fiscal year eighteen hundred and eighty-eight under appropria- tions for “International Exchanges,” “ North American Ethnology,” and the *“‘ National Museum,” and annually thereafter a detailed state- ment of expenditures under said appropriations shall be submitted to Congress at the beginning of each regular session thereof. (Sundry civil appropriation act. Approved October 2, 1888, chapter 1069.) For the National Museum, ior printing labels and blanks and for the “ Bulletins” and annual volumes of the ‘ Proceedings” of the Museum, ten thousand dollars. (Sundry civil appropriation act, approved October 2, 1888, chapter 1069.) For preservation of collections, National Museum, eighteen hundred and eighty-five and prior years, to pay the claim numbered fifty-two thousand one hundred and eighty-two, in said Executive Document, number three hundred and seventy-seven, sixty dollars. (Deficiency appropriation act, approved, October 19, 18388, chapter 1210.) AN ACT for the relief of Semon Bache and Company. Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary of the Treas- ury be, and he is hereby, authorized to pay to Semon Bache and Com- pany, of New York, the sum of three thousand five hundred and sixty- two dollars and fifty-six cents, out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, for the purpose of refunding the duty paid by said firm upon glass from imported stock furnished to the National Museum and the New Orleans, Louisville, and Cincinnati Expositions or exhibition cases. (Approved September 26, 1888. Private laws, chapter 1043.) REPORT OF SAMUEL P. LANGLEY, SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, FOR 1887-83. To the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution: GENTLEMEN: I have the honor to present with this the customary report for the year ending June 30, 1888. This year is memorable for the loss to the Institution, not only of its Chancellor and of others to be mentioned later, but of its late Secretary, Spencer F, Baird. I have endeavored elsewhere to characterize his character and serv- ices, while yet feeling that one who has been so recently called to fill his place is hardly the fittest person to adequately describe them ; but that may surely be repeated here which is no secret to any one, that a most honored and useful life, which might have been prolonged for many years, came to an end which can not but be called premature, largely through a too self-sacrificing devotion to the public service. I shall also have to speak later of the loss to the Institution of its Chaneellor, the late Chief-Justice of the United States—a man whom those honored with his acquaintance grew, in proportion to their knowledge of him, to look up to and trust; and of one of its Regents, Prof. Asa Gray, pre-eminent in science, but in whom, as in the Chief- Justice, the qualities of the intellect were supplemented by others, such that both inspired even in their official relations, a feeling not only of respect, but of affection, which the formal intercourse of public life rarely brings. The past has, indeed, been a fatal year to the Institution; but these great losses have been spoken of at length in its necrology, and I will now ask to be allowed to preface this and the rest of my report by a few personal words. Although long acquainted with both Professor Henry and Professor Baird [ had no official relationship with either until two years ago, when the latter, in view of the end which he must have felt to be approaching, asked me if I was disposed to assume a connection with the Institution while continuing the scientific researches to which my life had been chiefly devoted. The position then tendered me, and later at your hands, that of See- retary, was accepted, from the knowledge that in your view such re- searches for the increase of knowledge, no less than administrative la- EieeMis;, JA 1 : 2 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. bors, formed the essential duties of the place to which I was honored by your invitation, though it has happened that this, the first year of these duties, has been passed all but exclusively in purely administra- tive work, of which there is alone occasion at present to speak. The year was begun with the feeling that it was best to closely follow the methods of my predecessors till a longer experience should have brought material for independent judgment; but at its close I desire to be allowed to say that every experience has enhanced my confidence in their policy as a permanent guide; and if it be true, as hassometimes been said, that men eminent in science are apt to be devoid of capacity in the management of daily affairs, we must conclude that Professor Henry was a Singular exception to such a rule: for the practical wisdom of the general lines of conduct laid down by him, and adopted by my honored predecessor, so commend themselves to me in the light of daily service that more trust in them is felt with every new trial.- From them there may, it seems to me, be deduced some general con- siderations with reference to the Smithsonian Institution and its asso- ciate interests, of which the following brief summary represents those general principles of official action by which I have sought to be guided. If the position of the Smithsonian is that of a ward of the Govern- ment, having property of its own, for which that Government acts the part of a trustee, while leaving its administration wholky with the Re- gents, it follows that the Institution enjoys a measure of independence, and in it a power of initiative for good which ought to be deemed its most privileged possession ; so that any action which is taken by one having its interests at heart, ought to be with this consideration of its independence always in mind. The Institution is for ‘the inerease and diffusion of knowledge among men.” It is not primarily for the promotion of utilitarian interests, which can be advanced through other channels, but for knowledge in the highest and widest sense, including not only all pure science, but even, in the words of Henry, “the true, the beautiful, as well as the immediately practical; ” and these interests it is to guard from all en- tangling alliances, In dealing with the circumstances of to-day, the Institution should still be guided by these principles; but in bringing them to the test of present needs, we are daily reminded that these same principles are now to be often applied to quite new conditions. The Smithsonian has under its charge besides the Museum, the Bureau of Ethnology, which will be referred to later, and some minor interests, which are, however, insignificant in comparison. It has from time.to time been proposed by friends outside of this Institution that it should: take on much wider cares than these, and that it should be the center around which all the scientific establish- ments of the Government might cluster. . In the writer’s opinion it ee r Ce ee a ee a a ————————— REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 3 would not be perhaps impossible, but it would certainly be difficult, to make such a permanent arrangement consistently with the independence of the Smithsonian, and its continued devetion to the original objects of its being; but since the project is from time to time renewed, it may not be superfluous to observe that in any case the Museum would stand on an entirely different footing from any other governmental bureau of applied science, if only because it has been created in a very consider- able degree out of the endowment income of the Institution; while other scientific bureaus have grown up wholly independent of the Smithso- nian, which has neither legal nor moral title to their property. It must be admitted, however, that the line of demarcation, even in the Museum, between the property to which the Smithsonian has an undoubted legal title; that to which this claim is only presumptive; and that to which it has no claim, is not in all cases at present clearly drawn, and we are endeavoring to remedy this uncertainty. As regards the care of this property, a great gain has been made in the past year by carrying out (with the concurrence of the Secretary of the Interior) the wishes which the Regents expressed in regard to the Museum at their last meeting; so that it is no longer uncertain how far this care falls upon the Institution, and how far upon the Interior Department. Reference has just been made to the question of the general policy to be followed by the Smithsonian with regard to its accepting the charge of other Government departments of science, and this question is so far from being an idle one that the Secretary has been called upon during the past year to consider whether it was his duty te advise that the Fish Commission, which until lately had such intimate though unofficial re- lations with the Institution, should be united with it by a legal bond, ornot. While feeling that it would be in many respects most desira- ble to connect with the Smithsonian the purely scientific portions of the Fish Commission and its apparatus of research, he could not but recog- nize that these were almost indissolubly mingled with certain great utilitarian interests, which were not equally proper subjects of the Smithsonian’s care; and after consultation with those Regents whose advice he could separately obtain, he felt unable to urge such a union with any confidence that it would meet the approbation of the Board. The President saw fit to appoint as Commissioner, Dr. G. Brown Goode, the Assistant Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, who, while still, with my full consent, retaining that place, accepted the office provisionally, from a sense of duty to the interests of the Fish Commission, concerning which he had obtained an intimate acquaint- ance under the late Professor Baird. Having placed these interests on a proper footing; after a brief period of laborious but wholly gratuitous service, he declined the higher salary and permanent appointment of Commissioner which was pressed upon him, and resumed the duties here to which his scientific life has been chiefly devoted. 4 REPORT OF THE SHCRETARY. On the 2d of December, 1887, the chancellor, Chief-Justice Waite, uuder the provision of the law, designated Dr. G. Brown Goode as Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution during the absence of the Secretary. If only from the ordinary need of a periodical revision, nearly every department of the Institution has been the subject of examination, and in some cases of considerable modification during the past year, and I now proceed to speak of these in some detail, prefacing each with a brief statement of such considerations as seem to me deserving of the particular attention of the Regents. BOARD OF REGENTS. Meetings of the Board.—A special meeting of the Board was held No- vember 18, 1887, to take action in regard to the death of the Seeretary, Spencer Fullerton Baird, and at this meeting Samuel Pierpont Langley was elected his successor. The stated annual meeting of the Board was held on the 11th Jan- uary, 1888. . A special meeting of the Board was also held on the 27th March, 1888, to take action in regard to the death of the chancellor of the Tuistitution. Chief-Justice Waite. The journal of proceedings of the Board is given in full, as usual, in the introduction of the Regents’ report. Changes in the Board of Regents.—Other vacancies than those already mentioned have occurred in the membership of the Board during the year by the expiration of the legal terms of service. Senator Maxey’s term ended March 3, 1887, and with the close of the Forty-ninth Congress the terms of the Hon. O. Rh. Singleton, of the Hon. W. L. Wilson, and of the Hon. W. W. Phelps, members of the House of Representatives, also expired; and on the 19th of December, 1887, the President of the Senate appointed the Hon. Randall Lee Gib- son, Senator from Louisiana, a Regent for the term of six years, to fill the vacancy occasioned by Senator Maxey’s retirement. On the 5th of January, 1888, the Speaker of the House of Representatives appointed the Hon. Samuel 8. Cox, of New York, a Regent in the place of the Hon. Otho R. Singleton; and on the 10th of January, 1888, he appointed the Hon. Joseph Wheeler, of Alabama, a Regent in the place of the Hon. William L. Wilson, and re-appointed the Hon. William Walter Phelps, of New Jersey, to continue his service as Regent. Lastly, by joint reso. lution of Congress, approved by President Cleveland, February 15, 1888, Dr. Andrew D. White, of New York, was elected a Regent for the term of six years, to fill the place of Dr. Asa Gray, deceased. At the special meeting of the Board of Regents, held March 27, 1888, Mr. Justice Samuel F. Miller, senior Associate and acting Chief Justice of the United States Supreme Court, was elected to act as chancellor of the Institution pro tempore. - (ey | REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. FINANCES. While with this is presented the report of the Executive Committee and other statements, showing that the funds are in the usual sense in a satisfactory condition, this seems to be a proper occasion to say some- thing about the larger questions of finance, for, as time passes, the purchasing power of money imperceptibly but surely alters, until finally the consideration is forced upon us that these slow changes, though almost inappreciable from year to year, have, in the half century already elapsed since Congress accepted Smithson’s bequest, essentially dimin- ished the actual value of the fund, while its nominal value remains unchanged. I do not now refer merely to the fact that we measure all things by another scale in 1888 from what we did in 1836; or that, owing to the immense increase of public wealth, the capital of the original bequest, which then was greater than any but a few private fortunes, has be- come relatively so inconsiderable to-day. More than this is meant. It is meant that the actual purchasing power of each dollar is, for our purposes, notably less; that it is being forced upon us that we can not print as many books, or pay as many employés, or make as many re- searches as when the scheme of expenditure was first fixed, and that, consequently, a scheme which was wise then, because not only desirable but feasible, is not necessarily so now. i know that this consideration is not presented to the Regents for the first time, and that aacommittee of their number, as long ago as 1877, observed— “That the income of the Smithsonian fand, while nominally fixed, is growing actually less year by year, with the rapidly-changing value of money, and of less and less importance in,the work that it accomplishes with reference to the immense extension of the country since the Gov- ernment accepted the trust.” In a time, short with reference to the probable life of the Institution, the income of the Smithsonian fund proper will necessarily become en- tirely inadequate to carry on the object of Henry’s care on the scale which he inaugurated. Even when this is the case, it seems to me ‘that this income of the Smithsonian bequest will stiil have a value wholly beyond its nominal one, for it will at least maintain the Institution in that position of independence and disinterestedness which are its most potent means of influencing others to aid in carrying out the intention of its founder. It is, nevertheless, most evidently desirable that the fand should be enlarged both by Governmental recontribution and by private bequest, so as to constantly represent at least the original position of its finances relatively to those of the country and contemporary institutions of learn- ing; a position which we can estimate from the observation that there are several such institutions, which were at first scarcely on a par with it financially, but whose funds, having been invested so as to share in the 6 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. growth of the country, and aided by private benefaction, now surpass ours from ten to twenty fold. We can never regret the generous spirit which has dictated the direc- tion of the expenditure of the Smithsonian income in the past, but it is true that if a less absolutely unselfish policy had been followed—if, for instance, though keeping up all proper expenditures for the increase and diffusion of knowledge, those funds whose expenditure has practi- eally inured chiefly to the benefit of the General Government had been allowed to accumulate—the Institution would have been comparatively wealthy to-day. I will instance, in explanation of my meaning, the remark of Profes- sor Henry in 1872, to the effect that the Government, in equity, should then have paid the Institution $300,000 for the use of the present build- ing. This building, erected wholly out of Smithsonian funds at the cost of over half a million dollars, has, with the exception of a small por- tion, been ever since that time used rent-free by the Government; and if the observation had force then, it has double force to-day. Again, the Institution has left in perpetual charge of the nation, in the Museum alone, property acquired out of its private fund (and to which it has apparently the same title), whichis probably now more than equal in value to the whole amount of the Smithsonian bequest. While it is gratefully recognized that Congress has never dealt in any ungenerous spirit with the Institution, I ean not think it superfluous to keep such facts as those just cited in mind at a time when it becomes necessary to review the whole scheme of expenditure, in view of an income practically diminishing, and which would, .if not for these facts, be more than double its actual amount. The will of James Smithson, of England, “to found at Washington, under the naine of the Smithsonian Institution, an establishment for the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men,” was made Octo- ber 23, 1826. ‘The existence of the bequest was communicated to Congress by a message from the President of the United States December 17, 1835, and by an act of Congress approved July 1, 1836, the bequest was ac- cepted, and the President was authorized and enabled to assert and prosecute with effect the claim of the United States to the property thereby bequeathed and then held in trust by the English court of chancery. Under this authority the sum of $508,318.46 was received in gold by the United States and placed in the Treasury. The “Smithsonian Institution” provided for in the will of Smithson was not established, however, by Congress until August 10, 1846, when a definite plan of organization was adopted and operations commenced. By act of Congress February 8, 1867, the Secretary of the Treasury was authorized to receive a residuary legacy of Smithson, which had been received by the Institution in 1863, amounting to $26,210.63, on ’ - + ee — REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. f the same terms as the original bequest. By the same act the Regents were authorized to add to the Smithsonian fund such other sum as they might see fit to deposit, not exceeding, with the original bequest, the sum of $1,000,000. The original bequest and the sums since added are therefore as follows: (NOM OSh Wit Siam on)s Ilo ese 286 =p oksoeaeen> pooone Se Sae re rOod SoU poaese $515, 169. 00 Resilaayne Sac ylOtnsinl UNSOUsLSOd.msiend = se. awe <2 sm croeaie= sonia - = 26, 210. 63 Wepositsaromrsavines Ob meome, etc:, 186722... sccc ec ccs e+ omnes 25 108, 620. 37 Bed monvoredomes iano, 1SVA-. 25. 622 on. 2 cee ace Seceicecs coe cee 1, 000. 00 Beqiesttoie Sine On@l Del mlOCU tee 0% A. ccs) oa oniwle loon are cceccle sensa 500. 00 Deposit trom proceeds of sale of bonds, 1881 .........--...--.-.....----- 51, 500. 00 Total permanent Smithsonian fund in the Treasury of the United States, bearing interest at 6 per cent. per annum..--....--..--- 703, 000. 00 At the beginning of the fiscal year the balance on hand of the income from the fund was $1,423.14. The interest paid semi-annually July 1, 1887, and January 1, 1888, was $42,180. To this was added from sales of publications and miscellaneous sources $752.86, making a total available amount for carrying on the operations of the Institution of $44,356; totalexpenditures for the year, $39,546.77; leaving a balance July 1, 1888, of $4,809.23. It is proper in this connection to state that the Institution is charged by Congress with the care and disbursement of, sundry appropriations, those for the past year being as follows: MOMMMLeLT Aion alee XCHANGE ss 2 ce cisccinee cesses so eeeccesceened eset estes $12, 000 emeeninOlosie meTOSCArC MOG): 2 52 S5\s0 gan Joceid a kee se eiso es ee deco Jee eet 40, 000 For preservation of Government and other collections in natural history, eubnology.cuc...1m the National Museum -... 2.5.2... .5--.2s2 sc ¢--2 coe" 116, 000 For furniture and fixtures for the National Museum .---...------.--------- 40, 000 For heating, lighting, and electrical service for the Museum........------- 12. 000 The vouchers for all the expenditures from these appropriations as well as those from the Smithsonian income are carefully examined and passed upon by the Executive Committee of the Board of Regents, with one exception—those for ethnological researches. The disbursement of this appropriation from its commencement has been made under the direction of Maj. J. W. Powell, who has been in charge.of the Bureau of Ethnology. The necessity of greatly increased appropriations for the proper con- duct of the interests committed by Congress to the care of the Insti- tution is daily more manifest, and has been made known in the strongest terms to the National Legislature. The estimates prepared to be submitted for the fiscal year ending June 30, 18389, are as follows: MUGS MOM ANOS 68 65 cn aaa cue nae tin nnn otanecaesccos sous cece sane $27, 500 See tTMNSECRC AT MON Ga eas eee tts oe ema eca ands Jadenswe'ess-es same 50, 000 MEU mGIOE CL COMCCHIONS 65-2 52cdn cane coed So acca woe Sens ees sewe ens ae) 160,000 Vo ues: STG Ue nN 2 ee oe ec a ae 40, 000 MILA AGG MER er ches SOS a Scie wo wea vine vine) acini sjmnnne 12, 000 279, 500 8 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. In accordance with the instructions of the Board of Regents at its last annual meeting, I requested the Committee on Appropriations of the House of Representatives to make certain changes in the assign- ment of appropriations and the method of their disbursement. The following is the correspondence on the subject with the Secretary of the Interior and with the chairman of the Committee on Appropria- tions. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, February 29, 1888. Str: I have the honor to make the following requests in regard to the assignment of the appropriations for the maintenance of the U. S. National Museum for the coming fiscal year: (1) That the items for “ preservation of collections,” “heating and lighting,” “ furniture and fixtures” be transferred from their present position in the schedule of ‘ Estimates of Appropriations, 188889” (p. 237), under the Department of the Interior, to a place under the gen- eral head of “under the Smithsonian Institution,” and along with and in proximity to the other items to be expended under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution or its Secretary. (2) That each of these items be placed directly under the subhead ‘“‘ Under the direction of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution as director of the National Museum.” (3) That a special item be inserted under the caption “ Public print- ing and binding,” providing the sum of $10,000 for printing labels and blanks for the use of the National Museum and for the *“ Bulletins” and annual volumes of the ‘“‘ Preceedings” of the Museum. In explanation of these requests, [ submit the following statements: Theactof Congress establishing the Smithsonian Institution, approved August 10, 1846 (Revised Statutes, Title LX XII, sections 5579, 5594), provided that all objects of art and of foreign and curious research, and all objects of natural history, plants, and geological and mineralogical specimens belonging or hereafter to belong to the United States, which may be in the city of Washington, shall be delivered to the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, and, together with new specimens obtained by exchange, donation, or otherwise, shall be so arranged and classified as best to facilitate their examination and study. The National Museum, as it is now called, was thus placed under the sole control and direction of the Smithsonian Institution, and has ever since remained under its control; Congress having, since 1858, made annual appropriations for its maintenance. Until 1880, however, the sums thus appropriated were inadequate, and the yearly deficiences were paid from the income of the Institution. In accordance with a practice of nearly thirty years the estimates for the annual appropriations have been each year, at the request of the Secretary of this Institution, forwarded by the Secretary of the Interior to the Secretary of the Treasury for transmission to Congress, and the disbursement of the appropriation has been made by the disbursing agent of the Interior Department. This arrangement is somewhat inconvenient aud cumbersome, and at the last meeting of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution the following resolution was adopted: “Resolved, That the Regents recommend to Congress that the form of the sundry civil appropriation bill be so chan ged in the terms relating to the Museum and the Bureau of Ethnologyeas to provide— = ‘ REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 9 “6(1) That these moneys shall be disbursed under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution. (2) That the estimates for the appropriations of the Museum in the future shall be sent direct to the Secretary of the Treasury by the Smithsonian Institution through its Secretary.” In obedience to the wishes of the Board of Regents thus expressed, the matter was brought to the attention of the Secretary of the Inte- rior, in arecent interview, by Chief-Justice Waite (the Chancellor of the Smithsonian Institution) and myself. Asa result of this meeting a letter has been received from the Secretary of the Interior, in which he expresses the opinion that changes may be made with great propriety both in the manner of voting the appropriation and in the method of its disbursement. A copy of this letter is herewith inclosed, together with a copy of a second letter received in response to an inquiry as to the manner in which this change may best be effected. In further explanation of the third request, I wish to say that this does not involve anew appropriation, since the estimate for this amount is included, as I understand it, in the sum of $375,525 estimated by the Secretary of the Treasury for the printing of the Interior Department and its Bureaus (see page 129 of the “‘ Estimates of Appropriations, 1888-’89”). I may say in further explanation of this item that an ap- propriation has thus been made for the printing of the National Museum for at least twelve years past, and I am informed that the amount al- lotted during recent years has usually been $10,000. I believe these changes will be in the interest of the public service, and respectfully ask that they be made. I am, sir, your obedient servant, S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary. Hon. SAMUEL J. RANDALL, Chairman of Committee on Appropriations, House of Representatives. DEPARTMENT OF THK INTERIOR, Washington, February 14, 1888. Str: I have considered the topic of the conference which I had the honor to have yesterday with the Chancellor of the Smithsonian Insti- tution and yourself, being the relation of the Interior Department to the expenditure of the appropriation for the increase and care of the National Museum, which is a part of the Smithsonian Institution, and whetber there be objection to the recommendation of an independency in the disbursement of the funds provided for its support as well as in its management. The first collection of seientifie curiosities which appears to have been a special object of care on the part of Congress was that made by the Wilkes Exploring Expedition, provided for by the act of May 14, 1836 (5 Stats., 29). This collection was first placed in the care of the Na- tional Institution for the Promotion of Science, and afterwards was transferred to the hall in the second story of the Patent Office. In 1846, when the act for the establishment of the Smithsonian Institution was passed, it was provided that, ‘‘as suitable arrangements could be made for their reception, all objec ts of art, and of foreign and curious research, and all objects of natural history, plants, eeological and min- eralogical specimens, belonging or hereafter to belong to the United 10 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. States, which may be in the city of Washington, in whosesover custody the same may be, shall be*delivered to such persons as may be author- ized by the Board of Regents to receive them, and shall be arranged in such order and so classed as best to facilitate the examination and study of them in the building so as aforesaid to be erected for the Institu- tion;” provision having been made in the act for a suitable building, etc. It was provided by Congress that the Smithsonian Institution might be constructed adjacent to the Patent Office Building, but the project was not accepted, and an independent building, where now located, was arranged, this being completed in the year 1853. It is said that the Secretary of the Interior and the Commissioner of Patents were desirous of removing the collections of the exploring ex- pedition and of the National Institution out of the Patent Office Build- ing, and requested the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution to receive them. This appears to have been acceded to by the Regents on the condition imposed that the Secretary of the Interior should provide for the payment of the expenses of the keeping and care of the collections. An appropriation of $15,000 was made by Congress in the aet of March 3, 1857, for the construction of cases, and of $2,000 for the re- moval of the articles. It was then held by the Attorney-General, in response to a request of the Secretary of the Interior for his opinion, that the provision in the eighth section of the act of the 4th of August, 1854 (10 Stats., 572), placing the collections under the control of the Commissioner of Patents, and authorizing the employment by him of keepers therefor, was designed to be temporary only, and that the act establishing the Smithsonian Institution, as well as that making the appropriation in 1857, were to be regarded as indicating the purpose of Congress respecting permanent provision for these collections. In 1858, by the act of the 2d of June (11 Stats., 301), an appropria- tion of $4,000 “ for the preservation of the collection of the exploring and surveying expeditions of the Government” was made as a contin- gent expense in the office of the Secretary of the Interior, This ap- pears to have been the product of the condition acceded to by the Sec- retary of the Interior upon the occasion of the removal of the collections from the Patent Office to the Smithsonian; and, pursuing the same practice in October, 1858, Professor Henry, your illustrious predecessor, requested of the Seeretary of the Interior the renewal of the same ap- propriation. Since that time this course appears to have been pursued without any other reason for its support than this summary narration indicates. By the seventh section of the act for the establishment of the Smith- sonian Institution (9 Stats., 105) the Secretary is directed to discuarge the duties of “ keeper of the Museum,” and authorized, with the con- sent of the board, to employ assistants. No power of appointment of any of the officers who expend the money provided by these annual ap- propriations is supposed to exist, or, since the transfer to the Smith- sonian, has ever been exercised by any officer of this Department. The manner of the appropriation has operated to impose upon the disbursing officer of this Department the duties of an auditor and a treasurer for this fund, as an officer for whom the Secretary is respon- sible. But no authority over the expenditures appears to rest with the Secretary of the Interior or at least ever to have been exercised, so that any scrutiny supposable has been thatonly of an auditor. Practically the disbursement of this appropriation has been made by the officers of the Smithsonian Institution, subject to two audits, one by this Department and the other by tine Treasury, while the disbursing oflicer of the In- - - ¥ : : REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 11 terior Department acts as the disbursing officer for the Smithsonian, and a clerk has been assigned, as I am informed, by the Smithsonian to duty in the Interior Department to assist the disbursing officer Obviously there is nothing in the relations between the Smithsonian and the Interior Department to require the continuance of this state of things. The National Museum enjoys now an annual appropriation of a large amount in the various items, not usually less than $150,000. In the last act the appropriation was of $12,000 for heating, sheng, elec- trical, and telephonic service; of $116, 000 for the preservation, exhibi- tion, and increase of the collections; and of $40,000 for cases, furniture, fixtures, and appliances; both of the latter items embracing salaries. These items indicate not only the considerable proportions which the Museum has attained, but that their disbursement should be in the hands of those who have the government ot the Museum and a direct responsibility exacted. So far, then, from there appearing to be objection, the facts suggest to my mind the wisdom and desirability of providing for the National Museum directly, and imposing responsibility for the disbursement of the appropriation immediately upon the officers of that Institution, and with accountability to the Treasury, as in other cases. The act of July 7, 1884 (23 Stats., 214), was a step in the direction of this independency of requiring the director of the National Museum to report annually to Congress the progress of the Museum during the year and its present condition. The papers you kindly loaned me are herewith returned. I have the honor to be, very respectfully, Wu. F. VILAS, Secretary. Profs: Py LANGLEY, Seerctaru of the Smithsonian Institution. =. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR, Washington, February 20, 1888. Sir: Replying to your favor of the 16th instant, I beg to say that it seems to me that so long as Congress has made the appropriation for the current year ‘‘ under the Interior Department” in terms, it is neces- sary that it should be expended according to the practice hitherto prevailing; and that, if the same terms of appropriation should be continued, it would be with the expectation that the fixed practice of disbursement would continue also. It is therefore probably necessary that the language of the appropriation should be changed in order to effect the object. desired. It may be presumed the accounting officers of the Treasury would require it. The same observations may be applied to the appropriation for print- ing. I think it desirable that that should be separately made, so that the Smithsonian Institution should be independent, in its use of the provisions made by Congress, of this Department, and this Department freed of care in respect to it.. Yours, respectfully, Wm. F. VILAS, Secretary. Prof. S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. 12 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. It was anticipated that when the wishes of the Regents were communi- cated to the Appropriations Committee of the House, the objection might be raised that the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, as such, was not an officer of the Government in the sense that the head of an executive department is, and that this might be an obstacle to the proposed transfer. Such objection was, in fact, made in the committee, and for this rea- son the bill as reported from the House committee places the Museum appropriation ‘under the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution as director of the National Museum; ” while at the same time this, with the other appropriations, is subordinated to the general title ‘under the Smithsonian Institution.” In regard to the Bureau of Ethnology, the Secretary had already represented to the Regents his desire to see such a modification of the wording as might relieve him from the personal responsibility imposed by the language of former bills. The change actually introduced by the committee consists in making the former words ‘under the di- rection of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution” subordinate to the same general title “ under the Smithsonian Institution.” Should the bill as reported pass both houses the disbursements for the National Museum will hereafter be made by an officer designated by the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, duly qualified and bonded to the acceptance of the Secretary of the Treasury, whose of- fice will be in the Smithsonian building, instead of by the disbursing officer of the Department of the Interior, as heretofore. The appropriations for “ international exchanges” will also be dis- bursed by the same clerk at the Institution, instead of the disbursing clerk of the Treasury Department. This new arrangement, while adding greatly to the responsibilities and cares of the officers of the Institution, will, it is believed, secure good results. International exchanges.—The regular estimate submitted to Congress was as follows: For expenses of the system of international exchanges between the United States and foreign countries, under the direction of the Smith- sonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employés, $15,000. A revised estimate was submitted to Congress through the Seere- tary of the Treasury, on May 31, 1888, asking for $27,050 for the ex- changes. The House committee declined to recommend the proposed increase. It was then laid before the Senate Committee on Appropriations and an arguinent presented in favor of the increase, which induced the com- mittee to report an amendment to the sundry civil bill increasing the appropriation from $15,000 to $20,000.* * See Congressional Record, July 29, 1888, page 7666. _ REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 1) This amendment was adopted by the Senate, rejected by the House, and finally lost in conference committee of the two houses, so that the increase of appropriation for exchanges is only $3,000 for the next fis- eal year. Preservation of collections—The appropriation asked for this service was $150,000. The House committee reported $120,000; the Senate committee, $125,000, and this latter amount was finally agreed to. Furniture and fictures.—An estimate of $40,000 was submitted, ac- cepted by both committees, and passed by Congress. Heating and lighting.—The original estimate “ for expense of heating, lighting, and electrical and telephonic service for the National Museum,” was $12,000. ‘This sum was reported by the House Committee on Ap- propriations and adopted by Congress without change. Armory building.—For several years this building has been occupied jointly by the National Museum and the U. 8. Fish Commission, the lat- ter paying the expenses of its care and repairs since July 1, 1885. The House Committee on Appropriations in reporting the item of $120,000, for “preservation of the collection of the National Museum” inserted the following clause: *‘ And for the care and custody of the so- called Armory building,” thus transferring the whole of the building and its maintenance to the Museum. The Senate Committee on Appropriations, after hearing a statement from the U.S. Fish Commissioner,* struck out this clause, and inserted the following under the items for the Fish Commission :t Provided, That the building known as the Armory building, Wash- ington, District of Columbia, is hereby transferred to the charge of the United States Commission of Fish and Fisheries for use as a hatching and distributing station and for offices. These diverse views were finally reconciled by the conference com- mittees, who reported the following, which became a law: “ Under the U. S. Commission of Fish and Fitheries.” Provided, That the building known as the Armory building, Wash- ington, District of Columbia, shall be occupied as at present, jointly by the United States Commission of Fish and Fisheries and the National Museum. North American Ethnology.—The regular estimate for ‘continuing ethnological researches among the American Indians, under the direc- tion of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, including salaries or compensation of all necessary employés,” was $50,000. The House Committee on Appropriations, however, only reported $40,000, the sum which has been appropriated annually since 1884. This sum was accepted by both the House and the Senate, and is the amount appropriated. The appropriation is placed in the language of former years “ under the direction of the Secretary,” but at his request this with other departments is placed under the general caption under the Smithsonian Institution.” *Senate Report No. 1814, p. 26. + Act No. 1877, p. 47. 14 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Report of the expenditures to be made to Congress —The House Com- mittee on Appropriations proposed a clause in the sundry eivil bill for the next fiscal year which was agreed to by Congress and forms part of the act (No. 307), which is as follows: That the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution shall submit to Congress at its next session a detailed statement of the expenditures of the fiscal vear 1883, underappropriations for “ International Exchanges,” “North American Ethnology,” and the “National Museum,” and annu- ally thereafter a detailed statement of expenditures under said appro- priations shall be submitted to Congress at the beginning of each reg- ular session thereof. BUILDINGS. Among other matters discussed at the last meeting of the Regents was the erection of a new Museum building.. On this occasion the Re- gents tacitly re-affirmed their resolution of 1882, recommending to Con- gress the enlargement of the National Museum by the erection of a fire- proof building on the southwest corner of the Smithsonian reservation, similar in style to the present National Museum; but on viewing the sketch plans, which had been prepared subsequently to the resolution, so as to include offices for the Geological Survey, they added an ex- pression of their opinion that the new building should be planned ex- clusively for Museum purposes. It was not at first intended to take action in this matter during the present year, but the overcrowded condition of the building, on account of which not only the current work but the proper development of the collections is greatly impeded, seemed to render immediate action nec- essary. A still more urgent need appeared to be the unsatisfactory sanitary condition of the new Museum building. A committee, consist- ing of Dr. J. H. Kidder, chairman, Dr. James M. Flint, U.S. Navy, and Mr. J. E. Watkins, was appointed on April 14 to make a careful study of the water supply, ventilation, and drainage, and in May submitted a preliminary report, from which it appeared that an alarming amount of sickness and mortality has been manifest among the employés since 1881—a mortality which can not be attributed to the location of the building, which has sometimes been pronounced unsanitary, since there has been no corresponding percentage of ill health in the old Smithson- ian building adjoining. The number of days lost by employés on ac- count of sickness in 1836 was 796; in 1887, 875; and in 1888, up to May 10, 213, by far the largest part of this loss of time being attributed on the books of the Museum to miasmatic diseases. The committee states that there is no reasonable doubt that some, if not all, of the ten deaths since 1881 were hastened or induced by the unwholesome condition of this building. The committee suggested repairs and modifications of considerable extent, including the construction of continuous cellars under each of the four sides of the building, which, in addition to the other necessary expenses, would cost in the neighborhood of $40,000. > REPOR! OF THE SECRETARY. 15 This state of affairs seemed to demand decided action, and it being absolutely impossible to make any changes in the present building with- out entirely vacating a portion of it for a considerable period of time, the exigency for more accommodation seemed a great deal more urgent than had been at first supposed. While it became evident, on study ot the question, that for the ulti- mate needs of the Museum, a building of but one story occupying the same area as the present Museum would be insufficient, the question of immediate action was unexpectedly brought up in May by one of the senior Regents, a member of the Senate, who, when visiting the Museum with some friends, noticed its crowded and unsatisfactory condition. Having learned from me of the mortality and sickness of the employés, he inquired as to the feasibility of erecting a new building, and offered to use his influence to procure an appropriation, if 1 could obtain for him a set of sketch plans within a week, time being, as he stated, a very essential condition. After consulting with the chairman of your Exec- utive Committee, I had no hesitation in accepting such an offer, but a difficulty arose from the fact that the sketch plans which had been laid before the Regents in 1882 were in part for purposes which the Regents had at their last meeting disapproved, and that hence they could not be used. By great diligence, however, plans for a building to be de- voted exclusively to Museum purposes were prepared within the time mentioned. ‘These were based upon an extensive accumulation of notes and drawings, embodying the record of the best recent work of museum construction in this country and in Hurope, and they were for a building, as far as was consistent with these improvements, like the existing Museum. The report submitted by Senator Morrill, to accom- pany Senate bill 3154, contains the correspondence on which action was taken, and I have discussed the acts therein presented elsewhere under the proper heads.* The following bill was introduced by Senator Morrill on June 12, was passed by the Senate on June 20, and at the end of the fiscal y year was in the hands of the House Committee on Public Buildings and Gr ounds: A BILL for the erection of an additional fire-proof building for the use of the National Museum. Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the sum of five hundred thousand dollars is hereby appropriated, out of any money in the Treas- ury not otherwise appropriated, or so much thereof as may be neces- sary, for the erection of a fire-proof building for the use of the National Museum, to cover three hundred feet square, and to consist of two stories and basement, to be erected under the direction of the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, in accordance with the plans now on file with the Committee on Public Buildings and Grounds, on the south- western portion of the grounds of the Smithsonian Institution. Said building to be placed W est of the Smithsonian Institution, leaving a $4 See museum, ete. 16 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. roadway between it and the latter of not less than forty feet, with the north front on a line with the south face of the building of the Agricult- ural Department and of the Smithsonian Institution; and all expendi- tures for the purpose herein mentioned shall Oe audited by the proper’ officers of the Treasury Department. The building, as proposed, covers the same area as the present Museum, and is of the same general style, so far as is consistent with the introduction of a second story, thus affording nearly three times as much accommodation under the same area of roof as the building now in use. The arrangement of the interior of the proposed new structure is, however, considerably modified, as the result of the experience of seven years’ occupation of the present building. The eighteen exhi- bition halls, on the two main floors are completely isolated from each other, and are capable of subdivision into smaller halls. The lighting will be equally as good as in the present building, the ventilation will be much better, and in other important respects thé sanitary arrange- ments will be far more satisfactory. A basement story is absolutely necessary, not only with a view to promoting the comfort and health of v ‘seers and employés, as well as for securing greater dryness and better preservation of the specimens, but also for the purpose of providing large apartments for store-rooms and workshops. These proposed improvements in arrangement will not, however, interfere with the possibility of constructing a building which shali conform in the essential points of exterior proportion with the main features of the present building. The present building contains about 80,000 square feet of floor space available for exhibition and storage. The building proposed will con- tain about 220,000 square feet. The amount of room for offices and laboratories would be about the same in each. The net area in the new building available for exhibition, storage, and office rooms, as esti- mated, would be between 5 and 6 acres. For the construction of the present Museum Building an appropria- tion of $250,000 was made. This sum was supplemented by the follow- img special appropriations: $25,000 for steam-heating apparatus, $26,000 for marble floors, $12,500 for water and gas fixtures and elec- trical apparatus, and $1,900 for special sewer connections. The total amount expended on this building was therefore $315,400, and it is generally admitted that the cost of its construction was considerably less than that of any other similar building in existence; in fact, per- haps too cheap to secure the truest economy. The proposed structure can be erected at a proportionately smaller cost. I have obtained from responsible bidders, who are willing to give bonds for the completion of the work in accordance with the bids which they have submitted, estimates for the erection of the building com- plete, with steam-heating apparatus and all other essential appliances, excepting the electrical equipment, amounting in the aggregate to $473,000. These bids, upon which the estimates of cost have been made, . > ; | REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 7 were not competitive, and it is possible that something may be saved through competition. It is, however, necessary to provide also for the architect’s superinten dence, and for the removal and reconstruction of the Smithsonian stable, which now occupies the site. I therefore think it advisable to make request for the sum of $500,000, in order that these additional items and other contingencies may be covered. The plans, though drawn in the limited time imposed, represent the results of an exhaustive study—which has extended over several years— of plans of the best modern museum buildings in Europe and America, nearly all of which have been personally inspected by officers of the Smithsonian Institution. It will be remembered by the Regents that neither the central por- tion of the Smithsonian Building nor the so-called ‘* chapel,” at its west- ern extremity, has ever been made fire-proof. The first contains valua- ble collections, which are in somewhat menacing neighborhood to the paint shop outside and to alcoholic stores within. These ought to be provided for separately, but the representations made of the necessity have not yet obtained attention from Congress. A special occasion having arisen which made it desirable, at any rate, to complete the fire- proofing of the ‘‘ chapel,” on the 21st May, at the request of the Sec- retary, Hon. J. S. Morrill reported from the Committee on Public Buildings the following bill: A BILL to provide for making the west end of the Smithsonian Building fire-proof, and for other purposes. Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United Statessof America in Congress assembled, That for the purpose of making the roof of the Gothic chapel at the west end of the Smithsonian Build- ing fire-proof, and for other purposes, under the direction of the Re- gents of the Smithsonian Institution, the sum of seventeen thousand five hundred dollars, or so much thereof as may be necessary, is hereby appropriated out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appro- priated. This bill was adopted without a dissenting vote by the United States Senate. It was referred in the House May 22, 1888, to the Committee on Public Buildings, but no report was made by the committee. The same bill was offered in the Senate on the 28th of June by Senator Morrill as an amendment reported by the Senate Committee on Public Buildings and Grounds to the sundry civil bill. This was referred to the Senate Committee on Appropriations, but was not reported back. Fire-proofing west range of Smithsonian building.—In 1887 Congress made an appropriation of $15,000 ‘for urgent and necessary repairs to central and western portions of the Smithsonian Institution.”* This was expended in removing the combustible material in the west range, as this was the most urgent work required. The contents of * Sundry civil act, No. 148, Mareh 3, 1887 H. Mis. 142—_2 18 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. this part of the building, consisting of the alcoholic collections, were very inflaminable and dangerous. ‘The fire-proofing was intrusted to Messrs. Cluss and Schulze, architects, from whose report the following account of the work is taken: “The reconstruction extended over the curtain between the main building and the west wing, a building of 60 feet in length and 54 feet in width, with an adjoining turret containing stairs. It contains a basement where alcoholic specimens are kept. ‘¢The main story is mostly occupied by an exhibition hall, extending up into the roof, with a clere-story. Along the north front was origi- nally an open cloister, which had been, for many years, temporarily fitted up, by frame-work, for offices. ‘Permanent provision was made for these purposes, and a mezzanine story formed by the insertion of a fire-proof upper floor. ‘‘ Besides the old, rotten, combustible floors and roofs, a complicated system of decorative hollow columns and vaults, framed of wooden scantlings, boards, and lathed plastering, had to be carefully removed, so as not to injure the outside walls, consisting of a thin cut-stone fae- ing, backed by ordinary rubble-work. ‘In the reconstruction the Romanesque general character of the building was preserved with the greatest simplicity compatible with the surroundings, and also made a necessity by the limited appropria- tion, in conjunction with the increased cost of decorations in fire-proof materials. “The first advertisement for bids for the work was confined to what was required for making the reconstructed building ready for oceu- pancy; and to leave desirable but not absolutely necessary improve- ments and internal tinishings to any balance left from the appropria- tion. ‘‘ Under date of June 27, 1887, an advertisement was issued for the wrought and cast iron work, and the award made to C. A. Sckneider’s Sons, of this city, at $1,848, the lowest bid received. “On July 6, 1887, another advertisement was issued for cut-stone work, brick-work, fire-proofing, metal-roofing, lighter iron-work, eorru- gated-iron lathing, carpenter’s work, plastering, and miscellaneous work. There was no bid below that of D. T. Cissel, of Washington, which amounted to $9,850, and was within the estimates. ‘ Miscellaneous minor operations, such as cleaning and clearing the building, steam fitting, and electric work, were done by day’s work and settled for on pay-rolls. “The hardware was obtained in open market, by competition among the principal dealers of the city, on specifications. “The contractors have satisfactorily and for the sums agreed upon completed their work. ‘‘The cost of the work to June 30, 1888, has been— Pay-rolls of laborers, carpenters, and steam-fitters...,...--.--.----..-.-- - $466.30 AGVELrbISING, Prinvinig, ANG typeO- WILLING ceo se scl eee ase ete ae eee 49.10 Brick repairs, nails, and dumber.) =... ces occ cece eee eee ee eae 61. 32 Contract for iron-work by C. A. Schneider’s Sons-...-..-..--.--.-....-.-. 1, 348. 00 Contract for miscellaneous work by D. D.-Cisselss— 222s. eee eee eee 9, 800. 00 Hardware Wind’en Cines seer ee-s-elee eee eee 4 TWO {coasnsonmsonoceds se sao nSSossso0Ns 6 7 | Johns Hopkins exchange list ...-...--...-. 805 Machine \construchonees-s<-scle- see == 16 | List of books, Patent Office................ 700 Gyre) ae sa5 Shans onc dboussosessosenscs 58 5, 756 Marine invertebrates Bad he ee te AR or Ee 50 Less duplication eee cc ene cess eccecece ricdonomos 26 Mathentaicseeseeesceseeesasmalceeesleee se 16 Mathematics and algebra.......-...------- 27 RGN sasaeeones sods Snbonmonscssass == 5, 730 | { | aor eo FD '’ REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. ont articles) are found to reach the enormous number of 5,594; and yet these by no means comprise, as it will be seen, all that the Smithsonian lists contain. Five thousand seven hundred and thirty names were in fact received, but many of these were duplicates, after striking out which, 5,594 titles remain, and a careful investigation by Mr. Boehmer, then in charge of exchanges, shows that of these, 2,328 were foreign, and 1,266 were domestic; and that of the foreign titles but 792 were on our old lists. As regards these latter, then, the final result of the inquiry is the nearly trebling of our foreign lists by adding to them 1,536 new titles (con- sisting largely of periodicals begun in the past twelve or fifteen years), and this list will be used by the library in obtaining, so far as possible, the periodicals themselves. e LIBRARY. Chiefly through its exchange system, the Smithsonian had in 1865 accumulated about forty thousand volumes, largely publications of learned societies, containing the record of the actual progress of the world in all that pertains to the mental and physical development of the human family, and affording the means of tracing the history of at least every branch of positive science since the days of revival of let- ters until the present time.* These books, in many cases presents from old European libraries, and not to be obtained by purchase, formed even then one of the best collections of the kind in the world. The danger incurred from the fire of that year, and the fact that the greater portion of these volumes, being unbound and crowded into in- sufficient space, could not be readily consulted, while the expense to be incurred for this binding, enlarged room, and other purposes con- nected with their use threatened to grow beyond the means of the In- stitution, appear to have been the moving causes which determined the Regents to accept an arrangement by which Congress was to place the Smithsonian Library with its own in the Capitol, subject to the right of the Regents to withdraw the books on paying the charges of binding, etc. Owing to the same causes (which have affected the Library of Congress itself) these principal conditions, except as regards their custody in a fire proof building, have never been fulfilled. The books are still deposited chiefly in the Capitol, but though they have now accumulated from 40,000 to fully 250,000 volumes and parts of volumes, and form without doubt the most valuable collection of the kind in existence, they not only remain unbound, but in a far more crowded and inaccessible condition than they were before the transfer. It is hardly necessary to add that these facts are deplored by no one more than by the present efficient Librarian of Congress, who would, I am confident, gladly give, as far as it lies in his power, effect to any ex- *See Smithsonian Report of 1867. 38 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. pression of the wish of the Regents that in the new building a hall or halls worthy of this really magnificent collection of a quarter of a mill- ion titles should be exclusively devoted to it, under the name of the “Smithsonian Halls”, or in any such other method as may point it out as an acquisition of national importance due to the Institution under the Regents’ care. It will be remembered that a small portion of these volumes, repre- senting in number something like one-twentieth of the whole, is ordi- narily retained for consultation in the National Museum. A certain limited number of books, chiefly of works of reference, obtained by purchase from the Smithsonian fund, is kept in the Smith- sonian building, under the titles of “The Secretary’s Library” and ‘¢ Hiditor’s Library.” With thesé exceptions, it will be understood that a large part of the Smithsonian exchange system, and a considerable portion of the best rooms in the main building of the Smithsonian, continue to be given to this portion of the Library of Congress without any return. On April 1, 1887, upon the resignation of Miss J. A. Turner, who had for many years performed the duties of librarian with the greatest dili- gence and faithfulness, the provisions for the care of the books supplied to the Congressional Library were reorganized under the regulations which I had prepared upon my appointment as assistant secretary. * Mr. John Murdoch, formerly assistant librarian in the National Mu- seum, was appointed librarian in Miss ‘furner’s place, and was also given the charge of the collection of books kept in the Museum as a working library for the use of the curators and other officers. A force of three clerks was detailed to report to the librarian, in order to enable him to carry out the new regulations, which require greater promptness in disposing of accessions than it was possible to effect when one person alone was employed on this work. All acces. sions received during any week must now be completely recorded and ready for a final disposition to be made of them on the Saturday of the same week. All accessions, as heretofore, except the comparatively few retained for use at the Institution, and certain medical publications which are specially loaned to the library of the Surgeon-General’s Office, U.S. Army, are sent to the Library of Congress. Publications retained for the use of the Institution must, under the regulations, be entered and ready for use within twenty-four hours from the time they are received. A “full entry” of any publication, according to the regulations, is “to consist of both a day-book and a ledger account entry.” The day-book is simply a continuation of the old Smithsonian record of accessions, in which the running numbers reached on June 30, 1888, 182,059. The ledger account is supplementary to the manuscript cata- logue in thirteen large bound volumes, called “ Publications of Learned * These regulations are given in Appendix V. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 39 Societies, Periodicals, ete., in the Library of the Smithsonian Institu tion,” which was complete up to April 1, 15387. The new record is kept on large cards, one for each institution or individual from whom the In- stitution has received any publication, and on each card is entered the title of everything received from the person or institution whose name appears at the head of the card, each marked with its accession or “day-book” number, by means of which reference can be made to the “day-book” for further particulars. These cards are now arranged alphabetically by the name of the donor’s residence. These regulations have been carried out without failure since the re- organization of the library, though there have been weeks when, owing to the arrival of large invoices through the department of foreign ex- changes, the librarian and his clerks have been hard pressed to com- plete the work in the time specified. Upwards of five hundred acces- sions have been recorded in a single week. The books destined for the Library of Congress are sent regularly on Monday of each week, and it is impossible for publications to be delayed at the Institution for the length of time which was frequently unavoid- able under the foriner arrangements. It is, however, to be regretted that the Librarian of Congress is unable to take advantage of the in- creased promptness of the Smithsonian library administration. Owing, as I am informed, to the pressure of copyright work and the over- crowded condition of the present quarters of the Library, the chests sent up from the Institution frequently lie for months unopencd, so that their contents are inaccessible to readers. This is the more to be regretted as, on account of the limited space at the disposal of the Institution for keeping books and periodicals, only the most important publications can be retained for use here. The books thus retained for use at the Institution form part of the National Museum library (the rest of which consists of such publica- tions as are donated directly to the Museum or pyrchased from the Museum appropriation for the use of its curators), and are loaned under certain necessary conditions to the officers of the Smithsonian Institu- tion, the Smithsonian editor, the scientific staff of the Museum, and such persons as are authorized to borrow books by special written per- mission from one of the officers of the Smithsonian Institution. How important these contributions from the Smithsonian accessions are to the Museum library may be seen from the fact that out of the 6,053 accessions to the Museum library (ineluding parts of regular serials) during the fiscal year, 3,045, or a trifle more than 50 per cent., were from this source. From lack of space in the Museum library it had been practically impossible to provide for the proper display of new accessions to the library, and especially of the current numbers of periodicals. At my direction, therefore, the librarian prepared plans for a reading-room in the Smithsonian Building. This room was opened to readers in the 40 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. latter part of April, 1587, and has remained in active use since then It now contains the current numbers of two hundred and sixty-five se- rials, embracing most of the chief scientific and technical publications, and including also a few of the more important literary periodicals. It is much used by the employés of the Smithsonian Institution and the Museum, and to a less degree by other persons in Washington who wish to consult the scientific periodicals. Such a scientific reading- room has long been needed at the Institution, and the one now in opera- tion appears to fill the want satisfactorily. The policy that has been pursued in regard to the library has been, in- general, to obtain as large and as valuable a return as possible for the works published by the Institution, and to make the best possible use of these returns when they are received. With this end in view, the librarian has been instructed to watch for all opportunities of ob- taining new publications by exchange and to bring to my knowledge every occasion of this kind. The results of this increased activity in seeking new exchanges are to be seen in the fact that for the fiscal year 1887~88 the total number of accessions amounted to 18,948, an increase of 2,401 over the total number for the preceding fiscal year (1886~%87), which was 16,547. As has been previously stated, 3,045 of these accessions have been transferred to the Museum library, and, in addition to these, 675 med- ical dissertations have been loaned to the library of the Surgeon-Gen- eral’s Office, U.S. Army. The remainder, 15,228 in number, have been transferred to the Library of Congress. It is impossible, as it seems to me, not to consider this as an ample return for whatever expense the Library of Congress is put to in paying for the recording of these acces- sions. : The following is a statement of the books, maps, and charts received by the Smithsonian Institution from July 1, 1887, to June 30, 1888: Volumes: ® Octavowrsmallers\.coe osc. da es scenes eee 1, 010 Quariororlarcerssass-e oeee cece ema eee 575 1,535 Parts of volumes: Octavororsmaller.-soeu.g. soc wie ems eee eee 6, 188 QuartolorJarcer aa s-eecees cece e reese eee 6, 420 12, 608 Pamphlets: Octavovorssmalllensos es pees ser eloe senenlaalstoreterais 3, 607 Quartolomlatpere= sooo anes ae eeeeee ee 681 4,288 MAN Bian sc aolccnc ost ate «cece rs cofeeieie as aa = aa . 467 Total cs 2. SoS. e ee ee eee ee 18, 948 Were I to attempt to mention the titles of the publications received, it would expand this report beyond all reasonable dimensions. pies jee ii REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Ai [ may, however, specify the following publications as among the most important additions to our list of serials : L’Aérostat. American Anthropologist. American Geologist. American Journal of Psychology. American Yachtsman. Anales del Museo Michoacano. Astronomische Nachrichten. Boletin mensual del Observatorio Meteor- ologico del collegio pio’ de Villa Colon. Boletin mensual del Observatorio Meteor- ologico-magnetico, Mexico. Boletin de Sanidad, Madrid. Centralblatt fiir Bacteriologie und Par- asitenkunde. Entomologist. Entomologists’ Monthly Magazine. Ethnologische Mittheilungen aus Un- garn. Fernschau. Geografisk Tidskrift. Globus. Tfonduras-Progress (the English newspaper published in Honduras). Indian Annals and Magazine of Natural Sciences. “Notes from the Leyden Museum.” Notes and Queries (Manchester, N. H.). Record of American and Foreign Ship- first ping. Scottish Geographical Magazine. Societas Entomologica. Zeitschrift fiir Luftschiff fahrt. The following universities have sent complete sets of all their aca. demic publications for the year, including the inaugural dissertations delivered by thestudents on graduation : Bern, Bonn, Dorpat, Erlan gen, Freiburg-im-Breisgau, Giessen, Gottingen, Greifswald, Halle-an-der- Saale, Heidelberg, Helsingfors, Jena, Kiel, KGnigsberg, Leipzig, Liege, Lund, Marburg, Strassburg, Tiibingen, Utrecht, Wiirzburg, and Ziirich. Among other important accessions during the year, | may mention the following: *‘ Les premiers ages du métal dans le Sud-est de l’Es- pagne,” from the authors, MM. Henri and Louis Siret, Antwerp, a magnificent illustrated work; a full set of the publications of the Physicalische Anstalt im-Bernoullianum, Basel; vol. 4 (the first is- sued) of the reports of the German commission for the observation of the transit of Venus; a full set of parliamentary publications from the German Reichstags-Bibliothek; two volumes Qf the magnificent “Corpus Inscriptionum Latinorum,” published by the Berlin Acad- emy; a full set of the publications of the Birmmgham Natural History and Microscopical Society, since 1872; ‘* Voyages en Moscovie et Tar- tarie,” by Adam Olearius, and Mandelslo’s ** Voyages de Perse aux Indes Orientales,” both published in 1727, from Hon. William T. Rice, United States consul at Horgen, Switzerland; the first 2 volumes of Houzeau and Lancaster’s great “ Bibliographie Générale de VAstron- omie,” from Prof. A. Lancaster, of Brussels; twenty-eight ichthyo- logical publications from the author, Dr. Francis Day, Cheltenham, England; volumes 17 and 18 of the report of the Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition; a full set of government publications from Sax- ony; the great ‘*Catalogus Librorum Bibliotheez Collegii S. S. Trini- tatis,” in 8 folio volumes, from Trinity College, Dublin; a valuable set of 16 volumes on forestry, from the author, Dr. John Croumbie Brown, Haddington, England; Haeckel’s “ Kalkschwiimme,” in 3 vol- 42 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. umes, and his ‘Allgemeine Naturgeschichte der Radiolarien,” vol- ume 2, from the author; a full set of their publications for the year from the British Admiralty ; volumes 20, 21, and 22 of the Challenger Re- port (Zoology) from the British Government; a full set of Indian Govern. ment publications from the India office ; volume 1 of Lieutenant-General Pitt-Rivers’s great work, ‘“* Excavations in Cramborne Chase,” from the author; a full set of catalogues and handbooks published during the year from the ‘science and art department, South Kensington; See- bohm’s magnificent “Geographical Distribution of the Family Chara- dride ”, from the author ; 110 volumes and pamphlets of “ Columbiana” from Columbia College, New York; a full set of parliamentary papers, ete., for the year, from the library of Parliament, Ottawa, Canada; volumes 2, 3, 4, and 6 of the ‘ Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn” and other important Government publications from the Bureau Frang¢ais des Echanges Internationaux; a full set of all the results that have yet been published of the scientific cruises of his yacht L’Hirondelle, from Prince Albert of Monaco; a full set of Government publications for the year from the Italian Government; the memorial edition of the “Botanical Works of George Engelmann,” from Henry Shaw, esq., Saint Louis; a set of the “ Jahresberichte des Comités fiir ornithologische Beobachtungs-Stationen in Oesterreich” from Victor Ritter Tschusi zu Schmidhoffen, Salzburg, Austria; the concluding volumes (volumes 4 and 5) of “ Vega-Expeditionens Vetenskapliga Iakttagelser” from Baron Nordenskiéld, Stockholm; a large series of government publications from the Government of New Zealand. ZOOLOGICAL PARK. Collections of living Animals.—it has been customary, ever since the Institution commenced to form collections, that skeletons and skins of wild animals should be sent here for preparation, so that a certain reg- ular supply of stfeh material now comes in without solicitation every year, together with occasional live animals, which have been usually sent to the Zoological Gardens in Philadelphia. It seemed to me worth while to try the experiment of having all animals sent on alive when this could be done without enhanced cost; and thus has been formed the nucleus of a collection of living animals, which, though still small, has attracted the popular interest in a very marked degree. It is understood that this interest, and the consideration that the buffalo, the mountain sheep and goat, the elk, and other vanishing races of the continent deserve protection at the hands of the Government, was the cause of a bill which was introduced by Senator Beck to create a Zoological Garden on Rock Creek, such that these animals might not only form the subject of study, but be expected to increase as they do not do in ordinary captivity. I present herewith the amendment to the sundry civil appropriation bill reported by Senator Morrill, of the Committee on Public Buildings REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 43 and Grounds, June 4, 1888. This is identical with the bill proposed by Senator Beek April 25, 1888 (S. 2752), which was read twice and re- ferred to the Committee on Public Buildings and Grounds with the ad- ditions of the paragraphs inclosed in brackets. This establishment it is proposed, when completed, to place under the care of the Regents, with a proper provision for its maintenance. The bill has not yet become a law, but in the event of its doing so, the trust created, being in the interest of knowledge, and incidentally offer- ing a most obvious means for its popular diffusion, seems to be one which falls entirely within the proper function of the Smithsonian Institution, and I hope I may be able to state that the trust is one of a nature which the Regents, if called upon, are likely to favor. [A BILL for the establishment of a zoological park in the District of Columbia. ] That, in order to establish a Zoological Park in the District of Colum- bia, for the advancement of science and the instruction and recreation of the people, a commission shall be constituted, composed of three persons, namely: the Secretary of the Interior, the president of the board of Commissioners of the District of Columbia, and the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, which shall be known and designated as the commission for the establishment of a zoological park. That the said commission is hereby authorized and directed to make an inspection of the country along Rock Creek, beginning at the point on that creek where the Woodley road crosses said creek, and extend- ing upward along its course to where said creek is crossed by the Klingle road, and to select from that district of country such a tract of land, of not more than one hundred acres, which shall include a section of the creek, as said commission shall deem to be suitable and appro- priate for a zoological park. That the said commission shall cause to be made a carefui map of said zoological park, showing the location, quantity, and character of each parcel of private property to be taken for such purpose, with the names of the respective owners inscribed thereon, and the said map shall be filed and recorded in the public records of the District of Columbia; and from and after that date the several tracts and parcels of land em- braced in such zoological park shall be held as condemned for public uses, subject to the payment of just compensation, to be determined by the said commission and approved by the President of the United States, provided that such compensation be accepted by the owner or owners of the several parcels of land. That if the said commission shall be unable to purchase any portion of the land so selected and condemned within thirty days after such condemnation, by agreement with the respective owners, at the price approved by the President of the United States, it shall, at the expira- tion of such period of thirty days, make application to the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia, by petition, at a general or special term, for an assessment of the value of such land, and said petition shall contain a particular description of the property selected and condemned, with the name of the owner or owners thereof, and his, her, or their residences, as far as the same can be ascertained, together with a copy of the recorded map of the park; and the said Court is hereby author- ized and required, upon such application, without delay, to notify the owners and occupants of the land and to ascertain and assess the value 44 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. of the land so selected and condemned by appointing three commis- sioners to appraise the value or values thereof, and to return the ap- praisement to the Court, and when the values of such land are thus ascertained, said values shall be paid to the owner or owners, and the United States shall be deemed to have a valid title to said lands. - That when the said commission shall have obtained the land for a zoological park, as herein provided, it shall have power to lay out the same as a park and to erect such building or buildings thereon as may be necessary for the scientific purposes to which the park is dedicated and proper, for the custody, care, and exhibition of a collection of ani- mals. That when the said commission shall have established a zoological park in the District of Columbia under the provisions of this act, by ac- quiring the necessary lands and by laying out the same as a park and by the erection of the necessary buildings, thereupon it shall be the duty of said commission to turn over the said zoological park, with all its buildings and appurtenances, to the custody and care of the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution ; and when such transfer of the custody and care of the zoological park shall be made, the duties of said com- mission shall cease and its existence terminate. That when the said commission shall tender to the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution the care and custody of the zoological park pro- vided for in this act, the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution are hereby authorized to assume the care and custody of the same; and the said Regents of the Smithsonian Institution are hereby authorized to make such rules and regulations for the management of the park, and of the property, appurtenances, and collections of the park, as they may deem necessary and wise to secure the use of the same for the ad- yancement of science and the instruction and recreation of the people. [That the said commission is hereby authorized to call upon the Di- rector of the Geological Survey to make such surveys as may be neces- sary to carry into effect the provisions of this act; and the Director of the Geological Survey is hereby authorized and required to make such surveys under the direction of said commission. ] [ will take this occasion to observe that we have found great liberal- ity in the donors of specimens. Among those to whom we are especially indebted is the Hon. Eugene G. Blackford, commissioner of fisheries for the State of New York, and an old and valued supporter of the work of the Institution, who has presented us with two buffaloes, an animal now become so rare as to have a high money value. The proposition for the establishment of a National Zoological Park has met with a very surprising amount of support from all parts of the United States.* * The followi ing extract from ‘“ Public Opinion » will serve to give somewhat of an idea of the character and extent of this support: [Public Opinion, New York.] The National Zoological Park.—Of all the bills that have been introduced in Con- gress this session, no other has been more universally approved by the press than Senator Beck’s bill for the establishment of a National Zoological Park at Washing- ton, on a grand and liberal scale, ‘‘ for the advancement of science and the instruc- tion and recreation of the people.” With all our great game animals being swept out of existence by modern breech-loaders, a magnificent site within 2 miles of the Executive Mansion, a huge surplus in the Treasury, gifts of live animals pouring into > REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 45 ART AND MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. Art collections.—The words of your first seeretary, that the Institution sxists for knowledge in the highest sense, including not only science commonly so called, but “the true, the beautiful, as well as the immedi- ately practical,” remind us that one of the lines on which the Institution was to develop according to the views of Congress, that of its counec- tion with art, has been allowed almost entirely to lapse. It is now, how- ever, understood that a very valuable collection of art objects, repre- senting, perhaps, over $1,000,000 in value, has been left to the Smith- sonian Institution; and it is not an abstract question when we ask what these relations are to be. It seems to me that here again the fact of the independence of the Smithsonian is of inestimable value in its possible future usefulness. No possessor of a great private gallery like either of the two or three in this country which are rising now to al- most national importance—no possessor of such a gallery, knowing on the one hand what art is and on the other hand what the relations of the Government to art have been in the past, is likely to bequeath it to the nation without some guaranty, not only for its care and mainte- nance, but fer its judicious use in the cause of national art itself. the Smithsonian, the public clamoring for a National ‘‘ Zoo,” and a competent natu- ralist ready and anxious to build it up, what reason is there why the bill should not be passed and work begun at ‘once? If it is neglected much longer some of our grandest game species will have become so nearly extinct it will be almost, if not quite, impossible to procure living representatives of them at any price. At therate mountain goats are now being killed off for their pelts five years hence it will be im- possible to procure a living specimen. A live buffalo is now worth from $500 to $1,000, according tc sex and size, whereas three or four years ago they were worth only one-fifth as much. Asan index to public sentiment in regard to the proposed zo- ologizal park at Washington, we may quote a few editorial expressions from our ex- changes. It 1s interesting to note the unanimity of the opiniens that come to us in journals of all kinds and parties, from Boston to San Francisco. The Boston Globe exclaims: ‘Give us a National Zoo. Senator Beck has introduced a bill of great in- terest to the people of the United States, concerning which there van be no partisan difference of opinion, and which ought to be passed. This is the only great nation in the world which does not possess such an institution, and it is the one of all others which needs it most. A national museum of living animals would be one of the leading attractions of Washington, and would show the citizen and foreign visitor at a glance the animals of this country as they could never be seen otherwise. By all means let this country have a National ‘Zoo.’ Senator Beck’s bill ought to pass.” The Pittsburgh Dispatch declares that the bill ‘‘should meet with the hearty in- dorsement it deserves. That a nation so far in advance in the march of progress as the United States should be entirely without some such institution under Gov- ernment protection seems almost incredible.” The New York Forest and Stream asserts that ‘‘ the importance of preserving living North American mammals can hardly be overestimated. The buffalo is practically extinet, and the range of the elk has become so contracted in the last few years that it is apparent the same fate awaits that noble species. There are ofhers that will survive longer, but the people at large know nothing, and never can know, about them, unless they shall be brought close to their homes. All these animals should be secured before it is too late.” The Chicago Inter-Ocean, in a lengthy and very earnest editorial on this sub- 46 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. The Smithsonian stands here in the position of a disinterested and independent party, absolutely responsible, having a permanency such as no individual or private corporation can represent, and it might very well, it seems to me, in pursuit of its proper objects accept a trust of this kind on the condition either of seeing itself that the Government accepted it and provided for it in a proper way or handing it back to the heirs of the conditional donor. It is perhaps not too much to say that an important function of the Smithsonian which has lain long in whey- ance may yet be developed in this direction. Assignment of rooms for scientific work.—During the past year the use of rooms in the Smithsonian building has been granted to the Director of the Geological Survey for draughtsmen; to the Coast and Geodetic Survey for pendulum experiments under the direction of Assistant C. 5. Peirce; to the Fish Commission, during the commissionership of Dr. Goode for the sessions of a committee for revising the work and organi- zation of the Commission, and for the storage of the stereotype plates of its publications. Rooms and facilities for work have also been granted to Dr. J. F. ' Bransford, surgeon, U. S. Navy, for the preparation of a report on the ject, dwells with special emphasis on the fact that ‘if the Government purchases and fits up a park or extensive gardens there will not be the slightest difficulty in ob- taining suitable inhabitants. No better illustration need be cited than the menagerie at the Smithsonian. Nearly all the really valuable animals there have been pre- sented to it. The zoo in London, the gardens in Paris, the parks in the cities of the United States, not the least of which are those of Chicago, set forth, with pointed object-lessons, the value and interest these zoological exhibitions possess. A great garden at the national capital could, on the plan proposed, be made one of the most interesting and instructive of public resorts.” The Minneapolis Journal says with confidence that ‘inasmuch as the expense would be comparatively trifling under the management of that object of national pride, the Smithsonian, there is every reason to expect that the project will meet the approval of Congress.” The San Francisco Call earnestly advocates the measure as one of interest to the entire American peo- ple. Itsays: ‘That such a park would be of advantage ‘for the advancement of science and the instruction and the recreation of the people’ needs no demonstration, It would be a national benefit, as similar gardens have proved themselves to be in other countries. But there are peculiar reasons for establishing an American Zoo. The original wild animals of this country are being rapidly exterminated. The American bison, better known as the buffalo, is almost extinct. There are a few ina remote corner of ‘lexas, and a few still survive in the Yellowstone Park. But if nothing is done to preserve them, in a few years they will have disappeared as com- pletely as the pterodactyl. A few moose can still be found in northern New York and Maine; there are still a few specimens of the mountain sheep and goat in the mountains of Colorado; an occasional caribou is still shot in the Adirondacks; a herd of antelope is still seen, once in the way, on the prairies; a few grizzlies survive in the Rocky Mountains, b ut hunters know to their sorrow that these creatures, once so plentiful, are growing scarcer every year, and will soon have vanished altogether. The traveler on the eastern slopes of the Rockies finds plenty of beaver dams, but few beavers, and the mountain lion is almost a thing of the past. ‘To find a complete collection of the wild beasts which once roamed in freedom over the mountain slopes and the prairies one must now go to the northern section of the Dominion of Canada. my REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. AT antiquities of Central America; and to Paymaster William J. Thomson, U.S. Navy, for the preparation of a report on the antiquities of Haster Island, Pacific Ocean. Toner Lecture Fund.—The Secretary of the Institution is ex-officio chairman of the board of trustees. No lectures have been delivered for several years. The fund remains as originally invested, increased annually by the unexpended income. It consists partly in real estate in Washington, and partly in Government bonds, the estimated value of which is about $3,000. American Historical Association.—A bill was introduced in the Senate by Hon. G. F. Hoar on the 21st of May, 1888, and in the House on the 4th of June by Hon. James Phelan, to incorporate the ‘American His- torical Association,” and as the bill proposes an intimate connection between the association and the Smithsonian Institution it is here given in full: [A BILL to incorporate the American Historical Association. ] Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That Andrew D. White, of Ithaca, in the State of New York; George Bancroft, of Washington, in the District of Columbia; Justin Winsor, of Cambridge, in the State of Massachusetts; William FI. Poole, of Chicago, in the State of Illinois; Herbert B. Adams, of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland; Clarence W. Bowen, of Brooklyn, in the State of New York, their associates and suc- cessors, are hereby created a body corporate and politic, by the name of the American I[listorical Association, for the promotion of historical studies, the collection and preservation of historical manuscripts, and for kindred purposes in the interest of American history and of history in America. Said association is authorized to hold real and personal estate to an amount not exceeding five hundred thousand dollars, to adopt a constitution, and to make by-laws. Said association shall have its headquarters at Washington, in the District of Columbia, and shall hold its annual meetings in such places as the said incorporators shall determine. Said association shall report annually to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution concerning its proceedings and the condi- tion of historical study in America. Said Secretary shall communicate to Congress the whole of such reports, or such portion thereof as he shall see fit. The Regents of the Smithsonian Institution are authorized to permit said association to deposit its collections, manuscripts, books, pamphlets, and éther material for history in the Smithsonian Institution or in the National Museum, at their discretion, upon such conditions and under such rules as they shall prescribe. Highth centenary of the University of Bologna.—In accordance with the request of Prof. J. Capellini, reetor of the University of Bologna, the Smithsonian Institution appointed two representatives to be present at the eighth centenary of the university, which occurred on the 12th of June, 1888. Dr. S. Weir Mitchell, of Philadelphia, and Dr. C, Gardini, 48 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. United States consul at Bologna, were appointed. A letter from Doe- tor Mitchell is herewith appended: To the REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION: GENTLEMEN: As representing the Institution over which you preside I went to Bologna, and was present at the eight hundredth anniversary of its famous university. The ceremonies consisted in addresses and a poem by Professor Carducci, with presentations to the King and Queen, and with the conferring of degrees in law, letters, science, and med- icine. Mr. James Russell Lowell was thus honored in letters, Mr. David Dudley Field in law, Alexander Agassiz in science, and myself in med- icine. The ‘ Laureati” were not given LL.D.’s but were made doctors in their respective branches; a more sensible plan. I shall send a medal and the volumes presented to me, that of these you may make such dis- posal as seem best. And I have the honor to be, very respectfully, . WEIR MITCHELL. Grants and subscriptions.—In accordance with a precedent established by the first Secretary to encourage meritorious scientific enterprises undertaken wholly for the advance of knowledge and not for pecuniary gain, a subscription of twenty copies was made for the Astronomical Journal of Dr. B. A. Gould, published at Boston. Privilege of floor of the House of Representatives.—A resolution having been introduced in the House of Representatives on the 6th of February, 1858, to admit to the privileges of the floor certain officials of the Gov- ernment, Hon. Mr. Cox, of New York, one of the Regents, introduced a resolution, which was referred to the Committee on Rules, to confer the privilege on the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. | It is proper to state that for many years this privilege has been ex- tended to the Secretary by the Senate of the United States. Reception.—It was the habit of the first Secretary, when he resided in the Smithsonian building, to give receptions there from time to time, which many still pleasantly remember. It is, perhaps, proper for the writer to mention that though these rooms are now devoted to official pur- poses he, desiring that the traditions of this kindly hospitality should not entirely lapse, used them on the 17th of April of the present year on an occasion, which, so far as he was able to make it so, was not dis- similar in kind to the former ones in the same place, and which he has reason to hope will be pleasantly associated with them in the recollec- tions of old friends of the Institution. Employés of the Institution—Few changes have occurred in the cleri- cal force. Owing to the independence of the Smithsonian Institution of those alterations which take place with changes of administration in Government Departments, the tenure of office of all its employés is justly regarded as more secure than in other public establishments ; and acceptable persons are commonly found willing to take employment are ey Se Pa ae REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 49 under the Regents on lower terms than the same nominal service is elsewhere paid for by the Government. At the same time with this fixity of tenure and permanence of position, closer and perhaps kindlier relations are found to arise than exist else where in the midst of frequent change; and the writer is happy to believe that the best and most val- uable part of this service is often an unbought and voluntary one, and that this is recognized by both employer and employed. U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM. The relations of the Museum to the Smithsonian Institution have so frequently been discussed, that itis unnecessary to dwell upon them at the present time. The connection of the Museum with the present establishment has not only always been very much more intimate than that of many of the other undertakings which were projected at the time of the foundation of the Institution, but as has already been observed, it rests on a radically distinct footing from any other, since the Smith- sonian Institution has actual property in the Museum, equalling probably its whole original fund. Through the agency of the Museum the Insti- tution is able to direct the work of a goodly number of investigators, who, in addition to their regular administrative work, are doing each year im. portant service in the increase and diffusion of knowledge. In fact so much is done in the name of the Institution by the officers of the Museum and the Bureau of Ethnology in all the fields of biological, anthropologi- cal, and geological work, that the Institution can devote a larger pro- portion of its own funds to the encouragement of investigation in phys- ical sciences than it could were not the biological sciences thus well provided for. The statement of the work of the year in the Museum some years since became so great in extent that it was found necessary to add a second volume to the Smithsonian Report to contain it. Referring then to the report of Dr. G. Brown Goode, the assistant secretary in charge of the Museum, for a history of the work as performed in its various departments, I need here refer only to some of the most important gen- eral considerations. Prominent among these are the financial relations of the Museum to the Smithsonian and to the General Government, and the changes ob- tained by legislation in the past year, with regard to placing the appro- priations more immediately under the care of the Regents, but these I have already spoken of under the head of ‘ Finance.” During the past year a committee appointed by me to investigate the sanitary condition of the present Museum structure, has reported in urgent terms on the need in the interest of health, of very great changes such as can not be undertaken till another building exists to receive the present personnel, the collections, and the public during the changes, H. Mis. 142 4 50 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Through the agency of one of your body this is likely to be provided. The particulars have already been stated under the subject of “Building.” I may add in this connection that the present Museum building is not more than large enough for the ethnological and technological material already available. The proposed new building will afford ac- commodation for the natural history collections which are at present very inadequately housed. For instance, the amount of space assigned to the collection of mammalsis about 6,500 feet. At least double that amount of space will be needed to accommodate the material now on hand, as soon as the taxidermists of the Museum shall have been able to prepare it for exhibition, it being our desire to have mounted groups, similar to the buffalo family recently finished, in order to preserve for future generations representations of the large quadrupeds native to this continent, which are on the verge of extinction. At the close of the last fiscal year (June 30, 1887), a very careful esti- mate showed that the collections were about fifteen times as great in number of specimens as in the year 1882. I desire to eall your attention especially to the inclosed statement bearing upon this point. The Museum is growing, as it is fitting that the National Museum of a great country should grow; and it is not only necessary to care for what is already here, but to provide for the reception and display of what is certain to be placed in our hands within the next few years. Since the erection of the present Museum building there have been more than 12,000 groups or lots of specimens added to the collection, chiefly by gifts. From the year 1859 to 1880 the accessions numbered 8,475. It is thus evident that within the last eight years the number of accessions has been half as large again as during the previous twenty- one. Many of the more recent accessions are of very great extent, as for instance the bequest of the late Isaac Lea, of Philadelphia, which con. tains 20,000 specimens of shells, besides minerals and other objects ; the Jeffreys collection of fossil and recent shells of Europe, including 40,000 specimens; the Stearns collections of mollusks, numbering 100,000 specimens; the Riley collection of insects, containing 159,000 specimens; the Catlin collection of Indian paintings, about 500 in number; the col- lection of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, for the transpor- tation of which to Washington several freight-cars were required. There are also the extensive collections obtained at the Fisheries Exhibition at Berlin and London and at the close of the New Orleans Cotton Centennial; the Shepard collection of meteorites; the Wilson collection of archeological objects (more than 12,0.0 specimens) ; the Lorrillard collection of Central American antiquities, and very many others nearly as extensive. In addition to these are the annual accre- tions from the work of the U.S. Fish Commission, the U.S. Geological Survey, and the Bureau of Ethnology, as well as the contributions from several expeditions of the Government, from Army and Navy officers, REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 51 and from other Government officials. These are very extensive, and are yearly increasing in bulk and value. In the Armory building are stored many hundreds of boxes of valu- able material which we have not room to unpack, and the great vaults under the Smithsonian building and many of the attic and tower rooms are similarly occupied. For several important departments of the Museum no exhibition space whatever is available, and no portion of the collection can be publicly displayed. Indeed, the growth of many of the departments is in large measure prevented by the fact that we have no room for addi- tional exhibition cases, or even for storage. Many valuable collections elsewhere than in Washington are at the service of the Museum, but we have no space for their reception. The collection of birds, which, so far as North America is concerned, is the finest in the world, is very inadequately shown, and requires double the case room now available. The collection of mollusks, which is one of the most complete in the world and contains more than 450,000 specimens, is at present almost entirely unprovided for. The collection of insects, which, though smaller, is, so far as North America is concerned, equally perfect, is also practically without any exhibition space. And so I might continue. It should be borne in mind that under the roofs of the Smithsonian and new Museum buildings are grouped together collections which in London, Paris, or any other of the European capitals, are provided for in a group of museums, for the accommodation of which a much larger number of equally commodious buildings is found needful. One of the most striking features in connection with the affairs of the Museum is the remarkable increase in the extent of its collections, which each year becomes greater. This increase is in a large degree spontaneous, only a very small sum of money being available for the purchase of new material. As might be supposed, a considerable pro- portion of the objects given duplicate material already on hand, and although these contributions can, with the utmost advantage, be st for distribution to other museums and schools, they do not increase a much as is desired the value of the collections for study by stain and for general educational purposes. The need of a larger fund for the purchase of specimens is yearly more manifest. Exceedingly im- portant material is constantly offered to us at prices very much below what it would cost to obtain it by collecting, and in many instances, when refused, it is eagerly taken by the museums and institutions of Europe. The extent and character of the recent additions to the collec- tions may, perhaps, be better shown by the appended table than in any other way. This table shows comparatively the results of a census of the collections, taken for the past six years, and from it appears that the number of specimens or of lots of specimens on hand at the close of 52 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. the year is more than 2,800,000. These figures are in many instances estimated, and are always subject to revision. Name of department. 1882. 1883. 1884, | 1ise5,| 1885-’86, | 1886-87. | 1887-'88. Arts and industries: Matenianmiedicderecce= =e. cael sesacte one 4, 000 B44 ON oe cree 4, 850 5, 516 5, 762 TING Cae OSAS ESS SSA SEe cal Dereneenoe 21, 244 1580) peeees 3822 4877 5877 Mexbilesieeer eee staat nas ease =| etecieeie octal neem entero 2; 000) Sasa 38, 064 3, 144 53, 144 MIsheries: 222 bets eoeceuice cece cues senckal|e se eaceees Oo O00N Paeeee 39, 870 10, 078 510, 078 J SSAA STO Keemncoqpessa4 psebenooad||sacccaone r T0005 |= | 2 aininlnlnielwimlall cine ale 1, 002 l Coins, medals, paper money, 13, 634 14, 640 A Cosas ele ee ae cian eee eee se| ee ee ascasee cell ssbasc 1, 055 | Minsicalanstrouments = oe. a= |= mm | = = rar minimal al ole ofainlerl | ereiaiel 400 417 427 Modern pottery, porcelain, 4 * PANG! KOVAL) Se noseosooedand pRoocdeoanr paaoscognr jpsspoosodal |sodcs 2, 278 2, 238 3, OLL Paints and! dy esce-n ecco te. =e eee cela = | (== eee oat eee eae |e aee ee 377 100 5100 Sy (Chalten (Geil Gre Me ees Paes ee seoo Soeeoe occ S=acaoncec||secons 500 500 5500 JE ENCE By eee NH aaa cae bods |scdeeeooes| |seasboosed| aokaoacos|lasscc: 250 251 5951 Ovsandoumpec ss oe ae eee sae cece | = =o alee | ee nore ees 3197 198 5198 Chemical products...........|--------+-|----------|--------0.]------ 3659 661 5661 IDLE Gin ogee eo UE ae Se | Rte eee a 200, 000 |...... 6500, 000 | 503,764 | 505, 464 American aboriginal pottery..-...|----------|---------- TPAD) eS ecce 25,000 | £26, 022 697, 122 Prehistoric anthropology.....-.. 35, 512 40, 491 45, 252 |.--.-. 65,314 | 101, 659 108, 631 Mammals (skins and alcoholics). . 4, 660 4, 920 DB; 694 || see ree 7,451 7, 811 8, 058 Birds -teteee tes site e28-= eke ceed 44, 354 47, 246 50)350)|Ss-e—= 55, 945 54, 987 56, 484 Qblor yee reat Heat: ese e es | enna es | aeses eee £0: 072 ee 44,163 | 748, 173 50, 055 Reptiles and batrachians.........]----------|---------- PRE CUS Ee coKa 25, 344 27, 542 27, 664 MISH OSes cme acre Seaver cies 50, 000 65, 000 68, 000 |.--..- 75, 000 | 100, 000 101, 350 Moltisks= 5.55. cheese cess se nescce LBB AG Y(is:| Faoeodanod 400, 000 |..-... 2460, 000 | 425, 000 455, 000 Insectsyscisen -veatveyssee ss ossules SD) isoososcss: 10151000 |. - =.=. 6500, 000 | £585, 000 595, 000 Marine invertebrates...........- 811, 781 814, 825 | 6200, 000 |.....-. 6350, 000 | 450, 000 515, 000 Comparative anatomy : | . Osteology~~-------- es------=- 3, 935 3, 640 4,214 ; scsel LON 270) | et 1022 ie 558 ANALOMYs -osenss-2- = Sescne ae 70 103 3, 000 Palwozoic fossils.......-....<. biel sees seer 20, 000 73, 000 |...--- 80, 482 84, 491 &4, 649 MESGZOICMONSIISS= 55 se ene os eee ae. |ricieciase ee lee ele 100, 000 |...... 69, 742 70, 775 70, 925 Cenozoic fossils: .-...-:---...-... (@neluded! with mollusks:)) j)=-<- 9.) ¢22seese-e| oss eee | pases MOssUliplanisessvssceseces es cesarean ae 4, 624 I17; 2910 |e sane 127, 429 8, 462 10, 000 AROS) 11h] 2) MINUS aR SaueooEne aos PHossempod| | pocor sats | aboscn.Fee | Meee REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 69 members of the extensive Algonkian stock in the regions west of the Great Lakes and those on the northeastern sea-board. The correlation of the pictographic practice in manner and extent was before inferen- tially asserted, but no satisfactory evidence of it had been presented until the researches of the present year brought into direct comparison the pictography of the Ojibwa with that of the Micmacs and Abnaki. Colonel Mallery returned to Washington in October. Mr. James Mooney spent the earlier months of the fiscal year in the examination of the northern division of Cherokees with reference to the dialeetie difference of vocabulary between them and the main body of the same tribe in the Indian Territory from which they have long been separated, and also, in studying for the same comparison their reli- gious practices, traditions, social customs, and arts. The northern Cherokees are found to have been less affected by civilization than those of the south, and they can therefore be studied with manifest advantage. Mr. Mooney procured a large amount of valuable material from them. OFFICE WORK. Director Powell was frequently occupied during the year in the ex- amination of undetermined problems pertaining to his work upon the classification of the Indian linguistic stocks, the scope of which has been explained in his former reports. It was found necessary to defer decis- ion respecting some of the stocks until after obtaining the result of additional field-work planned for the ensuing year. Colonel Mallery, after his return from the field-work, was engaged in study of important and novel points developed thereby, and in contin- ued research and correspondence on sign language and pictography. Dr. Hoffman, while assisting in the same work, prepared an atlas and topograhic chart showing all the petrogylphs within the limits of the United States and adjacent countries so far recorded in the archives of the Bureau, and all particulars of manipulation, coloration, position, and other characteristics of interest, with descriptions and references to authorities. : y Mr. H. W. Henshaw was chiefly employed in a solution of problems relating to the geographic distribution of the linguistic families of North American Indians in the territory north of Mexico. When not engaged in this work or with executive duties he continued the preparation of a dictionary in the nature of a synonomy of tribal names of the North American Indians, now well advanced toward completion, the general character and object of which have been set forth in a former report. While in general charge of that division of the office work he specially attended to the Sahaptinian, Salishan, Chemakuman, Chinookan, and several other linguistie stocks of the Pacific slope. ° During the first five months of the year Mr. A..S. Gatschet was en- gaged in digesting the results of his recent trip to Louisiana, Texas, and 70 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Mexico, and utilizing them in the compilation of the Indian tribal synonomy now in course of preparation by the Bureau. His designated share in that work comprised the families of the south- ern Indians from the Rio Grande to the Atlantic sea-board of Florida, namely, the stocks of the Natchez, Atakapa, Shetimasha, Tonkawe, Pakawa (otherwise known under the vague designation of “ Coahuilteco o Tejano”), Tonica, Yuchi, and Tim mueua, and the most important stock of them all, the Mask6ki family. His work of correlating the informa- tion of these tribes for the synonomy can now be considered as com- pleted, though some important tribes can not be classified linguistically, e. g., the Koroas and Pascagoulas, on account of the absence of all information in the documents of early chroniclers relating to these extinet tribes. The Adai, classed by Gallatin as a distinet family, is believed by Mr. Gatschet to be affiliated with the Caddoan stock as a dialect distantly related to Yatassi and Caddo proper. After concluding his labors on the tribal synonomy, Mr. Gatschet re- sumed his work on the grammar of the Klamath language of south- western Oregon. He combined all the results of his recent studies of both dialects, the northern and the southern, with the facts previously aequired by him and composed a treatise on the morphology of the lan- guage. This has now been rewritten three times by him in order to secure completeness and accuracys The *‘ phonetics” are already cast in plates as are the chapters on radicals and on prefixion. From July to December, 1887, Rev. J. Owen Dorsey was engaged in translating the Teton texts of Mr. George Bushotter, a Dakotan, who was working under his direction. Mr. Bushotter’s collection consists of myths, legends, historical papers, an autobiography, accounts of games, folk-lere and epistles, amounting to two hundred and fifty-eight textual manuscripts. This work was continued until the following December when Bushotter resigned, leaving one hundred and twenty- nine texts to be translated. Mr. Dorsey then continued the work alone until April 18, 1888, when another Dakotan, Mr. John Bruyier, of Chey- enne River Agency, began to revise and interpret the Teton texts, making many corrections in the originals, and supplying important parts omitted by Bushotter. Mr. Bruyier also furnished Mr. Dorsey with many examples of the Teton, as spoken at the Cheyenne River Reservation, which showed that it differed considerably from that spoken at the Lower Brulé and Pine Ridge Reservations. He also wrote new versions. of several myths, continuing his work until June 30, 1888. During the autumn of 1887, Mr. Dorsey completed his work on the Siouan, Caddoan, Athapascan, Takilman, Kusan, and Yakonan cards for the Indian synonomy referred to in a former report of the Director. ile also prepared nearly four hundred type-written foolscap pages of (ehiga epistles, legends, and other téxts, which constitute an important addition to those published in the Contributions to North American eae. aie \s ; ; REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. r@ | Ethnology, vol. v1, part 1. He also transliterated on slips in alpha- betic order his Winnebago material, obtained in 1875-79, collating it with the additional material obtained in 1886. This contains fully four thousand entries. He gave much attention to the Catawba language, collating parts of a recent vocabulary (that procured by Mr. Gatschet) with all others which were accessible. Mr. Jeremiah Curtin contributed to the Indian synonomy with reference to several tribes in Oregon and California, and devoted much study to the large number of myths obtained by him from the same tribes, also to those of the Iroquois. Mr. James C. Pilling has continued throughout the year to give a por- tion of his time to the preparation of bibliographies of the more impor- tant stocksof North American languages. As stated in the last report, the manuscript for the Siouan bibliography, the second of the series, was sent to the printer late in the fiscal year 1886-87. The proof was read during the summer months and the work received from the Public Printer November 12. Work was then begun on the Iroquoian stock of languages, and the close of the fiscal year found it ready for the priuter. Some preliminary work was also done on the Muskokian bibliography. Late in December Mr. Pilling made a visit to the library of the His- torical Society of Pennsylvania, at Philadelphia, for the purpose of inspecting and taking descriptions of several important manuscripts in Indian languages, written by Moravian missionaries, manuscripts then temporarily in that city and permanently preserved in the Moravian archives at Bethlehem, Pa., and Fairfield, Canada. Mr. James Mooney, when notin the field, continued to be charged with the synonomy relating to the [roqnoian and Algonkin linguistie stocks, and also worked upon the vocabularies, myths, and notes of informa- tion procured by him from the northern Cherokees. During the entire year, except at short intervals when he visited the field to make personal observations, Professor Thomas has been busily engaged upon his report. The manuscript for the first volume with the illustrations was presented for publication about a month before the close of the fiscal year. The manuscript, illustrations, and maps for the second volume are well under way and will soon be ready for publi- eation. Mr. Henry L. Reynolds, from December until the close of the fiseal year, was at Washington occupied in the preparation of maps, plates, and diagrams for the report. During the winter and until the 1st of May, 1888, Mr. Gerard Fowke was engaged in preparing a paper for areport on the articles of stone in the Bureau collections. Mr. W. H. Holmes has charge of the illustrations intended for the Bureau publications as in previous years, and has as far as possible con- tinued his studies in aboriginal art and archeology. The collections acquired during the summer, although not lacking a2 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY interest and value, are not so extensive as those of previous years. Acquisitions are wade in three distinct ways: first, through members of the Bureau and the Geological Survey who act as collectors ; second, by means of exchange for publications or duplicate specimens from previous collections; and third, by donation. Professor Thomas and his assistants, working in the Mississippi Valley and on the Atlantic slope, report but few accessions during the year. Mr. James Steven- son secured important collections from the Pueblo country, especially from the villages of Jemez and Silla, in the Jemez Valley, New Mexico. These collections include about five hundred specimens of pottery and nearly four hundred of stone, wood, and other substances. A large per- centage of these specimens are ancient. A considerable number of ancient relics of pottery and stone were obtained from ancient ruin sites in the Jemez and RioGrande Valleys, New Mexico, by the Director and Mr. Holmes. Mr. A. P. Davis collected a number of fragments of ancient pottery from the ruin of Pueblo Alto, New Mexico. A very interesting series of objects, illustrating the present condition of the arts among the Cherokee and Catawba Indians, was procured by Mr. James Mooney of the Bureau. Mr. DeLancey W. Gill, of the Geological Survey, has added to the collection many specimens of rude stone implements from the vicinity of Washington. Donations have been received from the following persons: Mr..C. C. Jones, fragments of ancient pottery from Stallings Island, near Augusta, Ga.; Dr. Taylor, fragments of ancient pottery from Baldwin County, Ala.; General G. P. Thruston, fragment of an enormous earthen vase from a suburb of Nashville, Tenn.; Mr. W. W. Adams, articles of stone from Union Springs, N. Y.; Mr. C. L. R. Wheeler, cast of a unique stone knife from Westchester County, N. Y.; and Mr. James Tilton, fragments of pottery from Plum Island, Massachusetts. By exchange for books and duplicates from the National Museum the following acquisitions have been made: | From Mr. H. P. Hamilton, fragments of ancient pottery from Two tivers, Wis., and from Mr. H. W. Hakes, fragments of pottery from Broome County, N. Y. By purchase or part purchase the Bureau has obtained from Mr. J. A. MeNiel one hundred and seventy pieces of ancient pottery from Chiriqui, Panama, besides some very interesting objects of stone. From Mr. Ward Bachelor it has acquired a fine collection of earthen and stone objects from Mexico. From Dr. E. Boban a few fine samples of Mexican pottery were obtained. All these have been catalogued and turned over to the National Museum. Mr. L. B. Case, of Richmond, Ind., has presented to the Bureau the records of the State Archxologic Association of Indiana, which fell into his hands as secretary at the discontinuance of the society several years ago. Valuable photographs of archxologie subjects have been received —— REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 73 from Prof. Anastasio Alfaro, secretary of the National Museum of Costa Rica; also from Mr. C, F. Low, of Cincinnati; from Mr. A. F. Sears, of Portland, Oregon; and Mr. D.S. Sears, of Cuba, Il. During the first two months of the fiscal year Mr. Victor Mindelett was engaged upon a report on the architecture of the Cibola and Tus- ayan groups of pueblos, in New Mexico and Arizona. Subsequent to his return from the field on March 18 that report was resumed, but it was not completed at the end of the fiscal year. The additional data secured from the Tusayan district during the field season is being pre- pared for incorporation into the same report. During the early part of the year Mr. Cosmos Mindeleft was occupied upon that portion of the report on pueblo architecture which had been assigned to him. On his return from the field on February 23 he re- sumed work upon that report, but it was suspended in order to take up the preparation of an exhibit to be made by the Bureau at the Cincin- nati Centennial Exposition. An exhibit to cover nearly 2,000 square feet of floor space was prepared, but as the space was limited only the field work of the Bureau in one especial region, viz, the Pueblo coun- try, was illustrated, though a small amount of other material was added for purposes of comparison. This work was not completed at the close of the fiscal year. The work of the modeling room was continued throughout the year in his charge. No new work was taken up, all available labor being used in preparing a series of duplicates of models previously deposited in the National Museum. This work was continued from last year. The series is not yet completed, but the accumulations on hand at the end of the fiscal year were sufficient to enable the Bureau to make a ecredit- able display at the Cincinnati Centennial Exposition without withdraw- ing, to any large extent, the models deposited in the National Museum. During the year eight models were added to the duplicate series, and three other models commenced. Dr. Washington Matthews, surgeon U.S. Army,continued work upon a grammar and dictionary of the Navajo language. Mr. EK. W. Nelson was still engaged in the completion of his paper mentioned in the last report upon the Eskimo of northern Alaska, com- prising a dictionary with notes upon the grammar of the language and also upon the myths and customs of the people. Mr. J. N. B. Hewitt has continued the study of the Iroquoian lan- guages and the preparation of a Tuscarora-English dictionary. He also worked upon the comparison of words, radicals, and terms in the Triquoian languages with those in the Cherokee, and in determining the prehistoric habitat of the Lroquois. The work of Mr. Charles C. Royce, before reported upon, presenting the former title of Indian tribes to lands within the present boundaries of the United States, and the methods of securing their relinquishment, was substantially prepared for publication, the charts having all been finished. 74 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. for several years past it has been part of the work of the Bureau to take advantage of the frequent presence in Washington of parties styled “delegations,” of the several Indian tribes visiting the capital, for the purpose of photographing all the individuals composing them. These are generally the prominent men of the tribes represented by them and their photographs have biographie and historic interest as well as an- thropologic importanee. Mr. J. K. Hillers has been in charge of this branch of the work, and during the past year has secured ninety-nine photographs of prominent Indians in both full face and profile, in order to exhibit to better advantage all their facial characteristics. The sub- jects were from the following tribes, viz: White Mountain Apache, 15 persons ; Chiracahua Apaches, 20; Jica- rilla Apaches, 8; Sac and Fox, 7; Utes, 4; Shawnee, 9; Omaha, 20; Dakota, 11; Oto and Missouri, 5. In connection with the name of each Indian photographed it has been the practice to note his age, status in the tribe, and such biographie in- formation as could be obtained. LIST OF PUBLICATIONS OF THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. ANNUAL REPORTS. . First Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, 1879-80. 1881. xxxv, + 603 pp. 8vo. Second Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, 1880-81, 1883. xxxvii, +477 pp. 8vo. Third Annual Report of the Burean of Ethnology, 188182. 1884. Ixxiv, + 606 pp. 8vo. Fourth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, 1882-83. 1886. Ixxili, 4+ 532 pp. 8vo. Fifth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, 188384. 1887. lili, 4-564 pp. 8vo. CONTRIBUTIONS. odes Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. 1. 1877. xiv, + 361 pp. 4to. Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. 1m. 1877. 3. 635 pp. 4to. Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. tv. 1881. xiv, +281 pp. 4to. Contributions to North American Ethnology, Vol. v. 1882. 112. 32. XXXVii, + 237 pp. Ato. INTRODUCTIONS. Powell, J. W. Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages. 1877. 104 pp. 4to. Powell, J. W. Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages. 2nded. 1880. xi, + 228 pp. 4to. Mallery, Garrick. Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages. 1880. iv, +72 pp. 4to. Yarrow, H. C. Introduction to the Study of Mortuary Customs. 1880. ix, +114 pp. Ato. Mallery, Garrick. Colleetion of Gesture Signs and Signals. 1880. 329 pp. 4to. Pilling, J.C. Proof-sheets of Bibliography of North American Indian Languages. = * 1885. xl,-+1135 pp. 4to. ——-a REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. U5 BULLETINS. Pilling, J. C. Bibliography of the Eskimo Language. 1887. v, + 116 pp. 8vo. Henshaw, H. W. Perforated Stones from California. 1887. 34 pp. 8vo. Holmes, W. H. The Use of Gold and other Metals among the Ancient Inhabitants of Chiriqui, Isthmus of Darien. 1887. 27 pp. 8vo. Thomas, C. Workin Mound Exploration of the Bureau of Ethnology. 1887. 15 pp. vo. Pilling, J. C. Bibliography of the Siouan Languages. 1887. v,-+ 87 pp. 8vo. NECROLOGY. MORRISON R. WAITE, CHANCELLOR. In the order of official precedence, I am ealled on to first mention the loss sustained by the Institution during the year, of its Chancellor, the late eminent Chief-Justice of the United States Supreme Court, Morri- son R. Waite, who died in this city on the 25d of March last (1888). His biography belongs to the whole country; but though I have only to speak of his relations to this Institution, yet one who knew him even in this limited part of his important duties can not but feel that his was a character of a singular sincerity, in the proper meaning of the word ; so that it has been well said of him that he possessed not only a moral but an intellectual integrity. Of the affection, as well as respect, he inspired, I have already spoken. Remarkable for this admirable sim- plicity of character as for his kindness of beart, in his unwavering con- scientiousness of purpose in the discharge of every duty, he made him- self, perhaps, the most influential and efficient Chancellor among the very able ones the Institution has been so fortunate as to possess. Taking pains to acquaint himself accurately with the character and requirements of the Institution, evincing an earnest sympathy in ifs objects and in its adopted policy, he was a faithful attendant on the meetings of the Board during the fourteen years of his presidency. It seems proper to here record, as a part of the official history of this bereavement, that a special meeting of the Board of Regents was called on the 27th of March, 1888, to take appropriate action on the occasion, and that the following resolutions, expressive of the general sentiment, were unanimously adopted and placed upon the journal of the soard: Whereas the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution has been called to meet in extraordinary session by the afflicting intelligence that Morrison Remick Waite, late Chief-Justice of the Supreme Court of the United States and late Chancellor of the Smithsonian Institution, has been removed by the hand of death from the scenes of his high ae- tivities and distinguished usefulness: Therefore be it Resolved, That sitting as we do at this time and place, in the very center of that dark shadow which has fallen upon the whole land in the jamented death of the late Chief. Justice Waite, and appalled as we are by the suddenness as well as by the magnitude of the great affliction 76 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. which in coming to the nation at large has come to us individually with an added pathos of sorrow, because of the nearer view we have had for so many years of the talents, virtues, and graces which found their fa- miliar home in the person of our honored friend, we could with much good reason crave for ourselves, in this hour of bere: avement, the humble permission of mourning apart, that we might silently gauge thedepth and the dimensions of a calamity which brings to us its message of personal grief and which has also torn away from our highest seat of justice its venerated and beloved chief; from the legal profession of the country its foremost official representativ e and therefore its crowning exponent; from the walks of social life in this National Capital a commanding presence, no less remarkable for his genial and open-hearted sincerity than for his affable and gracious benignity : ; and from the Christian communion a true and faithful disciple who witnessed a good confession as much by the simplicity and humility with which he walked before God as by the unswerving consistency with which he wore the ornament of a pure heart and of a meek and quiet spirit before the serutiny of bis fellow men. Resolved, That while an obvious sense of propriety must dictate that we should leave to others in that great forum which was the chosen arena of his life’s career, the sad privilege of depicting, with minute and detailed analysis, the remarkable combination of strong and lovely traits which met in the person of the late Chief-Justice and gave to the: symmetrical character of our beloved friend its blended sweetness and light, we ean not omit, even in this hour of our special sorrow, to bea cheerful testimony to the pleasing amenity with which he presided over the deliberations of this council chamber as the Chancellor of the Smith- sonian Institution, and sharing as we all do in a profound admiration for the intelligence he brought to our discussions, while ever moder- ating them by the guidance of his clear thought and mild wisdom, we can but render our reverent homage to the engaging personal qualities which endeared him to us as a man; while at the same time gratefully con- fessing our obligations to him for the provident care and deep interest which he always brought to the discharge of his official duties in this place, where through all the years of his honorable and useful service at the head of this Board, the Secretary of the Institution, in common with ourselves, has le: aned on him as the wise and true counsellor who could be trusted as well for the rectitude of his moral intuitions as for the clear perceptions of his calm and judicious intellect. Resolved, That we will attend tbe funeral of our departed Chancellor in a body,. and that the Secretary of the Institution, together with a deputation from the members of the Board, be requested ‘to accompany the other friends and associates of the late Chief. Justice, who will bear his remains to their last resting-place in Ohio. Resolved, That these resolutions be entered on the minutes of the Board, and that the Secretary be requested to send a copy of them to the family of our departed friend, in token of our sincere condolence with them in their great affliction. It only remains for your Secretary to add that, in accordance with your request, he proceeded to Toledo, where he was joined by one of your body, Dr. J. B. Angell, and in his company paid the final tribute of respect, by representing your honorable body at the obsequies of this eminent and good man. = = ——o- ‘ REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 17 PROFESSOR BAIRD. I have referred, at the beginning of this report, to the death of the late Secretary. Both the greatness of the loss to science and to this Insti- tution make me feel the need of speaking again and more particularly both of him and of his work. When, in January, 1887, the Secretary asked of your honorable body authority to appoint two assistant secretaries to relieve him from the growing burden of his official occupations, it was doubtless with the consciousness that his failing strength no longer permitted the contin- uous attention to his varied duties which he had previously, with ready zeal, bestowed. When, under the imperative orders of his physician, he withdrew himself (as much as his active mental interest permitted) from the executive operations of his position, the comparative relaxa- tion of effort and responsibility seemed to have been accepted too late to give him its expected relief and recuperation ; and his exhausted powers continued to decline until he quietly breathed his last, on the afternoon of the 19th of August, 1887, at the headquarters of the U.S. Commission of Fisheries, at Wood’s Holl. In recognition of his distinguished services, a bill was introduced in the Senate of the United States, and passed by that body February 10, 1888, making an appropriation for the erection of a bronze statue to commemorate his merits. A bill was also introduced in the Senate for the benefit of his widow. At aspecial meeting of the Board of Regents, held November 18, 1887, the following resolutions were passed : Whereas, in the dispensation of Divine Providence, the mortal life of Spencer Fullerton Baird was ended on the 19th of August last, the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, now at the earliest practicable moment assembled, desire to express and torecord their profound sense of the great loss which this Institution has thereby sustained, and which they personally have sustained. And they accordingly resolve : 1. That, in the lamented death of Professor Baird, the Institution is bereaved of its honored and efficient Secretary, who has faithfully and unremittingly devoted to its service his rare administrative abilities for thirty-seven years—that is, almost from the actual foundation of the establishment—for the last nine years as its chief executive officer, under whose sagacious management it has greatly prospered and widely ex- tended its usefulness and its renown. 2. That the National Museum, of which this Institution is the ad- ministrator, and the Fish Commission, which is practically affiliated to it, both organized and in ajust sense created by our late Secretary, are by this bereavement deprived of the invaluable and unpaid services of their indefatigable official head. 3. That the cultivators of science, both in this country and abroad, have to deplore the loss of a veteran and distinguished naturalist, who was from early years a sedulous and successful investigator ; whose native gifts and whose experience in systematic biological work served in no small degree to adapt him to the administrative duties which filled the later years of his life, but whose knowledge and whose inter- est in science widened and deepened as the opportunities for special 78 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. investigation lessened, aud who accordingly used his’ best endeavors to promote the researches of his fellow naturalists in every part of the world. 4, That his kindly disposition, equable temper, singleness of aim, and unsullied purity of motive, along e with his facile mastery of affairs, greatly endeared him to his subordinates, secured to him the confidence and trust of those whose influence he sought for the advancement of the interests he had at heart, and won the high regard and warm af- fection of those who, like the members of this Board, were officially and intimately associated with him. 5. That, without intrudiug into the domain of private sorrow, the Regents of the Institution would respectfully offer to the family of their late Secretary the assurance of their profound sympathy. 6. That the Regents invite the near associate of the late Secretary, Professor Goode, to prepare a memorial of the life and services of Pro- fessor Baird for publication in the ensuing annual report of the Insti- tution. The address made by Maj. J. W. Powell, an old and personal friend of the late Secretary, at the memorial meeting held by the scientific societies of Washington January 11, 1888, contained so just and elo- quent a tribute to Professor Baird’s memory, that I feel inclined to quote from it a few words which, it seems to me, will characterize the large purpose and attainment of his life, and its relation to others, bet- ter than any of ny own: “Baird was one of the learned men of the world. He knew the birds of the air; he knew the beasts of the forests and the prairies, and the reptiles that crawl through desert sands or slimy marshes; he knew the fishes that scale mountain torrents, that bask in quiet lakes, or that journey from zone to zone through the deep waters of the sea. The treasures of the land did not satisfy the desires of Baird; he must also have the treasures of the sea, and so he organized a fish commission, with its great laboratories and vessels of research. ‘The Fish Commission was an agency of research; but it was more ; he made it an agency by. which science is applied to the relief of the wants of mankind—by which a cheap, nutritious, healthful, and luxuri- ous food is to be given to the millions of men ‘In the research thus organized the materials for the work of other scientific men were gathered. He incited the men personally to under- take and continuously prosecute their investigations. He enlisted the men himself; he trained them himself; he himself furnished them with the materials and instruments of research, and, best of all, was their guide and great exemplar. Thus it was that the three institutions over which he presided—the Smithsonian Institution, the National Museum, and the Fish Commission—were woven into one great organi- zation, a university of instruction in the methods of scientific research, including in its scope the entire field of biology and anthropology. “In his work with his assistants, he scrupulously provided that every one should receive the meed of honor due for successful research, and . treated all with generosity. Many an investigation begun by himself, was turned over to assistants when he found that valuable conclusions could be reached; and these assistants, who were his warm friends, bis. younger brothers, reaped the reward; and he had more joy over every young man’s success than over the triamphs and honors heaped upon himself from every quarter of the globe. He was the sympathetic coun- a ee REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. T9 selor of many men; into his ears were poured the sorrows and joys of others, and he mourned with the mourning, and rejoiced with the re- joicing. His life at home was pure and sweet and full of joys, for he gave and received love and trust and tender care. But the history of his home life is sacred. ‘“ For many long months he contemplated the day of parting. Labor that knew no rest, responsibility that was never lifted from his shoulders, too soon brought his life to an end. In the summer of the past year he returned to his work by the sea-side, that he might die in its midst. There at Wood’s Holl he had created the greatest biologic laboratory of the world; and in that laboratory, with the best results of his life-work all about him, he calmly and philosophically waited for the time of times.” The memorial which is being prepared, in obedience to the desire of the Regents, by the Assistant Secretary of the Institution, is partly writ- ten, but the pressure of official work has prevented its completion in time for publication in the present report. It seems essential, however, that this report should not be pub- lished without at tose a brief biographical sketch of my predecessor from one of his scientific family, and the following notice, which antici- pates the coming fuller memorial by Dr. Goode, has accordingly been prepared by him at my request. “ Spencer Fullerton Baird was born February 3, 1823, in Reading, a town in southeastern Pennsylvania about 60 miles from Philadelphia, where his ancestors, people of education and prominent in the commu- nity, had lived for several generations. About 1834 his mother, then a widow, removed to Carlisle. Carlisle was the seat of Dickinson Col- lege, where he was graduated in 1840, at the age of seventeen. His tastes for scientific investigation had already developed in such a re- markable manner that his mother felt that she was justified in allowing him, after graduation, to devote himself for a time to his favorite pur- suits, and his time for several years was devoted to studies in general natural history, to long pedestrian excursions for the purpose of observ- ing animals and plants, and collecting specimens, and to the organiza- tion of a private cabinet of natural history, which a few years later be- came the nucleus of the museum of the Smithsonian Institution. During this period he published a number of original papers on natural his- tory. There were at that time no schools for young naturalists, and his education was in large degree self-directed ; during this time, how- ever, he partially completed a course in medicine at the College of Physicans and Surgeons in New York,* and drew inspiration and in- struction from such men as Audubon and others of the older natural- ists whom at this period he visited, forming the foundation of lifelong friendships. His home studies continued for six years, and were Sci wcely interrupted by his election in 1841 to the chair of natural his- * He read medicine with Dr, Middleton Goldsmith, ‘and attended a winter course of jectures at the College of Physicians and Surgeons in New York, in 1842. His medical course was never formally completed, although in 1848 he received the degree of M. D., honoris causa, from the Philadelphia Medical College. 80 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. tory and chemistry in his own college, where he remained until 1850, having married, meantime, Miss Mary H. Churchill, the daughter of General Sylvester Churchill, U. S. Army, for many years Inspector- General. ‘‘'The inheritance of a love of nature and a taste for scientific classi- fication, together with the companionship of a brother similarly gifted, tended to the development of the young naturalist. In 1841, at the age of eighteen, we find him making an ornithological excursion through the mountains of Pennsylvania, walking 400 miles in twenty-one days, the last day 60 miles between daylight and rest. The following year he walked more than 2,200 miles. His fine physique and consequent capacity for work are doubtless due in part to his outdoor life during these years. “The coming of Agassiz to the United States in 1846, was an inspira- tion to him, and one of the first great works projected by the Swiss sa- vant was a joint memoir upon the fishes of North America, which was enthusiastically begun by the young Dickinson professor, but never brought to the point of publication. “Agassiz did not become established in Cambridge until 1848, and it is to Baird rather than to him that should belong the credit of having introduced into American schools the system of laboratory practice and field explorations in connection with natural history instruction. Mon- cure D, Conway, who was one of his pupils, has often told me how fas- cinating were Professor Baird’s explanations of natural phenomena, and how the contagion of his enthusiasm spread among his pupils, who fre- quently followed him through the fields and woods 20 or 30 miles a day. ‘‘ His mentor at this period was the Hon. George P. Marsh, of Vermont, already prominent in public affairs, and his warm friend and admirer.* To him Professor Baird felt that he owed his real start in life, for Mr. Marsh, feeling that his protégé was disposed to bury himself too deeply in the technicalities of a specialty, proposed that he should undertake the translation and editorship of an edition of the ‘ Iconographice Eney- clopedia,’ a version of Heck’s Bilder-Atlas, published in connection with the famous Conversations-Lexikon of Brockhaus. This task, though ex- ceedingly laborious and confining to a young man of twenty-six, en- tirely untrained in literary methods, was efficiently and rapidly per- formed, and resulted in a great extension of his tastes and sympathies, while the training wltich he acquired was an excellent preparation for the tremendous Jiterary tasks which he undertook without hesitation in later years. It was also to the interest of Mr. Marsh, who was one of the earliest Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, that he owed his nomination to the position of Assistant Secretary of that Institution, then recently organized, which he accepted July 5, 1850, and October 3, at the age of twenty-seven years, entered upon his life-work in con- “In Mrs, Caroline Marsh’s lately published biography of her husband many inter- esting letters from Mr. Marsh to Professor Baird are quoted. I REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 81 nection with that foundation, ‘ the increase and diffusion of knowledge among men.” His appointment, if we may judge from a statement in Professor Henry’s fifth report, was due quite as much to his training in editorial methods as to his professional acquirements. His appoint- ment, it is stated, was made at this time more particularly in order that his services might be secured to take charge of the publications, and that the Institution might take advantage of theample experience which he had gained in this kind of work. “It was, of course, impossible that the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution could have appreciated the fact that he had invented, in connection with his work upon his own private collections, a system of museum administration which was to be of the utmost value in the de- velopment of the great National Museum which he afterward was instru- mental in founding. All the elaborate and efficient methods of admin- istration which are now in use in the National Museum were present, in germ at least, in the little private museum which grew up under his control at home, and which he brought with him in a single freight car to form the nucleus of the great Smithsonian collections.* Among the treasures of this collection, which are still cherished by the Institu- tion, were a number of the choicest bird skins collected by Audubon, who had always felt for him a sincere friendship from the time when he proposed to the boy of seventeen that he should accompany him on a voyage to the headwaters of the Missouri, and become his partner in the preparation of a great work on the quadrupeds of North America, which afterward he brought out in conjunction with Bachman, of South Carolina. “The first grant made by the Institution for scientific exploration *The only specimens in possession of the Institution at the time of his arrival were a few boxes of minerals and plants. The collections of the Wilkes Exploring Expedi- tion, which constitute the legal foundation of the National Museum of the United States, were at that time under the charge of the National Institute; and although by the act of incorporation the Smithsonian Institution was the legal custodian of the national cabinet of curiosities, it was not until 1857 that the Regents finally ac- cepted the trust, and the National Museum was definitely placed under the control of the Sinithsonian Institution and transferred to its building. Until this time Con- gress had granted no funds for the support of the Smithsonian cabinets, and the collec- tions had been acquired and cared for at the expense of the endowment fund. They had, however, become so large and important in 1857 that the so-called ‘National Collection” at that time acquired was small in comparison. The National Musenm thus had a double origin. Its actual although not its legal nucleus was the collection gathered in the Smithsonian building prior to 1857. Its methods of administration, which were in fact the very same that had been developed by Professor Baird in Carlisle as early as 1845, are those which are still in use, and which have stood the test of thirty years without any necessity for their modification becoming apparent. In the Fifth Annual Report of the Smithsonian Institution, now exceedingly rare, is a report by the assistant secretary in charge of the natural his- tory department, for the year 1850, which enumerates the specimens belonging to the Museum on January 1, 1951, including a full account of his own deposit. H. Mis, 1426 82 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY, and field research was in 1848 to Spencer F. Baird, of Carlisle, for the exploration of the bone caves and the local natural history of south- eastern Pennsylvania. ‘Irom the start the department of explorations was under his charge, and in his reports to the Secretary, published year by year in the annual report of the Institution, may be found the only systematic record of Government explorations which has ever been prepared. “The decade beginning with 1850 was a period of great activity in exploration. Our frontier was being rapidly extended toward the West, but in the territory between the Mississippi and the Pacific coast were immense stretches of country practically unknown. Numerous Government expeditions were sent forth, and immense collections in every department of natural history were gathered and sent to Wash- ington to be studied and reported upon. The Smithsonian Institution had been designated by law the custodian of these collections, and within the walls of its buildings assembled the naturalists by whose exertions these collections had been brought together. Professor Baird ras surrounded by conditions most congenial and stimulating, for he found full scope for his administrative skill in the work of arranging the scientific outfits for these expeditions, preparing instructions for the explorers, and above all in inspiring them with enthusiasm for the work. ‘To him also fell in large part the task of receiving the collec- tions, arranging for the necessary investigations, and the collation and publication of their results. The natural history portions of the re- ports of the Mexican boundary survey, the Pacific Railroad surveys, the expeditions of Ives, Emory, Stansbury, and others, were under his su- pervision, as well as, in considerable degree, the natural history collec- tions of the Wilkes exploring expedition, which were still under inves- tigation. “The period of the civil war was one of comparative quiet, but much was accomplished by Baird and his pupils, and two of his most impor- tant memoirs, viz, Review of North American Birds and The Distribu- tion and Migrations of North American Birds, were published. During this decade, too, continued the summer expeditions usually extending over three months, which were becoming yearly more and more exclu- sively devoted to the investigation of marine life, and which ultimately led to the organization of the Fish Commission in 1871. During the latter part of this decade the early impressions of his work in connec- tion with the Iconographic Encyclopedia began to revive, and a new interest was shown by Professor Baird in the popularization of scien- tific subjects. At the solicitation of Mr. George W. Childs, in 1867 he began to devote a column to scientific intelligence in the Philadelphia Public Ledger, and about 1870 he became the scientific editor of the periodicals published by the Harper Brothers, of New York. His con- nection with this firm continued until 1878, and in addition to the weekly and monthly issues there resulted cight annual volumes of the Annual — — se Te 9 oo. es ee REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 83 tecord of Science and Industry, the successor of the Annual of Scien- tific Discovery, established by David A. Wells, in 1850. When Pro- fessor Baird became Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution his edito- rial labors were abandoned, but the idea of his Annual Record of Science and Industry was continued in the yearly appendices to the Smithsonian report under the title of Record of Progress, and the scientific work of the world for as many consecutive years is passed in review in the thirty- eight volumes which combine the three series just referred to. “In the memoir which the writer is preparing it is his intention to discuss in detail the great labors of Professor Baird in scientific admin- istration and investigation, but his life was so full that it is only by careful condensation that even an outline of its eventful features can be brought within the brief limits of this notice. “There may be noted in the career of Professor Baird several dis- tinct phases of activity, namely: (1) A period of twenty-six years (1843-1869) occupation in laborious investigation and voluminous pub- lication upon the vertebrate fauna of North America; (2) forty years (1840-1880) of continuous contribution to scientifie editorship; (3) five years (1845-1850) devoted to educational work; (4) forty-four years (1845-1887) devoted to the encouragement and promotion of scientific¢ enterprises and the development of new workers among the young men with whom he,was brought in contact; (5) thirty-seven years (1850- 1887) devoted to administrative work as an officer of the Smithsonian Institution and in charge of the scientific collections of the Government, twenty-eight (1850-1878) as principal executive officer, and nine (1878- 1887) as Secretary and responsible head; (6) sixteen years (1871-1887) as head of the Fish Commission, a philanthropic labor for the increase of the food supply of the world, and, incidentally, in promoting the interests of biological and physical investigation of the waters. “The extent of his contributions to science and scientific literature may be at least partially comprehended by an examination of the bib- liography of his publications issued by the Institution in 1883.* The list of his writings is complete to the end of the year 1882, and contains 1,063 titles. Of this number, 775 are brief notices and critical reviews contributed to the Annual Record of Science and Industry, while under his editorial charge; 31 are reports relating to the work.of the Smith- sonian Institution; 7 are reports upon the American fisheries ; 25 are schedules and circulars officially issued, and 25 are volumes or papers edited. Outof the remaining 200 the majority are formal contributions to scientific literatnre, among them the two classical works upon the Mammals of North America and the Birds of North America (Volumes vill and 1x of the Pacific Railroad Reports). These were the only ex- tended systematic treatises upon those groups which bad at that time ' been prepared, of scope suflicient to embrace the fauna of the entire continent. They are still standard works of reference, and every spec- * Bulletin xx, U.S. National Museum, 84 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. ialist who uses them bears testimony to their extreme accuracy and merit. “Of the total number of papers enumerated in the list, 73 relate to mammals, 80 to birds, 43 to reptiles, 431 to fishes, 61 to invertebrates (these being chiefly reviews), 16 to plants, 88 to geographical Magia tion, 46 to geology, mineralogy, aud paleontology; 45 to anthropology 31 to industry and art, and 109 to exploration and travel. ‘While the number of new species described does not necessarily attord any clew to the value of the work accomplished, it may not be uninteresting to refer to if as an indication of the pioneer work which it Was necessary to do even in so prominent a group as the vertebrates. TI note among mammals 49, birds 70, reptiles 186, fishes 56. Forty-nine of 220, or nearly one-four th, of the mammals discussed in the Mammals of North America were Gio described for the first time. In the cata- logue of serpents not more than 60 per cent. had been named, and in preparation for studying the specimens each was carefully ticketed with its locality, and then the 2,000 or more individuals were thrown indis- criminately into one great pile, and the work of sorting them out by resemblances was begun. Not the least valuable have been the numer- ous accurate figures of North American vertebrates, prepared under Professor Baird’s supervision. These include representatives of 170 species of mammals and 160 species of reptiles, besides many hundreds of birds. “On the 9th of February, 1874, Congress passed a joint resolution which authorized the appointment of a Commissioner of Fish aud Fish- eries. The duties of the Commissioner were thus defined: ‘To prose- cute investigations on the subject (of the diminution of valuable fishes) with the view of ascertaining whether any and what diminution in the number of the food-fishes of the coast and the lakes of the United States has taken place, and, if so, to what causes the same is due; and also whether any and what protective, prohibitory, or precautionary measures should be adopted in the premises, and to report upon the same to Congress.’ “The resolution establishing the office of Commissioner of Fisheries required that the person to be appoivted should be a civil officer of the Government, ef proved scientific and practical acquaintance with the fishes of the coast, to serve without additional salary. The choice was thus practically limited to a single man. Professor Baird, at that time Assistant Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, was appointed, and, at ence entering upon his duties, soon developed a systematic scheme of investigation. “The Fish Commission now fills a place tenfold more extensive and useful than at first. Its work is naturally divided into three sections : “(1) The systematic investigation of the waters of the United States and the biological and physical problems which they present. The scientific studies of the Commission are based upon a liberal and phil- —— ee See Oe eee Or REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 85 osophieal interpretation of the law. In making his original plans the Commissioner insisted that to study only food-fishes would be of little importance, and that useful cone lusions must needs rest upon a broad foundation of investigations purely scientific in character. The life his- tory of species of economic value should be understood from beginning to end, but no less requisite is it to know the histories of the animals and plants upon which they feed or upon which their food is nourished ; the histories | of their enemies and friends, and the friends and foes of their enemies and friends, as well as the currents, temperatures, and other physics Ai phenomena of the waters in relation to migration, repro- duction, and growth. A necessary accomplishment to this division is the amassing ‘of material for research to be stored in the National and other museums for future use. (2) The investigation of the methods of fisheries, past and present, and the statistics of production and commerce of fishery products. Man being one of the chief destroyers of fish, his influence upon their abun- dance must be studied. Fishery methods and apparatus must be ex. amined and compared with those of other lands, that the use of those which threaten the destruction of useful fishes may be discouraged, and that those which are inefficient may be replaced by others more serviceable. Statistics of industry and trade must be secured for the use of Congress in making treaties or imposing tariffs, to show to pro- ducers the best markets, and to consumers where and with what their needs may be supplied. (3) Theintroduction and multiplication of useful food fishes through- out the country, especially in waters under the jurisdiction of the Gen- eral Government, or those common to several States, none of which might feel willing to make expenditures for the benefit of the others. This work, which was not contemplated when the Commission was es- tablished, was first undertaken atthe instance of the American Fish Cultural Association, whose representatives induced Congress to make a special appropriation for the purpose. “His relation to the organizations with which he was so closely iden- tified, the Smithsonian Institution, its ward, the National Museum, and the Fish Commission, can in this place only be incidentally mentioned, and the numerous biographical notices which have appeared since his death have not failed to review critically the significance of his connee- tion with them and his influence upon them. To his friends who knew him best and miss him most it seems pleasanter to dwell upon the rec- ognition which his labors received than upon the labors themselves, his devotion to which shortened his life so many years ** Almost every civilized country in the world nae paid him nonor. In 1875 he received the decoration of Knight of the Royal Norwegian order of St. Olaf from the King of Norway and Sweden. In 1878 he was awarded the silver medal of the Acclimatization Society of Mel- bourne, and in 1879 the gold medal of the Société d@Acclimation of France. In 1856 he received the degree of doctor of physical science from Dickinson College, and in 1875 that of doctor of laws from Co- lumbian University. A few months before his death, on the occasion of the two hundred and fiftieth anniversary of Harvard University, the same degree, ad eundem, Was conferred on him as an eminent promoter of 86 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. science. This was one of the few occasions upon which he was induced to ascend the platform ina public place. He was one of the early mem- bers of the National Academy of Sciences, and ever since the organiza- tion was a member of its council. In 1850 and 1851 he served as per- manent secretary of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, and since 1878 was one of the trustees of the Corcoran Gallery of Art, Washington. He was a president of the Cosmos Club, and for many years a trustee of Columbian University. Among his honorary relations to numerous scientific societies of the United States and other countries are included those of foreign membership in the Lin- niean Society of London and the Zoological Society of London, hon- orary membership in the Linnean Society of New South Wales, and cor- responding membership in the K. K. Zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaft, Vienna; the Sociedad de Geographia, Lisbon; the New Zealand Insti. tute; the Koninklijke Natuurkundige Vereeniging in Nederlandsch Indié, Batavia; the Magyar Tudomanyos Akademia, Buda-Pesth; the Société Nationale des Sciences Naturelles, Cherbourg; the Academia Germanica Natur Curiosorum, Jena; the Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Halle; the Naturhistorische Gesellschaft, Nuremberg; the Geograph- ical Society, of Quebec; the Historical Society of New York; the Deutsche Fischerei- Verein, Berlin. “The nomenclature of zoology contains many Memorials of his con- nection with its history. A partial enumeration shows that over twenty- five species and one genus of fishes bears his name, and that not less than forty species have been named in his honor. These will for all time be monuments to his memory as undying as the institutions whieh he founded. “« A post-office in Shasta County, Cal., located near the McCloud River Salmon Hatching Station of the U. S. Fish Commission, was named Baird by the Postmaster-General in 1877. “Even Japan was not unmindful of Professor Baird’s services to science, for from distant Yezo, the most northern island of the Japanese Archipelago, came, soon after his death, a little volume beautifully printed upon silk, containing his portrait and the story of his char- acter. ‘‘The importance of his services to fish-cullure was perhaps more fully recognized in Germany than in any other country, not excluding the United States. In 1880, on the occasion of the first great Inter- national Fishery Exhibition held in Berlin, his name was found to be widely known among the scientific men there present. “The magnificent silver trophy which was the chief prize was awarded to him by the Emperor William. This now stands in the fishery hall of the National Museum. While Professor Baird’s portrait hung over the entrance to the American section at Berlin, the Kammerherr von Behr, the presi- vent of the German Fishery Union, the most powerful and influential fishery organization in the world, never passed under it without taking Fey = REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. it off his hat in honor of the ‘ first fish-culturist of the world, as he de- lighted to call him. He also insisted that any who might be in his company should pay the same respect to Professor Baird. Indeed, I am not sure that the late Emperor Frederick, at that time Crown Prince and protector of the German fisheries, did not do homage in this way tothe American philanthropist. After Professor Baird’s death a cir- cular was issued by the German Fishery Union which contained a most appreciative eulogy. ‘¢ His ever ready assistance to his fellow-workers in Europe won for him their deep regard. Mr. R. Bowdler Sharpe, of the British Museum, writes as follows to Nature: ‘As chief of the Smithsonian Institution Professor Baird possessed a power of conferring benefits to the world of science exercised by few directors of public museums, and the man- ner in which he has utilized these powers has resulted not only in the wonderful success of the United States National Museum under his direction, but in the enrichment of many other museums. We know by experience that the British Museum is indebted to Professor Baird beyond measure. We had only to express our wants, and immediately every effort was made to supply all the desiderata in our ornithological collection.’ *¢ Professor Baird was the most modest of men. He seemed never to care for public recognition. In speaking of any honors which he had received he appeared to deprecate what had been done, as if ashamed of the attentions, feeling himself unworthy to receive them. “Fle once remarked to me, some years before his death, that he was satisfied that no man’s life was of such importance to the people among whom he lived that he could not shortly be replaced by another who would fully fill his place. As I looked af the man before me, a giant in body and in mind, a treasury of untransferable experience and wisdom, I thought to myself that if this judgment was a true one (which [ did not believe, nor, at his heart, I suppose, did he), in him at least there was an exception. I speak not now of his official usefulness alone, but of the broader and more essential relationships which he held to science and to humanity. *¢ Such a man has a thousand sides, each most familiar to a few, and perhaps entirely strange to the greater part of those who know him. ‘* Future historians of American science will be better able than are we to estimate justly the value of the contributions to scientific litera- ture which are enumerated in his bibliography; but no one not living in the present can form an accurate idea of the personal influence of a leader upon his associates and upon the progress of thought in his special department, nor can such an influence as this well be set down in words. This influence is apparently due not only to extraordinary skill in organization, to great power of application and concentration of thought constantly applied, and to a philosophical and comprehen- 88 - REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. sive mind, but to an entire and self-sacrificing devotion to the interests of his work and that of others. ‘“His extreme diffidence aud lack of self-seeking were among his con- spicuous characteristics. He was always averse to addressing audi- ences, and this is all the more remarkable to his friends, who remem- ber how winning and persuasive his ecloguence was when he talked in the presence of a few. His ability as a talker and organizer was never better seen than when, as already observed, in the presence of Con- gressional committees, before whom he was summoued from year to year to give reasons for his requests for money to be used in expanding the work of the Fish Commission or the National Museum. He was always received by the members with the heartiest weleome; and it seemed that always these pushing, brusque men of business, who ordi- narily rushed with the greatest haste through the routine of committee work, forgot their usual hurry when Professor Baird was before them. They listened attentively as long as he could be induced to talk about his plans for the development of the organizations whose success he had at heart. Not unfrequently they would wander from the business before them as they asked bim questions upon subjects which his sug- gestive remarks impressed upon their attention. ‘“No man was more easily approached than Professor Baird. He seemed especially fond of meeting young persons, whom he immedi- ately set at their ease by his geniality and frankness of manner. A writer in the Nation has said: ‘* It seemed as if in his mind he had an epitome of all the characteristics of mind and habit of each and every man. No thought of self seemed to enter into his calculations. Those who felt themselves the object of his personal regard sometimes halted for a moment in a comical dismay, perceiving themselves frankly moved, like chessmen, in directions which they would not themselves have se- lected, but an overwhelming sense of Baird’s entire devotion to the promotion of science, his perfect unselfishness, and his incomparable good judgment, always carried the day.’ “From his early youth until his failing strength forbade, he kept a journal of his daily pursuits, and this, together with the immense piles of copy-books and files of letters received, will afford a boundless treas- ure to his biographer; and when his biography is written, if if be prop- erly done in accordance with the modern theory of biography-making, it will form essentially a history of the natural sciences in America for the past half century. ‘For many months before his death he knew that his life was drawing to a close. In the summer of 1887, a few weeks before he died, he went to Wood’s Holl, as usual, to direct the operations of the Fish Commission. Of all the tributes to his character none were more eloquent or touching than one at the funeral service at Wood’s Holl. The simple burial service was read, and then the clergyman recited these sentences from the Sermon on the Mount: ‘Blessed are the merciful, for they shall obtain _ ee Ta ee eS ee re REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 89 mercy. Blessed are the pure in heart, for they shall see God. Blessed are the peace-makers, for they shall be called the children of God.’ So appropriate were these words that scarcely one of those present could refrain from tears, realizing how great, how benevolent, how simple- hearted had been the friend whom they had lost.” A memorial meeting was held January 11, 1888, in the lecture-room of the Columbian University of Washington, under the joint auspices of the Philosophical, Anthropological, and Biological Societies of this city, at which addresses were made by members of the several societies commemorating the life and scientific work of Professor Baird. An oil portrait of Professor Baird, of life-size, painted by Mr. Henry Ulke, of this city, was purchased by the Regents for the Institution. PROFESSOR ASA GRAY, REGENT. In addition to the loss of our honored Chancellor and Seeretary, the Institution has further been called upon to mourn the decease of one of the oldest and most distinguished members of the Board of Regents, Dr. Asa Gray, whose death took place on the 30th day of January last (1888), and brought the mournful loss not only of a great man of sci- ence, intimately and long connected with the Institution, but of one personally endeared to all who knew him. Professor Gray may be said to have been identified with the Institu- tion from its very beginning as a chosen and trusted counselor of its first Secretary, and an active member of the Board from January, 1874. Born in the town of Paris, Oneida County, N. Y., on the 18th of No- vember, 1810, Professor Gray was at the time of his death, therefore, over seventy-seven years of age, though few would have so supposed, judging from his continued activity and vigor. He was graduated at the Fairfield College of Physicians and Surgeons, Herkimer County, N. Y., in 1831, as doctor of medicine. Relinquishing, however, his pro- fession, he devoted himself to the study of botany under Professor Torrey ; and he prosecuted for years this branch ef natural history with such zeal and energy as ultimately to even surpass the fame of his distingushed preceptor, and to become the acknowledged chief of American naturalists in his chosen field. In 1842 he was elected the Fisher professor of natural history at Harvard College, a position he retained for more than thirty years. Irom this college he received, in 1844, the degree of A. M., and from Hamilton College, in 1860, the degree of LL. D. He published various botanical manuals and systematic treatises, several of which became universally-accepted popular text-books. He was one of the original members of the National Academy of Sciences, incorporated by act of Congress Mareh 3, 1863. From 1863 to 1873 he was president of the 90 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. American Academy of Arts and Sciences, and was president of the American Association for the Advancement of Science for the year 1872. More than forty years ago, in the very infancy of this Institution, Dr. Gray, at the instance of its Secretary, undertook to prepare for publica- tion, under its auspices, a comprehensive illustrated work on American Forest Trees. In the Secretary’s third report (for 1849) it is recorded, with reference to contemplated ‘Reports on the Progress of Knowledge,” that ‘the most important report now in progress is that on the Forest Trees of North America, by Dr. Gray, professor of botany in Harvard University. It is intended in this work to give figures from original drawings of the flowers, leaves, fruit, etc., of each principal species in the United States proper, for the most part of the size of nature, and so executed as to furnish colored or uncolored copies; the first being intended to give an adequate idea of the species, and the second for greater cheapness and more general diffusion. This work will be com- pleted in three parts, in octavo, with an atlas of quarto plates, the first to be published next spring. - - - As the work will be adapted to general comprehension, it will be of interest to the popular as well as the scientific reader.” This very interesting and important enterprise, delayed by Dr. Gray’s visit to Europe the following year, and afterward from time to time postponed by various hindrances, was never completed. Simultaneously with his engagement upon this great work, other interests and investi- gations were pressing upon his attention. A botanical expedition— assisted by the Institution—made by Mr. Oharles Wright, through Texas and New Mexico in the summer and autumn of 1849, was re- warded by an extensive and valuable collection of the plants of these regions, which were placed in the hands of Dr. Gray; and in 1851 it was announced that his report on this new material was ready for pub- lication. This memoir was issued in two parts, quarto size. Part 1, comprising 146 pages of text, illustrated by ten engraved plates, was included in Vol. 11 of the Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, and Part If, comprising 119 pages, illustrated by 4 plates, was included in Vol. v of Contributions to Knowledge. In the winter of 185455 Dr. Gray delivered, in the lecture-room of this Institution, a course of nine lectures “ On Vegetation.” In 1884, Dr. Gray presented to Harvard College his herbarium, con- taining more than 200,000 specimens, and his botanical library of more than 2,500 works; for the reception of which a fire-proof building was provided. In 1873, he resigned his professorship in the college, retain- ing, however, the charge of its herbarium. In 1874, he was selected by joint resolution of Congress a Regent of this Institution, taking the place made vacant by the death of Professor Agassiz, who had been a regent for the preceding ten years. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Al DR... PETER PARKER, EX-REGENT. While recounting the inroads made by death on the earlier por- tion of the membership of the Institution and its Board of Regents, it seems proper to notice also the demise of Dr. Peter Parker, who had been a Regent from 1868 to 1884, when he was induced to resign his position on the Board in consequence of infirmity and failing health, His death occurred at his residence in this city on the 10th day of Jan- uary last (1888). The stated annual meeting of the Board occurring on the following day (January 11, 1888), expression was given to the regret occasioned thereby, in the following preamble and resolution : Whereas the Board has received the afflictive intelligence that the venerable Dr. Peter Parker, who for sixteen years was a member of the Board of Regents, and who for this whole period served with fidelity on its executive committee, has departed this life after a long career filled with useful labors in the service of God and of man: Therefore, Be it resolved, That in the retrospect of such a life-eareer, protracted . ? - . ? as it was beyond the limit usually allotted to men, and yet at each stage of its progress dedicated to beneficent works in the cause of religion, philanthropy, and science, we desire to testify our respect for the exalted worth and scrupulous conscientiousness which Dr. Parker brought to the discharge of every duty, and which during bis connection with the government of this Institution were nobly exemplified by the zeal and diligence with which he ever watched and worked for its prosperity and usefulness, ever during the later period of his honorable service, when the burden of years was added to the burden of official cares, and when with a less conscientious sense of public duty he might have claimed an exemption from the tasks of life. DR. CHARLES RAU, CURATOR OF ANTIQUITIES. Dr. Charles Rau, for many years in charge of the department of an- tiquities in the National Museum, was born in Belgium in 1826. He lived for a time in Germany and as a political exile came to America thirty years ago, landing at New Orleans December 23, 1848; lived for a time in Saint Louis; engaged in teaching at Belleville, Ul., and later went to New York City, still occupied as a teacher of languages. He had always been a deeply interested student of aboriginal remains, and had written many articles on the prehistoric condition of man. In 1875 he had charge of an exhibition of North American archeology for the display of the Institution in the Centennial Exhibition at Philadelphia. He was in 1881 appointed curator of the department of antiquities in the National Museum. His health gave way in 1886, and in July, 1887, he went to the hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, where he died on the 25th of July. His body was brought to Washington and was buried in Oak Hill Cemetery, where a modest grave-stone bearing a Suitable inseription has been erected to his memory. 9? REPORT OF THE SECRETARY, Ile bequeathed to the National Museum his library, consisting of 715 bound volumes, and 1,722 volumes unbound ; his archieologiea: collec- tion comprising 1,920 specimens (ethnologic) and his collection of minerals and fossils. These objects have been transferred to the Museum by his adminis- trator, Mr. Thomas Wilson. The books comprising the library are being arranged and catalogued, and will form the nucleus of a departmental library. The archeological specimens will be kept together and dis- played under the name of their donor. Almost the entire life of Dr. Rau was spent in arehzologic studies. He was faithful, zealous, and devoted to science. He had the courage of his convictions and was ready to defend them before any person or tribunal, however august. He did what he could for the alleviation of human suffering and regret- ted he could not do more. The fruits of his scientific labors will be de- seribed in the Bibliographical Appendix to the Report of the National Museum in Part II of this Report. In addition to the above, mention should be made of the deaths of the following employés of the Institution : On June 8, 1888, Charles Wickliffe Beckham, formerly an assistant in the Department of Birds, died at his home near Bardstown, Ky. He had made several valuable contributions to American ornithological literature. Mrs. L. S. Weaver, clerk and translator, died November 26, 1887. She had been employed in the Institution since 1876, having been ap- pointed upon the death of her first husband, L. Stoerzer, at that time chief taxidermist; and she rendered always willing and efficient service. Japt. C. W. C. Dunnington, a respected citizen of Washington, for several years a watchman in the Museum, Frederick R. Parker, a clerk in the Institution, and Isaac Diggs, for twenty years a laborer and at- tendant, have also died during the year. The following notice of Dr. Emil Bessels has been supplied by Dr. Dall: Dr. Emil Bessels was born in Heidelberg, June 2, 1847. Edueated at the University, and securing the degree of doctor in medicine, he was more disposed toward science and belles-lettres than to the practice of his profession. Being in easy circumstances he was enabled to follow his natural bent, and for a time was a student in zoology under Van Bene- den, and an assistant of Krauss at the Naturalien Cabinet, or Royal Museum of Wiirtemberg in Stuttgart. He became interested in Arctic discovery, and his first essay in this direction, ander the encouragement of Petermann, of Gotha, was the well-known voyage of 1869 into the 4 = rg REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Va sea between Spitzbergen and Nova Zembla. By his observations on this journey he traced the influence of the Gulf Stream water east of Spitzbergen and added much to the scanty knowledge of this region then available. In 1870 he was called to the field as military surgeon, rendering services in the hospitals, which brought him a public com- mendation from the Grand Duke of Baden. In 1871 he came to Americi at Petermann’s suggestion to join Hall’s Polar Expedition as naturalist aud surgeon. Most of the scientific results of this voyage were the fruit of his’ personal efforts. After the rescue of the survivors he returned to America, where for some years he was busy at the Smithsonian In- stitution in preparing for publication the scientific results of the voy- age, one of the most striking of which was the proof first brought out by him of the insularity of Greenland, which be deduced from the tidal observations secured on the expedition. In 1876 his work was printed in quarto, under the title of “Report on the Scientific Results of the Polaris Expedition.” Three years later he published through Engle- mann, at Leipzig, a German narrative of the expedition, illustrated largely from his own very artistic sketches. He projected a work on the Eskimo, to which he devoted much labor. An ethnological voyage undertaken on the United States steamer Saranac to the northwest coast of America was prematurely terminated by the wreck of that vessel in Seymour Narrows, British Columbia. He returned to Wash- ington, where he prepared several contributions to Arctic and zoolog- ical literature. Through an unfortunate fire at his residence he lost his library, manuscripts, and collections in 1885, and subsequently returned to Germany, where he settled at Stuttgart. Here he was engaged in literary pursuits, the study of art, and in geographical instruction. He died after a short illness, March 30, 1838, aud his remains were in- terred in the Cemetery, at Heidelberg. Respectfully submitted. . S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary of Smithsonian Institution. ie eee Seat eee slaptes WARNS Foun) Age honk gee ae Eas ea VES a epdeseah daehar nals i pipes. hn Ses o sooner 2 a geameees sare ae bike. oe ret ee Pishcn\'s ESE pas Sates By ; ca oy aa ‘ Stet se ayes 702 SS aap re

REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 97 DETAILS OF THE PLAN FOR DIFFUSING KNOWLEDGE. I. By the publication of a series of reports giving an account of the new discoveries in science, and of the changes made from year to year in all branches of knowledge not strictly professional.—l. These reports will diffuse a kind of knowledge generally interesting, but which, at present, is inaccessible to the public. Some of the reports may be pub- lished annually, others at longer intervals, as the income of the Institution or the changes in the branches of knowledge may indicate. 2. The reports are to be prepared by collaborators eminent in the different branches of knowledge. 3. Each collabo- rator to be furnished with the journals and publications, domestic and foreign, nec- essary to the compilation of his report; to be paid a certain sum for his labors, and to be named on the title-page of the report. 4. The reports to be published in sepa- rate parts, so that persons interested in a particular branch can procure the parts relating to it without purchasing the whole. 5. These reports may be presented to Congress for partial distribution, the remaining copies to be given to literary and scientific institutions and sold to individuals for a moderate price.* Il. By the publication of separate treatises on subjects of general interest.—1. These treatises may occasionaliy consist of valuable memoirs translated from foreign lJan- guages, or of articles prepared under the direction of the Institution, or procured by offering premiums for the best exposition of a given subject. 2. The treatises should, in all cases, be submitted to a commission of competent judges previous to their pub- lication. 3. Asexamples of these treatises, expositions may be obtained of the present state of the several branches of knowledge mentioned in the table of reports. SECTION II. Plan of organization, in accordance with the terms of the resolutions of the Board of Regents, providing for the two modes of increasing and diffusing knowledge. 1. The act of Congress establishing the Institution contemplated the formation of a library and a museum, and the Board of Regents, including these objects in the plan of organization, resolved to divide the income into two equal parts. 2. One part to be appropriated to increase and diffuse knowledge by means of pub- lications and researches, agreeably to the scheme before given. The other part to be appropriated to the formation of a library and a collection of objects of nature and of art. 3. These two plans are not incompatible with one another. 4, To carry out the plan before described, a library will be required, consisting, first, of a complete collection of the transactions and proceedings of ail the learned societies in the world; second, of the more important current periodical publications and other works necessary in preparing the periodical reports. 5, The Institution should make special collections, particularly of objects to illus- trate and verify its own publications. 6. Also, a collection of instruments of research in all branches of experimental science. 7 * The following are some of the subjects which may be embraced in the reports: 1. Physical Class.—(1) Physics, including astronomy, natural philosophy, chemistry, and meteorology, (2) Natural history, including botany, zoology, geology, ete. (3) Agriculture. (4) Application of science to arts. “TI. Moral and Political Class.—(5) Ethnology, including particular history, com- arative philology, antiquities, etc. (6) Statistics and politicaleconomy. (7) Mental and moral philosophy. (8) 4 survey of the political events of the world, penal re- form, ete. Tl. Literature and the Fine Arts.—(9) Modern literature. (10) The fine arts, and their application to the useful arts, (11) Bibliography, (12) Obituary notices of distinguished individuals. ~ AA, Mis, 142——7 98 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 7. With reference to the collection of books, other than those mentioned above, catalogues of all the different libraries in the United States should be procured, in order that the valuable books first purchased may be such as are not’to be found in the United States. 8. Also, catalogues of memoirs, and of books and other materials, should be col- lected for rendering the Institution a center of bibliographical knowledge, whence the student may be directed to any work which he may require. 9. It is believed that the collections in natural history will increase by donation as rapidly as the income of the Institution can make provision for their reception, and therefore it will seldom be necessary to purchase articles of this kind. 10. Attempts should be made to procure for the gallery of art casts of the most celebrated articles of ancient and modern sculpture. 11. The arts may be encouraged by providing a room, free of expense, for the exbi- bition of the objects of the Art Union and other similar societies. 12. A small appropriation should annually be made for models of antiquities, such as those of the remains of ancient temples, ete. 13. For the present, or until the building is fully completed, besides the Secretary, no permanent assistant will be required, except one to act as librarian. 14. The Secretary, by the law of Congress, is alone responsible to the Regents. He shall take charge of the building and property, keep a record of proceedings, dis- charge the duties of librarian and keeper of the museum, and may, with the consent of the Regents, employ assistants. 15. The Secretary and his assistants, during the session of Congress, will be required to illustrate new discoveries in science, and to exhibit new objects of art; distin- guished individuals should also be invited to give lectures on subjects of general in- terest. This programme, which was at first adopted provisionally, has become the settled policy of the Institution. The only material change is that expressed by the follow- ing resolutions, adopted January 15, 1855, viz: Resolved, That the seventh resolution passed by the Board of Regents on the 26th of January, 1847, requiring an equal division of the income between the active opera- tions and the museum and library, when the buildings are completed, be, and it is hereby, repealed. Resolved, That hereafter the annual appropriations shall be apportioned specifically among the different objects and operations of the Institution in such manner as may, in the judgmens of the Regents, be necessary and proper for each, according to its intrinsic importance, and a compliance in good faith with the law. [Resolution of Board of Regents, adopted January 17, 1880, and at each successive annual meeting. | Resolved, That the income for the year be appropriated for the service of the Insti- tution upon the basis of the report [of the Executive Committee], to be expended by the Secretary, with full discretion as to the items, subject to the approval of the Executive Committee, | ; APPENDIX ITI, PUBLICATIONS OF THE YEAR. SMITHSONIAN CONTRIBUTIONS TO KNOWLEDGE. Of this series, no work has been published during the past year. A memoir on the archeology of North America has been for several years in course of preparation by Dr. Charles Rau, the late curator of the department of Pre-historic Antiquities, and several thousand dollars have been expended in the production ef drawings by Mr. C. F. Trill and others, under Dr. Rauw’s direction, for the purpose of properly illus- trating the work. Dr. Rau’s illness at the beginning of the past fiseal year, and his death in July, 1887, have arrested the progress of this undertaking. The unfinished work will, however, be taken up by his suecessor, Mr. Thomas Wilson, and prosecuted to an early completion, and it is not improbable that this work may be published in the above series. SMITHSONIAN MISCELLANEOUS COLLECTIONS. Of this series three volumes have been published during the year, besides several independent treatises. Taking these in the order in which they appear in the printed lists, they are as follows: 591. ‘Synoptical Flora of North America: The Gamopetal ; being a second edition of Vol. 1, Part 11, and Vol. 11, Part 1, collected,” by Asa Gray, LL. D. Of these two portions, the earlier—the last part of the proposed first volume—comprises 480 pages, and the latter—being the commencing part of the proposed second volume—com- prises 494 pages; forming in the aggregate, with introductory matter, an octavo vol- ume of 9°6 pages. As long as forty years ago, Dr. Gray, in co-operation with Dr. Torrey, undertook a comprehensive classification of the North American flora, which, however, never was completed, stopping with a synopsis of the polypetalous, and about half the gamopetalous divisions of the Dicotyledons, or to the close of the order of Composite. Ambitious of reconstructing and completing the long contem- plated work, Dr. Gray, postponing the first part of Vol. 1 (the Polypetala), has taken up, for the second part of the volume, the Gamopetala as far as the completion of the Composite, and has continued the remaining orders of the Gamopetale as the first part of the succeeding volume. ‘The lamented death of the author has left his great work still unfinished; the third division of the Dicotyledons (the Apetal@), and the Monoctyledons having been designed to form the second part of Vol. u. The present two detached portions of successive volumes, however, have a unity in being occupied entirely with the Gamopetala, and they constitute a full and systematic descriptive catalogue or synopsis of this great division. Several thousand dollars have been expended by the Institution in furthering this important botanical work, which probably cost the author nearly as much more. In consideration of this, Dr. Gray was allowed to issue for his own benefit a first edition of the work of 500 copies before the Institution attempted to publish its own edition, which bas thus only lately appeared. ‘Miscellaneous Collections, Vol. xxx1.” This volume is occupied with the two parts of the ‘‘ Flora of North America,” by Dr. Asa Gray, just described ; a separate edition of 500 copies of the work haying been issued as ‘No, 591,” for special dis« 99 100 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. tribution, according to the long-established policy of the Institution, and an edition of 1,000 copies being issued as a numbered volume of the ‘‘ Collections,” for deposit with the principal libraries and scientific societies of the world. 658. ‘‘Index to the Literature of the Spectroscope,” by Alfred Tuckerman. This bibliography is designed to give a list of all the books and smaller treatises, espe- cially contributions to scientific periodicals, on the spectroscope and spectrum an- alysis from the beginning of our knowledge upon the subject until July, 1887. The work is arranged as an alphabetical index to topics as well as of ‘substances which have been spectroscopically examined, followed by an alphabetical list of the authors. It comprises: 3,829 titles and the names of 799 authors, and forms an octavo volume of 433 pages, including introductory matter and supplement. 659. ‘“‘A Table of Specific Gravity for Solids and Liquids (new edition, revised and enlarged),” by Frank Wigglesworth Clark. This work is a revised edition, entirely re-written, of specific gravity tables, by the same author, published by this Institu- tion December, 1873, and a supplement to the same, published April, 1876. ‘I‘he melting and boiling temperature appended to many of the substances in these earlier tables have been omitted in the present. A general idea of the expansion given to this important series of density determinations may be suggested by the statement that the original work gave a list of 2,263 different substances, to which the supple- ment added nearly 700 more, while the present work presents a list of 5,227 distinct substances. And as many of the substances have had their specific gravities inde- pendently investigated by several eminent chemists, with slight variations in their results, it may be well to add that the tables actually include 14,465 separate deter- minations of these constants, averaging about two and three-fourths independent ex- aminations to every substance catalogued. The large mass of material thus ex- hibited furnishes a creditable record, both of the rapid extension of minute chemical investigation in the last dozen years and of the diligence of the present compiler, Mr. Clark, who has himself, moreover, done very meritorious work in the direction of specific gravity determinations. The work forms an octavo volume of 417 pages in all, and it is under consideration whether it may not be well, in view of the interest of chemists in the table and the demand for them, to put the sale copies in the hand of a publisher. 660. ‘‘ Miscellaneous Collections,” Vol. xxxu. This volume is made up of the two works last mentioned, in the order, first, Clark’s Table of Specific Gravity ; second, Tuckerman’s Bibliography of Spectroscopic Analysis. It forms an octavo volume of 855 pages. 661. ‘‘ Bulletin of the Philosophical Society of Washington,” Vols. rx, x. Contain- ing the minutes of the society and of the mathematical section for the years 1886, 1887, together with the proceedings of the Baird memorial meeting, held January 11, 1888. The bulletin for these two years forms an octavo volume of 376 pages, embel- lished with a phototype likeness of Professor Baird. 662. ‘‘ Miscellaneous Collections,” Vo]. xxxu1. This volume consists entirely of the bulletins of the Philosophical Society of Washington, and is made up of No. 543, Bulletin, Vol. v1, for the year 1883; No. 592, Bulletin, Vol. vu, for the year 1884; No. 636, Bulletin, Vol. vii, for the year 1885, and No. 661, just previously described, Bulletin, Vol. 1x, for 1886, and Vol. x, for 1887. The following note is appended to the general table of contents on page 5: ‘‘ With this volume (containing the last five volumes of the bulletins of the Philosophical Society of Washington) is terminated the re-issue of these proceedings in the series of Miscellaneous Collections. It may be stated that volumes 1, 2, and 3 of these bulletins formed Vol. xx of the Miscella- neous Collections; volumes 4 and 5 were included in Vol. xxv of the Miscellaneous Collections; and, lastly, volumes 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10, together with the Memorial Pro- ceedings in honor of Professor Baird, and a full index of the whole ten volumes, con- stitute the present Vol. Xxxui of the Miscellaneous Collections.” This last forms in all an octave volume of 910 pages, with several wood-cuts and one plate. portrait, a oe REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. LO SMITHSONIAN ANNUAL REPORT. 654. ‘Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution,” 1885, Part 11. This second part, being the report of the United States National Museum to July, 1885, has at last been received from the Government Printing Oftice, more than a year later than the first part of the report for the same period, which related to the operations of the Smithsonian Institution proper. This long-delayed Part 1 consists of five sections: The first being the ‘‘ Report upon the Condition and Progress of the U. S. National Museum during the half year ending June 30, 1885,” by G. Brown Goode, assistant director, and occupying the first 54 pages of the work. The second, ‘‘ Reports of the Curators and Acting Curators of the Museum upon the Progress of their Work” during the period, occupying pages 55 to 146. The third, a ‘Bibliography of the Museum” during the period, including the publications of the Museum and those of its officers and others relative to the museum material, and occupying pages 149 to 173. The fourth, a ‘List of Accessions to the Museum” dur- ing the period, together with descriptive notes and indices, occupying pages 175 to 243. The fifth, an appendix, consisting of a very full description of the ‘‘George Catlin Indian Gallery in the Museum, with memoir and statistics,” by Thomas Don- aldson, occupying 939 pages, illustrated by 142 plates and maps. ‘This historical sketch (forming the greater portion of the volume) has proved to be in great popular demand, the applications made for it through Members of Congress having been un- usually numerous, so that our stock of 7,000 copies is already nearly exhausted. The whole namber of pages of this Part 11 of the report, including introductory matter and indices, is 1,220. If to this be added the illustrations, the aggregate would be equal to 1,500 octavo pages. 657. ‘ Report of Prof. Spencer F. Baird, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, for the year 1886—87.” This last report of my lamented predecessor forms an octavo pamphlet of 27 pages. The volume to contain the above report, with its ac- companying papers and general appendix, has not yet been set up at the Govern- ment Printing Office. ISSUES OF THE NATIONAL MUSEUM. 655. ‘‘ Proceedings of the United States National Museum, Vol. rx, 1886.” As already stated, this series, though primarily published at the expense of the Govern- ment by the authority of the Interior Department, has heretofore been re-issued by the Smithsonian Institution. The present volume, completed and collected during the past year, consists of descriptive papers by James E. Benedict, T. W. Blackiston, George H. Boehmer, Charles H. Bollman, E. D. Cope, W. H. Dall, George E. Doering, Charles L. Edwards, Carl H. Eigenmann, Barton W. Evermann, Fernando Ferari- Perez, Morton W. Fordyce, Elizabeth G. Hughes, David 8S. Jordan, George N. Law- rence, John Belknap Marcou, William G. Masyk, George P. Merrill, Richard Rathbun, Robert Ridgway, John A. Rider, John B. Smith, Rosa Smith, Leonard Steineger, Frederick W. True, and John Grant Wells. The collection forms an octavo volume of 720 pages, including introduction and index, and is illustrated by 25 plates, of which one is a chromo-lithograph. 565. ‘* Bulletin of the United States National Museum, No. 32.” This work is a Catalogue of Batrachians and Reptiles of Central America and Mexico, by E. D. Cope. The systematic catalogue is very largely based on the specimens contained in the National Museum. To each species is added a list of the localities aft which it has been discovered, together with the name of the discoverer, or, in the absence of that, with the name of the author who is responsible for the correctness of the locality. The total number of genera included in the catalogue is 197, and of species 705, of which 135 are Batrachians and 570 Reptilians. The Bulletin forms a pamphlet of 98 octayo pages. STEREOTYPE PLATES ON HAND. For many years the greater portion of the stereotype plates of Smithsonian pub- lications has been stored in Philadelphia, in the fire-proof vaults of the Academy of 102 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. Natural Sciences, generously offered for that purpose. There having been no safe depository here for them, and much of the printing having been done in Philadelphia, the plates have been allowed to remain there undisturbed. As the institution now has suitable store-rooms entirely fire-proof, and it is found that new editions of works can be printed to better ‘advantage in this city, thereby avoiding the cost of transportation of the whole editions of publications, it is pro- posed to bring all these plates together in one depository—the basement of the Smithsonian Building. It is to be regretted that the early volumes of ‘‘Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge” were not stereotyped, and thus that it is impossible at the present time to reproduce full sets. The plates of the annual reports from 1862 to 1886 (twenty-five years) are in pos- session of the Institution; and if supplies should be wanted for libraries or individ- uals, an edition might at any time be ordered by Congress, at the mere cost of paper and press-work. APPENDIX III. REPORT UPON INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES, UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, FOR THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1888. By J. H. Kipprr, Curator. The business of the exchange office has increased during the year, as shown by the following table: 1886—'87. | 1887-’88. | Increase. AMON PEOCOLU OU menace otter a < ania va b.c'Sa Geb ace aeciainivieicis esas) a - aces + 21, 506 18, 060)5, 190/13, 958 9, 126/8, 089,11, 197] 15, 920 6, 885)6, 215/18, 415/22, 567\149, 630 Entries made: | Morelentss) ccs: -- 4,412) 5, 702|1, 178| 1, 58611, 794|2, 366] 4,086] 2, 850)2, 858/2, 050) 2, 074] 9, 242) 40, 148 Domestic... .....--- 4, 484| 1,834] 604] 2,358] 698|1, 690| 3, 586] 1, 404/2, 766|1, 400] 2,474] 812) 23, 510 Ledger accounts: Foreign societies....| 4, 159)...... SES A8 ISH ABO BRHOE GORCe NGESea Baaencl Bess SaNcelesebica| lation 4,194 Domestic societies. - - Q70 a2 < Sena Meee Rear sees Peseta) (beers Rese reg eee aa sess 1, 070 Foreign individuals Baal sons = =escel|osdece By | eee BeSsoE Saeace seers Sabse|accasol|Gooder 4, 15 Domestic individuals) 1, 195|......|..-.-|------ Se ect Weneesa5! Poeesae Sih Alister seltae let 1, 556 Domestic packages | SEVIND cose- cesses anbe | 2, 242 917) 302) 1,179} 559) 845) 1, 793 702/1, 383) 700) 1, 237 442) 12, 301 Invoices written ......|.----- 1,864) 840) 744) 847] 555) 925) 1,159} 605} 725) 1,365) 3, 896) 13, 525 Cases shipped abroad 43 63} 38! 63] 28) 19 32 81] 43) 20 86) 147 663 Acknowledgments re- | . corded : HOreign a.) 2.- <<< 731 849) 383) 1,171) 769}1, 061 612 607) 341) 443 584 419) 7,970 Domestic ----.---. 318 418) 495, 207) 428) 405 206 378} 400) 670 570 313) 4, 808 Letters recorded...... 81 83 77| 91 92 85 163 9) 72 80 69 138) 1, 062 Letters written .....-. 129 93 130. 169} 130 92 89 137} 266 ; 92 247 230, 1, 804 EXHIBIT B. CONVENTION CONCERNING THE INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGES FOR OFFICIAL DOCU- MENTS AND SCIENTIFIC AND LITERARY PUBLICATIONS. {Translation from the French. ] The President of the United States of America, His Majesty the King of the Bel- gians, His Majesty the Emperor of Brazil, Her Majesty the Queen Regent of Spain, His Majesty the King of Italy, His Majesty the King of Portugal and of the Algarves, His Majesty the King of Servia, the Federal Council of the Swiss Confederation, de- siring to establish, on the basis adopted by the conference which met at Brussels from the 10th to the 14th April, 1883, a system of international exchanges of the official documents and of the scientific and literary publications of their respective States, have appointed for their plenipotentiaries, to wit: The President of the United States of America, Mr. Lambert Tree, minister resident of the United States of America at Brussels, His Majesty the King of the Belgians, the Prince de Caraman, his ininister of foreign affairs and the Chevalier de Moreau, his minister of agriculture, industry, and public works, His Majesty the Emperor of Brazil, the Count de Villeneuve, his envoy extraordi- nary and minister plenipotentiary near His Majesty the King of the Belgians, Her Majesty the Queen Regent of Spain, Mr. de Tavira, chargé (affaires ad in- terim.of Spain at Brussels, His Majesty, the King of Italy, the Marquis Maffei, his envoy extraordinary and minister plenipotentiary near His Majesty the King of the Belgians, 112 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. His Majesty the King of Portugal and of the Algarves, the Baron de Sant’Anna, envey extraordinary and minister plenipotentiary of His Very Faithful Majesty, His Majesty the King of Servia, Mr. Marinovitch, his envoy extraordinary and minister plenipotentiary near His Majesty the King of the Belgians, The Federal Council of the Swiss Confederation, Mr. Rivier, its special plenipoten- tiary, Who, after having communicated between themselves their full powers, which arg found in good and due form, have agreed upon the following articles: ARTICLE I. There shall be established in each of the contracting states, a bureau charged with the duty of the exchanges. Art. II. The publications which the contracting states agree to exchange are the following: Ist. The official documents, parliamentary and administrative, which are published in the country of their origin. 2nd. The works executed by order and at the expense of the Government. Art. III. Each bureau shall cause to be printed a list of the publications that it is able to place at the disposal of the contracting states. This list shall be corrected and completed each year and regularly addressed to all the bureaus of exchange. Art. IV. The bureaus of exchange will arrange between themselves the number of copies which they may be able eventually to demand and furnish. Art. V. The transmission shall be made directly from bureau to bureau. Uniform models and formulas will be adopted for the memoranda of the contents of the cases, as well as for all the administrative correspondence, requests, acknowledgments of reception, etc. Art. VI. For exterior transmissions, each state assumes the expense of packing and transportation to the place of destination. Nevertheless when the transmissions shall be made by sea, special arrangements will regulate the share of each state in the expense of transportation. ArT. VII. ‘The bureaus of exchange will serve, in an official capacity, as interme- diaries between the learned bodies and literary and scientific societies, etc., * * * of the contracting states for the reception and transmission of their publications. lt remains, hcwever, well understood that, in such case, the duty of the bureaus of exchange will be confined to the free transmission of the works exchanged, and that these bureaus will not in any manner take the initiative to bring about the establishment of such relations. ; Art. VIII. These provisions apply only to the documents and works published after the date of the present convention. Art. IX. The states which have not taken part in the present convention are ad- mitted to adhere to it on their request. This adhesion will be notified diplomatically to the Belgian Government, and by that Government to all the other signatory states. Art. X. The present convention will be ratified and the ratifications will be ex- changed at Brussels assoon as practicable. It is concluded for ten years from the day of the exchange of ratifications, and it will remain in force beyond that time, so long as one of the Governments shall not have declared six months in advance that it re- nounces it. In witness whereof the respective plenipotentiaries have signed it, and have there- unto affixed their seals. Done at. Brussels in eight copies the 15th of March, 1886. LAMBERT TREE. [ SEAL. ] José Ma. DE TAvIRA. [SEAL. ] Pr. DE CaRAMAN. [ SEAL. } MAFFEI. [SEAL. | CHEVALIER DE Moreau. [SEAL. ] Baron DE SANT’ANNA, [ SEAL. ] CoMTE DE VILLENEUVE, [SEAL. ] I. MARINOVITCH. [SEAL. ] ALPHONSE RIVIER, | [SEAL] . REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 113 CONVENTION FOR ASSURING THE IMMEDIATE EXCHANGE OF THE OFFICIAL JOURNAL, AS WELL AS OF THE PARLIAMENTARY ANNALS AND DOCUMENTS. {Translation from the Freuch. } ~ The President of the United States of America, His Majesty the King of the Bel- gians, His Majesty the Emperor of Brazil, Her Majesty the Queen Regent of Spain, His Majesty the King of Italy, His Majesty the King of Portugal and of the Algarves, His Majesty the King of Servia, desiring to assure the immediate exchange of the Of- ficial Journal, as well as of the parliamentary annals and documents of their respect- ive states, have named as their plenipotentiaries, to wit: The President of the United States of America, Mr. Lambert Tree, minister resi- dent of the United States of America at Brussels, His Majesty the King of the Belgians, the Prince de Caraman, his minister of foreign affairs, and the Chevalier de Moreau, his minister of agriculture, industry, and public works, His Majesty the Emperor of Brazil, the Count de Villeneuve, his. envoy extraordi- nary and minister plenipotentiary near His Majesty the King of the Belgians, Her Majesty the Queen Regent of Spain, Mr. de Tavira, chargé @’affaires ad interim of Spain, at Brussels, His Majesty the King of Italy, the Marquis Maffei, his envoy extraordinary and minister plenipotentiary near His Majesty the King of the Belgians, His Majesty the King of Portugal and of the Algarves, the Baron de Sant’Anna, envoy extraordinary and minister plenipotentiary of His Very Faithful Majesty, His Majesty the King of Servia, Mr. Marinovitch, his envoy extraordinary and minister plenipotentiary near His Majesty the King of the Belgians, Who, after having communicated between themselves their full powers, found in good and due form, have agreed upon the following articles: ARTICLE I. Independently of the obligations which result from artiele 2 of the Gen- eral Convention of this day, relative to the exchange of official documents and of scientific and literary publications, the respective Governments undertake to have transmitted to the legislative chambers of each contracting State, as fast as their pubiication, a copy of the official journal, as well as of the parliamentary annals and documents which are given publicity. ArT. II. The States which have not taken part in the present Convention are ad- mitted to adhere thereto on their request. ‘ This adhesion will be notified diplomatically to the Belgian Government, and by that Government to all the other signatory States. Ar?. III. The present Convention will be ratified, and the ratifications will be ex- changed at Brussels as soon as practicable. It is concluded for ten years from the day of the exchange of the ratifications, and if will remain in force beyoud that time, so long as one of the Governments shall not have declared six months in advance that it renounces it. In witness whereof, the respective Plenipotentiaries have signed it, and have there- unto affixed their seals. Done at Brussels, in seven copies, the 15th of March, 1886. LAMBERT TREE. [ SEAL, ] José Ma. Dr Tavira. ([SEAL. ] PRINCE Dr CARAMAN. [ SEAL. ] MAFFEI. [SEAL. ] CHEVALIER De Moreau. [SEAL.] BARON De SANT’ANNA. [SEAL. ] CoMTE DE VILLENEUVE. ([SEAL.] I. MARINOVITCH. [SEAL. | EXHIBIT C. OFFICIAL GOVERNMENT EXCHANGES. During the year ending June 39, 1883, the number of packages sent abroad to those Governments participating in the Government exchanges was 36,445. H. Mis, 142 8 ® 114 ' REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. The number of packages received during the same time (besides 13 boxes of book yurchased by the Library of Congressin England) was 1,530, as follows: } o 5 ? ? From Austria...-- dente se Sines ~ | 219) "Wromibalysscteen as. cesses Doarelate 164 From France..--- nh osanos scene acct 9) Prony Norwayseasose ere eeeaee 2 From Great Britain---2-5=2-- 2 -5-- 2 (| Brom) Swedenescec-seece asses ene 30 Prom GermManyjeceeaartee eee eee 1,104 1,580 ExuHipiT D. A RESOLUTION TO CARRY INTO EFFECT THE RESOLUTION APPROVED MARCH 2, 1867, PROVIDING FOR THE EXCHANGE OF CERTAIN PUBLIC DOCUMENTS. (No. 72.) Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States in Congres assembled, That the Congressional Printer, whenever he shall be so directed by the Joint Committee on the Library, be, and he hereby is, directed to print fifty copies, in addition to the regular number, of all documents hereafter printed by order of either house of Congress, or by order of any Department or Bureau of the Govern- ment; and whenever he shall be so directed by the Joint Committee on the Library one hundred copies additional of all documents ordered to be printed, in excess of the usual number, said fifty or one hundred copies to be delivered to the Librarian of Congress, to be exchanged, under the direction of the Joint Committee on the Library, as provided by the joint resolution approved March 2, 1867. Sec. 2. And be it further resolved, That fifty copies-of each publication printed under the direction of any Department or Bureau of the Government, whether at the Con- gressional Printing Office or elsewhere, shall be placed at the disposal of the Joint Committee on the Library, to carry out the provision of said resolution. Passed July 25, 1868. Exuisit E. LIST OF STEAM-SHIP COMPANIES AND OTHERS GRANTING TO THE SMITHSONIAN IN- STITUTION FREE TRANSPORTATION FOR ITS BOXES AND PACKAGES, DURING TILES YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1888. Allan Steam-ship Company (A. Schumacher & Co., agents), Baltimore. Anchor Steam-ship Line (Henderson & Brother, agents), New York. Atlas Steam-ship Company (Pim, Forwood & Co., agents), New York. Bailey, H. B., & Co., New York. Bixby, Thomas E., & Co., Boston, Mass. Borland, B. R., New York. Boulton, Bliss & Dallett, New York. Cameron, R. W., & Co., New York. Compagnie Générale Transatlantique (L. de Bébian, agent), New York. Cunard Royal Mail Steam-ship Line (Vernon H. Brown & Co., agents), New York. Dennison, Thomas, New York. Florio Rubattino Line, New York. Hamburg American Packet Company (Kunhardt & Co., agents), New York. Inman Steam-ship Company, New York. Merchants’ Line of Steamers, New York. Mutioz y Espriella, New York. Murray, Ferris & Co., New York. Netherlands American Steam Navigation Company (H. Cazaux, agent), New York. New York and Brazil Steam-ship Company, New York. New York and Mexico Steam-ship Company, New York. . Se a REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 115 North German Lloyd (agents, Oelrichs & Co., New York; A. Schumacher & Co., Baltimore). Pacific Mail Steam-ship Company, New York. Panama Railroad Company, New York. Red Star Line (Peter Wright & Sons, agents), Philadelphia and New York. White Cross Line of Antwerp (Funch, Edye & Co., agents), New York. Wilson & Asmus, New York. EXHIBIT F. SHIPMENTS AND RECEIPTS BY INTERNATIONAL EXCILANGE DURING THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1883. Shipments. Country. chee No. of cases. ments. JIG PIE oon ce cos hoocndtod eeees seas cooeddadeseoedec se sseans 1 1 AMGEN) LED ONG. Ss ose coe b ese banbn6 soos SUOOUEE A SBOsOnUSB0e 11 8 PANIS PUTAS ELITES UM pe tle oolala an falo/3) fo mis} \=isinjsioteioinis sis'e)nieie's = SiSizjesjaeies 36 21 TBE Hie copa See SO Se Ce BASE Ae fe oh Meee esata eee 26 3 TRORO Ns 3c 4e-ceced Ss a6 Ch OcsOte One eEe ae ee eee 4 4 ENG 2 cogadcocccetksoocUSctst Sh coSodepee SoCo RIUOEmopeEoeooE 19 12 JUWAIL. ¢ oa cine che ce Gseduene Bemebds ob BOE Cae SCO SS ACRE e aera 11 8 PESTLE ex TIM ume rerage eee ie oie lors ere ois Seis einic's w scicisiniaie ale ciwinse ] 1 Leia) AGREE eosocdopscocupesosadaopebosd656 soBsoseosemoo se 4 4 ATA ae eee eeenies oo eeiis=c 2c ncmigoceecse ccecccses= me 15 11 A EO I OOH ODO rem emalmence en niette mos feel /cie= seein co GENCE OU ID EE OCC EIDE SE SCE REC eEa rae 1 1 BESTS Ulett tet etal eter ettetetafetateteti aie aelaleinieie = oe winisisate> eicine = =\ai-1= 2 2 LID oiocde SESS BEBE: COO RE Be eRe Se Soe ee eee eee se see 59 21 GenMmanyesescsessce~scccssecce ase Se ec ce cise ears 76 29 Great Britain and Ireland (including the colonies not men- tioned separately) ...-.-...--.--..-. BPD Ae Fy nea: Sika. fs 96 28 PD OU meter tetera tetatem aie tae ora otetat aire otal m2) shSjstalsie ars Siw\sieva/e sic. ae D 5 CURIGTI ER 3 Sade ceiceee COnC ree SaaS anee See ane sapen ate eerie 1 l LEO ie osc otic SOE COLE ODOR SEE nn Cae ee See 4 4 UNG VE: ose cecOcOn BASE. CGOAe GOSS ee ACs nee ee aee a ae ee 1L 8 MU een tetetaei sale atin ecisiwie seme cataclale aiehi,ainceteoetasess 33 13 JIGTTOIUD = teepsoecSotGc gat Ce OC Se CE Mee ee era 1 1 A aUseneet ten ween coe mnie tee aan au cise 's viceinc nics sveiewclscccens 18 9 Hat Oli ue eee cane an ate leg as oo ea irececinclc wai ve\deccaesce cans 2 2 Mom CO meno te cetes dettine seiccctseaec ciesceteadsecesemcntectees. 13 8 Netherlands -csee. 2.2545 004 PEE ORO ABER COTE Rr EIECOCEEEE 14 9 IN GWA SOUUNAV IGS c.ssccacs scone ccecee een ola Supe see noe 10 7 IN OWEHA ENO Gee m pease ® oceans eet so i. coccee se aes 10 7 INO Steilatemtacieuieicicteised ca dee bce ce cae atta seminin sion tlenjese ner 11 8 1) ge eeacee SSC TIES OSES SHI GGC PROO SAR GO HISEE | 6 6 Receipts. No. of No. of ances ship- ments. 8 3 2 1 7 1 2 2 7 2 55 17 51 32 13 5 3 3 3 2 1 1 er ee reer? 116 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. SHIPMENTS AND RECEIPTS BY INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE DURING THE YEAR ENDING JUNE 30, 1888—Continued. Shipments. Receipts. pert No. of ae of No. of Toler cases. ae cases Sina ments. ments 12 MANS Pb eo ceanne Geinogosabb ce pe ScbaacQueboatasodecrsaoscsc 1 UO oe stse seas|sscsteoske lekan nel ee eee 5 soos bsheasmoendcbessnosskosecocdsseadces 8 6°) 2k eces sulle eeeee LEMIRE) Aocccedocees § Soc coombepoueqdbos op SaaecBEooneatessse> 4 a eeesecca Pesacsosce @ neers) amd Qe cease eet ee eet eect n ete eee eee cen ene 8 U oe ébocsees|ecce see IBN cad cones roses node ceec ep SHenecEaoosD GBS COBO sSeceeecoas 26 12 8 4 S@XONY 1.5. mewn «wenn ee emer se ne wen ween nent nn ens 4 CR ESescicsSaa||eoa SocSo5 Sti AVG ANDES es aces soocsend sobe5 JocecocscosHbesbooecnSese u Un eRe deisa| sosensHasé SPA epee cleo eeste lore = tala ielelainimr oe = nvin le =e nle eee wol-==ae ela = =i 8 U Ibanccndase||choassasas Sweden§ ..-.... Soo adoossasnagdossooessocass SSoncgeeasoSssS ose: 15 We pacareoaad Wsocegsode Swap eG) onc sco5 Socos Sopk Soa pb con pono ES soaqobonedosases 19 OBieasecremos|ekccaso AUSTEN) cncensSoogodbe sonbob9 ooonodScosdsoosossososeds=s 5 mat) leseeccoo ce tsbedaGosc WMA AG oe coc aosbos Sooo stb osbogorDoNyoecesonsososepssacssap 1 ES Sarees ol meme JUTE EW coo poodoesse6s 3 Soon soeee cnoSos socesrSedscortcaesesos 5 @) ||pocanestoc|scstee cece WITEIE SY so5 coscses ocooceou ccd essasosee neous a aim/alemieiweleslef==3 2 7B |\redimeoeSsclloncossscse WONG. Shs Se cacacons Seeaeese nue sbad oo Uoon seca adesaccocasc 6 Se Reeeeeetad |Sactese Sots BVALC LOLITAS western ieee icescisicisc sei em eeice s ewcieeeleaeee 9 Vial Be seeierer sacs Sasa \ ATEN DGPS oS oh So onbnosononnsos CoSccsesoescaU=SopSeseos 4 40) S32 5 o5eelescneseees 663 359 160 73 *Returns made through French Exchange Bureau. t Returns included under Germany. t Returns included under Great Britain and a portion received directly by mail. § Returns receivod directly by mail (a smail number of parcels). APPENDIX IV. CIRCULARS RESPECTING PERIODICALS. CIRCULAR TO THE CURATORS OF THE U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM. Marcn 19, 1887. DEaR Str: It is my desire to obtain from you (1) a list of those periodicals, whether transactions of societies or otherwise, which you deem most nearly indispensable to your own department. This inquiry is irrespective of the fact that the Museum does already possess them or not, and the list should be confined to the most essentially necessary titles; if possible, not over twenty in number. I may add, to make my meaning plainer, that standard transactions of well-known societies concerned in all branches of science, such as the Royal Society of London, the Comptes Rendus de Institut of Paris, etc., and well known periodicals admitting the discussion of all scientific topics; such as Seience, the American Journal of Science, Nature, etc., are excluded from such a list, which is meant to cover only those technical periodicals of most special use to your own department. In addition to this list, and quite distinct from it, I should be pleased to nave you give a list (2) of recent serials, whether transactions or otherwise, of interest in con- nection with your special investigations, even if not exclusively devoted tothem. To be more definite, let us say anything of real importance or even considerable promise commenced within the past twelve years. There need be no limit to the number of titles in this list, but the more important one should have a distinctive check; and I should be very glad if it might suit your convenience to let me have it in this week or next. While the above two lists are especially important and are desired at your earliest convenience, | should be pleased to have you supply me in addition with a list of every serial publication which a worker in your fieid may expect to have not wholly infrequent occasion to consult; and here again I should be glad to have you indicate those of most value. S. P. LANGLEY, Assistant Secretary. GENERAL CIRCULAR, JUNE 15, 1887. Dear Sir: The Smithsonian Institution, in pursuit ofethe object of its foundation, the “‘increase and diffusion of knowledge among men,” has always aimed to keep a complete list of all transactions and proceedings of learned societies and of all jour- nals devoted to science and the useful arts throughout the world. This, at least, is the aim; but it must often fall short of the fulfillment of so large a purpose and from time to time find its lists need revising, and this in two different particulars. First, in adding to its lists new societies or new periodicals which have arisen since the last revisal ; second, in repairing lacunz in its sets of long established society trans- actions or technical journals, and for this end it needs to know which still maintains a prominent place, so that gaps in the more important ones shall receive first atten- tion. It has been suggested to me that you are able, and may perhaps be willing, to assist us by supplying under these two heads the names of those special transactions 117 118 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. or journals which you would like to see made accessible to every student of the sub- ject of ——-— , With which your own name is here associated. The subject of - is, of course, divisible into others, such as ,and we address ourselves to you in the hope that you can oblige us with the names of any meritorious publications, whether foreign or domestic, devoted either to —in general, or to any such of its subdivisions. To make our wants entirely clear, let me explain that the Institution does not or- dinarily need to be informed of the names of societies or journals dealing with all departments of knowledge, but only of such transactions of societies and the names of such journals as are concerned chiefly, if not wholly, with the subject in ques- tion, or whieh, at any rate, are frequently consulted by itsspecial students. It is chiefly for such technical publications that we desire lists under the two heads already named. To repeat: First, of those transactions of societies or periodi- cals devoted to the principal subject in question, or to some of its branches which have been established within the past twelve or fifteen years and which you know to be frequently consulted; second, of those which, being long established, are of now most generally recognized importance. I venture to address to you thiss outlined plan without having any claim upon your kindness other than this, that the single purpose of this request is to make the Smithsonian Library more immediately useful to every student in your own depart- ment, and that nothing can contribute more directly to this end than your furnish- ing the desired list, with which, if you can oblige me, I beg we may be favored within the coming month. In case you do not feel that your time will allow you to make it complete, I beg you will not, on this account, refuse your help altogether, but rather that you will put down, if only imperfectly, the transactions or journals best known to you and which seem most desirable in connection with the general subject or with any of its divisions as indicated. I have the honor to be, very respectfully, your obedient servant, S, P. LANGLEY, Acting Secretary. Blank form accompanying the circular. * List of desirable journals or transactions commenced within the past fifteen years, specially devoted to —— or to any of its departments or subdivisions, as ae re o APPENDIX V. ORGANIZATION OF LIBRARY. 1. By act of Congress of April 5, 1866, the Library of the Smithsonian Institution is to be kept with the Library of Congress, but with the provision that the Institu- tion shall continue to enjoy ifs customary use of it. The following regulations refer only to those books which, under the above proviso, are retained at the Smithsonian Institution proper, or in its Museum Library. 2. By order of the Secretary, after April 1, 1887, these are under the general direc- tion of the Assistant Secretary, in charge of the library placed in the immediate charge of a librarian, whose title shall be Librarian of the Smithsonian Institution, and whose duty it shall be to decide what books shall be retained from the Library of Congress in a central library under his charge. The following regulations are in- tended for the better execution of the aforesaid order. SECTIONAL LIBRARIES. 3. Sectional libraries may be formed by the officers of the Smithscnian Institution, namely, the assistant secretaries and the chief clerk, and also by the curators and acting curators and the editor. Curators and acting curators are permitted, subject to the approval of the assistant secretary in charge of the Museum, to form sectional libraries to be kept in their respective offices, but this shall only be done by with- drawing from the general collection such books as relate exclusively to the objects under their care. Dictionaries, cyclopiwdias, journals, or any works other than such as relate exclusively to the special department can not form a part of such a see- tional library, except upon the recommendation of the librarian, approved by one of the assistant secretaries. 4. The official in charge of each sectional library shall be responsible for its safe keeping, and shall on no account lend the books. 5. Books in the sectional library must be returned to the central library before they can be issued for use outside of the office or room to which they are accredited. 6. The books of each sectional library shall be kept separate from all other books in the rooms of the official or curator, in distinct cases, the locks of which shall be controlled by a master key in the hands of the librarian, who may, at stated times, examine them, and call the attention of the curators to any deficiencies. 7. No person who is not a member of the scientific staff of the Museu shall with- draw books or other matter without special written permission from one of the offi- cers of the Smithsonian Institution. Persons taking books from the central library shall be responsible for the safe keeping of the same, and shall make good any losses. They shall not be allowed to withdraw other books until those which are lost have been restored. ; 8. The librarian shall have authority to decide what books are suitable for any curator’s sectional library, and to recall any book not in a sectional library within two weeks. Permanent recalls of books from sectional libraries may be made, as well as temporary calls. In case of certain rare or costly or encyclopedic works, or in other special instances, the librarian shall be authorized to designate books which shall in no case be taken from the library. This regulation shall not apply to 119 120 REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. any books now actually in the office of the editor. All books and other matter not in the sectional library shall be at all times subject to recall by the librarian. 9 The librarian will be expected to exercise his discretion as to the books to be withdrawn from the Congressional Library, but will (in the absence of special cause to the contrary) recall any book upon receiving a written request for the same. 10. The librarian shall annually, or oftener, report to the Assistant Secretary, in charge of the library, any defective series, any missing books, or any new serials, or books which are specially desirable. REGULATIONS CONCERNING ENTRY AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF BOOKS. 11. All books, pamphlets, periodicals, maps, and other publications acquired by the Smithsonian Institution through exchange or donation or purchase shall be separately entered by the librarian, who shall prepare a reference list, with the aid of which he shall immediately upon their receipt from the chief clerk divide them into two classes, one of which is to be fully entered within a day of its receipt; the other to be fully entered in any case at some time within the current week. 12. It shall be an invariable rule that such a full entry, to consist of both a day- book and a ledger-account entry, shall be made within the above-specified time for every separate book, or pamphlet or map, without exception; but it is understood that this ledger account may be in the form of a card catalogue. 13. Against every title there shall be entered in the day-book the letter ‘‘ C” (Smithsonian Library, deposited in Library of Congress), or ““G” (Smithsonian Li- brary, deposited with Surgeon General), or ‘‘1” (Smithsonian Library, deposited at the Institution) ; and it shall be the duty of the librarian to see that all books of the first class are prepared for delivery to the Librarian of Congress within the current week. 14. The librarian shall notify the exchange department within the current week of any new correspondent on his books, and shall also acknowledge receipt to the senders - or donors of every article at stated times, at intervals of not more than a year, and shall make a record of such entry, with the date of acknowledgment opposite to the entry of the work in question. 15. It shall be the duty of the librarian at all times to hold these books open to the inspection of the Librarian of Congress, and to report to him the place and condition of any work under his charge in answer to any specific inquiry. 16. In addition to the books which are included in ithe Smithsonian deposit in the Library of Congress, and so stamped, there are certain books procured by the Smith- sonian Institution for use in the National Museum. These shal? be distinctively marked ; and it is understood that while they form no part of the above-described books of the Smithsonian deposit in the Library of Congress, they are in other re- spects to be treated in accordance with the above regulations. No book or chart belonging to the Smithsonian Institution is exempt from them unless procured for the specific use of an officer of the Smithsonian, as above designated, and distinctively stamped as belonging to his office. The above rules will take effect on and after this date. S. P. LANGLEY, Assistant Secretary, in charge of Library. Nore (added December 3, 1887).—Under the last clause come books purchased es- pecially for the office of the Secretary, Assistant Secretary, or chief clerk, forming ‘office libraries,” and for these it is uuderstood that the librarian’s responsibility ceases when he has distinctively stamped each, entered it distinctively on the card catalogue, and also in a separate list catalogue. Indispensable books of reference in exchange department, ete., form part of chief clerk’s office library. S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary. REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. 1a Note (added February 13, 1888).—This last clause above cited is to be understood as including the books purchased at the expense of the Museum appropriation, but not necessarily books obtained by exchange for Museum publications, as it would be difficult, if not impossible, always to discriminate these under our present system. This point is reserved for future consideration, but provisionally it is understood that the librarian is to send books to the Library of Congress if not evidently meant for the Museum. S. P. LANGLEY, Secretary. GENERAL APPENDIX TO THE SMITHSONIAN REPORT FOR 1888. ADVERTISEMENT. The object of the GENERAL APPENDIX to the Annual Report of the Smithsonian Institution is to furnish summaries of scientific discovery in particular directions; occasional reports of the investigations made by collaborators of the Institution; memoirs of a general character or on special topics, whether original and prepared expressly for the pur- pose, or selected from foreign journals and proceedings ; and briefly to present (as fully as space will permit) such papers not published in the “Smithsonian Contributions” or in the “ Miscellaneous Collections ” as may be supposed to be of interest or value to the numerous correspond- ents of the Institution. 124 pe ak al RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. ASTRONOMY FOR 1887, 1888. By WILLIAM C. WINLOCK. The following record of the progress of Astronomy during the years -1857 and 1888 is presented in essentially the form adopted by Professor Holden in 1879. It is thought that this form is most suitable for an annual record, as it furnishes a series of reference notes for those espe- cially interested in the study of astronomy, and at the same time a con- densed review for the general reader. The writer has made free use of reviews and abstracts which have appeared in the Bulletin Astronomique, the Observatory, Nature, the Atheneum, and other periodicals. COSMOGONY. Dr. Carl Braun, 8. J., formerly director of the Kalocsa Observatory, has collected in a book of 167 pages a series of essays, first published in the Catholic periodical Natur und Offenbarung in 1885-’86, in which he enters into a scientific discussion of the evolution of the universe, more particularly the formation of the sun and planets. His theory demands a structureless, motionless, tenuous nebula, its particles en- dowed with gravity and atomic repulsion. Such a nebula, if perfectly homogeneous, should give birth to one portentous solitary sub. But, in point of fact, it would possess innumerable, almost imperceptible, local irregularities, which, forming so many centers of attraction, would eventually lead to the breaking up of the nebula into a vast multitude of separate fragments. On one of these, the destined progenitor of the solar system, we are asked to concentrate our attention. The manner of its development is, however, a widely different one from that traced by Laplace, who assumed the needfal rotation and left the rest to work itself out spontaneously. Dr. Braun, on the other hand, assumes less to begin with, but invokes adventitious aid in emergencies. He ascribes the rotation of the original solar nebula to the impact of masses drawn in from the depths of space, comet-like projectiles, endowed with energy external to the system. These masses would affect the outer shell con- 125 126 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. stifuting the nebula more than they would the inner, and the result is a central condensation surrounded by an ellipsoidal atmosphere revolv- ing with increasing velocity as we proceed outwards from the center. Instead of supposing that the planets are formed from. rings detached from this nebula by over-spinning, Braun assumes that their formation is determined simply by centers of condensation which existed in the nebula itself. These formations have commenced at distances from the central nucleus much greater than the present distances of the planets, and the immediate result is an approach to the sun within a distance at which its attraction is balanced by the outward gaseous pressure and the centrifugal force. The incipient planet, animated with the greater angular velocity of the stratum to which it originally belonged, revolves now at a rate slightly superior to that of the new medium in which it finds itself. Hence the possibility of its sweeping up and annexing fresh matter as it proceeds along the coils of its narrowing orbit, until a point is reached when the planet, or evenssun, has drawn in all the matter which stood in its way, and gravity alone exactly balances cen- trifugal force. The planet then revolves in an orbit sensibly the same as at present. As the planet in approaching the sun has encountered strata of in- creasing density, so that the tangential resistance on the side towards the sun has always been greater than on the opposite side, it is easy to see that a planetary or ‘ direct” rotation must be set up in the direction of revolution. In order to explain the rotation of Neptune, which is probably, like its satellite, retrograde, it is necessary to suppose that the birth of the planet was preceded by the formation of a ring, while Uranus is regarded as a “limiting instance” between the annular and the nuclear methods of generation. Ingenious explanations are derived for the rapid motion of Phobos, the inner satellite of Mars, for the swifter rotation of the larger planets, and for the increase in their density and decrease in their mass as we approach the sun. Mars is an exception; but there are reasons for thinking it of later formation, so that when it came into existence the space allotted for its growth was already greatly exhausted, owing chiefly to the powerful attraction of Jupiter. While many of Father Braun’s conclusions will not be accepted by cosmogonists, his work forms an able contribution to the subject. Its appearance may be said to mark the definite abandonment by sound thinkers of the annular method of planet and satellite formation, and gradually it is becoming clear that ‘ while the various members of the solar family owned unquestionably a common origin, they can scarcely be said to have had a common history.” Janssen delivered an interesting discourse bearing upon the same sub- ject at Paris, October 25, 1887—‘‘The age of the stars,” in which he reviewed the steps leading us to the belief that each star must have a beginning, a period of activity, a decline, and an end; and he points ASTRONOMY. At out that upon the hypothesis that stars of higher temperature will last longer than stars of lower, we must conclude, from the testimony of the spectroscope, that Sirius, Vega, and the greater number of the stars visible to the naked eye are in their youth, while Aldebaran, Arcturus, and our own sun have long since passed their period of greatest activity. NEBULA AND STAR-CLUSTERS. Dr. Dreyer’s new general catalogue of nebulie and clusters of stars is essentially a new edition of Sir Jolin Herschel’s catalogue, revised, cor- rected, and brought down to December, 1887. It therefore forms a com- plete list of all known nebulie, and is of the greatest value to observers, Herschel’s General Catalogue was published in 1864 and contained 5,079 objects. D’Arrest’s work, published three years later, gave the means of correcting many of the errors in the earlier observations, and in 1876 Dr. Dreyer compiled a supplement from the material at that time avail- able. Recent discoveries have given rise to a demand for a second sup- plement which has been wisely met by recasting the whole work. *The present catalogue contains 7,540 objects, the positions being given in right ascension to seconds of time and in declination to tenths of a min- ute of are. The epoch of the first general catalogue and of D’Arrest’s final positions—1860—has been retained ; precessions are given for 1880. There is an index to published figures of nebulze and clusters, and an appendix giving the places of new nebule published too late to be in- corporated in the catalogue itself. Further additions in numbers or in accuracy of positions might, perhaps, now be made from the recently published lists of Bigourdan, von Engelhardt, Ginzel, Stone, and Swift. The largest refractor devoted almost exclusively to the observation of nebulie is the 26-inch equatorial of the Leander MeCormick Observatory. Professor Stone’s object is to obtain as accurate positions as possible and thus to establish the means of detecting the proper motion of these objects if any exists. His working list embraces all nebulze north of —0° which are as bright as the fourteenth magnitude. Dr. Dreyer has submitted to a rigid examination all reported cases of variability or proper motion in nebulie, and concludes that in not one case can either be considered as well established. It seems that the only well-anthenticated changes are changes of brightness only, while we so far do not possess any clear evidence of change of form or change of place. Detection of new nebulee by photography.—Protessor Pickering in order to test the efficacy of photography in the discovery of new nebule has compared the number of nebulee shown in a series of photographs of the regions about the great nebulee in Orion with the number in the Same region given by Dreyer’s catalogue. The instrument employed was the Bache telescope, which has a photographic doublet with an aperture of 8 inches and focal length of 44 inches. Hach plate covered aregion 10 degrees square, the great nebulie being about the center ; 128 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. the definition was good in a central circular area about 7 degrees in diameter. Fourteen of the objects photographed are contained in Dreyer’s catalogue; four in the catalogue are not photographed; twelve that are photographed are not in the catalogue. Professor Pickering concludes that in carrying out the same proportion we might expect to discover four or five thousand such objects by photographing the whole sky; but, he adds, ‘there is one consideration that may seriously modify this conclusion. The successive improvements in photography have continually increased the limits of the nebula in Orion. These plates show that it not only includes the sword-handle, ¢, z, and @, but a long nebulosity extends south from ¢€, others surround this star, while others, both north and south, indicate that perhaps the next mcerease in sensitiveness of our plates will join them all in a vast nebula many degrees in length.” Herr von Gothard has obtained extraordinary results with a 10-inch reflector. His photographs, though small, show a great richness of de- tail; several of them are reproduced in an article by Dr. Vogel, in No. 2854 of the Nachrichten. The photographs of clusters Dr. Vogel was able to enlarge without great difficulty, but for the nebule it was neces- sary to resort to drawings; among the latter the reproduction of a photograph of the spiral nebula in Canes Venatici is particularly inter- esting. The Ring Nebula in Lyra.—Professor Holden reports that nearly all the nebule examined with the 36 inch Lick telescope show a multitude of new details of structure. In the Ring Nebula in Lyra, for example, Lassell’s 4-foot reflector and the Washington 26-inch refractor show thirteen stars in an oval outside the ring, and only one star within it, while the Lick glass shows twelve stars within the ring or projected on it, and renders it obvious that the nebula consists of a series of ovals or ellipses—first the ring of stars, then the outer and inner edges of the nebulosity; next a ring of faint stars round the edges of the inner ring, and last a number of stars situated on the various parts of the nebu- losity and outer oval. Mr. Roberts’ photographs of the Ring Nebula in Lyra, the Great Nebula in Andromeda, and others, also require special mention. - The Great Nebula in Orion.—In the spectrum of this nebula, Dr. Cope- land has observed a new line apparently identical with D;, wave-length 587.4. The occurrence of this line in the spectrum of a nebula is of great interest as affording another connecting link between gaseous nebule and the sun and stars with bright-line spectra, especially with that remarkable class of stars, of which the first examples were de- tected by Wolf and Rayet in the constellation Cygnus. The Pleiades.—The initial volume of publications of the Yale Observa- tory is a valuable memoir by Dr. W. L. Elkin on the positions of the principal stars in the Pleiades as determined with the new Yale heliom- eter, and it is, we believe, the first heliometer work done in this coun- BP PO Oe on a § ASTRONOMY. 129 try. Dr. Elkin has taken in all the stars in the Durchmusterung down to 9.2 magnitude, which may reasonably be said to fall within the group, and in so doing he has rejected one of the stars used by Bessel in his celebrated work with the KoOnigsberg heliometer as too faint for accu- rate measurement, but he has added seventeen stars to Bessel’s list of fifty-three, so that he has taken sixty-nine stars in all. Two practically independent methods of measurement. were adopted. The first plan was to measure the distance of each star of the group from each one of four reference stars situated so as to form a quadrilateral symmetrically placed about the group; the position of each star thus depended on measures of distance alone. The second plan was to measure the posi- tion-angle and distance of each star from 7 Tauri or Alcyone, the cen- tral star of the group. The work on the quadrilateral plan was com- menced in March, 1884, and lasted to December—the measures from 7 Tauri occupied the first three and last four months of 1855, the mean epoch of the second triangulation falling about a year later than that of the first. Dr. Elkin gives a brief description of the instrument with his method of using it, and this is followed by a determination of the instrumental constants and by the observations in detail. The defini- tive results are then critically compared with Bessel’s heliometer work and with the filar micrometer measures of Wolf at Paris and Pritchard at Oxford. The comparison with the KGnigsberg observations shows that for the six largest stars there is a striking community of mo- tion, both in direction and in amount, and it is remarkable that this general direction of drift is very similar to the reversed absolute motion of Alcyone as given by Newcomb. Dr. Elkin thinks the coincidence is sufficiently close for two of the stars at least, and possibly for the other four, to warrant the conclusion that they are only optically members of the group. Of the remaining twenty-six of the thirty-two stars show- ing some displacement since 1840, the epoch of Bessel’s catalogue, the distribution of the direction of motion is by no means equabte, six stars only having an easterly motion, while twenty move towards the west, and here too there seems to be a tendency to community of drift in cer- tain groups in the same part of the cluster. “The general character of the internal motions of the group appears to be thus extremely minute. If for the six stars mentioned as with more or less probability not belonging to the group this proves to be the case, there are but five stars for which the displacement amounts to over one second in forty-five years. The bright stars especially seem to form an almost rigid system, as for only one is there really much evi- dence of motion, and in this ease (star b)*the total amount is barely one second per century. The hopes of obtaining any clew to the internal mechanism of this cluster seem therefore not likely to be realized in an immediate future.” Professor Hall has measured with the 26-inch Washington refractor the positions of sixty-three small stars in the group relatively to the H. Mis, 142 9 130 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. brighter stars determined by Bessel and Elkin, thus furnishing further data for testing in the future any movement that may be going on in the system. Since the discovery of the nebula in the Pleiades around the star Maia, the Henrys have been at work perfecting their apparatus, and upon repeating theireexamination of the Pleiades with an exposure of four hours, and very sensitive plates, they have defined with considera- ble detail a great mass of cosmic matter covering a large part of the group. The most interesting detail is a straight nebulous filament 35/ to 40/ long and only 3” to 4” wide projecting from the main mass in an east and west direction. This filament passes over seven stars, which it seems to connect like beads on a string; a slight change in direction takes place where it meets the largest star. The plate contains nearly twice as many stars as the {rst plate—about 2,000 down to the eight- eenth magnitude. Excellent photographs of the Pleiades have also been taken by Mr. Roberts near Liverpool with an 18-inch silvered-glass reflector. ASTRONOMICAL CONSTANTS. Constant of precession.—Dr. Ludwig Struve has deduced a new value - of the constant of precession and the motion of the solar system in space from an elaborate comparison of recent Pulkowa catalogues with Brad- ley’s observations as reduced by Auwers, thus obtaining an interval of a century—1755.0 to 1855.0—for the determination of proper motions. These proper motions, computed with O. Struve’s precession constant (of 1841), were affected by the apparent displacement due to the motion of the solar system in space and by the error of the assumed precession constant. They thus furnished a means of determining these two quantities. After rejecting seven stars which seem to be exceptionally near us, the remaining 2,509 are divided into 120 groups, forming 240 equations of condition to be solved by least squares for the determination of the five unknowns, the co-ordinates X, Y, Z of the sun’s “goal” (or point in space towards which the sun is traveling, to adopt the term introduced by Professor Newton) and the corrections Am and An to Bessel’s con- stants. The following table shows the resulting value of the luni-solar precession compared with that of previous calculators: Bessel cece cee DU. 73655 Boltezescce see 50,/73584 O. Struve ....50. 3798 Bolte.scacseee 50. 3570 INiymén 22 -f) 50. 3269 Bolterseeeeee 50. 3621 Dreyer .----.-50. 3820 L.Struve-.....50. 3514 At the end of the paper the author treats of the planetary precession and the secular variation, and gives a list of stars whose proper mo- tions as found by him differ from those deduced by Auwers from Green- wich and Berlin observations. The results obtained for the motion of the solar system are quoted elsewhere in this report. 8 AS a ASTRONOMY. elo Constant of aberration.—Herr Kiistner of the Berlin Observatory has made a determination of the constant of aberration with a 44 inch broken-back, universal instrument, employing what is commonly known in this country as Talcott’s method. THis result is a correction of —0’.132 to Struve’s constant of aberration with the sinall probable error of +0’.011. A further exhaustive discussion of the observations has led the author to conclude that the latitude of his instrument in the spring of 1834 was 0.204+0”.02L greater than in the spring of 1885—im- portant evidence upon the mooted question of the variability of ter- restrial latitudes. ; Professor Hall has recently reduced a series of observations of @ Lyre made with the prime vertical instrument at the U. S. Naval Ob- servatory between the years 1862 and 1867. These observations had been designed to give corrections to the as#imed values of the constants of nutation and aberration, and an absolute determination of the paral- lax of the star. The series was not continued for a sufficient period for the first purpose, and a preliminary examination having shown that a negative parallax would result, the work has been set aside till the present time. The mean resulting parallax from the 436 observations is z=—0”".07940".0134, and the constant of aberration = 20’.4506+ 0.0142. On account of the uncertainty in the parallax, Professor Hall has in- troduced a parallax of +0/.15, about the mean value indicated by nu- merous observations of this star, and he then obtains a constant of aberration =20//.4542+0/.0144. To this result he gives the preference and deduces for the solar parallax 8/’.810+ 0/’.0062, adopting Hansen’s value of the mean anomaly of the earth and eccentricity, Clarke’s value for the equatorial radius of the earth, and Michelson and Newcomb’s determination of the velocity of light, 186,325 miles per second. Herr Nyrén has found in a discussion of the Pulkowa observations of the difference of right ascension between Polaris and its companion, evidence to confirm the hypothesis, upon which determinations of the aberration constant rest, that the velocity of light is independent of the state whether of motion or rest of the luminous body. On the other hand the experiments of Michelson and Morley seem to throw some doubt upon Fresnel’s hypotheses that the ether is at rest except in transparent media, and that there it participates in the motion i Naa Frog : : Bs of translation in the ratio yee tt being the index of refraction. “ Loewy’s method of determining the constant of aberration from differ- ential measurements of the changes in the distances of suitably-chosen pairs of stars is to be tested at the Paris Observatory with an equatorial coudé, and by Professor Comstock at the Washburn Observatory with Suitable apparatus fitted to the 6-inch equatorial. The method is essen- tially to bring the two stars, which may be, say, 90 degrees apart in the ‘sky, into the field of an equatorial by reflection from the surfaces of a ‘ula Loz RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. double mirror at the objective: any change in the distance between the two stars can then be measured with extreme nicety. Itshould perhaps be mentioned that Houzeau claimed to have suggested this principle in 1871. Diurnal nutation.—M. Niesten, in applying Folie’s formule for diurnal nutation to the Greenwich observations of y Draconis, has found a posi- tive parallax where Main and Downing obtained a negative value, and a constant of aberration more closely agreeing with that generally adopted. Introducing similar corrections in Hall’s discussion of the prime verti- cal observations of a Lyre has, however, had no appreciable effect, STAR-CATALOGUES AND CHARTS. Paris Catalogue.—The first two volumes of the great work undertaken by Leverrier a.third of a cegtury ago, the re-observation of the stars of Lalande’s catalogue, have recently been published. The first volume is the first installment of the catalogue proper, viz, stars from 0" to 6" of right ascension, observed during the years 1837 to 1881; the second volume gives the separate observation® Each series when complete will extend to four volumes. The observations were made with the five meridian instruments of the Paris Observatory, and inelude some 20,000 or 30,000 observations made between 1857 and 1854; they have there- fore been divided into three periods, 183753, 185467, and 1868~81, and severally reduced to the mean epochs 1845, 1860, or 1875. Obser- vations subsequent-to 1881, about one-fourth of the entire number, will be published separately. The present section of the catalogue contains 7,245 stars, and represents about 80,000 observations in both elements. It gives for each of the three periods the number of observations, the mean date, the right ascension and north polar distance reduced to the mean epoch, and a comparison with Lalande. The precessions for 1875. are also added. The introduction, by M. Gaillot, who has superin- tended the reduction, contains a discussion of the probable errors of the observations, and is followed by a comparison of the present catalogue with Auwers’ Bradley, and an important investigation by M. Bcssert of the proper motions of a large number of stars, followed by a table of errors in Lalande’s catalogue which the present and other catalogues have brought to light. . Cincinnati Zone Catalogue.—Professor Porter has published the re- sults of observations made with a 3-inch transit instrument, at the Cin- cinnati Observatory, upon 4,050 stars between the declinations —18° 50! and —22° 20’, during the years 1885 to 1887. The faintest stars were of about 8.5 magnitude, and nearly all the stars were observed three times. The observations were made in zones, the telescope being clamped. The transits which were recorded by the chronograph were generally taken over five wires, and two biseetions were made in declination when- ever time allowed. The probable errors of a single observation are + 08.123 and + 1.”84. An appendix gives the proper motion of sev- enty-five stars deduced from a comparison with other catalogues, ASTRONOMY. ees Dunsink Catalogue.—TVhe sixth part of the Dunsink observations is devoted to a catalogue of 1,012 stars, between —2° and —23° declina- tion, observed with the meridian circle from 1881 to 1885. The standard stars employed are those of the Berlin Jahrbuch, and the observations are reduced to Auwers’ system. The mean right ascensions and deeli- nations, with the annual precessions for the epoch 1885.0, the mean epoch, and the number of observations are given. Pulkowa.—V olume Xit contains a catalogue for 1865.0 of the principal stars, to the fourth magnitude—381 in ntumber—as far as 15 degrees south declination deduced from observations in the years 1861-1872. ‘The for- mation of a catalogue of these stars for the epoch 1845.0 was the first piece of work completed by this observatory, and the present work is thus enhanced in value by being an almost exact repetition of that un- dertaken twenty years before. Auwers’ new reduction of Bradley.—Thehird volume of Auwers’ new reduction of Bradley, which has been five years in going through the press, was finally published in 1888. This volume contains, in addition to the catalogue proper, tablgg giving the quantities in the reduction to the apparent place that depend upon the star’s position, and a compar- ison of Bradley’s positions, reduced to 1865, with Berlin and Greenwich observations of about the same date. The catalogue contains 3,268 stars, and gives for each star the magnitude, right ascension, and dee- lination for 1775.0, corrections to the Fundamenta of Bessels, number of observations, epoch, precessions for 1755, 1810, and 1865, proper mo- tions, references to Greenwich catalogues, and to double-star cata- logues, where the star was double, and a column of notes. An important list of 480 stars to be used as fundamental stars for zone observations between —20° and —80° declination, is published by Dr. Auwers in the Monthly Notices for June, 1887. Dr. C. H. F. Peters has contributed two valuable papers to the third volume of the Memoirs of the National Academy of Sciences; the first is a critical examination of all data bearing on Flamsteed’s twenty-two “missing” stars, for each of which a plausible explanation is found; and the second paper is a list of corrigenda in the catalogues, O. Arg. S., Bonn vi, Weisse (1 and 2), Riimker, Schjellerup, Baily’s Lalande zones, Yarnall, Glasgow, Santiago, and Geneva. : A very useful index to stars in Airy’s six Greenwich catalogues not found in Flamsteed—the work of Miss Lamb—will be found in the fifth volume of publications of the Washburn Observatory. Astronomische Gesellschaft Zones.—The following notes condensed from the reports presented at the meeting of the Gesellschaft in August, 1887, show the progress of the work at that time: Kasan, 80°-75°.—The second volume of observations has been printed, and the reduc- tions to 1875.0 and the formation of the catalogue have been begun. Dorpat, 75°-70°.—Partly printed. Christiania, 70°-65°.—Greater part printed. 134 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Helsingfors-Gotha, 65°-55°.—Catalogue finished to the precessions; 0" ready for press. Cambridge (Harvard), 55°-60°.—Reductions nearly completed. Bonn, 50°-40°.—Reductions well advanced. Lund, 40°-35°.—T wo-thirds reduced to 1875.0. Leiden, 35°-30°.—Zones printed, and precessions for catalogue partly finished. Cambridge (England), 30°-25°.—Observations nearly complete; reductions proceeding rapidly. : Berlin, 25°-20°.—Reduetions nearly finished. Berlin, 20°-15°.—Reductions under way. Leipzig, 15°-5°.—Observations practically finished. Albany, 5°-1°.—In press. Nicolaief, +19 .. . —2°.—Observations finished; reductions progressing. Observations of zero stars for the zones —2° to —23° 10’ are in progress at Leiden, Strassburg and Karlsruhe. Two of these zones have been undertaken in the United States—9° 50’ to—14° 20’ at Cambridge and —18° 50’ to —18° 10’ at Washington. Star-charts.—Sections m1 and tv of the Southern Durchmusterung charts (sheets 48, 53-63) have been published, bringing to a close that most valuable work. Professor Schénfel@& has issued with these last numbers a short list of errata detected, which is reprinted in No. 2834 of the Nachrichten. e A series of charts embracing all the stars visible to the naked eye— that is, down to about the sixth and one-half magnitude—has been pub- lished by Mr. Cottam, and has been very highly complimented. There are in all thirty-six sheets, the scale being one-third of an inch to one degree of &*great circle. Another useful book of the same kind is Klein’s New Star-Atlas, which has appeared in both English and Ger- man editions. There are eighteen maps, containing about the same number of stars as Mr. Cottam’s, and giving also all the nebule and clusters visible in telescopes of moderate power—a great help to comet hunters. STELLAR PARALLAX. Parallax of a Tauri.—Prof. Asaph Hall has published in No. 156 of the Astronomical Journal, a determination of the purallax of ¢ Tauri from a series of observations with the 26-inch Washington equatorial, extending from October 2, 1886, to March 15, 1887. The comparison- star was an eleventh magnitude companion distant about 116”, in posi- tion angle 34°.5. The resulting values of the relative parallax are: From measures of position angle, 7=+0/.163-+0.0409; and from measures of distance, 7=+0/.035+0/.0431. The mean value of the parallax of a Tauri from these observations is, therefore, az—0"'.102+ 0.0296. Prof. O. Struve, using the same comparison-star, recently obtained a value nearly five times as great, namely, 7=0/7.5164-0/.057. Parallax of = 1516.—Dr. L. de Ball, of the observatory of the Univer- sity of Liége, has determined in a similar manner the parallax of the > ta ASTRONOMY. 135 brighter component (which has a sensible proper motion) of this optic- ally double star. From measures of position angle he finds 7=-+0”.091 +0”.013; and from measures of distance, 7=+0”.11210/.010. The mean result is 7=+0/.104+. 0.008. Parallax of = 2398.—A new investigation of the parallax of the double star > 2398 has been made by Dr. Lamp, based upon observations be- tween May 20, 1885, and March 15, 1887. In this he not only obtains a very satisfactory confirmation of his previous value of the parallax (0.34) of the larger star, but he is able to show that the two stars are at practically the same distance. For the principal star he finds the annual parallax equal to 0”.3520+0.0140; for the smaller, 0/.3545 +0.0131; or for the mean, 0/.35340".014. The magnitudes are 8.7 and 8.2, respectively, and the common proper motion about —0%.17 in right ascension, and +1/.90 in declination annually. Parallax of first-magnitude stars in the northern hemisphere.—Dr. Elkin has completed his heliometer measures for the determination of the parallax of the ten stars of the first magnitude in the northern hemi- sphere, and summarizes his yesults in the following table: -. _| No. of No. of >. Star. Parallax. | ? KOU compara- | obserya- 7 Ries Soe e Mal Taye stars.| tions. ees Mf ‘t | Ml DANAUS eRe 2 ele a aisccice eabic cs +0.116 | -{0. 029 6 | 64 0. 202 Ge INCI SEN G5 8385 cS CCU REO DIESoE +0. 107 | . 047 2 16 0. 442 GaORIOUIS et o aeieeeaicic sh a/are oi oi='s —0. 009 . 049 Oe aed 16 0. 022 MACATIS MIM OLIS) 21> ==0)s5.0'---- +0. 266 . 047 2 16 1257 eG SHIHOLGM sees |< - 0 --- - +40. 068 047 2 16 0. 628 a wCOMIN ease acess dass 5 -++0. 093 . 048 4 15 0. 255 as OO LISiesset Gc ire ae ase(o ain Si -+-0. 018 . 022 10 59 2. 287 Ge b\ its se Acs Spee ECS eee +0. 034 . 045 2 30 0. 344 DIMAS epee ee oe ae cise eins sc +0. 199 . 047 4 16 0. 647 GAC VOUMee cas Saiscins ofc nc ce m= —0(, 042 . 047 4 16 0.010 The mean of the ten parallaxes gives for the mean parallax of a first- magnitude star, +0/.039 +0’.015, a result according well with the values deduced by Gyldén (0/.084) and Peters (0.102). The probable errors include an estimation of the probable systematic error of the measures. They are therefore considerably larger than those generally assigned to such results, which, as a rule, only take into account the mere casual error of observation. It will be seen on inspection of the table that of the ten stars six may be said to give indications of a measurable parallax, but in only two cases, a Canis Minoris and a Aquilie, are the values in any degree remarkable, and these confirm closely results of former investigators ; Auwers and Wagner having obtained +0.240 +0/.029 and +0/.299 +0’.038 respectively for Procyon, and W. Struve +0/.181 +.0/.094 for Altair. On the other hand, the next two largest results, those for 136 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. a Bootis and a Aurige, do not confirm the large values found by O. Struve, + 0.516 and +0/.305; but in the ease of the former star there is a close agreement with Hall, who got +0.102 +0/.030, and there seems to be but little doubt that the Pulkowa value is largely in error. Of the four stars where the parallactic displacement has been inap- preciable, Arcturus, with its large proper motion of over 2’, second only to that of a Centauri in all of the 200 brightest stars down to the fourth magnitude, is especially note-worthy. The minuteness of the parallax is beyond doubt, depending, as it does, on five pairs of com- parison stars, all in reasonable agreement, and it can not be considered as seriously at variance with the results previously obtained by Peters and Johnson, +0127 +0/.073 and +0/.138 +0/.052 respectively, when their liability to systematic error is taken into account. The Yale result for a Lyre does not fall in well with those hitherto deduced for this star. If we commence at the epoch of W. Struve and neglect the earlier attempts to find the absolute parallax, we have the following list of values: * | Parallax. Evopalle error, : n J hg es tt all ae | if vf W. Struve, at Dorpat, 1837-40 ...---. +-0.261 |--0. 025 Peters; atpeulkowa, 1e4235. ae oes | . 103 . 053 O. Struve, at Pulkowa, 1851-753 ...... sel, . 009 Johnson, at Oxford, 1-54-55 ......-.. . 154 . 046 Briinnow, at Dubiin, 186869 ........ woke 010 Brinnow, ab Dublin’ 870.2 os eae . 188 . 033 Hall, at Washington, 1880-’81 --..-.-- . 134 . 0055 from which a parallax of about +0/.17 would seem well assured. The pair of comparison stars used by [Elkin are very symmetrical, and so large a value would seem incompatible with the heliometer measures. Photographic determination of stellar parallax.—Professor Pritchard, of the Oxford University Observatory, pursuing his experimental work upon the determination of stellar parallax by the help of photography, has published the following interesting results. The last three are pro- visional, having been determined from only six months’ observations : ay 4 Parallax. ] See Mt | dl BE OA eto eta BECO BER eC ONS Sao CGOEE Gace -+0. 4289 |--0. 0180 (SEC Circ i eee ae Bei een aos Batcad RC Se) en aUiGy BR CABSIOP CE eee sates ae eee eee .0356 | — .0250 WO] sir Sumas ese Sah oe Sh ee . 052 . 0314 CAC ASSIONE Bt sans ce Sarseee ee eee eee OS . 042 jor W@assiopesy.1 4062 tc eee . 187 . 039 97) WC AGSIOP Gr rtieere saya settee eee el eee OO) . 047 eee cee ern arse ee 2 EE ES ee us =e ae ae. ASTRONOMY. iGo ( For comparison we may cite the following results obtained by other astronomers working with equatorials and heliometers in the usual way: | GINCyomieee= os. BesselelcdO emcee nee wees seas +0!" 348 AUIVETS pIIBGB Ns. eee cece eat 1 OD Od Ballet SiS secciss= ceceisccsrcee.c +0 .468 Tele sei Stel 0) Akh Sr eee ere eta 8 +0 .261 [EO ASS OM OD tyeaal- ls OSSC! tars = Syorspern Sie aera eles cue =i —0 .12 SEU Olgsepe sects saree hese te reine +0 .342 OATS seen cleo Windenaulsses sees hese eae -+0 .144 Struve and) Peters:...:-=. <=... 0.172 OVATE PP eters... .ccnin= cece +0 . 067 Professor Pritchard lays stress upon the faet that each photographie plate must be considered as carrying its own scale; and, due regard being paid to the unavoidable, though slight, variations of scale in the different plates, he is of opinion that in this delicate class of work pho- tography will give as accurate results as any other known method. For 61 Cygni the value given rests upon the measurement of three hundred and thirty plates, taken upon eighty-nine nights; each com- ponent was referred to four @mparison stars. On each of fifty-three nights four photographic plates were taken of » Cassiopex, the ex- posures varying from five to ten minutes. Experiments seemed to indi- cate, however, that sufficiently approximate results, with a great saving of labor, would be obtained by confining the observations to about five nights in each of four periods of the year indicated by the position of the parallactic ellipse. Professor Pritchard proposes to apply this method systematically to all those stars between magnitudes one and one-half and two and one-half which attain at Oxford a suitable alti- tude; and he hopes to obtain good results for all of these stars that have a parallax not less than the thirtieth of a second of are. , DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE STARS. Extension of the law of gravitation to stellar systems.——Professor Hall, in a discussion of this question in the Astronomical Journal, after a re- view of the various speculations upon the subject, says: ‘*The weakness of the proof that the Newtonian law governs the motions of double Stars arises from two sources. In the first place, the errors of obser- vation have a large ratio to the quantities measured. This condition makes it difficult to compute the orbits with much accuracy, or we may satisfy the observations with very different elements. - - - The insufficiency in the data can only be removed by further observation. Since there is no theoretical difficulty in the way, the continuation of the observations of double stars and the improvement of methods of ob- servation will, in time, give the means for the accurate determination of their apparent orbits. The theoretical difficulty in proving the law of Newton for double stars can not be overcome. But we can increase the probability of the existence of this law by determining more orbits 138 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. and those that are very differently situated. If the law prove satis- factory in all cases, we shall have a probability-of its universality in- creasing with the progress of astronomy.” But, although this proba- bility may be very great, it can not constitute a proof offering the char- acter of experimental certainty which clothes the law of Newton itself in our planetary system. A serious difficulty is encountered in the enormous velocities with which quite a number of stars appear to be moving through space, “run- away” Groombridge—1830, 4. Cassiopex, 6 Hydri, a Bootis, and others. Some of these velocities are comparable to that of a comet in close prox- imity to the sun, but in most cases there is no visible object near the one in motion to which we can ascribe an attractive force, acting accord- ing to the Newtonian law, which would produce the velocity observed, unless we assume enormous masses. An interesting article upon this subject is contributed by M. Tisse- rand to the Bulletin Astronomique for January, 1887. Milan Double star observations.—Professor Schiaparelli has published, in the Milan volume 33, his first series of double star observations made at that observatory with the 8-inch refractor from 1874 to 1885. There are four hundred and sixty-five stars in his list, and in most of them the components are less than 5” apart. In an appendix are given the mean results for a number of the closest pairs as measured with the 18-inch refractor. With this instrument he discovered that the princi- pal star of ¢ Hydrve is itself a very close double, the magnitudes of the two components being 4 and 5.5, and distance 0.2 or 0.25. The first part of the volume contains a detailed description of the optical per- formance of the 8-inch refractor, a discussion of the errors of the mi- erometer and of the accidental errors of observation, and a very full comparison with Dembowski’s measures. ‘The differences in the deter- mination of position angle due to the varying inclination of the line joining the two stars to the line of the observer’s eyes are also investi- gated, but the reversion prism was not used. Professor Schiaparelli finds that his measures of distance are free from systematic errors, due to personality, but his position angles have a tendency to be small as compared with those of other observers. Professor Hough has published a catalogue of two hundred and nine new double stars discovered and measured by himself with the 183-ineh refractor of the Dearborn Observatory. Short lists of new doubles discovered with the McCormick 26-inch, and the Lick 36-inch, have also been published. Burnham’s list of his discoveries with the 36-inch re- fractor in three months is very interesting, containing as it does new companions to y Cassiope, 11 mag., 2.2 distant; and a Tauri, 12 mag., 2.3 distant. The following table contains the results of receat computations of the orbits of binary stars. The star 6 Equulei is of especial interest, as the period of eleven and a half years assigned to it is the shortest of — ee ee t ASTRONOMY. 139 any known pair. The elements, however, are only to be regarded as provisional, For 85 Pegasi, Mr. Schaeberle has deduced proper motions of +08.833 in right ascension, and —1’’.005 in declination. Elements of binary stars. | | 20si- | “ . . ; | Time of Het | pie Inch Eccen- eas | Mean Berica ‘ Star. penitent noite | Bovine. maior | CHCiey | major | ee years Computer. | | wacky : Red fis Massa a | ° | ° ° | | " } 6 Equulei........ 1892. 03 24.05 | 26.61 | 81.75 | 0.2011 | 0.406 |.--..-... 11.478 | Wrublewsky. B Delphini...--.-. 1868. 850 | 10.938) 220. 952) 61.582 0.09622) 0. 46000) sondoaSe 16.955 | Celoria. SIP OTAST 2.52225 | 1884.00 | 306:1 | 70.3° | 68.6 | 0.35 OXOG eA ore 22.3 Schaeberle. OB ooo reSees | 1878.5198 24. 847| 129. 454) 75. 436 0. 30863) 0. WES Sobneans 34.6183] Celoria. ROO Osa m.cinis a \-\- 1882. 857 | 2 130) 21.899) 65. 847, 0.58360) 0. 88549) sODogOS £6. 653 | Celoria. 70 (p) Ophiuchi..| 1807.65 | 120. i | 171.8 | 58.5 | 0.4912} 4.50 |—4.098 | 87.84 | Gore. 14 (z) Orionis.....| 1959.05 99.6 | 302.7 45.0, | 0.2465 | 1.22 |—1.69 {190.48 Gore. EV Se eee 1791. 98 87.6 | 185.4 40.9 | 0.4498 | 2.05 [41.30 [276.92 | Gore. p Eridani ...-.--. 1823.55 | 135.0 | 240.0 38.5 | 0. 674 6.96 |—1.19 |302.37 Gore. NOLO ese 1787.9 | 105.5 | 152. & | 38. 1 | 0.4424 | 1.53 | 40. 9638/3738. 5 Glasenapp. 2 UES Geass oesene 1716.0 | 166, 5 | 93.6 | 46.0 | 0.229 | 1.64 |—0. 741 /485.8 Gore. The multiple star € Cancri.—Professor Seeliger’s recent investigations have confirmed the results of his earlier work, and those obtained by Struve in 1874. ‘The threestars A, B, and C have the magnitudes re- spectively, 5.0, 5.7, and 5.3. The proper motion of the system amounts in a century to +10°%.6 in right ascension, and to —11” in declination. The close pair, A and B, have a motion round each other in about sixty years; their apparent distance varying from about 0.6 to 1.1; whilst C, the more distant companion, has moved through about 55° of posi- tion angle round the other two since Herschel’s observations in 1781, its distance never very greatly varying from 54’. The motion of A and B round their common center of gravity does not appear to be dis- turbed to any appreciable extent by the influence of C, which is so placed as not to affect their apparent relative motions, even though a very con- siderable mass be assigned to it, and as a fact Professor Seeliger finds, for / the most probable value of the mass of CG, - se = 2.386, where 1, m, and “m’ are the masses of A, B, and € respectively. But there is a periodi- cal retrogression of © itself which is most easily accounted for by sup- posing the presence of a close companion, one hitherto undetected, and therefore either entirely dark or but faintly luminous. The distance of this companion is probably only a few tenths of a second, the distance of C from the point, s., round which it appears to revolve, and which may reasonably be assumed to be the center of gravity of itself and of D, the as yet undiscovered fourth member of the family, being only about one- fifth of a second. The entire group may then be considered as a double double. 140 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. VARIABLE AND COLORED STARS. Chandler's catalogue of variable stars.—The most important work upon variable stars since Schoenfeld’s “ Zweiter Catalog,” now thirteen years old, is a new catalogue published by Mr. 8. C. Chandler as Nos. 179 and 180 of the Astronomical Journal. In the absence of any later catalogue from Schoenfeld this immediately takes its place as the standard, though the author states that it is preliminary to a more complete catalogue which will embody a series of observations and definitive investigations now in hand. | An analysis of the catalogue shows that of the 225 stars comprised in it 160 are distinctly variable ; in 12 the periodic character is rather uncertainly defined ; 14 are distinctly irregular; 12 belong to the so- called nove, or have beer seen at only one appearance; and the 27 re- maining have been too little observed for the character of the variation to be properly known. Of the 160 periodical variables, epochs of both maximum and minimum are assigned for 63; maximum epochs alone for 82; minimum epochs alone for 14,9 of these being of the Algol type, while in one the period alone is given. The elements of 124 stars are the results of Mr. Ohandler’s own investigations; 22 are taken from Schoenfeld; and 14 from other computers after Mr. Chandler had care- fully confirmed them. The systematic perturbations shown by many of the periods have received attention, and the further study of this subject promises important additions to our knowledge of the causes of stellar variation. A useful novelty introduced in numbering the stars calls for unquali- fied approval. Instead of giving them consecutive numbers each is dis- tinguished by a number equal to one-tenth of the right ascension ex- pressed in time-seconds for the equinox 1900.0. In this way the numer- ation need not be disturbed by fresh discoveries. The catalogue gives in successive columns a serial number assigned in the way just described; Schoenfeld’s number; the right ascension and declination for 1855, and the annual variations; the discoverer ; date of discovery; redness on an arbitrary scale; magnitude at maxi- mum and at minimum; Greenwich mean time of maximum and mini- mum; period; remarks; and approximate place for 1900. A very ingenious method of estimating the colors was employed by Mr. Chandler; it consists in estimating the relative change in bright- ness effected in two stars by the interposition, first, of a blue and then of ared shade glass. If a red and a white star appear of the same brightness, when viewed directly, the red star will seem the fainter when the blue glass is interposed, but the brighter with the red glass; and these differences of brightness can be very precisely estimated by Argelander’s method, and they thus afford definite measures of the differences in color of the two stars on an arbitrary scale depending upon the glasses employed. Mr. Chandler finds that the effect of brightness upon the scale-estimates is imperceptible, at least between _ apes a omar ea 2) Oe aE ee we ee ee ee ASTRONOMY. 141 the second and ninth magnitudes. An important result of his obser- vations is the intimate connection shown between the length of period and the depth of color of the star; the very short-period variables are nearly white; those of longer period somewhat redder, the tint grow- ing deeper, the longer the period. Several new variable stars have been detected by Chandler, Sawyer, Espin, and others, and among them are two of more than ordinary in- terest, as they apparently belong to the well-known “ Algol-type.” The first was discovered by Mr. Chandler in the constellation Cygnus (Y Cygni), right ascension =20" 47.5; declination =+34° 14’ (DM. + 34°, 4181). Its light varies from 7.1 magnitude to about 7.9 magni- tude, and the period is probably 1¢ 11" 56™ 488, The second star re- ferred to, was discovered by Mr. Sawyer in March, 1887, in the constel- lation Canis Major, and as it is the first undoubted variable found in that constellation, it will probably be known as Rt Canis Majoris. Its position for 1887 is right ascension =7" 14™.4; declination =—16° 11’, The minimum observed by Mr. Sawyer was 6.7 magnitude, and the period is 145" 15™ 55%.) Mr. Chandler has collected the observations of U Uphiuchi, of all variables the one with shortest period and the most rapid fluctuations of light, and he finds a curious but well-marked re- tardation in the increase of brilliancy some half-hour or so after mini- mum is passed. ) 94 falls of which we know the time of day; (c) 50 or more falls of which the history is too scanty to give the time of day. He is led to the following three propositions: 1. The meteorites which we have in our cabinets, and which were seen to fall, were originally (as a class and with a very small num- ber of exceptions) moving about the sun in orbits that had inclinations less than 90°; that is, their motions were direct, not retrograde. 2. The reason why we have only this class of stones in our collections is not one wholly or even mainly dependent upon the habits of men; nor on the times when men are out of doors; nor on the places where men live; nor on any other principle of selection acting at or after the arrival of the stones atthe ground. Either the stones, which are mov- ing in the solar system across the earth’s orbit, move in general in direct orbits, or else for some reason the stones which move in retrograde orbits do not in general come through the air in solid form. 3. The perihelion-distances of nearly all the orbits in which these stones moved were not less than 0.5 nor more than 1.0, the earth’s radius-vector being unity. (Observatory 11: 331.) At the meeting of the Royal Society, November 15, 1888, Prof. G. H. Darwip read an important paper dealing with the mechanical conditions of a swarm of meteorites from a mathematical stand-point. SOLAR SYSTEM. Motion of the solar system in space.-—Dr. Ludwig Struve has made a eareful comparison of the Pulkowa catalogues for 1855 with Auwer’s re-reduction of Bradley (epoch 1755), and, as one of his results, has ob- tained a value of the motion of our system to which a good deal of in- terest attaches. As it was necessary to assume some connection be- tween the magnitude of a star and its distance, he adopted the follow- ing relative scale, regarding a star of the sixth magnitude as at the dis- tance unity: 1 (Oo 118} | 5 0. 70 2 Q.23 || 6 1. 00 x 3 0. 36 || 7 1.49 4 0.51 | 8 2.95 The result he obtains—4./’36—is then the angular motion of the sun in one hundred years, as seen from the average sixth magnitude star. The actual velocity corresponding to this is about 13 miles per second. The point in the sky towards which the sun is moving is in the constel- Cn i, bt A 8 ; ASTRONOMY. 157 lation Hercules. By combining his results with those of other astrono- mers, Struve adopts for the mean a displacement of about 5”, corres- ponding to a velocity of 15 miles per second. The point toward which the system is moving is still in Hercules, right ascension 266°.7, decli- nation +51°.0. The following table shows how the various determinations of these co- ordinates agree: A. D. Epoch. ee (0) fe) \ We 18ST oe ee SSS 260. 6 Ber Sa al ee Se een seni aeS Dope ese Soccee oo ocsccee ces dec. 245.9 SEO! A soa ecm rate |'tertere mere COURS. 535500 oriasose goo eeee ee eee 209. 2 = 30) Biase eee ee laee eee. ANGER Ps ob ae SBoS ceee0 Cnc OBC OnaeSeee 209: 9 +32. 5 1792.5 390 MOOR ees veces sci cniencces ses es 252.5 +14. 4 WZ 5 147 (0), SEU Cleo Soa ae ae 261.5 +37.6 1790 392 GRILOW ENT ase 058 655500 e5ce0E agree SesoIBbes 260. 1 +34. 4 1790 78 WIPO? 2 seme eae eSG0sS0E0 Sa De Bee e aaa 261.6 +39. 9 1800 2,163 IMIN? poecapescesd 6GsscH yoaBBd Uae Ces Saco anes 261.5 +24.7 1800 113 Danian 265 SS ee Soh ae Gee SCOR e eee 263. 7 4.25. 0 1800 1, 167 GiyWGM é+.6 scs6éh soe eobRnneb o> BOSE CE ICSeaeaee 21359) |soee eee 1800? (?) Dik is et aoe D602 57 |hee seems 1800 (?) ILic Gh? Nl ep SoCke be Soe Aae se oy Seen eee eee 269, 0 +23. 2 1860 67 IMPNG MOT SS SpuRee Ses eos cO See aee a eaee 284. 6 +31.9 1855 ? 106 LWIGEINON. 5.526806 56 BI C5o8 RIce SOC aE Ser nSaaeeE 285. 2 +48. 5 1855 , 4380 lilinsroahh Bese eees cere sensi cierce Se oc.c:5 ono om oe 262. 4 +26. 6 1810? 464 ay, SURUNT Eke, Sec ene eR a 273.3 | 127.3} 1805 2,509 TIP ANG PAR KnGe Se ogs Coeecee DEC OO eRe aires 270.1 EU Sy Wericcucosce 274 1D) Ope eta a cisciccen se sec ieine 276. 1 +26. 5 | Re naee se 274 For the magnitude of the motion in a century we have— OMS ULIMO Racer e och aa enc hc co ie RS eee Gy ues IDNA eS 6 Bache OS SOE eee ee eee See ihe, SSRUTRUCEY Gc a eR a i ag cB BP lJ 4. 36 COMIEAY Sostge See S45 Lae doe ee ee eee nae gers Soe 6. 80 IDS) eS AS OGG, eee Eco aa ee eee gen ne Creer 5. 89 as seen from a star of the sixth magnitude. SUN. Rotation time of the sun.—Mr. Crew, of Johns Hopkins University, has made a new determination of the time of revolution of the sun on its axis by comparing the wave-lengths of certain lines in the spectrum when measured in light coming from two opposite limbs of the sun. By Doppler’s principle the wave-length of the line in light from the ap- proaching limb ought to be shorter than in the light from the receding limb. The results obtained give a velocity of the photosphere at the suu’s equator of 2.437 miles per second; from this the rotation time is determined to be 25.88 days. Mr. Crew’s observations indicate an in- crease in the angular velocity of the surface with increase in the helio- graphic latitude. This result is opposed to that obtained by Carrington and Spoerer from observations of sunspots. 158 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Dr. Wilsing has found the rotation period from ovservations of faculee to be 25.23, and has detected no variation in velocity depending upon the latitude. The difficulty of identifying facule on their reappearance, and of measuring their positions with exactness, makes the result some- what doubtful. Diameter of the sun.—Dr. Auwers has made a very exhaustive dis- cussion of the sun’s horizontal and vertical diameters from the meridian observations of Greenwich, Washington, Oxford and Neuchatel with special reference to the alleged variations in the mean annual diameters following the period of the sunspot cycle. He concludes that there is no valid reason tor supposing the sun’s diameter to vary, and that the apparent changes arise from insufficiently determined personal equa- tions. Healso points out that meridian observations are quite unsuited for the determination of any possible ellipticity in the sun’s disk, and that there is no reason to conclude from these results that such ellip- ticity exists. The several mean values of the sun’s (assumed circular) diameter are: Greenyech essere ss aaecoon eo cas Oxford \sccee5,ceeae Soy Ou Oe WiishimotOnasssseesacae, 2. ilk Neuchidtellss secs ee oot The discordances are ascribed to instrumental or uneliminated per- sonal peculiarities. In a second paper Dr. Auwers discusses the apparent changes of both the horizontal and vertical diameter during the course of a year, de- duced from meridian observations, and he concludes that the periodic variations in the monthly value of the diameters result not from physical changes in the sun, but from the effect of temperature on the instruments and from difference in the quality of the telescopic images at opposite seasons of the year. Another discussion of the horizontal diameter of the sun has been made by Professor di Legge from meridian transits of the sun observed at Campidoglio from 1874 to 1883. The mean horizontal diameter at mean distance deduced from 5796 transits by four observers on 2213 days is 32’ 2/.38. Solar activity in 1887, 1888.—The decrease in spots, facula and promi- nences which was so marked during 1886, and particularly during the latter part of that year, continued in 1887, and although there was no spotless period as long as that of November, 1886, the mean spotted area for the year was much below that of the year preceding. The days of greatest spotted area were July 6,7, and 8. The agreement in the general form of the curves for spot numbers and magnetic variation Was not so close as in some previous years. The fluctuations in the num- bers and dimensions of the prominerces were less than for the spots, but they also showed a maximum in July. Facule accorded well with the prominences, neither facula nor prominences following the spots in the marked depression of November. . ASTRONOMY. 159 ° During 1888 spots were few, small and in low latitudes, and there were frequent intervals in which no spots at all were seen, longer inter- vals in fact than any since the minimum of 1879. The most prolific month as to entire spotted area, though not as to number of spots, was November, following immediately a long period of quiescence. There was a rough tendency of spots to certain solar longitudes and in lati- tude, they continued to be more numerous in the southern than in the northern hemisphere. Facule did not vary simultaneously with spots, but their diminution as compared with 1886 and 1887, was slight. They showed a very noticeable development during the secondary maximam of September, while the prominences fell off considerably both in Sep- tember and November, but attained their greatest development in March and April. Solar spectrum.—Experiments made by Professor Trowbridge and Mr. C. C. Hutchins at the Jefferson Physical Laboratory in Cambridge, have overthrown the proof brought forward in 1879 by Dr. Henry Dra- per of the existence of oxygen in the sun. They show that when suf- ficiently powerful apparatus is used to bring out minute details of the spectrum of oxygen and of the sun, the bright regions of the solar spec- trum disappear, and hence also the apparent coincidences between them and the spectrum of oxygen upon which Dr. Draper based his proof. The bright bands obtained by Dr. Draper are in fact occupied by num- erous dark lines of variable intensity. Continuing their experiments however they have been led to con- clude that there is unmistakable evidence of the existence of carbon in the sun. * In a valuable paper by Mr. C. C. Hutchins and Mr. EB. L. Holden, evidence is brought forward to show the probable existence in the sun of bismuth, silver, and platinum, while tin potassium, and lithium are more doubtful. For cadmium two perfect coincidences were found, while there was no good evidence in favor of the presence of lead cerium, molybdenum, uranium or vanadium. Prof. S. P. Langley has published in the American Journal of Science an abstract of a memoir on the invisible solar and lunar spectrum, in which he summarizes the result of investigations carried on at the Al- legheny Observatory in continuation of his previous researches on the infra-red of the solar spectrum to the extent of about three microns. By means of the improved apparatus described, the extreme infra-red solar spectrum has now been searched from three to over eighteen mic- rons; and it is shown that in this region the ratios between solar and lunar heat are completely changed from what they are in the visible spectrum. While the solar light in the latter is about five hundred thousand times that of moonlight, the solar heat received in the invisi- ble part of the spectrum is probably less than five hundred times the lunar. These studies also promise important results for meteorology, by opening to observation the bitherto unknown region of the spectrum, 160 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. in which are to be found the nocturnal and diurnal radiations, not only from the moon towards the earth, but from the soil of the earth towards space. (Natuwre.) Total eclipse of the sun, August 19, 1887.—Unusual preparations were made throughout Europe for observing this eclipse, and great popular interest was manifested in the event, but, unfortunately, very few ob- servations of value were obtained on account of the generally cloudy weather that prevailed over the whole region west of the Ural moun- tains. The central line of the eclipse first struck the earth at a point: _ 53 miles west-northwest of Leipsic, where the sun was just rising. The line of totality, which was about 135 miles wide, then crossed Germany, Russia, Siberia, China and Japan, and left the earth at a point in the Pacifie Ocean in latitude 24° 27’ north, longitude 173° 30’ east. Eclipse of the moon, January 28, 1888.—The total eclipse of the moon on January 28, 1888, presented an unusually favorable opportunity for observing the occultations of a large number of faint stars, and, in order to secure as many observations of these phenomena as possible, Dr. Déllen, of Pulkowa, prepared and sent out to the principal observa- tories in Europe and America, a list of the stars to be occulted at each. He reports that he has received three hundred and ninety-six observa- tions of disappearances and three hundred and eighty-seven of re-ap- pearances, the places of observation being so favorably situated, that he considers that there is ample material for determining the position, the diameter, and possibly the ellipticity and parallax of the moon. SOLAR PARALLAX AND THE TRANSITS OF VENUS. Professor Harkness, at the meeting of the American Association in Cleveland on August 20,1888, gave a description of the instruments and reduction processes employed by the United States Transit of Venus Commission in determining the solar parallax from the measure- ment of photographs taken at the ten American stations in December, 1882; Washington, Cedar Keys, San Antonio, Cerro Roblero, Prince- ton, and the Lick Observatory, in the United States; Santa Cruz and Santiago, South America; Wellington, South Africa, and Auckland, New Zealand. The preliminary value of the parallax deduced from the measured distances of the centres of the sun and of Venus on 1,475 photographs is <=8”.847+0".012. The American photographs in 1874 gave z=8".883+ 0.034, and the French <=8.80. The distance of the sun corresponding to the value now obtained—8”.847—is 92,385,000 miles, with a probable error of only 125,000 miles. These numbers are doubtless close approximations to the results which will be obtained from the complete discussion of all the photographs, but they cannot be regarded as final for several reasons, chief among which is the fact that the reduction of the position angles of Venus relatively to the suns center is still unfinished. The report of the committee appointed to superintend the arrange- - a ASTRONOMY. 161 ments for the expeditions sent out by the British Government to ob- serve the transit of Venus in 1882 has been published. It consists almost entirely of a discussion by Mr. Stone of the observations of con- tact. Expeditions were sent from England to Jamaica, Barbadoes, Bermuda, Cape of Good Hope, Madagascar, New Zealand, and Bris- bane, Queensland, and the observers at all these stations were success- ful, except at Brisbane, where the weather was cloudy. It will be remembered that the English committee did not feel satisfied with the photographic work in 1874, and for various reasons they deter- mined in the second transit to put their reliance entirely upon contact Naan From the observations of external contact at ingress *, Stone obtains a parallax of 8.”700+0".122; from those of internal ee at ingress, $/”.823+ 0.023; from those of internal contact at egress, 8/.855+0/.036, and from external contact at egress 8.9534 6.048. The most probable combined result he considers to be 8.8524 0.024, which corresponds to a mean distance of 92,5.0,000+ miles between the earth and sun, with an uncertainty of 250,000 miles. The fourth volume of the report of the German Transit of Venus Commission was published in 1887, under the editorship of Dr. Auwers. It contains the observations in detail made with the heliometer by various observers, both before and after the transits of 1874 and 1882, for the purpose of determining the instrumental constants. The report of the Brazilian expeditions has been printed in a quarto volume of 700 pages. Three stations were occupied: St. Thomas, in the Antilles; Olinda, Brazil; and Punta Arenas, in the Straits of Magetlan. The transit was observed by projecting the sun’s image forined by an equatorial refractor of 6.3 inches aperture upon a screen and noting the times of contact. The result given for the value of the parallax from the internal contacts is 8/’.808. Professor Hall, using 4 value of the constant of aberration 20 tb deduced from a series of observatious of a Lyrae, made at the U. Naval Observatory during the years 1862 to 167, and euaeee Michelson and Newcomb’s determination of the velocity of light, has found for the solar parallax 8/7.810 + 0/7.0062. PLANETS. MArs.—The observations of Perrotin, Terby, and Denning have con- firmed the presence of most of the so-called ‘ canals,” or narrow, dark lines, that were discovered by Schiaparelli in 1877, and at subsequent oppositions, and in some cases the gemination or doubling of the canals has been detected. Considerable interest has been aroused in regard to Mars on account of the recent changes reported in the markings upon its surface by Perrotin and others. The chief change reported was the apparent in- undation or disappearance of the “triangular continent,” to which the name of Libya has been assigned, but che report has not been contirmed H. Mis. 142 LI 162 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. by the observations of Schiaparelli, Terby, Niesten, and Holden. The observations of Professor Holden and his assistants with the 36 inch refractor began on July 16, 1888, and were continued to August 10; the planet was therefore very unfavorably situated, its diameter being less than 9’. Several of the most important canals were seen, but they were not double, appearing rather “as broad bands covering the spaces ow M. Sehiaparell’s map which are occupied by pairs of canals and by the spaces separating the members of each pair.” Professor Hall, with the Washington 26-inch refractor, has never been able to see these markings so sharply drawn by European observers. ‘The only remark- able change he noticed was the diminution in the size of the white spot at the south pole of the planet. Numerous sketches of Mars showing the canals or other markings have been published by Holden, Perrotin, Terby, and Niesten. No ad- equate explanation of the canals, or of the changes observed, has yet been offered. JUPITER'S SATELLITES.— Astronomers have always been puzzled by the discordant appearances of the satellites during transit, but more especially by the fact that the phenomena do not apply equally to all the satellites, or even in some instances to the same satellite in two suceces- sive revolutions. The fourth, for instance, as it approaches the disk of Jupiter becomes rapidly fainter till if arrives at contact. When once on the limb it shines with a moderate brilliancy for about ten or fifteen minutes, then beGomes suddenly lost to view for a similar period, and lastly reappears, but as a dark spot, which grows darker and darker until it equals the blackness of its own shadow on the planet. The ap- pearance of the second satellite, however, is entirely different, for it seems never to have been seen otherwise than pure white during transit; whereas the first and third differ yet again from the preceding two. The former is sometimes a steel-gray, and at others a little darker, whereas the latter has been seen perfectly white and yet so black as to be mistaken for the fourth. Mr. EK. J. Spitta has made a careful investi- gation of these interesting phenomena, communicating his results in a paper of some Jength, read at the meeting of the Royal Astronomical Society, in November, 1887. His experiments consisted essentially of numerous observations upon suitably prepared models representing the planet and satellites, and he concludes (see Nature 37:468, March 15, 1888) that the probable reason the fourth satellite is uniformly black during transit, when it bas passed its period of disappearance, is, that its albedo is so low as to grant the difference between it and the back- ground necessary for a body to appear black when superimposed on an- other. Its preliminary whiteness and disappearance are also shown to be a question of relative albedo, for they are due to the fact that a sphere at its limb loses so much in reflective power that up to that moment the satellite possesses sufficient albedo (as compared with the back- ground in that situation) to maintain its whiteness, So, too, with the sec- — ASTRONOMY. 163 ond satellite. Its albedo proves to be so high that it is capable of pre- serving its brilliancy throughout the entire transit. The third and first satellites evidently possess sides of different al- bedo, one high enough to maintain a brighter aspect than the other, or even, as in the case of the third, to make it appear white when one side is presented to the earth and dark when the other. Finally, to quote from the original paper, ‘it is not unreasonable to conclude that these anomalous phenomena are due to functional idiosyncrasies in the eye itself, rather than to physical peculiarities of the Jovian system.” Mr. Denning has obtained from observations of the red spot made between February 12 and August 22, 1888, a rotation of 9" 55™ 408.24, nearly one second less than the spot gave in 1885—86, though six sec- onds greater than in 1879. The value obtained for the mass of Jupiter by von Eaerdtl in his dis- cussion of Winnecke’s comet is 1: 1047.152 + 0.0136. SATURN.—The first number of a new series of publications called Supplements to the Pulkowa Observations contains an interesting me- moir by Dr. Hermann Struve on the outer satellites of Saturn. He dis- cusses his own observations made with the 15-inch refractor in the years 1884-1886 on lapetus, Titan, Rhea, and Dione, with a view to correcting the elements of these satellites, and also the values of the mass and ellipticity of Saturn. The mass of Saturn was found by Bes- sel to be 1 : 8501.64. 0.77, or with a slight correction indicated in the pres- ent paper, 1: 3502.5. Prof. Asaph Hall, on the other Mand, obtained the value 1: 3481.5+.0.54. Struve considers the rather large discordance be- tween these values due to systematic error in measuring the distance of a satellite from a limb, and his own observations consist entirely of comparisons of one satellite with another, either by differences of right ascension and north polar distance or of distance and position angle. His resulting value of the mass of Saturn agrees closely with Bessel’s, being 1:3495. The correction of the elements has been sarefully and laboriously carried out by the method of least squares. (The Observa- tory, 11: 303, July, 1888.) Mr. G. W. Hill,in his paper on the motion of Hyperion and the mass of Titan, has obtained for the latter 1: 4714, Saturn’s mass being unity. Newcomb’s corrected value, and Ormond Stone’s value, accord well with this. Uranus.—Dr. Valentiner, of the Karlsruhe Observatory, and his as- sistant, Dr. von Rebeur-Paschwitz, were able to detect in April, 1887, a slight ellipticity in the disk of the plavet Uranus, but their instrument, a 6-inch equatorial, was not of sufficient power to make satisfactory measures. NEP1LUNE.—Tisserand has shown that the progressive changes in the node and inclination of the orbit of the satellite of Neptune can be ex- plained by supposing a slight flattening of the surface of the planet; but the flattening would probably be too slight to be measured. Fur- 164 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. ther observations may enable the amount of the inclination to be more exactly determined, and at the same time will show whether the changes in question are due to this cause alone. THE MINOR PLANETS.—Seventeen of these small bodies were added to the group during the years 1887 and 1888, making the total number now known 281. The new discoveries, with approximate elements, are given in the following table. All except number 270 were below the eleventh mag- nitude, and some slight confusion at first occurred in the numbering, owing to the difficulty of distinguishing a new asteroid from one already known in the absence of a very carefully computed ephemeris. For instance, numbers 268 and 279 were at first thought to be identical with 149, Medusa; 277 with 228, Agathe; 280 with 255, Oppavia; while an asteroid deteeted by Luther on April 11, 1887, and independentiy by Coggia on April 16, proved to be 69, Hesperia, which had been looked for in vain in 1882 and 1885; and one found by Borelly on May 12, 1888, to which the number 278 was assigned, though it was suspected to be identical with 156, Xanthippe, eventually proved to be 116, Sirona. List of minor planets discovered in 1887 and 1883. g Stale ioe aes : ae eS OS) oe 5 7) eq es ; ap 9 = Sa ao oy = =) ny ko] a Number and Minneroren 5 Be Ets S z = 4 Z ce name. z Bales = A =I iS) = all aes 3 o8 Sa Si St 5 ae Ao mies = ao a ro =) ) Seal s So & 3 = 2 © oS © A 4 4 Se Uleeaie al inet A ey —— ze 2 z 1887. S o ° ue 365) ANS --n.0< Palisa, at Vienna....| Feb. 25 | 226.0] 335.4 | 25.8 | 0.26 942 Ps A Bale 266 Aline.-.-.-.. Basalt liye Ap auc cree eee a yams ed 23.8 236.3 | 13.3 16 754 2. 81 4.70 ii VAM er oor Charlois, at Nice....| May 27 | 264.3 74.0|} &0 10 768 277 | 4.62 268 Adorea ..-.-. Borrelly, at Mar-; June 9] 184.8) 121.8) 7.3 13 655 3.08 | 5.42 seilles. 269 TustM@a..... Palisa, at Vienna....| Sept. 21 | 274.6) 157.3 BRC oral 888; 2.62 | 4.23 270 Anahita ..-.| Peters,at Clinton. .| Oct. 8 | 333.1 | 254.5) 2.4 15 1090 2.20 | 3.26 271 Penthesilea.| Knorre, at Berlin ...| Oct. 13 | 24.8; 337.5 3 10 681 3. O1 D: 2b 1888. | 272 Antonia ..-.| Charlois, at Nice:-..| Feb. 4; 21.4 37.0) 4.6 03 770 2 hie | weal 273 Atropos ....| Palisa,at Vienna -. | Mar. 8 | 285.0) 158.8 | 20.8 14 974 | 2.37] 3.64 iA NAOMI ater | ose CO = astel= ainlaleja)e 2 = Apr. 3) 212.8 93.6 | 3.7 12 668 | 3.04] 5.31 BG) SEW ONE oS bed.0 ierocopoeeoceeoE Apr. 15 | 162.9) 134.9] 4.8 17 769) 277 | 4.6L QTGENdellheidi sss |eee dO cee a= Gee Apr. 17 | 120.6) 211-6 | 21.7 06 644 3.12) | 5.51 277 Elvira .----. Charlois, at Nice.--.| May 3 |.---.-..- PBB HEY ee BU I. se cuooe PS acs Ss 278 Paulina..-..| Palisa, at Vienna....) May 16 | 224.8 Cer: Sy a) 11 7286 2.73 | 4.52 279 Ehlers ses. Seac0 iespaas peo oae Se Oct. 25 | 298.8 15) 2d! 11 405 425) |" 850 280 Phiiaiser = Peet d CLO Mam emcee Oct. 29 96.9 10.9 7.4 14 692 2. 97 Dsili2 QS TeTERGtia salle 4 OF feos sic c< mere i= = Oct. 31 45.9 31.0 | 5.3 13 1096 2.19) | 13.24 Number 265 is remarkable on account of the very considerable in- clination ef the plane of its orbit to that of the ecliptic, and also on account of its near approach to the earth, its least distance from us a ASTRONOMY. 165 being 0.96, in terms of the earth’s mean distance from the sun; 1 would therefore seem to offer an additional means of determining the value of the solar parallax. Number 270 also approaches quite near the earth, A=0.81. It will be noticed that 279, with its mean distance from the sun of 4.25, considerably greater than that of any other aste- roid, lies upon the extreme outer limit of the group, and will at certain times, therefore, be brought quite close to Jupiter, and by the pertur- bations thus experienced may furnish further knowledge of the mass of that planet. Number 281, with its small mean distance of 2.19 lies, on the other hand, near the inner border of the group; it is the sixty- eighth asteroid discovered by Dr. J. Palisa. Prof. Tietjen discontinues with the year 1888, the regular issue of the Cireulars and Correspondence of the Berlin Jahrbuch, relating to as- teroids. Special attention will be given hereafter to the orbits of newly discovered planets presenting interesting peculiarities. The Annals of the Harvard Observatory, volume 18, No. 3, contains a discussion of a series of photometric observations of the asteroids by Mr. H. M. Parkhurst, extending from April to December, 1887. The method of observation was to note the time that the asteroid took to disappear after pa@sing a transit wire, the telescope being stationary, and the light of the asteroid or comparison star suffering diminution either by a wedge or more frequently by a deflector—a piece of glass with nearly parallel sides placed in the telescope tue, about one sev- enth of the way from the focus to the object glass, and covering half the field. The conclusions reached by the author are as follows: (1) The phase correction can not be neglected, and is peculiar to each asteroid. (2) There may be, for certain asteroids, large errors from rotation. (3) In most eases, after the phase correction has been determined, the remaining unknown errors are less than the average variation of the fixed stars. 166 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR i887 AND 18838. REPORTS OF OBSERVATORIES. In collecting the following notes upon observatories the latest avail- able information has been utilized, but it has been found impossible to biing the report in each case down to the end of 1888. The Viertel- jabrsschrift, for instance, from which the data for many EKuropean ob servatories are drawn, contains reports no later than 1887, and compar atively few observatories publish independent annual reports. The writer’s thanks are due to Sr. Felipe Valle for notes on the observatories of Mexico. Ann Arbor.—Prof. W. W. Campbell has been appointed assistant to fill the vacancy made by the removal of Mr. Schaeberle to the Liek Ob- servatory. Armagh.—Dr. Dreyer has devoted a large part of his time to the pre- paration and passing through the press of a new general catalogue of nebule. Bamberg.—An interesting description of the new observatory is given in the Vierteljahrssehrift for 1887, p. 333, by the direetor, Dr. KE. Hart- wig. The sum of $45,000 was available for buildings, $17,500 for in- struments, the interest on $20,000 for salaries, and on $12,500 for main- tenance, with a reserve fund of about $20,000. The observatory con- sists of two buildings, the observing-rooms being in one and the offices and dwelling inthe other. In the first there are two towers surmounted by domes and connecting them is the transit room. pt. 1. 237"p. . 4°° London, ee8ee eee eee (M. 21) New gencral catalogue of nebulae and clusters of stars. By J. L. E. Dreyer. Saturn. Etcer (T. G.) Physical observations of Saturn in 1883. il. Month. Not., 48: 362-370. [Observations of rings and belts.] Obsry., 11: 153. Kreter (J. E.) First observations of Saturn with the 36-inch equatorial of the Lick Observatory. il. Sid. Mess., 7: 79-83. PERROTIN (J.) Anneaux de Saturne. Compt. Rend., 106: 1716. TrenrBy (I°.) [Dessins des anneaux et des bandes.] il. Obsry., 11: 195. ——. Premiéres observations de Mars et de Saturne faites & Vobservatoire Lick... en 1888, et réponses & quelques objections. Ciel et Terre, 9: 370-380. TROUVELOT (I.-L.) Nouvelles observations sur la variabilité des anneaux de Saturne. Compt. Rend., 106: 464-467. Also, Reprint. Saturn (Satellites of). Hatt (A.) Motion of Hyperion. Astron. Jour., 7: 164. Hiri (G.W.) Motion of Hyperion and the massof Titan. Astron. Jour., 8: 57-62, LYNN (W.T.) Discovery of Titan. Obsry., 11: 338. Newcomen (Simon). Mutual action of the satellites of Saturn. Astron. Jour., 8: 105. OuprEMANS (J.A.C.) Retrogradation of the plane of Saturn’s ring and of those of his satellites whose orbits coincide with that plane. Month. Not., 49: 54-64. Srruve (H.) Beobachtungen der Saturns-trabanten, Abtheilung I. Beobach- tungen am 15-zédlligen Refractor. 132 p. 4to. St. Petersburg, 1888. ..(M. 10.60) Supplement 1 aux observations de Poulkova. Scintillation. CoLEMAN (W.) Jumping stars. Obsry., 11: 434. INFLUENCE des bourrasques sur la scintillation des étoiles. Ciel et Terre, 9: AR9—494, Maw (W.H.) Jumping stars. Obsry., 11: 404. MontTiIGNny (C.) De Vintensité de ja scintillation des étoiles dans les différentes parties du cie]. Bruxelles, 188. Repr. from: Bull. Acad. roy. de Belg., 3. s., 16. Abstr: Astron. Nachr., 120: 223. Also, abstr.: Ciel et Terre, 9: 393-400. SearLe (A.) Apparent instability of stars near the horizon. Astron. Nachr., 12O)R* IMO). TENNANT (J. F.) Jumping stars. Obsry., 11: 433. Weyer (G.D.E.) Sternschwanken. Astron. Nachr., 119: 143. Sextant. Comstock (G.C.) Adjustment ofa sextant. Sid. Mess., 7: 129-132. Gruey (L.-J.) Application de Voculaire nadiral & la détermination des con- stantes de horizon gyrosecopique, Compt. Rend., 105: 727-729. SCHAEBERLE (J. M.) Adjustment of the sextant. Sid. Mes.,7: 223. —. Eccentricity of the sextant. Astron. Nachr., 118: 383. Sirius. MaNN (N. M.) System of Sirius. Sid. Mess.,7: 25,94, ASTRONOMY. 21d Société astronomique de France. BULLETIN de la société astronomique de France. Premiére année: 1887. 128 p. 8vo. Paris, 1888. FLAMMARION (C.) Discours prononcé A la séance générale annuelle du 4 avril 1888. 15p. 8vo. Paris, 1&8. Solar system. FLAMMARION (C.) Les centres de gravité. il. L’Astron., 7: 361-365. Srone (O.) Motions of the solar system. Proc, Am. Ass. Adv. Se., 37: 47-59. Also, Reprint. Also: Science, 12: 89. Also: Obsry., LL: 363-366. Also, abstr. : Nature, 39: 162. Spectra (Stellar). CLERKE (A. M.) Southern star spectra. Obsry., 11: 429-432. DUNER on stars with spectra of Class III. Nature, 37: 234, 260. Espin (T. E.) Stars with remarkable spectra. Astron. Nachr., 118: 257; 119: 309, [Remarkable change in the spectrum of R Cygni.] Astron. Nachr., 119: 365. See, also: Ibid., 120: 41. Also: Astron. Jour.,8: 96. Also: Month. Not., 49: 18. VoGcrEL (H. C.) Zwei Stern Spectraltafeln. [Mit Text.] 100 x 70cm. Wien, Spectroscope. Kriss (H.) Automatisches Spektroskop mit festem Beobachtungsfernrohr. il. Ztsehr. f. Instrmknd., 8: 388-392. Spectrum. JANSSEN (J.) Spectres de l’oxygéne. Mem. soc. spettrsep. ital., 17: 31. Spectre tellurique dans les hautes stations. L’Astron.,7: 443-446. Spectrum analysis. KURLBAUM (F.) Bestimmung der Wellenliinge einiger Fraunhofer’scher. Linien. 96 p.,1 pl. 8vo. Berlin, 1887. LANGLEY (S. P.) Energy and vision. Am. J. Sc., 136: 359-379. Spectrum (Solar). D&rrAILLE (C.) Photographie du spectre solaire & Vaide de petits instruments. il. L’Astron., 7: 26. LANGLEY (S. P.) The invisible solar and lunar spectrum. il. Am. J.Se., 136: 397-410. MENGARINI (G,) Massimo d’ intensit& luminosa dello spettro solare. Mem. Soc. spettrsep. ital., 17 : 117-129. Star-catalogues. AUWERS (A.) Nene Reduetion der Bradley’schen Beobachtungen aus den Jahren 1750 bis 1762. 3. Band den Sterneatalog tiir 1755, und seine Verglei- chung mit neuen Bestimmungen enthaltend, 5-352 p. 4to. St. Petersburg, USE w sod. ce 6de: 068506, Son SSO Ce RdENIORCOd SBenOE BUD BOSGoSSeS ssaeceoscc (M. 9.20) BACKLUND (O.) Ueber die Herleitung der im 8. Bande der Observations de Poulkova enthaltenen Stern-Cataloge, nebst einigen Untersuchungen iiber den Pulkowaer Meridiankreis. 100 p. 4to. St. Petersburg, 1888. ........(M.2.80) BecKkER (E.) Resultate aus Beobachtungen von 521 Bradley’schen Sternen am grossen Berliner Meridiankreise. 8yo. Berlin, 1888. DOWNING (A.M. W.) Positions for 1750.0 and proper motions of 154 stars south of—29° declination, deduced from a revision of Powalky’s reduction of the star places of Lacaille’s Astronomi fundamenta. Month. Not., 48: 322-333. Franz (J.) Zur Bonner Durchmusterung bei 23", +8°. Astron. Nachr., 120: 75. vf (Pe RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Star-catalogues—Continued. Marcuse (A.) Ableitung der Sterne des Fundamental-Cataloges der astrono- mischen Gesellschaft aus den von H. Romberg in den Jahren 1869-1873, am grésseren Meridian-Instrumente der Berliner Sternwarte angestellten Beobach- tungen. 84p. 4to. Berlin, 1888. Beob.-Ergeb. d. k. Sternw. zu Berlin, Heft 4. OERTEL (K.) Vergleichung der in den “‘ Greenwich Observations” von 1877 bis 1884 enthaltenen Sternverzeichnisse mit den beiden Catalogen der astronomi- schen Gesellschaft. Astron. Nachr., 118: 177-188. Untersuchungen iiber die aus Beobachtungen an den Pariser Meridianinstru- menten abgeleiteten Sternpositionen. Astron. Nachr., 119: 194. Srruve (O.) [Declinationen in dem Cataloge von 3542 Sternen.] Astron. Nachr., TS) Sr tele Star-charts. KLEIN (H.J.) Stern-Atlas enthaltend siimmtliche Sterne der 1—6.5 Grdésse zwischen dem Nordpol und 34 Grad siidlicher Declination. 8-+-71p. 18 maps. SOP LIGIPZI WL GGG actos 2—2), 22) sn sta 8 aes elas ate a eer rg Se (M. '6) Star atlas, containing maps of all the stars from 1 to 6.5 magnitude between the north pole and 34° south declination, and of all nebule and star clusters in the same region which are visible in telescopes of moderate powers. With ex- ‘planatory text... Translated... by E.McClure. 72 p., 18 pl. 4to. London and Leipsic, 1888. MEssER (J.) Stern-Atlas fiir Himmelsbeobachtung. 11+4+175p.il. Map. St. eters ur er BSS sce. secre = seis = ole fels mn elma ela ee (M. 10) ScuONFELD (E.) Fehlerverzeichniss zur zweiten Seric der Bonner Sternkarten. Astron. Nachr., 119: 31. Star-clusters. CLERKE (A.M.) Globular star-clusters. Nature, 38: 365, -— Irregular star-clusters. Nature, 39: 13. See also, Ibid., 61. Star-places (Reduction of). Boquet (F.) Note sur la détermination géométrique des positions apparentes des étoiles cireumpolaires. Bull. Astron., 5: 137. Application de la méthode de Gaillot. bid., 5: 233-237. Fasritius (W.) Sur le calcul des lieux apparents des étoiles. Ibid., 5: 187-193. Four (F.) Sur Vineorrection des formules proposées par Fabritius pour la réduction des cireumpolaires. IJbid., 5: 47-50. Sur les formules de M. Fabritius. Réplique aux notes de MM. Gonnessiat et Herz. Ibid., 5: 185, 384. —— Traité des réductions stellaires. Fascicule 1. Bruxelles, 1888 ...-.. (M. 22) Repr. from: Bull. Acad. Roy. d. Belg., 1888. GONNESSIAT (F.) Calcul des positions apparentes des étoiles circumpolaires : Méthode de M. Fabritius. Bull. Astron., 5: 135-145. Herz (N.) Surlaréduction ces cireumpolaires (apres les formules de Fabritius, Tbid., 5: 145-147. Sarrorp (T. H.) Reduction of star-places by Bohuenberger’s method. Astron. Nachr., 119: 21-28. Note concerning Fabritius’s method of reducing from one equinox to another, Ilias ANSE. teRy ScnuLnorT (L.) Sur les formules de M. Fabritius. Bull. Astron., 5: 231-283. Stars (Distribution of). Monck (W. H. 8.) Note on the distribution of the stars. Sid. Mess., 7: 20-25, 73-77, 105, 236. Stars (Motion of) in the line of sight. SPECTROSCOPIC results for the motions of stars in the line of sight, obtained at ... Greenwich... 1887. Month. Not., 48: 16-122, ASTRONOMY. is Stars (Motion of ) in the line of sight—Continued. Voce (H.C.) Bestimmung der Bewegung von Sternen 1m Visionsradius, As- tron. Nachr., 119: 97. —— Bestimmung der Bewegung von Sternen im Visionsradius durch spectro- graphische Beobachtung. Mem. Soc. spettrsep. itai., 17: 33. Sun. See, also, CORONA; PROMINENCES; SPECTRUM; SUN (Diameter of), ete. FLAMMARION (C.) Les grandes manifestations de activité solaire. il. L’Astron., 7: 121-133. —— Une année de l’histoire du soleil. il. L’Astron., 7: 201-213. Fritz (H.) Beitriige zur Beziehung irdischer Erscheinungen zur Sonnenthiatig- keit. Sirius, 21: 206-210, 217-222, 245-246. Scuurz (J.F.H.) Zur Sonnenphysik. II. 1pl. Astron. Nachr., 119: 225-242. Sear_e(A.) Atmospheric economy of solar radiation, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Se., 26-29. Also, Reprint. Sun (Diameter of). Wetman (V.) Einfluss der Blendgliiser bei Beobachtungen des Sonnendureh- messers. Astron. Nachr., 119: 241. Sun (Rotation of). Crew (H.) Period of the rotation of the sun as determined by the spectroscope. Am. J.Se., 135: 151-159. WILSING (J.) Ableitung der Rotationsbewegung der Sonne aus Positionsbestim- mungen von Fackeln, Astron. Nachr., 119: 311-316. Sun (Statistics of faculee, prominences, and spots). FLAMMARION (C.) Fluctuations de Vactivité solaire depnis le dernier maximum de 183381 jusqu’au dela du dernier minimum. ‘Taches facules, é6ruptions et maguétisme terrestre. il. L’Astron., 7: 41-53. Spoprer (A.) Verscbiedenheit der Hiinfigkeit der Sonnenflecken auf der nérd- lichen und siidlichen Halbkugel in den Jahren 1886 und 1887. Astron. Nachr., 118: 307. TrETENS (O.) Sonnenflecke im Jahre 1837 nach den Beobachtungen zu O’Gyalla. Astron. Nachr., 119: 267. Wo tr (R.) Sonnen-Statistik des Jahres 1887. Astron. Nachr., 118: 307. Sun-spots. Bosst (B.) Le macchie solari; cause ed effetti. Sui terremoti avvenuti e futuri come da predizioni dell autore. 3.ed.,enl. L16p. 16mo, Genova, 1888 .(M. 1.50) Faye(H.) Remarques sur une objection de M. Khandrikolf & la théorie des taches et des protubérances solaires. Compt. Rend., 106: 899-103, — Taches et protubérances solaires. L’Astron., 7: 89-93. Tables (Logarithmic). NeELL(A. M.) Fiinfstellige Logarithmen ... 6.ed. 194+104p. 8vo. Darmstadt, SGil US Eee ee Sees ee i rath, se RS (M. 1.80) Taschkent Observatory. POMERAN1ZEFF (H.) Latitude de Vobservatoire de Tachkent. Astron. Nachr., 119: S17. {Memoirs of the Taschkent astronomical and physical observatory. Publication IT.] 104 p. 4to. MockBa, 1888. Telegrams (Astronomical). See Cop (Astronomical). Telescopes. Sce, also, EQUATORIALS: MIRRORS; OBJECTIVES. Cross.Ley (E.) Improved centering tube for reflecting telescopes. Month. Not., 48: 280. GRUBB (H.) .Good astronomical telescopes. Sid. Mess., 7: 106, 259. HARKNEss (W.) Visibility of objects as conditioned by their magnitude and brightness with applications to the theory of telescopes, ewe 4 Pye Arve 08 sila aaa r GEOLOGY. aoe Regis Chauvenet, and by Prof. Arthur Lakes and Prof. Magnus C., Ihlseng. These officers are sometimes accompanied by advanced pupils, but rather for their instruction than for any assistance they may be able to give. The results of these field researches are generally published annually by the school in suitably illustrated octavo volumes. Columbia College.—No specitic provision is made here for original re- searches in geology in connection with the regular course of instrue- tion; but the professor of geology in the School of Mines forming a part of the institution, Dr. J. S. Newberry, devotes his vacations and leisure to geologic work in field and office; and in this work he some- times receives the assistance of, and his example is sometimes imitated by, advanced pupils. Part of the results of these researches appear in the School of Mines Quarterly, which is regularly published by the College Alumni Association. It should be understood that in this as in some other cases (and indeed in some measure in all cases) the credit for the original work belongs rather to individuals than to the insti- tution. Dakota School of Mines.—This institution is located at the same time in the only notable mining region in the State and in one of the most interesting geologic provinces on the face of the globe; and while, as in Colorado, the course of instruction relates rather to technology than pure science, field-work is carried on not only in connection with the teaching but during vacations, chiefly by the dean, Prof. Franklin R. Carpenter. A preliminary report upon this work was published in 1888 in an illustrated octavo volume of 171 pages. Denison University.—Original investigations in field and office are carried on in this institution in connection with the regular course of instruction by C. L. Herrick, professor of geology and natural history, and some of his associates and pupils; and the results of these re- searches are published in excellent style in the Bulletin and Transae- tions of the scientific laboratories of the University. State University of Towa.—Special provision for criginal investigation is not made in this institution; but the encrgetic incumbent of the chair of geology and zoology, Prof. Samuel Calvin, carries forward, in connec- tion with his university duties and during vacations, original researches in geology and paleontology; and in 1888 the publication was com- menced of a “* Bulletin from the Laboratories of Natural History, ” in which the results of the work of Professor Calvin and some of his asso- ciates and pupils are printed. Johns Hopkins University.—There is in this university a fellowship assigned to geology which is worth $500 per year; and during the fis- cal year there has been allotted in addition a small sum for the pay- ment of field expenses incurred by the fellow of geology. Moreover, field-work is recoguized as an important aid in class instruction, and the professor of geology, Dr. George H. Williams, introduces his pupils to practical work in the field upon the erystalline rocks of eastern Mary- 224 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. (and. The outcome of this work by Dr. Williams, that of some of his pupils, and that of the fellow in geology, Dr. William B. Clark, is pub- lished in condensed form in the University circulars. Both Dr. Will- iams and Dr. Clark, however, spend their vacations in field and office work for the U. S. Geological Survey. Massachusetts Institute of Technology.—Geologic investigations are conducted by the incumbent of the chair of geology in this institution, Prof. W. O. Crosby, chiefly during vacations; classes are sometimes taken into thetield; and the results of the various studies are sometimes printed in the Technological Quarterly published by the Institute. University of Nebraska.—The professor of geology (Lewis E. Hicks, in this institution is ex officioState geologist, and divides his energies be- tween class instruction and field investigation within the State; the classes are sometimes introduced to practical field-work in the vicinity of the University, and the advanced pupils sometimes aid the professor in his work in more distant parts of the State ; and the results are pub- lished in a bulletin of the University. Princeton (College of New Jersey.)—F¥ield-work in geology and paleon- tology is carried on in connection with class instruction in this institu- tion, and several expeditions have been fitted out in this department for exploration and surveys in the western Territories under the direc- tion of Prof. Henry F. Osborn. The more important results of the original work so performed are published in the Bulletin and Memoirs of the E. M. Museum of Geology and Archeology of the College of New Jersey. The activity in original investigation has apparently declined somewhat during recent years. University of Texas.—In the summer of 1888 a chair of geology was established in this institution; and it is the policy of its incumbent, Prof. Robert 'T. Hill, and of the president of the university, Dr. Leslie Waggener, to carry on field studies in connection with class work. It is proposed to publish the more important results of original work in circulars or bulletins. Vassar College—Although specific provision is not made in this col- lege for field studies in connection with class work, the professor of geology, William B. Dwight, frequently carries his classes into the field and thus enlivens the prosaic courses of the text books. A part of the results of Professor Dwight’s studies in field and office find a place in the Proceedings of the Vassar Brothers’ Institute, which is connected with the college. Washburn College—No provision is made for original investigation in connection with class work in this institution, but Prof. I’. W. Cragin, of the natural history department, devotes his vacations and leisure to geologic investigations in which he is sometimes assisted by associates and pupils. The preliminary and some of the final results of this work are printed in the Bulletin of the Washburn College Laboratory—a periodical maintained chiefly by personal enterprise. GEOLOGY. 225 Wisconsin State University.—Nine fellowships have recently been es- tablished in this university through the influence of President T. C. Chamberlin, and one or more of these is assigned to geology from time to time, as the bent of thought of fellows may indicate to be wise. A chair of agricultural physics is also maintained; and the incumbent, Prof. F. H. King, devotes a large part of his time to original work more or less closely connected with geology. Orogenic. ? Depression. oO. =n Bric aly ‘ Deposition. ae Wee=Cradationiiss!coscis.ccoi--2ea0s " Den qa 1S | ? Degradation. (4 Vnlcanism ( Extravasation. . | : sates cere Sane eth ee ok eee 2 (Antithesis of extrav.) So. nteas § Lithifaction. | 2.—Alteration ..-------.--- 2 Decomposition. ) Glacial construction. ; Nuaceare 3.—Glaciation ..-.--+.----. 2 Glacial destruction. § Wind construction. NNO 9 2 Wind destruction. Subordinate categories 4 Various constructive and a 2 5.—Vital action ...-...---. 4 F Vital action 2 destructive processes. (The matter of this record is arranged in accordance with the last classification.) DEFORMATION. The initial geologic movements (so far as may be inferred from the present condition of the rocks of the earth) were distortion or displace- ment of the solid or solidifying crust in such manner as to produce ir- regularities in the surface of the globe. These are the movemeuts in- volved in mountain growth and in the elevation of continents; they have been in operation from the earliest eons recognized by the geolo- gist to the present time; and the advances in knowledge concerning them include not only current observations upon the movements now in progress, but observations upon crumpled and otherwise deformed strata, and also legitimate inferences concerning the causes of the movements whose effects are recorded in these strata. It has long been known that the waters of the Atlantic are advane- ing upon the New Jersey coast, in consequence not only of wave-cut- ting, but also of sinking of the land. So rapid indeed is the sinking of the land, particularly towards Sandy Hook, that notable geographic changes have occurred within the last hundred years, and the mining of timber, which grew upon dry land, but is now lodged among its stumps many feet beneath tide level and buried beneath the oceanic and fluvial deposits, has become an industry of some importance. The *Nat. Geog. Mag., vol. 1, 1888, pp. 27-36; Geol. Mag., Decade III, vol. v, 1888, pp. 489-495, 234 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. rate of sinking has been estimated by Cook at 2 feet per century;* and the observations of the last two years corroborate this estimate. This land movement is not confined to the coast of New Jersey, nor to historical time. It has recently been shown (1) that the entire coastal plain of the Middle Atlantic slope is now undergoing depression so rapid that sedimentation in the numerous estuaries by which it is dissected lags behind the sinking, so that sub-aerial alluvium is prae- tically absent from the region; (2) that the Piedmont plain overlook- ing the coastal lowlands is rising so rapidly that the rivers are unable to cut down their gorges to tide level; and (3) that the differential movement culminates in a line of displacement, which every river crosses in a cascade or rapid, and along which the principal cities of the eastern United States have been located.t It would appear that this displacement began in early Pleistocene time, that it is yet in prog- ress at a rate probably about as high as quiet orogenic movement ever acquires, and that the amount of displacement increases northward from perhaps 100 feet at Washington to 400 or 500 feet at New York. It is improbable that the great earth-movement of the Middle At- lantic slope extends into New England; for although this part of the country is now suffering deformation as recently shown by Shaler, the tilting is southward rather than northward as in New Jersey. The modern deformation of New England is best shown in the behavior of streams. Throughout Massachusetts, Connecticut, and southern New Hampshire and Vermont, the greater part of the streams flow from north to south or with slight deviations from this direction. Except at the headwaters of these streams, where their volume is too slight to clean their beds of the glacial waste which encumbers them, their valleys are without swamps, and the streams flow upon beds of hard rock flanked by terraces of glacial material which record the stages of valley-excavation—t. e., all of these south-flowing streams have high declivity and are energetically corrading their beds. A much smaller number of New England streams flow to the northward ; and these, un- like their south-flowing neighbors, all flow sluggishly in débris-clogged valleys and are bordered by swamps instead of terraces—i. e., all of these streams have low declivity and are employed in sedimentation rather than corrasion. The behavior of both classes of streams sug- gests southward tilting of the land and can not be satisfactorily ex- plained in any other way;{ and this inference is in line with the con- elusions of Dana, the elder Hitchcock, and many others who have shown that the southward inclination of the terraces of the Connecticut River and its tributaries indicates a rise of the land to the northward since the recession of the last ice-sheet of the Pleistocene. It is in line, too, with the work of Gilbert, Spencer, and others in the region of the * Geology of New Jersey, 1868, pp. 3623-64. t McGee, 7th Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv., 1888, pp. 616, et seq. t Shaler, Am. Jour. Sci., 1887, vol. xx x11I, pp. 210-221. a GEOLOGY. 235 Great Lakes, where, as shown by the first-named geologist in particu- lar, there has been so decided tilting of the land since the retreat of the latest ice-sheet that some of the terraces and shore lines carved out «by Lake Ontario when its northern confine was the receding ice-sheet, now incline southward as much as 5 feet per mile in western New York. Southward tilting in the western part of the Great Lake region is also indicated by the backing of water in the southern affluents of Lake Michigan and the consequent conversion of their mouths into swamps and lakes as shown by Wooldridge.* The inferences of Shaler in New England and Gilbert in New York as to the southward tilting of the land are in line with a notable inves- tigation of the ancient terraces and beaches of the extinct Lake A gassiz by Upham. As the last ice-sheet of the Pleistocene withdrew beyond the divide between the Mississippi drainage and that of Hudson’s Bay, the waters formed by its melting were dammed by the divide and so ae- cumulated in swamps, ponds, and lakes along its front. The largest of the lakes oceupied the valley now drained by the Red River of the North. It was a veritable mediterranean sea, albeit of fresh water, and confined on the north by walls of ice alone; for at the period of its maximum size it was fully 600 miles long and 200 miles in maximum breadth. Pending the final melting of the northern mer de glace this lake found outlet over the portage between Lakes Traverse and Big Stone, and thence through the Minnesota and Mississippi Rivers to the Gulf; and, although it has now utterly disappeared from the fice of the earth, it has left an unmistakable record of its existence and its extent in the terraces and beach lines already traced by Upham over many hundreds of miles, and in the vast beds of lacustral sediments which make the valley of the Red River the paradise of*the wheat grower.t Now the old shore lines of this extinet lake (named in honor of the illustrious Swiss naturalist by Upham) are no longer hori- zontal as when fashioned by the wind-swept waters, but incline south- ward about 6 inches per mile on an average. This departure from hori- zontality in the beach lines has indeed been ascribed (in part at least) by Upham to deformation of the surface of the lake by the gravitational attraction of the contiguous ice sheet; but since it has been shown by Woodward that this cause is alone incompetent under probable assump- tions as to volume of the ice sheet,t most geologists who concern them- selves with such questions have settled down to the conviction that there is here another example of that southward tilting of the area of Pleistocene glaciation already noted in New England by Dana and others, in New York by Gilbert and his contemporaries, and about Lake Michigan by Chamberlain, and more recently by Woolbridge. Leading students of the general subject of terrestrial deformation are indeed dis- * Am. Geologist, 1888, vol. 1, pp. 143-146. t Final Report of the Geology of Minnesota, 1888, vol. 11, pp. 517, 527; Bull. U.S, Geol. Surv. No. 39, 1887. ¢ Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv. No. 48, 1888, p. 67. 236 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888 posed to look upon the tilting of the glaciated region as but an exem- plification of one of the fundamental laws of earth movement: Babbage, Hall, Hunt, and Dana long ago, and Dutton, Fisher, Reade, Alexander Winchell, and others within the Jast lustrum, have shown that the exter- ior portions of the earth behave as if in a state of hydrostatic equilibrium, ready to rise with the removal and sink with the addition of the matter transferred by the processes of gradation. Now it is evident that an ice Sheet must depress the surface upon which it rests, just as does a mass of oceanic sediments, directly by its weight, and also indirectly by chilling and so condensing the underlying rocks; and sinee, as all students of the primary agencies and conditions of geology are agreed, the viscous mass of the earth responds slowly to stresses tending to pro- duce deformation, it is equally evident that the resumption of original attitude by any part of the surface after the recession of an ice sheet must be gradual and perhaps exceedingly slow. So the southward tilt- ing indicated by the shore lines of Lake Agassiz, by the half drowned estuaries of Lake Michigan, by the beaches of the ancient Lake Ontario, and by the terraces of the Connecticut River, all seem attributable to the effort of the resilient terrestrial crust to return to its original form on relief from the pressure of the Pleistocene ice sheet; and the diver- sity in behavior of the north-flowing and south-flowing streams of New England would indicate that the restoration is even yet barely com- plete. The ideas current among the leading geologists of the country con- cerning the behavior of the earth as an isostatic body when compressed beneath a great continental glacier have been summarized by Alexander Winchell within a few months.* But there are certain comparatively recent changes in level which can not be attributed to movements due to the weighting of the land beneath the Pleistocene ice sheet. One of the more important contri- butions of the biennial period to the general subject of deformation is that by Le Conte, on the recent changes of physical geography in Cali- fornia indicated by the flora of the coast islands.t Sometime during the Pleistocene there was a depression of the Pacific coast by which the westernmost of the two ranges belonging to the trans-Sierra mountain system was nearly submerged, only the commanding summits rising above tide-level to form the islands of Santa Rosa and her companions; and this drowned mountain range displays no disposition to return to its former altitude. The period of this submergence is indicated, in so far as plants may be regarded as chronometers of geologic time, by the distintictive Pliocene flora of the islands, which has, according to Le Conte, been preserved by reason of its isolation, while the flora of the mainland has undergone modification in the struggle against competi- tors, enemies, and climatic conditions proper to a great continent. *Am. Geologist, 1888, vol. 1, pp. 139-143. _t Bull. of Cal. Acad. Sci., 1889, vol. 11, p. 575, ee ae GEOLOGY. rn The most notable North American advances of recent years in the observation and interpretation of the results of diastatic movement relate to faulting. Two genetic classes of faults have long been recog- nizea—, é., normal faults, in which the hade (or inclination of the plane of fracture) is toward the thrown side, and reversed or overthrust faults, in which the hade is toward the heaved side; ard in general the normal faults have been attributed to stresses not accompanied by horizontal compression, and the overthrust faults primarily to horizontal com- pression. A few years ago Archibald Geikie and his collaborators upon the Geological Survey of Great Britain concluded that the peculiar struct- ure of the Scottish Highlands is determined by overthrust faulting _ upon a grand scale—older strata being pushed over newer, sometimes for distances amounting to miles. This conclusion was so novel and striking, and so widely at variance from prevailing opinion, that despite the ability of the geologists by whom it was enunciated and the appar- ent conclusiveness of the evidence upon which it was based, many con- servative students in this country hesitated to accept it; yet within the last two years there have been brought to light on this side of the Atlantic almost as striking examples of overthrust faulting as those of the Scottish Highlands. During 1886 McConnell made an extended exploration of the Rocky Mountains among the passes followed by the Canadian Pacific Rail- road, under the direction and auspices of the Geological Survey of Canada. In the course of this exploration he determined the limits of a remarkable faulted region, now about 25 miles wide, though a rough estimate places its original width at over 50 miles (the difference indi- cating the amount of compression suffered), in which the faults are generally of the overthrust type. The whole region is broken by a num- ber of parallel, or nearly parallel, longitudinal fractures into a series of oblong blocks, and these are tilted and shoved one over the other until they have taken the form of a westerly dipping compound monocline, rising into a succession of ridges. A section through almost any of these ridges, starting from the west, shows, first, Cretaceous shales folded under older formations, ranging from upper Carboniferous downward through the Devonian and Silurian, and even to the Cambrian. The overthrusts on the south fork of Ghost River reach 3 or 4 miles; and in these, as in some other cases, the rocks thus faulted have been sub- sequently corrugated, and the original fault surface has been flexed into anticlinals and synclinals, parallel to those of the planes of depo- sition.* Recent studies in the Appalachian region by Willis and other officers of the U.S. Geological Survey have brought to light examples of over- thrust faulting, differing only in degree from those of the Scottish Highlands and the Canadian Rocky Mountains; and these observa- * Rpt. D, of Annl, Rpt. Geol, and Natl, Hist, Canada for 1386-87, 238 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. : tions have corrected certain early inferences as to the mechanism of such faulting; inferences originating partly in Europe and partly in the Ap- palachians, and current for many years on both sides of the Atlantic. Heim noticed that in the Alps the inverted limb of an anticlinal is stretched or even crushed out between the anticlinal and synclinal curves of an overturn and the flexure thus converted into a fracture, and inferred that overthrust faults are always formed in this manner ; but Willis points out that this explanation fails to account for many of the faults of the Appalachians because the essential fact of squeezed beds has not been found in that region. He shows also that the Appala- chian sedimentary series, from the Cambrian upward, is composed of strata differing greatly in their capacity for resistance to horizontal thrusts, and that these variations in rigidity oceur from place to place in the same strata as well as in the different strata superimposed one on the other, and that the rigid strata may not fold at the place where a verti- cally adjacent flexible stratum does fold, but that the rigid stratum may ride forward on its bedding plane until it reaches an axis (anticlinal or synclinal) in which both beds have suffered flexure, and that the forward movement may then sheer across the beds on the opposite dip, produc- ing a fault.* Under this view it would appear that the yielding of rocks to horizontal pressure may take piace, (1) as corrugation; (2) as overthrusts, perhaps originating in incipient corrugations ; (3) as vari- ous Combinations of corrugation and overthrust faulting, the difference in effect depending upon difference in structure, difference in the pressure beneath superincumbent beds, and other differences in conditions. Willis’s inferences from Appalachian structure have been checked by experimentation. During the past year he has subjected masses of wax consisting of alternating layers of varying rigidity, built up in imitation of the rocky strata of the earth’s crust, to horizontal compression, the waxen strata being variously loaded in different experiments ; and he finds that the deformation of the miniature strata in his models imitates the deformation displayed on a grander scale in the Appalachian Mount- ails. Another order of faults, also resulting from horizontal compression, has recently been developed by Davis. There are in the Connecticut Valley extensive deposits of sandstone and shale of Triassic age, of un- known thickness, generally dipping eastward at a considerable angle ; and there are in New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and northern Virginia sim- ilar deposits of Triassic sandstone, also of unknown thickness, dipping westward at high angles. In both of these areas the existence of faults has long been suspected, and in a few cases minor faults have actually been discovered; so the feeling has gained ground that despite the persis- tent and high dips over broad areas, the deposits are only of limited thick- ness. Now Davis has shownt that in the Connecticut area there are * Bull. Phil. Soc. Wash., 1889, vol. xr (in press). a t7th Ann, Rpt. U. 8. Geol. Survey, 1888, pp. 461-490 .° ~ =” > tl teeta GEOLOGY. 2a9 intercalated within the sandstones certain sheets of trap, mainly intru- sive; and using these distinctive beds as data planes in the otherwise homogeneous deposits, he finds that the same beds re-appear many times, and that in some cases several successive trap ridges are formed by outcropping edges of a single sheet, the mass having been thrown into aseries of parallel blocks and subsequently so degraded as to leave the harder trap projecting in the form of strongly accented surface features. His explanation of the faulting in this region is unique. He supposes that the Triassic sandstones were originally deposited in hor- izontal beds upon an eroded surface of highly inclined (but not vertical) schists, gneises, etc.; that after the completion of Triassic deposition, horizontal compression occurred ; that the inclined erystalline strata slipped upon each other, as does a row of fallen books when pushed to upright position, and thus became more nearly vertical; and that as the successive blocks (defined perhaps by intercalations of softer mat- ter) approached verticality the veneer of Triassic sediments above was broken through by a succession of approximately vertical faults coin- ciding with the planes of slipping among the crystalline strata. Davis’s hypothesis is certainly suggestive, and, if valid, constitutes a notable advance in the branch of geology dealing with the deformation of the earth. The terra incognita of American geographers for many years has been, singularly enough, not the comparatively inaccessible mountains and deserts of the West, but a tract in southwestern Missouri, north- western Arkansas, and eastern Indian Territory. Somewhere here was supposed to belong that will-o’-the-wisp of geographers and geologists alike, the Ozark Mountain system—a half-ideal mountanie tract com- monly named in geographic treatises and sometimes vaguely located in small-scale maps, though no geographer knew their exact position and no geologist knew their structure. Now during the last year or two a part of this tract has been surveyed topographically by officers of the U.S. Geological Survey and its general configuration ascertained ; and moreover the work of the geological survey of Arkansas has extended along its southern flanks and the predominant structural characteristics ascertained. According to Branner and Comstock, the region suffered post-Paleozoic deformation now expressed by corrugation approaching the Appalachian type, the strata lying in a series of folds of nearly east-west direction; * and as pointed out by the former in a communica- tion before the American Association for the Advancement of Science at Cleveland, the crystalline rocks found along the southern flanks of the corrugated tract are not eruptive, as they have hitherto beer re- garded, but Archwan, so that the region would appear to be homologous with and probably a continuation of the Appalachian region of eastern United States. *Ark, Geol. Survey, Ann. Rpt. 188, Vol. 1, maps, and p, xxx, 240 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. During the biennial period there have been some valuable foreign contributions to our knowledge of the causes and conditions of mount- ain-making, notably the development of the conception of the “ level- of-no-strain;” for as shown upon physical grounds, by Reade, Fisher, G. H. Darwin, and Davison, there is at limited depth within the terres- trial crust a horizon or couche in which tangential stress disappears. This conception has modified American as well as foreign thought, but thus far no important contributions to the subject have been made on this side of the Atlantic. Apropos to the conclusions of geologists and physicists concerning the isostatic condition (or condition of hydrostatic equilibrium) of the exte- rior crust of the earth, and of the bearing of these conclusions upon the general problem of mountain-making, reference may be made to a prac- tically new conception as to certain relations between sedimentation and depression which bears upon the theory of mountain-making re- cently advocated by Reade. It may be thus stated: Lines of sedi- mentation are the margins of continents, and the sediments are laid down not upon horizontal surfaces, but upon seawardly sloping bot- toms; so the sediments do not form horizontal beds, but take a variable seaward slope, determined by marine currents, wave action, ete. Thus the mass of sediments is collectively in the condition of a mass of snow upon a roof or upon a mountain side; @. ¢., in a condition of potential instability or inequipotentiality. If the mass is stable in either case, it is because the friction among the particles exceeds the attraction of gravitation upon ‘the particles; it is obvious that if particle friction were reduced by augmentation of temperature or by alteration of con- stitution, or if the efficiency of gravitation were increased by addition to the mass, the point of stability might be passed, when the mass would move in the direction of the slope; and it is equally obvious that if an inequipotential mass expand, the resulting movement will not take place equally in all directions, but mainly or wholly in the direction of least resistance, which is that of the slope. Since the sediments fringing continents are in a condition of inequipotentiality, any movement due to the rise of isogeotherms or other cause must take place in a single direction ; and it might not be limited to that due to expansion, for other factors co-operate. Supplemented by this addi- tional conception, the hypothesis of mountain growth so ably advocated by Herschel* (who alone recognized vaguely the conception), Babbage, Hall, Dana, Le Conte, Reade, and a score of others, appears to gain much in acceptability. The great displacement of the Middle Atlan- tic slope has been attributed to downward and seaward settling of the inequipotential mass of Mesozoic and Cenozoic sediments constituting the coastal plain.t *L. E. & D. Phil. Mag., 1856, 4th ser., xm, pp. 197-198. t McGee, Geol. Mag., Decade III, 1888, vol. v, pp. 494, 495, $7tb Ann, Report U, 8, Geol, Survey, 1888, p. 634, GEOLOGY. 241 Since diastatic movements are predominantly vertical and measured from sea-level as a datum plane, the determination of the mean sea-level (commonly called the “figure of the earth,” or, more properly, the geotd) is important to geologists. The “figure of the earth ” is also important to geologists in another way: It has long been known that despite the gravitational attraction of mountains and continental masses a plumb- line suspended at the sea-shore is generally deflected seaward, and that in some cases a plumb-line suspended at the base of a mountain range is deflected toward the plain rather than the mountains ; and accordingly it has been supposed by many physicists, astronomers, and geologists that the rocks constituting the ocean bottom are heavier than those of the land, and that the rocks underlying plains are often heavier than those forming mountain masses. Suess and some others have indeed maintained that such mountain systems as the Andes must attract and materially elevate the surface of contiguous ocean waters; but Pratt and several other careful students have, on the contrary, advocated the simple inference from observation; and Faye has attributed the great inequalities of the earth’s surface to the more rapid refrigeration and consequent condensation of sea bottoms than of land surfaces. Now, the determination of the differences in density indicated by the anom- alous deflection of the plumb-line in certain cases, and so the solu- tion of some of the most profound problems with which geologists have ever grappled, depends, first, upon the determination of the general form of the geoid, and second, upon the development of a formula by which the gravitational attractions of adventitious rock masses, and of rock masses varying in density, can be computed. The importance of these inquiries has been recognized by some of the ablest mathemati- cians, physicists, and geologists, including Thomson, Clarke, Pratt, Fisher, Stokes, Helmert, G. H. Darwin, Fischer, and others. For some years past Woodward has been engaged upon these problems ; and dur- ing 1888 he published an elaborate discussion of the whole subject, in- cluding analyses of the results reached by former investigators, and formule applicable in evaluating the deformation of water surfaces by the gravitational-attraction of ice masses, continents, and mountains, the changes in level of inconstant lakes, ete.* While the immediate result of Woodward’s researches can searcely be regarded as a con- tribution to knowledge of the general phenomena of deformation, his contribution is worthy of note as a sound basis for further investigation. DEGRADATION. All portions of the earth standing above the level of the sea are sub- ject to degradation. Different processes effect degradation, but incom- parably the most potent is the action of rain andrivers. Nowthe whole subject of hydro-dynamic action has received more attention from Amer- *Bull. of the U. S. Geol. Survey, No. 48. H. Mis. 142 16 242 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. ican geologists than from those of any other country, and the greater part of our knowledge of the subject must be credited to American in- vestigators. Thus, it was American geologists employed in the canon- cut plateaus and mountains of the western Territories who discovered that the water of a river is not so much the agent of corrasion (which is one of the principal modes of degradation) as the vehicle by which the agent is rendered operative, and that the real agent of corrasion is the sand or other material with which the water of rivers is loaded. Pure water is practically impotent as a corrading agent; but when fur- nished with tools in the form of sand grains it rapidly cuts away the hardest rocks. And this is only one of many American contributions to the subject. Until recently it has been commonly believed that while the sand grains and other matter held in suspension in river water directly in- creases corrasion, there is an indirect diminution in corrading capacity going with the addition of such matter, due to the absorption of a por- tion of the energy of the stream in transporting the solid matter. Oba Le J. S. Newberry (196 and 200) describes some specimens of fossil plants from San Juancito, Honduras, brought by Charles M. Rolker, and other specimens sent by T. H. Leggett. In the first paper these had been identified by the author, and were announced as representa- tives of a Rhetic or Upper Triassic flora. In the article in the Ameri- ean Journal (260) fourteen species are mentioned, the following of which are new: Otozamites linguiformis, p. 344, f. 9, 10; Encephalastos (?) denticulatus, p. 346, f. 5; Sphenozamites robustus, p. 347, f. 12-14; Sphenozamites (”) grandis, p. 347; Anomozamites elegans, p. 348, f. 6-8; Noggerathiopsis sp., p. 350. An abstract, very brief, is given in the Proceedings of the American Association of a paper read by Professor Newberry (192) on the Cre- taceous Flora of North America. Sir William Dawson (64, 68, 71) discusses the characters of the Ore- taceous plants of the western territories of Canada and other parts of British America. The flora of the Laramie group is discussed by L. F. Ward (266), and a short review of the same by Leo Lesquereux (149) is given. Professor Ward (266) describes a considerable number of new species, and illus- trates others which have previously been described. The descriptions were first published in this bulletin (266). The figures, however, with the specific names were issued in connection with the author’s paper in the Sixth Annual Report of the U. 8S. Geological Survey for 1884 and 1885, entitled ‘Synopsis of the Flora of the Laramie Group,” pages 399-518, sixty-five plates, as explained in the ‘* Explanatory Remarks,” pages 9-12 of the bulletin. The following new species are described and beautifully illustrated : Spiraxis bivalvis, p. 14, pl. i, f. 3. Populus speciosa, p. 20, pl..v, f. 4-7. Populus amblyrhyncha, p. 20, pl. vi, f. 1-83. pl. vii, f. 1-3. Populus daphnogenoides, p. 20, pl. vii, f. 4-6. Populus oxyrhyncha, p. 21, pl. viii, f. 1, 2. Populus craspedodroma, p. 21, pl. viii, f. 3. Populus Whitei, p. 22, pl. viii, f. 4. Populus hederoides, p. 22, pl. viii, f. 5. Populus anomala, p. 23, pl. vill, f. 7. Populus Gréwiopsis, p. 23, pl. 1x, f. 1. Populus inequalis, p. 24, pl. ix, f. 2. Quercus bicornis, p. 24, pl. 1x, f. 3. Quercus Carbonensis, p. 29, pl. 1x, £6, 3 f i . 3 ee ee ee ee Se a ee PALEONTOLOGY. Dryophyllum aquamarum, p. 26, pl. x, f. 2, 4. Dryophyllum Briuneri, p. 27, pl. x, f. 5-8. Dryophyllum faleatum, p. 27, pl. xi, f. 1. Dryophyllum basidentatum, p. 27, pl. xi, f. 2. Corylus Fosteri, p. 29, pl. xiii, f.5, 6. Alnus Grewiopsis, p 30, pl. xiv, f. 1. Betula coryloides, p.31, pl. xiv, f. 3. Betula basiserrata, p.32, pl. xiv, f. 4. . Platanus basilobata, p.35, pl. xvii, f.1; pl. xviii, f. 1-3, 3a; pl. xix, f. 1. Ficus Crossii, p. 39, pl. xxi, f. 2. Ficus speciosissima, p. 39, pl. xxi, f. 3. Ficus sinuosa, p. 41, pl. xxii, f. 2. Ficus limpida, p. 42, pl. xxii, f. 3. Ficus viburnifolia, p. 42, pl. xxii, f. 4-8. Ulmus planeroides, p. 44, p). xxiii, f. 1,2. Ulmus minima, p. 45, pl. xxiii, f. 3, 4. Ulmus rhamnifolia, p. 45, pl. xxiii, f. 5. Ulmus orbicularis, p. 46, pl. xxiii, f. 6. Litswa Carbonensis, p. 48, pl. xxiv, f. 1. Nyssa Buddiana, p. 53, pl. xxv, f. 4. (2) Cornus Fosteri, p.54, pl xxv., f. 5. Cornus Emmonsii, p. 55, pl. xxvi, f. 2,3. Hedera parvula, p. 57, pl. xxvi, f. 4. Hedera minima, p. 57, pl. xxvi, f. 5. Hedera Bruneri, p. 58, pl. xxvi, f. 6. Hedera aquamara, p. 59, pl. xxvi, f. 7. Aralia digitata, p. 62, pl. xxvii, f.3-5; pl. xxviii, f. 1. Sapindus grandifoliolus, p. 67, pl. xxx, f.3-5; pl. xxxi, f. 1,2. Sa pindus alatus, p. 68, pl, xxxi, f. 3,4. Vitis Bruneri, p. 69, pl. xxxii, f. 1,2. Vitis Carbonensis, p. 70, pl. xxxii, f. 3. - Vitis Xantholithensis, p. 71, pl. xxxii, f. 4,5. Vitis cuspidata, p. 71, pl. xxxii, f. 6-8. Zizyphus serrulatus, p. 73, pl. xxxiil, f. 3,4. Paliurus pulcherrimus, p. 75, pl. xxxiii, f. 11. Paliurus Pealei, p.76, pl. xxxiii, f. 12-14. Celastrus ferrugineus, p. 78, pl. xxxiv, f. 1-4. Celastrus Taurinensis, p. 79, pl. xxxiv, f. 5, 6. Celustrus alnifolius, p. 80, pl. xxxv, f. 1, 2. Celastrus pterospermoides, p. 80, pl. xxxv, f. 3-6. Celastrus ovatus, p. 81, pl. xxxvi, f. 1. Celastrus Grewiopsis, p. 81, pl. xxxvi, f. 2. Celastrus curvinervis, p. 82, pl. xxxvi, f. 3, 4. Euonymus Xantholithensis, p. 82, pl. xxxvii, f. 1,2. Elwodendron serrulatum, p. 83, pl. xxxvii, f. 3-). Elewodendron polymorphum, p. 84, pl. xxxviii, f.1-7. ? Grewia celastroides, p. 86, pl. Xxxix, f. 2. ? Grewia Pealei, p. 87, pl. xxxix, f. 3-5. Grewiopsis platanifolia, p. 89, pl. xl, f. 1. Grewiospis viburnifolia, p. 89, pl. xl, f. 2. Grewiopsis populifolia, p. 90, pl. xl, f. 3-5, Grewiopsis ficifolia, p. 92, pl. xli, f. 1, 2. Grewiopsis paliurifolia, p. 92, pl. xi, f. 3. Pterospermites cordatus, p. 93, pl. xli, f. 4. Pterospermites Whitei, p. 94, pl. xli, f. 5, 6. Pterdspermites minor, p. 95, pl. xlii, f. 1-3, 307 308 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888, ? Credneria daturefolia, p. 97, pl. xlii, f.4; pl. xliii, xliv, xlv. Coculus Haydenianus, p. 100, pl. xlvii, f. 1-4; pl. xlvii, f. 1. Lioriodendron Laramiense, p. 102, pl. xlviii, f. 2. Magnolia pulchra, p. 103, pl. xlviii, f. 3, 4. ? Diospyros obtusata, p. 105, pl. xlix, f. 5. Viburnum perfectum, p. 109, pi. lii, f.3,45; pl. iii, f. 1. Viburnum macrodontum, p. 110, pl. liii, f. 2. Vibernum limpidum, p. 110, pl. liii, f. 3-6. Vibernwm perplexum, p. 111, pl. ie fereyede Viburnum elongatum, p. 112, pl. liv, f. 4, 5. Viburnum oppositinerve, p. 112, pl. ie ad es Vibernum erectum, p. 112, pl. lv, f. 3. Viburnum Newberrianum, p. 113, pl. lvi, f. 1-6. Viburnum betulefolium, p. 114, pl. lvii, f. 4. Viburnum finale, p. 115, pl. lvii, f. 5. Professor Ward has also contributed several reviews of current lit- erature on Paleobotany (267, 268-270, 271), which have appeared in the American Journal of Science. Mr. Lesquereux (152) describes fossil plants from Golden, Colorado ; all the species are of the Tertiary age, and mostly of the Lower Miocene. The following are the new species described and named, but not illus- trated : Pieris undulata, p. 43. Protoficus Zeilleri, p. 50. Geonomites graminifolius, p. 44. Styrax Laramiense, p. 51. Palmocarpon lineatum, p. 44. Cissus corylifolia, p. 52. Piper Heerii, p. 44. Cissus duplicato-serrata, p. 52. Betula fallax, p. 45. Pterospermites grandidentatus, p. 53. Betula Schimperi, p. 45. oe Pterospermites, species, p. 53. Alnus rugosa, p. 45. Negundo decurrens, p. 54. Alnus carpinifolia, p. 45. Celastrus Gaudini, p. 54. Quercus celastrifolia, p. 46. Paliurus Coloradensis, p. 55. Quercus coloradensis, p. 46. Crataegus Englehardti, p. 56. Quercus Whitei, p. 46. Crategus myricoides, p. 56. Populus tenwinervata, p. 48. Crataegus betulafolia, p. 56. Ulmus antecedens, p. 49. Pterocarya retusa, p. 56. Ficus Berthoudi, p. 49. Thamnus creatus, p. 55. Ficus Andrai, p. 50 F. H. Knowlton (142) describes some specimens of silicified wood from Arizona under the names of Araucarioxylon Arizonicum, and under ae generic name Cressinoxylon. N. L. Britton (18) has described an Archean plant from the white crystalline limestone of Sussex County, New Jersey, under the name Archeophyton Newberryanum, and although its characters are very im- perfect, Mr. Britton regards it as the remains of a plant. Joseph Le Conte (146) discusses the interesting flora of the coast islands of California. This same article appeared also in the American Geologist, vol. 1, and in Bulletin No. 8 of the California Academy of Sciences. The author considers the flora of these islands as represent- ing somewhat nearly the character of the flora of the whole: country | | PALEONTOLOGY. 309 during the Pliocene times, and that the islands were separated from the mainland during the Quaternary period. Leo Lesquereux (150) in a paper (compiled and prepared for publica- tion by F. H. Knowlton, assistant curator of Botany and Fossil Plants U. S. National Museum), has described a number of new species of plants from various localities in North America of Upper Mesozoic and Cenozoic age: Myrica elenoides, p. 12, pl. iv, f.5. Lower Eocene, Kentucky. Miocene, John Day Valley, Oregon : Acacia Oregoniana, p. 14, pl. v, f. 4. ACEI PDENdiTeL. a4, Dla) Vie, tos Vit. 1s waits) f. 1 ss wild, k. Acer dimorphum, p. 15, pl. ix, f. 1. Rhus Bendirei, p. 15, pl. ix, f. 2. Andromeda (?) (Leucothe) crassa, p. 16. Carpites fragarivformis, sp. nov., p. 16 (no description). Salix Engelhardti, p. 17, pl. viii, f. 2. Quercus Horniana, p. 17, pl. v, f. 6. Quercus pseudolyrata, var. brevifolia, n. var. (no description), pl. x, f. 2. Quercus pseudolyrata, var. latifolia, n. var. (no description), pl. xii, f. 1. Quereus pseudolyrata, var. obtusiloba, u. var. (no description), pl. x, f. 3. Ficus (2) Oregoniana, p.18, pl. ix, f. 3. Smilax Wardii, p. 19, pl. xiii, f. 1. From Wasco County, Oregon (?), Eocene: Salix Schimperi, p. 21, pl. xiii, f. 5. Phyllites Wascoensis, p. 22, pl. xiv, f. 3. Equisetum Hornii, p. 23, named without figure ‘‘ Carpites cincona, n. sp.,” p. 21. Persea punctulata, p. 26, pl. xiv, f. 1. Alameda County, California (?), Miocene. =f Persea Dilleri, p. 27, pl. xiii, f. 2-4. Shasta County, California (?), Mio- cene. Ficus Shastensis, p. 28, pl. xi, f. 3. Shasta County, California, Miocene. Aralia Lasseniana, p. 28, pl. xiv, f. 5. Lassen County, California (?), Eocene. Oreodaphne lithaformis, p. 30, pl. xiv, f. 4. Lassen County, California (?), Eocene. Zamites Alaskana, p. 32, pl. x, f. 4. Cape Lisbourne, Alaska (?), Neocomian. Chondrites filiciformis, p. 32, pl. xvi, f. 1. Cape Lisbourne, Alaska (?), Neo- comian, Diospyros Virginiana L., var. Turneri,n. var., p. 35. Contra Costa County, California (?), Pliocene. Crategus Marcouiana, p. 36, pl. xiv, f.2; xv, f. 1, 2, Crategus Marcouiana, var. subintegrifolia, n. var., p. 36, pl. xiv, f. 2 (no description). ‘' Fossil Point, P. Y. Sheet.” “The Geological History of Plants,” of J. W. Dawson, presents in a very readable form an account of the plants which have appeared in the past and are now extinet, describing their historical sequence and the characters presented by the faunas of each age. The notes to the sev- eral chapters contain much of value to the special student of Palzeon- tology. ) CONTACT METAMORPHISM, Gre, G. Die Diabas-Contactmetamorphose zu Weilburg a. d. Lahn, pp. 1-31. One plate. Neues Jahrb., 1888, 1. Band, Ist Heft. HARKER, ALFRED. Woodwardian Museum. Notes on some Anglesey Dykes. Geol. Mag., September, 1887, p. 409. Describes the rocks as Augite-andesites, and Dolerites. A dike of the latter rock at Plas-Newydd is described as having at contact converted a bed of cal- careous shale into ‘‘a kind of lydianite, containing calcite and clusters of garnet and analcime crytals.” RIcuarbs, Gary F. Lithologiecal note on Contact, Phenomena in South Carolina. Bull. Denison University, Parts 1 and 11, vol. 1v, 1885, pp. 5-10. SrecuerR, Ernst. Contacterscheinungen an schottischen Olivindiabasen. Min. u. pet. Mittheilungen, 1x, Band, 11 u. 10 Heft, pp. 145-205. One plate showing microstructure. WILLIAMS, GrorGE H. The contact metamorphism produced in the adjoining Mica- schists and Limestones by the Massive Rocks of the ‘ Cortlandt Series” near Peekskill, New York. Am. Jour. Sci., October, 1888, vol. XXXVI, pp. 259-269. One plate showing micro-structures, (c) REGIONAL METAMORPHISM.” Barrots, C. Modifications et Transformations des Granulites du Morbihan, Lille, 1887. Annales Soc. Géol. du Nord, xv, 1887. Bonney, T. G. Notes on the structures and relations of some of the older rocks of Brittany. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., August, 1887, vol. xu, No. 171, p. 301. Discusses the structures of the crystalline shists and their probable origin ; their age, to what extent crystalline and sedimentary rocks are affected by intru- sive masses and the resemblance of such secondary structures to gneisses and schists commonly regarded as of Archean age. The rocks carry, besides glauco- phane, abundant garnets, epidote, green hornblende, white mica, quartz, sphene, rutile, and hematite. They are commonly schistose in structure and occasionally banded, the banding being produced by a predominance of epidote or sometimes glaucophane. The rocks are sometimes extraordinarily rich in glaucophane, though the individual crystals are not generally large. The writer agrees with Dr. Barrois, that the crystallization of the mineral has taken place since the folia- tion of the rocks, as they show no signs of strain or fracture. The garnets, on the other hand, existed prior to the foliation, as witnessed by their shattered condition. The rock appears interstratified with the adjacent schists; but, nevertheless, Pro- fessor Bonney is inclined to regard if as an eruptive, altered by pressure. He has further described the gneisses of the district around Quimperlé with especial ref- erence to their original and secondary structures, and the gneisses, granites, and amphibolites of the Roscoff and Morlaix district. Mis conclusions are that while both igneous and stratified rocks have undergone a certain amount of pressure metamorphism, the igneous rocks being converted into gneisses and schists, yet many of the Brittany gneisses and schists were evidently true foliated rocks anterior to the earth movements. Contact metamorphism produced by igneons rocks on the Paleozoic sediments does not produce rocks which resemble the pre- sumable Archiean gneisses and schists. On some results of Pressure and of the Intrusion of Granite in Stratified Paliweo- zoic Rocks near Morlaix, in Brittany. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 173, February, 1888, vol. XLIV, p. 11. * Here are also, for convenience’ sake, included all papers bearing on the subject of the origin of the gnisses and crystalline schists, oe RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. CaLLaway, C. A preliminary inquiry into the Genesis of the Crystalline Schists of the Malvern Hills. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 171, August, 1888, vol. XLIII, p. 525. On Parallel Structure in rocks as indicating a sedimentary origin. Geol. Mag., July, 1887, p. 351. — — On the alleged conversion of crystalline schists into igneous rocks in County Galway. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 171, August, 1888, vol. XLII, p. 517. Contends that the ancient gneisses of Galway (Ireland) display evidence of having been formed in part from mixtures of diorite and granite, similar to the more modern ‘ diglomerates.” The above-quoted author has also contended (same journal, p. 536) that many of the gneissic and schistose rocks of the Malvern Hills are formed out of igneous materials and owe their foliated structure to regional pressure, as proven by the intense contortion of granitic veins and by the mechanical effects recognized in the rocks under the microscope. Danzic, E. Ueber die eruptive Natur gewisser Gneisse sowie des Granulites im siichsischen Mittelgebirge. Kiel, 1888. Inaug.-Dis. Fox, Howarp. On the Gneissic Rocks off the Lizard, with notes on the specimens by J.J. H. Teall. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 174, May, 1888, vol. xxiv, p. 309. GrIkiIn, A. Report on the recent works of the Geological Survey in the Northwest Highlands of Scotland, based on the field-notes and maps of Messrs. B. N. Peach, J. Horne, W. Gunn, C. T. Clough, L. Hinxman, and H. M. Caddell. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 175, August, 1888, vol. xLIv, p. 378. Hunt, T. StERRY. On crystalline schists. Nature, September 27, 1888, p. 519. Lr VERRIER, M. Structure des gneiss. Note de M. Le Verrier, présentée & M. Fouque. Comptes Rendus, October 29, 18838, p. 669. Lorri, B. Sur les roches métamorphosées pendant les 4ges Tertiaires dans l'Italie centrale. Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, 1888, 3d series, vol. Xvi, p. 406, No. 6. Lory, Cu. Onthe constitution and structure of the crystalline schists of the Western Alps. (Abstract of Professor Lory’s original paper, by Dr. F. H. Hatch.) Nature, September 20, 1888, p. 506. Marr, J. E. Onsome effects of pressure on the Devonian sedimentary rocks of North Devon. Geol. Mag., May, 1888, p. 218. McManon,C. A. Note on the foliation of the Lizard Gabbro. Geol. Mag., February, 1887, p. 74. — The Gneissose Granite of the Himalayas. Geol. Mag., May, 1887, p. 212. Describes with some detail the macroscopic and microscopic structure of this granite, and which he contends could not have assumed its marked gneissic struc- ture through merely mechanical agencies. Regardsit as preduced by a forcing up _ of asemi-plastic granite porphyry mass through faults in the overlying rock where it was subjected to enormous pressure. Before final consolidation took place, minor and subsidiary eruptions took place, which forced new supplies of granitic material into fissures formed in the previously injected rocks, and this fresh mate- rial consolidated under conditions somewhat different from those of the first eruptions. MicHet-Livy, A. Sur Vorigive des terrains cristallins primitifs. Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, 1888, 3d series, vol. xvi, p. 102, No. 2. . OLDHAM, R. D. The Gneissose Rocks of the Himalayas. Geol. Mag., October, 1387, p. 461. ae Reuscu, H. Geologische Beobachtungen in einem regional metamorphosirten Ge- biet am Hardangerfjord in Norwegen. Neues Jahrb., 1887, Beil.-Band, 1st Heft, pp. 52-67 ; thirteen wood-cuts in text. ) Has studied the effects of pressure on sedimentary and massive rocks, and shows how in conglomerates a schistose structure may be produced which is quite distinct from the bedding due to sedimentation, PETROGRAPHY. 343 Treat, J.J.H. On the origin of certain banded Gneisses. Geol. Mag., November, 1887, p. 484. Contends that the gueissic rocks of the Lizard District (the granulitic series of Professor Bonney) are of igneous origin, and owe their banded structure to dy- namic agencies. (d) RELATING TO METHODS OF WORK. Breckr, F. Unterscheidung von Quarz und Feldspath in Diinnschliften mittelst Far- bung. Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, Zehnter Band, 1. Heft, 1888, p. 90. Treats the uncovered section with hydrotiuorie acid. Quartz isdissolved, while the feldsparis converted into an amorphous fluosilicate of alumina. This, when treated with aniline, absorbs the color, while the quartz remains clear. McMaunon, C. A. On a mode of using the Quartz-Wedge for estimating the strength of the Double Refraction of Minerals in thin slices of rock, Geol. Mag., Decem- ber, 1888, p. 548. Smertu, W.F. Apparatus for separating the mineral constituents of rocks. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dub. Soc., May, 1888, vol. v1, pp. 58-60. On a method of determining the specific gravity of substances in the form of powder. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dub. Soc., May, 1888, vol. v1, p. 61. STRENG, A. Ueber einigg mikrospisch-chemische Reaktionen. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1888, 11. Band., 2. Heft, p. 142. (€) MISCELLANEOUS. ADAMS, FRANK, and A. C. LAwson. On some Canadian Rocks containing scapolite, with a few notes on Rocks associated with the Apatite Deposits. Canadian Rec- ord of Sci., No. 4, 1888, vol. 111, pp. 186-201. AuGE, M. Note sur Ja Bauxite, son origine, son Age et son importance géologique. Bull. Soe. Géol. de France, 1888, 3d series, vol. Xv1, p. 345, No. 5. BaILey, W.S. Notes on the microscopical examinations of rocks from the Thunder Bay Silver District. Rep. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey of Canada, 1887, Appendix I, pp. 115 H to 122 H. Summary of Progress in Mineralogy and Petrography in 1887. Irom monthly notes in the American Naturalist. Summary of Progress in Mineralogy and Petrography in 1888. From monthly notes in the Am. Naturalist. These summaries are issued by Mr. Bailey in pamphlet form at the end of each year; they consist of the same notes published by him monthly in the American Naturalist, and form a very essential part of the literature to those not having access to many of the periodicals and other publications. On some peculiarly spotted rocks from Pigeon Cove, Minnesota. Am. Jour. Sci., May, 1888, pp. 388-393. BERTRAND, MARCEL. Sur la distribution géographique des roches éruptives en Eu- rope. Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, 1888, 3d series, vol. xvi, No. 7, p. 573. Bryer, Orro. Der Basalt des Grossdehsaer Berges und seine Einschliisse sowie iihnliche vorkommnisse aus der Oberlausitz. Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, x. Band, 1. Heft, p. 1. One plate with eight figures showing micro-structures. Brake, J. F. On the occurrence of Glaucophane-bearing Rock in Anglesey. Geol. Mag., March, 1888, p. 125. On the Monian System of Rocks. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 175, August, 1888, vol. xLiv, p. 463. Bonney, T.G. The foundation stoues of the earth’s crust. Nature, November 22, 1888, p. 89. —— Note on the structure of the Ightham Stone. Geol. Mag., July, 1888, p. 297. —— Notes on a part of the Huronian series in the neighborhood of Sudbury (Can- ada). Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 173, February, 1888, vol. XLIV, p. 32. 344 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. BonnEY, T.G. Note on specimens from Mysore, collected by G. Attwood. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 175, August, 1888, vol. XLIv, p. 651. s Describes the rocks as eclogites, hornblende and mica schists, felstones and porphyrites. One color-plate showing micro-structure of flattened garnets. ——— Note on specimens of the Rauenthal Serpentine. Geol. Mag., February, 1887, p. 65. Mr. Bonney is disposed to question Mr. Teall’s statement that this serpentine is an altered hornblende rock, but regards it rather as derived from a rock in which olivine was an essential constituent. BORNEMANN, J. G. Der Quarzporphyr von Heiligenstein und seine Fluidalstructur. Zeitschrift deuts. geol. Gesell., Xxxrx, Band, 4. Heft, p. 793. Ueber Schlackenkegel und Laven. Ein Beitrag zur Lehre vom Vulkanismus, Jahrb. der k preus. geol. Land- u. Bergakademie zu Berlin, 1887, p. 230. BorRNEMANN, L. G., Jr. Ueber einige neue Vorkommnisse basaltischer Gesteine auf dem Gebiet der Messtischbliitter Gerstungen und Eisenach. Jahrb. der k. preus. geol. Land- u. Bergakademie zu Berlin, 1887, p. 291. Bose, ParamMatua, Natu. Notes on the igneous Rocks of the districts of Raipur and Balaghat, Central Provinces. Ree. Geol. Soc. of India, vol. Xx1, P. 2d, 1888, p. 56. One plate, two figures, showing micro-structures. The rocks are described as felsites, basaltic rocks, and tuffs. Bosscua, J. Ueber den Meteorit von Karang Modjo oder Magetan anf Java. Neues Jahrb., Beil. Band, 1st Heft, pp. 126-144, 1887. Three plates showing macro- and micro-structures. Brapy, Henry B. Note on the so-called ‘‘Soapstone” of Fiji. Quar, Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 173, February 15, 1888, vol. XLIv, p. 1. Biickrnc, H. Mittheilungen iiber die Eruptivgesteine der Section Schmalkalden (Thiiringen). Jahrb. der k. preus. geol. Land- u. Bergakademie zu Berlin, 1887, p. 119: CAMERLANDER, CARL von. Zur Geologie des Granulitgebietes von Prachatitz am Ostrande des Bbhmer Waldes. Jahrb. der k. k. geol. Reichsanstalt, 1887, xxxvu, Ist, pp. 117-142. CATHREIN, A. Ueber den Proterobas von Leogang. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., ete., 1887, 1. Band, Erstes Heft, p. 113. Beitriige zur Petrographie Tirols. Neues Jahrb., 1887, 1. Band, 1. Heft, pp. 147-172. Describes from the Tyrolian Alpsa series of six rocks, comprising: (1) Staurolite mica schists, (2) garnet amphibolites, (3) pyroxenic serpentines, (4) tourmaline granite, (5) porphyrites, and (6) pitchstone porphyry. The garnet amphibolite is interesting mainly from its pseudomorphs of plagioclases after garnets. The serpentines are derived from diallage, bronzite or enstatite, and are appropriately named pyroxene serpentine. The porphyrites are classed as hornblende, uralite, mica, and garnet porphyrites; the last are characterized by the occurrence of numerous reddish brown garnets, the largest of the dimensions of a hemp-seed, and with chanveled and rounded faces shown to be due to oscillatory combina- tions of dodecahedral with icositetrakedral forms. The pitchstone porphyry presents a micro-crystalline or micro-felsitic ground-mass with fluidal struct. ure with orthoclase and oligoclase porphyritically developed and more rarely quartz and biotite. It occurs in the form of independent dikes and stocks, oftenof considerable size, cutting the prevailing quartz-porphyry and present- ing sharply defined borders without transitions between the two anywhere dis- cernable. Ueber primiire Verwachsung von Rutil mit Glimmer und Hisenerz. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., ete., 1888, 1. Band, 2. Heft, p. 151. Ueber Chloritoidschiefer von Grossarl. Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, vuI. Band, m1. und Iv. Heft, p. 331. labs ‘ PETROGRAPHY. 345 Cueuius, C. Die lamprophyrischen und granitporphyrischen Ganggesteine im Grundgebirge des Spessarts und Odenwalds. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1888, 11. Band, Erstes Heft, p. 67. CLARKE, F. W., and MERRILL, GEORGK P. On Nephrite and Jadeite. Proc. U.S. Nat. Museum, 1888, p. 115. CouENn, E. Andalusitfiihrende Granite. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., ete., i887, 11. Band, p. 178. Calls attention to the occurrence of inicroscopic andalusite in the granites of Klause and Rauhmiinzach in the Schwarzwald; in Rochesson, Department of Vosges; Moszlavina, Croatia; and other localities. CoL¥, GRENVILLE A. J. The Rhyolites of Wuenheim, Vosges. Geol. Mag., July, 1887, p. 299. On some additional occurrences of Tachylyte. Quar. Jour, Geol. Soe., No. 174, May, 1888, vol. XLIV., p. 300. Describes the occurrence of tachylyte in Ardtun, in Mull; Kilmelfort, in Ar- gyle; Bryansford, County Down, in Ireland; and among certain older rocks of the Welsh border. One plate, with six figures, showing micre-structures. Couuins, J. H. On the Geological History of the Cornish Serpentinous Rocks. Geol. Mag., May, 1887, p. 220. Concludes that these are altered olivine, hornblende, or augite rocks. CHRUSTCHOFF, K. VON. Beweis fiir den urspriinglich hyalin-magmatischan Zustand gewisser echter Granite und granitartiger Gesteine. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1887, 1. Band, zweites Heft, p. 208. CrosBy, W.O. Quartzites and Siliceous concretions. Tech. Quarterly, May, 1888, pp. 377-407. Discusses the origin of the secondary silica in quartzites and of the chaleedonic nodules in caleareous rocks. / xeology of the Outer Islands of Boston Harbor, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. His- tory, 1887, vol. xxi, p. 450. Cross, WHITMAN. Geology and Mining Industry of Leadville, Colorado. Appendix A. Petrography, Monograph xu, U. 8. Geol. Survey, pp. 319-358. Two full-page plates showing micro-structure. The rocks described are quartz-porphyries, diorites, porphyrites, rhyolites, trachytes, and andesites. One of the more interesting rocks of the series is the nevadite variety of the rhyolite. The sanidins of this rock often show a beauti- ful satin-like luster, which is shown to be ‘‘ due to the interference of light in passing films of air between the extremely thin plates,” into which the crystals are divided by a series of partings parallel to the lustrous surface. Drusy cavi- ties in the rock contain topaz in very perfectly developed forms. The andesites are in part hypersthenic, as previously described in Bull. No. 1, U. S. Geological Survey. The quartz porphyries frequently carry the mineral allanite. Cross, WHITMAN. Notes on the Henry Mountain Rocks. Geol. and Min. Industry of Leadville, Colorado. Mono. x11, U.S. Geol. Survey, pp. 359-362. The rocks are hornblendic and augitic porphyrites and are briefly noted for purposes of comparison with the rocks of the Leadville region. —— Notes on Phonolite from Colorado. Proc. Colo. Sci. Soe., 1887, pp. 167-174. This paper is of particular interest as describing the second occurrence of phonolite yet known in the United States.* The rock has not as yet been found in situ., but in the form of bowlders of ‘ local origin,” and ‘‘ apparently derived from the hills to the southward,” and on the eastern slope of the Hayden divide. * The only other known locality for this rock in the United States is the Black Hills of Dakota, where it was described by Caswell in 1880. 346 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Cross, WHITMAN On some eruptive rocks from Custer County, Colorado. Proce. Colo. Sci. Soc., 1887, pp. 228-250. The rocks described are, (1) rhyolites, with primary corroded garnets; (2) trachytes, apparently allied to the so-called sanidin-oligoclase trachytes of the Siebengebirge in Germany; (38) syenites; (4) peridotites, containing essential hornblende and hypersthene, with accessory biotite, plagioclase, apatite, pyrrho- tite, and sillimanite; (5) augite diorite, containing olivine; (6) sanidin bearing andesite, in which the oligoclase crystals are nearly always surrounded by a zone of orthoclase. DaLMER, Karu. Die Quartztrachyte von Campiglia und deren Beziehungen zu granitporphyrartigen uni grapitischen Gesteinen. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1887, 11 Band, p. 206. DERBY, ORVILLE A. On nepheline rocks in Brazil, with special reference to the as- sociation of phonolite and foyaite. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 171, August, 1887, vol. XLII, p. 457. Describes the geological occurrence and, to a certain extent, the lithological characters of some peculiarly interesting nepheline and leucite rocks in the proy- inces of Rio de Janeiro, Sao Paulo, and Minas-Geraes, Brazil. The more striking features of the paper are the conclusions reached regarding the relations of the phonolites and foyaites (eleolite syenite), the phonolite not only showing in- clusions of foyaite, but also the foyaite containing inclusions of phonolite, all appearances indicating that they are both portions of the same magma; that, in short, the phonolite occurs as a peripheral facies of the foyaite. A second re- markable feature is the occurrence of leucite in rocks of undoubted paleozoic age. The full significance of these discoveries may be best comprehended by those not specialists in this line of work if it be stated that the elieolite syenites are deep-seated or plutonic rocks of paleozoic age, and of which the phonolites have been considered the effusive tertiary or post-tertiary equivalents. Moreover the mineral leucite up to this time has been found as a constituent only of post-ter- tiary lavas. The two discoveries, it will be observed, having a very important bearing upon the subject of rock history and classification, and bringing once more proof of the utter impossibility of relying upon mineral composition or structure as a guide to geological age. The conclusions reached by Dr. Derby may be best understood by quoting the author’s exact words. He feels convinced of, (1) the substantial identity as regards mode of occurrence and geological age of the Caldas phonolites and foyaites; (2) the connection of the latter through the phonolites with a typical volcanic series containing both deep-seated and aerial types of deposits; (3) the equal, if not greater, antiquity of the leucite rocks as compared with the nepheline rocks, whether felsitic as phonolite, or granitic as foyaite; and (4) the probable paleozoic age of the whole eruptive se- ries. DILLER, J. S., and GrorGE F. Kunz. Is there a diamond field in Kentucky? Sci- ence, September, 1887, vol. x, p. 140. ELspvEN, J. VINCENT. Notes on the Igneous Rocks of the Lleyn Promontory. Geol. Mag., July, 1888, p. 303. FouquE, M. Sur les nodules de la granulite de Ghistorrai prés Fonni (Sardaigne). Bull. Soc. Frangaise Minéralogie, February, 1887, vol. x, p. 57. The nodules occur in a granulite consisting of quartz, orthoclase, oligoclase, and both white and black mica. They are rounded in outline and consist of an irreguiar nucleus of the same composition and structure as the inclosing rock surrounded by a shell composed of concentric layers of albite and biotite. —— Pétrographie de l’Hérault. Les porphyrites de Gabian. Note de MM. P. De Rouville et Auguste Dilage, presented by M. Fouque. Comptes Rendus, October 22, 1888, p. 665. Fox, Howarp, and ALEX. SOMERVALL. On the oceurrence of Porphyritie Structure in some rocks of the Lizard district, Geol. Mag., February, 1888, p. 75. > PETROGRAPHY. 347 FRANTZEN, W. Untersuchungen iiber die Gliederung des unteren Muschelkalks in einem Theile von Thiiringen und Hessen und iiber die Natur der Oolithkorner in diesen Gebirgsschichten. Jahrb. der k. preus. geol. Land-und Bergakademie zu Berlin, 1887, p. 1. Three full-page plates showing micro-structures. FriepEr, C. Sur un gisement de diamants et de saphirs d’ Australie. Bull. Soe. Francaise Minéralogie, February, 1888, vol. x1, p. 64. GERHARD, ALFRED EnGar. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der sogenannten ‘ Sodagranite.” Inaugural-Disseitation. Leipzig, 1887, thirty-five pages. Gini, A.C. Petrographical notes on a Rock Collection from Fernando Noronha, A preliminary notice. Johns Hopkins Uniy. Cireular, April, 1888, p. 71. GORGEN, ALEX. Sur la production artificielle de la zincite et de la Willemite. Bull. Soc. Frangaise Minéralogie, January, 1887, vol. x, p. 36. GOrz, J. Ueber Andalusit aus den krystallinen Schiefern von Marabastad, Trans- vaal. Neues Jahrb., 1887, 1. Band, zweites Heft, p. 211. GRAEFF, FraNZ Fr. Mineralogisch-petrographische Untersuchung von Eliolithsy- eniten von der Serra de Tingua, Proving Rio de Janeiro, Brasilien. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1887, 1, Band, p. 222. Describes the micro-structures and mineral composition of the nepheline-bear- ing rocks of Brazil, the field relations of which were described by O. A. Derby in Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc. for Aus ust, 1887. . —— lLaavenit im brasilianischen Elaeolithsyenit. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1887, zweites Heft, p. 201. Gratacap, L. P. The Eozoonal Rock of Manhattan Island. Am. Jour. Scei., 3d, 1887, vol. XXXIII, pp. 374-378. Describes the serpentine as secondary after a mineral of the amphibole group. GRESLEY, W. 8S. Notes on Cone in Cone. Geol. Mag., January, 1887, p. 17. Guricu, G. Beitriige zur Geologie von West-Afrika. Zeitschrift der deut. geol. Gesell., January, 1887, xxx1x. B., 1. Heft, p. 96. Describes foyaits from the Isle de Los and from Tumbo. These all carry orthoelase, eleolite, hornblende, and magnetite, while more or less sporadically occur sodalite, cancrinite, augite, wgerine, lavenite, astrophyllte, zircon, and spene. Other rocks described are an olivine gabbro trom Freetown, diabase and diorite, olivine diabase, amphibolite, sandstone, and gneiss from various points. GYLLING, HJALMAR. Zur Geologie der cambrischen Arkosen-Ablagerung des west- lichen Finland. Zeitschrift deuts. geol. Gesell., 4. Heft, XXx1x, p. 770. HARKER, ALFRED. Additional note on the Blue Hornblende of Myndd Mawr. Geol. Mag., October, 1858, p. 455. Calls attention to the probability of a blue hornblende found in the quartz porphyry proving to be riebeckite. —— Woodwardian Museum notes on some Anglesey Dykes. Geol. Mag., June, 1888, p. 267. —— On the Eruptive Rocks in the neighborhood of Sarn, Caernarvonshire, Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 175, August, 1888, vol. xLIv, p. 442. Describes the rocks of the area as (1) granites and granitic gneiss, (2) gabbro diorite and gneissic diorite, (3) diabase, (4) hornblende diabase, (5) hornblende picrite, and (6) dolerite. HartTLey, W. N. The Black Marbles of Kilkenny. ‘ci. Proc. Roy. Dub. Soc., April, 1887, vol. v, p. 486. Gives results of chemical analyses. Watrcu, Frederick H. On the spheroid-bearing Granite of Mullaghderg, County Donegal. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 175, August, 1888, vol, XLIvy, p. 545. Describes the spheroids as composed of a nucleus of oligociase, biotite, and over 12 per cent. magnetite with a peripheral shell of radiating feldspars, chiefly oligoclase. a little quartz, and possibly orthoclase. Size of spheroids about 3 by 4 inches, The granite itself is described as a ‘‘sphene-bearing hornblende gran- ite.” o48 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Hatrcu, Freperick H. On a Hornblende Hypersthene Peridotite from Losilwa, a low hill in Taveta District, at the S. foot of Kilimanjaro, East Africa. Geol. Mag., June, 1888, p. 257. Hawortn, Erasmus. A contribution to the Archean Geology of Missouri. Am, Geol. Mag., 1888, p. 280. Describes the eruptive rocks in the vicinity of Pilot Knob and Iron Mountain, Missouri. ‘These consist of (1) granite, (2) porphyries and porphyrites, (3) dia- bases and diabase porphyrites. The quartzes of the granites show often a de- cided approach to an idiomorphie structure and the orthoclases, in places, sec- ondary enlargements. Topaz was found in slides from near the mineral veins. A large share of the rocks is described as quartz porphyries and porphyrites, in some of which occurs the rare manganese epidote piedmontite. — A contribution to the Archean Geology of Missouri. Johns Hopkins Uniy. Cir., April, 188, p. 70. HENDERSON, G.G. Note on the composition of a Carbonaceous Sandstone. Trans. Geol. Soc. of Glasgow, 1886-’87~88, vol. VIII, part 1, p. 276. Herrick, C. L., W. G. Tiaut, and H. L. Jones. Geology and Lithology of Michi- picoten Bay. Results of the Summer Laboratory session of 1826, Bull. Soe. Laboratories, Denison Univ., 1887, parts 1 and 2, vol. m1, p. 119. ——— FE. S. Crarke, and J. L. DemMING. Some American Norytes and Gabbros. Am. Geol., June, 1888, p. 339. HeTrner, A., and G. Linck. Beitrage zur Geologie und Petrographie der Columbia- nischen Anden. Zeitschrift deuts. geol. Gesell., XL, Band, 2, Heft, p. 205, Hipscu, J. E. Ueber einige minder bekannte Eruptivgesteine des bOhmischen Mittel- gebirges. Min. u. pet. Mittheilungen, 9. B., IL, u. IIL, pp. 282-262. Six figures in text. Hint, E. The Rocks of Sark, Herm, and Jethou. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 171, August, 1888, vol. xLIII, p. 322. The principal features are a mass of Archean gneissoid rocks consisting of quartz, feldspars, dark green or black hornblende and microscopic apatites and sphenes. This is overlaid by a hornblendic schist consisting of alternating bands of very pure hornblende and feldspathic material with occasional quartzes. This rock often shows false bedding and is regarded as a possibly metamorphosed vol- canic ash. This in its turn is overlaid by a mass of granitic or syenitic igneous rock. The whole subsequently cut by a series of dikes including quartz-felsite, diabases, and kersantites. HINDE, GEORGE JENNINGS. On the chert and siliceous schists of the Permo-Carbon- iferous strata of Spitzbergen, and on the characters of the sponges therefrom, which have been described by Dr. E. von Dunikowski. Geol. Mag., June, 1888, p. 241. —— — On the organic origin of the chert in the Carboniferous limestone series of Ireland, and its similarity to that in the corresponding strata in North Wales and Yorkshire. Geol. Mag., October, 1887, p. 435. The paper is largely controversial. The author shows apparently conclusively that the cherts in question are formed mainly from the siliceous residues of sponges. Hoxsss, WILLIAM H. On the rocks oceurring in the neighberhood of Ilchester, How. ard County, Maryland. Being a detailed study of the area comprised in sheet No. 16 of the Johns Hopkins Univ. Circular, April, 1888, p. 69. (A preliminary notice; the full paper, with map and plates, in course of preparation.) Describes the rocks as hypersthene gabbro locally altered into gabbro diorite, olivine hyperite, diorites, pyroxenite, and granite containing abundant accessory allanite. HOLLAND, P., and E, Dickson. Examination of quartzites from Mills Hill, Pontes- bury. Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc., 188738, vol. v, part IV, pp. 380-384, PETROGRAPHY, 349 Hovey, E. O. A cordierite gneiss from Connecticut. Am. Jour. of Sci., July 18, 1888, vol. XXXVI, p. 57. Reports from the vicinity of Guilford, Connecticut, a cordierite gneiss. This is the first to be reported in the United States. The rock consists essentially of quartz, biotite, cordierite, and some plagioclase. Hupparp, Lucius L. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Nosean-fiihrenden Auswiirflinge des Laacher Sees. Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, vit. Band, v. Heft, p. 356. HuGues, T. McKrnNy. On some brecciated rock in the Archean of Malvern. Geol. Mag., November, 1887, p. 501. Hurron, F. W. The eruption of Mount Tarawera. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 170, May, 1-88, vol. XLIu, p. 178. Gives an account of the eruption of June 10, 1886. The materials ejected are classed as augite andesites and rhyolites. —— Ona hornblende biotite rock from Dusky Sound, New Zealand. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 176, November, 1888, vol. XLIv, p. 744. HYLAND, J. SHEARSON. Ueber die Gesteine des Kilimandscharo und dessen Umgebung, Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, x. Band, 111. Heft, p. 203. Jory, J. On the occurrence of Iolite in the Granite of County Dublin. Geol. Mag., November, 1888, p. 517. Jones, E. J. Examination of Nodular Stones obtained by trawling off Colombo. Rec. Geol. Soc. of India, part Ist, 1288, vol. xx1, p. 35. Jupp, J. W. On the Voleanic Phenomena of the eruption [of Krakatoa] and on the Nature and Distribution of the ejected materials. The Eruption of Krakatoa and subsequent Phenomena. Report of the committee of the Royal Society, London. Triibner & Co., 1888. KRATZER, F. Geologische Beschreibung der Umgebung von Ricau. Jahrbuchdek. k. geol. Reichsanstalt, 1888, xxxvill, 3rd, pp. 355-416. Two plates showing micro- structure. Kemp, J. F. Rosetown extension of the Cortlandt Series. Am. Jour. Sci., October, 1888, vol. XXXVI, pp. 247-253. —— The Dikes of the Hudson River Highlands. Am. Nat., August, 1888, p. 691. Describes dikes of basic rocks somewhat resembling the Camptonite of New Hampshire. KENDALL, PERCY F. Preliminary notes on some occurrences of Tachylyte in Mull. Geol. Mag., December, 1888, p. 555. KINAHAN, G. H. Arenaceous Rocks, Sands, Sandstones, Grits, Conglomerates, Quartz- Rocks, and Quartzites. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dub. Soc., July, 1887, vol. v, pp. 507-618. Gives many interesting facts relative to the composition, occurrence, and eco- nomic value of these materials. ——— Slates and Clays, with Introduction and Building notes by R. Clark. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dub. Soc., May, 1888, vol. v1, p. 69. The paper is acontinuation of those previously given on Irish economic geology. —— On Trish Arenaceous Rocks. Supplementary note to paper given in Sci. Proce. Roy. Dub. Soc., vol. v1, p. 507. Treats of the rocks wholly from an economic standpoint. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dub. Soc., February, 1888, vol. v1, pp. 6-13. —— Marbles and limestones. Sci. Proc. Roy. Dub. Soc., April, 1887, vol. v, pp. 489-496. Continued in January number, p. 372. KiSpatTiz, M. Die Glaucophangesteine der Fruskagora in Kroatien. Jahrb. derk, k. geol. Reichsanstalt, 1887, Xxxxvi, Ist, pp. 35—46. KLEIN, CARL. Optische Untersuchung zweier Granatvorkommen vom Harz. Neues Jahrb. Min. Geol., ete., 1487., 1. Band, zweites Heft, p. 200. Petrographische Untersnehung einer Sinte von Gesteinen aus der Umgebung des Bolsener Sees. Sitz. der kén. preus. Akad. der Wiss. zu. Berlin, February, 1888, v, 2nd, pp. 91-121 The rocks described are an olivine-bearing trachyte, from Torre Alfina and San Lorenzo ; olivine-bearing andesitic trachyte, from Sassara and Mont Alfina; 350 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. KLEIN, CARL—Continued. trachyte, fromm Bolsena and Monte di San Magno; trachyte tutf, from Valle Vi- dona; leucite tephrite, leucite basanite, and augite andesite with accessory olivines. The rocks are described in detail with a large number of complete an- alyses. Koro, BunDJ1RO. On some occurrences of Piedmontite Schist in Japan. Quar. Jo. Geol. Soc., No. 171, August, 1882, vol. xLm1, p. 474. KrRousTCHOFF, K. de. Nouvelles synthéses du quartz et de la tridyinite. Bull. Soe: Francaise Mineralogie, January, 1887, vol. x, p. 31. Note sur une inclusion dune encrite 4 enstatite dans le basalte de Wingendort pres de Laban, en Silésie. Bull. Soc. Francaise Minéralogie, December, 1887, vol. RNa: Notice sur la granulite variolitique de Fonni, pres de Ghittorrai, Sardaigne. Bull. Soc. Francaise Minéralogie, April and May, 1888, vol. x1, p. 173. Lacroix, A. Note sur un mode de reproduction du Corindon. Bull. Soe. Frangaise Minéralogie, vol. x, March, 1887, p. 157. Note sur la composition p4trographique des roches de Blekka et Dalane (Nor- wege.) Bull. Soc. Frangaise Minéralogie, March, 1887, vol. x, p. 152. and BARET, CH. Sur la pyroxenite 4 wernerite du Point-du-Jour, prés Saint- Nazaire (Loire-Inférieure.) Bull. Soc. Francaise Minéralogie, July, 1887, vol. x, p. 258. Launay, L. pr. Note sur les Porphyrites de VAllier. Bull. Soe. Géol. de France, 1888, 3rd Series, No. 2, vol. XVI, p. 84. Lawson, ANDREW C. Geology of the Rainy Lake Region, with remarks on the elas- sification of the crystalline Rocks, west of Lake Superior. Preliminary note. Am. Jour. Sci., 1887, vol. Xxxu1II, p. 473. Note on some diabase dykes of the Rainy Lake Region. Am. Geol., April, 1888, p. 199. LeMBERG, J. Zur Kenntnissder Bildung und Umbildung von Silicaten. Zeitschrift deut. geo]. Gesell., xxxrx. Band, 3. Heft, p. 559. Lewis, H. CarviLtt. Ona Diamantiferous Peridotite, and the Genesis of the Dia- mond. Geol. Mag., January, 1887, p. 22 ‘alls attention to the fact that the South African diamonds occur in pertions of aperidotite in contact with highly carbonaceous shales. — The Matrix of the Diamond. Geol. Mag., March, 1838, p. 129. Describes the porphyritic peridotite in which the South African diamonds oceur. The principal mineral constituents are bronzite, chrome diallage, smarag- dite, biotite perowskite, pyrope, titanic and chromic iron. Rutile is mentioned as occurring as a secondary constituent through the alteration of olivine into serpentine. The structure is porphyritic and brecciated; suggests the varietal name of /imberlite. LOEWINSON-LEssING, F. Die mikroskopische Beschaffenheit des Sordawalits. Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, rx. Band, 1. Heft, p. 61. Shows that the so-called Sordawalite of Nordenskjéld is not a true mineral species, as heretofore supposed, but a vitreous eruptive rock—diabase vitrophyrite, aceording to the author. Four figures showing micro-structure. Zur Bildungsweise und Classification der klastischen Gesteine. Min. u. pet. Mitth., B. 1x, VI, p. 528. Lorerz, H, Ueber das Vorkommen von Kersantit und Glimmerporphyrit in derselben Gangspalte, bei Unterneubrunn im Thiiringer Walde, Jahrb. der k. preus. geol. Land- und Bergakademie zu Berlin, 1887, p. 100. Lupwie, E.,and G. TsCHERMAK. Der Meteorit von Angra dos Reis. Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, vii. Band, v. Heft, p. 341. The stone is described as consisting of augite, 93.28 per cent.; olivine, 5.45 per cent.; pyrrhotite, 1.27 per cent., and is anomalous in showing, on analysis, 24.51 per cent. of CaO. The name Angrite is proposed for this new variety of meteoric stones, CT =e =~ = ain) PETROGRAPHY. ail MaAcHADO, JORDANO. Beitrag zur Petrographie der siidwestlichen Grenze zwischen Minas Geraes und S. Paulo. Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, 1x. Band, ly. u. v. Heft, p. 318. The rocks described are nepheline syenites, quartz-diorites, olivine diabase, gneiss, and sedimentary rocks. Twelve colored figures, showing micro-structure, and map. MERRILL, GEORGE P. Concerning the Montville Serpentine. Science, June, 22, 1588. — On the Fayette County Meteorite. (See Whitfield & Merrill.) Am. Jour. Sci., August, 1888, vol. XxxvI, p. 113. — On Nephrite and Jadeite. (See Clark & Merrill.) Proc. Nat. Museum, 1888, p. 115. Note on the secondary enlargement of Augites in a Peridotite from Little Deer Isle, Maine. Am. Jour. Sci., June, 1888, pp. 488-490. On the San Emiglio Meteorite. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Museum, 1888, p. 161. On the Serpeutine of Montville, New Jersey. Proc. U.S. National Museum, 1888, p. 105. MEUNIER, STANISLAUS. Détermination lithologique de la Météorite de Fayette County, Texas. Comptes Rendus, December 17, 1888, p. 1016. MicuagrL, Paut. Ueber die Saussurit Gabbros des Fichtelgebirges. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., ete., 1888, 1. Band, 1. Heft, pp. 32-64. One plate. MicHeLt-Livy, A., and A. Lacrorx. Sur le granite & amphibole de Vaugueray (Vauguerite de Fournet.) Bull. Soc. Francaise Minéralogie, January, 1887, VOls Xeaps 27. This rock, variously described under the names of Vauguerite, Micaceous diorite, and Kersanton, is, after amicroscopic study, referred by the above authorities to the gronp of hornblende granites. Note sur les roches éruptives et cristallines des Montagnes du Lyonnais. Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, 1888, 3d series, No. 3, vol. XVI, p. 216. Note sur un basalte riche en zéolithes des environs de Perrier (Puy-de-Déme). Bull. Soc. Frangaise Minéralogie, February, 1887, vol. x, p. 69. Mipptemiss, C. S. Crystalline and Metamorphic Rocks of the lower Himalaya Garhwal and Kimaon. Sec. 1m. Rec. Geol. Soc. of India, 1888, vol. XX1I, p. Ist, pp. 11-28. Three full-size plates, showing micro-structure. Moétier, Ep. Petrograpbische Untersuchung einiger Gesteine der Rhén. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., ete., 1888, 1. Band, zweites Heft, pp. 81-116, with one plate of twenty-three figures. The rocks are deseribed as sanidin-rich tephrites, phonolites, nepheline basalts. Morton, G. H. Microscopie characters of the Millstone Grit of southwest Lanca- shire. Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc., 1886-87, vol. v, p. ILI, pp. 280,253. ——— The microscopic characters of the Cefu-y-fedw Sandstones of Denbighshire and Flintshire. Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc., 1886-87, vol. v, part 11, pp. 271-279. MiaGr, O. Ueber ‘“Gelenksandstein” aus der Umgegend von Delhi. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., ete., 1887, 1. Band, zweites Heft, p. 195. OsANN, A. Ueber Sanidinite yon Sao Miguel. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1888, 1. Band, zweites Heft, p. 117. Beitrag zur Kenutniss der Labradorporphyre der Vogesen. Habilitations- sehrift zur Erlangung der Venia Docendi der hohen philosophischen Facultit der Universitit Heidelberg, vorgelegt von Dr. A. Osann, Assistent am mineralo- gischen Institut. Abhandlungen zur geologischen Special-Karte von Els.-Lothr., Band 11, Heft 11, 1887. Inaug. Diss. Patron, H. B. Die Serpentin- und Amphibolgesteine nérdlich von Marienbad in Bohmen. Min. u. pet. Mittheilungen, 9. B., u. u. 11. Heft, pp. 89-144. With two wood-cuts in the text. POHLMANN, R. Einschliisse von Granit im Lamprophyr (Kersantit) des Schiefer- bruches Biirenstein bei Lehesten in Thiiringen, Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol,, etc., 1888, 11. Band, 2, Heft, p. 87, BDZ RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. PosSrepny, F. Ueber die Adinolen von Pribram in B6hmen. Min. und pet. Mittheilun- gen, 1888, x. Band, u1. Heft, p.175. RaAIsINn, CATHERINE A. Notes on the Metamorphic Rocks of South Devon. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 172, November, 1887, vol. XL111, p. 715. : —w— On some rock specimens from Somali Land. Geol. Mag., September, 1888, p. 414. Describes these rocks as porphyrites, hornblende diabase, granite, gneisses, tale schists, epidote schists, quartzite, grits, sand and lime stones. On some rock specimens from Socotra. Geol. Mag., November, 1888, p. 504. Rowe, A. W. On the rocks of Essex Drift. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 171, August, 1888, vol. XLII, p. 351. The rocks were studied with a view, if possible, of ascertaining their original source. They are identified as granite syenite, quartz porphyries, quartz tra- chytes, trachytes, dolerites, granulites, crystalline schists, quartzites and quartz rocks, sandstones, limestones, and fragments of silicified woods. RupoupH, Fritz. Beitrag zur Petrographie der Anden von Peru und Bolivia. Min, und pet. Mittheilungen, rx. Band, Iv. u. v. Heft, p. 269 The rocks described are andesites of the pyroxene or hornblende varieties. RUuTLEY, FRANK. On Perlitic Felsites, ete. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 176, Novem- ber, 1888, vol. xxiv, p. 740. Describes an obscure perlitic structure occurring in certain felsitic rocks of the Herefordshire Beacon ; suggests, further, the probability that felsites resulting from the devitrification of obsidian, quartz felsites, aplite, arkose or feldspathic grits may on decomposition pass into rocks composed mainly of quartz and kaolin and thence by further alteration into epidosite. —-— On the rocks of the Malvern Hills. Quar. Geol. Jour. Soc., No. 171, Angust, 1888, vol. XLin, p. 481. SANDBERGER, F. Bemerkungen iiber den Silbergehalt des Glimmers aus dem Gneisse von Schapbach und des Augits aus dém Diabase von Andreasberg am Harze. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1887, 1. Band, erstes Heft, p. 111. SauER, A. Ueber Riebeckit, ein neues Glied der Hornblendegruppe, sowie tiber Neu- bildung von Albit in granitischen Orthoklasen. Zeitschrift deuts. geol. Gesell., XL. Band, 1. Heft, p. 138. Scumipt, C. Diabasporphyrite und Melaphyre vom Nordabhang der Schweizer Alpen. Neues Jahyb. Min., Geol., ete., 1887, 1. Band, erstes Heft, p. 58. Describes a diabase porphyrite and meiaphyr presenting certain interesting features. The porphyrite occurs, cutting Eocene strata in its three typical varie- ties, as a dense, dirty, grayish green, in places dark violet mottled or veined rock carrying small nests of calcite. In the thin section it is pronouncedly porphyritic, with long, slender plagioclases, which from their small extinction angles are sup- posed to be oligoclase. The groundmass consists of augite and feldspars, some- times grouped in tuffs or with a tendency toward spherulitic structure. The feldspars contain inclosures of the amorphous base, often showing a mere vein of feldspar substance. ‘The second variety is of a gray green color, and badly altered, only the feldspars being recognizable while the base has gone over to chloritic material, and granules of opacite, calcite, and chlorite abound, The third variety is a reddish brown dense rock which the microscope shows to consist of a confused aggregate of oligoclase Jeistens with interstitial irregularity developed augites. Thestone therefore presents all the characters of the pre-Tertiary por- phyrites, although. as above noted, of post-Eocene age. The melaphyr is also of interest as containing olivine, which has undergone alteration into a bastite-like substance, here noted for the first time. ——— Ueber den sogenannten Taveyannaz-Sandstein. Neues Jahrb, Min., Geol., etc,, 1888, 11, Band, erstes Heft, p. 80. “: > PETROGRAPHY. 353 SHERBORN, C. Davies. Ona limestone with Concentric Structure, from Kulu, North India. Geol. Mag., June, 1888, p. 255. Smock, JoHn C. Building stone in the State of New York. Bull. No, 3, N. Y. State Mus. of Nat. History, 1888, 8vo, pp. 152; printed for the Museum. The volume gives an account of (1) the geological position and geographical distribution of the building stone in this State; (2) descriptive note of quarry district and quarries. SoMERVAIL, ALEX. On aremarkable Dyke in the Serpentine of the Lizard. Geol. Mag., 1888, p. 533. StreNG, A. Ueber die in den Graniten von Baveno vorkommenden Mineralien. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1887, 1. Band, erstes Heft, p. 98. Srriver, J. Ueber Gastaldit und Glaukophan. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1887, 1. Band, zweites Heft, p. 213. Tate, A. Norman. Ironas a coloring matter of Rocks. Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc., 1886-87, vol. v, part I, pp. 287-289. TrERMIER, M. Note sur trois roches éruptives interstratifiées dans le terrain houiller du Gard. Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, 3d series, 1888, No. 7, vol. xvi, p. 617. T6RNEBOHM, A. E. Ueber das bituminése Gestein vom Nullaberg in Schweden. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1888, 11. Band, erstes Heft, p. 1, with 12 wood-cuts. VAN Hise, C. R. Note on the enlargement of hornblendes and augites in Frag- mental and Eruptive Rocks. Am. Jour. Sci., 1887, vol. Xxx1Il, p. 335. Von Foutton, H., and Vict. GOLDSCHMIDT. Ueber die geologischen der Inseln Syra Syphmos u. Tinors. Jablrb. d. k. k. geol. Reichsanstalt, 1887, xxxvut, Ist, pp. 1-34. The rocks described are gneisses, glaucophone, hornblende, ‘‘strahlstein,” and augitic schists, with secondary serpentine after the hornblende schists. WETHERED, Epwarp. On insoluble residues obtained from the Carboniferous Lime stone series at Clifton. Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc., No. 174, May, 1888, vol. xiv, p. 186. WHITFIELD, J. E., and G. P. MERRILL, The Fayette County Meteorite. Am. Jour. Sci., August, 1888, vol. Xxxvi, pp. 113-119. Two figures in text. Gives resulfsof chemical and microscopic examinations of a chondritic olivine enstatite stone from above-named locality. WILLIAMS, GEORGE H. On the Serpentine of Syracuse, N. Y. Science, March, 1887, vol. rx, p. 232. —— The Norites of the ‘Cortlandt Series” on the Hudson River, near Peekskill, New York. Am. Jour. Sci., 1887, vol. XxxI11, 3d, p. 135-144, also 191-199. The rocksdescribed are norites proper, hornblende norite, mica norite, hyperite or augite norite, and pyroxenite. —— On the chemical composition of the orthoclase in the Cortlandt norite. Am. Jour. of Sci., 1887, vol. xxx11, p. 243. On the Serpentine (Peridotite) occurring in the Onondaga Salt-group, at Syracuse, New York. Am. Jour. Sci., Aug., 1887, vol. xxxIv, p. 137. Shows that this rock, considered by Dr. Hunt (Min. Phys., pp. 443-447) as orig- inating as an aqueous precipitate, is in reality an altered peridotite. —-— The massive rocks and contact phenomena of the ‘‘Cortlandt Series,” near Peekskill, New York. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circular, April, 1888, p. 63. Abstract of a series of papers in course of publication in the American Journal of Science. Rutil nach Ilmenit in verandertem Diabas-Pleonast (Hercynit) in Norit vom Hudson-Flnss, Perowskit in Serpentin (Peridotit) von Syracuse, New York. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., ete., 1887, 11. Band. p. 263. Wortu, R.N. Some Detrital Deposits associated with the Plymouth Limestone, Trans. Roy. Geol. Soc. of Cornwall, vol. x1, part m1, pp, 151-162, H, Mis. 142——23 354 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Wutr, Hernricu. Beitrag zur Petrographie des Hererolandes in Stidwest-Afrika. Min. und pet. Mittheilungen, vim. Band, 11. u. tv. Heft, p. 193. Describes the rocks as granite, diorite, basalt, gneiss, mica and diorite schists, amphibolite, augite, gneisses bearing scapolite and wallastonite, augite schists, and granular limestones. Witrine, E. A. Untersuchung eines Nephelinsyenit aus dem Mittleren Transvaal, Siid-Afrika. Neues Jahrb. Min., Geol., etc., 1888, 11. Band, erstes Heft, p. 16. YOUNG, JOHN. Quartz as a Rock-Forming Mineral, Trans, Geol, Soc, of Glasgow, 1886-’87, 1887~’88, vol. VI, part U1, p, 278, RECENT PROGRESS IN DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. By CLEVELAND ABBE. PREFACE. The previous summaries of progress in meteorology that I have pub- lished since 1871 have each in its turn more or less imperfectly cov- ered the whole field of meteorology, but it has not Seemed wise for me in the present summary to endeavor to compass a science which is now so rapidly enlarging in all directions. Several reasons have led me to this conclusion, among which I may mention, first, the fact that the American Journal of Meteorology, published at Ann Arbor, Mich., and which is now in its fifth year, has, since the publication of my sum- mary for 1884, endeavored to keepits American readers fully acquainted with the progress in all branches of our subject, while the German Zeitschrift, published at Hamburg, and which is now in the sixth year of its succession to the Austrian Zeitschrift, accomplishes the same ob- ject for German readers in the most exhaustive manner, and is of course widely circulated in this country. Again, as regards recent progress in instrumental meteorology, American readers will perhaps find a sufficiently complete statement of the present condition of that subject in my Treatise published in December, 1888, as part 11 of the annual re- port of the Chief Signal Officer for 1887. Finally,asmy own studies have during the past year been almost wholly directed to the dynamical phenomena that are offered to us in the movements of the atmosphere, and as these are undoubtedly by far the most important questions that come before the practical meteorologist, and are those about which most numerous inquiries are made (or rather by means of which innumera- ble popular questions must be answered), I have in the present sum- mary endeavored to give an account of the important works that have appeared up to December, 1888, on the movements of storms and the general motions of the atmosphere, reserving for a next report some equally important papers that have come to hand since that date. Some of these memoirs are so important and so little accessible to American readers, that not content with a popular summary, I have pre- pared full translations of them, which will be printed in the present, or a following Report, in the confident hope and expectation that American mathematicians, pliysicists, and meteorologists may thus bestimulated to 355 356 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. prosecute further studies in the directions indicated by the most success- ful European students. At first sight these original memoirs and even the popular summaries may appear mathematical and repugnant to the ordinary meteorological observer, but meteorology, like astronomy, em- ploys a wide range of talent. If the observer and the computer are needed in both, so also are the physicist and mathematician; in both cases we have to do not merely with the superficial phenomena of nature, but also with the fundamental laws that underlie these and a process of severe thought is needed in the discovery and the applica- tion of these laws. It seems to have been conceded by all that meteoro- logical phenomena, at least those which depend on the motions of the atmosphere, are too difficult to be unraveled at present, but during the past few years the application of thermo-dynamics has been so helpful, and the study of fluid motions, whether discontinuous or steady, has made such advances as to justify the belief that we may begin to build a lasting superstructure of dynamic and rational deductive meteorology. But such a work needs the co-operation of many minds. The fundamental factors in meteorology and climatology are the forces of heat and gravity; the figure, rotation, and inequalities of the earth; the circulation of vapor, and its latent heat; all this is summed up in “the thermo dynamics and hydro dynamics of our atmosphere.” For ages mankind has relegated to evil and good spirits, to chance, to instinct or will, to the stars, the planets, the comets, and the moon, to the fates, to sun-spots, to electricity, and to every other form of su- perstition the explanation of our complex phenomena, because, in our despair, we were not able to comprehend the possibilities of the simple laws of mechanics. The labors of hydraulic engineers in handling the turbulent flow of rivers ; of astronomers in treating the motion of the planets; of chemists in unraveling the mysteries of compound bodies; of physicists in explaining the phenomena of light, heat, and electricity ; of mathematicians in resolving the difficulties attending the treatment of complex functions, were all needed as preparatory to successful attacks upon the laws of the motions of the atmosphere. May the pres- ent summary be the means of enlisting the co-operation of universities and their patrons, professors and their students, in a work that prom- ises results so important to human welfare. The few memoirs that I have summarized in the following pages as having important bearings on our knowledge of the atmosphere and its storms are to be classified as follows : I. Laboratory experiments on fluid motion. . 1. Helmholtz and Kirchoff. 5. Colledon and Weyher. 2. Oberbeck. 6. Reynolds. 3. Vettin. 7. Hagen. 4. Bezold. 8. Kummer, Ii. Statistics of actual storms, 9, Loomis, DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. Hy III. Theoretical hydro-dynamies applied to the motion of the air. 10. K6ppen. 18. Eliot. 11. Ferrel. ’ 19. Sir William Thomson. 12. Sprung. 20. Oberbeck. 13. Greely. 21. Oberbeck. 14. Scott. 22. Oberbeck. 15. Blanford. 23. Helmholtz. 16. Davis. 24. Diro Kitao. 17. Abercromby. 25. Fluid motion. IV. Thermo-dynamies of atmospheric phenomenon. 26. Introductory. 27. Bezold. V. Prediction of storms and weather. 98. Abbe. I.—LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS ON FLUID MOTION. The imitation in laboratory experiments of natural motions of the atmosphere offers an instructive and fascinating field for research. Among those who have contributed to this subject are: (1) Helmholtz, in 1857, first solved analytically the problems of vortex motion, and in 1868 those of jets, both being illustrations of general propositions in discontinous motions. Kirchhoff immediately followed with solutions of other cases, and since then W. Thomson, J. J. Thom- son, Rayleigh, Hicks, and other English writers, Oberbeck, Planck, Zoppritz, Bertrand, Boussinesq, Saint Vincent, and others, have added to these conquests of analysis. The experimental illustrations and verifications of their results have been especially due, as regards jets in liquids, to Savart 1833, Bidone 1838, Rayleigh 1879, Oberbeck 1877, Reynolds 1883, and as regards jets and whirls in air to Vettin 1857 to 1887, Colladon and Weyher 1887, (2) Oberbeck.—As long ago as 1877 this mathematician, by careful experiments, reproduced the results analytically obtained by himself and predecessor, all of which will be found in the appended translation of his memoir on discontinuous motions. These jets in water have a close analogy to the columns of warm air that rise in the atmosphere. (3) Vettin, of Berlin, whose work began 1856, and whose first publi- cation was in Poggendorff’s Annalen of 1857, met with an opposition from Dove, that seems to have inspired him with the resolution to ob- serve and experiment until all doubt was settled. Consequently, we owe to Vettin a remarkab!e series of observations on clouds and most instructive experiments, illustrating the whole convective process by which heat and moisture are carried by the air from the ground to the upper atmosphere, and inversely the dryness, cold and motion of the upper air brought down tous. Vettin’s latest contributions are in the volumes of the Meteorologische Zeitschrift for 1887. (4) Bezold, who, in 18586, was called from Munich to Berlin to take charge of the reorganized Meteorological Institute of Prussia, has pub- 358 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. lished the account of some carefully executed experiments on vortices and other motions in water, illustrating points in the movements in the air. (5) Colladon and Weyher.—As to experimental work in circular vor- tices nothing has been more interesting than that done on a large scale in 1887 by Colladon at Geneva, and Weyher at Paris. Colladon used a simple apparatus for producing vortices and arti- ficial whirlwinds and water-spouts both in water and in air. A more effective apparatus was constructed by Weyher, in which a great variety of interesting vortical phenomena were produced, illustrating what might happen in the free atmosphere if only the conditions were the same. He established a drum, rapidly revolving about a vertical axis, which therefore set in motion the surrounding air of the room or other inclosure. Ifthe drum is at the top of the inclosure, the air thrown out from it descends along the sides of the room, while, in the center im- mediately below the drunf, a rapid spiral or corkscrew movement exists inward and upward. Water contained in a vessel in the middle of the room is set in motion by the air, and some drops are even carried up- ward through the ascending core, thus approximately imitating the lower end of a water-spout, and showing how spouts and tornadoes originating in the clouds settle downwards to the earth. Many modi- fications of his apparatus have been made by Weyher, illustrating many problems in vortex motion, and which are valuable for the comparison with the analytical formule of hydro-dynamics, but which have only indirect bearing on meteorological phenomena. They, however, serve to remove from the mind any difficulties that may have been experienced by those who hesitate to admit the importance of vortex motion in meteorology. (6) Reynolds.—Among the investigations into the motions of fluids, that made by Prof. Osborne Reynolds, on “the two modes of mo- tion of water,” has had a peculiar interest for me and seems generally to be regarded as one that has contributed decidedly to our knowledge of the conditions under which steady motion and eddying or vortex and wave motions take place. Reynolds’s paper is published in the London Philosophical Transactions of 1883. In his annual address, November 30, 1888, Professor Stokes says of it: ‘‘The dimensions of the terms in the equations of motion ofa fluid, when viscosity is taken into account, involve, as has been previously pointed out, the conditions of dynamical similarity in geometrically similar systems in which the motion is regu- lar; but when the motion becomes eddying it seemed po longer to be amenable to mathematical treatment. But Professor Reynolds has shown that the same conditions of similarity hold good as to the aver- age effect even when the motion is of the eddying kind; and moreover that if in one system the motion is on the border betweeu steady and eddying, in another system it will also be on the border, provided this system satisfies the above conditions of dynamical as well as geometri- So DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 359 cal similarity. The resistance to the flow of water in channels and con- duits usually depends mainly on the formation of eddies, and though we can not determine mathematically the actual resistance, yet the ap- plication of the above proposition leads to a formula for the flow in which there is a most material reduction in the number of constants, for the determination of which we are obliged to have recourse to ex- periment.” (7) Hagen.—No experimental work has been done on the absolute re- sistance of the air to bodies moving through it superior to that of the eminent hydraulician H. Hagen, of Berlin; a translation of whose mem- oir will be given in the series previously referred to, because of the fre- quent inquiries that are made of me as to his results. But in applying Hagen’s observed pressures to other surfaces, or other angles of incidence than those used by him, great mistakes are liable to be made, and the student should consult the chapter on anenometers and wind pressure in the *‘ Treatise on Meteorologial Apparatus,” Re- port of the Chief Signal Officer for 1887, part 11, or the excellent mem- oir of St. Venant, quoted below, if he would avoid serious errors. (8) Auwmmer.—Allied to the problem of resistance, treated of by Hagen, for plates normal to the wind, is that of plates inclined to the wind, which is one that is specially important in problems relating to gunnery, Sailing, flying, and the construction of windmills. On this matter Kummer has made a Serious of experimental determinations of the center of pressure for a thin flat plate when struck by the wind at special angles of incidence. Although his revised results were published in 1876 in the Berlin Abhandlungen yet they seem unknownin America, and I have therefore re-arranged them in the followiag table. Kummer’s final measurements were made on six stiff glass plates of the following shapes and dimen- sions : [ ips [ er : Plate. Length. 3readth. | Millimeters.| Millimeters.| Meas: 90 90 WaB reese © | 180 | 90 | ix oe 180 | 60 | iO bea 180 30 | Eee a 180 | 20 | EE Asote 180 10 The center of pressure is the point at which the plate must be sup- ported in order to remain quietly balanced when the wind is blowing upon it ata given inclination. These points are always in front of the center of figure, or between it and the windward edge. The distance between the two centers is given in the column ¢; the angle between the wind and the plate is given in the column a At first thought one would be inclined to convert the ¢, as given in milli- 360 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. meters, into decimal fractions of the whole length of the plate, and apply the corresponding angles to similar plates of any size. This can be done in the case of the square plate A, by simply multi- plying its sides and its € by two, and thus obtaining the column 2A, as if for a square 180™" on a side. If the reasoning were correct then the a in the column 2A should be comparable with those extrapolated from B and C, but the relation between them is not simple, so that care must be taken in applying this data to other cases. Center of pressure for inclined rectangles. A. | a —— Ge a Ceillata |2eAcsol ocs Cella el S| | mm lo) mm O ie] | 0) ce) fe) a 0 90 0 90 90 90 90 |} 90 90 1) 84| 2} sf) 85] 8] 86) 87| 86 gi 4| 77 | 78) 7 | 83| 85] 82] (ars | 70) 6| 10} 68) 66) 7) a2] 78] 4} 2; 8) @2) 58) 56) 69) 75) 74] Be) 0524 0a be |, BRIM sbah | es) peo mera lok 16) eA] Qh) 942. oT Ny SBA c63yl2 Mahe GEN Z| 31) 0] ~31,|- 45.) Sih wok) celal amet edie 28 16 28 43) 50 SON G0 exe 9 |: 26:) ey 726"| Pare Mao “azn sor 10) 25 | 20) 25) 39) 48) 55) 58 | At} 2h | 28.) 2a) Bz) all) ba leeoMl fo tall ops eas 9. sable iasel) eo Ou ox | a3] 21] 261 a1] ‘s3| as} 45 | | | | | Spam hag eal TT ey 18 135 \eeasoale els TO |) 36 . 19) | 2 eee Sal nemnte 9 20] 10) 40) 10 8 21 g| 42 8 7 22 ial ac TalleesX 23 5 | 46 5 | 24/ X 48 | X X indicates that the angle is indeterminate or that the plate oscillated so much as to show that it was in a state of unstable equilibrium. II.—STATISTICS OF ACTUAL STORMS. (9) Elias Loomis, on the form, extension, movement, and temperature phenomena of barometric maxima and minima.—The tirst and second chapters of the revised edition of Loomis’s contributions to meteorology, although printed in New Haven in 1885 and 1887, respectively, for pri- vate distribution in Europe mostly, will not be generally accessible to American readers until they appear in permanent form in the forth- DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 361 coming volume ly of the Memoirs of the National Academy of Science. Asan early copy of the private edition has fallen into the hands of Drs. Van Bebber and W. Koeppen, the latter has given a condensed review of both chapters more perspicuous than the mass of details given in the original. We shall do our readers a favor by laying this before them ; and the more so inasmuch as the labor bestowed by Koeppen and his occasional criticisms as reviewer enhance the value of his work. This constitutes a most condensed summary of the results to dynamic meteor- ology of the statistics published daily by the U.S. Signal Service. BAROMETRIC MAXIMA.—The isobars around a barometric maximum are of irregular, more or less elliptical, form. The ratio of the greatest to the least axis of the ellipse, as determined by Loomis from three years’ observations for North America, for Europe and the Atlantic Ocean, is, respectively, 1.91 for 238 cases in North America, and 1.84 for 252 cases in Europe’and on the Ocean. Ina third of all these cases this ratio was more than 2. The same number is also found by Loomis for the ratio of the similar axes in areas of barometric minima. The direction of the longest axis with reference to the meridian is also demonstrated to vary very little in the two regions, being as shown in the accompanying table: roe Europe and North the Atlantic | America. | Ocean. Maxima ....-.....| N. 44° E.....| N. 75° E. Mimimaiseete sacicte SaIeN's 109 B._ N. 35° E. The more easterly direction of the axes of the minima on the ocean and in Europe is by Loomis attributed to the frequent formation of a ridge of high pressure which in the colder half of the year connects the area of high pressure in Asia and the Azores. Three fourths of the above cases are of this kind. Loomis subjects to a special investigation the especially intense baro- metric maxima. He collects these in three tables, of which the first one (Loomis No. XL) contains all cases in which, during the years 1872 to 1884, a pressure of over 30.85 inches (783.6 millimeters) occurs at any station of the Umted States on the charts of the Signal Service; the second table (Loomis LVI) contains the eases in which, during the years 1874, 1876, and 1881, an isobar of 785 millimeters occurs on the Hoft- meyer charts, and their continuation by the Seewarte; the third table (Loomis LVU1) contains those eases in which, during the interval from 1877 to the beginning of 1854, an isobar of 31 inches (787.4 millimeters) occurs on the charts of the International Bulletin of the Signal Service, which comprehends the whole northern hemisphere. The annual distribution of these cases is given by the following tabular summary ; in which, of the double numbers, the first one gives the num- 362 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. ber of separate occasions on which high maxima occur, each one being separated from the other by intervening times of low pressure; the second number [in brackets] gives the number of charts on which they occur. With respect to these numbers it is necessary to remember that for the United States (series a) there are three charts daily, but for Europe and the Atlantic Ocean (series b) two, and for the northern hemisphere one each day (series ¢). (a) United Statesand Canada.-.1[3] 10[73] 8[64] 14191] 16[80] 3[26] 52[337] (b) Europe and Atlantic Ocean.2[4] 6[14] 4[14] 3[12] 5[20] 4[18] 24[ 82] (c) Northern hemisphere.. ...-- ft] — 6p sy psa) 10p29]) 4 4a sir oye s7ih ek) In the other months of the year such high barometric readings do not occur. As concerns the geographical distribution over the surface of the earth, the maxima occurred as follows : Series (a).—Highty-two per cent. west of 90° longitude (west of Green- wich), and the greater part north of 46° north latitude. Series (b).—Three-fourths were in Asia and only two on the Atlantic Ocean.* Series (c).—Of these eighty-one charts, seventy-four show the maxi- mum over Europe and Asia, six over North America, and one on the ocean west of Ireland. The station with the highest pressure occurred in Europe or Asia, always between latitude 50° and 60° north, with one exception, when it was at Taschkent; in thirty-two cases it was at Jenisseisk (latitude 58°.5 north); in nine cases at Barnaul (53° north), and in seven cases at Nertschinsk (51° north), and the other seven at Semipalatinsk (50°.5 north). Within Europe proper such extreme maxima were observed only in European Russia, and the centers oc- curred either at Wjatka, Kazan, Moscow, or Warsaw, the two latter only once each. Such high pressures occur very decidedly only in the centers of the continent and in the colder seasons of the year. For such of the areas of high pressure as could be followed for many days the following results are given: Series (a).—An average movement toward south 40° east, or, if we con- sider only the movement east of the Rocky Mountains, south 57° east, with a velocity of 21 English miles per hour (eight degrees of a great circle per day); the average movement of the maxima is therefore di- rected more southerly than that of the minima. Series (b).—In fourteen cases of long-continued high areas there were eleven where the last position lay more southerly than the first, and * On nineteen of these eighty-two charts, the highest isobar is 790, on five charts it is 795, and on one chart (January 1, 1876) it is 800 millimeters; on this day the maximum was at Omsk; in the year 1877, for which the Hofftmeyer charts were not printed, there occurred a still higher barometer, on December 16, namely, 806.5 as reduced to sea-level, or unreduced 784.5, which is the highest atmospheric pressure that Loomis has found anywhere charted. DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 363 eight where the last was more easterly than the first, as opposed to three and five cases, respectively, where the movement was toward the north or west. Series (c).—For the maxima in this series, Loomis remarks that appar- ently, by reason of small variations of the pressure of the air, the cen- ters appear to show rapid movements to and fro, but that in general, in the fourteen cases where the isobar of 31 inches continued for at least two days, the position on the last day did not differ materially from that on the first. The relative size of the barometric maxima in the United States was investigated by Loomis for the maxima of Series (@) (Loomis Table x11), with the assistance of the charts of the International Bulletin, but only sinee October, 1877, because the weather charts for the United States only did not cover enough ground to fully present these extended phe- nomena. The mean value of the smallest diameters of these regions of extraordinary high pressures measured between the isobars of 762 milli- meters is 2,587 miles, which is equal to the width of the American con- tinent at 40° north latitude. The mean distance of the centers of low pressures from the centers of maxima was 2,371 miles on the east side of the maxima and 2,381 miles on the west side; the value of the lowest isobars in these measurements was 29.19 inches = 741.4 millimeters ou the east side, and 29.57 inches = 751.1 millimeters on the west side; so that therefore the gradient was twice as great on the east side as on the west side. If we reduce the adopted superior limit from 30.85 to 30.4, we find that the mean diameter of the maxima between 1877 and 1884 that rise above this limit amounts to 1,406 miles, and that the ba- rometer in these is on the average 0.40 inch above its normal value. For the maxima above 30.85 these values become, respectively, 2,587 miles and 0.75 inch. Since 0.75: 0.40 = 2,537 : 1,380, therefore the diameters of the maxima are approximately proportional to their alti- tudes measured from the normal value. Series (b).—The mean diameter of the maxima of this series for wnich the isobar 760 millimeters is taken, is at least 2,740 miles, therefore larger than in the United States. The lowest isobar on the west side was on the average 739 millimeters—only in two cases was it less than 730—whereas this is a frequent case on the Atlantic Ocean; therefore here also an uncommon high pressure does not imply a remarkably low pressure in the neighborhood. The mean distance of the center of high pressure from that of low pressure on the west amounted to 2,280 miles, which indicates a somewhat greater gradient on the European side of the ocean than on the western or American side. Series (c).—The mean diameter of the maxima of this series is 3,800 miles in the north-south direction under 55° of north latitude, and 4,900 miles in the east west direction. The temperature relations of the barometric maxima are quite thor- oughly investigated by Loomis. In the cold season of the year the 364 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. maxima are characterized by very low temperature. For those in North America the following table gives froin twelve years’ observations the pressure and the departures of temperature for the stations that showed the highest pressure at the time: Barometiic pressure. | Temperature departure. Inches. Millimeters. | Fahrenheit. Centigrade. ° | 30. 5-30. 6 747-772 —18.0 —10.0 | | 30. 6-30. 7 772-798 20.3 | —11.3 | 30. 7-30.8 798-823 =—2aa8 13.2 | 30. 8-30. 9 823-848 | —26.3 —14.6 | 30. 9-31. 0 818-874 —2& 8 —18 2 31. 0-31. 1 84-899 —28. 9 | —18.8 This shows that the higher the pressure by so much greater is the eold. The maxima of pressure and of cold, however, do not as a rule secur at the same time and place, but lie ou the average 400 miles apart, and the greatest temperature departure ordinarily lies north of the high- est barometer. (This which holds for North America does not obtain in Kurope.—W. K.) The temperature depression at the center is greater when the center Jies west of 87° W. longitude than when it lies east thereof; for pressures of 30.85 inches the temperature depression is in the first case 28.8° F. (or 16° C.); for the second case it is 24° F. (or 13,39 C.). In three-fourths of all the cases in series (@) the thermometer at the center fell below 0° F. (or—17.8° C.). In twelve eases it fell to—309° F. (or—34.5° C.). For the maxima of the series (b) for Europe, after excluding the two cases of the ocean, the mean temperature fell to —25.4° C., and the mean for the three winter months fell to—28.9° C, For the maxima of the series (c), in so far as they occur over Europe and Asia, the departure from the normal was somewhat less, averaging — 19° F., or—10.6° C., and the mean temperature was about the same, namely —28° C, For the average of all cases, whenever the thermometer at Jenisseisk, between 1876 and 1882, went below—36° C., the barometer stood 7.8 millimeters above its normal value, but only in one of these cases did the pressure exceed 787 millimeters. Therefore, extraordinary low tem- peratures are generally accompanied by high, but seldom by extremely high, barometric pressures. In the warmer season of the year the temperature in the center of the maxima is also generally below the normal, but only a little below. For the average of the cases where the pressure in the United States during 1873 to 1880 exceeds 30.35 inches (or 770.9 millimeters) the tem- perature was 8.3° F.=4.7° C. below the normal, and here also for places west of 87° longitude the depression is greater, 7. ¢., 6.6° C., than for places on the east of that meridian, where it is 3.8° C, _" DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 365 In the interior of the United States the highest temperature of the summer usually occurs with a pressure that is decidedly below the mean value, but, on the other hand, on the Atlantic coast it occurs with a normal pressure. [or the North Atlantic Ocean and Europe-Asia Loomis deduces from seven years’ observations the mean thermometrie departures at the time of the monthly maxima of temperature for the months of June, July, and August, and for a number of stations. The average of the three months is given in the following table : Station. Departure. Station. Departure. RGodthaab..--2)c2s. 5 ) wi ee ee ee eee) ont ere» ome a |e a | United States and asta ce! | ozs h| econ as |e a hr alae 7| 26] 24 Canada. | | b | EuropeandAtlan-| 33} 12] 22/ 6] 2| of o| 4 1, | 22)" ato) |g | tic Ocean. | | | | c, | Pacific Ocean -.... 19} 10 4 4 | 2 | 0 | 0 0 2 4 7 22 CoaeAsinheseea as. Sees 350 pend Ohi eee en pesece lease eee | 24.223) sscecd ee eee eee 38 Only the first of these series, depending upon twelve years of records, can have any pretense of accurately presenting the normal annual rate. The remarkable double maximum of frequency with a diminution in the middle of winter will probably remain even in long series of observa- tions, and has its origin in the development of the continental area of high pressure in January and February. The small number of depres- sions under 29 inches in the Pacific Ocean is doubtless in part due to the insufficient data from this ocean for the first year, but Loomis shows that even in the last three years (summer of 1881 to the summer ot 1884), where the number of observations was nearly sufficient, only nineteen cases below 736 millimeters occurred in the year, whilst on the Atlantic Ocean twenty-eight cases occurred annually below 725 milli- meters on the average of four years; in the Pacific Ocean the barome- ter sank below this latter limit only five times in three years, so that such deep depressions occur sixteen times more frequently over the At- lantic than over the Pacific Ocean. This result is confirmed by another consideration: On the average of five years’ observations at Stykkis- holm, in Iceland, the barometer fell below 725 millimeters on 6.8 days annually, but in three years’ observations in the Aleutian Islands only on one day annually. The lowest depression reported from the Pacific Ocean during seven years is 719 millimeters, but in the North Atlantic such depressions occur on the average about thirty times annually. As concerns the location of these barometric minima, Loomis finds that of one hundred and thirty-one in the first (a) series, one hundred and twelve occurred on the Atlantic coast, and only nineteen in the in- terior of North America; that, therefore, the neighborhood of the ocean is an almost indispensable condition for these deep depressions. He presents the location of the one hundred and thirty-seven minima of series (b) on a chart that shows that three-fourths of the total number occurred on the Atlantic Ocean or its coast, and that of the remaining cases ten occurred within 100 miles distant from the coast; seven at 100 to 150 miles ; and only one, January 15, 1881, at Moscow, occurred more than 150 miles from the coast. Within the area of the ocean more DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 367 centers of depression eccurred in the neighborhood of the coast than in its central portions, and four regions of greater frequency are especi- ally recognizable ; uamely, Southern Greenland, west coast of Iceland, the islands north of Scotland, and the North Cape. This confirms in general the results that KoOppen attained and presented graphically for all depressions without considering the depths (Zeitschrift Oester- reichisches Gesellschaft fiir Meteorologie, July, 1882).* Of the one hundred and sixteen winter days that show a barometric pressure in Asia below 752 millimeters, fifteen show such depressions simultaneously at many places; so that we have one hundred and thirty-one separate cases that are distributed as follows: Thirty-seven on the eastern coast of Asia and in Japan; seventy-seven on the western border of Asia, namely, at Ekaterinburg, and seventeen in the interior of Asia, at Akmolinsk, Barnoul, or Jenisseisk. The minima of the first group seem to originate in the Pacific Ocean or on the coast. None of them appear to have come from the interior of the continent, or from a region north of latitude 62°, so that the numerous depressions that pass from west to east over the eastern part of North America seem to find no anaiogue in Eastern Asia. The minima of the second and third groups appear to progress from Northern Europe along a path directed somewhat south and east, and none of them pass eastward over Jen- isseisk, unless perhaps some of them are deviated northeastward be- yond the region occupied by the station. The highest isobar in the neighborhood of these depressions was on the average, in series (a) 30.29 inches (769.4 millimeters) on the west side, and 30.35 inches (770.9 millimeters) on the east side; in the series (b) the isobars of 785 millimeters and upwards occurred only twice on the west side, and twice on the east side of the depressions ; the maxima in the neighborhood of the deep minima therefore seldom attain ex- ceptional heights—a confirmation of what is above said for the maxima. The mean distance of the centers of these maxima from those of the de- pressions was in series (a) 2,130 miles on the east side of the depression, and 1,985 miles on the west side. The mean diameter of the depres- sions (namely between the isobars of 760 to 770 millimeters) Loomis has determined to be for the depressions of series (a) from the years 1877 to 1884, 2,139, but for series (b) 2,365 miles. The mean of the temperatures at the centers of such barometric de- pressions as were lower than 737 millimeters, was 6°.4 Fahr.,=3°.6 C.. above the normal in the United States for the years 1873 to 1877; but the greatest excess of temperature did not occur here, but about 300 miles farther southerly or easterly, and on the average, for the cases that allowed of a satisfactory determination, amounted to 229.3 Fahr., or 10°.3 C. *Journal of the Austrian Meteorological Society, July, 1882. See also the charts compiled by me for Walker’s Statistical Atlas of the United States, Washington, 1874, s 368 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. These deep depressions belonged, as we have seen, almost exclusively to the colder period of the year; in order to investigate the tempera- ture of the summer depressions, Loomis has brought together the depres- sions with a central pressure less than 29.4 inches (746.7 millimeters) for June, July, and August of the three years 1873, ’74,’77. For these the average departure of the temperature from its normal value was +6°.5 Fahr., or 3°.6 C. at the center of the depression and +20° Fahr. = 119.1 C. at the above-mentioned warmest point, therefore almost the same as in the winter depressions. For the minima of series (}) Loomis has determined only the temper- ature at the center, not its departure from the normal value; the for- mer is +4° ©. (399.2 Fahr.), which is very high for the season and the latitude of most of these minima. Loomis has subjected to a thorough investigation the relation of the wind to the gradient. First, he selected from Hoffineyer’s synoptic charts eighty-one on which there appeared especially well-developed cyclones or anti-cyclones. For meteorologists who desire to submit to a special proof some notable examples, he calls attention to the cyclones of January 12, and December 21-22, 1875; January 22 and March 9 and 10, 1876; and the anti-cyclones of December 30-351, 1875, and Jan- uary 1-2 and 13, 1876. Loomis says nothing as to his interpretation of the arrows indicating the strength of the wind on Hoffmeyer’s charts; under the assumption that he has properly considered the half-degree marks on the wind arrows of Hoffmeyer’s charts, we can consider the mean strength of the wind deduced by him and given according to the “1 to 6” scale as correct Beaufort degrees, since the wind estimates of both German and English navigators, on which these charts are based, are alike made on the Beaufort scale; on the other hand, if he has counted the half-degree marks as full scale degrees, then all his figures for mean wind force, when they are uneven figures, are too large by one, and therefore his mean values for the whole series will be too large by one-half of a Beaufort degree. Loomis’s results from Hoffmeyer’s charts are summarized in the foliow- ing table; the measurements were generally made on that side of the center where the strongest gradients and winds were found. The mean latitude of the centers of the cyclones was 58°.8 north, and that of the anticyclones 49°.7 north. Loomis’s wind and barometric gradients on the DYNAMIC | Tsobars. Consecu- gti Cain } Se On great. Bon || | : cirele. | aeereoal | | Cyclones. | ) Mm. | 715-720... 1.20 4.17 | 720-725....| 1.29 3. 87 L2527304,5- 1.35 3. 71 | 730-735....| 1.39 3. 60 7g5-740. =~. 1.42 3.52 740-745. ...| 1.45 3.45 745-750. ..., 1.48 3.37 750-755... 1.54 3. 24 | 755-760... .| 1.61 3.10 Anti cy- clones. | 760-765. ... 1.70 2.95 es=TTOsea|\ Sus 1582 2.75 770-775... 1.98 2.53 775-780. ... 2.16 2.31 780-785. ... 2. 37 ed 785-790... 2. 60 1.92 | Winds. wes | Inclina- ‘Beaufort, Teebaee. | seale. | | 1°) 6.70! 64. 6. 80 63.5 6.78 62.1 6.76 | 60.1 6.78 | 58.1 6.82 | 56:7 6.82 | 56.3 6.68 | 55.9 6.32 552A 5. 54 | 53.1 4.78 49.3 4.28 | 45.6 3.78 | 42.1 3.40 | 39.4 3.04 | 37.9 METEOROLOGY. North Atlantic Ocean. Location. Tempera . Geo: ture cen- Distance to cen- lgraphical tigrade, tral pressure. leiatnitries Kim, ° 2.49 277 | 58. 0 +-2.1 3.74 415 57.6 2.2 5. 66 562 | Lier 2.2 6.42 714 56.8 2.2 7.83 70 56.4 2.3 9. 26 1029 55.9 2.7 10.73 1192 Dds0 3.2 12. 24 1360 55. 0 3.5 13. 82 1536 54.5 +3.8 1 13. 84 1537 54.0 | +1.5 12.08 1342 534i) 450 10.18 1131 52.9 —9.0 8.11 901 | 52.2 —13.6 5.81 | 649; 51.5| =18.1 3.36 S73)! SDSOhraN ecto 369 In order to determine the same quantities also for the storms of the United States, Loomis has chosen thirty-six charts for cyclones and thirty-six for anti-cyclones out of the twelve thousand published by the Signal Office since November, 1871, which gave him the following table of results. 44°.7 north, that of the anti-cyclones 45°.1 north. Loomis’s wind and barometric gradients within the United States. Isobars. Wind. Locality. sea cntel , _ | Distance | Velocity | poonneen, Ppp EneSe| es ea meters panes Distance to central of great |_| per sec- snail pressure. bers. Gieale: puerta ade Tsobars. | Cyclones. ° Mm. | Miles. | © ° Km. 731, 5-734. 0 1.36 3.73 12. 20 | 53. 2 2. 24 249 734. 0-741. 7. e515 | 3.36 11.80 | ase 3. 68 409 741. 7-746. 7. 1.65 | 3. 08 11. 44 | 50. 2 | 5. 26 | 584 746. 7-751. 8 1.75 2.90 11.09 | 49.0 | 6.96 773 751. 8-756. 9.| 1.82 2.80 | 10.64 47.6 | 8.74 971 | 756, 9-762. 0 1. 87 2,72 10, 28 | 46.7 | 10.58 1176 Anti-cy- | | | clones. | | i | 762. 0-767. 1. 1.94 2.61 9.66) 45.6| 9,59/ 1065 | 767. 1-772. 1 2.05 | 2.48 9. 03 44.8 | 7. 59 343 772. 1-777.2.| 2. 20 ql 253 Sais | 43.0 5. 46 607 ie 177. 2-782 2.3.) 2.4 ete 2 7.20} 40.8 | 3.15 350 ture cen- tigrade. 10 — bo =) to = - Re LS 'Tempera- The mean latitude of the centers of these cyclones was 370 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. These two tables contain a wealth of data for future deductions, but as to the results that Loomis draws from them, Képpen promises a fut- ure communication. IlIl.—THEORETICAL HYDRO-DYNAMICS APPLIED TO THE MOTION OF THE AIR. (10) Koppen, whose skill in studying the mechanism of storms and in handling masses of data has so frequently been shown, has con- tributed to the Meteorological Zeitschrift of December, 1888, a study ‘On the form of the isobars in reference to their dependence upon alti- tude and the distribution of temperature.” Assuming’that isotherms and isobars have been given by the daily weather chart, he then gives a most convenient and rapid method of computing tables and deriving the isobars for any elevation, such as 2,500 meters, by an inspection of the tabular figures. Such upper isobars were first published fora given storm by Mollerin the Annalen fiir Hydrog., April, 1882. The impor- tance of such upper isobars had been urged by me in 1871~72, and sam- ple maps were drawn preparatory to their daily use, but subsequently the introduction of departures and variations of departures in pressure and temperature as auxiliary to sea-level isobars and surface isotherms was decided on by General Myer. K6ppen’s diagrams of ideal systems are very suggestive. (11) Ferrel.—tIn 1886 there appeared a treatise by Prof. William Fer- rel, ** Recent Advances in Meteorology,” being Appendix 71, or part H, of the Annual Report of the Chief Signal Officer for 1885. This treatise was originally designed as professional .paper of the the Signal Service, No. 17, but the abolition of that series of papers by order of the Secre- tary of War caused a change in the method of publication. An abstract of the contents of this book was delivered in lectures by Professor Ferrel to the second lieutenants of the Signal Corps, but the abolition of the Signal-Service school of instruction at Fort Myer has prevented its further use in that direction. The complete volume being easily obtained in this country, I need give only a short account of it. In this work Ferrel has collected the results of recent investigations by many authors, adding to them many of his own demonstrations, and combining the whole into a systematic treatise on meteorology under the following seven chapters: (1) The constitution and physical prop- erties of the atmosphere; (2) the temperature of the atmosphere and the earth’s surface; (3) the general motions and pressure of the atmos- phere; (4) cyclones; (5) tornadoes; (6) observations and their reduc- tions; (7)ocean currents and their meteorological effects. In the first chapter, after the sections on chemical constituents, pressure and weight, there comes a section on the diffusion and arrangement of the constituents, including the vapor atmosphere, followed by the ordinary applications to the atmosphere of the thermo-dynamies of adiabatic processes, In his section on the diathermancy and transparency of the * DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. Oak air Ferrel gives especial attention to the effect of wave length upon the law of diminution in a complex bundle of rays, such as those from the sun, and shows that his formula and constants hold good for the visual, the thermal, and the chemical effects of the solar rays. (A special mem- vir by him on radiation is published in the American Journal of Science, July, 1889.) In chapter 2, on temperature of the atmosphere, Ferrel gives an ex pression for the mean diurnal intensity of the sun’s radiation developed into a series as a function of the sun’s declination and the observer’s latitude, which expression he also further converts into a series de. pending on the time and the observer’s latitude. With this he then combines the effect of the absorption by the earth’s atmosphere, and proceeds to discuss the conditions that determine the temperature at any place and any time for a body of any shape and co-efficient of ab- sorption and radiation. The importantresults obtained in this chapter depend principally upon the radiation observations of Prevostaye and Desains, Melloni, Langley, Dulong, and Petit, and are applicable to the temperature of bodies at the earth’s surface, the temperature shown by thermometers and those shown by solar radiation apparatus. Especial attention is given to the nocturnal cooling by radiation. (The late pub- lications by Maurer, H. F. Weber, Angot and Zenker could of course not be utilized by Ferrel.) In chapter 3 Ferrel deduces the general motions and pressure of the atmosphere, beginning with the equations of absolute motion on the earth at rest, whence follows his law that all bodies in motion are de- flected to the right in the northern hemisphere. Combining these equa- tions with the equation of continuity, certain general relations are de- duced expressed by differential equations. Ferrel’s method of solution of these equations consists in successive approximations, beginning with the simplest cases of no friction and no disturbance of the normal distribution of temperature, he finally pro- ceeds in section 4 of chapter 3 to give a special solution for the actual case of the earth, whichalthough only approximate yet within the limits indicated, appears to agree well with observed phenomena; this solu- tion is summed up in the two following formule for the connection be- tween the barometric gradient (G) expressed in millimeters per degree of the great circle of the meridian from north to south, the angular dis- tance (#) from the north pole or 90 degrees minus the latitude ; the veloe- ity (v) of the east-west motions of a particle of air; the total velocity (s) of the particle ; the temperature (7) on which the density of the air de- pends; the inclination (7) of the wind to the parallel of latitude ; the observed barometric pressure (P) and the normal sea level barometric pressure (P,). The resulting formula for the barometric gradient meas- ured on the meridian, as given on page 207 of his “ Recent Advances,” is 0.1571 v cos 6 Pee sO OC) ae soso) r ~ os? i(1-0,004 7)’ Py (1--0,00£7) cost Py Ble RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Substituting this value of G in the general differential equation of motion, Ferrel deduces the following expression for v for the mean temperature condition of the earth where h is the altitude, and G' the full gradient at the earth’s surface; the last term is negligible as ex- pressing the effect of inertia and friction due to meridional motions: dt »— 8:37 (140.004 T)¢41__9.0001690 A» sin 4) dius PGi een coswa 140,004 7 cos # (2n-0) The coetticient A, represents the principal term in Ferrel’s previous development of the solar diurnal variation of temperature in a harmonic series that obtains for the whole year and the whole earth. Instead of attempting to compute the temperature (7) Ferrel has preferred to compile from charts of temperature and pressure the actual average values of temperature and pressure and wind velocity for each five de- grees of latitude for January, July and the whole year, for the north- ern and southern hemispheres. The introduction of these observed temperatures and pressures enables him to compute the value of » which on comparison with the observed velocity shows a very excellent agreement. The process is simply a refinement upon the numbers already published by him in 1858, and is, I think, equivalent to the statement that if among the many direct solutions of the equations of motion possible when the boundary conditions are given, we, without a previous knowledge of these boundary conditions, select that special solution that we find existing on the earth’s surface as indicated by our observed temperatures and pressures, then the resulting computed velocity agrees with the observed velocity of the wind. After explain- ing the annual oscillations of winds and calms, rain and cloud, Ferrel passes to chapter 4 on cyclones. In this is given an elementary me- chanical theory of the gyration of a smali portion of the atmosphere near the earth’s surface at any latitude, the resulting equations (7) on page 238 being, of course, entirely similar to the general equations 13 on page 188 for the general cyclonic motion of the atmosphere about the earth’s axis. The treatment of these equations is naturally very similar to that for the general motion of the atmosphere, and if Ferrel’s methods seem pro- lix and inelegant, as compared with the beautiful work of Oberbeck and Helmholtz, it must be remembered that he expressly states this treatise to have been written for persons who have a slight acquaintance with the mathematical progress of the past thirty years, and that he has therefore adopted such elementary and simpler methods as could be easily comprehended by those who graduate from minor colleges and scientific schools, while at the same time he has also expressly avoided analytical refinements that are not demanded in the present crude state of meteorological knowledge. Jn fact, like all his other treatises, this also impresses one with the conviction that Ferrel aims to be a practical : DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 373 meteorologist rather than an elegant analyst. He is satisfied with show- ing that the larger features of atmospheric motion are abundantly explicable by known laws of mechanics and that, therefore, the ulti- mate details of these phenomena will undoubtedly be also thus ex- plained, and this conviction is that which is needed in order to attract to this study those who wish to devote themselves to ‘exact science.” The formule for cyclones are treated approximately for the case of no friction and uniform temperature; then for the case of a difference of temperature between the central and exterior parts, the warm center being a cyclone, the cold center the anti-cyclone ; finally, the solution is indicated for the case of the existence of both friction and temperature disturbances. In the next section on the progressive motion of cyclones, Ferrel states, on page 259, that “ the principal cause of the progressive motion is the general motion of the atmosphere ;” but he also adds that ‘the velocity of progress is much greater than the general motion of the atmosphere,” and his short discussion of this subject suffices, we think, to show that the cyclonic progress is only to a small extent actually due to the general atmospheric motion, and is mainly due to those causes that determine the distribution of vapor and precipitation around * the center of power,” as he terms it. By this precipitation and redistribu- tion of heat, the cyclone center is, as Ferrel states, continually renewed a little in advance of its former position. My own view differs from his only in the relative effect attributed by us to the general movement of the atmosphere on the one hand, and the tendency to the formation of new aspiration centers on the other. Ferrel gives special prominence to the former, but I to the latter; possibly he is correct for high south- ern or northern latitudes, but my own view agrees best with my experi- ence in the temperate zones; it appears to agree closely with the excel- lent work of John Eliot in India, and is peculiarly applicable to many abnormal storm-paths that I have had occasion to predict. I notice that Ferrel, on page 260, quotes the lake region of North America as possibly attracting cyclones by reason of the aqueous vapor furnished by them: but would it not be more rational to infer that the course of our great storms is determined by larger forces than the slight excess of evaporation over the lakes as compared with surrounding forest and prairie; that in fact the lakes are the result of the precipitation that occurs from the atmosphere above them? Evaporation and moist air are not of themselves able to produce a storm; we must have cold or dry airready to flowin beneath, and our present lake region (as well as our ancient glaciated region) is so evidently located precisely in the spot where cold northerly and warm soutberly winds conspire with the orography of the continent to produce precipitation and storms, that L must consider the lakes (and glacial epoch) as the result of the orogra- phy, and as exerting by their evaporation only avery slight reflex action principally appreciable in the re-distribution of local rains and snow and slightly higher temperatures in their immediate neighborhood, On 374 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888 page 282 Ferrel shows that the formula expressing the relation between the barometric gradient (G) and the velocity of the winds is very much the same for the pressures and winds around a cyclone center as for the pressures and winds about the polar axis of the earth, and is ex. pressed by a quadratic equation s?4+ as=bG. As the cyclone moves from the land to the ocean the so-called friction term would, a priori, be expected to suffer a decided change, and the actual amount of such change is indicated by the data collected by Loomis. Adopting his re- sults Ferrel deduces a correction to his formula based upon the principle “that the frictional resistance of any stratum of air moving over the earth’s surface comes both from the earth’s surface and from the stratum above it,” and again, ‘‘that the direction of motion of the air of the stratum above differs considerably in a cyclone from that at the surface of the earth.” To me it seems that there is here not a sufficient dis- tinction between the small and negligible friction called viscosity, which acts both from above and below upon any intermediate stratum, and the resistances due to impact and convection, both which operate princi- pally from below upward; still the general effect is undoubtedly, as Ferrel says, to make the gradient that accompanies a given velocity of the wind at the earth’s surface greater than that accompanying the same velocity of wind over the sea or at higher altitudes. Similarly the gradient is less in Summer than in winter. The chapter on tornadoes deals in a very interesting manner with the different types of cyclones in which the horizontal movement is less conspicuous than the vertical movement; the formation of water-spouts is explained as a special case of tornado action, and examples are com- puted showing the dimensions of the spout as depending on the hu- midity of the air. In a section on the force of the wind and supporting power of ascending currents, Ferrel gives merely the oid approximate formule for the resistance of the air varying as the square of the velocity and the square of the cosine of the angle of incidence, and applies the resulting numerical resistances to the explanation of the formation of large drops of water, cloud-bursts, hail-stones, and the destructive ef- fects of tornado winds. Stokes’s explanation of the effect of viscosity seems to have been overlooked. On page 314 he explains the effective force of the wind against an obstacle, or in the production of drafts up chimneys, as due ‘not simply to the inertia of the air but to the drag- ging effect of the air through friction upon the columns of air in the front and rear of the obstacle.” I presume that this ‘‘drag” is inten- ded to refer to viscosity or so-called internal friction of gases, and appar- ently the same use of the word is made by Hagen in his explanation of the fact that the pressure against a thin plate depends upon the size and shape and especially upon the sharp angles of the plate. It is a suffi- cient answer to this introduction of viscosity to state that the value of the viscous resistance can be easily computed with sufficient accuracy to show that it is not an important factor in these experiments on large DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 375 bodies. The true explanation of Hagen’s results and of the production of drafts by wind transverse to the chimney flue is found in the study of the pressure within discontinuous spaces and the vortices attending the flow of liquid past any resisting body. The same criticism applies to Ferrel’s explanation of the pumping of the barometer, in so far as he implies that friction drags away the air. In his sixth chapter Ferrel gives an excellent exposition of harmonic analysis as applied to periodic phenomena, which is followed by the fundamental principles of thermometry, actinometry, hygrometry, ba- rometry, and anemometry. Among the new things, we notice that he introduces here the analytical portion of his investigations upon the psychrometric formula, the numerical portion of which is published by him in full as an appendix to the annual report of the Chief Signal Officer for 1886. In regard to the reduction of the barometer to sea- level he recommends, on page 398, the use of monthly normals for the upper and lower station. In order to diminish the diurnal temperature effect he has since then acceded to the present practice of the Signal Service in the use of mean daily temperatures. In 1886, to the great regret of his colleagues, Professor Ferrel an- nounced that, conformably to a long-cherished resolution, he should celebrate his seventieth birth-day by resigning official public office and retiring to his homestead in Kansas City, Missouri. The leisure thus secured, we learn, has been used in the preparation of a ‘ Popular Treatise on the Winds,” which will be published in 1889 and be doubly welcomed by the student of meteorology. (12) Sprung.—In 1885 Dr. A. Sprung published his Lehrbuch der Me. teorologie. Shortly afterward he moved to Berlin, and as instructor in the university and as assistant under Professor Bezold has exerted a strong and good influence on the progress of meteorology. His Lehrbuch is by far the best treatise extant on dynamic meteor- ology, and I have included it in this section of theories of atmospheric motion, because Dr. Sprung has devoted two-thirds of his Treatise to the exposition of the views that have been worked out by the mathemati- cians whose names are already so familiar to my readers. Itis scarcely necessary to say that the volume contains nearly all that had been sat- isfactorily established in dynamic meteorology at that time. Those who have not access to—or time to consult—the original memoirs should by all means study this volume. Of the other general treatises those that bear especially on storms are: (13) Greely.“ American weather,” by Gen. A. W. Greely, in which the statistics of American storms are quoted to substantiate the theory of their progress by transportation in the general drift of the atinos- phere. (14) Scott.—“ Elementary meteorology,” by R. H. Scott, in which only a Small section is devoted to storms. 376 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. (15) Blanford.—“ A practical guide to the climates and weather in India, Ceylon, aud Burmah, aud the storms of Indian seas,” by H. F. Blanford. This volume, published in 1889, marks the retirement of Mr. Blanford as meteorological reporter to the Government of India, in which position, since 1875, he has undoubtedly accomplished the great- est works ever undertaken in meteorology. Wilde’s Repertorium and Annalen, Maseart’s four annual volumes of observations and memoirs, Neumayer’s annual Ergebnisse and Archiv, are the principal works to be named in comparison with Blanford’s annual reports and Indian mem- oirs. In the present work Blanford devotes only a moderate portion to storms, and summarises the results that have been attained in India by Piddington, Willson, Pedlar, Meldrum, and especially the great work of John Eliot. So far as could be seen from the scattered records available up to the end of 1876, cyclones are most frequent in the Bay of Bengal in May and October, and least frequent, being almost unknown, in February and very rare in July ; but with the more perfect data furnished by the Government weather office Mr. Eliot has compiled alist of cyclones for the ten years 1877-86, which entirely alters this supposed annual dis- tribution, and makes the distribution almost uniform from June to No- vember. The Indian storms generally move toward northwest or west- northwest, and with very few exceptions the direction is toward some point in the northwest quadrant. The incurvature of the winds for storms in the northern part of the Bay of Bengal is about 35 degrees, with a slight increase as we go southward. The barometer does not fall for the approaching cyclone until long after the wind and skies show that the center of the storm is close at hand and only when the winds become strong and squally, nor does it fall rapidly until the winds have inereased to hurricane force and the center is distant less than 50 miles. The most important indications of the approach of a storm are therefore to be found in the observation of the sky and clouds. The storms of the Arabian Sea, on the west coast of India, have been studied by Mr. F. Chambers. The storms that cross India as they move westward deteriorate greatly before they reach the Arabian Sea, but then at once begin to increase. The stormy months are April, May, June, and November, but the records are rather fragmentary, and the results will probably be changed by future study. The system of storm signals for the Bay of Bengal is under the control of the Caleutta office, and consists of a simple warning or danger signal at all ports except Calcutta, where a much more elaborate system is used. There is an independent system of storm warnings for the Arabian sea-coast by the office at Bombay. (16) Davis.— Whirlwinds, cyclones, and tornadoes,” by William M. Davis. This little book is the result of a series of lectures for the DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. OU Lowell Institute in Boston. The author is professor of geology and meteorology in Harvard College. The work is written in a very popu- lar and easy style, and deserves to be read and used in elementary schools. (17) Abercromby.—* Weather,” by Hon. Ralph Abercromby, London, 1887. As the name implies, this book deals with the weather, its causes and changes, as distingnished from the statistics of climate. Neither formula nor numerical tables interrupt the reader, as the ob- ject of the author is to sketch the general principles of the science and give a picture of the methods ordinarily adopted in predicting the weather. The present book reads as though it had its origin in the thought, ‘Farmers and sailors have always foretold the weather by the sky and cloud; why may not the meteorologist do the same?” He therefore devotes one-fourth of the book to clouds and cloud prog- nosties, and, again, fifty pages to types of weather. The last eighty pages are given to the rules and methods of weather predictions or (as the English call them) forecasts. His whole system, as he says (pp. 430), ‘depends neither on theory nor calculation, but solely on obser- vation and experience, and success depends on natural aptitude and the experience of many years’ study.” _To this we add, that these same statements apply to work in astron- omy, chemistry, etc, and that he who makes forecasts merely by means of generalization relative to types of weather and clouds, is sure to suffer from the neglect of a deeper study into causes and laws of opera- tion, but to those who have mastered these mechanical laws the addi- tional information given in Abercromby’s book would be of value. (18) Hliot.—The report by John Eliot in 1876 on the Backergunge cyclone, and his report of 1879 on the Madras cyclone, marked an im- portant step in the progress made, by one of the ablest meteorologists. He tells us he began his inquiry with a strong bias towards the hypoth- esis that cyclones originate between belts of parallel opposing winds, but that this proved so unsatisfactory that he rejected it and adopted the condensation theory, which accounts satisfactorily for the entire range of atmospheric action that constitute an extensive and intense cyclonic storm in the Bay of Bengal. At the close of his work on the Madras cyclone, and after refuting some views as to cyclone formation that Dr. Hann had advanced, Eliot sums up his own conclusions, from which we make the following extract: ‘The invariable antecedents of powerful cyclones at the two transi- tion periods, April and October, are (a) approximate uniformity of pressure over and around the coast of the Bay of Bengal; (b) light and variable winds or calins over a considerable portion of the bay ; (ce) little or no rain-fall over the coast region as well as in the bay; (d) hence the weather is sultry; (e) hence the sea is smooth; (/) the amount of aqueous vapor accumulates and finally gives rise to peculiar sky effects ; 378 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. (g) the immediate antecedent is heavy rain-fall, concentrated over a portion of the bay; () accompanied by a strong indraft, which is most marked from the Indian Ocean at the entrance of the bay; (7) this in- draft from the Indian Ocean gives rise to strong winds and heavy rains at the stations on the south and west coast of Ceylon.” Of the preceding items (a) (b) (c) are invariable and necessary ante- cedents, but the source of the energy is the item (g), condensation of vapor and precipitation of rain, or, as stated in the Backergunge report, the primary cause of cyclone formation is the production and ascent of a large quantity of vapor, which is condensed with the liberation of its latent heat over the place of its production instead of being carried away to some distant region. ; This independent confirmation of the views for which Espy lived and died, as well as the numerous other generalizations not quoted by us, after having been clearly apprehended by their author, were found re- peated in other storms, and were confirmed in his subsequent memoir ‘‘On the cyclonic storms of November and December, 1886, in the Bay of Bengal.” Eliot states that there is a marked difference in the char- acteristics of the storms of one year and of another, which is explicable on the same hypothesis as that which explains the variations in the southwest monsoon rain-fall. These variations are apparently periodic in Bengal, and when the Bengal branch of the monsoon current be- comes strong the Bombay branch becomes weak. Pending the appointment of a successor to Mr. Blanford, Eliot, as officiating reporter, has published the report of 1887 on the Meteorol- ogy of India. On page 209 he refers to certain storms in Bengal known as northwesters, which are occasionally as destructive as the tornadoes of the United States, but his description does not enable us to conclude as to whether they were of the nature of twisting tornadoes, or the straight-line Derecho, described by Hinrichs, in Iowa, On page 251 Eliot says the great majority of cyclonic rain-storms march across the Bengal coast in the direction of the belt of lowest pressure at the time of their formation. As the chief characteristic of such a barometric trough is light and variable winds, it will be seen that this principle virtually coincides with the rule of cyclonic storms in the Bay of Bengal, which march in the direction of least relative air motion immediately antecedent td the formation of the cyclone. On page 271 Eliot states that “the persistency of the pressure anomo- lies (for weeks and mouths) is almost certainly due to the fact that an abnormal variation of pressure in a moving mass of air necessarily gives rise to or accompanies the modification of its motion and in con- sequence of well-known properties of fluid motion this changed or modified air motion tends to perpetuate the pressure variation which gave rise to it.” If I correctly understand this sentence I should apply it to the flow of air over an obstacie where the change of motion produces a change DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 379 of pressure or vice versa a change of pressure produces a change in the motion; for example: Standing waves are produced at the surface of a stream which tend to perpetuate themselves; the atmosphere is thrown into a system of undulations by mountain ridges, plateaus, and continents (which undulations may also be horizontal deviations on a grand seale) and into periodic recurrences due to their own inertia and therefore as Eliot says, tending to reproduce themselves until broken up by outside disturbances. This is the explanation of the special sea- sons of droughts, storms, and rains that we experience in America, and it doubtless obtains equally in India. (19) Sir William Thomson.—Thompson has published aseries of papers sparkling with his customary briiliancy on fluid motions ; these are scat- tered through the Philosophical Magazine, the proceedings of the societies at London, Edinburgh, and Glasgow, and the reports of the British As- sociation. These papers will cover theoretical questions as to the sta- bility of fluid motions, the formation of standing waves, the discontin- uous space in the rear of an obstacle, the laminar flow of liquids, the turbulent flow of water, and other matters bearing on atmospheric phe- nomena. These papers have apparently been drawn out as notes for the forthcoming third volume of his mathematical and physical papers, and when collected will be recognized as completing our views on many subjects. (20) Oberbeck.—In 1882 Oberbeck published in Wiedemann’s Annalen a mathematical development based on the correct hydrodynamic for-- mule, of the theory of horizontal atmospheric currents. A full translation of this important memoir will be ineluded in the series of papers formerly referred to; but the following popular state- ment of his results is given here as published by Oberbeck himself in the proceedings of the second German Geographical Congress: Starting from the generally known results of recent meteorvlogieal observations in so far as these relate to the distribution of pressure and the direction and force of the wind, the author explains that one of the most important problems of the mathematical theory of the motion of fluids is to explain quantitatively the connection of the above- named phenomena. The recently published investigations of Guldberg and Mohn (tudes sur les mouvements de Vatmosphére, Christiania, 1876 and 1850), are to be considered as a specially successful attempt in this direction. It must be of interest also for the larger number of geographers to know the most important results to which the Norwe- gian scientists have attained. In order to understand the horizontal movements of the atmosphere it is important for a moment to consider their causes. As such we con- sider the differences of pressure at the surface of the earth as observed with the barometer. But whence do these arise? This question has been answered a long time since. It is heat which is to be considered as the prime cause of the disturbance of equilibrium in the atmosphere. 380 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Because of the sight conductivity of the air the process of warming can progress only slowly from below upwards, so that, as is well known, the temperature of the air steadily diminishes as we ascend. The heated air expands. The pressure becomes less. If the heating takes place uniformly over a large area there will be at first no reason for horizontal ¢urrents. But vertical currents can certainly be brought about by this means. If we imagine a circumscribed mass of air trans- ported into a higher region without any increase or diminution of its heat its temperature will sink because it has expanded itself propeor- tionately to the diminished pressure. If its temperature is then equal to that prevailing in the upper stratum it will remain in equilibrium at this altitude as well as below. The atmosphere in this case exists in a state of indifferent equilibrium. If its temperature is lower the mass of air will again sink down; in the reverse case it willrise higher. The air in these cases is then in stable or unstable equilibrium respectively. In the latter case any vertical movement initiated by some accidental disturbance will not again disappear, but rapidly assumes increasing dimensions. The current will also continue uniform for a long time. This is the explanation given by Espy, 1851, William Thomson, 1861, and Reye, of Strasburg, 1868, of the ascending air currents in the mined! winds of the tropics. The winds of our (temperate) zone also presuppose such ascending currents whose origin must have been quite similar. The ascending current is in general restricted to a definite region that we can desig- nate as the base. Since the ascending current consists of warmer air, therefore above this base the pressure sinks.* A barometric depression is inaugurated there. The pressure increases from this region outward in all directions. The isobars therefore surround the region of ascend- ing atmospheric currents in closed curves. At greater heights the up- per cooled air flows away to one side, and in other regions gives occa- sion to descending currents of air. At the earth’s surface itself the air flows towards the depression; its influence thus extends over an area much greater than that of the base. If we neglect the curvature of the earth’s surface over this larger area we find there simple horizontal movements. Mathematical computations should now reveal to us the nature of such horizontal movements. To this end all the causes of motion or the forces that come into consideration are first to be collected together. The differences of pressure have already been several times spoken of; these are measured by the gradient, and it gives for any point the direction and amount of the greatest change in pressure. In horizontal movements the effect of eral can be omitted. *Thus i in the original; agi ate ena reader W il perceive Aji in this “ popu- lar” presentation Oberbeck has not escaped the repetition of a popular error, The fall of pressure, due to the warming of the air, is quite inappreciable; the okserved barometic depression is due to cyclonic motions. — DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 381 On the other hand, attention must be given to the rotation of the earth on its axis, since we are only interested in the paths of the winds on the rotating earth. This influence can be taken account of if we imagine at every point of the mass of air a force applied which is perpendicular to the momentary direction of motion and is equal to the product of the double angular velocity of the earth, the sine of the latitude, and the velocity of the point. On the northern hemisphere this influence causes a continuous departure of the path towards the right-hand side. Since the movement takes place directly on the earth’s surface the direct in- fluence of that surface, namely, the friction, remains to be considered. Its influence diminishes with the distance from the earth’s surface. Fur- thermore, it depends on the nature of the earth’s surface, whether sea or lands, plains or wooded mountains. For this computation Guldberg and Mohn have made a convenient assumption in that they introduce the friction as a force which opposes the movement and is equal to the pro- duct of a given factor and the velocity. This factor can have different values according to the nature of the earth’s surface. All these forces are to be introduced into the general equations of motion of the air. If however one desires solutions of these general equations for special cases there is still needed a series of assumptions. Let there be only one single vertical current of air present. The totality of all the atmospheric movements depending upon this one ver- tical current is called a wind system. If the strength of the ascending current is variable or if the basis itself changes its place then the wind system is variable. In the first case the system stands still, in the second case it 1s movable. If, on the other hand, the ascending current of air retains its strength and location without change, or, which is the same, if the isobars for a long time retain their position then the wind system is invariable. It is evident that the Jast ease is by far the most simple. We will therefore begin with its consideration, In order to execute the calculation the location of the isobars must be known. Even in this respect also in a preliminary way one must limit himself at first by simple assumptions. Let the isobars be either par- allel straight lines or concentric circles. In the first case the computation leads to the following simple results : (1) The parallel isobars are equally distant from each other. The gradient is therefore everywhere of equal magnitude. (2) The paths of the wind consist of parallel straight lines. The strength of the wind has everywhere the same value. (3) The direction of the wind forms an angle with the gradient whose tangent is equal to the quotient of the factor arising from the earth’s rotation divided by the friction-constant. The deviation of the wind from the gradient is therefore greater in proportion as friction is smaller. If the earth’s surface were perfectly smooth the wind would blow in the direction of the isobars, 382 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. This result following directly from the computation and at first sur- prising finds its confirmation in a variety of observations. For example in England we observe a deviation of 61 degrees for land winds but of 77 degrees for sea breezes. From this it follows that the friction on the land is more than twice as great as on the sea. Conditions of pressure like those here considered frequently occur. In the regions of the trade. winds and monsoons they ordinarily prevail either during the whole or about half of the year. The circular isobars to the consideration of which we now pass pro- duce systems of wind that can be considered as the simplest types of cyclones and anti-cyclones according as the pressure in the interior is a minimum or maximum. We confine ourselves here to the consideration of cyclones. As already remarked, these are not conceivable without an ascending current of air, whose area in our case is defined by a circle. Outside of this horizontal movements prevail exclusively; inside of it there is also the vertical movement to be considered. Therefore the computa- tions for the outer and inner regions are different. In this way we ob- tain the following results: (1) The pressure increases from all sides outward from the center; the gradient increases also from the center out to the limit of the inner re- gion; from there on it diminishes, and at a great distance becomes in- appreciable. (2) The wind-paths in both regions are curved lines, logarithmic spirals, which cut the isobars everywhere at the same angle or make everywhere the same angle with the radial gradient. Therefore the movement of the air can be considered as consisting of a current toward the center and a rotation around the center, the direction of the latter is counter clock-wise. This departure from the gradient is of different magnitudes in the outer and inner regions. For the former the de- parture has the same value as for straight isobars, that is to say, it depends alone upon the rotation of the earth and the friction. For the inner region the departure is greater, and depends besides upon the intensity of the ascending current of air. If both regions were sepa- rated from each other by a geometrical cylindrical surface, then the wind-paths in these would not continuously merge into each other, but would form an angle with each other. This, of course, can never occur in nature. We must therefore assume a transition region in which the wind is continuously diverted from one into the other direction. At any rate accurate and comparative observations of the wind direction in the inner and outer region of.a cyclone would be of great interest. From these one could draw a conclusion as to the limitation of the as- cending current of air. This limit is, moreover, also notable in that at it the winds reach their greatest force. There is no arrangement that has been discussed theoretically as yet, except the straight line, circular, and nearly circular forms of the isobars, DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 383 We have as yet only spoken of the invariable systems of wind. In fact, however, their duration is relatively short. No sooner is a depres- sion formed than it fills itself up. Furthermore, the central region of depression generally does not remain long in the same place, but pro- gresses often with great velocity, drawing the whole system of winds with it. We must look to the density of the horizontal current flowing in toward the ascending current of air as the cause of these changes. The system of winds remains unchanged only when, as has hitherto been silently assumed, the temperature and density of the horizontal and vertical currents are alike. If the inflowing air is warmer, the depres- sion increases in depth, in the opposite case it becomes shallower. Finally, if the inflowing air is not of the same temperature on all sides, but is on the one side of higher and on the other side of lower tempera- ture than the ascending air, then it will on the one side be strengthened and its area increased, on the other side enteebled and its area dimin- ished. The consequence of this is that the current of air or the region of depression moves along. The cyclone progresses. Since in the cyclones of our zone the air entering on the east side comes from more southern, therefore in general warmer, regions, while the air entering on the west side comes from the north and is generally colder, therefore the cyclone progresses from west to east or from southwest to northeast. This is in fact the path of most cyclones in northern Europe. Tor a moving cyclone the isobaric curves must have a different shape than for astationary. Therefore one can inversely, from the shape of the isobars, infer the direction of motion. If the region of ascending air has a cir- cular form the computation can be rigorously executed. Without going into the details of this interesting problem in this place, I will only re- mark that the isobars consist of closed curves similar to an ellipse. There is one direction from the center outwards, in which the isobars are most crowded together, while in the opposite direction they are furthest apart. The movement of the cyclone is in a direction at right angles to this line. With the solution of this problem we now stand about at the limits of what analysis has thus far accomplished. Still there is hope that it will make further progress so far as concerns the relations between the pressure and the motion of the air at the earth’s surface. (21) Oberbeck.—Oberbeck has added to his memoir of 1882 a further investigation on the general movements of the atmosphere, which was published in full in two communications to the Academy of Sciences at Berlin in the year 1888, (See Sitzungsberichte, 1883, xry, p. 883-395.) On account of their importance I have, asin his former memoirs, given a complete translation of these in the collection of translations previously noticed; but to those who do not care to follow the mathematical inves- tigation the following résumé of his results is given mostly as expressed in a popular paper by Oberbeck himself and originally contributed by him to the Naturwissenschaftliche Rundschau of June 9, 1888, 384 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. “The systematic and successful labors of meteorological observers in the last decade has given a series of empirical laws for the motion of the air that have already become of great importance for meteorology and for weather predictions, and promise to become still more so in the future. “Tn general the active forces that constitute the principal causes of these phenomena of motion have been correctly appreciated, but so far as I know we have not yet been successful in bringing them into such a systematic connection that we have been able to deduce therefrom a mechanies of the atmosphere or a theory that reproduces the most im- portant points in the phenomena of motion. However, very noteworthy attempts in this direction have already been made by different parties. ‘The oldest investigations upon this point are due to the American meteorologist, William Ferrel. They are contained in a large number of memoirs, only a part of which is accessible to me; but from the memoirs that are known to me I think I may conclude that the most important results to which Ferrel has attained are collected together by himself in a work recently published (Recent Advances in Mete- orology, Washington, or Appendix 71 to the Annual Report for 1885 of the Chief Signal Officer), so that the following remarks relate to this work: ‘* Ferrel starts, in reality, with the equations of motion of a free heavy point or a small free mass, and eudeavors, by the addition of further terms, to accommodate these equations to the motion of a fluid, but without finally attaining the correct form of the hydrodynamic equa- tions. also the west wind as it prevails be- ed = : 7 : 80° pe i a yond the fortieth degree of latitude. —— From the agreementof the wind paths RiGy dae eee in this diagram with those actually observed, the important conclusion can be drawn that in general the currents u and 0, are of the same order of magnitude. Hence, it fol- lows that 0, or the upper easterly current must be of materially greater intensity than the lower currents. The upper wind paths agree in the tropics with the anti-trade. In higher latitudes the west wind must principally prevail in the upper regions. “In the very highest strata of air the currents must again diminish in strength; this is to be concluded from the fact that the two quanti- ties C and D contain the density of the air as a factor which enters in its first power into C, but in its second power into D. s “To this general presentation of the currents of air the detailed com- putation of the distribution of pressure is still lacking by this execu- tion, perhaps some unimportant modifications of the results here com- fe cited may be attained.” (22) Oberbeck.—In his third communication on this subject (the second of 1888), Oberbeck passes from a consideration of the motions of the at- mosphere to that of the general distribution of pressure that results from the movements, which themselves result from the distribution of temperature, or more properly of density. In this case he again deals with the hypothetical atmosphere of uniform density and depth adher- * ing to the earth but gliding under the upper layers and adopts the ap- proximate law of temperature of the air as above given. His general solution of the equations leads to the formula: p=constant+m cos?)—n cos*é. In the southern hemisphere we have conditions that approximate those here adopted more nearly than in the northern, and having shown 390 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. that the observed pressures agree with the preceding result, Oberbeck then utilizes the terms m and v to separate the motions in latitude and longitude. This process is more general than that which Ferrel ex- ecuted in the case of the solutions given by him in 1859 in the Mathe- matical Monthly, so that the equations can be adapted to a wide range of constants in the law of distribution of temperature at the earth’s sur- face. Oberbeck proceeds to apply it to the extreme seasonal ciange in the atmosphere as well as to the assamed mean. The whole memoir will be given in my selected translations. | (23) Helmholtz —In May, 1888, Helmholtz submitted to the Berlin Academy the memoir on atmospheric movements that I have given in full in the accompanying translations. He first shows that the results of laboratory experiments on a small seale can not be directly applied to larger atmospheric movements because of the fact that the inertia and density of the masses, the forces of viscosity and gravitation, and the linear dimensions, length, area, volume, angle and time, are not all enlarged in the necessary ratios, so that certain results, especially vis- cosity, become inappreciable in large natural phenomena. He then studies the conditions of stability among masses having discontinuous motions; thus if two ring vortices encircle the earth having different latitudes and temperatures, stable equilibrium is possible only when the warm ring is on the polar edge of the colder ring. If they have the same latitude then the warmer must be above the colder. The unroll- ing of the vortex-cylinders and rings destroys their integrity and mo- tions, mixes their own and the surrounding air together, determines the actual average distribution of temperature and moisture in the atmos- phere, and is the important step in the history of all atmospheric phe- nomena. Helmholtz announces his intention of further developing this subject. (24) Diro Kitao—Comparable with the elegant analysis of Helm- holtz and Oberbeck, and, in fact, reminding us remarkably of the work of Kirchhoff, is the memoir by Kitao (professor of physics and mathe- matics in the Imperial Academy of Agriculture of the University of Tokio), entitled ‘Contributions to the theory of the movement of the terrestrial atmosphere and of whirlwind storms.” A few years ago, Professor Kitao returned from studying in Germany, and Japan is to be congratulated on possessing two such mathemati- cians as Kikuchi and Kitao, the former as able a pupil of the English school as the latter is of the German. Kitao’s memoir is published in two parts, in vol. 1, 1887. and vol. 11, 1889, of the Journal of the College of Science of the University Tokio, and a further continuation is promised. But for its great length his work would have been included inthe appended collection of transla- tions, but awaiting its completion and eventual translation I can now only call the attention of students to this extensive analytical memoir. DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 391 (25) General treatises on fluid motion.—To complete our list of recent works bearing directly on the mechanics of the atmosphere, we should include a few general treatises on fluid motion that are specially worthy of the study of meteorologists. I do not note any general works by French authors, but have reason to expect such in the near future, judging from the introductions and notes in recent publications by Poincaré , boussinesq, Duhem, and Mathieu. Our list is as follows: G. KircuuHorr. Vorlesungen iiber mathematische Physik. Mechanik. Dritte Auf- lage. Leipsig, 1883. [Chapters 15-26, or one-half of this volume, is devoted to fluid motions. ] A. B. Basser. A treatise on hydro-dynamics, with numerous examples. Vols. 1 and 11 [a third is expected], Cambridge (England), 1888. W.S. BESANT. A treatise on hydro-mechanics. Fourth edition, Part 1, hydrostat- ics. Cambridge (England), 1883. [Part 11, hydro-kinetics, is promised. ] M. DE SaInT VENANT. Résistance des Fluids [edited by Boussinesq]. Institut de France, Tome xLiv. Paris, 1887. IV.—THERMO-DYNAMICS OF ATMOSPHERIC PHENOMENA. (26) Introductory.—The application of the laws of thermo-dynamics to the movements of the atmosphere was first made in a crude manner by Espy and Joseph Henry before the development of this branch of physics had been attempted by Clausius, Sir William Thomson, and others. The memoir of Thomson in 1861; Reye, 1864 and 1872; that of J. H. Lane (American Journal of Science and Arts, July, 1870) ; that of Charles Chambers (see the Meteorology of the Bombay Presidency, 1878); the short paper by Hann (Z. O. G. M., 1874); the memoirs of Prof. William Ferrel (see especially his Meteorological Researches, 1877, 1881, 1883, and his Recent Advances, 1885; those of Guldberg and Mohn, 1876~78), and the treatise of Sprung (Meteorologie, 1885), have all of them given analytical expressions for this application of thermo-dyna- mics, so that the whole subject of adiabatic changes should now be familiar to all meteorologists. The works of these authors have now been most admirably supplemented by two memoirs by Hertz and Be- zold, respectively, who have developed graphic methods that render the entire process of cooling and warming easy of computation and clear of comprehension, as also very expeditious. The memoir of Hertz is confined to the determination of adiabatic changes, but the memoir of Bezold includes the consideration of changes that are not strictly adiabatic, but in which the quantity of heat within a mass of air actually changes by reason of mixtures, precipitations, and radiations. It is evident to the most superficial thought that the quantity of heat within a given mass of air actually is continually in a state of change and that too not only by reason of its gain of heat from the sun by day and its loss by radiation at night, but especially by the process of mixture that is continually going on. On the one hand cold and dry 392 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. airs are being mixed with warm and moist; on the other hand aqueous vapor with latent heat is being added to the air by evaporation from the ground, and again being taken from the air, but leaving its heat behind by the process of formation of rain, hail, and snow. Therefore the ascent and descent of atmospheric currents is by no means an adia- batic process, and it is the aim of Bezold to so present graphically the changes that take place in ascending and descending air as that we may at any time calculate its thermal condition. (27) Bezold.—The original memoirs of Hertz and Bezold detailing their graphic methods in thermo-dynamics as applied to our atmosphere will be given in full in the promised collection of translations. The ground covered by these will be easily understood from the following analysis of Bezold’s work by Lettry,* with slight additions by myself. (A.) DEFINITIONS.—Let p and v be respectively the values of the vol- ume and pressure of a unit weight, namely, a unit mass, of gas or gas- eous vapor whose absolute temperature is T. Then according to the law of Boyle Mariotte-Gay-Lussac and Charles, we have fil SE Ge ee (Ds Let the condition of the unit of gas be graphically represented as to pressure and volume by the ordinate and abscissa of a point; when p and v are given, the location of the point is known by the graphie con- struction, but equally is the temperature_T known by the equation (aq) ; thus the location of a point in the diagram corresponds to a definite temperature of the gas. If the gaseous mass is maintained at a con- stant temperature then p and v may vary continuously, only fulfilling the condition that their product p v remains constant. The locus of the continuous series of points thus defined is called an isotherm, and we see that the isotherm occurring for any given temperature must be a hyperbola with the axis p and v as its asymptotes, as in Fig. 2, where the co-ordinate axes are rectangular and the hyperbola is equilateral. If on the other hand the tem- perature be allowed to change, but the original amount of heat or thermal energy in a unit mass of gas is forced to remain constant, then a new relation between the pressure and volume that can co- exist is brought about and is defi- nitely determined by the laws of given by the equation, UV Fic. 2.—Isotherms. p*v*/=constant where k and k’ are respectively the specific heat of the gas or vapor at constant volume and again at constant pressure. If, as before, the 0 *See Annuaire Soc. Mét. de France, 1888, XXXVI, p. 236. thermo-dynamies; this relation 1s = DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 393 co-existing p and v are made the co-ordinates of a point, the locus of the points representing the pressure and volume for a given constant quan- tity of heat is called the adiabatic curve for that special quantity, as is shown in Fig. 3. An isotherm and an adiabatic line may beimagined passing through any P point whatever if the latter be con- sidered as an indicator of a given initial state of the gas; that is to say, a point whose position is determined by co-ordinates having the initial ralues p,and v,. The indicator point will follow the isotherm if we make the condition of the gas vary while 2ealories. maintaining a constant temperature; 2 == Leatories. it will follow the adiabatic if the con- dition of the gas varies without increase or diminution of the quantity of heat contained within it. ; Hitherto in the application of the mechanical theory of heat to me- teorology the adiabatic changes only have been considered, but Hertz has shown how to approximately consider non-adiabatic changes, and especially has Bezold freed himself from the adiabatic hypothesis, which is in fact not generally realized in nature. Dynamic cooling.—Bezold first considers the preliminary question, Why does air cool on ascending to higher elevations? Most meteorol- ogists explain this cooling as the transformation of molecular energy into external work done in the expansion of the gaseous mass as if comes under and acts against the diminished pressure of the upper re- gions. This is correct, and it is necessary to be on our guard against an erroneous explanation adopted by Guldberg and Mohn, to the effect that the work done is the elevation of the gas to the higher level; this latter explanation is not allowable, since the work of raising the gas is really done by gravity, namely, the heavier descending air pushes up the lighter rising gas. Fic. 3.—Adiabatic curve. (B.) THE DRY STAGE.—Let x be the mass of aqueous vapor (namely, not the weight nor the tension, but strictly the mass of vapor) that is as- sociated with a unit mass, i. e., a kilogram of dry air, and m the mass of the mixture; then m=1+.z. Note that « differs slightly from the quan- tity of vapor in a kilogram of the mixture, which latter is the quantity generally given in meteorological tables. Let p, and ps be the partial pressures of the dry air and the vapor, respectively ; the total barometric pressure will be p=p, + Po. Let R, and Rg be the constants in equation (a) for the air and vapor; that equation then gives for the mixed gas and vapor Pr 97=R,T psv=x Rs T p=> (Ra + @Rs) T. eae ea (1) 394 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Approximately, Ry, =29.272 and R;=47.061 in the metric system of units. Comparing this with the corresponding equation for dry air, we see that (1) contains the additional variable x, and that the thermal condi- tion of the gas is not defined until we know p, v, and x. Geometrically the condition of the gas would be represented by the location of a point in space whose co-ordinates are these three variables. Let pov, in Figs. 2 and 3, be called the “ plane of co-ordinates,” as that term is used by Bezold, and let 2 be measured perpendicular thereto; we have thus the necessary system of three rectangular co-or- dinates. The value of x in ordinary meteorological problems is gener- ally very small in comparison with p and v. For any given constant value of # the indicator point, showing the thermal condition of the air, would move in a plane parallel and very near to the plane pov. If x is zero the equation and the curve becomes the same as for dry air. Isotherms.—If we assume that the temperature T is maintained con- stant, then the indicator moves along an isotherm, as above described. For a given value of x equation (1) shows that the isotherm is an equi- lateral hyperbola precisely like that in dry air, but situated in a plane parallel to the plane of co-ordinates. The isotherms for the same tem- perature T and for different values of 2, when projected upon the plane pov, agree sensibly. In fact the ordinates p, and p, of the two isotherms coriesponding to a given abscissa, v, and to the given quantities of aqueous vapor v, and x are connected by the relation Rs T Pi—P2=(% —X2) 7 Since the second member of this equation is very nearly zero, since the values of # are generally less than 0.03, therefore the ordinates p; and p, are sensibly equal. One may then be content to consider in the geometrical interpretation of the facts, not the isotherms themselves, but their approximately common projection upon the plane of co-ordi- nates; this amounts to saying that we may consider 2 as constant. The line of saturation.—The changes in the condition of the air are not reversible, and the equation (1) holds good only for certain values of v. In fact the fundamental condition of the dry stage is that the vapor pressure ps Shall be rather less than the maximum pressure of the sat- urated vapor for the temperature T. Designating this maximum press- ure by eit is necessary that we should have Dye or rather by replacing ps by its value as a function of v that we should have rR,T ae: ax. > DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 395 that is to say v> ates Par th oy; oe ar ee) or for the limiting case {<4 se (3) Each isotherm therefore commences only at acertain limiting point, whose absvissa is given by the equation (3) and whose ordinate is deter- mined by the relation found by combining equations (1) and (3) namely, fa ea len nha ee ee ay (45) If the quantity x# preserves a given constant value the isotherm con- tinues to lie in its own plane as the temperature T varies; the limiting point of the isotherm, as just defined, is displaced at the same time, and describes a curve that Bezold calls the line of saturation or the line of the dew-point. (See Fig. 4.) This curve has its concavity 005 turned toward the side of positive p. The indicator point for air in the ? dry stage ought therefore always to be on the concave side of the line of saturation; if this point passes over to the convex side it indicates that the dry stage has been followed by the rain stage. When the quantity 2 varies while T remains constant the projections upon the plane of co-ordinates of i the isotherms corresponding to the Fic. 4.—Dew-point curve. various values of x sensibly agree with each other, as we have said, at least when one draws a diagram rather than a rigorously exact figure. On the other hand, the limit- ing point in this common projection on the plane of co-ordinates is not the same when we take different values of 2. We find, without diffi- culty, that if 7, and x are the abscisses of the limiting points belong- 0.02 ; Bog ‘ . OEE ing to the quantities of vapor x, and «,, respectively, we have be 3,? 2 HX that is to say, that the abscissas of the limiting point vary propor- tionately to x. ‘To each value of x there corresponds a line of satura- tion, precisely as to each value of T there corresponds anisothern. Adiabatics.—The equation of an adiabatic in the dry stage is 1 (¢,4+xe,') log TT ACR +27; ) log 5 =08 5) Aine) 1 396 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. where ¢, and ¢,/ designate respectively, the specific heats at constant pressure of air and of non-saturated aqueous vapor; A480, approxi- mately, is the mechanical equivalent of a unit of heat. T and p per- tain to an initial state of the air, but T, and p, to a final state. Bezold gives a method of constructing by points an indefinite number of adiabaties when we know one and when we have first constructed the system of isotherms. In the dry stage the adiabatics are appreciably independent of a, which is a very small quantity, and they can be regarded as sensibly the same as the adiabaties for dry air entirely without aqueous vapor. Résumé.—For the dry stage the condition of the atmosphere is repre- sented by three systems of lines that can be traced upon a diagram, whose co-ordinates are p and v, which lines constitute a net-work inter- secting each other over the whole plane of co-ordinates, as follows: (1) Isotherms that are equilateral hyperbolas that depend, respectively, upon the values of the variable parameter T, but can for a given temp- erature be considered as independent of wv,the quantity of aqueous vapor. 2) Lines of saturation, the position of each of which depends on the variable parameter x Each line of saturation divides the plane of co- ordinates into two parts; on the concave side of this curve the dry stage is represented, and on the convex side the wet stage. (3) Adiabatics, which are asymptotic to the axes of p and v and inter- sect the two preceding systems of lines; these adiabatics are sensibly the same as those that relate to absolutely dry air. (C.) THE RAIN STAGE.—When rain is forming let xv be the quantity of saturated vapor that is associated with one kilogram of dry air, and 2’ the quantity of water as such suspended within this kilogram of dry air; let M be the mass of the mixture; we have the equation M=1+4+<2+2' Here the tension of the vapor is determined by the temperature it- self; if e designates this tension then we have the two following equa- tions of condition as representing the relations in this stage of rain: pHRyo te. + a ie eee e=eR, tdi ait ie The following remarks may be made with regard to the rain stage: (1) The quantity of water in suspension, w’, is always very small; for as soon as this quantity becomes rather large the water separates from the foggy mass and falls; therefore the changes of condition are irre- versible. . ee ea DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 397 (2) In general, the quantity, 7, of saturated vapor can only diminish. This quantity could increase with v if, in an exceptional case, the tem- perature remained constant, or with Tif the volume remained the same, but it would be necessary that the added vapor should be fur- nished by the evaporation of the water in suspension. Now, the quan- tity of water in suspension is very small, and this store would be quickly exhausted. The contact of the air with moist bodies or any circum- stance of the same class would also tend to increase the quantity of vapor 2, but still this would be an exceptional case. (3) The equations (6) and (7) show that when « is given it suffices to know apy one of the quantities e, T, v, or p in order that the others may be determined. We see also that if # is given and T varies, the indi- cator of the condition of the air moves along the line of saturation that is peculiar to the special value of x. (4) Let us suppose that at the moment when the vapor becomes sat- urated and that one enters into the rain stage the quantity of vapor is x,, and that at the end of a certain time this quantity is diminished to a, The indicator was at first on the line of saturation belonging to z,, but it now is found on the line of saturation belonging to 7,. While « has decreased from x, to x,, the indicator has passed from its initial to its final position by cutting across all the lines of dew-point or lines of saturation relative to the intermediate values of «. But the indicator can not retrace its path, because # can not increase in general. Therefore in the rain stage the indicator always describes its path in the same direction. For such paths or trajectories, described in the given direction, one can apply the principles of thermo-dynamics as if reversible changes were under consideration. Therefore the changes of condition in the case of rain can be described as “ partially reversible.” Isotherms.—As the tension e of saturated vapor is constant so long as the temperature T is constant, and as on the other hand w can only decrease, the equation (7) shows that v can only decrease if T does not change. This being allowed, the equation (6) will be the equation of the isotherm for a given temperature, T, and for decreasing values of v and of x. The isotherm remains entirely throughout its whole ex- tent on the convex side of the line of saturation belonging to a,, the initial value of x. » | We see that the isotherm in the rain stage is still an equilateral hyperbola, and that it varies very little from the isotherm of the dry stage for the same temperature. Adiabatics.—Strictly speaking there is no adiabatic, unless we sup- pose that all the condensed water remains in suspension. If all or a part of the water falls to the ground there is an exterior work per- formed, and consequently a loss of internal heat or calorific energy, and the definition of the adiabatic no longer applies, 398 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888, If we assume that all the water formed by condensation continues in suspension, we have for the differential equation of the adiabatic (c.+2,)aT+Td (+ AR, To) where ¢, designates the specific heat of the air at a constant volume, x, 18 the quantity of aqueous vapor at the moment when the rain stage - begins, x is the quantity of aqueous vapor at any given moment during the rain stage, r is the latent heat of vaporization or quantity of heat required to vaporize a unit mass of water at the temperature T, and the pressure p or approximately, 606 at 0° C and varying with the tempera- ture; A and R,, known constants, as before used. We have moreover x,=«1+u2', where a’ designates the mass of condensed water that re- mains in suspension. Wecould have given another form to the preced- ing equation by choosing as variables p and T in place of v and T. Integration furnishes the equation of the adiabatic under a finite form. If we pass from an initial condition designated by the subseript 1 to a final condition designated by the subscript 2 the equation of the adiabatic is AR, log T+(e.-b2t.) 108 ae T= ere (9) Pseudo-adiabatic.—W hen the condensed water is separated wholiy or in part from the mass of air, exterior work is done, and consequently there is a loss of heat. The changes of condition in this case are called pseudo-adiabatic by Bezold. He gives this name especially to the curve described by the indicator when all the water that is formed falls to the ground without increasing the energy of the mass of gas and with- out other loss than that just mentioned ; actually the fall of rain does communicate some energy to the air. The differential equation of the pseudo-adiabatic is (e,-+o)aT+Td (ip +) AR, nee Da va) Lae ee This equation is independent of x, or the quantity of saturated vapor that existed at the moment when the rain stage began; it is also inde- pendent of the quantity of water formed, and consequently on our hypothesis, fallen to the ground since the beginning of the rain stage. In equation (10) « represents the quantity of saturated vapor that exists at any given moment. Integrating this equation between an initial condition designated by the subscript 1 and a final condition designated by the subscript 2 we obtain Shs aT Ys XY) AR, log 7 +6, went fT ee Teno ee 1 The integration can not be completely effected so long as the relation between the variables is not given under an explicit form; but we may s > ee —-. " DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 399 remark that in the third term the integral is here present only as a cor- rection whose value is comprised between very small limits. By com- paring the adiabatic and the pseudo-adiabatie that start from the same initial point we find that this latter curve is the one that most rapidly approaches the axis of v. (D.) 1HE SNOW STAGE AND THE HAIL STAGE.—These are treated by Bezold in a manner entirely similar to the preceding. He gives the following examples of application of his methods. (A) Foehn.—In the Foebhn, moist air expanding by ascending the sides of a mountain is then compressed when it descends upon the other slope, all without any addition or diminution of its heat. The curves representing these changes of condition are therefore adiabatics. In Fig. 5, let a be the position of the indicator for the condition | %@ 7a corresponding to the initial con- dition; SaSa the corresponding line of saturation; as the air ex- pands the indicator moves cor- respondingly along the adiabatic ab down to the point b, where this curve reaches the line of satura- tion Sa. The are ab is located really in a plane parallel to the plane pov of the diagram, and at a distance from this plane equal to @ the mass x, of the vapor of water ; Fic. 5.—Adiabatics. that accompanies 1 kilogram of the dry air. From a to b the adiabatic crosses a series of isotherms, of which the first one only, namely, the dotted line Ta Ta is traced in the diagram, and we see that the temperature has fallen continuously. At the moment when the indicator cuts the line of saturation at b the dry stage ceases and the rain stage begins. The adiabatic ab is now continued by the pseudo-adiabatic bc, which represents the rain stage. The air does not now cease to expand, but the temperature falls more slowly ; this is why the curve bc is less steeply inclined to the axis ov and intersects continually the lines of saturation for quantities of aqueous vapor that are steadily diminishing. However, the air arrives at the summit of the mountain and crosses it and the compression begins ; at this moment the indicator of the con- dition of the air is atc. Then we have the following alternatives: (1) All the water that is formed remains in suspension; in this case be is a true adiabatic, and here the change of condition of the air is completely reversible. The indicator returns from ¢ to b in the rain Stage, and then from 6b to a in the dry stage. We find the same con- ditions as to temperature, volume, and pressure, on either side of the mountain, This case of complete reversibility always occurs when the 400 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. line of saturation has not been attained ; that is tosay, when the changes have occurred entirely within the dry stage. (2) Or, on the other hand, and which generally happens, the water that is formed as the indicator passes below / is separated from the rest of the mass by falling to or towards the earth, and be is a pseudo-adi- abatic; in this case the change is irreversible, and as the air descends along the opposite slope of the mountain the indicator follows a curve ed other than be, or the adiabatic of the dry stage. We see by the consideration of Fig. 5, that the initial temperature will be recovered at a pressure lower than the initial pressure ; that the temperatures that are attained become higher and higher, and the ex- cess over the former becomes greater in proportion as the air descends and is compressed. Moreover, the absolute quantity of the aqueous vapor has become smaller, therefore the real line parallel to the plane pov, and of which ed is the projection, is now much nearer to this plane than was the orig- inal line ab. Thus we have cold and moist air on one side of the mountain becom- ing warm and dry air on the other. Thus we derive all the character- istic properties of the Foehn, and explain without difficulty how it is that these properties do not pertain to descending winds that have not first surmounted a summit, for example, to the winds that simply de- scend along the slope of a plateau. (B) Interchange of air between a cyclone and anti-cyclone, in the sum- mer.—The changes of condition of air within a cyclone and anti-cyclone are analogous to those of air that has surmounted a mountain ridge. Rain within the area of a cyclone, dry weather in a clear sky within an anti-cyclone. But whereas, in the case of the Foehn, these changes are experienced within an area of small diameter, so that one can neglect external thermal actions; the passage from the cyclonic state to the anti-cyclonic is, on the contrary, effected within a space so extended that it is necessary to take account of these actions. In summer the addition of solar heat is the prevailing power; in winter it is the reverse; the day-time and the night timehave influences very nearly like those of summer and winter. In all cases the curves representing the condition are no longer adiabatic. Let us suppose that the air passes from the cyclonic to the anti-ey- clonie condition in the summer time. Starting from an initial condition a in the cyclone, the temperature diminishes by expansion and the indi- cator of the condition of this mass of air starts to describe the adia- batic ab!, but the diminution of temperature is retarded by the addition of external heat and the air expands, as shown by the movement of the indicator along the curve ab, which is less inclined than the adiabatic ab'. It follows that the line of saturation is attained later than it other- wise would be, and this corresponds to a higher elevation above the surface of the earth of the mass of air under consideration. (See Fig. 6.) bis et el DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. AOL In the rain stage the curve be of the change of condition is also less inclined than the adiabatic bc'; at the same time it remains nearer to the line of saturation. While traversing the line be the condensed vapor is form- ing clouds. If the addition of external heat con- tinues, the air can even return to the dry stage along the curve cd; let ¢ be this point where this occurs; the point e will at the same time be the upper limit of the lower clouds. From } toc the absorptive power of | the suspended water renders the warm- ing by insolation relatively large. But a V when one has entered into the dry stage, tgs beyond the point d, the absorptive power of the atmosphere diminishes ; however, the expansion continues, and with the expansion the cooling, and at some point d, which corresponds to the height of the cirrus clouds, we enter into the snow stage. The absorption of heat, as we go from c¢ to d, has become so feeble that the line cd can be considered as an adiabatic. From d to 2 we continue in the snow stage or the cirrus-cloud stage. At 2 the air begins to descend in the anti- cyclone During the first portion of the period of compression the air follows a curve 2f, corresponding very nearly to the adiabatic 2f! of the dry stage, but departing from it always alittle toward the higher isotherms, in proportion as we descend to the lower altitudes, where there exists an energetic absorption of heat. The final pressure at the point f at the base of the anti-cyclone is greater than the initial pressure at the point a at the base of the cyclone. Moreover, it generally happens that the point / is situated to the right of the point a, that is to say, that v is larger than v,, or that the air in an anti-cyclone is specifically lighter than in a cyclone. This results from the fact that the addition of external heat compensates for the in- fluence of compression. If the air, descending in the anti-cyclone, encounters a new depres- sion, this is represented in the diagram by the dotted line fa, supposing everything else to be the same in the old and in the new cyclone. The line fa completes the cycle of the changes of condition. (C) Interchanges of air between a cyclone and anti-cyclone, in winter.— We note at first that the curves of the changes of condition more nearly approach the axes of co-ordinates in winter than in the summer, since the temperatures remain relatively low and the higher isotherms are not attained. At the initial point a the pressure is lower and the tempera- ture higher; at the final point d the pressure is higher and the tempera- ture lower. The point dis therefore to the left and above the point a. H. Mis. 142——-26 P 402 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Moreover, the curves of condition are in winter nearer the plane pov than in summer, because in winter the absolute quantity of aqueous vapor contained in the air is always smaller. When the air rises in the cyclone, starting from the initial condition a, the indicator-point very nearly follows the adiabatic until it attains the upper limit of the mass of clouds; in fact, below this limit the insolation and the radiation can produce only inappreciable effects. As for the rest, in so far as the curve departs from the adiabatic, it approaches the axes, contrary to what happens in the summer time. In the accompanying diagram, Fig. 7, abe is the curve of conditions from the initial point a up to the moment when the compression begins. We have supposed that the initial mass passes immediately from the dry stage ab to the snow stage be. It is probable that at high altitudes the compression of the descending air the adiabatic of the dry stage; but nearer the ground the radiation causes Fic. 7.—Adiabatics. Oe 5 - a deviation toward the co-ordinate axis ov. Thus one obtains a curve somewhat analogous to cd in Fig. 7. The curve cd is only a graphic representation of the well-known fact that there is an inversion in the vertical distribution of tempera- ture during clear days in winter. Near d the curve approaches the line of saturation, so that it may even intersect it; this case corresponds to the formation of fog at the surface of the ground. ; Numerical data are wanting to determine whether the passage from c to d can be made in any other manner, as when the cooling exerts its action near the point ¢. The curve of condition in the plane pov would then possess a double point. These examples suffice to enable us to judge of the usefulness of this graphic method, devised by Bezold, and of which, as he says, when per- fected from a mathematical point of view, this method will give an ex- cellent means of discussing the numerical data furnished by observa- tion ; it will at the same time make known in what direction other ob- servations are to be sought to the greater profit of dynamic meteorology. In his second memoir of November, 1888, Bezold adopts the term, ‘potential temperatures” as equivalent to Helmholtz’s expression “thermal contents,” and as the term has been applied by the latter it will, we hope, obtain general use, although it is perhaps objectionable, as involving a new modification of the much used word potential. The ‘‘pnotential temperature” is simply the absolute temperature that a body would assume if it were brought to a normal pressure without loss or gain of heat. . proceeds adiabatically, according to - DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 403 Adiabatic or pseudo-adiabatic changes of free air that do not involve evaporation either leave the potential temperature unchanged or increase it, but never diminish it. Bezold uses the term to simplify the state- ment of theorems in atmospheric circulation. V.—PREDICTION OF STORMS AND WEATHER. (28) Abbe.—In 1871 the present writer prepared a short sketch of views held by himself and other meteorologists with reference to the laws of storms and methods of weather predictions. Three editions of this sketch were published by the Signal Office under the title of “ Sug- gestions as to the Practical Use of Meteorological Reports and Weather Maps.” =:\-= 5.2 8 4 8 1.0 0.19 @ahiforniver.o--==-)-- 15.8 1 1 1 0.1 0.01 | ColoradOscercaiesin1-/>'=\- | 10. 4 1 1 ] Etisal 0. 01 | Connecticut .--..--- | 0.5 | 6 87 2 0.2 0.40 Dako fat eos sac: | tat 9 7 9 1.1 0.07 | Delaware. .-.--...-.. Hal Bea encandl dace eseAl eras sacs loaceoous se lsotecc soc> | District of Columbia 05.0. |esn2 ace woes dl everee cmc ene eee eee ee MVOTIiGae saeco e = 5.9 | 5 7 5 0.6 0. 10 Georriateeses --iceecr 5.8 oe 78 29 3.6 0. 62 DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. 421 Table of frequency of tornadoes in each State—Continued. - Tornadoes from 1874 to 1881, | | Finley’s record. | inclusive (eight years | Area in complete). State or Territory Sa Non | ; LA 1 | ry square | Total ; ‘ ale | miles. | number of eeord | Finley's | average per 10,000 nance | (years). ~~" |perState.| square | miles. x zat ———— IGEN siscneecocseaa GbG || secelodec [POOP Piece eee ail seo IM ta Se | llinoiswsten sens «a3. 5.5 | 54 | 28 | 50 6.2 1.13 | Indian aigee seca er 121 3.4 | 27 | 29 | 24 3.0 0, 88 Indian Territory ---. 6.9 1 1 1) 0.1 0, 01 | Boren eet Css 3: 5.5 31 28 26 3.2 | 58 | Mansa. cassccten- so. Sali 62 23 55 6.9 | . 85 Wentuckiysses-j---e- 3.8) | 6 it 5a 0.6 | 0.16 Mouisiangs <- AlGOs se Orage Of these the last one is doubtful. (Zeitschr. Phys. Chem., 1, 396.) Hydroxychlorides of titaniwm.—According to Koenig and Otto von der Pfordten, dry, gaseous hydrochloric acid does not act upon titanium tetrachloride. On the other hand, concentrated aqueous hydrochloric acid acts upon the chloride, forming a series of hydroxy-derivatives, which may be represented as follows: TiCl,; TiC],OH; TiCl.(CH); TiCl(OH);. These compounds are called by the authors chlorides of titanic acid, and all are solids. The monochloride is stable in the air; the dichloride is very hygroscopic; the trichloride somewhat so. (Be- richte, XxI, 1703.) Titanic acid in soils.—J. ¥. McCaleb has examined fourteen samples of soil from central Virginia, together with one from Alabama and one from Nevada, finding titanic oxide present in all in percentages ranging from 0.53 to 5.42. Although this wide distribution of titaniam was rea- sonably to be expected, it seems not to have been hitherto observed. (Am. Chem. Journ., x, 36.) Germanium.—Several papers upon this interesting new metal have appeared, which identify it completely with the predicted ‘+ ekasilicium ” of Mendelejeff. For the specific heat of the metal, between 0° and 440°, Nilsou and Pettersson find 0.0757, which gives an atomic heat of 5.33. They also find normal values for the vapor density of GeCl,, Gel, and GeS. (Berichte, xx, ref. 134.) By Winkler several compounds of germanium are described, notably @ germanium chlorcform, GeHCl;; germanium ethyl, Ge(C,H;),, and Ts ee ee, ee CHEMISTRY. AA] a gerthanium ultramarine. The double fluorides of germanium are strictly analogous to those of the other elements of the same group. (Journ. Prakt. Chem. (2), xxxvi, 177.) The potassium germanifluo- ride, K,Gek¢, is also studied by Nilson and Pettersson, who show its analogies with the silicofluoride. Crystallographic measurements by Paykull show it to be isomorphous with ammonium silicofluoride. (Be- richte, xx, 1696.) In euxenite Kriiss discovers about one-tenth of 1 per cent. of germanium oxide. (Berichte, xxt, 151.) Hydrazin.—The compound N,H,, hydrazin or amidogen, of which many derivatives have long been known, has at last been isolated by Curtius. When diazoacetic ether is treated with hot, strong potash lye the potassium salt of a new acid is formed. When this salt is treated with a mineral acid the new diazo.acid is set free, which upon digestion with dilute sulphuric acid deposits superb colorless crystals of hydrazin sulphate. The latter by warming with caustic alkali solutions readily vields up free hydrazin as a colorless, perfectly stable gas having a pe- culiar odor slightly suggestive of ammonia. It dissolves easily in water to a strongly alkaline solution, which acts as a powerful reducing agent, precipitates alumina and other like bases from their salts, and unites readily with acids. (Berichte, xx, 1632.) The chloride of nitrogen.—This compound, which is perhaps the most violent explosive known, has been recently investigated by Gatterman. As obtained by the action of chlorine upon sal ammoniae solution, it was found to be indefinite in composition and to contain various admix- tures of chloramines. From tbis mixture the pure NC], was prepared by first washing thoroughly with water in a separatory funnel and then saturating for half an hour with a stream of chlorine. The oil so ob- tained was thoroughly washed, dried, and analyzed and, was found to be definite in composition. By careful manipulation it was prepared about thirty times without explosion, and its reputedly capricious explosibility was found to be due to the action of light. By flashing upon it the light from burning magnesium it exploded violently. On careful heating up to 90° it remains unchanged, but exploded with great force when the temperature reached 95°. (Berichte, xx1, 751.) In a note upon the foregoing paper Mallet calls attention to the faet that nitrogen iodide, which is not sensitive when wet, when dry also detonates by exposure to bright sunlight. (Chem. News, Lyrit, 64.) Thiophosphoryl fluoride—According to Thorpe and Rodger, when phosphorus pentasulphide is heated with lead fluoride in a leaden tube a gas is formed which analysis shows to be thiophosphoryl fluoride, PSF;. It is also produced by several other re-actions, and is a trans- parent, colorless, liquefiable gas. In contact with air it spontaneously ignites, burning at a jet with a pale yellowish-green flame tipped with blue. It dissolves in water, to some extent in ether, not at all in alco- holor benzene. It has no action on mercury. (Jour. Chem. Soe., LI, 766.) 442 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Amorphous antimony.—This modification of antimony, discovered by Gore, is prepared by Hérard by heating antimony to dull redness in a current of nitrogen. The grayish vapors condense at the cool end of the tube in which the operation is performed, to an amorphous powder. Its specific gravity is 6.22 and it melts at 614°, while ordinary erystal- line antimony fuses at 440° and has a density of 6.73. (Compt. Rend., CVII, 420.) Decomposition of antimony sulphide by water.—Elbers finds that when antimonious sulphide is boiled with water it is slowly decomposed with evolution of sulphuretted hydrogen. In this-‘way 0.05 gramme of sul- phide was converted into oxide in fourteen hours, giving a liquid of faintly alkaline re-action. (Jour. Chem. Soc., Lv1, 108, from Chem. Zeitung, X11, 355.) Hydrochlorates of chlorides.—Three of these hitherto doubtful salts, well crystallized, are described by Engel. They are (SbCl;).. HCl. 2H,0O ; SbCI;. 5HC1. 1107.0; (BiCl,),. HCl. 3H,O. A similar copper salt, CuCl. 2HC}l. 5H,O, also crystallized, is described by Sabatier. (Compt. Ren#., CVI, 1724 and 1796.) The fluohydrates of potassium fluoride, KF.2HF and KF.3H1, lately discovered by Moissan, may be analogous in con- stitution. (Compt. Rend., evi, 547.) Pentathionic and hexathionic acids.—When sulphuretted hydrogen is passed into an aqueous solution of sulphurous acid a milky liquid is formed in which an acid called pentathionie acid is commonly believed to exist. Its existence, however, having been called in question by Spring, the question has been re-investigated by Debus with affirma- tive results. According to Spring the pentathionie acid is merely a physical solution of sulphur in tetrathionic acid, and the pentathionates are mixtures of tetrathionates with free sulphur. The original liquid from which pentathionic acid is obtained is known as Wackenroder’s solution, and is a highly complex and unstable mix- ture. Its properties were thoroughly studied by Debus, who explains the anomalies which have troubled Spring and others, and who dis- covers in it, besides tetra- and penta-thionie acids, still a new compound, hexathionic acid, H.S,O;. He obtained well-erystallized and definite pentathionates of potassium and copper, and also the potassium salt of hexathionie acid, establishing the existence of both acids beyond all reasonable question. Healso found in the Wackenroder solution rather large quantities of free sulphur in a new colloidal modification, soluble in water. (Journ. Chem. Soc., Li, 278.) A new sulphur acid.—Villiers, studying the action of sulphur dioxide upon sodium thiosulphate, finds that when the gas is passed into an ice- cold solution of the latter salt a new sulphur acid is generated. If the solution, after saturation, be allowed to stand for a few days and then is evaporated in vacuo over sulphuric acid, crystals of the sodium salt, Na,S,O,, are obtained. It crystallizes from water with 2H,O. From the first mother liquor on further evaporation sodium trithionate ecrys- ee — or 7 =. , ,O. The resinoid constituent of Japanese bird-lime has the composition ©,,H,,O, differing from mochylic aleohol by having two atoms less of hydrogen. (Journ. Chem. Soc., LI, 268.) A solid hydrocarbon in plants—Helen C, de SwAbbott and H. Trimble, CHEMISTRY. 447 in the petroleum ether extract from Cascara amarga and Phlox Caro- lina, have discovered a solid, crystalline hydrocarbon, melting at 1969. In composition itis represented by the formula ©), Hj, or some multiple thereof. (Berichte, Xx1, 2598.) The synthesis of closed carbon chains.—During 1887 and 1888, W. H. Perkin, jr., has published a number of papers extending his earlier researches upon compounds containing closed carbon chains. In some of these papers he appears in joint authorship with other investi- gators. By acting upon ethyl malonate in presence of sodium with trimethy- lene bromide a number of tetramethylene derivatives were formed, but the hydrocarbon itself could not be prepared. In the same reaction some pentamethylene derivatives were also produced. By other pro- cesses compounds involving hexa- and hepta-methylene were obtained. Some work was also done on trimethylene derivatives, and also on the synthesis of aromatic compounds having closed carbon chains. (See Perkin, Journ. Chem. Soe., Li, pp. 1, 240, 702, 849, and Li, 1; Colman and Perkin, ibid., L1, 228, and LIII, 185 : ; Freer and Perkin, tbid., LI, 820, and Lilt, 202, 2 5.) The aromatic compounds were also studied by Kipping, tbid., Li, 21. None of these papers are suited for detailed abstraction. A new general method of synthesis for aromatic compounds.—Friedel and Crafts, continuing their researches upon the re-actions of aromatic hydrocarbons in presence of aluminum chloride, find that the latter re-agent causes benzene and its homologues to take up readily various elements, radicles, and acid anhydrides. Thus, when dry oxygen is passed into a mixture of benzene with aluminum chloride, it is slowly absorbed; and upon treating the mass with water phenol is formed. Toluene, similarly treated, yields cresol. The benzene and chloride mixture easily takes up eer sulphur, with evolution of hydro- chloric and sulphydrie acids, and afterwards, with water, gives phe- nyl mercaptan, phenyl sulphide, and diphenylene disulphide. With carbonic anhydride the same fundamental mixture yields benzoie acid, with sulphur dioxide it gives benzylsulphurous acid, and so on through a long list of similar reactions. In every casc, however, treatment with water is necessary to complete the re-action. In all these syntheses, according to the authors, the first step appears to be*the formation of a peculiar organo- metallic compound, as follows: Cs;He+ Al,Cl],=( \¢H;. A],C],+ I ICl. This compound, C, H;. Als Cl;, being formed, it is readily acted upon by various agents, as, for example, by the paraffin chlorides, in which case hydrocarbon derivatives are produced with regeneration of aluminum chloride, thus: C,H;.Al,Cl,+-CH,Cl=C,H;.CH,+ Al,Cl.. 448 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. This order of syntheses is discussed in previous papers. In the present essay the reactions are but little more complex. In the first case, in which oxygen is taken up to form phenol, the equations are as follows: CoH, a O+ AlLClg=C, H;.O.A1,C];+ HCl, an oxygenated compound being formed which, upon treatment with water, is destroyed and phenol is generated. C,H;.0. Al,Cl;+ H,O=C,H;OH-+ Al,Cl;(OH). The definite addition compounds of aromatic hydrocarbons and alumi- num chlorides which were some time ago described by Gustavson, Frie- del and Crafts were unable to prepare. Instead they obtained variable mixtures. They describe, however, a definite aluminum-phenyl, which Serves asa starting point for still other syntheses. (Aun. Chim. Phys. (6), XIV, 433.) The application of aluminum chloride to organic syntheses in the fatty series has also been studied by Combes (ibid., x11, 199), with ref- erence to diphenyl by Adam (ibid., xv, 224), and in connection with naphthalene derivatives by Roux (ibid., x11, 289). Inosite.—This substance, isomeric with glucose, has been elaborately studied by Maquenne. With acids it yields ethers which prove it to be a hexatomic alcohol, while with reducing and oxydizing agents it gives derivatives belonging in the aromatic series. Its constitution, therefore, seems to be ‘‘hexagonal” like that of benzene; but the evi- dence leads Maquenne to suppose that it contains no double bonds and is to be regarded rather as a derivative of hexamethylene. As existing in plants it is perhaps an intermediary between the fatty and the aro- matic compounds, and one of the sources from which the natural ben- zene derivatives originate. (Am. Chim. Phys. (6), x11, 80.) Perseite.—Maquenne, in a new research upon this carbohydrate, finds by Raoult’s method that its molecular weight is represented by the formula C,H,,05. It acts as a hexatomic alcohol, and its hexacetate, hexnitrate, etc., are described. (Compt. Rend., CVI, 1235.) In a later paper Maquenne revises his former conclusions, and shows that perseite is really a heptavalent alcohol of formula C;H,,O, On treatment with boiling hydriodic acid it yields heptine, C;H,:. (Compt. Rend., Cvit, 583.) Graminin and phlein.—Two new carbohydrates, isomeric with inulin, are given the above names by Ekstrand and Johanson. The first is de- rived from the rhizomes of Trisetum alpestre ; the second from Phleum pratense. (Berichte, xxt, 594.) Cadaverin.—This base, derived from putrefaction, has been identified by Ladenburg as pentamethylenediamine. Both cadaverin and the synthetic compound form the same double salt with mercuric chloride. (Berichte, Xx, 2217.) “ 4 CHEMISTRY. 449 Putrescin.—This compound, analogous to cadaverin, has been identi- fied with tetramethylenediamine by Udranzky and Bawmann. (Berichte, weer, 2938.) Identity of the naphtenes with the aromatic hexhydrides.—In 1883 Mar- kownikoff and Ogloblin obtained from Caucasian petroleum a series of hydrocarbons isomeric with the aromatic hexhydrides, to which they gave the name of naphtenes. Konovaloff, studying the hexhydro- pseudocumene, which he prepared synthetically from pseudocumene, finds it to be in all respects identical with nononaphtene, and concludes that the supposed naphtenes, as an independent series of hydroear- bons, do not exist. (Berichte, xx, ref. 570.) Action of pyridine on metallic salts—The observations of Jorgensen upon metallic pyridine compounds have been extended to a number of new cases by Lang. When pyridine in excess is added to a solution of zine chloride, a voluminous white precipitate is formed. This dissolves in boiling water with which pyridine has been mixed and erystallizes out in long silky needles having the composition ZnC],.2C;H;N. It is ~ recrystallable from boiling alcohol, but water decomposes it into free pyridine and a basic chloride. From an alcoholic solution of copper chloride pyridine precipitates magnificent bluish-green needles of CuCl,.2C;H;N. With copper sul- phate dissolved in water, pyridine produces a heavy, light green pre- cipitate, which dissolves in excess of the reagent. From the latter so- lution alcohol throws down the compound CuSO,.C;H;N.3H,0, which is essentially the normal sulphate with two of its water molecules replaced by one of the organic base. Cuprous chloride treated with pyridine in absence of air reacts so strongly that the mixture becomes boiling hot. Upon cooling the solution, crystals of Cu,Cl.4C;H;N are deposited. With great excess of pyridine, six molecules are taken up, forming the salt Cu,Cl,.6C;H;N in long, greenish-yellow needles: With an alcoholic solution of cadmium chloride, pyridine precipi- tates the salt CdCl,.2C;H;N. A similar salt, highly erystallized, is also formed by cadmium iodide. With mercurie chloride a compound HgCl,.C;H;N is produced. Anhydrous cadmium chloride absorbs three molecules of pyridine with evolution of heat. Other salts of cobait chloride, ferrous sulphate, and nickel sulphate with pyridine were also prepared. _ (Berichte, xx1, 1678.) Pyridin and piperidin.—In a paper of nearly a hundred pages, Lad- enburg presents the collected results of recent investigations made partly by himself and partly by students under his direction, concern- ing the preparation and properties of the pyridin, and piperidin bases. The compounds were partly synthetic, and in part derived from tar oil, and embrace pyridin, three methylpyridins, two ethylpyridins, isopropylpyridin, two dimethylpyridins, three methylethylpyridins, di- ethylpyridin, and the corresponding members of the piperidin series, H. Mis. 142 29 450 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888, (Ann. Chem.,ccxLvit,1.) Some higher homologues of the same series, synthetically prepared, are also described by Jaeckle. (bid., CCXLYVI, 32.) A new base from tea.—Under the name theophylline, A. Kossel de- scribes a new alkaloid which occurs with caffeine, buf in very small quan- - tities, in tea. Its formula, C;H;N,O,, makes it isomerie with theobro- mine and paraxanthine; from which bases, however, it distinctly differs. Unlike theobromine, it crystallizes with one molecule of water, and in crystalline form it is unlike either of its isomers. It melts at 2649, while paraxanthine melts at above 280°, and theobromine sublimes without fusion at 290°. Its salts crystallize well. As it is convertible into caffeine by methylization, it is doubtless a dimethylxanthine, but the position of its methyl groups is not yet determined. (Berichte, XXt, 2164.) Some homologues of cocaine.—Starting from cocaine as methyl-benzoy1- ecgonine, F. G. Novy has prepared the corresponding ethyl, propyl, and isobutyl compounds, of which the first had already been deseribed by Merck. In each case benzoyl-ecgonine was heated in a sealed tube with the proper alkyl iodide and the corresponding alcohol. The new alkaloids and their salts crystallize easily, and all possess like cocaine strong anesthetic properties. (Am. Chem. Journ., x, 145.) Isatropyl cocaine.--This alkaloid, discovered by Liebermann, was ob- tained as a bye-product in the extraction of cocaine from coca leaves. It is amorphous, forms amorphous salts, and has the composition rep- resented by the formula C,,H.,;NO;. Upon prolonged treatment with hydrochioric acid it is easily split up into methyl alcohol, eegonine, and two isomeric isatropic acids, C,H,O,. In constitution if is probably a cocaine, in which the benzoic radicle is replaced by one from isatropic acid. Physiologically, the new alkaloid is highly poisonous, differing from cocaine and atropine, and acting mainly on the heart. (Berichte, XXI, 2342.) The alkaloids of areca nut.—F rom the areca or betel nut Jahns has obtained two new alkaloids. The first, arecoline, C;H;;NO,, is a color- less, oily liquid of strong alkaline reaction, which boils at about 220°, Its salts are easily soluble, and mostly crystallizable. It appears to be the physiologically active principle of the nut, and to be near pelletier- ine in its properties. The second alkaloid, arecaine, C,H,,NO,.H,O, forms colorless, easily soluble crystals, whose solution reacts neutral. Tt loses its water at 100°, melts at 213°, and chars upon stronger heat- ing. Physiologically it is inactive. Probably it is related to betaine. (Berichte, XXxT, 5404.) Atropine and hyoscyamine.—Ladenburg, investigating the isomerism of these two alkaloids, concludes that it is ‘‘ physical” in character, and that they are related to each other like tartaric and racemic acids, atropine being the inactive compound optically. The actual transfor- mation of one into the other is yet to be accomplished, the supposed ~~ CHEMISTRY. 451 change heretofore having been deceptive, on account of impurities in the atropineexamined. (Berichte, XX1, 3065.) Coloring matter from Drosera Whittakerit.—From the tubers of this South Australian plant Rennie has isolated a magnificent red coloring matter which dyes silk brilliantly. It erystallizes easily from solution in hot alcohol or glacial acetic acid, and has the formula C,,H,0;. From experiments upon the oxidation and reduction of the compound, Ren- nie infers that it may be a trihydroxy-methylnaphthaquinone. (Jour. Chem. Soc., LI, 371.). The supposed identity of rutin and quercitrin.—These two tinctorial- substances approximate to each other so nearly in properties and com- position, that the question of their identity or distinctness has not hitherto been. settled. By the action of strong acids both are decom- posed into quercetin and isodulcite, they dye similar colors, and have many properties in common. Schunck now points out a number of differences in physical characteristics and reactions, and by careful analyses shows that whereas quercitrin contains two molecules of iso- dulcite to one of quercetin, rutin has three of isodulcite to one of quercetin. The differences and similarities are thus easily explained. (Jour. Chem. Soe., Lin, 262.) The fluorides of the parafin radicles.—Several of these compounds have been prepared and described by Moissan, partly in co-operation with Melsans. They are produced by acting on silver fluoride with the paraffin iodides, and up to isobutyl fluoride they are gaseous at ordi- nary temperatures. Methyl fluoride is a colorless gas of extreme sta- bility, which is saponifiable only with difficulty. It can be liquefied in Cailletet’s apparatus. The ethyl compound liquefies at —48, under normal pressure, and isobutyl fluoride becomes liquid at +16°. The gases are combustible, and burn witha blue fame. (Compt. Rend., Cvi, 260, 992, 1155.) The action of fluoride of siticon upon organic bases.—By acting upon aniline, orthotoluidine, paratoluidine, diphenylamine, dimethylaniline, and chinoline with silicon fluoride, Comey and Jackson have prepared a series of compounds which they designate silicotetrafluorides. In these compounds the nitrogen appears to be quinquivalent, one of its bonds being satisfied by fluorine and another by silicon. (Am. Chem. Jour., X, 165.) Other organic fluorine compounds, substitution derivatives of the aromatic series, are described by Wallach and Heusler. , Among them are difluobenzene, parafluoanilin, fluonitrobenzene, parafluophenol, fluo- pseudocumene, fluodiphenyl, ete. (Ann. d. Chem., CCOXLULI, 219.) Organo-metallic compounds.—The question as to the valency of bismuth is settled by the researches of Michaelis and Polis on bismuth triphenyl. This compound unites directly with two atoms of chlorine or bromine, to form halogen saits in which the metal is definitely pentavalent. (Be- richte, XX, 54.) 452 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. On the other hand Marquardt has studied the trimethyl, triethyl, tri- isobutyl, and triisoamyl compounds of bismuth. These only form salts by replacement of the alky! radicle, which are compounds of the di- and monoalkyl compounds, the bismuth remaining triad throughout. (Be- richte, XX, 1516, and XxI, 2035.) The tetraphenyl and tetratolyl lead compounds have also been studied by Polis. The derivatives of lead tetrapheny] are salts of the diphenyl compound, being formed by replacement and not by addition. (Be- richte, Xx, 717 and 3331.) . By Marquardt and Michaelis we have a research upon tellurethyl. When zine ethyl acts on tellurium tetrachloride, the monochloride of tellurium triethyl is formed. Tellurium tetrethyl probabiy does not exist. Tellurium diethyl is also described. (Berichte, xx1, 2042.) By Michaelis and Weitz trianisylarsine and its compounds and also triphenetylarsine are described. In these bodies the arsenic remains trivalent throughout. (Berichte, xx, 48.) A silico-organic compound of a new type.—When silicon tetrabromide or tetrachloride is added to an excess of aniline diluted with three or four volumes of benzene, silicotetraphenylamide is produced. By dis- tilling off the excess of benzene on a water bath, and crystallizing the residue from solution in warm earbon disulphide, magnificent colorless prisms of the new compound are obtained. According to the dis- coverer, Prof. J. Emerson Reynolds, its formula is Si(NHC,¢Hs5)s, and it seems to be the first well-defined compound in which silicon is in di- rect and exclusive union with amidic nitrogen. ‘About 50 grammes of it were shown at the meeting of the British Association at Bath. (Chem. News, LVIII, 272.) The action of micro-organisms upon nitrie acid.—Upon cultivating thirty-two species of micro-organisms in sterilized solutions containing nitrates, Percy Frankland found a great difference in their power of re- ducing nitric to nitrous acid. Sixteen or seventeen of the species pro- duced the reduction more or less completely, while the remaining fifteen or sixteen were quite destitute of the power. In no case did the redue- ing action lead to the formation of any noteworthy amount of ammonia. With two of the more powerful organisms the quality of nitrate reduced to nitrite in a given time was found to depend on the proportion of or- ganic matter—peptone and sugar—present in the solution; the peptone exerting far more influence than the sugar. None of the organisms ex- amined were.capable of oxidizing ammoniacal nitrogen—present as ammonium chloride—to nitric or nitrous acids. (Journ. Chem. Soce., L111, 373.) The same subject is also discussed by Warington, who made numer- ous experiments with pure cultures. He studied their action upon urea, upon milk, and upon nitrates, using in all twenty seven micro-organ- isms, many of them being well known as pathogenic. Considering his own results in connection with those of Frankland and others, as re- . — | | } | | : 3 ——- CHEMISTRY. 453 gards the nitrifying power of organisms, he coneludes that no one who has worked with isolated bacteria has obtained more than a mere trace of nitric or nitrous acid in ammoniacal solutions. On the other hand, the mixed organisms present in arable soil produce distinet and com- plete nitrification in ammoniacal liquids containing twenty-five parts of nitrogen in the million. Of twenty-five organisms studied, sixteen re- duced nitrates with considerable vigor, and seven were entirely destitute of reducing capacity. The reduction was from nitrates to nitrites, and not to nitrogen. (Journ. Chem. Soe., Lill, 727.) The chemistry of fish. Atwater has published in the form of a pvre- liminary notice the results of his elaborate analyses of the flesh of American food-fishes. One hundred and twenty-two specimens belong- ing to fifty-two species were examined, together with two European fishes, and an account of the methods of analysis is included in the statement. The results are given in the form of elaborate tables, which are not suitable for abstraction. (Amer, Chem. Journ., 1x, 421, and x, 1.) MINERALOGY FOR 1887 AND 1888. By EDWARD S. DANA. GENERAL WORK IN MINERALOGY. The wide interest felt during the last few years in the general sub- ject of microscopical mineralogy, and the advance made in this field, are well shown by the number of new works that have recently ap- peared which are devoted to this line of research. It has been in the allied department of petrography that the work has been most actively done and the progress made, but the result has been to bring about a most important advance in the instruments and methods of study ap- plied to mineralogy proper. The worksof Rosenbusch and Zirkel, (1873,) were the pioneers in this direction, and since then the workers have been many and the progress made rapid. A second edition of the work of Rosenbusch was published in 1885, and now an English edition! has been given to students in this country and England by J. P. Iddings. In this translation the original work appears in somewhat abridged form, but not so much so as to diminish its value, while making it rather more convenient of use. All that is essential has been retained, in- cluding the large number of fine plates of microphotographs. Another work of similar character is that of Rutley.2. The methods of studying minerals with the microscope are given systematically, with the charac- ters especially of those species which enter into the fermation of rocks. A book of rather wider scope and more profound character is that of Michel-Lévy and Lacroix.’ The first author has already made impor- tant contributions in this field, and the Mineralogie micrographique by Fouqué and M.-Lévy (1879) is one of the most exhaustive memoirs that has been published. In the present volume the author introduces some of the results of his former labors; for instance, on the variation of the 1 Microscopical Physiography of Rock-making Minerals, and aid to the Microscopi- eal study of Rocks, by H. Rosenbusch. Translated and abridged for use in schools and colleges, by Joseph P. Iddings. 333 pp., 26 plates. New York, 1886. J. Wiley & Sons. 2Rock-forming Minerals, by Frank Rutley, F. G. S. 252 pp. London, 1888. Thomas Murby. 2Les Minéraux des Roches: (1) Application des méthodes minéralogiques et chi- miques & leur étude microscopique, par A. Michel-Lévy; (2) Données physiques et optiques, par A. Michel-Lévy et Alf, Lacroix. 334 pp. Paris, 1888. Baudry & Cie. 455 456 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. angle of extinction in crystal sections cut in different directions, and other related subjects. The first part is thus theoretical ; the second gives a concise summary of the characters, chiefly physical, of rock- making mineral species. This part of the work contains many original observations by the authors of the optical constants, indices of refrac- tion, absorption, and soon. Rosenbusch has also issued a set of tables giving in compact form the microscopical characters of all important# minerals;' these will be found of great Sugren use by the worker in this line of research. Related to the works mentioned is that of Teall on British Petrog- raphy, an extended and well illustrated volume, but tooexclusively pet- rographical to call for more than simple mention. Other important pet- rographical works are those of Rosenbusch (Die massigen Gesteine, 1887) and Roth (Allg. und chemische Geologie, vol. 2, 1887). The work of Goldschmidt? on Crystallography and the forms of erys- talline minerals is without question the most extended which has ever been undertaken in this field. ‘The author has developed a new sys- tem of crystallographic notation, simply related to those in common use, and designed to exhibit especially the relations of the forms of a erys- tal as given in the projection, In connection he hasdeveloped a method f calculation adapted to this notation, and further has given athorough - discussion of the various systems that have been in use from the éar- liest time down. This forms the first half of the first volume, after which begins the work proper, namely, the catalogne for each species of all the planes that have been observed with the literature, the letters and other notation of different authors, the equations for transforma. tion,andsoon. The species are arranged alphabetically, and the whole work is to consist of three large volumes. The working mineralogist will profit to no small degree from the author’s labors, though the fact that neither figures nor angies are given, and that theoretical consid- erations have often led to a variation from the commonly accepted method for the orientation of the crystals of a species will restrict its usefulness. Several volumes on local mineralogy have recently appeared. The Russian Mineralogy* of von Kokscharof has now entered upon its tenth volume, and although the veteran author celebrated his fiftieth anni- versary of active service in 1887 he is still carrying forward his labors with vigor. The present state of knowledge in regard to the mineralogy of India is well peSsentod by F. R. Mallet,‘ in a volume devoted to this PeTatetanenen zur aiiinae Benin Arnos ee Rime} in Menu tnan Stuttgart, 1888. 2Index der Krystallformen der Mineralien, vol. 1, 1886; vol. m1, Nos. 1-4, 1888; vo). 111, Nos. 1-3, 1888. 3 Materialien zur Mineralogie Russlands, von N. von Kokscharow, 1888, vol. 10, pp. 1-224, 4A Manual of the Geology of India, part 1v, Mineralogy (mainly non- econanE by F. R. Mallet, 179 pp., with 4 plates. Calcutta, 1888. ™ MINERALOGY. ADT subject, and forming volume Iv of the Geology of India. Except in certain special directions, the mineral wealth of this country is but par- tially developed, and much remains to be done, particularly on the scientific side. Progress will be stimulated and directed by this excel- lent volume. eS ee ANTHROPOLOGY. 533 CALDWELL, R. On demonology in southern India. J. Anthrop.Soc., Bombay, I. CAMPBELL, GEORGE. Theracesof India. Rev.inJ. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), xvi, 289-290. CAMPBELL, S. G. Zulu witch doctors. Glasgow Med. J., 4.s. Canadian Record of Science (The), Montreal. Quarterly. Replaces the Canadian Nat- uralist. Vol.i, in 1887. CANAL. Marnia. (Lalla-Marghnia.) Rev. de l’ Afrique francaise, 213-227, 1887, figs. CANDOLLE, ALPHONSE DE. Les types brun et blond au point de vue de la santé. Rev. @anthrop., 3. s., 11, 265-274. Nouvelles recherches sur le type sauvage de la pomme de terre. Arch. se. phys. et nat., 3. s., xv, No.5. Biblioth. universelle. Genéve, 15 mai, 1886. CANESTRINI, G. Anthropologia. 2. ed. Milano (1888), 232 pp., 12mo. CAPPELLI,G. La calotta cranica di Donizetti. Arch. ital. per le mal. nerv., Milano, Xxfy, 135-153. CARGUET ET TOPINARD. Contribution a l’anthropologie de la Basse-Bretagne, la popula- tion de Vancien pagus Cap Sizun (pointe du raz). Rey. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., iii, 159-168. CARLEs, W. R. Life in Corea. London, 1888, MacMillan. II]. and maps. CARPENTER, W. H. Old Norse bibliography. Mod. Language Notes, Feb. (See Johns, Hopkins Cireulars, No. 57.) CASTAING. Croyances sur la vie d’outretombe chez les anciens Péruviens. Arch. Soe. Amér. de France. No. 2. Les populations de la Russie. Le Muséon. Louvain, v1, 31-49. CASTELFRANCO, PoMPEO. Les villages lacustres et palustres et les terremares. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 111, 568-587; 607-619; 707-719. Paléoethnologie italienne. Les fonds de Cabane. Rev. d’anthrop., Paris, 1887, 182-200. CATAT, Louts. Les habitants du Darien méridionel. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, 1888, VII, 397-421, 6 ills. CATTELL, J. McK. The time it takes to think. Nineteenth Cent., Lond., xx, 827- 830. CAUVIN. Anatomie et physiologie anthropologiques des Hindous. Mém. Soe. d’an- throp., Paris, 2. s., 11, 430-442. CenTorIze, RAFFAELE. L’ uomo preistorico sul Monte Gargano e sulle rive del Lago di Lesina in Capitanata, Sanseverino, 1888, 41. [Rev. in Arch. per l’ antrop., Fi- renze (1888), XVIII, 281-282. ] CHAILLE, 8S. E. Infants, their chronological progress. N.Orl. M. and 8. J.,n.s., XIv, 893-912. Also, reprint. CHALLEMEL. Saperstitions médicales. J. de méd et chir. prat., Paris, 1888, lix, 479. Also, Gaz. hebd. d. sc. méd., Bordeaux, 1888, 1x, 495-497. CHALMERS, JAMES. Pioneering in New Guinea. Religious Tract Society. Nature, XXXVI, 255. CHAMBERLAIN, A. F. Notes on the history, customs, and beliefs of the Mississagua Indians. J. Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 150-160. CHAMBERLAIN, BAsiL HALL. Note on the Japanese Go-hei, or paper offerings to the Shinto Gods. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1838), xvri1, 27-29, 1 pl. The language, mythology, and geographical nomenclature of Japan viewed in the light of Aino studies. Mem. Lit. College. Imp. Univ. Jap., Tokyo, Japan, 1887. [Rev. in Nature, XXXVI, 25. ] CHAMBES. Les populations indigénes entre le Haut-Sénégal et le Haut-Niger. Rev. san. de Bordeaux, Iv, 112; 177. CHANTRE, E. Les laboratoires et les collections anthropologiques publiques de I’ Italie en 1886. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop., Lyon, 163-165. 534 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. CHANTRE, E. Recherches anthropologiques dans le Caucase. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Par., 1888, 3. s., XI, 198-221. Also, Paris, 1885-7, Reinwald, 5 vols., 130 pl., 4to. [ Rev. in Rev. d’ethnog., v1, 470-489. ] CHAPIN, H. D. Social and physiological inequality. Pop. Sc. Month., Xxx, 757-765, 1887. CHARENCY, H. DE. Textes en langue tarasque. Rev. in Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, v1, 491. CHARNAY, D&éstrr&. A propos de Tamoanchan. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, v1, 347-350. Expédition au Yucatan. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 65-78. Monnaie de cuivre en Amérique avant la conquéte. Bull. d.1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., x, 237-240. The ancient cities of the new world, being voyages and explorations in Mexico and Central America from 1857 to 1882. New York: Harpers. 209 ill., map, 8mo. ® CHARVEY. Essai de reconstitution d’époque et d’origine d’un mors de bride antique conservé au musée de Naples. Bull. d.1. Soc. d’anthrop. de Lyon, v1, 179-182, pl. vViI-x, 1887. CHATELLIER, P. pu. Tumulus emblématiques de l’Amé¢rique du Nord. Matériaux, 3.8., Paris, 1887, 1x, 274-280, pl. CuaAuvet, G. Etude préhistorique. Les débuts de la gravure et de la sculpture. Melle: Lacuve, 1887, br. in-8, fig. CHAVERO, ALF. Historia antiqua y de la Conquista. México 4 través de los siglos. Vol. 1. México: Ballesea, pl. and figs., 4to. CHUDZINSKI ET MANOUVRIER. Etude sur le cerveau de Bertillon. Bull. d. 1. Soe. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 558-591. Buste d’une jeune Cynghalaise. Bull. d.1.Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3.s., x, 146- 148. Sur un os surnuméraire du pied. Bull. d.1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3.s., x, 603- 605. Quelques notes sur la splanchnologie des races humaines. Rev. d’anthrop., Paris, 3: s., II, 275-290. CHURCHWARD, WILLIAM B. My consulate inSamoa. London: Bentley & Son. CLAIRIN, EM. Notice biographique de Jean-Charles Geslin. Vitry-le-Francois, 1887, br., 8vo. CLARKE, F. W., and G. P. MERRILL. On Nephrite and Jadeite. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mu- seum, 1888, Wash., 115-130, 1 pl. CLARKE, J. M. Report on bones of Mastodon or Elephas found in association with hu- man relics in the village of Attica, Wyoming Co., N. Y., 1888. Albany, James B. Lyon, p. 7. CLARKE, W.B. Supernumerary auricles. Illust. M. News, Lond., 1888, 1, 321. CLELAND, J. Rational teratology. Brit. Med. J., 11, 346-348. CLEMENT, E. Ethnographie et démographie lyonnaises. Lyon méd., Lv1, 361; 394; 591. CLERKE, A. M. Homeric astronomy. Nature, XXXy, 585-588. CLERMONT-GANNEAU C. Deux inscriptions inédites de la Phénice propre. Ann. du mus¢ce Guimet, X, 503-516, et pl. xIx—xx (1887). CLosMADEUC, Dr M. Fouilles sous le dallage du monument intérieur de Gavr’inis, Morbihan). Bull. d. 1. Soc. @’anthrop., Paris, 3.s., x, 10-13. CockBuRN, J. On paleolithic implements from the drift gravels of the Singrauli Ba- sin, South Mirzapore. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., XviI, 57-65. CopRINGTON, R.H. A Folk-tale from New Hebrides. Archiol Rev., Lond., 11, 90. CoLAJANNI, NAPOLEONE. La sociologia criminale. 1 vol. Catania, 1889, 1 vol., pp. 505, e una grande tavola. [Rev.in Arch. per d’antrop., Firenze (1888), 288-290. ] CoLLIGNoN, RéNE. Carte de répartition de | indice céphalique en France. Bull. d.1. Soc, d’anthrop., Paris, 3, s., X, 306-312. ANTHROPOLOGY. 535 CoLiiGNon, RENG; Etude sur Vethnographie géiérale de la Tunisie. Bull. de Géog. hist. et desériptivé, 1886, Nos. 1-5: Paris: Leroux. L’inscription'de temia découverte par le capitaine Lefevre; contribution 41’ étude des Ainos. Rev. @ethnov:, vit, Paris, 1888, pp. 449-454, 1 ill. La nomenclature quinaire de lindice nasal du vivant. Rev. @anthrop., 3. s., Li, 8-9. E. Houzé. La taiile, la circonférence thoracique et l’angle xiphoidien des Fla- mands et des Wallons (avec une carte). Rev. d’antbrob:, Par. (1888), 3° s.,' 111, 359-361. E. Morselli. Lecons sur Vhomme suivant la théorie de l’évolution. (Lezioni sul’ uomo secondo la teoria dell’ evoluzione.) Cours professé i V Université de Turin, 1887-1888. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 111, 373-374. Les Ages de la pierreen Tunisie. Matériaux, 3. s, Iv, 171-204, maps and plates. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., x, 460-461. LW’homme avant histoire, par Ch. Debierre. J. B. Bailliére (1888), 1 vol., in- 12. Rev. d’anthrop. (1888), 3. s., 111, 77. Vianna de Lima: L’homme selon le transformisme, 1 vol. de la Bibl. de philo- sophie contemporaine. Paris, F. Alcan, 1888. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 111, 477-479. G. J. Romanes. L’intelligence des animaux, 2 vol. de la Bibl. scientifique in- ternationale. Paris, F. Alcan. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 111, 736-740. Répartition de la couleur des yeux et des cheveux chez les Tunisiens sédentaires. Rev. d’anthrop., 3. s., 11, 1-8. (COMBEMALE, F. La déscendance des alcooliques. Montpei. (1888), Coulet, 213 pp., 8vo. (CONDER, C. R. Hittite ethnology. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., xv11, 137-158. Congrés international d’anthropologie criminelle. Rome, 1885. Actes published in Rome, 1886-1887. Congrés international d’anthropologie et d’archéologie préhistoriques. Compte rendu de la 8. session 4 Budapest, 1876. Budapest (1887). Vol. 11, partie 2. in 8vo. L’ouvrage complet (2 vols.) M. Congrés international des Américanistes. vi° session. Turin. Président, Ariodante Fabretti. Matériaux, 3. s., Iv, 39-41. Cons, H. Le bassin du Niger. Union géog. du nord de la France. Bull. x1, 128- 143, 1887. Cook, PIZARRO. Effigy mounds on the Kickapoo River. Am. Antiquarian, x, 175-177. Cork, E. D. Origin of the Fittest. London: Macmillan & Co., 1887. Reviewed in Nature, XXXVI, 505. D. Appleton & Co., 486 pp., 5 pl. The relation of the sexes to government. Pop. Sc. Month., xxxut, 721-730. CopLAs. A la engarnacion y nacimiento de Nuestro Sefior Jesu Christo. Rev. de Ling., Par. (1888), x x1, 64-65. CorpiEk, H. La grammaire chinoise du Pére Francisco Varo. Paris: Maison neuve, 1887, br. in-8. Les sociétés seerétes chinoises. Rey. d’ethnog., v1, 52-72. CorRADI, A. Della longevita in relazione alla storia, all’ antropologia ed all’ igiene. Ann. uniy. di med. e chir., Miiano, ccLXxt, 161-199. Also, transl.: Rev. internat. d. sc. méd; Par., rv, 405-414. CorkE, A. Les peuples du Rio Nunez, W. Africa. Mém. Soe. d’anthrop., Paris, 2. s., Il, 42-73. Correspondenzblatt der deutschen Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte. Miinich: Johannes Ranke. Vol. Xviit in 1887, monthly, 4to. “Corson, E. R. The future of the colored race in the United States, from an ethnic and medical standpoint. N. York M. Times, xv, 193-201. 536 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. CorTINA, CARLO A. Cesare Lombroso e la nuove dottrine positiviste in rapporto al diritto penale. Torino, 1888, Petrini, 28 pp., 8vo. CosMos, GUIDO Cora’s. Torino: Guido Cora. Vol. 1x, 1886-’88. Cosmos, Revue des sciences et de leurs applications. Paris: By the Journal. Founded in 1850, 37th year in 1887, weekly, 8vo. Coupreau, H. A. La France ¢quinoxiale. Voyage A travers les Guyanes et l’ Ama- zonie. Paris, Challamel, 1887, 2 vols., 8vo. La Haute-Guyane. Rey. d’ethnog., vil, Paris, 1888, pp. 455-481. Courtes, L. Le musée Guimet. Rey. d’anthrop., 1887, 476-482. CouRTNEY, Miss. ‘‘ Cornish Folk-Lore.’? Folk-Lore Journal. (Vol. v, Parti.) 1887. CowLes, EpwArpD. Insistent and fixed ideas. Am. J. Psychol., 222-270. CRANE, T. F. The diffusion of popular tales. J. Am. Folk-Lore. New York, 1, 8-15 (1888). CREMER, MAX. Ueber das Schitzen von Distanzen bei Bewegung von Arm und Hand. Wirzb., 1887, A. Menninger, 36 pp., 8vo. CULLIMORE, D. H. Ona tropical and subtropical climates, and the acclimatisation of the fair races in hot countries. Med. Press and Cire., London, n.s., XLVI, 436; 461. Cuyer, Epovuarp. Forme d’une région du poignet dans lasupination et la pronation. Différence de saille des métacarpiens sur le squelette et sur ’écorche. Bull. d.1. Soc. d’anthrop., Par., 1888, Par., 421-430, 9 figures. CULIN, SriwaArt. Chinain America: A study in the social life of the Chinese in the eastern cities of the United States. Phila., 1887, 16 pp., 1 map, 8vo. CUMMING, Miss C.F.GoRDON. Strange medicines. Pop.Sc. Month., XX XI, 750-767. CUNNINGHAM, Development of the brain and cranio-cerebral topography. Royal Irish Academy of Medicine, May, 1888. CUNYNGHAME, H. The present state of education in Egypt. J. R.A.S., Xrx, 223. Curr, E.M. The Australian race; its origin, languages, customs, place of landing in Australia, and the routes by which it spread itself over that continent. Melbourne (1888), 46 pp., w. color map. 4 vols. CURRAN, W. The senses of savages. J. Anat. and Physiol., Lond., x x1, 558-570. CuRTIN, J. Paper on folk-lore of Ireland. Anthrop. Soc. of Washington, 1888. Na- ture, p.473. (Vol. 37.) Cust, R. N. Linguistic and oriental essays from 1847-1887. London: Triibner, xiv-+ 548 pp. 8vo. Original vocabularies of five west Caucasian languages. J. Roy. Asiat. Soc., Lond., x1x, 145 (1887). The modern languages of Oceanica. J.R.A.S., XX1, 369-392. Cuyrr, Epovarp. Sur un allongement anormal du cubitus et sar la présence d’un muscle rond pronateur chez un cheval. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 701-704. Sur un os surnuméraire du corps humain. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3.8., X, 303-306. D’Acy, E. De Vemmanchement des silex tailles du type généralement connu sous le nom de type de Saint-Acheul ou de Chelles. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Par., 3. s., X, 158; 219-223. D'AGUANNO, GIUSEPPE. Concetto ed origine del diritto di successione. Studii di sociologia comparata. Milano-Torino, 1888, pp. 38. [Rev. in Arch. per I’ antrop., Firenze (1838), XvI1l, 287-288. ] Datiy, M. Aphasie congénitale chez un enfant de quatre anset demi. Bull. d. 1. Soe. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., x, 320-323. De la sélection ethnique et de la consanguinité chez les Grees anciens. Rey. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., 11, 408-444. Day, Dominic D. Digging, squatting, and pioneering life in the northern territory of South Australia. London: Sampson Low, 1887. Rev. in Nature, XXXVI, 363. . roe ee ee ee ee ee ee ANTHROPOLOGY. 5ST Daty, Dominic D. Native life in British Borneo. Pop. Se. Month., N. Y., XXXIV, 246-251. DANFORTH, GRACE. A law of heredity, or possibly maternal impressions. Texas Cour. Rec. Med., Dallas, 1888-9, v1, 79-81. DANKS, BENJAMIN. Theshell-money of New Britain. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), XVIII, 305-317. Marriage customs of the New Britain group. J. Anthrop. Inst., London, 1888-9, XVIII, 281-294. : D’ ARBOIS DE JUBAINVILLE. Papers on the Celts. Revue Celtique, vil, 2; 129. DARESTE, M. Compte rendu de l’autopsie d’un veau, presénté dans la séance du 24 février. Bull. d.1.Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 185-186. - Coutume contemporaine et loi primitive. J. des savants, March and May, 1887. —— - Les veaux 4 téte de bouledogne. Bull d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 875- 383. Dausts, M. Guyor. Variations in human stature. Pop. Sc. Month., XXXI, 314-323, ill., 1887. DAVEGNO, F. Le superstizioni de Portofino (Liguria, riviera di levante). Arch. per. 1’ antrop., Firenze, 1888, XVIII, 83-90. Davis, J. A. Feetal measurements. Univ. M. Mag., Phila., 1, 101. DE ALBERTIS. Le tatouagesur 300 prostituces liguriennes. Arch. d. psichiat., sc. pen. ed antrop., 1888, 1x, fase. 6. : Cas de tatouage chez une femme. Actes Cogr. internat. d’anthrop, crim., 1885, Rome, 1, 456-458. DEANS, JAMES. The feast of Ne-kilst-luss, the raven god. A tradition of the Queen Charlotte Haidas. Am. Antiquar., Mendon, Ill. (1888), x, 583. The raven’s place in the mythology of Northwestern America. Am. Antiquar., Mendon, Ill. (1888), x, 273-278. What befell the slave-seekers. J. Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 123-124. DEBIERRE, CH. L’homme avant Vhistoire. Paris (1888), Bailliére. Decazes, E. L’Ouest Africain. Bull. Soc. Norm. Géog., Rouen. DenHousseEr. De Vindex et de lannulaire. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop. de Paris, 1888, 3. s., XI, 449-451. DELISLE, F. Note sur une fouille faite au champ du double-d’or. Bull. de la Soe. d’anthrop., Paris, 3.s., X, 774-777. DELPINO, FEDERICO. II passato, il presente e 1’ avvenire della psicologia. Bologna, 1888. [Rev. in Arch. per. 1’ antrop., Firenze (1888), Xvi, 290-291. DeMpsTER, Miss. The folk-lore of Sutherlandshire. The Folk-Lore Jour., Lond. (1888), vi, pt. iv, 215-252. . DENIKER, J. Emile Schmidt. Methodes anthropologiques; instructions pour collec- tionner et observer en voyage et au laboratoire. (Anthropologische Methoden; An- leitung zum Beobachten und Sammeln fiir Laboratorium und Reise.) Leipzig, 1888, in-8 vo, 3 pp., avec figs. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 111, 611-616. Le pr¢éhistorique en Allemagne. Rey. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 111, 59-72. Les populations turques en Chine et plus spécialement les Daldes. Bull. de la Soc. @anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 206-210. Rapport de la commission pour l'étude des echantillons de cheveux rapportés par M. de Ujfalvy de son voyage dans l’Inde. Bull d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., x, 516-518 DEPERET, CHARLES. Note sur la Faune de Vert¢brés Miocénes. Matériaux, 3. s., TV, 53-56. DESCHAMPS, ALBERT. Les névroses et le pessimisme. Paris, 1888, Doin, 38 pp., 18mo. DESCHMANN, K. Bronzesachen von der Kulpa. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch f. An- throp., Berlin, 1888, 246. DESHMUKH, M. G. On the habits of a Jain Ascetic. J. Anthrop. Soc. Bombay, I. 538 RECORDOF SCIENCE FOR 1888 AND 1888. DETMER, W. Zum Problem der Vererbung. Thiermed. Rundschau, Halle, 11, 121-124, 133-135, 203-215. Deutsche anthropologische Gesellschaft. XVII. general meeting in Stettin, 10-12 Aug., Correspondenz-Blatt, Xvit, 33-94. DEEVZE, GERARD. Cakuntala, traduction de la version tamoule. Rev. de Ling., Paris, XX, 352-376; XXI, 48-53. Dewey, JOHN. Psychology. Rev. in Am. Journal of Psychology. Baltimore, 1, 146- 59a Dickens, F. V. Aino hairiness and the urvolk of Japan. Nature, XXXV, 534. - The story of the old Bamboo Hewer. J. R. A. S., X1x, Art. I. ; Dictionnaire des sciences anthropologiques. Publié sous la direction de MM. Ad. Ber- tillon, Condereau, ete. etc. Paris. Dictionnaire Universel, Paris. Dicut, C. F. Measurements from skulls of the seventh century. J. Am. Med. Ass., Chicago, VIII, 205. Discussion sur la craniométrie. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 659-687. DISSELHORST, RUDOLF. Studien tiber Emigration. Halle a. S., 1887, 22 pp., 8vo. DoLBESCHEFF, W. J. Archiologische Forschungen im Bezirk des Terek (Nordkau- kasus). Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., Berl., x1x, 101-118. DoNALDSON, HENRY H. On the relation of neurology to psychology. Am. J. Psychol., IT, 209-221. Do6nirz, W. Vorgeschichtliche Graber in Japan. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- throp., 1887, 114-126. Donner, Dr. De l’intoxication professionnelle des dégustateurs de vins et de liqueurs. Rey. in Am. Jour. of Psychology, Baltimore, I, 194-195. Dorsey, J. OWEN. Abstracts of Ponka and Omaha myths. J. Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), i, 74-78; 204-208. Omaha songs. Ibid., 209-214. A Teton Dakota ghost story. J. Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 68-72. Books on Myths and Mythology. Am. Antiquarian, Ix, 40, 41; 173, 174. Osage traditions. vi. An. Rept. Bur. Ethnol., 1888, pp. 373-397, 1 fig. Songs of the Heucka Society. J. Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 65-68. The Orphan Myth. Am. Antiquarian, Ix, 95-97. DRAMANT, Mrs. The Folk-Lore of Guillim. Antiquary, London, xy, 149-155. DRAPER, LYMAN ©. Forman’s journey down the Ohio and Mississippi in 1789-90. [Rev. in Am. Antiquar., Chicago (1888), x, 396. ] DRAUTREMER, J. L’Ile de Kiou Siou. Bull. Soc. d’Ethnog., Paris, 2. s. 1, 88-98. Drews, R. Ueber das Mongolenauge als provisorische Bildung bei deutschen Kindern und tiber den Epicanthus. Arch. f. Anthrop., Braunschwg., 1888-9, XVIII, 223-233. DrRovet, Fr. Grande Kabylie. Excursion chez les Beni-Yenni. Bull. Soc. Normande: de Géog., 212-240, 1887. DunoussEr, E. Les races humaines de la Perse. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, v1, 400-413. DuKA, THEODORE. An essay on the Brahti Grammar, after the German of the late Dr Trumpp, of Munich. J. R. A. Soc., n.s.,XIx, 59, 1887. DUMONTIER, G. Le Nam-giao de Hanoi. Rev. d’ethnog., Par., vi, 181-184. Les textes Sanscrits au Tonkin. Rev. d’ethnog., v1, 23-38. Notes sur le bouddhisme tonkinois. L’enfer. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, 1888, VI, 285-301. Dun, W. A. The police standard of Cincinnati. Cincin. Lancet, n.s, XVI, 151-135; 767-769. DuRAFFOURG, V. Béja et ses environs. Bull. Soc. de Géog. de Lille, vir, 214-240, 1887. DURAND, M. Ethnolegie du Rouergue. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop., Par., 3. s., XI (1888), 138-156. DuRtvAu, A. Le bec-de-liévre. Kev. in Rev. d’anthrop’, Paris, 3. s., 11, 290-292. ANTHROPOLOGY. 539 DURKHEIM, E. Suicide et natalité. Rev. phil., Paris, xxv1, 446-463. DuVAL, Mararas. Installation d’un laboratoire de transformisme au pare de Mont- souris. Proposition deClémence Royer. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 525-526. L’aphasie depuis Broca. Bull. d. 1. Soe. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., x, 743-771. Dwiacut, T. The range of variation of the human shoulder-blade. Am. Naturalist, Phila., XxXI, 627-638, 2 pl. EDKINS, J. Connection of Japanese with the adjacent continental languages. ‘Tr. As. Soe. Japan, Xv, 96-102. Origin of Chinese words in natural sounds. Ztschr, f. allg. Sprachwissensch., Ill, 276-285. Philological importance of geographical terms in the Shi-ki. J. China Br. R. AG Se SOX I9—20e. Priority of labial letters illustrated in Chinese phonetic. J. R. A.S., x1x, 207- 229 ae EDWARDs, BLANCHE. Fracture intra-utérine des deux tibias et syndactylie ou ectro- dactylie concomitante. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, x, 299-302. EpwWarps, C. L. Winter roosting colonies of crows. Am. J. Psychol., 1, 436-459. Rides and studies in the Canary Islands. London: Unwin. 380 pp., 8vo. EELLS, M. Decrease of population among the Indians of Puget Sound. Am. Anti- quarian, IX, 271. The Indians of Puget Sound. Am. Antiquarian, Ix, 1-9; 97-104; 211-219 (1887). EHRENREICH, P. Ueber die Botocudos der brasilianischen Provinzen Espiritu Santo und Minas Geraes. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., Berl., x1x, 1; 49, 2 pl. Exxtiorr, A. M. Speech mixture in French Canada. Am. J. Philol., vitr, 133-157. ELuis, A. B. The Tshi-speaking peoples of the gold coast of West Africa; their re- ligion, manners, customs, laws, language, etc. London (1887), 340 pp.. 8vo. ELTON, F. Notes on natives of the Solomon Islands. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., xvn, 90-99. ELy, RIicHARD T. Political economy in America. N. A. Review, Feb.; also Labor Organizations, The Forum, March. EMERSON, E. Man in relation to the lower animals. Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., XXXII, 751-754. EMIN, PASHA. Collection of letters and journals. Central Africa. Edited by Schwein- furth, Ratzel, Felkin & Harlaub. London (1888), Geo. Philip & Son. Nature, RRKVI, 56a: Egnmepis Apyaiodoyinn. Journal ofthe Archeological Society in Athens, 1886, vol. 1. Vv. EREKERT R. Der Kaukasus und seine Volker. Nach eixener Anschauung. Mit Text- abbildungen und Lichtdrucken, kurzen tabellarischen Resultaten linguistischer und anthropologischer Forschungen, und einer ethnographischen Karte des Kaukasus. Leipzig (1887), Frohberg. 385 pp. &vo. ERMAN, A. Das friihzeitige Auftreten von Eisen in Aegypten. Verhandl. d. Berl. Ge- sellsch. f. Anthrop., 1888, 180. Ernst, A. Rio Tigre und Rio Conejo. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Berl., 1888, 274-278. ——— Ueber einen Motilonen-Schiidel aus Venezuela. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Berl., 296-301. ERRERA, LEO. Pourquoi dormons-nous? Bull. Soc. d’anthrop. de Bruxelles, v, 249- 281; Rev. Scient., Paris, xL, 105-114. ERRINGTON DE LA Crorx, J. Latombe Maoriau Musée du Trocadero. Nature, Par., Xv, 297-299. ESTHENAUER, M. Chevelure en vadrouille. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3.s., X, 418. 540 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. EsTREY, MEYNERS D’. Tribus aborigénes du centre de Celebes. Les Topautunuasu. [ Rev. in Rev. d’Ethnog., Paris, v1, 163-164. Ethnographische Studien tiber Alt-Serbien. Mitth. d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, n. F., vil, 182-190. Ethnologische Mittheilungen aus Ungarn. Zeitschrift fiir die Volkskunde der Bewoh- ner Ungarns und seiner Nebenliinder. Budapest: Redaction. 1st year, 1887—’88 4to. Evans, A. J. Stonehenge. Archzol. Rev., Lond., 1888-89, 1, 312-330. Exposition de M. Joseph Martin, au Maaco ae Trocadero. [Rev. in Rev. d’Ethnog., Paris, VI, 503-508. Exposition rétrospective du travail et des sciences anthropoliques. (See plan and or- ganization of this exposition to be held in 1889, in Matériaux, 3. s., Iv, 480-486.) FALLotT, A. Note sur l’indice céphalique de la population provengale et plus particu- liérement Marsezillaise. Rev. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., 11, 129-135. FARAGO, G. Az ujsziilétt gyermekek nehany reflex. [Some reflections on new-born children (as to weight).| Gyogyaszat, Budapest, xxvil, 205. FARNELL, L. R. The origin and earliest development of Greek sculpture. Archveol. Rey., Lond., 11, 167-194. Faurort, L. Observations ethnographiques dans Vile de Kamarane. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, VI, 433-438. Observations ethnographiques sur les Danakils du golfe de Tadjoura. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, v1, 57-66. FAUVELLE, Dr. De la direction de la criniére comme caractéristique du tone cheval. Bull. de la Soc. @anthrop., Paris, 3. s., x, 706-707. De la philosophie au point de vue anthropologique. Mém. Soc. d’anthrop. de Paris, 2. s., 111, 376-390. Des causes d’erreur en anthropologie. Bull. de la Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 263-27 De ae oa des caractéres Ge l’appareil masticateur en anthropologie. Bull. Soe. d’anthrop. de Paris, 1888, 3. s., x1, 463-471. Des mystifications dans les sciences anthropologiques. L’Homme, Par.; Iv, 651-657. —— Le cheval sauvage de la Dzoungarie. Bull. d.1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X 188-193. Le systéme nerveux, la nervosité et l’intelligence considérés au point de vue physico-chimique. Bull. d.1.Soc. d’anthrop., Paris. 3. s., xX, 462-482, Quelques considérations sur l’évolution phylogénique des hémisphéres cérébraux de Vhomme. Bull. d. l. Soe. @’anthrop., Paris, 3. s., x, 104-118. Qu’est-ce que la psychologie physiologique. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, SP Sse 119-128; Recherche sur Vorigine ancestrale de homme a l’aide du systéme dentaire. L’Homme, Par., Iv, 545-552. Sur un point fixé pouvant servir de repére dans les mensurations craniennes. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop. de Par., 3. s., XI, 55-62. FAviEr, Henri. Le recrutement militaire dans les cantons de Saint-Omer. Rey. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 111, 42-48. FEATHERMAN, A. Social History of the Races of Mankind. Division II: Papuo-and Malayo-Melanesians. London (1887). 518 pp. 8vo. [Rev. by A. H. Keane, in Nature, XXXVI, 147. ] Fért, Cu. A contribution to the pathology of dreams and of hysterical paralysis. Rey. in Am. Jour. of Psychology, Baltimore, 1, 192. Dégénérescence et criminalité. Rev. phil., Par., XXIV, 337-377. Note sur les conditions physiologiques des émotions. Rey. phil., Par., XXIV, 561-581. stn line Sit eee lll ANTHROPOLOGY. 541 FERRI, E. Variations thermométriques et eriminalité. Arch. de l’anthrop. crim., Par., II, 3-22. Festschrift zur Begriissung des Xvill. Kongresses der deutschen anthropologischen Gesellschaft in Niirnbere. Niirnberg (1887), v. IEbners; 12 tables, 31 figures. FIELD, ADELE M. Chinese marriage customs. Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., XX XIv, 246- 2a. Chinese mortuary customs. Jdid., XXXIII, 569-596. FELLENBERG, E. von. Alte Schweizer-Hauser. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- throp., Berlin, 1888, 312-316. Jadeit bei Borgonuovo. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Berlin, 1888, 316. Fifth national convention of the bureaus of statistics of labor in the United States. [Rev. in the Jour. Roy. Statis. Soc., London, L, 735. ] Fink, H.T. ‘‘ Romantic Love and Personal Beauty.’’ London: Macmillan & Co., 1887, 2vols. [Rev. in Nature, xxxxtI, 149. ] Frnscu, O. Canoes und Canoebau in der Marshal-Inseln. Verband]. d. Berl. anthrop. Gesellsch., 22-29, 1887, 8vo.. Hausbau, Hiuser, und Siedelungen an der Siidostkdste von Neu-Guinea. Mit- theil. d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, xvii, 1-15. FISHER, C. H. Adjustable frames for taking facial measurements. Med. Rec., N. Y., KXXIV, 522. FISKE-BRYSON, Louise. Women and nature. N. York M. J., XLVI, 627. Fison, LoRIMER. The hew Norcia marriage laws. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), XVIII, 68-70. FLEMMING, W. Eine Karte des menschlichen Auges. Braunschweig, 1887. Am. J. Psychology, Baltimore, 1, 196. FLETCHER, ALICE C. Glimpses of child-life among the Omaha tribe of Indians. J. Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 115-123. FLINKER, A. Ueber den Farbensinn der Thiere. Wien med. Wochenschr., xXXvII, 273-277. FLINT, E. Paleolithicsin Nicaragua. Am. Antiquar., Mendon, Ill. (1888), x, 381, 382. FLOWER, WILLIAM HENRY. Description of two skeletons of Akkas, a Pygmy race from Central Africa. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), xv1ir, 3-19, 3 pl., also 73-91. Folk-Lore Journal. Published by the Folk-Lore Society. London: Elliot Stock, for the Folk-Lore Society, bimonthly, vol. vi in 1887. FoLMEr, A. Eene bijdrage tot de ethnology van Friesland. Nederl. Tijdschr. v. Ge- neesk., Amst., XXIII, 401-439. ForsusH. The Hindu doctrine of death and immortality. Unitar. Rev., Apr., 1888, 319-330. ForRRER, R. The copper age in Europe. Am. Antiquar., Mendon, Ill. (1888), x, 318- 321. FoRTIER, ALCEKE. Customs and superstitions in Louisiana. J.Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 136-140. Louisianian nursery-tales. J. Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 140-145. FouILLEE, ALFRED. The language of the emotions. Pop. Sc. Month., xxx1, 814- 824, FOovILLE, M. DE. The abuse of statistics. Jour. Roy. Statis. Soc. London, 1, 703- 708. FOWKE, GERARD. Brer Rabbit and Brer Fox. J.Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 148-149. The manufacture and use of aboriginal stone implements. 20 pp., 8vo. (n. d.) Foy, G. M. Idiosyncrasy. Dublin J. M. Se., LXxx1Iv, 197-202, 542 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. FRADENBURGH, I. N. Living religions, or the great religions of the Orient, from sacred books and modern customs. New York, 1888, Iv, 508 pp., 12 mo. FRAENKEL, M. O. Etwas tiber Schaidel-Asymmetrie und Stirnnaht. Neurol. Cen- tralbl., Leipz., vil, 438-442. FRAIPONT, J., et BRACONNIER. La poterie en Belgique de l’Age du mammouth. Rev. d@anthrop., 3. s., 111, 385-407. et M. LoHest. La race humaine de Néanderthal ou de Canstadt en Belgique (1887). (Lille, Bull. Scient.), 18 pp., 8vo. , Le tibia dans la race de Néanderthal; étude comparative de l’incurvation de la téte du tibia, dans ses rapports avec Ja station verticale chez homme et les anthro- poides. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 11, 145-158. Nouvelle exploration des cavernes d’Engis. Soc. Géol. de Belg., reported in Matériaux, 3. s., Iv, 163-165. FRANKLIN, CHRISTINE L. A method for the experimental determination of the hor- opter. Am. J. Psychol., 1, 99-111. FRAZER, JOHN. The aborigines of Australia; their ethnic position and relations. J. Trans. of Victoria Inst., Lond., 1888, xx11, 155-181. FRAZER, J. G. Folk-lore at Balquhidder. Folk-Lore Jour., Lond. (1888), v1, Iv, 268-271. Totemism. Edinburgh, Adam and Chas. Black. I vol., 1887. 16mo. FREICHEL. Pferdekopf und Storchschnabel in Westpreussen. Verhandl. d. Berl. Ge- sellsch. f. Anthrop., Berl., 1888, 295-297. FREMANTLE, CANON. Theology under changed conditions. Pop.Se. Month., xxx, 171-187. FRESHFIELD, D. W. The Suanetians and their home. Pop. Se. Month., N. Y., 1888-9, XX XIv, 380-385. FRIEDRICHS, K. Zur Matriarchaftsfrage. Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., Berlin, 1888, xx, 211- 216. FRERE, CH. Contribution to the pathology of dreams and of hysterical paralysis. Paris 1887. FRIGERIO, L. Caso di porencefalia posteriore destra da cause traumatica. Ann. univ., di med.e chir., Milano, cCLX XIX, 46-52. L’oreille externe; étude d’anthropologie criminelle. Arch. de Vanthrop. crim., Paris, III, 438-481. FritscH, A. Principien de Organisation der naturhistorischen Abtheilung des neuen Museums in Prag (1888). 8vo. Bemerkungen zur anthropologischen Haaruntersuchung. Verhandl. d. Berl. Ge- sellsch. f. Anthrop., 1888, 187-199. FROTHINGHAM, A. L. The deyelopment and character of Mohammedan education. Proc. Am. Orient. Soc., Oct., 1688, 114-116. FROTHINGHAM, A.L., Jr. A proto-Ionic Capital and Bird-worship. Am. J. Archzol., Il, 57-61. FuLLER, E. M. Pedigree in health and disease. Tr. Maine M. Ass., Portland, 189-210. FURTWANGLER, A. Studien iiber die Gemmen mit Kiinstlerinschriften. Jahrb. d. k. deutsch. archzol. Inst. Berlin, 111, 193-224. GACHE, 8. Antropologia criminal. An. d. Cire. méd. argent., Buenos Ayres, x, 404— 414. Garpoz, H., et PAUL SfBiLLoT. Bibliographie des traditions et de la littérature popu- laire des Frances d’Outre-Mer. Rev. de Ling., Par. (1888), x x1, 105-144. GAILLARD, F. Du tumulus de Kerlescan a Carnac, de son acquisition et de sa restaura- tion. Bull. de la Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3.s., x, 687-693. Les dolmens de Kergo en Carnac. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop.; Paris, 1888, 3. s., XI, 430-433. Observations sur le complément de la restauration du tumulus de Kerlescan. Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Par., 1888, 461-463. se ANTHROPOLOGY. 543; GALIBERT, T. Au pays des Manjaques. Ann. de 1’Extr. Orient et de 1’ Afrique, 65- 74, 143-149, 180-185. GALLIPPE, V. La droiterie et la gaucherie, sont-elles fonction de l’éducation ou de Vhérédité ? Compt. rend. Soe. de biol., Par., 8.s., 1V, 519-529, Also, Gaz. d. hop... LX, 953; 1062. GALTON, FRANCIS. Anthropometric statistics from Amherst College, Mass. J. Anthrop.. Inst., London, xv1it, 192-199. Co-relations and their measurement, chiefly from anthropometric data. Proc. Roy.. Soc., Lond., 1888, xiv, 135-145. Exhibition of an ancient Peruvian gold breast-plate. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond.,, 1888-9, XvIII, 274. Human variety. Nature, Lond., 1888—’89, xxxIx, 296-300. List of Anthropometric apparatus. Cambridge Scientific Instrument Co. Nature,, 1837, pp. 615, vol. 36. Note on Australian marriage system. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), Xv1II,, 70-72. On head growth in students at the University of Cambridge. J. Anthrop. Inst.,, \ Lond. (1888), xviiJ, 155-156. 1 pl. d/so, Nature, Xxxvit, 14. Personal identification and description. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), xvrtt,, 177-191, 8 ills. Also, Nature, Lond., XxxXviII, 173; 201. GARDNER, JOHN LESLIE. The Legends of Jamched Quetzalcoat]. Am. Antiquar.,, Mendon, II]. (1888), x, 285-291. GARDNER, PERCY. Catalogue of Greek Coins. [Vol. x, Cat. Greek Coins in Brits Mus.] London: Longmans, etc., Ixiv-+250 pp., 8vo. GARMAN, SAMUEL. An Andean Medal. Bull. Essex Inst. (1888), xx, 1-4, 2 ills. GAROFALO, R. L’anomalie du criminel. Rev. phil., Par., x x11, 225-261. GARSON, J. G. Observations on Recent Explorations made by General Pitt-Rivers at: Rushmore. Wature, Xxxvi, 600. ~ Skulls from the Hindu Kush district. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), xv111, 20-26. Gason,S. The Dieyerie tribe, South Australia. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), XVIII, 94-95. : GATSCHET, A. S. Bibliography of Gatschet’s writings in Pilling’s Bibliographies, Bu- reau of Ethnology, Washington. Elephants in America. Am. Antiquarian, 1x, 202. —— Ethnologic notes. American Antiquarian Bi-monthly. —— Linguistic families in southeastern United States. Science, April 29, 1887. Réplique 4 D. G. Brinton, au sujet de son article: ‘‘ Linguistique Américaine.”’ Rev. de Ling., Par. (1888), xx1, 199-208. GAULTIER DE CLAUBRY, J. Note sur le vocabulaire des couleurs chez Jes Arabes d’Algérie. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3 s., 1x, 698-701, 1886. GAUTIER, E. Le monde des prisons. Arch. de l’anthrop. crim., Paris, 1888, 3. s., II, 417; 541. GERLAND and RATZEL. Controversy concerning the limit of the regions within which the boomerang is used in Australia: Internat. Arch. f. Ethnog., 18838, 1, 61. GIACOMINI, CARLO. Annotazioni sulla anatomia del negro. Appendice alle tre prime memorie. VIII. Esistenza della ghiandola d’ Harder in un Boschimane. Duplicitae della cartilagine della plica semilunaris. Muscolo ciliare nei negri. Distribuzion. del pigmento del globo oculare. Torino, 1887, E. Loescher, 23 pp., 2pl. 8vo. [Repr. from: Atti d. r. Accad. d. sc. di Torino, 1887, Xx1I. ] GIARD, A. Histoire du transformisme. Rev. scient., Paris, 1888, xXL1I, 689-699. GIFFEN, Roper. The recent rate of material progressin England, Jour. Roy. Statis. Soc., London, L. 615-647, 544 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. GIGLIOLI, ENrico H. Ossa umane portate come ricordi o per ornamento e usate come utensili od armi. Arch. per l’antrop., Firenze (1888), xvii, 201-213. Mask from Boissy Island, N. E. New Guinea; and queries on the lizard in the folklore of Australasia. Internat. Arch. f. Ethnog., Leiden, 1, 184-187. GILBERT, J. H. Results of experiments at Rothansted on the growth of root-crops. Royal Agricultural College, Cirencester. Agric. Students’ Gazette, new series, 11, pt. v, 1-50. y GILEs, HERBERT A. Family namesin China. J. China Br. J. R. A. S., XXI, n. 8., 255-288. Ginky PARTAGAS, J. El codigo penal y la frenopatologia. Correo méd. Castellano, Salamanca, v, 406, 421, 436, 449, 468, 483, 499, 513, 529, 548. Giron, P., et ELizE MAsseNAT. Art paléolithique. Sur une sculpture en bois de renne, de l’époque Magdalénienne représentant deux phallus réunis par Ja base. Compt. rend. Acad. d. se. Paris, 1888, cvit, 1027. Gitreb. Sur les moyens de recueiller le Folk-lore. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop., Bruxelles, v, 331-345. GLAumont, M. Ethnogénie des insulaires de Kunie. Rey. d’ethnog., Paris, V1, 336- 342. Usages, mceurs et coutumes des Néo-Calédoniens. Rev. d’ethnog., XvI, 73-141. GLENNIE, J. S. Sruarr. The Non-Aryan and Non-Semitic white Races. Nature, XXXVI, 598. Globus. Illustrirte Zeitschrift fiir Liinder-und Vélkerkunde. Braunschweig, vol. LI and LII in 1887. A GLoverR, A. K. The Jews of the extreme eastern diaspora, and the Jews of the Chi- nese Empire (Jews of China Proper). The Menorah, July, 1888, pp. 10-19. Goprrey, J. Psychological and pathological influences of self-consciousness. Am. Pract. and News, Louisville, n. s., Iv, 129-1351. GOEHLERT, V. Statistische Betrachtungen iiber biblische Daten; ein Beitrag zur Volkskunde des Alterthums. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., Berl., xix, 83-93. Gommr, G. L. On the evidence for Mr. MeLennan’s theory of the primitive human horde. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., xvi, 118-133. On the Village Community at Ashton and Cote, in Oxfordshire. Archzol. Rev., Lond., 11, 29-44. The primitive human horde. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., (1888), XVII, 356-357. Widowhood in manorial law. Archieol. Rev., Lond., 11, 184-197. Goopricu, J. K. Ainu family-life and religion. Pop. Sc. Mo., N. Y. (1888), XXXIV, 81-92, 2 ills. GoopYEAR, W.H. The lotus in ancient art. Critic, Apr., 1888, p. 209. Gorpon, C. A. Notes from the history of medicine and of medical opinion from the earliest times. Med. Press and Circe., Lond., n.s., XLII, 25; 44; 69. GosHEN, G.J. The increase of moderate incomes. Jour. Roy. Statis. Soc., Lond., 1, 589-612. GorTHEIL, R. A Syriac geographical chart. Proce. Am. Orient. Soc., May, 1888, 16-20. GouBAuX, A. Des aberrations du sens génésique et de hybridite chez les animaux. N. Arch. d’obst. et de gynéc., Paris, 111, 455-480. GovurIntock, W.C. Hats as a cause of baldness. Pop. Se. Month., xx x1, 97-100. GouLD, ELIZABETH P. School life in China. Education, 1888, VIII, 557-562. Gow, J.M. Notes on cup-marked stones, ete., Perthshire. Archieol. Rev., Lond., 1, 102-104. G. P. F. Notice sur la campagne contre le marabout Mahmadou Lamine. Union géog. du nord. 1. France. Bull., vit, 236-251, 1887. GrRABowsky, F. Opfergebriiuche hei den Ngadju in Borneo. Internat. Arch. f. Eth- nog., I, 130-134. Das Betelkauen bei den malaischen Volkern. Ibid. 188-191. _— —T ANTHROPOLOGY. 5AD GRASSERIE, RAOUL DE LA. Esquisse d’une grammaire du Timucua, langue de la Floride. Rev. de Ling., Par. (1888), XX1I, 295-313. GREEF, GUILLAUME DE. Introduction a la Sociologie, pt. 1. Bruxelles: Gustave Mayolez. GREGOR, WALTER. Some Folk-lore from Achterneed. Folk-Lore Jour., Lond. (1888), VI, pt. iv, 262-265. Gross, V. La paléoethnologie en Suisse. Rey. d’anthrop., Paris, 1888, 3. s., 111, 720- 735. Pferdegebiss aus Hirschhorn und Knochen, Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., 1888, 180. GRIERSON, G. A. Some useful Hindi Books. J. R. A.S.,X1X, art. Tv. GRIFFIS, WILLIAM E. The Mikado’s Empire. History of Japan from 660 B.C. to 1872 A.D. New edition. New York: Harper, ill., 8vo. Japanese Art, Artists, and Artisans, with illustrations from drawings by a Japanese artist. Scribner’s Monthly Mag., Jan., 1888. Japanese ivory carving. Harper’s Mag., Apr., 1888, 7 ill. GRIMALDI, A. Il pudore. Manicomio, Nocera, 1v, 57-80. Grissom. Insanity in history and poetry. N.E. Med. Month., vit, 565-583. GRUNWEDEL. Acht Schiidelschalen der Aghori. Verhdndl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- throp., Berlin, 1888, 307. GubBins, J. H. The feudal system in Japan under the Tokugawa Shoguns. Tr. As. Soc. Japan, Xv, 131-142. GUIGNARD, L. Antiquité de homme dans le Loir-et-Cher, Chartres, 1888, 16 pp. ,8vo. Guppy, H. B. Solomon Islands and their natives. Longmans. Nature, XXXVI, 404. The Solomon Islands and their natives. London: Sonnenschein. GURNEY, EDMUND, and others. Phantasms of the living. London: Triibner, 1886. Rev., in Nature, xxxv, 290. Guss, A, L. Tribal affinity of Shickalamy and his son Logan. Am. Antiquar., Chi- cago, IX, 108-111. GuyAv, L.. IrreligiondeVavenir. Paris: Alcan, xxviii+479 pp. (See review in Rev. de Vhist. d. relig., xvi, 347-351.) GuyoT-DAUBES M. Les anomalies dactyles. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3.s., I, 534-559. Variations in human stature. [ Transl. from La Nature, Par.] Pop. Se. Month., N. Y., XXXI, 314-323. Guyor, Yves. Lascience économique, Paris. Rey. in Jour. Roy. Statis. Soc., London, L, 730-732. GROVE, Sir W. R. Antagonism. Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., XXX, 608-624. Guruitr, W. Die Hiigelgriiber von Loibenberge in Steiermark. Mitth. d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien., n. F. vitr, 202-204. Das Urnenfeld von Borstendorfin Mihren. /bid, 201. HABEL, S. Sculptures de Santa Lucia Cosumalwhuapa dans le Guatémala, Ann. du Mus¢e Guimet, x, 121-259, pl. viii-xv, 1887. HABERLAND?, M. Die Cultur der Eingebornen der Malediven, Mitth. d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien. Sitzungsb., 1888, 29-57, figs. Zum Ursprung des Bogens. Mittheil.d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, XVII, 116. HAGEN, A. La colonie de Porto-Novo et le roi Toffa. Rev. d’ethnog., Par., vi, 81- 116. et A. PiagNravu. Les Nouvelles Hébrides; ¢tudes ethnographiques. ley. d’ethnog., Paris, 1888, vit, 302-362, 1 map. HaAvpert, H.S. The Choctaw chungkee game. Am. Antiquar., Mendon, III. (1888), X, 283-284. Hae, E. M. A prehistoric amphitheater in Florida. Am. Antiquar., 1X, 207-210. H. Mis. 142 3d 546 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR- 1887 AND 1888. HALE, Horatio. Les origines d’une ancienne monnaie. Rev. in Rev. d’anthrop. Paris, 3. s., 11, 372-373. Huron folk-lore. J. Am. Folk-Lore, 1, 177-183. Les sacrifices du chien blanc chez les Iroquois. Levy. in Rev. d’anthrop., Paris, OSes The development of language. Proc. Canadian Inst., Toronto, 3.s., VI, 92-134. The Aryans in science and history. Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., 1888-9, xxxIx, 672-686. HALEvy, J. Recherches Bibliques, x. Le xiv° chapitre de la Genése. Rev. des Etudes Juives, XV, 161-202, 1887. HALIBURTON, R.G. Gypsies and an ancient Hebrew race in Sus and theSahara. Na- ture, XXXVI, 599. HALL, ALFRED J. A grammar of the Kwakiutl language. Trans. Roy. Soc., Canada, Montreal (1888), vi, 59-105. HALL, G. STANLEY, and MororA YuZERO, Dermal sensitiveness to gradual pres- sure changes. Am. Jour. of Psychology, Baltimore, 1, 72-98. HAMBLETON, G. W. The experimental production of chest. types in man. Lancet, Lond., 11, 610. HAmpy-Bey, M. J. Sur ene nécropole royale découverte a Saida. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, vI, 444-456. ; ; HAMMOND, C.M. The prolongation of human life. Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., Xxx1x, 92-101. Hamy, E.T. Decades american. Mémoires d’archéologie et d’ethnographie améri- caine. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, v1, 150-160. - Decades american. Peintures ethnographiques d’Ignacio de Castro. Rev. @ethnog., vil, 142-151; Mém. d’archéol. et d’ethnog. américaines. Jbid., v1, 150-160. Etudes ethnographiques et archéologiques sur l’exposition coloniale et indienne de Londres. Rey. d’ethnog., Par., v, passim; V1, 185-227. Note sur une statue ancienne du Dieu Civa, provenant des ruinesde Kampheng- phet, Siam. Rev. d’ethnog., Paris, 1888, x11, 363-372, -1 pl. Notice sur les fouilles exécutées dans le lit de la liane en 1887 pour létablisse- ment du nouveau viaduc du chemin de fer. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., III, 207-271. Sur un envoi d’Emin-Bey. Bull. de la Soc. d@’anthrop., Paris, 3.s., x, 605. Téte momifi¢ée provenant de la tribue des Jivaros (République de 1’ Equateur). Bull. d. 1. Soc. d’anthrop., Paris, 3.s., x, 148. Hamy, E. et F. BorRSARI. Geografia ethnologica e storica della Tripolitania, Cirenaicae Fezzan. Napoli, L. Pierro, 1888, 1 vol. in-8. Rev. in Rev. d’ethnog., vii, Par., 1888, p. 486, 1 ill. HaAmy, E. et Fr. MoREAU. Notice sur des silex tailles recueillis en Tunisie. Paris, Quen- tin, 1888, br. in-8, 3 pl., chrom. 1 carte. Rev. in Rev. d’ethnog., vil, Par., 1888, pp. 483-485, 4 ills. Hamy, E. et J. C. B. Voyage au Canada, dans le nord de 1’ Amérique septentrionale, fait depuis Van 1751 4 1761 (publié par. M. Vabbé H. R. Casgrain, Quebec, Brous- seau, 1887, 1 vol. in-8. Rev. in Rev. d’ethnog., vii, Par., 1888, p. 483. HANDELMANN, H. Zuder Krote von Crébern. Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. An- throp., etc., Broschwg., 1888, XIX, 57. HANDMANN, R. Die menschliche Stimme und Sprache in psychologischer Beziehung. Munster (1887), 230 pp. mit 27 Figuren, &vo. HaAnroor et C. Richer. Présentation d’un spirométre. Compt. rend. Soe. de biol., Par., 8.S., Iv, 405. HANSEN, SOREN. Diinische Untersuchungen in Gronland. Rey. in Intern, Areh, f Ethnog., 1888, 1, 76. —" 2 ANTHROPOLOGY. ay) HANSEN, SOREN. Dr. Henry Rink’s, ‘‘ The Eskimo Tribes.’’? [Rev. in Intern. Arch, f. Ethnog., 1888, 1, 74-75. et TOPINARD. La couleur des yeux et des cheveux en Danemark. Rey. d’an- throp., Par. (1888), 3.s., 111, 39-41. HANTZSCHE, J. C. Der alte Kanal von Gulga. Festschr. des Vereins f. Erdkunde zu Dresden (1888), 217-224. HARDERUP, V. Proposal for an international signification of the teeth. Presented to the ix. Intern. Med. Cong., Washington, 1887. Kristiania, 1887, Cammer, 8vo. HARDWICKE, H. J. Evolution and Creation. Lond., 1887, 180 pp., 51 pl., Svo. Harpy, M. Paléo-ethnologie. Découverte d’une sépulture de ’époque quaternaire a Raymonden, commune de Chancelade (Dordogne). Compt. rend. Acad. d sc., Paris, 1888, cv, 1025. HARLEY, CEORGE. Comparison between the recuperative bodily power of man ina rude and in a highly civilized state. London (1887), Harrison & Sons, 6-12. Harvard University Bulletin. Edited by Justin Winsor. Camb., Mass., vols. rv and vy. [Cassified lists of accessions to library. including all departments of anthro- pology. ] HARVEY, J. G. Cireumcised by a maternal impression. Med. Rec., N.Y., XX XtIv, 535. HASSELMANN, F. Ueber altiigyptische Textilfunde in Oberigypten. Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Brnschwg., Xx, 45-81. HAYNES, HENRY W. Some Aztec questions. Am. Antiquar., Chicago, 1x, 107-108. HEDGE, F.H. Mahommedanmysticisms. Unitarian Rev., May, 1888, xx1rx, 410-416. HEGER, F. Die Ethnographie auf der Krakauer Landesausstellung, 1887. Mitth. d. anthrop , Gesellsch. in Wien, n. F., viti, 190-201. HELFRICH, O. L., W. R. WINTER, en D. M. J. Scotrr. Het Hasan-Hosein of Taboet- Feest te Benkoelen. Intern. Arch. f. Ethnog., 1888, 1, 191-196, 1 pl. ; HELLWALD, F. von. Haus und Hof in ihrer Entwickelung mit Bezug auf die Wohn- sitzen der Volker. Lipsia, 1888, 1 vol., 581 pp., 222 ills. [Rey. in Arch. per 1’ an- trop., Firenze, 1888, XVIII, 283. HENNIGHAUSEN, Louris P. The redemptioners and the German Society of Maryland. An historical sketch. Balto. (1888), Theo. Kroh & Sons, 1 vol., 1-22. HENRI, M., and Louis Sirer. . The early age of metal in the southeast of Spain. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), xvi, 121-132, 1 pl. HENSHAW, H. W. Perforated stones from California. Wash., Goy. Print, 1887, br. 16 figures, 8vo. HERING, E. Ueber die Theorie des simultanen Contrasts von Helmholtz. Pfliiger’s Areh., 172, 1887. HERMANN, ANTON. Ethnologische Mittheilungen aus Ungarn. Zeitschrift fiir die Volkskunde der Bewohner Ungarns und seiner Nebenlinder. Budapest, Selbstver- lag der Redaction, 1887, 4. [Rev. in Arch. f. Anthrop., Brnschwg. (1889), XVII, 286. ] Heron. Funérailles de M. O. Rayet. Discours. Paris, Soc. nat. antiq., 1887, 8vo. HERTER, C. A. Hypnotism; what it is and what it is not. Pop.Sc. Month., N. Y., XXXII, 755-777. HERVE, GEORGES. Crane de gorille. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop., Par., 3.s., X1 (1888), 181. La circonvolution de Broca chez les Primates. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop., Par., 3. s., XI, 275-315. Also separate: Delahaye, 164 pp., 4 pl., &vo. HERZOG, WILHELM. Die Verwandtschaltsbeziehungen der costaricensischen Indianer- Sprachen mit denen von Central und Siid Amerika. Arch. f. Anthrop., XVI, 623- 627. HIBBERT, ANDREW. School plays and games. Antiquary, Xv, 52-54. Hicks, Henry. “‘The Faunas of the Ffynnon Beuno Caves and of the Norfolk Forest Bed.’’ Geological Magazine, 1837, March. Reviewed in Nature, XXXVI, 259. Hib, 8. A. Thelife statistics of an Indian province. Nature, Lond., XX XVI, 245-250. 548 RECORD OF- SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. HINs, EvGtNe. L’opinion que !es langues romanes dérivent du latin, a-t-elle un fonde- ment historique? Rev. Linguis., Paris, XX, 325-351. HINSDALE, G. Menneskets Holdning, fysiologisk og klinisk betragtet. Norsk Mag. f. Leegevidensk., Christiania, 4. R., 11, 782-787. Hirucock, E., and H. H.SEELtyr. Ambherst College. An anthropometric manual, giv- ing the average and physical measurements and tests of male college students and method of securing them. Prepared from the records of the department of physi- cal education and hygiene in Amherst College during the years 1861—2 and 1886-7, inclusive. Amberst, 1887, J. E. Williams, 26 pp., 2 tab., 8vo. Anthropometric statics from Amherst College, Mass., U. S. A. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), xv1i1, 192-199. —— and H.H.Seelye. Statistics bearing upon the average and typical student in Am- herst College, 1888. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), XVII, 357-358. Honae, C. F. Some effect of stimulating ganglion cells. Am. J. Psychol., 1, 479-486. Hopeetrs, J. F. The smith and wright. Antiquary, Xvi, 1-4; 96-100. HoERNES, M. Die Griberfelder an der Wallburg von St. Michael, bei Adelsberg in Krain. Mitth. d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, 1888, n. F., vii. 217-249, 4 pl. Einige Notizen und Nachtrage zu alteren Erwerbungen und Mittheilungen der anthropologischen Gesellschaft. Ibid. (Sitzungsb., 86.) Fernere Zusitze zu ilteren Mittheilungen der anthropologischen Gesellschaft. La Téne-Funde. Jbid. [Sitzungsb., 94-96. ] La paléoethnologie en Autriche-Hongrie. Rev. d’anthrop., 3. s., III, 333-347, Die iiltesten Beziehungen zwischen Mittel- und Sud-Europa. Mitt. d. anthrop. Gesellsch., Wien, n. F., viit, 57-61. H6FFDING, HARALD. Psychologie in Umrissen auf Grundlage der Erfahrung. Leip- "zig (1887), Fues’s Verlag, vi--463 pp., 8vo. HorrMan, W. J. Folk-lore of the Pennsylvania Germans. J. Am. Folk-Lore, N. Y. (1888), 1, 125-135. HOerier, M. Volksmedicin und Aberglaube in Bayern’s Gegenwart und Vergangen- heit. Beitr. z. Anthrop., Miinchen (1888), vill, 37-38. Ueber Votiv-Gaben. Beitr. z. Anthrop., Miinchen (1888), vi11, 39-40. HoLpER, M. pe. Moulages des type craniens du Wurtemberg offerts. Bull. d. 1. Soe. d@anthrop., Paris, 3. s., X, 640-641. Ueber die kérperlichen und geistigen Higenthtimlichkeiten der Verbrecher, Arch. f. Anthrop., Brnschwg., 1888-’89, Xv11I, 205-221. Hout, M. Ueber die in Tirol vorkommenden Schiideiformen. (Dritter Beitrag.) Mitth. d. anthrop- Gesellsch. in Wien, n. F., vit, 129-152. Hote, R. F. A journey in the Province of San Paulo, Brazil. Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc., rx, 108-114. HoitmeEs, W. H. Ancient art of the Province of Chiriqui. v1. Ann. Rept. Bur. Ethnol., 1888, pp. 3-252, 285 figs., 1 map. A study of the textile art in its relation to form and ornament. v1. Ann. Rept. Bur. Ethnol., 1888, pp. 189-252, '73 figs. The use of gold and other metals among the ancient inhabitants of Chiriqui, Ithmus of Darien. Wash., Gov. Print, br., 22 figs., 1887, 8vo. Hopkins, E. W. Inquiry into the conditions of civilization in the Hindu Midde Age, from the point of view of the ruling power or warrior caste. Proc. Am, Orient. Soc., 1888, 8. Horowitz, Ver. J. Marokko. Das Wesentlichste und Interessanteste tiber Land und Leute. Leipzig (1887), Friedrich, 111, 215 pp., 8vo. Horsey, Vicror. Trephining during the Neolithic period in Europe. J, Anthrop. Inst., Xvi1, 100-106. ——— te ——sss eS — Se ANTHROPOLOGY. 5AM HouGu, Water. An Eskimo strike-a-light from Cape Bathurst, British-America. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Wash. (1888), x1, 181-184. Notes on the ethnology of the Congo. American Naturalist, vol. XxI, Aug., pp. 689-693. Houssay, Fr. Les peuplesactuels dela Perse. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop., Lyon, v, 101-147. Les races humaines de la Perse. [Extr. du Bull. de la Soc. d’anthrop. de Lyon.] Lyon, Pitrat, fig., pl., 1887, 8vo. Hoursma, M. TH. Réponse d.la question sur une statuette ithyphallique. [Rev. in Inter. Arch. f. Ethnog., 1888, I, 235. ] Houzt, E. Comparaison des indices céphalométrique et craniométrique; indices cépha- liques de Belgique. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop. de Brux., v, 397-407. Les tribus occidentales du Lae Tanganjika. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop. de Bruxelles, V, 43-65. HovELAcQque ABEL. La grammaire indo-européenne d’aprés Fr. Miller. Rev. de Ling., Par. (1888) xxi, 91-104, 27-47. et Hervt, G. Précis d’anthropologie (bibliothéque anthropologique). Paris, A. Delahaye et Lecrosnier, 1 vol., 20 fig., 1887, 8vo. [Cf., Nature, xxXxvi, 1198. Sur la juxtaposition de charactéres divergents 4 propos de cranes Birmans. Rev. d’anthrop., Par. (1888), 3. s., 111, 681-683. Hovey, H.C. Eyay Shah: asacrificial stone nearSt. Paul. Am. Antiquarian, IX, 39, 36. HowartH, H.H. The survival of corporal penance. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., XVIII, 275-281, 2 pl. Howtrt, A. W. Further notes on the Australian class system. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond. (1888), xv111, 31-68, 1 pl. Howorrn, H.H. The mammoth andthe flood. London: Sampson Low, 564 pp., 8vo. Hurpekoper, R. S. Origin of the domestication of the horse. J.Comp. Med. and 5., Phila., 1x, 377-389. Hvupsarp, D. A. The religions of Zoroaster. Unitarian Rev., 1888, 112-139. Hutt, Epwarp. Sketch of geological history, being the natural history of the earth and of the pre-human inhabitants. London (1887), C. W. Deacon. HumpHry, G.M. Additional report on centenarians. [Brit. M.J., Lond., 1.] Col- lect. Invest. Ree., Lond., 111, 83-85. Centenarians. Brit. Med. J., Lond., 1, 502; 564; 612. The habits and family history of centenarians. Pop. Sc. Month., xxx, 618-630, 1887. HUNTER, W. W. Religions of India. Our day. Boston, 1888, 378 pp. HcURGRONJE, C.S. Ethnographisches aus Mekka. Internat. Arch. f. Ethnog., Leiden, 1, 146-154, 4 pl. HurcHinson, J. Skeleton of a short-limbed dwarf, aged thirty-five, from the Norfolk and Norwich Museum. Lancet, Lond., 1888, 11, 1230. Horn, ALFRED HENRy. The marriage of near kin considered with respect to the laws of nations, the results of experience and the teachings of biology. 2 ed. Lond., 1887, Longmans, Green & Co., 485 pp., 9 tab. Huxtey, T.H. Science and morals. Pop. Sc. Month., xxx, 493-506, 1887. IfyAprs. Ethnographie des Fuégiens. Bull. Soc. @’anthrop., Par., 3. s., X, 327-345. Hystop, J. H. The new psychology. New Princeton Review, n.s., vi, 155-171. ICHENHAEUSER, J. Ein Beitrag zur Uebervilkerungsfrage. Berlin, 1883, Heuser, 84 pp., 8vo. IHERING, H. y. Die Verbreitung der Ankerixte in Brasilien. Verhandl. d. Berl. Ge- sellsch. f. Anthrop., 1888, 217-221. ILJINSKI, A. Feasibility of preserving condition of women for an indefinite time. Mos- koa, 1888, Iverskaja, 241 p., Svo. Index-catalogue of the Library of the Surgeon-General’s Office. Washington: Govern- ment Print. Vol. 1x.—M&rpicine to NyWeELr. 550 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Index Medicus. A monthly classified record of the current medical literature of the world. boston: G. 8S. Davis. Vol. 1X, monthly. Indian affairs. Report of commissioner, Washington: Government Print. Indian Annals and Magazine of Natural Science. Ed. by J. Murray, Bombay. Monthly. No. 1 issued in May, 1887. 8vo. The Indian Antiquary. Bombay. Vol. xvit in 1888. Internationales Archiv fiir Ethnographie. Edited by J. D. E. Schmelz. Leyden: Trap. [Vol. 1 of this illustrated quarto published in 1888. Especially devoted to mu- seums. | Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft. International meeting respecting the cranial indices. Corr.-Blatt, xvi, 17-22. IRELAND, W. W. Herrschermacht und Geisteskrankheit. Studien aus der Geschichte alter und neuer Dynastien. Autorisirte Uebersetzung. Stuttgart: Robert Lutz, 1887, 8. [Rev. in Arch. f. Anthrop., Brnschwg. (1889), xviir, 288-289. ] Ives, S. E. Japanese magic mirror. J. of the Franklin Institute, 1888, 324 pp. JACKSON, J. H. Remarks on the psychology of joking, Lancet, London, 11, 800. Also: Brit. M. J., Lond., m1, 870. JACOB, G. Eiserne Hohlschiissel von dem kleinen Gleichberge bei Rémhild. Areh. f. Anthrop., Brnschwg., 1888-9, XVIII, 283. Jacobi, M. PurNAM. Note on the special liability to loss of nouns in aphasia. J. Nervous and Mental Disease, N. Y., 1887. JAcoss, J. Experiments on prehension. Mind, 1887. Notes on prehension in idiots, by Francis Galton. [Rev. in Am. J. Psychology, 1 ] : JACQUES, V.,etSrorms, E. Notes sur l’ethnographie de la partie orientale de 1’ Afrique équatoriale. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop. de Brux., v, 91-202. L’ethnographie prchistorique dans le sud-est de l’Espagne. Bull. Soc. d’anthrop. de Brux., vI, 210-236. JAGOR, T.. Indische Zahnbirsten. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Berlin, 1888, 412. Jahrbuch der kéniglichen deutschen archiologischen Institute. Berlin. Founded in 1886. JAMES, WILLIAM. Some Human Instincts. Pop. Sc. Month., xX XI, 666-681, 1887. The perception of space. Mind., London, xtr, 1; 185. JANES, Lewis G. Egyptian doctrine of the future life. Unitarian Rev., 1883, 33-48. JANKE, H. Die willktirliche Hervorbringung des Geschlechts bei Mensch und Haus- thieren. Berlin, 1887, x1x, 495 pp., 8vo. JARDINE, JUSTICE. Kattywar. Sassoon Mechanic Institute, Bombay, 25-29. JAsS?TROW, JOSEPH. - Ue nee! ae? ANTHROPOLOGY. 581 Wuson, THomas. Epitome of prehistoric archeology in Western Europe. [Extr. Am. Antiquarian, Noy., 1837 ],52 pp., 8vo. Survival of the Stone Age. Am. Antiquar., Mendon, II]. (1888), x, 379, 380. Description of exhibit made by the department of prehistoric anthropology in the National Museum at the Ohio Valley and Central States Exposition in Cincinnati, Ohio, 1888, pp. 33. Megalithic monuments of Brittany. American Naturalist, July, 1888. [Rev. in Arch. perl’ antrop., Firenze (1888), xvi11, 278, 279. ] Winsor, Justin. Narrative and critical history of America. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. 7 vols., 8vo. Vols. v and vi in 1887, vol. vii in 1888, and vol. 1 in 1889. WINTERNITZ, M. Der Sarpabali, ein altindischer Schlagencult. Mitth. d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wein, 1888, n. F., viii, 25-52. Wirrer,G. F. Heredity. Rep. Bd. Health Wisconsin, Madison, x, 167-181. Wo tpt, A. Die Kultusgegenstiinde der Golden und Giljaken. Internat. Arch. f. Ethnog., 1, 92-107. Wotrr, H. K. Untersuchungen iiber das Tongediichtniss. Rey. in Am. Jour. of Psychology, Baltimore, 1, 185, 186. Wor, Lupwic. Volksstiimme Central-Afrika’s. [Paper read before the Berlin Anthrop. Soc., Dec., 1886. ] Wooprorp, C. M. Paper onthe Solomon Islands. Roy. Geog. Soc., 1886-7; Nature, XXXVII, 546. Worsaak, J. J. A. The pre-history of the North. translated by T. and F. Moreland Simpson. (London: Triibner & Co., 1886.) [Rev. in Nature, xxXxvI, 79.] WraTIsLaw, A. H. The lame fox. The Folk-Lore Jour., Lond. (1888), vi, pt. iv, 252-262. . WRIGHT, CAROLINE R. Worship of the Dervishes in Cairo, Egypt. Christian Ad- vocate, N. Y., 1888 (July), p. 491. Wricat, G. F. Importance of the study of archwology in Ohio. Ohio Archzol. and Hist. Quart., 1, 55-60. ; The relation of the Glacial period to the archeology of Ohio. Ohio Archeol and Hist. Quart., I, 174-186. Also: Preglacial Man in Ohio, 257-259. Wunpt, W. Grundziige der physiologischen Psychologie. 2Biinde. Leipzig (1887), Engelmann, 210 Holzschn., 8vo. Ueber Ziele und Wege der Vélkerpsychologie. Rev.in Am. Jour. of Psychology, Baltimore, 1, 193,194. Wzn, C. M. PLeytre. Het ethn. Mus. v. h. Kon. Gen. Natura Artis Magistra te Am- sterdam. Rev. in Internat. Arch. f. Ethnog., 1888, 1, 28, 29. YOuFEROW, WL. Dolmens dans la Russie méridionale. Bull. Soc. d’ethnog., Paris, 2. s., 13-19. YVERNES, E. Des éléments essentiels qui doivent figurer dans la statistique crimi- nelle et des moyens de les rendre comparables. Bull. de ’Inst. internat. de Sta- tist., Rome, 1888, m1, 71-79. Le mélange des races qui a produit la nationalité russe actuelle. Iv, 20,21. ZABOROWSKI. Les peuples préhistoriques et les peuples actuels du Caucase. Rev. scient., Par., xu, 811-815. ZAMPA, RavFAELLO. I) tipo umbro. Arch. per |’ antrop., Firenze (1888), xvuq, 175-197. ZIESBERGER, Dayvip. Essay of an Onondaga grammar, or a shert introduction to learn the Onondaga Almaqua tongue. Penn. Mag. of Hist. and Biog., Phila, (1888), XII, 65-75. ZEISBERGER’S Indian Dictionary. English, German, Iroquois; the Onondaga and Algonkin; the Delaware. Printed from the original manuscript in Harvard College Library. Cambridge: John Wilson & Son, Publishers. 582 RECORD OF SCIENCE FOR 1887 AND 1888. Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie. Organ der Berliner Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Eth- nologie und Urgeschichte. Berlin: A. Asher & Co., vol. X1x in 1887; vol. xx in 1888. Zeitschrift fiir Volkskunde, Leipzig. Founded at the end of 1888. Zeitschrift fiir Vélkerpsychologie und Sprachwissenschaft, Leipzig. ZELENSKI, M. [Scientific method of ascertaining weight of body (of infants), and its importance in indicating health or diseased organism.] Trudi Obsh. Russk. vrach. v Moskve, ii, 1st ed., 18-29. Zosa, G. Misure della forza muscolare dell’ uomo. Arch. per l antrop., Firenze, XVII, 43-51. Intorno al mucrone dell’ angolo della mandibola del Sandifort. Arch. per VY antrop., Firenze (1888), xvill, 169-173. MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. CHRONOLOGY OF THE HUMAN PERIOD.* By J. WOODBRIDGE DAVIS. The earliest exact date we have is that of the victory of Cormbus, the runner, at the Olympian festival, July 21, B. C. 776. Beyond this, uncertainty grows from years into decades and from decades into cen- turies until, in the earliest existing traditions, it becomes supreme ; and yet man’s history is not half told. Of the vast preceding ages from which no word has come, the chro- nology is necessarily based upon traces of the events themselves. So the best results we can expect from an exploration of this dark region of time are a meager knowledge of events, a fairly accurate knowledge of successions, and a very inaccurate knowledge of durations. There is however an artificial difficulty in the way of the student of archeology, namely, the several scales used in the division of pre- historic time. A like difficulty pertaining to the era of written records has been overcome by means of formule for the translation of 2 -soaeg |. ty PON 2 puv ta UOTE z SOAv | gangjno1ase ON podeys Ajopny |. po ‘Araqjod : | JO Soowl} YSII |: “‘spunomi [[aqS | ‘peqwo ‘am0}s poystjoduy |: ‘spuy Isvog -ysomop s0q ' ‘QINJ[ NOLS’ ON ' 0 n Dainty ‘O1N} “OIQFILO9 NT ‘sBoq-qrod . u i nes b “Be " pee Sod Suyj}18 uy | 10 ous poeqst[od ‘SoULBIOTL SOOT Mody Bas ‘geToveq JuO1IOu ‘SUWOOTT AL, 070 es ete Ue ane ‘Sud ( (edoarng ur ose ‘sqisodop oyv'T ‘sosuoy §J0lq SyTISMo9} () < taddoo Jo aova} ON) {wn} SUYSIXG ‘sBUy[oMP Od “moyjyemmero Ag (aaddoo oe ‘syn, Wapoom IBjyNoalyH SoS1oH patopavy) ezuorg =e ‘a19e9 ee a "BOLL moa] ; ‘eno PDEA, -Jy puv visy wor | ; ek E eG suondiosuy | oanqooytyore paagary ain}[Nos y quaq und Prcctat vs tb ‘ Ssy0oq ; ‘soldmexoe Jsorpre aA OOO. ‘ojo ‘Kapueqsny *s}WaMIOJUy ‘syuemapdmy (52 moderne aw) eae “({BLOUTD) WOYCAE]? PUPT sy aoystaqd Ape “1B9(] ABD rd “wuod LT 5 *‘SUOI] CABO 4 “TIOWUIY JY Pe aca *(urejdmeyo) = ‘so1900U 9u990}8le[d- PUY 8 1qa ‘porrwy-[00 MA | ‘aorssordep pueTy 5B | ‘snare yododdtyy B gah ‘oyeMTD Plog *(s09R119}) yo ysl Sonuien ‘TOVAGTa puvry] | eued0qs1oyd oyv7 | Bs > s ‘satoveq uayung S A | ‘saqovoq posivy ‘snIQ | *OILO9STY OI ‘sn0q-4vag = v & ‘SOUIVAOM [RIOD 3 ‘sudo : ‘sqooiny ‘syisodep oyR'T | ‘snomepnuag | TUNTANT LEY 2 gaan ~ i (‘900911nd00 quepanqe 4sojeT) rs i r “BITRIMUIRM poyeas RAMS BON? di “le 10 OUI Xa | i ‘VIVQ NOILVZITIAID ‘VLV(T IVOID0T0a) ‘(adoung 0) aouasafow YL ) “XDOTONOUHD NVWOATT 1 THE HUMAN PERIOD. 58) The chart explains itself. All the items occurring together in one column between two horizontal lines, represent the characteristics of the period embraced by those lines. It has been found useful for de- termining the relation in time of events originally referred to different scales, and it also serves to divide the human period into smaller parts than can any single scale. The chart relates to Europe only, the most thoroughly investigated of the continents. Even so, its divisions are not contemporaneous for all that land. The dawn of written history in Britain breaks eight or nine centuries after that of Greece. The polished stone and the bronze ages must have rolled over Eurupe in slowly moving waves. The ad- vancement of the other arts and the domestication of animals similarly spread from men to men, retarded by mountain chains and salty chan- nels. But if these scales were applied to America, the later stone age alone must be shifted downward at least five thousand years. 2 \ 5 er | Aa ame miE Yh 3 sat ihe Ra Cede oe agai woe eee: Wike Ming ay vette Ms sortie es | ie sables vue a ate mae oe pee 9: ae ae : uA oe caine ale 005° 3b lene? .. j i Sus Hey oh ane mw EON) 3 Kate 7 api z0} Pig = = el pur. Ply: pays: a ¥ ME ip feutias LP kms Mie LYS Ne - are a WERE THE OSAGES MOUND BUILDERS? By Dr. J. F. SNYDER, Virginia, Cass County, Illinois. A reported instance of mound building by the Osage Indians, near » the close of the last century, has been cited by numerous writers on American ethnology in proof of the otherwise well-authenticated faet that the custom of erecting mounds over their distinguished dead was practiced by some of our Indian tribes down to comparatively recent times. The instance referred to was related by Dr. Beck, in his ‘‘Gaz- etteer of Missouri and Illinois.” When writing of the Osage River he says: “Ancient works exist on this river as elsewhere. The remains of mounds and fortifications are almost everywhere to be seen. One of the largest mounds in this country has been thrown up on this stream, within the last thirty or forty years, by the Osages, near the great Osage village, in honor of one of their deceased chiefs. This fact proves con- clusively the original object of these mounds, and refutes the theory that they must necessarily have been erected by a race of men more civilized than the present tribes of Indians.” * \ This was written in 1822. In the fall of 1834, Mr. Featherstonhaugh, the noted English geologist, when in the vicinity of St. Louis, Missouri, heard a similar statement in regard to the erection of a large mound, by the Osages, in the same locality, which he relates as follows: “We therefore walked into the country a mile and a half, to a Major Sibley’s, to whom I had a letter. - - - He had resided many years amongst the western Indians as agent of the United States, and had been one of the commissioners appointed to lay out the Traders’ Road to Santa Fé, in New Mexico. We soon got into conversation about the lofty mounds I had seen, when he stated that an ancient chief of the Osage Indians (corrupted by the French from Whashash) informed him, whilst he was a resident amongst them, that a large conical mound (which he, Major Sibley, was in the habit of seeing every day whilst he resided amongst them) was constructed when he was a boy. That a chief of his nation, who was a distinguished warrior, and greatly beloved by the Indians, and who was called Jean Defoe by the French, unexpectedly “A Gazetteer of the States of Illinois and Missouri. By Lewis C. Beck. Albany N. Y., 1823, p. 308. 587 588 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. ~ died whilst all the men of his tribe were hunting in a distant country. His friends buried him in the usual manner, with his weapons, his earthen pot, and the usual accompaniments, and raised a small mound over his remains. When the nation returned from the hunt this mound was enlarged at intervals, every man assisting to carry materials, and thus the accumulation of earth went on fora long period until it reached its present height, when they dressed it off at the top to a conical form. The old chief further said that he had been informed and believed that all the mounds had asimilar origin..”* It is altogether probable that these two accounts relate to the same mound, and that Dr. Beck’s source of information regarding it is the same as Mr. Featherstonhaugh’s. The “ancient chief” may have pur- posely imposed upon Major Sibley’s credulity in this matter: at any rate his reliability as a historian of his people is somewhat shaken by his further statement that ‘‘the tradition had been steadily transmitted down from their ancestors; that the Whashash (Osages) had originally emigrated from the east in great numbers, the population being too dense for their hunting-grounds. He described the forks of the Alle- gheny and Monongahela Rivers, and the Falls of the Ohio, where they had dwelt some time, and where large bands had separated from them, and distributed themselves in the surrounding country, etc.”t The Osages, it is well known, are a branch of the Dakotas, and migrated to Missouri from the north, or northwest; and perhaps the only mem- bers of that tribe who have at any time visited the headwaters of the Ohio were the few who joined the force that defeated General Braddock in 1755, and the peaceful delegations that have since visited Washing- ton City. The first mention of the Osages in history is by Father Marquette, who heard of them when descending the Mississippi in 1673; and in his map of the regions discovered by him he locates them as the ‘*Ouchage,” on the Missouri River, about the present site of Jefferson City. We have then no definite account of these Indians until 1719, when Du Tissenet, a young Canadian-Frenchman, was sent with a party, by M. DeBienville, then -governor of Louisiana, to explore the western wilderness in search of ores and precious metals. Du Tissenet’s expedi- tion set out from Kaskaskia, and, traversing southern Missouri, followed the Osage Rive hich he so named—-to its northwestern sources in Kansas. He visited the Osages at their “Great Village” near the con- fluence of the Little Osage and the Marmiton, in what is now Vernon County. in Missouri, and which was then the central point of their country. During the next year, 1720, Renault, with his lientenant, La Motte, and party, including five hundred negro slaves, arrived at Fort Chartres, and at once sent out exploring parties in all directions in *Excursion Pieter the sinve Sees ete. By G, W. Beaiheseaneaeete F, Ress, F.G.S., Two vols., London, 1844, vol. 1, pp. 286, 287. t Ibid, pages 287, 288. WERE THE OSAGES MOUND-BUILDERS ? 589 quest of precious ores. They opened lead mines in the vicinity of Potosi, at Minea Renault and Mine La Motte, which have been, more or less, in operation to the present day; and established trading posts and inti- mate commercial relations with the Osages. In 1806 Lieutenant Pike, on his expedition to the mountains, found the Osages at their “Great” and ‘“ Little” villages, where they had entertained Du Tissenet eighty- seven years before; both travelers locating the larger or main village in what is now Blue Mound Township, Vernon County, Missouri. Sev- eral years before Lieutenant Pike’s visit—in 1787—Pierre Chouteau had established, near the Great Village, a fortified trading post which he named Fort Carondelet in honor of the Baron De Carondelet. The topographical features of the country bordering the Osage River are iN many respects very peculiar and strangely attractive. In the greater part of its course the river has cut its way through ledges of massive magnesian limestone which tower above the beautiful stream in domes and terraces and knobs that seem to have been designed by skillful architects. Professor Swallow says of these bluffs, about the junction of the Niangua and Linn Creek with the Osage, they “slope back into knobs and ridges, which are frequently surrounded by numerous natural terraces so regular and uniform that they appear like the work of human hands. These terraces are formed by tne de- composition of the strata of magnesian limestone which form the bluffs.”* Farther back from the river, remarks the same writer, ‘“‘ The prairie of this region is characterized by what are called knobs or mounds; they are somewhat variable in size and form, but usually present the ap- pearance of a truneated’cone. The tops of these mounds are usually flat, and covered by a thin soil, underlaid by a durable stratum of sandstone or limestone, which crops out on all sides near the top, pre- vents the wearing away of the upper edges, and preserves the well defined angle between the top and sides; while the stratum of shale or clay, which forms the lower part, is easily decomposed and carried away by aqueous agencies. The sides rise with a gentle declivity, at first, but become more and more abrupt until they are nearly perpen- dicular at the top. The most of these mounds belong to the coal meas- ures; but those near Bolivar are in the Chemung group, the upper beds of the vermicular sandstone and shales forming the top, and the underlying shales the lower part of them.”t Of the mounds men- tioned by Professor Swallow, near Bolivar, one of the largest was almost in sight at my front door. It stood, in bold relief, near the middle of a cultivated field, a truncated pyramid, 20 feet high, with level top 20 by 50 feet in dimensions, and with angles and sides true *Geological Report of the Southwest Branch, ete., by G. C. Swallow, State geolo- gist, St. Louis, Mo., 1859, p. 22. + First and second reports of the Geclogical Survey of Missouri, by G. C. Swallow, State geologist, Jefferson City, 1855. 590 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. and regular; the complete duplicate in appearance of many artificial mounds co be seen east of the Mississippi.* The region at the head of the Osage River, particularly the district lying between its main branches, the Marais des Cygnes and the Little Osage, is mostly prairie, rising in graceful undulations and ridges, and isolated conical mounds, with broad valleys between, eroded by aque- ous or glacial action, combining in landscapes of charming interest and beauty. Prof. G. C. Broadhead, late State geologist of Missouri, in treating of the geology of Vernon County, remarks: ‘It is here diversified by clusters of mounds, reaching more than 100 feet above the general sur- face of the prairie. Blue Mound is 150 feet high, and can be seen for a long distance. Timbered Hill, near the mouth of Marmaton and Little Osage is a round, isolated mound, 1/0 feet above the Marmaton, and over 100 feet above the surrounding plain. Being several miles » from other marked elevations, it is seen for many miles off. North of the Little Osage a series of mounds extends east and west along the county line at an elevation of over 100 feet above the gently stretching val- ley at their base. - - - Further west, in range 52, we find the mounds rising still higher. These mounds continue on southward through the county, interrupted sometimes for several miles by the streams. From Moundville a high ridge or series of mounds connec- ted, trends off to the south line of the county, rising near the northern and middle line to 140 feet above the lower valleys, or 80 to 100 feet above Moundville Valley. - - - The occasional occurrence of these mounds gives a charming variety to the landscape. Many of them can be seen at a long distance, and from their summits the views are often very fine. - - - Undoubtedly this county has been subjected to glacial agency at some former period of time. Its results may be seen in isolated mounds and deep valleys between. The amount of erosion must have been of great force and of long continuance, if we view the mounds and long stretches of distance from one to the other. When pro- tected by the upper series of limestones, the erosion was not complete; but if these limestones were much broken, or entirely absent, leaving the sandstones exposed, the waters would rush down with resistless force, and bear away all the softer material.” t In a foot-note on page 82 of iis exhaustive monograph on ‘*‘ The Mounds of the Mississippi Valley Historically Considered,” Prof. Lucien Carr, in discussing the trustworthiness of a book purporting to have been written by one J. D. Hunter, (“* Memoirs of a Captivity,” ete., Lon- don, 1828,) remarks: ‘*To gono further than the instances quoted in the text, we find undoubted evidence that the Osages have, within the pres- ent century, built both stone heaps and burial mounds.” *These dimensions are not exact, but given from memory, the writer pot having seen the mound since 1860. tReport of the Geological Survey of the State of Missouri, Garland C. Broadhead, State geologist, Jefferson City, 1874, pp. 120, 121. a. I, WERE THE OSAGES MOUND-BUILDERS ? 591 So far as history can aid us in tracing the Osages we are satisfied that at the period of Marquette’s descent of the Mississippi, in 1673, they oc- cupied one or both banks of the Missouri River, at and above the mouth of the Osage; and that they established the central villages of their tribe at the head of the Osage River about the year 1700, ora few years before that date, and remained there until their removal, in 1826, farther west. That, in that time, they erected stone heaps occasionally over the graves of their dead—to preserve the bodies from the ravages of wild beasts—is true, for some of the stone heaps, attesting the faet, are still to be seen there. But they built noearthen mounds. In all the region of their occupaiey of the immediate valley of the Osage River there is not an artificial mound of earth to be found; and it is not reasonable to suppose that such monuments, if erected, should in the lapse of less than a century have socompletely disappeared. Pro- fessor Broadhead, who carefully explored the entire valley of the Osage sn prosecuting the geological survey of Missouri, in a private letter re- plying to my inquiries, says: *‘ I have seen noartificial sepulechral mounds on the Osage River. With the exception of pictographs, on the rocks, about 25 miles above its mouth, I found but few, if any, prehistoric remains anywhere on that river.” Robert I. Holcombe, esq., who ranks little below Parkman in Ameri- can historical research, after spending many months at or near the site of the “Great Osage village,” when writing of that locality in his ‘* History of Vernon County, Missouri,” says: ‘It does not seem tbat the mysterious race of beings termed the Mound Builders ever dwelt here in any considerable numbers or for any considerable period. But few traces of their occupation remain, if they ever existed. In some parts of the county there are a few small elevations resembling the sepui- chral mounds of the Mound Builders; but it can not be asserted that they are not natural. If any examination has been made, it has not dis- closed any noteworthy archeological specimens, and few, if any, flint arrow-heads, lance heads, stone axes, or fragments of pottery have been found.”** After calling Mr. Holcombe’s attention specially to this branch of inquiry he informed me, in the course of our correspondence, that in all the region he had examined he had not seen an artificial earthen mound; and had met but few, if any, evidences of a pre-exist- ent “stone age.” Of the many residents on and near the Osage, from its mouth to its sources, to whom I have addressed my inquiries, not one has seen an artificial earthern mound there, and but few have found aborignal stone implements of any description in that region. Ali agree that such evidences of prehistoric occupancy are almost to- tally absent. E. R. Morerod, M. D., an old resident of Vernon County, Missouri, an intelligent and scholarly man, who had devoted much time and thought to the study of American history and antiquities, and who per- * History of Vernon County, Missouri. St. Louis. Brown & Co, 1837, pp. 87,80. . 592 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. sonally inspected every locality on the upper Osage that had been in- habited by the Osage Indians, with the view of collecting reliable ma-— terials for his ‘Centennial History of Vernon County” (published in 1876), and to secure, if possible, reiics of ancient Indian art for the Phila- delphia Exposition of that year, in writing to me says: “As far as my knowledge extends there are but very few evidences of prehistoric man existing in Vernon County. Excepting a few flint arrow-points, I do not know of a stone implement of any kind, neither grooved ax, celt, or ornament, ever having been found here. Nor is there an artificial sepulchral mound in our county, though we have many magnificent natural mounds of geological origin. Absence of Indian burials here has often suggested to my mind the query, what did the Osages do with their dead? We know that they were a numerous tribe, and that this district was the central point of their territory for nearly, or quite, a century and a quarter; yet although I have searched all over the sites, of the Big and Little Osage villages, and in every direction throughout the county, I have failed to find any indication of Indian burying grounds, or any isolated graves that could, with any degree of certainty, be attributed to the Indians. Iam therefore of the opinion that with the exception of their distinguished men, these Indians cremated their dead. In my search for Indian relics here, in 1876, all that I found were brass and pewter ornaments, glass beads, fragments of gun fliné- locks, broken iron and copper utensils, and crockery of French make. There are no Indian graves here on the crest of our ridges and _ bluffs, or on the top of our natural mounds, as is the case elsewhere through- out the Mississippi Valley, with but one known exception. A very noted chief of the Osages, named Pah-hus-kah, or Pawhuska, but called by the early French ‘‘Cheveux Blanche,” said to have been killed in a skirmish with the whites, was buried on the top of the big Blue Mound, and over his grave a Jarge stone heap was ereeted by his people. Dr. Badger, an old settler here, says that on his arrival, in 1844, this stone heap was a very conspicious landmark and could be seen from a great distance. At that time it was 8 or 9 feet high and aboat the same in diameter at its base. When I first saw it, in 1867, there was still a por- tion of it plainly to be seen from the prairie in all directions; but in 1876 there was not a vestige of it remaiping.” Of the death and burial of this chief Mr. Holeombe says, ‘The exact date of the death of old White Hair can not here be given. He died at his village in the northern part of this county, however, and was buried on the summit of Blue Mound, in a stone sepulcher made for the oceasion. It is probable that this was about the year 1824. His grave was afterward broken into by white vandals in search of treasure.”* To the foregoing statements it may not be inappropriate to add the results of my own personal observations. During my residence of eight years in southwestern Missouri, 18535-1861, I traversed the entire valley s! History of Vernon County, Missouri, p. 142. e . WERE THE OSAGES MOUND BUILDERS ? 593 of the Osage River, from its junction with the Missouri to the extreme heads of the Little Osage and of the Marais des Cygnes, and was familiar with its entire southern water-shed west of the Niangua. And, though always a*persistent relic hunter, I never found, or saw, or heard of having been found by others, in that time, or since, in all that region, exceeding a dozen flint arrow-points, and not one stone ax, or celt, or other implement in stone, or ornament of bone or shell, or any frag- ments of Indian pottery. The only burials presumably Indian I met with were on the east bank of Sac River, near the village of Orleans, in Polk County, Missouri. The perpendicular rocky cliff rises from the river bottom at that place 75 or 80 feet, and is capped with shelly sub- earboniferous limestone, overgrown with briars and stunted bushes. On the verge of this precipice I found, in 1853, five small eairns a few feet from each other, constructed of rough stones rudely laid up, in di- “mensions 34 feet high and 3 or 4 feet in diameter. Oi opening them each was found to contain the fragments of a single human skeleton, much decayed, and broken in small pieces by the falling in of the loose stone covering. From the relative position of the bones, I inferred that the body had been placed upon the bare rock, in a squatting position, with the face to the west overlooking the river, and that the broken rocks of the surface had been piled up around it to protect it from destruction by wolves and vultures. The only work of art I discovered in or about the five stone heaps was a well-worn gun-flint with one of the skeletons. I saw no artificial earthen mounds there of any descrip- tion. In treating, specially of the history of Blue Mound Township, Mr. Holcombe says on page 539 of his “ History of Vernon County:” ‘In many other graves in the mound | Blue Mound| there have been found mingled with human bones tomahawks, knives, arrow-points, shell implements and ornaments, bone ear-rings, beads of various materials, sizes, and shapes, and other curious articles. Some of these relics are apparently of such antiquity as to lead almost to the thought that the graves containing them may be those of the Mound Builders, or of some other prehistoric race; but this is not at all probable. The graves are undoubtedly those of Osages, who, as is well known, were in this country as early at least as the year 1700.” I have not learned Mr. Holcombe’s authority for the statement he makes in regard to the discovery of *‘arrow-points, shell implements, and ornaments, bone ear-rings,” ete., found in the graves on Blue Mound. My investigations have failed to verify it. By persons who have resided in that immediate vicinity at an early day I am informed that in years past, quite a number of graves were distinctly seen on the slopes of the Blue Mound; but as in dimensions, construction, and relative position they exhibited the usual characteristics of an ordinary cemetery, and as none of them were opened to determine the question, H. Mis. 142——38 594 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. it was not known whether they inclosed the remains of Indians or white persons. And as to the relics, it is now not known that any of them were actually found in the graves; but they were found on the surface of the ground there, and subsequently turned up dy the plow about the base of the mound, as well as about the sites of the Big and Little Osage villages—as Dr. Morerod states—and are to this day occasion- ally found there. But the “‘tomahawks” are made of iron, and the ear-rings of brass; and if any implements or ornaments of bone or shell have been found associated with them, the reasonable conclusion is that they, too, were of French or English manufacture. Systematic investigation by adepts may yet discover the mortuary customs of the Osages. Their cemeteries have perhaps not yet been found. They died, of course, but as yet we are ignorant of the disposi- tion of their corpses. The suggestion of Dr. Morerod that they prac- tised cremation is scarcely tenable, for the negative reasons that no mention of such an extraordinary custom is made by Dr. Tissenet, Rénauit, or Lieutenant Pike; and that none of the crematories, or ancient fire-hearths (“altars”), have yet been found in the original Osage territory. In the absence of more accurate knowledge upon this point, it is not a violent presumption that these Indians—as the Pawnees, Dakotas, and other tribes of the plains have since been accus- tomed to do— placed their dead upon pole-scaffolds on the prairies, and in the branches of trees in the woods, as their final disposition, where the remains decayed, and in time were dispersed by the elements. — Hunter, in his “Captivity,” p. 300, says, of the Osages, ‘‘at or soon after burial, they cover the grave with stones, and for years after oc- casionally resort to it, and mourn over or recount the ‘merits and vir- tues of its silent tenant.” This was'not perhaps their general custom ; but, in regard to the burial of Old White Hair, is strictly true. Mr. Holcombe confirms it in his statement: “For many years up to 1870 the Osages made annual pilgrimages to the site of their ancient towns in this county, and of the graves of their ancestors and the tomb of the renowned chieftain, Pawhuska, on Blue Mound. Gathering about the mighty mound containing the ashes of their progenitors, they called to mind their virtues and lifting up their voices wept loudly and bitterly. Many citizens of the county have often heard them at their lamenta- tions. The Osages themselves called the Blue Mound the ‘Crying Mound” because it was to them a place of mourning and weeping.” * £ have seen it nowhere stated that the Osages conducted their lamenta- tions at any other locality excepting the Blue Mound, which towered above their principal village; and this fact alone is a strong basis for for the supposition that about the apex of this majestic natural eleva- tion thése Indians interred all of their distinguished chiefs; thus dis- posing of them, when dead, and of their common people’s corpses by different methods. We know that old White Hair was buried there, * History of Vernon County, pp. 142, 143. > ——— ia in WERE THE OSAGES MOUND-BUILDERS ? 595 and itis reasonably certain that this was the mound pointed out to Major Sibley, by the ‘‘old Chief,” as the burial place of “Jean Defoe.” * The singular absence of stone and bone implements in the valley of the Osage can ogly be explained by the hypothesis that prior to its oe- cupaney by the Osage Indians it was a neutral ground, only oceasion- ally visited by hunting parties of Indians residing on the Missouri, to the north, and on the Arkansas, to the south; in both of which local- ities evidences of long-continued tenancy before the kuowledge of metals are quite abundant. It is altogether probable, too, that when the Osages abandoned their territory on the Missouri and removed to the headwaters of the Osage River—about the close of the seventeenth century—they had secured fire-arms and European implements and utensils, and had adopted many of the methods of life of their French visitors.t The manners, customs, and practices of these Indians before their migration to the mounds and streams of Vernon County ean now only be conjectured; but there is no reason to doubt that in every respect they were identical with those of other pre-Columbian Indians of the Northwest. We are assured, however, that after that event in their his- tory they no longer employed stone as a material for weapons and tools; and they erected no mounds of earth as monuments over their dead, or for any other purpose. Dr. Beck, author of the “Gazetteer” before mentioned, may have inspected the Osage River personally before he published the statement that “Ancient works exist on this river, as elsewhere,” and that ‘ re- mains of fortifications and mounds are almost everywhere to be seen” there. And, if he did, it is not astonishing that he was led into such an error upon viewing the beautiful, faultless domes and terraces carved upon the great rocky cliffs of the Osage and the Niangua by the ¢a- pricious elements; or the isolated natural mounds in the prairie region beyond—enduring monuments, not of a by-gone people, but of a vastly remote glacial force. For when he wrote—sixty-seven years ago—arch- wology had not become a science, and geology was but in its infancy. Nor is it surprising that Major Sibley, an intelligent and educated officer of the Government, who resided for some years at the base of the great Blue Mound, should have accepted, without doubt or question, *The name of this chief is here probably incorrectly written. At the period of Lieutenant Pike’s visit, in 1806, Cheveux Blanche was the head chief of the Big Osages, and his son, Jean La Fon—as Pike wrote the name in his journal and official reports—was the second chief in authority. I have thought this orthography may possibly also be erroneous; because I remember, when a boy at my home near St. Louis, hearing the ‘‘ engagers,” recently returned from the Indian country, often mention a chief whom they called Jean Le Fou—‘‘ Mad,” or ‘“‘ Crazy John ”—on account of his peculiar eccentricities. It may be that Jean Defoe, Jean La Fon and Jean Le Fou were identical. tAs early as 1673 Marquette found Indias on the Mississippi, below the Ohio, well supplied with guns, powder, glass bottles, iron hoes, knives, hatchets, etc. 596 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. the extraordinary account of its recent erection by the Indians he was then residing amongst, as told to him by the “¢ Old Chief.” For to him glacial agency was unknown. Superstition had not yet abdicated to systematized investigation ; and society paid silent hamage to the mar- vellous and mysterious. ey big hips Pea a! ee er THE PROGRESS OF SCIENCE AS EXEMPLIFIED IN THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING.* By Prof. WILLIAM HarkKNEss, U.S. Naval Observatory, Two centuries ago the world was just beginning to awaken from an intellectual lethargy which had lasted a thousand years. During all that time the children had lived as their parents before them, the mechanical arts had been at a stand-still, and the dicta of Aristotle had been the highest authority in science. But now the night of medizval- ism was approaching its end, and the dawn of modern progress was at hand. Galileo had laid the foundation for accurate clocks, by discover- ing the isochronism of the simple pendulum; had proved that under the action of gravity, light bodies fall as rapidly as heavy ones; had invented the telescope and with it discovered the spots on the sun, the moun- tains on the moon, the satellites of Jupiter, and the so-called triple character of Saturn; and, after rendering himself immortal by his advo- cacy of the Copernican system, had gone to his grave, aged, blind, and fullof sorrows. His contemporary, Kepler, had discovered the laws— which while history endures, will associate his name with the theory of planetary motion; and he also had passed away. The first Cassini was still a young man, his son was a little child, and his grandson and great-grandson, all of whom were destined to be directors of the Paris Observatory, were yet unborn. The illustrious Huyghens, the discov- erer of Saturn’s rings, and the father of the undulatory theory of light, was in the zenith of his powers. The ingenious Hooke was a little younger, and Newton, towering above them all, had recently invented fluxions, and on the 28th of April, 1686, had presented his Principia to the Royal Society of London and given the theory of gravitation to the world. Bradley, who discovered nutation and the aberration of light; Franklin, the statesman and philosopher, who first drew the lightning from the clouds; Doliond, the inventor of the achromatic tel- escope; Euler, the mathematician who was destined to accomplish so much in perfecting algebra, the caleulus, and the lunar theory; Laplace, the author of the Mécanique Céleste; Rumford, who laid the founda- presidential Padieks delivered hae the Philosophical Society of Wiese December 10, 1887. (Bulletin Phil. Soc., vol. x, pp. xxxix-Ixxxvi.) 597 598 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS, tion of the mechanical theory of heat; Dalton, the author*of the atomic theory upon which all chemistry rests; and Bessel, the greatest of mod- ern astronomers,—these and others almost as illustrious, whom we can not even name to-night, were still in the womb of time. Pure science first felt the effects of the new intellectual life, and it was more than a century later before the arts yielded to its influence. Then came Hargreaves, the inventor of the spinning-jenny; Ark- wright, the inventor of the cotton-spinning frame ; Watt, who gave us the condensing steam-engine; Jacquard, the inventor of the loom for weaving figured stuffs; Murdock, the originator of gas-lighting; Evans, the inventor of the high-pressure steam-engine; Fulton, the tather of Steam navigation ; Trevithick, who ranks very near Watt and Evansin perfecting the steam-engine; and Stephenson, the father of railroads. If now we add the names of those who have given us the telegraph, to wit, Gauss, the eminent physicist and the greatest mathematician of the present century; Weber, Wheatstone, and Henry, all famous phys- icists, and Morse, the inventor and engineer, we have before us the demi-gods who have transformed the ancient into the modern world, given us machinery which has multiplied the productive power of the human race many fold, aunihilated time and space, and bestowed upon toiling millions a degree of comfort and luxury which was unknown to kings and emperors of old. The discoveries and inventions of the last two centuries have so far exceeded all others within historic times, that we are amply justified in calling this an age of amazing progress, and under the circumstances a little self-glorification is pardonable, perhaps even natural. The weekly and monthly records of scientific events which appear in so many newspapers and magazines are the immediate result of this, and the great increase of ephemeral scientific literature has led multitudes of educated people to believe that such records represent actual prog- ress. The multiplication of bricks facilitates the building of houses, but does not necessarily improve architecture. Similarly, the multiplica- tion of minor investigations improves our knowledge of details, but rarely affects the great philosophic theories upon which science is founded. The importance of human actions is measured by the degree in which they affect human thought, and the only way of permanently affecting scientific thought is by modifying or extending scientific theories. The men who do that, are neither numerous, nor do they re- quire weekly paragraphs to record their deeds; but their names are honored by posterity. Even in this golden age the advance of science is not steady, but is made by spasmodic leaps and bounds. Mere scientific brick-making, commonly called progress, is always the order of the day until some genius startles the world by a discovery affecting accepted theories. Then every effort is directed in the new line of thought until it is measurably worked out, and after that brick-making again resumes its place. While the progress in two centuries has been THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING. 599 immense, the progress in a week or a month is usually almost. nil. Optimism has its uses in many departments of human affairs, but science should be cool and dispassionate, having regard only tor the truth. To make a trustworthy estimate of the actual state of the whole vast realm of science would be a task beyond the powers of any one man; but perhaps it will not be amiss to spend the time at our disposal this evening in briefly reviewing the recent progress and present con- dition of the fundamental processes upon which the exact sciences rest;— I allude to the methods of weighing and measuring. Physical science deals with many quantities, but they are all so re- lated to each other that almost every one of them ean be expressed in terms of three fundamental units. As several systems of such units are possible, it is important to select the most convenient, and the con- siderations which guide us in that respect are the following: (1) The quantities selected should admit of very accurate Comparison with other quantities of the same kind. (2) Such comparisons should be possible at all times and in all places. (3) The processes necessary for making such comparisons should be easy and direct. (4) The fundamental units should be such as to admit of easy defi- nitions and simple dimensions for the various derived units. Scientific men have long agreed that these requirements are best fulfilled by adopting as the fundamental units, a definite length, a definite mass, and a definite interval of time. Length is an element which can be very accurately measured and copied, but it must be defined by reference to some concrete material standard, as for ex- ample, a bar of metal, and as all substances expand and contract with changes of temperature, it is necessary to state the temperature at which the standard is correct. A standard of mass, consisting of a piece of platinum, quartz, or other material not easily affected by atmospheric influences, probably fulfills the conditions set forth above better than any other kind of magnitude. Its comparison with other bodies of approximately equal mass is effected by weighing, and as that is among the most exact of all laboratory operations, very accurate copies of the standard can be made, and they can be carried from place to place with little risk of injury. Time is also an element which can be measured with extreme precision. The imme- diate instruments of measurement are clocks and chronometers, but their running is checked by astronomical observations and the ulti- mate standard is the rotation of the earth itself. It is important to note that the use of three fundamental units is simply a matter of convenience and not a theoretical necessity, for the unit of mass might be defined as that which at unit distance would generate in a material point unit velocity in unit time; and thus we should have a perfectly general system of measurement based upon only two fundamental units, namely, those of space and time. Such a sys- tem is quite practicable in astronomy, but can not yet be applied with 600 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. accuracy to ordinary terrestrial purposes. According to the law of gravitation Mass = Acceleration x (Distance)? and as in the case of the earth we can measure the quantities on the right-hand side of that equation with considerable accuracy, we can sat- isfactorily determine the earth’s mass in terms of the supposed unit. That suffices for the needs of astronomy, but for other scientific and commercial purposes a standard of mass having a magnitude of about a pound is necessary, and as two such masses can be compared with each other from five to ter thousand times more accurately than either of them can be determined in terms of the supposed unit, three funda- mental units are preferable to two. The Chaldeans, Babylonians, Persians, Greeks, and Romans all seem to have had systems of weights and measures based upon tolerably defi nite standards, but after the decline of the Roman Empire these stand ards seem to have been forgotten, and in the beginning of the sixteenth — century the human body had so far become the standard of measure- ment that the units in common use, as for example, the foot, palm, ete., were frequently taken directly from it. The complete table of measures of length was then as follows: The breadth (not the length) of four barley corns make a digit, or finger breadth; four digits make a palm (measured across the middle joints of the fingers); four palms are one foot; a foot and a half is a cubit; ten palms, or two feet and a half, are a step; two steps, or five feet, are a pace; ten feet area perch; one hundred and twenty-five paces are an Italic stadium; eight stadia, or one thousand paces, are an Italic mile; four Italic miles are a German mile; and five Italic miles are a Swiss mile It was then the practice to furnish standards of length in books by printing in them lines a foot or a palm long, according to the size of the page, and. from these and other data it appears that the foot then used on the continent of Europe had a length of about ten English inches. In England the first attempts at scientific accuracy in matters of measurement date from the beginning of the seventeenth century, when John Greaves, who must be considered as the earliest of the scientific metrologists, directed attention to the difference between the Roman and English foot by tolerably accurate determinations of the former, and also attempted the investigation of the Roman weights. He was followed by Dr. Edward Bernard, who wrote a treatise on ancient weights and measures about 1685, and towards the end of the century the measurements of the length of a degree by Picard and J. D. Cassini awakened the attention of the French to the importance of rigorously exact standards. In considering the progress of science with respect to standards of length, we may safely confine our inquiries to the En- glish yard and the French toise and meter, for during the last two hun- dred years they have been almost the only standards adopted in scien- tific operations. . THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING. 601 The English measures of length have come down from the Saxons, but the oldest standards now existing are the exchequer yards of Henry VII (1490)* and Elizabeth (1583).7 These are both brass end measures, the former being an octagonal rod about half an inch in diameter, very coarsely made, and as rudely divided into inches on the right-hand end and into sixteenths of a yard on the left-hand end; the latter, a square rod with sides about half an inch wide, also divided into sixteenths of a yard and provided with a brass bed having end pieces between which the yard fits. One end of the bed is divided into inches and half inches. Francis Baily, who saw this Elizabethan standard in 1836, speaks of it as ‘‘ this curious instrument, of which it is impossible, at the present day, to speak too much in derision or contempt. A common kitchen poker, filed at the ends in the rudest manner by the most bungling workman, would make as good a standard. It has been broken asunder, and the two pieces have been dove-tailed together, but so badly tbat the joint is nearly as loose as that of a pair of tongs. The date of this fracture I coulil not ascertain, it having occurred beyond the memory or knowledge of any of the officers at the Exchequer. And yet, till within the last ten years, to the disgrace of this country, copies of this measure have been circulated all over Europe and America, with a parchment document accompanying them (charged with a stamp that costs £3 10s. exclusive of official fees) certifying that they are true copies of the English standard.”¢ In the year 1742 certain members of the Royal Society of London, and of the Royal Academy of Sciences of Paris, proposed that, in order to facilitate a comparison of the scientific operations carried on in the two countries, accurate standards of the measures and weights of both should be prepared and preserved in the archives of each of these societies. This proposition having been approved, Mr. George Graham, at the instance of the Royal Society, had two substantial brass rods made, upon which he laid off, with the greatest care, the length of three English feet from the standard yard kept at the Tower of London. These two rods, together with a set of troy weights, were then sent over to the Paris Academy, which body, in like manner, had the measure ofa French half toise set off upon the rods, and keeping one, as previously agreed, returned the other, together with a standard weightof two mares, to the Royal Society. In 1835, Baily declared this copy of the half toise to be of little value, because the original toise-étalon was of iron and the standard temperature in France differed from that in England.§ In his opinion the French should have sent over an iron half toise in exchange for the English brass yard, but this criticism loses much of its force when it is remembered that in 1742 neither England nor France *50, p. 34, and 5, pp. 51, 52. (The numbers cited in the foot-notes refer to those ~ of the Bibliography at the end of the article.) + 50, p. 25. t 37, p. 146. § 37, p. 37, 602 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. had fixed upon a temperature at which their standards were to be re- garded as of the true length. On the return of the rod from Paris Mr. Graham caused Jonathan Sisson to divide the English yard and the French half toise each into three equal parts, after which the rod was deposited in the archives of the Royal Society, where it still remains.* Objection having been made that the original and legal standard yard of England was not the one at the Tower, but the Elizabethian stand- ard at the Exchequer, the Royal Scciety requested Mr. Graham to com- pare his newly made scale with the latter standard, and on Friday, April 22, 1743, he dic so in the presence of a committee of seven mem- bers of the Royal Society. In the following week the same gentlemen compared the Royal Society’s scale with the standards at Guildhall and the Tower, and also with the standards of the Clock-makers’ Company. These comparisons having shown that the copy of the Tower yard upon the Royal Society’s scale was about 0.0075 of an inch longer than the standard at the Exchequer, Mr. Graham inscribed upon the Royal So- ciety’s scale a copy of the latter standard also, marking it with the letters Exch., to distinguish it from the former, which was marked E. (English), and from the half toise which was marked F. (French).t In the year 1758 the House of Commons appointed a committee to inquire into the original standards of weights and measures of England; and under instructions from that committee, the celebrated instru- ment-maker, John Bird, prepared two brass rods, respecting which the committee speak as follows in their report: ‘And having those rods, together with that of the Royal Society laid in the same place, at the receipt of the Exchequer, all night with the standards of length kept there, to prevent the variation which the difference of air might make upon them, they the next morning compared them all and by the means of beam compasses brought by Mr. Bird found them to agree as near as it was possible.”{ One of these rods was arranged as a matrix for testing end measures, and the other was a line measure which the com- mittee recommended should be made the legal standard of England, and which has since been knowa as Bird’s standard of 1758. Respect- ing the statement that after lying together all night the rods were ali found to agree as near as it was possible, Baily says: ‘‘This is some- what remarkable, and requires further explanation, which unfortu- nately can not now be accurately obtained. For it is notorious that the measure of the vard of the Royal Society’s scale differs very con- siderably from the standard yard at the Exchequer: - - - Owing to this singular confusion of the lengths of the measures, which does not appear to havé been unravelled by any subsequent Committee, it has happened that the Imperial standard yard - - - has been assumed nearly 1 + 140 of an inch longer than the ancient measure of the kingdom.”§ There is little difficulty in surmising what Bird did. The Exchequer standard consisted of a rod and its matrix. The Royal *7, pp. 185-8. t®, pp. 541-556. $13, p. 434. § 37, p. 43. — THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING. 603 Society’s committee assumed the rod to be the true standard of 36 inches, and upon that assumption Graham’s measurements gave for the length of the matrix 36.0102 inches, and for the length of the Royal Society’s yard 36.0075 inches. The Parliamentary Committee of 1758 probably assumed the standard to consist of the rod and matrix together, which seems the better view; and by laying the rod in its matrix and measuring to the joint between them Bird would have got a length of about 36.0051 inches. The mean between that and 36.0075 would be 36.0063, which differs very little from the length of Bird’s standard resulting from Sir George Shuckburgh’s measurements. Thus the committee’s statement is justified, and there has been no falsi- fication of the ancient standards. On December 1, 1758, Parliament created another committee on weights and measures which in April, 1759, repeated the recommenda- tion that Bird’s standard of 1758 should be legalized, and further recom- mended that a copy of it should be made and deposited in some public office, to be used only on special occasions.* The copy was made by Bird in 1760, but owing to circumstances entirely unconnected with the subject, no legislation followed for sixty-four years. The Royal Commission appointed during the reign of George III to consider the subject of weights and measures made its first report on June 24, 1819, and therein recommended the adoption of the standard of length which had been used by General Roy in measuring the base on Hounslow Heath;t but in a second report, made July 13, 1820, they wrote: “We - - - have examined, since our last report, the rela- ~ tion of the best authenticated standards of length at present in exist- ence, to the instruments employed for measuring the base on Hounslow Heath, and in the late trigonometrical operations :—But we have very unexpectedly discovered, that an error has been committed in the con- struction of some of these instruments.¢ We are therefore obliged to recur to the originals which they were intended to represent; and we have found reason to prefer the Parliamentary standard executed by Bird in 1760, which we had not before received, both as being laid down in the most accurate manner, and as the best agreeing with the most extensive comparisons, which have been hitherto executed by various observers, and circulated through Europe; and in particular with the scale employed by the late Sir George Shuckburgh.” § Accordingly, when in 1824, Parliament at length took action, Bird’s standard of 1760 was adopted instead of that of 1753. The former be- ing a copy of a copy, its selection as a national standard of length seems so singular that the circumstances which brought about that result should scarcely be passed over in silence. Bird had a very “accurate brass scale 90 inches long, which he used in all bis dividing operations, whether upon cireles or straight lines, and which Dr. Maskelyne said was 0.001 of an inch shorter on three feet than Graham’s Royal Society *14, p. 463, t 26, p. 4. et)), joy SUPE § 27, p. 3; also 25 and 26, 604 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. yard E.* In the year 1792, or 1793, the celebrated Edward Troughton made for himself a 5-foot scale, which conformed to Bird’s, and which he afterwards used in laying down the divisions of the various instru- ments that passed through his hands. This was the original of all the standard seales he ever made, and at the beginning of the present century he believed these copies, which were made by the aid of micro- meter microscopes, to be so exact that no variations could possibly be detected in them either from the original or from each other. Among the earliest of the scales so made by Troughton was the one used by Sir George Shuckburgh in 179693 in his important scientific operations for the improvement of the standards. Subsequently, the length of the meter was determined by comparison with this scale and with the supposed fac-simile of it made by Troughton for Professor Pictet, of Geneva; and thus it happened that on the continent of Europe all measures were converted into English units by a reference to Sir George Shuckburgh’s scale. The Royal Commission of 1819 believed Bird’s standard of 1760 to be identical with Shuckburgh’s seale, and they legalized it rather than the standard of 1758, in order to avoid disturbing the value of the English yard which was then generally accepted for scientific purposes. There are yet four other scales of importance in the history of English standards, namely: The brass 5-foot scale made for Sir George Shuck- burgh by Troughton in 1796; two iron standard yards, marked 1A and 2A, made for the English Ordnance Survey department by Messrs. Troughton and Simms in 1826~27, and the Royal Society’s standard yard, constructed by Mr. George Dollond, under the direction of Cap- tain Henry Kater, in 1831. Bearing in mind the preceding history, the genesis of the present English standard yard may be thus summarized: In 1742 Graham trans- ferred to a bar made for the Royal Society a length which he intended should be that of the Tower yard, but which was really intermediate between the Exchequer standard yard of Elizabeth and its matrix. That length he marked with the letter E, and although destitute of legal authority, it was immediately accepted as the scientific standard and was copied by the famous instrument-makers of the time with all the accuracy then attainable. Thus it is in fact the prototype to which all the accurate scales made in England between 1742 and 1850 can be traced. Bird’s standard of 1758 was compared with the Exchequer standard and with the Royal Society’s yard E, and was of a length be- tween the two. Bird’s standard of 1760, legalized as the Imperial standard in June, 1824, was copied from his standard of 1758. After becoming the Imperial standard, Bird’s standard of 1760 was compared with Sir George Shuckburgh’s scale by Captain Kater in 1830, and by Mr. Francis Baily in 1834; with the Ordnance yards 1A and 2A in 1834 by Lieutenant Murphy, Rk. E., Lieutenant Johnson, R. N., and Messrs. * 15, p. 326. THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING. 605 F. Baily and Donkin; and with Kater’s Royal Society yard by Captain Kater in 1831. On October 16, 1834, the Imperial standard (Bird’s standard of 1760) was destroyed by the burning of the houses of Parlia- ment, in which it was lodged, and very soon thereafter the Lords of the Treasury took measures to recover its length. Preliminary inquiries were begun on May 11, 1838, and on June 20, 1843, they resulted in the appointment of a commission to superintend the construction of new Parliamentary standards of length and weight; among whose members the Astronomer Royal (now Sir George B. Airy), Messrs. F. Baily, ht. Sheepshanks, and Prof. W. H. Miller were prominent. The labori- ous investigations and experiments carried out by that commission can- not be described here, but it will suffice to say that for determining the true length of the new standard Mr. Sheepshanks employed a pro- visional yard, marked upon a new brass bar designated “ Brass 2,” which he compared as accurately as possible with Sir George Shuck- burgh’s scale, the two Ordnance yards, and Kater’s Royal Society yard. The results in terms of the lost Imperial standard were as follows: Brass bar 2 =36. 000084 from comparison with Shuckburgh’s scale, 0-36 inch. 36, 000280 from comparison with Shuckburgh’s seale, 10-46 inch. 36. 000303 from comparison with the Ordnance yard, LA. 36, 000275 from comparison with the Orduance yard, 2A. 36. 000229 from Captain Kater’s Royal Society yard. Mean = 36. 000234 Respecting this mean Mr. Sheepshanks wrote: ‘This should be pretty near the truth; but I prefer 56.00025, if in such a matter such a difference be worth notice. I propose, therefore, in constructing the new standard to assume that— “ Brass bar 2= 36.00025 inches of lost Imperial standard at 62° Fahr.” And upon that basis the standard now in use was constructed.* Turning now to the French standards of length, it is known that the ancient toise de magons of Paris was probably the toise of Charle- magne (A. D. 742 to 814), or at least of some Emperor Charles, and that its étalon was situated in the court-yard of the old Chatelet, on the outside of one of the pillars of the building. It still existed in 1714, but entirely falsified by the bending of the upper part of the pillar. In 1668 the ancient toise of the masons was reformed by shortening it five lines; but whether this reformation was an arbitrary change, or merely a change to remedy the effects of long use and restore the étalon to conformity with some more carefully preserved standard, is not quite clear.t These old étalons were iron bars having their two ends turned up at right angles so as to form talons, and the standardizing of end measures was effected by fitting them between the talons. Being placed on the outside of some public building, they were exposed to wear from constant use, to rust, and even to intentional injury by ma- - 1, p. 536 and 2, p. 395. 606 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. licious persons. Under such conditions every étalon would sooner or later become too long and require shortening. Respecting the ancient toise of the masons there are two contradict. ory stories. On December 1, 1714, La Hire showed to the French Academy what he characterized as ‘‘a very ancient instrument of mathematics, which has been made by one of our most accomplished workmen with very great care, where the foot is marked, and which has served to re-establish the toise of the Cbhatelet, as I have been informed by our old mathematicians.”* Forty-four years later, on July 29, 1758, La Condamine stated to the Academy that ‘‘ We know only by tradition that to adjust the length of the new standard, the width of the arcade or interior gate of the grand pavilion, which served as an entrance to the old Louvre, on the side of the rune Fromenteau, was used. This opening, according to the plan, should have been twelve feet wide. Half of it was taken to fix the length of the new toise, which thus became five lines shorter than the old one.”t Of these two contradictory state- ments that of La Hire seems altogether most trustworthy, and the ordinary rules of evidence indicate that it should be accepted to the exclusion of the other. In 1668 the étalon of the new toise, since known as the totse-étalon du Chatelet, was fixed against the wall at the foot of the staircase of the grand Chatelet de Paris, by whom or at what season of the year is not known. Strange as it now seems, this standard (very roughly made, exposed in a public place for use or abuse by everybody, liable to rust, and certain to be falsified by constant wear) was actually used for adjusting the toise of Picard, that of Cassini, the toise of Peru and of the North, that of La Caille, that of Mairan—in short, all the toises employed by the French in their geodetic operations during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. The lack of any other recog- nized standard made the use of this one imperative; but the French academicians were well aware of its defects and took precautions to guard against them. The first toise copied from the étalon of the Chatelet for scientific purposes was that used by Picard in his measurement of a degree of the meridian between Paris and Amiens.¢ It was made about the year 1668, and would doubtless have become the scientific standard of France had it not unfortunately disappeared before the degree measure- ments of the eighteenth century were begun. The second toise copied from the étalon of the Chatelet for scientific purposes was that used by Messrs. Godin, Bouguer, and La Condamine for measuring the base of their are of the meridian in Peru. This toise, since known as the toise du Pérou, was made by the artist Langlois under the immediate direc- tion of Godin in 1735, and is still preserved at the Paris Observatory.§ Itis a rectangular bar of polished wrought-iron, having a breadth of 1.58 English inches and a thickness of 9.30 of an inch. All the other *2, p. 395. +17, p. 484. +6, Art. 4, p. 15. § 17 p. 487, and 53, p. C. 2. THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING. 607 toises used by the Academy in the eighteenth century, were compared with it, and ultimately it was made the legal standard of France by an order of Louis XV, dated May 16,1766. As the toise of Peru is the oldest authentic copy of the toise of the Chatelet, the effect of this order was simply to perpetuate the earliest known state of that ancient standard. The metric system originated from a motion made by Talieyrand in the National Assembly of France, in 1790, referring the question of the formation of an improved system of weights and measures, based upon a natural constant, to the French Academy of Sciences; and the prelim- inary work was intrusted to five of the most eminent members of that Academy,—namely, Lagrange, Laplace, Borda, Monge, and Condorcet. On March 19, 1791, these gentlemen, together with Lalande, presented to the Academy a report containing the complete scheme of the metric system. In pursuance of the recommendations in that report the law of March 26, 1791, was enacted for the construction of the new system, and the Academy of Sciences was charged with the direction of the necessary operations. Those requisite for the construction of a standard of length were: (1) The determination of the difference of latitude between Dunkirk and Barcelona. (2) The re-measurement of the ancient bases which had served for: the measurement of a degree at the latitude of Paris, and for making the map of France. - (3) The verification by new observations of the series of triangles em- ployed for measuring the meridan, and the prolongation of them as far as Barcelona. This work was intrusted to Méchain and Delambre, who carried it on during the seven years from 1791 to 1798, notwithstanding many great difficulties and dangers. The unit of length adopted in their operations was the toise of Peru, and from the are of 9° 40/ 45” actually measured, they inferred the length of an are of the meridian extending from the equator to the pole to be 5,130,740 toises. As the meter was to be one ten millionth of that distance, its length was made 0.5130740 of a toise, or, in the language of the committee, 443.296 lines of the toise of Peru at a temperature of 13° Reaamur (164° C. or 614° Fahr.).* Before attempting to estimate how accurately the standards we have been considering were inter-compared it will be well to describe briefly the methods by which the comparisons were effected. In 1742 Graham used the only instruments then known for the purpose,—namely, very exact beam compasses of various kinds, one having parallel jaws for taking the lengths of the standard rods, another with rounded ends for taking the lengths of the hollow beds, and still another having fine points in the usual manner. The jaws, or points, of all these instru- ments were movable by micrometer screws having heads divided to show *22, pp. 432, 433, and 642. 608 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. the eight hundredth part of an inch directly, and the tenth of that juantity by estimation; but Mr. Graham did not consider that the measurements could be depended upon to a greater accuracy than one sixteen-hundredth of an inch.* Troughton is ge nerally regarded as the author of the application of micrometer microscopes to the comparison of standards of length, but the earliest record of their use for that purpose is by Sir George Shuckburgh in his work for the improvement of the standards of weight and measure, in 1796~98.t Since then their use has been gen- eral; first, because they are more accurate than beam compasses, and second, bécause they avoid the injury to standard scales which neces- sarily results from placing the points of beam compasses upon their graduations. As the objective of the microscope forms a magnified image of the standard, upou which the micrometer wires are set by the aid of the eye-piece, it is evident that in order to reduce the effect of imperfections in the micrometer, the objective should have the largest practicable magnifving power. To show the progress in that direction the optical constants of the microscopes, by means of which some of the most important standards have been compared, are given in the accom- pany ing table: Mag- | Equiva- Value of 0 apt one revo- Bower nifying lent focus NS TENS Date. Observer. of micro- lution of ) : | power ONE] OUT eye- Cinals we ‘objective. piece. bj ter screw. |— ~ —— -— = Inches. | Inches. I7O7e pole Georee Shuckbureh—-<- 2-2. -ssces <2 <- 14 Sf 1.50 | 0.061000 isis aptaimLenty, Katen. 2. = - ssa. === 180 (a3) leeeereeee . 00428 NSSAG Maram Cisp by alliy-= tas) seioee -emsens seer 27a 250) t - 00500 1Ss4e Mieroutenant Murphy. IR ibose 3. 2 soc ania Pe eee ONO), pesos 2.| .00500 SHOR RAS HeEODSNAMKS cee es cite ies ame see Cae c eel Sseereae (238) Fine - 00358 1864 | General’A. R. Clarke, R. E.--.----.------- 60 4, 0. 67 . 00287 1880 | Prof. W. A. Rogers, 1 inch objective .--.-.-|-------- C2 is Sees . 00079 | Prof. W. A. Rogers, 4inch objective -...-...|..-...-- (2856) )\eaeeeeee . 00035 Brot. Wie A: Rogers, 4 inch phiecinwe Bt Bove 303 | ana (B27) eee ete te OOO) 18383 | Imbem@ational Bureau) 2c. 54> sesso 90 NC ine 0.83 | 0.00394 Nore.—The magnifying power of Sir George Shuckburgh’s microscope seems to be referred to a distance of 12 inches for distinct vision. The powers inclosed in paren- theses are estimated upon.the assumption that the respective micrometer screws bad one hundred threads per inch. In the memoirs of the French Academy, nothing is said respecting the method adopted by the Academicians for comparing their various toises ; but in his astronomy, Lalande states that the comparisons were effected partly by beam compasses, and partly by superposing the toises upon each other and examining their ends, both by touch and with magnify- ing-glasses; they being all end standards.t For the definitive adjust- ment of the length of their meters, which were also end standards, the French Metric Commission used a lever compar ator by Lenoir. *8 pp. 5456, 421, p. a7: $19, p. 8. THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING 609 In 1742 Graham used beam compasses, which he considered trust- worthy to 0.00062 of an inch, in comparing standards of length; but at that time the French Academicians made their comparisons of toises only to one twentieth or one thirtieth of a line, say 0.00300 of an inch, and it was not until 1758 that La Condamine declared they should be compared to 0.01 of a line, or 0.00089 of an English inch ‘‘ if our senses aided by the most perfect instruments can attain to that.”* Half a century later, ten times that accuracy was attained by the lever com- parator of Lenoir, which was regarded as trustworthy to 0.000077 of an inch.t The heads of micrometer microscopes are usually divided into one hundred equal parts, and if we regard one of these parts as the least reading of a microscope, then in 1797, Sir George Shuckburgh’s micro- scopes read to one ten thousandth of an inch; and the least reading of microscopes made since that date has varied from one twenty thou- sandth to one thirty-five thousandth of an inch. : Date. Authority. - abuehe dye) yard and of Mie the commit- tee meter, CM. Ti eS os C2 eS Oe See a UASSIEri tn ose eo ws oe 39. 380917 39, 36994 SUS}. | Se Be a eee Kistone ees. we Ses 39. 37079 39. 36990 hori eeie ae al cree onal a\eraic'c acim mo Baril PALLY ca—'s ew ers ated os 39. 369678 39. 36973 Stee aero oe a a ee (Ola Kei eof. co eine 39. 370432 39. 36970 [eles 2a) = Se Seat Se ere ee Womstoek oo... ee 39. 36985 39. 36984 MNGISeriIMINALeumMeane- see See eet Sec ccs x paA ee 39. 36980 * See 73 and 74, ; 628 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL AUTHORITIES CONSULTED IN THE PREPARA- TION OF THE FOREGOING ADDRESS. NoTe.—The abbreviation ‘‘E. P. P.” is used to designate English Parliamentary Papers. Some of these papers are of folio size and others of octavo size, but in the official sets they are all bound up indiscriminately in volumes of folio size, measuring 13 by 84 inches. Throughout the preceding pages authorities in this list are usually cited by num- ber and page. For example, ‘‘30, p. 91” would indicate page 91 of Captain Kater’s account of his comparisons of various British standards of linear measure, contained in the Philosophical Transactions for 1821. 1. Prcarp, M. Abbé. De mensuris. Divers ouvrages. Mém. de Acad. Roy. des Sciences, 1666-1699, tome 6, pp. 532-549. Paris, 1730. 2. Hing, M. DELA. Comparaison du pied antique Romain a celui du Chatelet de Paris, avec quelques remarques sur d’autres mesures. Mém. de Acad. Roy. des Sciences, 1714, pp. 394-400. Paris, 1717. 3. FOLKES, MARTIN. An account of the standard measures preserved in the Capitol at Rome. Phil. Trans., 1735-’36, pp. 262-266. 4. MAuPERTUIS. La figure de la terre, déterminée par les observations de MM. de Maupertuis, Clairaut, Camus, le Monnier, - - - Outhier, - - - Celsius, - - - faites par ordre du Roy au cercle polaire. Paris, 1738. 16mo., pp. xxviii + 184. 5. CASSINI DE THuRY. Sur la propagation du son. (On p. 135 has statement respecting standards of length exchanged between the French Academy and the English Royal Society.) Mém. de l’Acad. Roy. des Sciences, 1735, pp. 128-146. Paris, 1740. 6. Degré du méridien entre Paris et Amiens, déterminé par la mesure de M. Picard et par les observations de MM. de Maupertuis, Clairaut, Camus, le Monnier, - - - mG 1740, 16mo, pp. lvj + 116. 7. GRAHAM, GEORGE. An account of the proportions of the English and French measures and weights, from the standards of the same, kept at the Royal Society. Phil. Trans., 1742, pp. [185-188]. 8. GRAHAM, GEORGE. An account of a comparison lately made by some gentle- men of the Royal Society, of the standard of a yard, and the several weights lately made for their use; with the original standards of measures and weights in the Exchequer, and some others kept for public use, at Guild-hall, Founders-hall, the Tower, ete. Phil. Trans., 1743, pp. [541-556]. 9. SaeerN DE TuurRy. La méridienne de VObservatoire royal de Paris, vérifiée dans toute l’étendue du royaume par de nouvelles observations. Paris, 1744. 8vo, pp- 292 + eexxxyj. 10. REYNARDSON, SAMUEL. A state of the English weights and measures of capac- ity, as they appear from the laws as well ancient as modern ; being an attempt to prove that the present avoirdupois weight is the legal and ancient standard for the we ghts and measures of this Kingdom. Phil. Trans., 1749-50, pp. 54-71. 11. ConpaMINE, M. DE LA. Nouyeau projet dune mesure invariable, propre a servir de mesure commune A toutes les nations. Mém. delAcad. Roy. des Sciences, 1747, pp. 489-514. Paris, 1752. 12. BoucuEr, Camus, CassINI DE THURY Prneré. Opérations faites par ordre de Académie pour mesurer l’intervalle entre les centres des Pyramides de Ville- juive & de Juvisy, ete. Mém. de ’Acad. Royale des Sciences, 1754, pp. 172-186. Paris, 1759. 13. Lord Carysrort. Report from the Committee appointed to inquire into the original standards of weights and measures in this Kingdom, and to consider the laws relating thereto. (Dated 26th May, 1758, and see to by the House June 2, 1758.) THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING. 629 Printed on pp. 411-451 of Reports from Committees of the House of Commons, which have been printed by order of the House, and are not inserted in the Journals. Re- printed by order of the House. Vol. 2. Miscellaneous subjects. (June 10, 1737, to May 21, 1765). Reprinted in 1803. Folio, 163 x 102’. pp 468. 14. Lord Carysrort. Report from the Committee appointed (upon the first day of Dee., 1758) to inquire into the original standards of weights and measures in this Kingdom, and to consider the laws relating thereto. (Dated 11th April, 1759, and agreed to by the House April 12, 1759.) Printed on pp. 453-463 of Reports from Com- mittees of the House of Commons, which have been printed by order of the House, and are not inserted in the Journals. Reprinted by order of the House. Vol. 2. Miscellaneous subjects. (June 10, 1737, to May 21, 1765). Reprinted in 1803. Folio, 162” x 102”. pp. 463. 15. MASKELYNE, Rev. NEvit (Astronomer Royal). The length of a degree of lat- itude in the province of Maryland and Pennsylvania, deduced from the foregoing operations (by Messrs. Chas. Mason and Jeremiah Dixon); by the Astronomer Royal. Phil. Traus., 1768, pp. 323-325. 16. Norris, Henry. An inquiry to show what was the ancient English weight and measure according to the laws or statutes prior to the reign of Henry the Seventh. Phil. Trans., 1775, pp. 48-58. 17. CONDAMINE, M. DE LA. Remarques sur la toise-étalon du Chatelet, et sur les diverses toises employées aux mesures des degrés terrestres & a celle du pendule a secondes. Mém. de l’Acad. Roy. des Sciences, 1772, 2° partie. pp. 482-501. Paris, 1776. 18. Roy, Major-General WM. An account of a measurement of a base on Hounslow Heath. (Four large folding plates.) Phil. Trans., 1785, pp. 385-430, 19. La LanbE, J6rROME LE Francais. De la grandeur et de la figure de la terre. Astronomie, tome 3, pp. 1-47. (3° édition; Paris, 1792.) 20. Borpa, CouLomMB, LeGENDRE, LAPLACE, Prony et Brisson. Rapport sur la vérification de Vétalon qui doit gervir pour la fabrication des poids républicains. Annales de Chimie, Paris, 1797, tome 20, pp. 269-273. 21. SHUCKBURGH EVELYN, Sir Gro. An account of someendeavors to ascertain a standard of weight and measure. Phil. Trans., 17938, pp. 133-182. 22. VAN-SWINDEN, TRALLES, LAPLACE, LEGENDRE, M&CHAIN, DELAMBRE, et Ciscar. Rapport sur la détermination de la grandeur de Vare du méridien compris entre les paralléles de Dunkerque et Barcelone, et sur la longueur du metre qu’on en déduit. Base du Systeme Métrique Décimal, tome 3, pp. 415-433. Paris, 1810. 4to. 23. KaTeR, Capt. Henry. An account of experiments for determining the length of the pendulum vibrating seconds in the latitude of London. Phil. Trans., 1818, pp. 33-102. 24. Karer, Capt. Henry. On the length of the French métre estimated in parts of the English standard. Phil. Trans., 1818, pp. 103-109. 25. Experiments relating to the pendulum vibrating seconds of time in the lati- tude of London. 41 pp. (E. P. P.) Accounts and papers. Session, 27 Jan.—10 June, 1818. Vol. 15. Folio, 13” x 8}. This is averbatim reprint of Captain Kater’s papers in the Phil. Trans., 1818, pp. 33-109. 26. BANKS, CLERK, GILBERT, WOLLASTON, YOUNG, and Kater. First report of the commissioners appointed to consider the subject of weights and measures. (Dated 24 June, 1519). 17pp. (E.P. P.) Report from commissioners. Session, 21 Jan.—13 July, 1819. Vol.11. Folio, 13} x 84”. 27. CLerK, GILBERT, WOLLASTON, YOUNG, and Karerr. Second report of the com- missioners appointed by His Majesty to consider the subject of weights and measures. (Dated July 13, 1820). 40 pp. (E.P. P.) Reports from commissioners. Session, 21 April to 23 Nov., 1820. Vol. 7. Folio, 13}/’ x 8}. 23. CLERK, GILBERT, WOLLASTON, YOUNG, and Karer, Third report of the com- missioners appointed by His Majesty to consider the subject of weights and measures, 630 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. (Dated March 31, 1821). 6pp. (E.P. P.) Reports from committees. Session, 23 Jan. to 11 July, 1821. Vol. 4. Folio, 13}’’ x 84”. 29. Report from the Select Committee on Weights and Measures. (Dated May 28, 1821). 7 pp. (E. P. P.) Reports frem committees. Session, 23 Jan. to 11 July, 1821. Vol. 4. Folio, 134” x 83”. 30. KaTER, Capt. HENry. An account of the comparison of various British stand- ards of linear measure. Phil. Trans., 1821, pp. 75-94. 31. Report from the Select Committee of the Houseof Lords - - - (onpetition from Glasgow relative to) - - - the bill entitled ‘‘An act for ascertaining and establishing uniformity of weights and measures” - - - together with the min- utes of evidence taken before said committee. (Dated 2 March, 1824). 35pp. (E. P. P.) Reports from committees. Session, 3 Feb. to 25 June, 1824. Vol. 7. Folio, 13" & SH" 32. KATER, Capt. Henry. An account of the construction and adjustment of the new standards of weights and measures of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland. Phil. Trans., 1826, part 2, pp. 1-52. r 33. KATER, Capt. HENRY. On errors in standards of linear measure, arising from the thickness of the bar on which they are traced. Phil. Trans., 1830, pp. 359-381. 34. Kater, Capt. Henry. An account of the construction and verification of a copy of the imperial standard yard made for the Royal Society. Phil. Trans., 1831, pp. 345-347, 35. Minutes of evidence taken before the select committee on bill to amend and render more effectual two acts of the 5th and 6th years of the reign of his late Maj- esty King George the 4th, relating to weights and measures. 67 pp. (EH. P. P.) Reports from committees. 1834. Vol. 18, part 1. Folio, 13’ x 84”. 36. Report from the select committee on the weights and measures act; together with the minutes of evidence. (Dated 17 June, 1835). 60 pp. (E. P. P.) Reports from committees. Session, 19 Feb. to 10 Sept., 1835. Vol. 18. Folio, 13’ x 84”. 37. BAILY, FRANCIS. Report on the new standard scale of this (the Royal Astro- nomical) Society. (Gives also a history of English ‘standards of length.) Mem, Roy. Ast. Soc., 1836. Vol. 9, pp. 35-184. 38. Airy, Sir Gro. B. Extracts of papers, printed and manuscript, laid before the Commission appointed to consider the steps to be taken for restoration of the standards of weight and measure, and the subjects connected therewith. Arranged by G. B. Airy, esq., Astronomer Royal. Printed by order of the Lords Cou:missioners of the Treasury. London, 1840. 4to, 155 pp. (Consists of a vast number of brief extracts giving the opinions of many experts upon various points connected with the con- struction and use of standards of weight and measure, and the advantages and dis- advantages of various systems of such standards. ) 39. AIRY, Batty, BETHUNE, HERSCHEL, LEFEVRE, LUBBOCK, PEACOCK, SHEEP- SHANKS. Report of the commissioners appointed to consider the steps to be taken for restoration of the standards of weight and measure. (Dated 21 Dec., 1841). 106 pp. (E. P. P.) Reports from commissioners. Session, 3 Feb. to 12 Aug., 1842. Vol. 25. Folio. 40. KeLiy, Patrick. The universal cambist: being a full and accurate treatise on the exchanges, coins, weights, and measures of all trading nations and their col- onies. By P. Kelly, LL. D. 2d edition. London, 1835. - 2 vols., 4to. Vol. 1, pp. x] + 422; vol. 2, pp. xxiv + 380. 41. YOLLAND, Capt. Wm. An account of the measurement of Lough Foyle base in Ireland, with its verification and extension by triangulation ; etc., ete. Published by order of the Hon. Board of Ordnance. London, 1847. 4to, pp. 154 + [117]. 42. Atry, Rossk, WROTTESLEY, LEFEVRE, LUBBOCK, PEACOCK, SHEEPSHANKS, HERSCHEL, MILLER. Report of the commissioners appointed to superintend the construction of new parliamentary standards of length and weight. (Dated March 28, 1854). 28 pp. (E. P. P.) Reports from commissioners. Session, 31 Jan. to 12 Aug., 1854. Vol. 19. Folio 13” x 8}’’. > ae THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING. 631 43. Abstract of ‘Report of the Commissioners appointed to consider the steps to be taken for restoration of the standards of weight and measure.” 16 pp. (E. P. P.) Reports from commissioners. Session, 12 Dec., 1854 to 14 Aug., 1855. Vol. 15. Folio, 13” x ee 44. Miuter, Prof.W.H. On the construction of the new imperial standard pound and its copies of piatinum; and on the comparison of the imperial standard pound with the Kilogramme des Archives. Phil. Trans., 1856. pp. 753-946. 45. Airy, Sir Gro. B. Account of the construction of the new national standard of length, and of its principal copies. Phil. Trans., 1857. pp. 621-702. 46. Copies ‘‘of a letter from the Comptroller General of the Exchequer to the Treasury, dated 3 June, 1863, transmitting a report on the Exchequer standards of weight and measure, dated 27 April, 1863, by Mr. Chisholm, chief clerk in the office of the Comptroller-General of the Exchequer; together with a copy of his report:” and, of a memorandum by the Astronomer Royal, dated 24 April, 1862, containing notes for the Committee on Weights and Measures, 1862. 51 pp. (Contains a complete descriptive list of all the old Exchequer stanards; a discussion on the moneyer’s pound; and a history of English legislation on weights and measures.) (E. P. P.) Trade (Generally). Session, 4 Feb. to 29 July, 1864. Vol. 58. Folio. 47, CLARKE, Capt. A. Rk. Comparisons of the standards of length of England, France, Belgium, Prussia, Russia, India, Australia, made at the Ordnance Survey Office, Southampton. Published by order of the Secretary of State for War. London, 1866. 4to, pp. 287. 48. CLARKE and JAMES. Abstract of the results of the comparisons of the stand- ards of length of England, France, Belgium, Prussia, Russia, India, Australia, made at the Ordnance Survey Office, Southampton, by Capt. A. R. Clarke, R. E., F. R.S., &c., under the direction of Col. Sir Henry James, R. E., F. R. S., &c., Director of the Ordnance Survey. With a preface by Col. Sir Henry James, R. E., F. R. S., &e. Phil. Trans., 1867, pp. 161-180. 49. CLARKE, Lt. Col. A. R. Results of the comparisons of the standards of length of England, Austria, Spain, United States, Cape of Good Hope, and of a second Rus- sian Standard, made at the Ordnance Survey Office, Southampton. By Lieutenant- Colonel A. R. Clarke, C. B., R. E., F. R.S., &c., under the direction of Major-General Sir Henry James, R. E., F. R. 8., &c., Director-General of the Ordnance Survey. With a preface and notes on the Greek and Egyptian measures of length by Sir Henry James. Phil. Trans., 1873, pp. 445-469. 50. CHISHOLM, HENRY WILLIAMS. Seventh annual report of the Warden of the Standards on the proceedings and business of the standard weights and measures de- partment of the Board of Trade. For 1872~73. 8vo, pp. 105. (Contains: Appendix Iv. Account of the standard weights and measures of Queen Elizabeth. pp. 10-26: Appendix v. Account of the standard weights and measures of Henry VIL. pp. 27- 34: Appendix vi. New standard weights and measures constructed and legalized from the reign of Queen Elizabeth to George IV. pp. 35-40.) (1. P. P.) Reports from Commissioners. Session, 6 Feb. to 5 Aug., 1873. Vol. 38. 51. CHisHorm, H. W. On the science of weighing and measuring, and standards of measure and weight. By. H. W. Chisholm, warden of the standards. 16mo, pp. xvi+192. London: Macmillan & Co., 1877. 52. HILGARD, JULIUS E. Report on the comparison of American and British stand- ard yards. Report of the Superintendent of the U.S. Coast Survey, 1877. Appendix No. 12, pp. 148-181. 4to. 53. Woxr, C. Recherches historiques sur les étalons de poids et mesures de VOb- servatoire, et les appareils qui ont servi 4 les construire. Annales de V’Obseryatoire de Paris. Mémoires, tome 17, pp. C.1-C.78. (Published in 1883. ) 54. WoLF, C. Résultats des comparaisons de la toise du Pérou au métre inter- national, exécutées au Bureau international des Poids et Mesures par M. Benoit. Comptes Rendus, 3 Avril 1888. Tome 106, pp, 977-982. 632 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. 55. Annual reports of the Warden of the Standards on the proceedings and busi- ness of the standard weights and measures department of the Board of Trade. 8vo. (Printed as English Parliamentary Papers and contained in the volumes of ‘‘ Reports from Commissioners.’’) | Nowon Volume of Reports No. of Report. - Dane’ ape from Commis- PAE ESS sinners. IG Sine GonGe SOBA eS ee orasee 186667 19 | 1867, Vol. 19. Uy Ree opioe Salas seeme nyo wayeieicis 1867-68 13 | 186768, Vol. 27. 210 eau aim Starr tee Rae nema L868—69 18 | 186869, Vol. 23. Ales See ise ececre cee aaa eete ns | ML SG9=Z0 25 | 1870, Vol. 27. Ste een sace seckeeseccss| TB70S 7 46 | 1871, Vol. 24. GUGM eee wee cs enccyeces cee. (MSE 203 | 1572, Vol. 35. CUM Cases eee ces aEe cose Heme cel ln beers: 105 | 1873, Vol. 38 SGhe eee eee eee ene ae eae 138 | 1874, Vol. 32. A ess Soe See Eae Se ee seers arian feel uci: 27165) 58 | 1875, Vol. 27. NOW ees Gabe Sareea ere 1875-76 68 | 1876, Vol. 26. Mt rs aoe tease sok Ses a| LOL OS age 12 | 1277, Vol. 33. IPA HS Seek 5 i eee en eas 1877-78 12 | 1878, Vol. 36. 56. Reports of the commissioners appointed to inquire into the condition of the Exchequer (now Board of Trade) standards. Presented to both Houses of Parlia- ment by command of Her Majesty. Folio. (Printed as English Parliamentary Papers, and contained in the volumes of ‘‘ Reports from Commissioners.” ) Novos Volume of Reports No. of Report. Date. ak from Commis- Pas ese sioners. WS tjepeetsloee erssiactse os ee ee= =| C4 duly eos 8 | 186768, Vol. 27. Pe ee SAE eS a eM ITE nee 3 Apr., 1869 133 | 1868-69, Vol. 23. SUM ee eas cece eee sol Tl eb eZO 1597) 1870 Viole 27. Athenee ease cee ee eee elec Mayadedd 438 | 1870, Vol. 27. OiMeece ree = wuertet cle cereal OV AMo len 265 | 1871, Vol. 24. (Genenalwlin dexcess siti-6. esc |e cee ee 101 | 1873, Vol. 38. *On the abolition of troy weight. +t On the inspeetion of weights and measures, ete. 57. ADAMS, JOHN QuINCY. Report upon weights and measures, by John Quincy Adams, Secretary of State of the United States. Prepared in obedience to the reso- lution of the Senate of the 3d of March, 1817. Washington: printed by Gales & Seaton. 1821. 8vo, pp. 245. (Contains report of F. R. Hassler on comparisons of English and French measures. pp. 153-170.) 58. ALEXANDER, J. H. Report (made to the governor of Maryland) on the standards of weight and measure for the State of Maryland; and on the construction of the yard-measures. Baltimore, Dec. 13, 1845. 8vo, pp. iv + 213. 59. HASSLER, FERDINAND ROpoOLPH. Papers on various subjects connected with the survey of the coast of the United States. Trans. Amer. Philosophical Society (Philadelphia), 1825, vol. 2, new series, pp. 232-420. 60. HassLer, F. R. Comparison of weights and measures of length and capacity. Reported to the Senate of the United States by the Treasury Department in 1382, and made by Ferd. Rod. Hassler. 22d Congress, 1st session, Ho. of Reps., Doc. No. 299. Washington, 1832. 8vo, 122 pp., with 4 folding plates. (Contains a paper by Trallés giving important details, not published elsewhere, respecting the original iron meters of the Commission des Poids et Mesures of 1799.) THE ART OF WEIGHING AND MEASURING. 633 61. HAssLER, F. R. Report from the Secretary of the Treasury, transmitting the report of F. R. Hassler, Superintendent of the Coast Survey, and of the fabrication of standard weights and measures. 25th Congress, 2d session, Senate, Doc. No. 79. Washington, 1837. 8vo, 16 pp. (Explains method adopted for determining sub- divisions of the troy pound.) 62. HassLer, F. R. Report upon the standards of the liquid capacity measures of the system of uniform standards for the United States; with description of a new original barometer, and of the balance for adjusting the half bushels by their weight of distilled water. By F. R. Hassler. 27th Congress, 2d session, Senate, Doc. No. 225. Washington, 1842. 8vo, 26 pp. and 3 folding plates. 63. McCuuiton, R. 8., and BacuE, A. D. Reports from the Secretary of the Treasury, of scientific investigations in relation to sugar and hydrometers, made, under the superintendence of Prof. A. D. Bache, by Prof. R.S. MeCulloh. 30th Congress, Ist session, Senate, Ex. Doc. No. 50. Washington, 1848. 8vo, pp. 653. 64. BacuE, Prof. ALEXANDER D. Report to the Treasury Department on the pro- gress of the work of constructing standards of weights and measures for the custom- houses, and balances for the States, and in supplying standard hydrometers to the custom-houses, from 1 Jan., 1848, to 31 Dec., 1856. 34th Congress, 3d session, Senate, Ex. Doc, No. 27. Washington, 1857. 8vo, 218 pp. with 6 folding plates. (Contains descriptions of yard dividing engine, and various comparators. ) 65. Rogers, Prof. W. A. On the present state of the question of standards of length. (Contains a bibliography.) Proceed. Amer. Acad. of Arts and Sciences (Boston), 1879-80. Vol. 15, pp. 273-312. 66. RoGers, Prof. W. A. On two forms of comparators for measures of length. 8vo, 12 pp. American Quarterly Microscopical Journal, April, 1579. 67. RoGcers, Prof. WM. A. Studiesin metrology. 5plates. (Contains description of the Rogers-Bond universal comparator.) Proceed. Amer. Acad. of Arts and Sciences, 1832-83. Vol. 18, pp. 267-398. 8vo. 68. RoGers, Prof. W. A. An examination of the standards of length constructed by the Société Génevoise. Proceed. Amer. Acad. of Arts and Sciences, 1884-’85. Vol. 20, pp. 379-389. 8vo. 69. RoGers, Prof. W. A. A study of the centimeter marked ‘‘ A,” prepared by the U.S. Bureau of Weights and Measures for the Committee on Micrometry. 8vo, 23 pp. Proc. Amer. Society of Microscopists. Vol. 32, p. 184. 70. RoGers, Prof. WM. A. Ona practical solution of the perfect screw problem. 8vo, 44 pp. Trans. Amer. Soc. of Mechanical Engineers. Vol. 5. 71. RoGers, Prof. W. A. A critical study of the action of a diamond in ruling lines upon glass. 8vo, 17 pp. Proc. Amer. Society of Microscopists. Vol. 32, p. 149. 72. Travaux et mémoires du Bureau International des Poids et Mesures, publiés sous ’autorité du Comité International, par le Directeur du Bureau. Paris. 4to. Tome 1, 1881, 391 pp.; T. 2, 1883, 413 pp.; T. 3, 1884, 348 pp.; 'T. 4, 1885, 421 pp.; T. 5, 1886, 416 pp. 73. TITTMANN, O. H. On the relatien of the yard to the meter. Bulletin No. 9, U.S Coast and Geodetic Survey. June 15, 1889. 4to., 8 pp. 74. TITTMANN, O. H. The Shu¢kburgh scale and Kater pendulum. Nature, April 10, 1690. Vol. 41, p. 538. 75. WALKER, Gen. J. T. On the unit of length of a standard scale by Sir George Shuckburgh, appertaining to the Royal Society. Proceedings Roy. Soc., Feb. 13, 189). Vol. 47, pp. 186-189. 76. LEHMANN, Dr. On the nature and distribution of the Babylonian metrical system. Nature, Dec. 19, 1889. Vol. 41, pp. 167-168, Cae ee reaps tases. Her aan eat aE sm : AFrae AL, Gi RED Sr Rete teat ts (Gs Bie wines $8 AG as ; : a me eS amuse Geeta s ey Cy! om 2 ea ana eid ay pe on ; ii ees ep nee! eatery E shrines on 6 ato ie zig a) ES barca ee iv: * a al day? BOs ee gar late OT asia tite. Es ee Srey ou RESTA SS CE + Ae wage Se 5 eras: a =) AE oe eH ef etl ihe Si iced s ge tem eae ‘ Miia Bec. ieee 7, Mats Tt. eORKy a ’ a at aie at) [ies giiss oar ene) \y-+ See i) Ve oa ye ra se Week yas Biers) ‘cal Pepin oa y)")- ris Slee. Fie) eee | ic Ge enginghe, ana af 2 = et ier es Mook ae Rey em ae AS aoe af Peeper ee iu ea elvss tA hegre a are Ai ast alts can es. te ae Meas ere tA al fbi S17) 1) lee gfe) eh es ie py : ain Fate seep ice Tesi ied Ey nes fags > ne at bee HES af Peak: (sees me ie aon iy Migs esl reg whe : am a Baier, ; ve Uv eee Lieb ibee” (alte ys Ear a, a= fi ia ae Wak Se i nae va ae BNR TA pee be at en ae Pat ee, ae Miri nee bale per a” a es a ; “Suh Sayan Pay Pane alte yA Sere Am sate eons om Sigatinn A ayy coh a ack nia ts Bet ee ee OR ye Sie DE Sa ean ear et aun. e's Bee G +50) inl 2 eae ee rr i aie eae Eee hig! Be te dor athe mie hea ee p Seis Spas ©. : ae | (Aes Bai baud iN ’ , + aoa: colar | a bey Ute oa See et re er alee ia i. Ee ies | cy Seo Cee ee pee cass erent Seca. 3. Be * i : , : 7 é : Be oer ar res ti) ti at, eae De atts ais me 2 a ay et ie ; Maps agar ia eee! IIe HG) Aad et en Spo ena ean Bs A No ey Aer aeliseangm 4: “tbr fa Sy. * ies = may te ciarbhiag? fea tare ts, Dake : : ee i NTA Sa ricer Lipghe RD eign Aol S te aor sri: i! y hie, eat ot bs AUB va gore - 4 Poi desken ete 2 a Suite a ciuaes fhm are oc cae ; i iat) eee femetle WS yitiy 7... ae eA oe 7 on Be *5 es ; ed ae eee eee Dig Hteeaideasee “ 48 ee ert ee eee A ny po "®t ea Beet ee Ree aaa.) 04) ah hae un toh ein ee “fe hye a ee each aay Kcr theo) fhe * oie, Raye ces | : Pi hee a ia Oy entre te iad hoehiaiagh ti pobre Ee: « e Pees ey PAS) Teton, 6 atsaet ihe, al GPa) Grell 0S. oh ge Se yr Pans oe rie oe now ee. Oi HM er aaa ae eae ‘ LS ae Cag OT ee ee = Gp Udine ay a ae oy Aa La t=! des hh, aad Ses ei Ci ol Ce ’ ok o ae o Ngai ; a $NA a) eee DETERMINATION OF THE MEAN DENSITY OF THE EARTH BY MEANS OF A PENDULUM PRINCIPLE. By J. WILSING. Translated and condensed by Prof. J. HOWARD GoRgE, Ph. D.* Four different methods have been used in the determination of the mean density of the earth. The:first is based upon the measurement of the deflection of the plumb-line in the neighborhood of great mount- ain masses; the second upon the determination of the length of the second’s pendulum at various distances from the earth’s center. Accord- ing to the third and fourth methods, the attraction of a body of known - mass, usually ofa globular shape, is ascertained by means of the torsion balance, or directly with an ordinary balance and compared with the constants of gravity. The first attempts towards the solution of this problem were by Mas- kelyne, receiving a new discussion at the hand of Hutton a few years later. Maskelyne’s results depended upon the measurement of the de- flection of the plumb-line caused by the attraction of Schehallien, in connection with an approximated value for the density of the moun- tain. This estimated density, derived from the superficial strata alone, was so subject to uncertainties that the result can be regarded as nothing more than a rough approximation. Later and more general investigations have shown that local deflection may arise from a variety of co-existing or conspiring causes, so that the attraction of elevations can be accounted for by the presence of depressions or interior defects in the earth’s mass. In such a case, a value for the attracting mass which is deduced from the exterior configuration alone, must lead to incorrect results. Similar objections can be applied to the method of pendulum Swinging, which was made use of by Carliniand Airy, and more recently by von Sterneck and Albrecht. Hence the invention by Coulomb of the torsion balance and its ap- plication by Cavendish to the problem in question marked a great advance towards its accurate solution. The great sensitiveness of this instrument makes its possible to render measurable the attraction of balls of a tew hundredweight, the mass of which can easily be ascer- *From Publicationen des astrophysikalischen Observatoriums zu Potsdam, vol. Vi, Potsdam, 1887, 1888, 635 636 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. tained by weighing, so that the determination of the density of the earth enters into the realm of laboratory investigation. However, this sensitiveness which eliminates the uncertainty in the computation of the attracting forces has, as a consequence, some disadvantages which were first mentioned by Francis Baily while engaged upon the same problem. These drawbacks consist chiefly of a limited inertia and sta- bility against accidental disturbances, especially temperature changes and the variations in the twisting force of the supporting thread. In the interesting investigations of A. Cornu and J. B. Baille the disturb. ances just referred to seem to have been essentially eliminated. Unfor- tunately it is not possible to form an opinion regarding the accuracy of the results from the short report that is given in Compt. Rend., 1878, LXXXVI, pp. 699-702. At all events measurements with the torsion balance must be regarded as especially difficult. For this reason the fourth method, the determination by the means of a balance of the change in weight of a body caused by the proximity of a second body of known mass, has the preference. It is true, however, that the ordinary balance is not sufficiently sensitive to measure the attraction of bodies as small as those employed in the torsion balance. Jolly, who first made use ot this method, utilized a ball of lead of 120 hundredweight. At this time Messrs. Kénig and Richarz are working at Jolly’s method, using a parallelopiped block of lead of 2,000 hun- dredweight. Since it is necessary to actually determine the weight of these large bodies, a task rendered difficult on account of their size, the measurement of their attraction requires the transposition of them while being weighed. Jolly had four scale pans, two of which were fastened below the others by a wire 21 meters long; he determined the increase in the weight of a glass vessel filled with mercury which was caused by its transfer to the lower scale pan under which was the at- tracting ball of lead. This transfer caused a loss of time, and necessi- tated a frequent stoppage of the balance, a condition which might seri- ously affect the results since the change in the relative positions of knife-edge and its resting place would bring about a deformity in the former, causing a disturbance in the oscillation of the balance. I have sought to overcome these difficulties by turning the instru- ment through 90°, that is, by replacing for a horizontal balance a verti- cal one or a pendulum whose knife-edge is above the center of gravity and very near to it, upon the hypothesis that the sensitiveness of the apparatus could be materially increased if it forms a rigid system and is protected from flexure by being supported with its length vertical. Then it is possible to succeed with smaller and more easily handled masses, and to prosecute the observations without difficulty while the necessity to stop the instrument during the progress of the work is en- tirely avoided. A trial apparatus was constructed in which the time of oscillation was proionged to the desired extent, giving results so har- monious that a final pendulum was completed in 1885 by Repsold, MEAN DENSITY OF THE EARTH. 637 DESCRIPTION OF THE APPARATUS. The pendulum consists of a drawn brass tube i" long, 4.15°" in diam- éter, and 0.16°" thick, which is strengthened near its middle by means ofaframe,C EF D. At this place are two mortises on opposite sides of the tube, E I’, rectangular in shape, 9°" long and 2°™ wide, for the insertion of the resting place or bed L for the knife-edge S which is firmly fastened to the pendulum, The upper portion of this bed is a slightly concave piece of agate of 6°™ in length and 1°" in width securely attached to the supporting brass. The knife-edge, alsoof agate, has the same length as its bed. Its cross-section is an equilateral triangle with sides 1.7°" long. The edge is not perfectly sharp, and on account of the concav- ity of the bed rests on it only near the end. The slits just referred to serve as a guide to the knife-edge and also admits the air into the interior of the tube so that there may be a quick and equable response to all temperature changes. The ends of the tube are closed by means of brass caps which carry conical pins. Upon these pins balls of brass, A, are attached by means of screws. The pins are prolonged beyond the balls and one of them carries three small mova- ble screws, N, whose determinations will be given later; at the other end corresponding to this addi- tional weight a brass disk of equal weight is screwed on so that the symmetry of the apparatus is pre- served. Through the upper end of the pendulum rod perpendicular to the length of the knife-edge there is a slender screw, G H, 7™ long, which serves in ad- justing the position of the center of gravity. Di- rectly before and behind the knife-edge circular mir- rors of 3.5°" diameter are attached, with whose as- sistance the swinging of the pendulum can be observed. In order to avoid magnetic interferences, brass is used throughout the entire in- strument. Fig1 DESCRIPTION OF THE OBSERVING-ROOM. The observing-room, 4™ square, is situated in the basement of the west wing of the observatory. As the walls are very thick and the room, being on the southern side directly under the cupola, is protected from the direct rays of the sun, the changes in the temperature are very slight. In the middle of the room there was a rigid pillar of brick with its foundation 3 feet deep. On its south side is the cast-iron bracket which supports the penduium, so arranged that when once placed in a perpen- dicular position it can be securely held so. The whole is protected 638 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. from air disturbances by means of a wooden box covered with cloth and fastened directly to the pillar. The front of the box can be taken off, so as to remove or replace the pendulum, while an opening, pro- vided with a cover, in the top allows the weights to be moved at will. On the sides in front of the mirrors, already described, are small square windows closed with glass. Later this box was covered with a coat of white lead. The telescope with which the oscillations were observed had an open- ing of 8™ and 80° focal distance. It was fastened on a brick pillar in communicating passage. The scale utilized in the observations was on glass; it was 50° in length, and was placed at a distance of 500°™ from the mirror. The magnifying power of the telescope was such that the tenth of a millimeter could be approximated, and after some prac- tice the twentieth, a value which represented about a second of are. The graduation error in the scale was never greater than 0.01, THE ATTRACTING MASSES. Until now balls of lead have been universally used. But on account of the softness of lead it is almost impossible to secure a geometric body homogeneous in its structure; besides, the continued suspension would bring about, through the action of gravity, deformities. For these reasons, notwithstanding its small specific gravity, the preference was given to cast-iron, and for practical convenience and the possibility of amore exact figure the cylindrical shape was chosen. They were cast under pressure, and upon a subsequent weighing and examination for specific gravity they appeared practically identical. These masses, each of which weighed 325 kilograms, were so hung by a wire rope over a system of pulleys that they always balanced one an- other, and could be easily moved, one up, the other down. The length of the rope was so adjusted that when one of the cylinders was directly opposite the upper end of the pendulum the other would be on the oppo- site side and directly on a line with the lower end. In order to obviate any lateral motion and consequent shaking, each cylinder was provided with guiding rollers which ran up tracks attached to uprights, firmly held in their proper places. This and similar precautions were so well taken that during the entire series of observations no jarring was ob- served. ARRANGEMENT OF THE OBSERVATIONS. When the pendulum was put in motion, before the cylinders were put in place, it was noticed if the amplitude was bisected by the vertical through the point of support. If not, the screw in the upper end, al- ready referred to, was made use of, aided, if necessary, by a change in the position of the thin plates on the top of the rod. The position of equilibrium was next determined by placing, for in- stance, the eastern weight near the upper end of the pendulum, observ- ing a series of four consecutive elongations, then changing the weights, observe another series of four elongations. Both series were, with few a eT a eS a eT a ee ee ee re ie MEAN DENSITY OF THE EARTH. 659 exceptions, separated from one another by a complete double swing. The observations were repeated, so as to have two or three sets of four readings for each day. The are of oscillation gradually decreased to a fixed limit, since the series were so arranged that the transfer of the weights could be made to follow that phase of oscillation in which the change in the direction of the force causes a retardation of its motion. The amplitude of the arc was between three degrees and a few minutes, with about 45/ as an average. With the determination of the position of equilibrium that of the du- ration of the oscillation is closely allied. The time of the transit of a division of the scale over the wire of the telescope could be estimated within 0.1 second. These transits were usually observed on three divis- ions. If the times of transits of the same phase were observed, the dif- ference would give an approximate value for the time of a double oscilla- tion; which, however, must be corrected for the decreased are owing to the resistance of the air. For the reduction of the observations there is still needed a deter- mination of the sensitiveness of the pendulum. Thisis also found from the period of oscillation, by changing the position of the supplemental weights attached to the upper end of the pendulum. Hach observed period in combination with the normal period gave the moment of in- ertia and the distance of the center of gravity from the knife-edge. In all the observations a chronometer giving stellar time was used, and was compared both before and after each series with the standard clock of the observatory. Barometric readings were made, as well as those for temperature, which were taken from thermometers placed in various parts of the room. Laplace noticed, and Bessel proved by experiments, that the shape of the knife-edge supporting a pendulum exerted an appreciable effect upon the period of oscillation and the diminution in the amplitude. Since this period furnishes an important element in all reductions, it was necessary to investigate the effect of the dulling of the knife-edge. At the same time the resistance of the air and its resulting interference were investigated. The computation of the moment of inertia was divided into parts, taking up first the moment for the mean position of the instrument as previously determined, using in this connection the moment of a mate- rial line coincident with the axis of the pendulum rod and perpendicu- lar to the line joining the centers of the attracting masses. The at- traction of the masses is: : 2afm g 6( Vv (a—h)?+ R?— V (a+h)+ R?+ 2h) in which mg is the weight of the ball, f a constant, 6, 2h, and R the specific gravity, height, and radius of the cylinder, and a the distance of the middle point of the ball to the center of the cylinder. If lis the distance of the center of the ball from the knife-edge, the moment will be: 2afmgdl (Va—h)?+R?— V(a+h)?+ R?+ 2h) 640 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. The effect of the screws and the rollers serving as guides for the cylinders was next investigated and allowance therefor duly made, likewise for such other parts as were not of an eliminating character. After making all corrections that presented themselves the result was the desired moment for the normal position of the pendulum. The next thing was to find what change was produced upon this moment by giving to the pendulum a certain position; that is, when the pendu- Jum is at a known point, as shown by the reading of the reflection on the scale. By combining both elongations certain terms in the com- putation disappeared, thus simplifying the labor. If 2~(a) represents the moment in the normal position of the pendulum, regarding @ as the distance from the origin, b the linear deviation of the middle of the ball, e the deviation, likewise expressed in linear measure, caused by attraction, the moment will be expressed by g(a+b—e) for the first position of the weights and gm(a—b—e) for the second. The sum of both is 2p(a—e)+b’p''(a—e), but since g//(a—e)=0, the resulting moment can be expressed by 2q(a)—2egp'(a), a value which can be ac- cepted as sufficiently accurate when it is considered that e never ex- ceeds two millimeters. Although the attraction of the cylinders upon the instrument is the- oretically determined with sufficient precision, yet the accuracy of the final result is limited by the closeness with which the constants are known. ‘Therefore it is preferable to eliminate from the final result those constants which can not be ascertained with the desired acecu- racy. This can be done in the following simple manner: Suppose a series of observations with the complete apparatus gave for the mean density 4, and a second series after diminishing the weights on the upper end of the pendulum gave 4,,; the difference be- tween these two values rests upon a false value for the specific gravity of the pendulum, not regarding errors of observation for the present. If is the error in the moment arising from this cause, the true value can be derived from 4=4,+ zt ,4=4,4+ ts m, m, tained from the observations. In this manner the attraction of the weights upon the pendalum-rod appears to be perfectly eliminated from the final result. It is conditioned upon the value accepted as the attraction of the balls alone, in which no uncertainty is involved, while the agreement 4, and 4,, furnishes a thorough control over the experi- ments. Correction for the resistance of the air was applied, and a law for the decrease in the amplitude sought. This was found to be proportional to the first power of the velocity, a result which agrees with the expres- sion found by Cornu and Baille for the effect of the air upon the torsion balance. The constants were determined with great care, and in each case the units of weight and measure were compared with the standards, while , m which m, and m,, are ob- / T ) a MEAN DENSITY OCF THE EARTH. 641 the specific gravity was ascertained from some metal taken from the same crucible from which the weights were cast. The relative position of the weights and pendulum balls during the observations was an im- portant factor, as was also the radius vector of each of the balls, and they were most carefully investigated. It was found that after the first few days there was no appreciable change in the length of the wire rope supporting the weights, so that the employment of the mean relative position could not introduce dangerous errors. The length of the pendulum balls from the knife-edge, the principal element entering into the computation of the moments, was measured by a standard catheto- meter belonging to the Prussian commission of standards. The dis- tance of the knife-edge from the scale was ascertained by means of direct measurement and by triangulation with results quite harmonious. In the determination of all the constarts the effort was made, and suc- cessfully it is believed, to keep the error within one unit in the third decimal place. Just here it might be mentioned that, taking every possible element into consideration, the resulting moment of the pendulum with the balls for both positions of the weights was 10.31066, while without the balls it was 4.35780, in which 6 represents the specific gravity of the weights. DISCUSSION OF THE OBSERVATIONS AND RESULTS. The observations consisted of the determination of the duration of oscillation and the equilibrium position of the pendulum, for which a series of fourteen observations were made with the balls on the pendu lum and twelve with the balls removed. They were begun with a large amplitude and continued until the are passed over was only six or ten minutes. In both cases a continuous decrease in the time showed it- self, which could not be explained by the usual reduction to the smallest swings. Hence the time was taken for two double swings when the amplitude was at an average value, and two or more times taken on each side of this value. These observations were adjusted graphically, a method which answered in this case in consequence of the regularity in the values. The theoretical time was compared with the observed, and the discrepancy reduced to a minimum. Knowing the equilibrium position of the pendulum, and the distance of the ball from this point, at each elongation a simple subtraction gave the dis- tance of the ball from the attracting body. The formula used in the final computation was: 4 i 5 ; g =a constant 437R [ 1+0—-(30-«) cos? p | in which 4 is the desired density, R the polar radius, o the ratio of the equatorial centrifugal force to the polar +) ¢ the elli »ticity of the 1 I ] Hee 1 R65 ati » (h90 OQ This o earth ( g99.15 224 py the geographicall atitude (52° 23”). This gave H. Mis. 142 41 642 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. with the balls 4,=5.651+ 0.017 and without 4,,=5.731£0.020. As al- ready intimated the discrepancy-is to be ascribed to the inaccuracy in the determination of the weight of the pendulum, so, using the formule already given :- |e 7 pe A Ay+~ , from which A= m, m,4,—m,,4,, m—M,, the reduced observations oe m,=4.6268 + 0.0136 m,,= 1.9269 + 0.006 from which the mean density 4=5.594+ 0.032. The probable error of the final result might have been reduced by it in- creasing the number of observations. Still it seemed better while test- ing this new method not to accumulate too much material or more than was needed to reach a reasonably accurate result. But since the ex- periments here made point to the possibility of a better solution of this problem, it is intended to carry the observations further, and by a new determination of the constants to secure results independent of their first determination. CONCLUSION. For the purpose of comparison, the previously-found values for the mean density might properly be given here. Maskelyne found from local deflection at Schehallien, 4.713 ; Colonel James, at Arthur’s Seat, 5.14; Carlini and Airy received from pendu- lum determinations 4.837 and 6.623, and in more recent times Menden- hall and von Sterneck, 5.77. Cavendish (5.48), Reich (5.49, in the revision 5.58), Baily (5.66, after correction by Cornu and Baille, 5.55), Cornu and Baille (5.56) used the torsion balance, finally Joily (5.692), Poyoting (5.69) utilizing the ordi- nary balance. The result bere found is considerably smaller than those found by Jolly’s method, and slightly larger than the values which the torsion balance gave, especially the corrected value of Baily. I think, however, that the correction here referred to as made by Cornu and Baille admits of criticism. As in the present case, Baily observed jn each position of the weights four stationary points. He also used the time when the balance was stationary at its greatest elongation for changing the weights, so that the last observation of each series might at the same time be the first of the next series. With most of his observations the difference between two consecutive elongations on the one side did not agree with the corresponding difference on the other, and furthermore this difference was always greater on the side where the first reading was. Cornu and Baille concluded that this lack of symme- try was owing to the presence of a constant error which was not eliminated in the subsequent adjustments. However, it is not equally apparent that the tendency of this error is to increase the final result. According to their belief the irregularity referred to in the diminution MEAN DENSITY OF THE EARTH. 643 of the amplitude is owing to unsteadiness which was caused by the change of the weights, and therefore influences the first reading of each series. But itis not easy to see how the disturbance, which was so regu- lar, can be explained in this manner, especially since Baily has ex- pressly referred to the perfect isolation of the masses, and their easy motions free from jar. He did not explain with equal clearness the way in which he obviated such disturbances as might arise from change of temperature, disturbances which, at the beginning of his observations, caused serious difficulties. The supposition of a difference of temper- ature, scarcely shown by a thermometer, between the masses and the balance inclosed in a thick box seems justified, and such differences are sufficient to explain the disturbances of a system swinging with such a slight inertia. They would be analogous to the irregularities which have been observed in these experiments to exist between the temperature of the two sides of the pendulum-rod and which were in direct dependence upon the algebraic sign of the motion of the zero point from the source of heat. The disturbances which showed them- selves in Baily’s series of observations were regarded as a change of sign in the course of the zero point, which produced such an effect that the observed deflection grew regularly with the time since the transfer of the weights to their new position. The plan of computing the posi- tion of equilibrium from the last three numbers of each series, a method which leads to a much smaller value, was set aside by Cornu and Baille for one which will increase the error in the reduction of Baily’s work. It would have been too much to expect for this reason a smaller value for the mean density of the earth from Baily’s observations than would have resulted from the avoidance of this error, a remark intensi- fied by the deviation of his result from those deduced by others from the torsion balance. Unfortunately it is not possible to reach from the observations any conclusion regarding the two opposing hypotheses, since no readings are given of a long series without changing the weights. The observations here given have shown that the pendulum is a most excellent instrument for the determination of gravity, a problem which for a time it did not seem competent to solve. It is to be hoped that its somewhat restricted domain may be extended. In this connection there may be mentioned the determining of inner friction, a matter of great importance in the mechanical theory of gas. Since the resist- ance of the air in the case of a sensitive pendulum causes a rapid de- crease in the amplitude of the arc, the amount of retardation is so con- siderable that an accurate determination of the desired quantity can best be secwed from a few observations. The results might be modi- fied by an appreciable change in the sensitiveness, atmospheric press- ure, or temperature. Stokes has discussed the case in which an infin- itely long cylindrical rod oscillates so that its axis remains parallel. The solution of this is closely related to that of a rod swinging about 644 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. a fixed axis in a closed box, if in addition to the conditional equations which are to be fulfilled on the surface of the rod certain others are introduced. In this way Stokes reduced Baily’s experiments with the rod-shaped seconds pendulum. In the foregoing case the pendulum- rod was hollow, intov which the air could enter unrestricted. This con- dition complicated the problem; however only a few changes in the construction of the pendulum would be necessary in order to render Stokes’s theory applicable. May the apparatus whose application to a special case is here shown, prove itself useful in physical investigations in other realms. In “Publicationen des Astrophysikalischen Observatoriums,” vol. VI (the preceding part of this abstract), I have given a series of obser- vations which I prosecuted with a peculiarly constructed pendulum for the purpose of determining the mean density of the earth. The dis- cussion of these observations led to satisfactory results, but the exper- iments justified the expectation that a greater accuracy might be reached by an elimination of certain obstacles, partly of an accidental nature, and especially by a more thorough protection against the influ- ence of temperature change. The results of the observations made after the application of the contemplated improvements gratified the anticipations, since the probable error in the latter set of experiments is only one-third of that obtained by the former. The axes of the cy- linders, which were directed towards the center of the balls attached to the pendulum, during the first experiments made an angle with the plane of oscillation in order to secure a sufficient proximity of the balls to the attracting masses. This state of affairs complicated the numeri- cal computation of the situation of the pendulum with respect to the masses, since besides the measurement of the separation of their sur- faces from the middle point of the apparatus it was necessary to accu- rately ascertain the difference of direction which the axes of the masses made with the plane of oscillation. The supports were so changed that the axes could be brought precisely into the plane of the pendulum. This simplification made it possible to secure such a position as to allow a more ready and accurate measurement of the distance of the masses from the apparatus, and at the same time it served to keep it in that position. On both sides of the pillar which supported the instrument places were attached for the support of a contact lever rotating about a vertical axis. One arm of this lever, terminating in a sharp point, rested against the back of the attracting mass, while the other arm swept over a short scale divided into millimeters, provided with a reg- istering apparatus so that its position could be readily ascertained. Since the lengths of the arms were as 1: 4, a change in the situation of the cylinder could be estimated to a tenth of a millimeter without dif- ficulty. In ease of a contrary movement of the mass, the pin of the lever would keep, in contact with it through action of a pressure weight MEAN DENSITY OF THE EARTH. 645 on the lever. The guides on the sides were reuewed and made stronger so as to counteract all swinging motions of the masses. While the changes and improvements just referred to were being made to secure a more accurate and ready determination of the con- stants, protection against the ill effects of sudden and irregular changes in temperature in the neighborhood of the apparatus was so complete as to obtain a closer agreement in the results of the experiments. The door and window were also tightened and the wooden coverings coated with paint. The box containing the pendulum was covered with tin- foil and white-lead, and the attracting masses were likewise subjected to a covering of tin-foil so as to free them from the action of the lamp which illuminated the scale. To still further secure the apparatus from sudden changes of temperature during a series of observations all oper- ations were conducted without entering the room, employing electricity to mark the correct height of the cylinders when their positions were changed. With the precautions just referred to, it was possible not only to keep the temperature of the room constant during a series of observations, but also to eliminate, so far as the thermometer would show, the effect of the warmth of the lamp, which was apparent during the first set of experiments. A disturbance was however noticeable, caused by a temporary hori- zontal stratification of temperature, which in the neighborhood of the apparatus was interrupted by the changing of the masses whose tem- peratures were unequal. I sought to compensate the operation of this interruption by so attaching lead disks of the same diameter as the cylinders that they remained in every position opposite the masses, in this way securing at each change the same temperature throughout any horizontal cross-section of the pendulum. The order of observing is essentially the same as during the former series; however, instead of having 2 pause in the middle of the set, with four readings on each side, or before and after, the eight or ten readings of the elongations of the pendulum were consecutive, in this way making it possible to discuss the observations of a day as equably dis- tributed over the period of observation. In the determination of the time of oscillation of the pendulum after the removal of the extra weight on its upper end a better method was adopted by computing the desired quantity directly from the means of two series of observations separated from one another by a considerable interval. In the first experiments I computed numerically the attraction of the masses upon the pendulum rod. The result was important, especially as a control or check upon the experiments, but on actvount of the un- certainty in the computation of certain constants which entered into the work, it was not to be compared with the latter results which were obtained by an empirical elimination. In these computations this con- trol could be dispensed with, thus relieving one of the numerical work 646 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. which the determination of the moments of the pendulum required. On the other hand it was desirable to make surer the empirical elimination or ascertaining of these constants by increasing and modifying the ob- servations. I have therefore made a series of observations, using on the pendulum balls of lead the same size but heavier than the brass balls, which, combined with the series made without any balls, gave an- other result independent of the result obtained when the brass balls were used. In all other respects the method of reduction was the same as during the first determination. The value found for the mean’density is 5.579 + 0.012. AMERRIQUES, AMERIGHO VESPUCCI, AND AMERICA. By JULES MARCOU. INTRODUCTION. The Amerriques tribe of Indians, now few in number, are confined to their mountains, called Sierra Amerrique, which form the cordillera between Lake Nicaragua and the Mosquito coast, in the province of Chontales, Nicaragua. By a combination of circumstances, not rare, in what pertain to the first discoveries made in the-New World, the name of Amerrique was not printed or perhaps even written in documents until 1872, when the late Thomas- Belt, a naturalist of genius, during an exploration of Nicaragua, heard of the name and used it in his excellent and very remarkable book “The Naturalist in Nicaragua,” London, 1874. De Humboldt says: ‘‘ Les pays découverts les premiers sont aujourd’hui oubliés et presque déserts.” (See ‘* Examen critique de Vhistoire de la géographie du nouveau continent,” vol. 111, p. 381, Paris, 1839.) SIERRA AMERRIQUE AND THE AMERRIQUES. I quote all I have been able to gather on the subject: “At a short distance to the west (of Fairbairn’s ranch, 2 leagues from Libertad, Nicaragua), rise the precipitous recks of the Amerrique range, with great perpendicular cliffs, and huge isolated rocks and pinacles. The name of this range gives us a clue to the race of the ancient inhab- itants. In the highlands of Honduras, as has been noted by Squiers, the termination of tique or rique is of frequent occurrence in the name of places, as Chaparristique, Lapaterrique, Llotique, Ajuterique, and oth- ers. The race that inhabited this region were the Leuca Indians. - - - I think that the Leuca Indians were the ancient inhabitants of Chon- tales, - - - and that they were partly conquered, and their territories encroached upon by the latter before the arrival of the Spaniards.” Now the Chontales Indians are confined to the western part of the province of that name (departamento de Chontales), west of the cordil- lera or Amerrique range; while all the eastern part, as far as the Mos- quito coast (Reserva Mosquita), is inhabited by uncivilized Indians 647 648 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. called Caribisi or Caraibs, and also Amerriques, Careas, and Ramas In- dians—tribus de aborigenes no civilizados—as they are called on maps of Nicaragua. On Fairbairn’s Ranch: ‘ There are many evidences of a large Indian population having lived at this spot, and their pottery and fragments of their stones for bruising maize have been found in some graves that have been opened.” - - - “There are many old Indian graves, covered with mounds of earth and stones.” (See “The Naturalist in Nicara- gua,” p.154.) At page 324, Belt refers again to the cordillera, saying: “About noon we came in sight of the Amerrique range, which I recog: nized at once, and knew that we had reached the Juigalpa district.” As regards gold, Belt, the engineer of the Chontales Gold Mining Company, during his four years’ residence in Nicaragua, was particu- larly well posted as to the location of the mines; and he says: ‘“ Gold mining at Santo Domingo is confined almost entirely to auriferous quartz lodes, no alluvial deposits having been found that will pay for working. - - - The gold does not occur pure, but is a natural alloy of gold and silver, containing about three parts of the former to one of the latter. - - - The small town of Libertad is the principal min- ing centre of Chontales. There are a great-number of gold mines in its vicinity.” The absence of paying placers, or auriferous alluvial gravels, in the valleys of the Rios Mico and Carca, the two main affluents of the Rio Blewfields, shows that they had been worked out in the old Indian time. The following letter from Mr. Belt, written a short time before his premature death,* is interesting, because it gives his impression after reading my first paper on the “ Origin of the name America,” published in the Atlantic Monthly for March, 1876: LONDON, April 8, 1878. M. JULES MARCOU, Salins, Jura, France: My DEAR Stir: I am much obliged to you for your kind letter and the copy of your. most ingenious speculation respecting the origin of the name ** Amérique.” The Amerrique range in Nicaragua was well known to me, and the curious coincidence with the name of the continent had often struck me, but only as a coincidence. I hope your suggestion will receive the attention it deserves, and that the origin of the name will be thoroughly inquired about. Should it turn out as you believe, you will have cleared up a most interesting point. I am, dear sir, yours very truly, THOMAS BELT. In 1887, by a happy circumstance, [ was able to communicate with Senator Don José D. Rodriguez, of Managua (Nicaragua), who lived for *Thomas Belt, born in Neweastle-upon-Tyne, 1832, died at Kansas City (Kansas), the 21st of September, 1878. THE NAME AMERICA. 649 many years in the dsitrict of Chontales, and who was also a personal friend of Thomas Belt. Hereare extracts from two of his letters to me: WASHINGTON, D. C., December 29, 1887. - - - The word Amerrique is pronounced as Mr. Thomas Belt wrote it by the natives of the tribe, with whom I have conversed. These In- dians seem to have been formerly a powerful tribe. Ata distance from the sierra (range), in the level ground, there are extensive spaces which were at one time cemeteries and undoubtedly belonged to these Indians. It is certain that towards the south other tribes inhabited that region. It is, moreover, easy to note that they kept up, from a very ancient date, a communication with the Atlantic coast, cultivating probably friendly relations with the once war-like tribe of the Moscos, who held the coun- try from about Laguna de Caratasca (Honduras) and the Cape Gracias 4 Dios to a little south of the Laguna de Perlas and the rio Blewtields. At the present day the Amerriques are few in number, but I do not feel able, at the moment, to give any sufficient reason for the fact. They are not molested by any one and they live at their ease in their mount- ains, but it is evident that no long time will elapse before they disap- pear entirely, perhaps by absorption into other tribes. - - - Mr. Thomas Belt, to whom you refer, must have had occasion to know the mountains and the Indians of that name during a journey which he made over the cordillera to Matagalpa and Segovia. I served under the order of that gentleman in the mines of Chontales, and enjoyed the honor of his friendship and confidence. WASHINGTON, January 12, 1888. - - - ITean assure you that the insinuation, ascribed to Mr. Peralta, that the name Amerrique was invented by my deceased friend, Mr. Thomas Belt, is an entirely gratuitous one. The mountain range and the tribe of the Amerriques have existed in Nicaragua for centuries which itis beyond our power to determine; and these facts may be veri- fied at any moment. Moreover, Mr. Belt was a serious person, who would never have lent himself to a deception. This protest of Senator J. D. Rodriguez was brought out by the posi- tion taken by a few opponents, who claimed that because the map- makers have not inscribed the name Amerrique on any of the maps known until now, the name Amerrique applied to a chain of mountains of Nicaragua was created out of Mr. Belt’s “inner consciousness.” Don Manuel M. de Peralta, minister of Costa Rica at Washington, wrote a letter to the President of the Republic of Nicaragua, Don Ad. Car- denas, asking if there really is in ‘‘el departamento de Chontales” a chain of mountains known by the name of Amerique, Amerrique, or Americ. The answer not only confirmed the existence of the Sierra Amerrique, but also of: a tribe of Indians called “los Amerriques”; and that the spelling of the name was as Mr. Belt wrote it: Amerrique, with two vs. From those well-authenticated facts, we can be fully confident that ~ there are still in existence the remnants of an Indian tribe calling them- selves Amerriques, formerly powerful, and extending over a great part of the ground between the Lake of Nicaragua and the Atlantic coast. 650 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. The mountains to which they are now confined are called Amerrique range, or Sierra Amerrique; and they have occupied for centuries the richest gold area of the region. The gold mines are numerous and are worked even to this day, on a great scale, round Libertad, Santo Do- mingo, and Juigalpa, where great quantities of the precious metal have been and are still extracted. The name Juigalpa (Huzgalpa) means the country of gold; and the name of the Mosquito coast in the Indian lan- guage is Tauzgalpa, or Taguzgalpa. Galpa means gold, so that the true name of the country between the Cape Gracias 4 Dios to the Rios Rama and San Juan, instead of being Mosquito coast or Mosquita, is, accord- ing to the aborigines, Gold Coast. Now let us see about the first explorations by European navigators of the coast of the central part of the New World. FIRST VOYAGE OF VESPUCCI. 4 From the beginning we are confronted by the most contested of Ves- pucci’s voyages, May, 1497, to October, 1498. Las Casas, Herrera, Charlevoix, Robertson, Tiraboschi, Muiioz, Navarette, and Washing- ton Irving declare that the author of the ‘“‘Quatuor Navigationes” has forged his first voyage. Alexander de Humboldt, after calling his so- called first voyage prétendu, tries to show an alibi for Vespucci, who, according to his opinion, was then in Sevilla and at San Luear super- intending the arming of a fleet for the third voyage of Cristoforo Co- lombo, from April, 1497, to May, 1498; and accordingly in a material impossibility of having then accomplished his first voyage, which fin- ally he calls “ problematic voyage of a contested date,”* admitting as proved that the date of May 10 or 20, 1497, is false. F. A. de Varnhagen is the only person who has accepted and maintained by excellent arguments and proofs drawn from the three historians, Pierre Martyr d’Anghiera, Oviedo and Gomara, the authenticity of the first voyage. After a careful study of all the objections, I have come to the same conclusion with Varnhagen, who correctly says, that ‘if the first voyage is not true, all fall to the ground ;” and also, ‘if we admit that Vespucci has been guilty of not telling the truth in regard to such an important voyage, then we must treat him as a forger and an imposter, and accept nothing of all that he says in his four voyages.” In fact, if the first voyage is a fable, or even only ‘‘ problematic,” Ves- pucci is a fabulist and an imposter who can not be trusted. But I do not believe it is the case. Vespucci, according to the great admiral, Cristoforo Colombo, was a good man (es mucho hombre de bien), unfor- tunate in his commercial enterprise, but eagerly looking out to * get a reputation of being a great discoverer and traveler, what I have called him before, a tan fino, in Italian (Nouvelles recherches, p. 80, Paris, 1888.) * Examen critique, vol. Iv, p. 292. THE NAME AMERICA. 651 According to Varnhagen the chiefs of this expedition of 1497 were V. Y. Pinson and J. D. de Solis; they first saw the land in the vicinity of the Cape Gracias 4 Dios, and after two days’ sailing, in following a sandy coast, they stopped at a small harbor near the Laguna de Caratasca, Honduras. They met there a great many Indians of the Caraibes type, some of whom possessed a few gold ornaments, which they got from some neighboring tribes. As we know now that the Amerriques Indi- ans had relations with the Caraibes of the coast as far as the Laguna de Caratasca, we have here the first contact of the Spaniards with the Indians possessing a little gold on the coast of Central America; and it is possible that the name Amerrique was then spoken of as a tribe of Indians and a country rich in gold, for it is the only gold area of that part of the coast of Honduras. THE LAST VOYAGE OF COLOMBO. Cristoforo Colombo in his fourth and last voyage sighted the Cape Gracias a Dios the 14th of September, 1502, followed all along the Mos- quito coast, until he stopped at Quiriviri (Huerta Island), now Booby Island, opposite the Indian village of Cariai at the mouth of the Rio Rama. He staid there ten days, from the 25th of September until the 5th of October.. There he repaired his vessels and let his crews recruit after their very fatiguing navigation from Cuba. The Indians were friendly and there was a great deal of communica- tion and intercourse between them and the one hundred and fifty sea- men composing the crews of his four caravels (schooners). Colombo in his Lettera rarissima says that at Cariai he heard of gold mines in the province of Ciamba; that he took with him two Indians who con- ducted him to another place called Carambaru, where the aborigines are always naked and carry round their necks mirrors in gold, which they declined to exchange on any account. At Cariai, the Indians named several places where gold mines existed; the last named being Veragua, 25 leagues distant. As de Humboldt says, that letter is not clear; it is written in a mel- ancholy mood, and characterized by many obscuritirs and want of order, due to many injustices and deceptions to which Colombo was subjected at the end of his life. Colombo was then an old man, almost infirm, when he wrote the letter at Jamaica, the 7th July, 1503, just after returning from the rich gold region of Veragua; being badly treated by the governor, Ovando, his mind was more or less affected by his suf- fering, and it is not strange if he did not give all the details and all the names of the countries rich in gold, as well as the names of the Indian tribes with which he came in contact. However, from his letter, we can say almost to a certainty that Cariay was at the mouth of the Rio Rama, that Colombo heard there of the tribe of Amerriques as possessing a good deal of gold, which the Span- iards were so anxious to get; that he took with him two Indians with 652 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. MAP of apart of NICARAGUA. Z) |Book by 1.- Ousrivirt | of Colombo. Sept. 5. Oct. 1502. Marcon. America. Sithsonian Report, 1888. THE NAME AMERICA. 653 whom he went to Carambaru, another Jand. Carambaru in all proba- bility, as we shall see if we consult a map of the coast, was at or near the mouth of the Rio Blewfields and there he found Indians wearing round their necks mirrors in gold which they declined to trade away. Those Indians can not be any others than the Amerriques, who then inhabited the gold area of the province of Ciamba, occupying all the placeres of the Rios Mico and Carea, the two main affluents of the Rio Blewficlds. Being not successful in his endeavor to get their gold mir- rors, Colombo was not well disposed to speak much of those Indians, and he did not give their name nor the name of the country from which they got the gold, speaking only of the province of Ciamba and the vil- lage of Carambaru, without localizing the area of gold in the Sierra Amerrique, as he did for Veragua. But because Colombo did not write the name Amerrique in his letter to the King and Queen of Spain it does not follow that ke did not hear it; and it would be against all that we know of discoverers of gold regions if the name Amerrique was not heard and afterwards repeated by Co lombo and the one hundred and fifty men of his crews. If Colombo is the only man who ever wrote anything about that eventful and diffi- cult voyage, all his hundred and fifty companions spoke at their return of what they saw and heard during the voyage; and it is to them, and probably also to Colombo, that is due the spread among the people of the name Amerrique as a country rich in gold and of Indians of that name possessing gold mirrors as their only article of dress. The name passed from mouth to mouth, first among seamen, and then it pene- trated into the continent of Kurope so fast that in less than twelve years the name Amerrique was generally used to designate the New World, according to a contemporary, John Schoener, of Bamberg. That the name came from the masses of the people and not from the few scholars who could read and write Latin is admitted by everybody. Officially the name was “ Las Indias” and “‘ New World.” Until 1520 we do not possess a single map with the name America, and if any ex- isted with that name, they have been lost and destroyed, since their number must have been extremely limited; and they can not be quoted as having spread the name among the people, who then did not know how to read, for we must always have in mind that it was the begin- ning of the sixteenth century and that the number of people able to read and write was very small and formed a special class far above the common people and having only oceasional contact with the masses. In résumé, Colombo and his one hundred and fifty companions saw Indians on the Mosquito coast wearing gold mirrors round their necks and otherwise naked. They had long talks with them in regard to countries and peoples where the gold existed in their neighborhood. We know now that those Indians were the Amerriques Indians, that they live still in the most productive gold area of that region, and that the Sierra Amerrique is, according to Thomas Belt, the most conspicuous 654 : MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. land-mark between Lake Nicaragua and the Atlantic coast. After the last voyage of Colombo of 1503 the name Amerrique spread so fast in Europe among the sailors and common people that in 1515 it was gen- erally adopted and used to designate the New World. Such are facts which seem well established. Now we come to the singular and rather mysterious christening of the New World at St. Dié, in Lorraine. CONFUSION OF VESPUCCY’S CHRISTIAN NAME. The Christian name of Vespucci is an example of confusion unique in history. Being an Italian, it was to be expected that his first name would be given exactly by his countrymen; on the contrary, they are the authors of all the confusions. As far back as 1503, or 1504 at most, the Italians Lorenzo Pier Francisco di Medicis, of Florence, and Giovanni del Giocondo, of Verona, call Verpucci Albericus, a Christian name well known ; and even since, until a few years ago, Italians, and more espe- cially Florentins, have persisted in calling him Alberico and even Alber- tutio. I made diligent researches to know exactly Vespucci’s Christ- ian name. Ina country like Tuscany and its capital Florence, where so many erroneous and forged documents have appeared on Vespucci in manuscripts, letters, printed books, and even inscriptions engraved on marble that I was obliged to be very careful before accepting any name that it should be well authenticated by indisputable documents. After many researches I did not find anything certain until the appear- ance of the first letter of Vespueci to Laurentio Petri de Medicis, with the name Albericus Vesputius,‘in 1504 or 1505. And in my second paper, ‘“‘ Nouvelles Recherches sur ’Origine-du nom d’A mérique” (Bulletin Soe. de Géographie, p. 66, Paris, 1888), say: ‘As long as the Christian name of Vespucci has not been submitted to a very minute and exact control, we must remain in doubt as to which is the true one, Alberico or Amerigo.” - - - The question has a certain importance, although its solution does not touch the vital and most important part of the origin of the name America, which remains undecided between the poetical license of Jean Basin and the indigenous name in the New World of Amerrique. The decision of this point will involve Vespucci more or less according to the help which he may have given, perhaps without knowing it, to the christening at St. Dié.” It is true that I inclined then toward Alberico instead of Amerigo for the Christian name of Vespucci, and in my second paper I have given reasons which seemed to sustain that view; saying, however, several times in speaking of Amerigo, that it was either his true Christian name, or only a surname or nickname. Diligent researches were continued to find proof if Amerigo was truly an Italian Christian name; for a learned Italian friend, who then lived at Florence, wrote me that the name, unknown to him as a Chris- tian name, even after the celebrity given the name by Vespucci, was not used in Italy. . THE NAME AMERICA. 655 HAMERICUS IN DANTE AND AMERIGO IN MACHIAVELLI. My son, Dr. Philippe Bb. Marcou, succeeded last year (1888) in finding twice the name Hamericus and Amerigo; first in Dante Allighieri, ‘* De Vulgaris eloquentia,” liber secundus, caput vi, and in the Comedia di Nicolo Machiavelli, in his Opere, vol. nono, Milano, 1805, where he has, as his first personage, Amerigo, vecchio Padrone, and as his last, frate Alberigo; besides he speaks at page 45 of the same volums> in Novella piace volissima di Nicollo Machiavelli, of a “ figlinola @ Amerigo Do- nati.” In Danté we have two provencal poets of the name Hamericus, written with an h, as a family name written in provencal or langue doce, ‘ Aimeric.” Even now the name Emeric isa family name in Provence. Danté inhabited Provence for some time, and was well acquainted with two Provencal poets, Emeric of Belinoi and Emeric of Péguilain; and in translating the family name of Emeric into Hamericus, its Latin form, it does not follow that he regarded Emeric as the Provencal name of the Florentine Amerigho; and we can not quote Danté as having translated the name Amerigho or Amerigo into Hamericus. AMERIGO IN SPAIN IN 1495. A short time after I received a letter from Don Marcos J. de la Es- pada, the most learned Americanist of Spain, and who knows more about the Archives de Indios than anybody else. The letter, dated Madrid, 22 de Marzo de 1889, says: ‘ Por el consta que Amerigo Ves- pucci se llameba y se llamabe Amerigo en las libros de cuentes y despa- chos de armadas 4 Indias perde el ato de 1495.” The oldest document made public in Spain before this was a receipt dated January 12, 1496, with only the name Vespuche, and no Christian name. The first time we have the Christian name of Vespucci, in well- authenticated documents, is in the two letters of Cristoforo Colombo of the 5th and 25th of February, 1505, written two years after the return of Colombo from his last voyage. Now since the discovery of Senior de la Espada we have the Christian name Amerigo in 1495, consequently before any of the voyages of Vespucci to the New World, and before the fourth voyage of Colombo to Nicaragua and Veragua. It is most im- portant, for the Libros de gastos de armadas of the archives de la casa de contractation at Sevilla, are justly regarded as an excellent authority for everything relating to the first voyages of discoveries of the New World or Las Indias. AMERIGHO IN THE ARCHIVES OF MANTOVA IN 1492. Lately I have received from Rome a paper: ‘(Come veramente si chiamasse il Vespucci, e se dal nome di lui sia venuto quello del Nuovo Mondo, nota del socio Gilberto Govi” (Rendiconti della R. accademia dei Lineei, vol. Iv, pp. 297-307, seduta del 18 nov. 1888, Roma, 4to). The author, Signor G. Govi, has the goo fortune to publish the only PAPERS. MISCELLANEOUS 656 vg po eee AM nd one - £$ 3 fee oe : = ce 2IIIVP ae lage sll : WAS angal orp cyoub vy 6 ab haupuvtep Go" y _seyaned_ enge stuons raves uf ouepeu enemy % Loguyes rue i enapeatirng (Pawen won yenbsg leyweagorng pagmasogye axel gt atiodrg (oyeashs Wwe pe). ergere yf s “ya v. pon. upod 5 owl, AEE ORAS IN ARNE s aoe pd ro epoueled 7 058 S Aft °1P8 evciragestis aw Goa meee onian Report, 1888. Smiths ee Bp ous) a8 ae Yo mel Jeng unwuofes 0499) bdee 249 cy adel gee ~_5gK et OS 96 -00tr ‘ THE NAME AMERICA. 657 truly authentic letter of Vespucci that had yet been found in Italy. It was discovered by Signor Davari conservatore dell ’archivio Gonzoga di Mantova, and although very short—only seven lines—is most impor- tant for it is wholly written by Vespucci, who was, as I have said be- fore, an excellent calligraphist. The date is: Sybilie.die xxx decembris M°CCCOOLXXXAIT (Sevilla, the 30 Dec., 1492), and consequently before the return of Colombo from his first voyage. The very distinct signature is: Ser. Amerigho Vespucci mer- chante fiorentino for - . Sybilia. I have received a photograph of the letter and its address, by the courtesy of an Italian friend; and I here give the fac-simile of it, as well as of the signature to a letter of Vespucci to the Cardinal Arch- bishop of Toledo, dated Sevilla, 9 December, 1508, which was published in fac-simile by the Spanish Government in 1878. Those two letters are the only authentic ones we possess; and the signatures are too important in the question of the origin of the name America not to be carefully studied. pls tH Now we have, without any possible doubt, the Christian name of Vespucci, written by himself Amerigho with only one r and an kh at the last syllable, in 1492; and Amerigo with only one ry and no h in the Libros de cuentes y despachos de armadas a Indias in 1495. Gilberto Govi* thinks that it is the Italian Fra Giovanni del Giocondo, who translated and changed too freely Amerigho into Alberico. It is only a personal opinion, without any base to rest upon, for the original letter of Vespucci to Lorenzo Pierfrancisco de Medicis is unknown. Generally, translators do not alter and change the signatures of authors; and so long as we have no positive proof to the contrary, we must say that Vespucci used for his Christian name, in 1502 or 1503, the name Alberico or Alberigo. But as his second letter to Piedro Soderini, writ- ten in 1504, is signed Amerigo, it is evident that he did not make use of the name Alberico for any length of time. There are certainly strong suspicions that he made use of it, not only in his first letter to Medicis, but also because Gomara, a Spanish historian of great reputation, in his General History of the Indies of 1551, uses both names, saying Americo or Alberico Vespucci, showing that in Spain the name of Al- *Govi died suddenly at Rome, in June, 1889, afew months only after his communi- cation to the Accademia dei Lincei. He was a physicist-mathematician of talent, H. Mis. 142-——42 658 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. berico must have been known quite well during the first part of the sixteenth century, although we do not know a single example of the name having been used in any official authentic Spanish document re- lating to Vespucci. COSMOGRAPHLH INTRODUCTIO. Thanks to the discoveries and researches of Alex. de Humboldt, D’Avezac, and a few others, we know a great deal about the Cosmo- graphie Introductio of the Vosgian gymnasium of St. Dié, in which is found the first announcement of the name America as the name of the New World. The interested reader will find all. the descriptions, dis- sertations, and conclusions of the extraordinary value attached to this now very celebrated small quarto volume in the “ Examen critique,” by Alex. de Humboldt, 5 vols., Paris, 1839; ‘ Martin Hylacomilus Waltzemuller,” by D’Avezac, Paris, 1867; and * Nouvelles recherches sur Vorigine du nom @Ameérique,” by Jules Marcou, Paris, 1888, in Bulletin Soc. géographie. The only addition to our knowledge about the printing press of St. Dié, is that it was removed in 1512 to Strasburg, from whence, very likely, it came; and that the same types used for the Cosmographie Introductio were used at Strasburg in 1512 and 1513 to finish the print- ing of the Ptolemey’s Geography of 1513, two-thirds of it having been printed at St. Dié between 1505 and 1510, as D’Avezac has proved. So, instead of calling it the Strasburg’s Ptoléme, it ought to be called the Vosgian Gymnasium Ptoléme, or at least the St. Dié and Strasburg’s Ptoléme. M. Ed. Meaume has lately proved the existence of a fourth e THE NAME AMERICA. 673 Amerrigo, according to his own signature, and has taken all the forms and combinations imaginable between Albericus and Morigo. To conclude, I shall quote a sentence taken from the life of Louis Pas- teur: * All new discoveries bring into the ideas generally used until then, a change which is accepted by somes with joy, while others resist, be- cause it deranges all their old habits.” (JI. Pasteur, Histoire Wun savant, ete., p. 341, Paris, 1883); which applies exactly to this case. Almost all Americans and all the Spaniards have accepted with joy the idea that the New World was not named for Vespucci, who has no claim whatever to such an honor, but that the beautiful name of Amerrique belongs to a tribe of Indians and to a range or sierra of the central part of the conti- nent, discovered and first explored.by Cristoforo Colombo. A few Amer- icanists, disturbed in their old habit of proclaiming in books, in pam- phlets, or in speeches, that the new continent has been called after Amer- igho Vespucci, do not like it, for it is disagreeable to them to see all they have published or said replaced by something more rational and natural, of which they had not the smallest idea, or even thought of for one instant, and their resistance is natural enough. I expected it from the time I wrote my first paper on the Origin of the Name America, published in March, 1875, in the Atlantic Monthly ; and nothing that has been said by a few critics and reviewers in the United States, in Italy, and in Ger- many has surprised me. But time will show who is right and I trust fully to the good sense of the people. The name of the New World was taken from the mountain range and Indian tribe at the center of the continent, and brought into general use by the people who had been there, and the people will now see who has the correct view as to the origin of the name. H, Mis. 142——43 ye ee aes PROGRESS OF ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA DURING 1888. BY CYRUS ADLER, PH. D. The study of oriental science has had a remarkable development in America during the past decade, and has at the same time taken on an almost entirely new aspect. Under the lead of Professor Whitney, and of the men whom he inspired, the Indian branch of oriental studies has in the past given—and still continues to give—many valuable contribu- tions to science, and holds an almost unique position towards the Old World in the circle of philological study. Investigation in the field of Semitic languages and archeology, on the other hand, was carried on mostly by the way, and in spite of a few valuable contributions the publications in that line were, as a rule, not important. The year 1883 marks a new era for these studies in America with the establishment of regular courses in Semitic languages (includ- ing Assyrian inscriptions) at two of our great universities, Harvard and Johns Hopkins. Most of the other important seats of learning have followed this departure, so that in 1886 it was already possible for the eminent French archieologist, M. Joachim Menant, to say that the most serious efforts in this line are now concentrated in America.* The year 1888 was one of great moment to oriental science in this country. Possibly no stronger evidence of the interest had for these studies could be afforded than the determination of the publishers of the series of text-books known as Porta Linguarum Orientalium to put an English translation on the American market; a confirmatory inci- dent is the selection of an American member of the board of editors of the Zertschrift fiir Orientalische Bibliographie, Prof. R. J. H. Gottheil, of Columbia College. A number of gentlemen of Philadelphia panier” and sent out a party to explore and conduct excavations in Mesopotamia, under the auspices of the University of Pennsylvania. Considerable difficulty was Eee neueed in procuring from the Turkish authorities the requisite . “Bes Bangues Perdues ae ta Perse et de V Assyrie. Assyrie, par M. Joachim Menant. Paris, Leroux, 1886, p. XIV. 675 676 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. permission to dig, and at the close of the year the party proceeded southward to Niffer. Itis likely that work will be continued during the coming year.* The American Oriental Society, at its meeting in Philadelphia, took a step which may lead to important results. A resolution was adopted and a committee appointed to obtain information and make a report in May, 1889, on the feasibility and utility of the preparation of a catalogue of oriental manuscripts in America. Such a catalogue, if it could be made complete, would be of the greatest service to American oriental scholars, whose chief drawback lies in the fact that their materials for work are scattered over the entire country. The University of Pennsylvania has acquired a collection of cuneiform originals (briefly described by Dr. Robert F. Harper in Hebraica, Vol. Vv, pp. 74-76), and also a collection of casts of Assyrian objects in the British Museum. The National Museum is steadily pursuing its policy of collecting copies of Assyrian and Babylonian objects preserved in this country. An exhibit of specimens in the field of Biblical Archeology was set up in the Government exhibit at the Centennial Exposition of the Ohio Valley held at Cincinnati. An interesting collection of casts of Assyrian and Egyptian objects has been received from the Berlin Museum and a working oriental library is being collected in the Smith- sonian Institution for the use of the oriental section, and of oriental scholars visiting Washington. . Possibly the first German journal in the field of oriental philology, to be published with the aid ofan American learned body is the Bettrage zur Assyriologie und Vergleichenden Semitischen Sprachwissenschaft, which willappear mit Unterstiitzung der Johns Hopkins Universitat zu Baltimore, edited by Prof. Friedrich Delitzsch, of Leipzig, and Prof. Paul Haupt, of Baltimore. American scholars have contributed to most of the important journals in the field of oriental science published abroad, and a number of for- eign scholars, among whom may be mentioned Canon Cheyne, of Ox- ford, Prof. G. Maspero, Mr. W. M. Flinders Petrie, Mr. Theo. G. Pinches of the British Museum, Prof. George Rawlinson, Prof. A. H. Sayce of Queens College, Oxford, Dr. Hugo Winckler, of Berlin, and the late Prof. William Wright, of Cambridge, have sent contributions to Ameri- can journals. The range of topics covered by American orientalists comprises : As- syro-Babylonian language, art, history, and religion; Armenia; Budd- hism and. Sanskrit; China; Cyprus; Egypt; Hittites; Japan; Jews and Judaism (so far as they bear on the history of the orient); modern oriental languages; Mohammedanism and Arabic ; Old Testament and Hebrew; Pedagogics; Persia; Samaritan; Siam; Semitic Philology ; Syriac. * Compare Philadelphia Ledger, June 14, 1383 ; New York Evening Post, June 22, 1883 ; New York Independent, June 28, 1888, . = ™ Se ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. Ole The present report is the first attempt made in this country to pre- sent in brief the work of oriental scholars during one year. It is nec- essarily imperfect partly because of its novelty and for lack of assist- ance on the part of scholars throughout the country. Many of the papers mentioned in the bibliography could not be described because they were not accessible. ASSYRIOLOGY. Cyrus Adler showed that two classes of Assyrian verbs weak in the third stem consonant, and usually confounded, were capable of sharp differentiation; criticised the neglect of Assyrian in the article on Semitic languages in the Cyclopedia Britannica, and suggested that a certain class of Syriac verbs (the saphel) might not be organic forms; described the views of the Babylonians concerning life after death ; some of the oriental objects in the National Museum, among them an Ethiopie version of the Gospels in the Grant collection; the German expedition tosouthern Babylonia; the Tell-Amarna tablets in the Brit- ish Museum; and announced to the American Oriental Society, on behalf of the Semitic Seminary of the Johns Hopkins University, the purpose to publish a complete edition of the life and writings of Edward Hincks, subjoining a tentative bibliography of Hincks’s works. Edgar P. Allen offered some new translations of the inscription of Tiglath-pileser I. In columns T 31-2, 1 25, and vu 34 he reads zér Sangiti; and in 11 66 gammaréa irhiti, “swift veterans;” he also made a conjecture which, if established, would present the unique instance of an Assyrian king mentioning an unsuccessful campaign. Francis Brown explained why the religious poetry of the Semitic cuneiform monuments is Babylonian rather than Assyrian; translated a number of Babylonian penitential psalms, and drew comparisons with the corresponding portions of the Old Testament. He pointed out the identification of the names of the kings mentioned in Genesis, chapter XIV, discussed the question of the capture of Samaria, disputing Delitzsch’s opinion that it was captured by Shalmaneser, and attempted tu harmonize the statements of the Bible (Is., xxxvii, 38), Alexander Polyhistor, and the Babylonian chronicie with reference to the murderer of Sennacherib. He gave notes on the Tell-Amarna tablets, discovered in 1887 in middle Egypt. One of the most surprising facts brought to light by these new tablets is the extent to which the cuneiform charac- ter and the Babylono-Assyrian language were employed in Western Asia. Robert F. Harper published text and translation of the cylinder of Ksarhaddon, and described his visit as a member of the University of Pennsylvania exploring party to Zinjirli, where a German expedition under Dr. Human has been excavating with most valuable results. Paul Haupt described modern researches in Assyria and Babylonia ; the development of the Assyrian writing; published the text of the 678 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. twelfth tablet of the Nimrod Epic; re-collated the whole of the poem ; gave a new translation of the first column of the Deluge tablet on the basis or recently found fragments; discussed the dimensions of the Babylonian ark (=120 half cubits, 110 feet, for both the depth and width, and 600 half cubits, 540 feet, for the length); and developed a theory of the Assyrian prefix na. Morris Jastrow discussed the Assyrian word kudtru, which he con- nected with the ring of the sun-god and the biblical and later Hebrew kaddur ; reviewed Parti of Delitzsch’s Assyrian dictionary, offered trans- lation of some passages in the monolith inscription of Shalmaneser I, and described ancient Babylonian cemeteries. M. L. Kellner gave a new translation of the standard inscription of Asurnazirpal, and compared and discussed the Babylonian and Old Testament accounts of the Deluge. David G. Lyon showed the development of the Assyro—Babylonian religious conceptions by a collection of the prayers appended to the royalinscriptions. He proved froma statistical study of the Pantheon of Asurbanipal (668-626 B. Cc.) that this king mentions most frequently Assur, the national god, and Istar, the goddess of war, and that he exhibited a marked tendency to invoke a group of twelve deities, not the same, however, which preside over the twelve months. He also called attention to some parallels between the Assyrian inscriptions and the Old Testament. S. H. McCollester deseribed his trip from Bagdad to Babylon and Mosul, the site of ancient Nineveh, with an account of the excavations, explorations, and discoveries made there. J. A. Paine gave a discussion of the eclipse in the seventh year of Cambyses, based on T. G. Pinches’s paper, ‘“‘An astronomical or astro- logical tablet from Babylon” (Babylonian and Oriental Record, August, 1888). This tablet is either the original or a copy of the text from which Ptolemy (in the Almagest) derived his information of the fifth eclipse which he enumerates (July 16, 523 B. c.). In this text we meet for the first time the Assyrian word irithu Hebrew idreah “moon.” Theophilus G. Pinches, of the British Museum, contributed to the New York Independent an article entitled, “An old Babylonian letter,” being a translation and commentary on a tablet in the British Museum, S+375. Zenaide A. Ragozin wrote a brief history of Media, Babylonia, and Persia, from the fall of Nineveh to the Persian war. Especial attention is given to the religion of the Parsees. A. H. Sayce described in the New York Independent the literary correspondence between Asia and Egypt in the century before the Exodus, being an account of some of the Tell-Amarna tablets. S. Alden Smith has carried on his studies in Assyrian letters, publish- ing a number of new texts; described Assyrian report tablets and the progress of Assyrian study, and criticized Delitzsch’s Assyrian dic- tionary. a Cae ge ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 679 William Hayes Ward concludes that there is no clear evidence, on Assyrian and Babylonian seals, of human sacrifice. He considers the so-called gate-god a conventionalized form of the sun-god coming out of the gates of the east. Hugo Winckler translated in Hebraica a cuneiform text describing the building of Nebuchadnezzar’s artificial reservoir. One inscription records that the royal canal was built because the river Euphrates had departed from the city of Sippar. D. A. Walker gave a historical sketch of the reign of the Assyrian king Asurbanipal. BUDDHISM AND SANSKRIT. A. H. Edgreen wrote a criticism of Van den Gheyn. His conclusion is that of the thirteen roots which have been referred to the eighth class of verbs in Sanskrit five are fictitious, and the remainder must be referred to the fifth class. T. B. Forbush described the Hindu doctrine of death and immortality. The early Hindus had no dread of death. The future life was a joyous one, when all good people reap the reward of virtue. The terrible conception of hell is no part of the primitive Vedic faith. The funda- mental postulate of Hindu ontology is that the soul is eternal. It is not born, it can not die, and is itself changeless. At different times it wears different garments;. sometimes it assumes the form of a man, sometimes the disguise of an animal, and sometimes it is clad in the robes of a spirit of light. J James T. Hatfield edited a Vedic text on omens and portents from two MSS. in the British Museum. EK. W. Hopkins continued his inquiry into the conditions of civiliza- tion in the Hindu middle age from the point of view of the ruling power or warrior caste, and discussed the quantitative variations in the Cal- cutta and Bombay texts of the Mahabharata. A. V, W. Jackson called attention to a new reference in the Avesta to “the life-book” hereafter. S. H. Kellogg discussed the origin of certain Rajput forms of the substantive verb in Hindi. David Ker described Burmah’s mighty river and the capital cities of the past, the old caverns, site and great temple of Moulmein, Lower Burmah; a trip by rail up the Himalaya; temples and Buddhist shrines that have been used as fortresses in times of war; the street scenes and play-houses of Rangoon, the Liverpool of Burmah, and the famous Shway Dagohn of Rangoon, the golden pagoda of Burmah; also a trip among the Circassian mountains. Edward A. Lawrence gave an account of his visit among the mis- sionary stations in South India. Churches and Christian worship are described. The population of South India is largely aboriginal, of Dravidian stock. The social institutions are primitive and interesting to the student of early customs. 680 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. Henry C, Lea in a note on Emerson and the Katha Upanishad referred . to a notice of Mr. W. 8. Kennedy calling attention to a passage in the “‘ Katha Upanishad ” which furnished Mr. Emerson the initial thought in his mysterious stanzas on “ Brahma.” H. W. Magoun treated of the Asuri Kalpa, a witcheraft practice of the Atharva-Veda. Asuri is the black mustard of India, and it was used in this rite to make an image of some person whom it was desired to overcome or destroy by magical practices. Mr. Magoun prints text, critical notes, extracts from the Scholiast, translation and a com- mentary. Raj Coomar Roy corrected various misapprehensions concerning child- marriage in India. The boys and giris, though married in infaney, are never allowed to live together until the girl reaches puberty. This being the case, and marriage ordained by God, it fulfills the twofold object of the procreation of children, and a remedy against sin; it even fulfills a third object, viz, mutual -society. There is great igno- rance among EKuropeans in regard to the position of Hindu women, - which is by no means that of slavery. W. W. Rockhill described the Lamaist ceremony of “making of mani pills.” During the entire process no one is permitted to approach who has used meat, spirits, garlic, tobacco, or other impure objects. The process is sometimes one hundred days in length (consisting of a very careful preparation of the pills, which are made of, flour and scented water), followed by a period of meditation and prayer. He discussed the use of skulls in Lamaist ceremonies, which is at present twofold : (1) as an offering to Tsepamed, who is represented as hoiding in his hands a skull filled with ambrosia; (2) as a receptacle for the wine or other liquid offered to the gods. Justin A. Smith gave a summary of the ancient literature of the East. He treats of romance and drama, the Pankatantra, the Sakoon- tala of Kalidasa, and Hindu fiction in general; of Hindu epic and my- thology, the Mahabharata and the Ramayana; of the Iranian script- ures, the Zend-Avesta of Zarathustra, adding notes on Persian and Iranian history; of the Shah-Nameh and the Bundehesh; of Buddhism and the teachings of Buddha; and of Chinese literature, especially the works of Confucius and Mencius. W. D. Whitney wrote a review of the second volume of Eggeling’s translation of the Catapatha Brahmana, and brought out a new edition of his Sanskrit grammar. CHINA. W.S. Ament discussed tne ancient coinages of China. Starting with the assertion that the Chinese were the inventors of coined money, he investigated, specifically, (1) the composition of Chinese coins; (2) the mode of their casting; (3) their inscriptions; (4) their form. Adele M. Fielde described some Chinese mortuary customs. The obsequies of a parent are reckoned the most troublesome affair in hu- “ sh | : ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 681 man experience among the Chinese, and, therefore, when they wish to declare the extreme vexatiousness of any piece of work, they say, “ It is more trouble than a funeral.” Infants are buried summarily, with- out coffins, and the young are interred with few rites; but the funerals of the aged, of both sexes, are elaborate in proportion to the number of the descendants and to their wealth. Elizabeth P. Gould describes the result of Yung Wing’s efforts to raise the standard of education in his native country during the last thirty years. It was through his influence that students were sent to America to be educated. One of these was Yan Phou Lee, whose bi- ography is given on the basis of his book, ‘*‘ When I was a boy in China.” W. A. P. Martin gave an account of diplomacy in ancient China. The doctrine of extraterritoriality was unknown; no agent was a min- ister plenipotentiary, and the sovereign always held himself free to dis- avow the acts of his representative; there were no resident ministers, only envoyés extraordinaires. He made a transiation of the devotional portion of a pictorial sheet engraved and published by the Buddhist high priest in charge of the Pas-én Temple; found traces of the philo- sophie ideas of Descartes in the Chinese thinkers of the eleventh cent- ury, and the same views among them concerning filial duty that are advanced by Plato. S. A. Stern described domestic customs in Japan and China, the business habits of the people, their dress and amusements, H. W. Warren described a journey on the Yang-tze-kiang, with some geographical and social notes. Canton, he says, isa thoroughly English place. The architecture is imposing and solid. It is a little London planted in the distant East. CYPRUS. W. H. Goodyear described the Cypriote sculptures in the Metropoli- tan Museum; and in a note to the Critic, April 18, corrects some mis- apprehensions in the Critic’s notice of his paper published in the Amer- ican Journal of Archeology on the Egyptian origin of the Ionie capital and the anthemion. EGYPT. The various articles on the Tell-Amarna tablets, discussed under Assyriology, all bear more or less on Egyptian history. Lysander Dickerman discussed Groff’s discovery of the names of Ja- cob and Joseph on the Egyptian monuments, holding that Groff’s in- ference was not warranted. William N. Groff, who continues his residence abroad, speaks of q. 1. u. 7. 0n an Egypto-Aramean papyrus, which he identifies with the Kgyptian Kelbi, a sort of wine; published in hieroglyphic the romance of the two brothers, with a translation and commentary ; discussed the 682 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. pronouns in Egyptian, and discovered the names of Jacob-El and Jo- seph-El, in lists of defeated nations, transported to Egypt in the time of Tuthmosis IIJ, about 1700 B. c. Lewis G. Janes reviewed Edward Naville’s edition and translation of the Egyptian Book of the Dead. A careful study of this book, with an unbiased scrutiny of the monuments and inscriptions, reveals coin- cidences of notable change and development in the Eyptian doctrine of the future life. Mr. Janes follows the development frem the archaic period down to the days of St. Paul. G. Lansing, in two articles on Egypticity and Authenticity of the Pentateuch, discussed the Biblical narratives of the lives of Joseph and Moses (Genesis xxxix, et seq.) with reference to the local hints and lin- guistic usages; in other words, the Egyptian cast and character of the narraratives. He concludes that the narratives must have been written at or near the time the events narrated occurred. G. Maspero studied the Egyptian words which seem to apply to the human soul and the places it inhabited after death. He pointed out ~ that the views of the Egyptians with reference to death and a future state underwent many changes. Ch. E. Moldenke edited the first part of a new edition of the so- called tale of two brothers, or the D’Orbiney papyrus. Howard Osgood made an English translation of M. Philippe Virey’s French translation of the Papyrus Prisse, ‘‘The Oldest Book in the World ;” described society, ethics, and religion in Egypt before 2000 B. C. Aug. de Plongeon recalled the fact that the Egyptian Sphynx is a riddle still unsolved and its age unknown. He directed attention to certain striking analogies existing between the Egyptian Sphynx and the leopard with human head that crowns the mausoleum of Prince Coh at Chichen-Itza (Yucatan). C. A. Siegfried described a tour from Tripoli to Alexandria. Tripoli is a typical Arabian town with all the evils of Moslem misrule, wretch- edness, and neglect. From Tripoli to Egypt is an agreeable change. The social and mercantile condition of Alexandria is described. He gives an account of his experience of a journey to the Dalmatian coast and Montenegro, describing the political, social, and archaeological features of the country. Cope Whitehouse discussed the map of Joseph the Fayumi and the Raian Basin, in the light of the survey made during 1887~88. EK. L. Wilson described “ the great Pyramid” of Cheops, narrates the incidents of an ascent and descent; pictures the views from its summit and hills, discusses its history and the curious speculations to which it has given origin; he wrote an illustrated paper on the temples of Egypt. No perfectly preserved Egyptian temple is in existence, but by study- ing the various parts in the existing examples an adequate idea can be obtained of what one of these structures must have been in its com- pleteness. . os ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 683 HITTITES. William Hayes Ward restored and described some imperfectly pub- lished Hittite monuments from Carcemish (Jerablis), which appeared in the London Graphic December 11,1880. These monuments had been rephotographed by the Wolfe expedition to Babylonia. JAPAN. S. Beale described Japanese pictures at the British Museum. Japan possesses works of art which from its own particular point of view equal any school of European painting; this art is the outcome of that of China. It dates back to the fifth century A. D. All pictures are essen- tially decorative ; light and shade are unknown quantities, and linear perspective completely ignored. He also gave an account of Japanese ivory carvings; showed the potent influence of tobaceo in the decora- tive art of that country. Every domestic occurrence is represented in ivory, and many of their classic romances are illustrated in the bronze, porcelain, and lacquer work. William Elliot Griffis described Japanese artists and artisans; with illustrations from drawings by a Japanese artist. Among things un- expected in Japan, none strikes the visitor or resident more than the enviroment of art and its maker; the critic and historian, who is yet to write the story of art in Japan, will discriminate between what is bor- rowed and what is original. The folding fan, the arts of lacquering, sword-making, cloissonné on porcelain, and some of the methods of dee- orating are of native origin. Other works of art are mostly imported. E. H. House gives a history of the tariffin Japan. ‘The first effective commercial treaty with Japan was negotiated in 1858 by Townsend and Harris, upon terms which in general were not disadvantageous to the unsophisticated people with whom they were dealing. If they had taken the precaution to insure the absolute termination of the treaty at a proper date, all would have resulted as they desired, but under the circumstances it has proved disastrous to Japan and proportionately favorable to the western powers. He also discussed foreign jurisdiction in Japan. The authors of the early treaties never intended to super- sede the laws of Japan by those of their own nations. The inflation of arrogant pretense, the multitude of entangling and bewildering compli- cations, the aggregation of gross abuses, and the offensive domination over the national rule which have been exercised in later years have no other basis than the narrow foundations of mutual assistance, stipu- lated in the treatiesof Harrisand Townsend. The ‘ diplomatic co-oper- ative policy” of European nations has put Japan in ties which hold her in political and morai enslavement. S. HE. Ives describes a Japanese magic mirror. It is a circular, metal- lie hand-mirror, having figures in relief upon its back; the reflecting surface is highly polished, and reflects the face as well apparently as do mirrors of silvered glass, but when itis used to reflect the direct rays 684 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. of a powerful light upon a screen the reflection shows the figures that are at the back of the mirror. This peculiarity is explained by the fact that there are irregularities in the convexity of the mirror which cause an irregular reflection of the sun’s rays. H. H. 8S. Thompson wrote on the womenof Japan. They pride them- selves on the fact that nine of the sovereigns of Japan have been wo- men; that the chief deity in their mythology is a woman, and that the keeper of the “divine regalia” is a virgin priestess. They say the women of the early centuries had great mental and physical vigor, and filled offices of public trast with dignity and honor. There are many heroines whose names are renowned in Japanese classics, while instances of woman’s valor, fortitude under suffering, and greatness in the hour of persecution abound. The Japanese woman has a place all her own in the world of letters. The evils in the position of women in Japan are traceable to Buddhism. JEWS AND JUDAISM. S. Adler discussed the various forms of benedictions in use in ancient times among the Jews. They fall into three classes: (1) After a physi- cal enjoyment; (2) on special occasion or at particular localities; (3) before fulfillment of a religious duty. B. Felsenthal showed that the popular Sabbath hymn Leha dodi was not composed by Judah ha-Levi, as Heine supposed, but was written by Solomon Alkabitz ha-Levy, who lived in the sixteenth cen- tury and died in the city of Safed, in Northern Palestine. He also showed that the pronunciation of Jehovah for the name of God was first employed in Germany in the sixteenth century. A. K. Glover described the Jews of India. They are all offshoots of Judah and not of the ten tribes. He also gave an account of the Jews of the Chinese Empire. k. J. H. Gottheil continues his translation of Karpeles’s History of Jewish Literature. M. Jastrow, jr., treated of several Jewish grammarians of the middle ages. Hayytg lived about the middle of the tenth century in Cordova, though born in Fez. He wrote two grammatical works on Hebrew verbs. In his studies he started from Arabic principles. From his treatises his pupil, Ibn Ganah, worked out his elaborate grammatical system. Donash ben Labrat’s only distinction is that he is the oppo- nent of Saadia Gaon and of Menahem b. Sarig. He is the author of two sharp polemical essays, the one containing a pointed criticism of Saadia’s Arabic translation of the Bible, the other an attempt to dis- countenance Menahem’s standing as a grammarian. Alexander Kohut discussed the etymology of a number of talmudiecal words. H. ©. Trumbull, in his history of the origin and development of the Sunday school, devotes the first chapter to a history of the ancient Jewish schools. . ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 685 The doctrines of the resurrection and of a world of the dead are found among the oldest heathen religions of Chaldea and Egypt. How- ard Osgood maintains against negative critics that the same doctrines are taught in the Pentateuch, especially in the narrative of Cain and Abel. B. Pick discussed the Old Testament, passages applied Messianically by the ancient synagogue, in Jeremiah, Lamentations, Ezekiel, Daniel, and the twelve minor prophets. His work consists in the collection of quotations from the Midrashim with reference to the promised Messiah. He maintains (Christ and the Essenes) against Ginsburg and Frankel that whatever points of resemblance critical ingenuity may emphasize, the teaching of Christianity was in a direction opposed to that of Essenism, and that the latter could have had no intentional connection with the origin of Christianity. In describing the Therapeute, of Egypt, a peculiar sect of Jewish ascetics, he points out agreements and disagreements between this sect and the Essenes. The characteristics of the two are so different that they can not be identical. Against Greetz he maintains the genuineness of Philo’s Tracta, and contends that the Therapeuti were Jews. Aaron Wise discussed the origin of Jewish angelology and demon- ology. He holds that it could not have arisen at the time of the Baby- lonian captivity, but antedates it. MISCELLANEOUS. I. N. Fradenburg has undertaken to show the connection of certain living religions of the Orient with the Jewish faith, and the connection of certain others with Christianity. He treats of (1) the great re- former of Asia, Buddha; (2) the old philosopher, Las-the, the contem- porary of Confucius; (3) Confucius, his life, teachings, and his religious system ; (4) Brahmanism and Hinduism, its caste, doctrines, precepts, and speculations. I. H. Hall gave a note on a Rhodian jar in the Boston Museum of Fine Arts; on one handle is the eponym and name of Doric month, and on the other the name of the manufacturer, owner, or exporter. L. describes the Musée Guimet in Paris, which contains a collection intended to teach the history of the characteristics of oriental religions. The Christian and the Hebrew forms of worship are excluded ; there is no other collection of the kind nearly so large, or so well adapted for the study of the development of oriental and ancient civilization. Allan Marquand described an archaic patera from Kourion, belong- ing to the Cesnola collection ; the central medallion is missing; the cen- ter zone represents a banquet scene; the scene figured upon the patera seems to be the autumnal Adonis festival, in which honor was paid to both Adonis and Aphrodite. A. P. Peabody compared classic and Semitic ethics. Semitic moral- ity has a ground or standard of right, and therefore a reason for con- 686 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. duct, of which we find no trace in the ethical philosophers of Greece and Rome. Acts are judged by their intrinsic and inherent nature, not by their bearing on some ultimate end ; a fatal deficiency in the morals of the classic ages was the relation of the sexes and the lack of purity and permanence of domestic institutions. S. D. Peet compared animal worship and sun worship in the East and in the West. The worship of the sun was prevalent in different parts of the world ata very ancient date. It was preceded by animal worship; but it is more powerful and more extensive than animal worship and grew out of it. The customs, habits, and language of the races of northern Asia are compared, especially the Ostyaks, with those of the aborigines of America. He discussed American religions and the Bible, and thinks that there are many things which go to show that there must have been a historic connection between the original religions of America and the teachings of the Bible. S. B. Platner, reviewed Myth, Ritual, and Religion of Andrew Lang. A method of explaining the irrational in mythology has been here worked out far more comprehensively and satisfactorily than by any other writer. MODERN ORIENTAL LANGUAGES. Cyrus Adler showed the importance of the study of modern oriental languages for a knowled ge of the ancient tongues and for the improve- ment of our consular service and increase of trade with the East. MOHAMMEDANISM AND ARABIC, The question, Why am I a Moslem? is answered by Ibn Ablis. There is a universally wrong conception of Mohammedanism among Western nations, but the more the religion of the Moslem is investigated the more does it claim the respectful homage of those who study its teachings. The Islam does not persecute any more than did or does Christianity. Notwithstanding his extensive travels in the Kast and West, the writer still clings to the five great duties of the true Moslem, and the six great dogmas of faith; in them he finds all that is needed to discipline the human soul to that condition which is expressed in the word ‘“* Moslem ”—“ one who is resigned.” ‘I am a Moslem because I recog- nize in Islam one of the many avenues through which the Creator of the universe leads his people to the temple of truth.” G. Benton discussed Mohammedanism in Africa, with reference to Canon Isaac Taylor’s statements, implying that Mohammedanism in Africa is an almost unmingled and beneficial success, while Christianity there is an undoubted failure. The replies of Canon McColl Bosworth Smith show that Canon Taylor was partly right. The superior success of Mohammedanism in Africa is due to the fact that it agrees better with the material and practical which it is within the power of the crude African mind to accept. oe ee Fay fers —_ See ae ee ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 687 Theodore Child gave a description of a visit to Constantinople. He narrates his treatment by the custom-house officers, his visit to the ba- zar, With notes on the municipal and social life of Stamboul. Guide- books are of very little help to the visitor of Stamboul, at least, to a man who really wants to know the life and social condition of the city. A. L. Frothingham sketched the development and character of Mo- hammedan education. The contrast between the liberal and the pro- gressive Arab of the Khalifate, and the intolerent and fanatical part of the East, are not to be lost sight of in a judgment of the culture of Mohammedanism. He traces the development and character of Arab- ian culture as influenced by the civilization of Byzantium, Syria, and Persia; gives the curriculum of studies; names the three institutions of instruction (school, college, and mosque), and points out the strong moral element in their education. F. H. Hedge, in an article on Mohammedan Mysticism, affirms that the recent account of the superior success, as compared with the Chris- tian, of Mohammedan missions in Africa confirms the former estimate of the prophet of Islam, whose claims were for the first time vindicated by Thomas Carlyle in 1840, and M. Barthilemy St. Hilaire in 1865. Mohammed borrowed much of his religion from Judaism, but, notwith- standing that this is the dominant element, he favored an un-Jewish mysticism. He compares Mohammed’s life with that of David. The two most obnoxious features of his religion, fatalism aud the sensual char- acter of his paradise, are found in the belief held by some branches of the Christian church, and, on the whole, are grossly misunderstood. He furnishes the biography of a saintly woman, Rabia, and closes with a few extracts from Tholuck’s Anthology of Eastern Mystics (1825). Thomas P. Hughes discussed the Moslem’s Bible, or Koran. Two hundred and one millions receive and venerate the Koran as the word of God. It is read more devoutly, more extensively, by the Moslems than the Christian Bible by the Christians. he Moslem takes religion seriously. The Koran contains some eighty thousand words, arranged in one hundred and fourteen chapters, called soorahs. The finest col- lection of ancient MSS. is in the library at Cairo. Whosoever can re- cite the whole Koran from memory is dignified with the title of hafiz, or protector of the faith. The early chapters are merely poetic effusions. The Koran is not an historic book; five periods can be distinguished in its composition. HK. P. Sanguinetti related his impressions of Constantinople ; his jour- ney to Batna, one of the French military outposts; an excursion to the tomb of Sidi Okbar; an Arab marriage, and his experiences in the Arab markets. Lawrence M. Simmons gave a brief statement of the views of Philippi and Wright on the separation which may take place between the so- called defined and defining neun in Arabic, followel by a translation from the celebrated “ Watchfire” of the late Nasif Al-Yazigi, showing ‘the treatment of this subject by a native grammarian. 688 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. C. H. Toy described some phonetic peculiarities of Cairo Arabic, especially the Egyptian mute Gym, palatal q, and the pronunciation of the dentals. In the Cairo pronunciation the old Arabic th and dh be- come ¢ and d; in some cases the Cairo fricatives pass into sibilants. George Washburn summarized the articles of the Mohammedan creed. Islamism has for its base faith in the unity of God and in the mission of his dearest servant Mohammed. The book of God which descended last from Heaven is the sacred Koran. The first of the prophets was Adam and the last Mohammed; the greatest of all is Mohammed, ete. Caroline R. Wright described the worship of the dervishes of Cairo. The preliminary prayers over, the curtain of the entrance door is raised, and giaours are admitted to the sanctuary. At this moment the chief dervish and other dervishes were prostrate, with their heads on the ground in the direction of meihrab, and for nearly half an hour they continued kneeling, praying and bowing, rocking to and fro, reciting the Koran in a twanging nasal tone. Then follows the howling of the litany, with its unison refrain Allah-hou, Allah-hou. OLD TESTAMENT AND HEBREW. Benjamin Wisner Bacon presented in tabular form the results of the principal schools of higher Biblical criticism, including fragments and portions assigned to editors, interpolators, compilers, and glossators. His classification is: Priestly Law Book, P?; Ephraimite Narrative, F; Judean Narrative, J; Law of Holiness, P?. HK. C. Bissell published a work on Biblical Antiquities, for popular use. It embraces the main facts under the classification of domestic, civil, and sacred antiquities. W.G. Blakie has published.the first and second books of Samuel. They belong to the series called the Expositor’s Library, based on the plan of giving the substance of scripture in a running commentary or connected narrative, which furnishes all needful explanations. C. A. Briggs continued his studies on the forms of Hebrew poetry. The tetrameters are measured by four beats of the accent, and are often divided by a cesura into two halves. Examples are Psalm xlvi, 13; 2 Samuel i, 19-27; Exodus xv; Psalm lxxxix. Tetrameters are not so numerous as the pentameters. The pentameter is measured by five beats of the rythmical accent; the cwesura usually comes after the third beat. Examples are Lamentations ili; Psalm exix; Jonah ii; Psalms CXx, Cxxxiv (the dirge of Babylon); Isaiah xlvii. The hexameter is a double trimeter. Instances of hexameter are Proverbs xxxi, 12 ff; Psalm exxxvil; Isaiah Ix, and Jeremiah viii, 9. T. K. Cheyne offers an emandation to Job iii, 14, and translates “ to build up ruined places.” Howard Crosby asserts that the revised Old Testament is too much a new edition of the old authorized version, and illustrates this by a Rp os 3 < eS a ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 689 passage from the book of Job (xxviii, 1-12), which, of all the Old Testa- nent writings, needed the most thorough revision. Against Cheyne he shows that the Cyrus inscription, and the statemeuts contained in Isaiah xliv, 28, and xlv, 1-13, do not really contradict each other. Cyrus may have treated Bel, and Nebo, and Merodach with the greatest courtesy, and yet have sent the Jews back as a wise piece of policy. James D. Dana discussed the cosmogony of Genesis in reply to Canon Driver (Defense and Critique, Andov. Rev., 1887). He favors the stand taken by Guyot, and holds that the fiats of Genesis did not produce completed results, but initiated slowly developing processes. T. G. Dashiel maintains that the Old Testament teaches practically the doctrine of eternal existence. Samuel Davidson. Notes on the Psalms: ii, 12; iv,3; vi, 2; viii, 2; xii, 7; xvi, 3, render: as to the saints who are in the land and the no- bles, all my pleasure is in them; xviii; xix; xxii, 17; xxv, 11; xxix, 2; xxxli, 9, With bit and bridle their youth must be bound; they do not come near thee otherwise; xxxvi, 13; xxxvii, 38; xxxix,3; xlii,5; xlv; ainsi As Ives elvis Ivins) vail, 25 ix, 6, bxivy 7 six 165 Mixa Ixvini; Ixix; Ixx;5 Ixxii; Ixxin, 4; Ixxiv, 19; Ixxvi, 5, and Ixxvii, 11, 17-20. W.N. Davis characterized the Chokmah or Hebrew philosophy. © It dates its development from the age of Solomon. It differs from the Greek philosophy in taking for granted the existence of an omniscient, omnipotent, and omnipresent God. Hebrew wisdom is inseparable from morals; wisdom and right living are synonomous terms. The best specimens of the Chokmah are found in Ecclesiastes and Job. In discussing Job xix, 25-7, he holds there is no evidence that the word “‘redeemer,” used in Job xix, 25, can be applied to Christ, “the Redeemer.” The word Goel used here is avenger, blood relative. He explains what a Goel is and translates verse 25. ‘I know that my Goel lives and my vindicator will arise upon the earth; (26) and after my sin is thus destroyed, and without my flesh (body) I shall see God.” Marcus Dod’s edition of the Book of Genesis belongs to the series called “The Expositor’s Bible.” G. C. M. Douglas reviews The prophecies of Isaiah, by T. K. Cheyne; and Isaiah, his life, and times, and writings, by S. R. Driver. Douglas does not agree with the position of either Cheyne or Driver, and gives his reason at length; there is nothing to justify us in disbelieving the universal and unbroken tradition which attributes them to Isaiah, the alleged reasons being misconceptions. J. F. Genung discussed the interpretation of the Book of Job. Many of its difficulties are due less to original fault than to crude interpreta- tion of them. The so-called debate-theory, with its assumed main sub- ject, “the mystery of God’s providential government of men,” does not result in an exposition so homogeneous as we could wish; it does not reach the heart of the book. The problem of the book is doth Job fear H. Mis. 142—-—44 690 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. God for naught? And the solution of it is Job himself, the man Job. The poem is an epic, not a drama. It is the epic of the inner life; as such its significance extends far beyond national bounds to the universal heart of humanity. W. H. Green proposed a new nomenclature for the Hebrew tenses; he prefers preterit and future as designations of the Hebrew tenses to perfect and imperfect, and holds that these tenses primarily and prop- erly denote the time of action, and not simply its mode as complete or incomplete. He has re-edited his Hebrew grammar, first published twenty-seven years ago; it has been revised throughout and the syntax entirely recast. i W. R. Harper published Elements of Hebrew Syntax and discussed the Pentateuchal question; he presented a detailed analysis of the Hexateuch, in parallel columns, giving not only the chapters and verses by sections as they are divided by critics, but also the topics of which each section treats. An introductory note states the points (7) agreed upon by the two schools. Then follow the facts and considerations urged in favor of the analysis of Genesis i, 1,-xii 5, in sections. Edward P. Humphrey (in Sacred History, from the Creation to the Giv- ing of the Law) defends the traditional view of the Mosaic records. The difficulties which are supposed to embarrass the Mosaic account of the creation he classes as follows: (1) All those questions in which the meaning of the text is fully ascertained and opposing sciences are im- mature. (2) The problems in which natural science is mature and the Bible is not understood. (3) Where the results of science are incom- plete and proper explanation of the Bible is not yet reached. M. Jastrow, sr., discussed the transposed stems in Talmudic, Hebrew, and Chaldaic, especially the reduplicated stems, the so-called pilpels and palpels of verbs and nouns. K. Kohler criticised the arrangement and method of Jastrow’s Tal- mudic dictionary, especially the tendency to give up derivations from the Greek and find Semitic etymologies. Thomas Lauris rendered Genesis xli, 32, “the dream was told or set forth to Pharaoh twice.” G. F. Moore gave a sketch of the history of Semitic studies in this country from the settlement of New England to about 1875. The author describes the state of learning among the Puritans, and its gradual decadence; then, at greater length, the revival of Biblical science in the early part of this century, with brief biographical notices of Stuart and other leading representatives of this movement; and gives, finally, without any attempt at exhaustiveness, a survey of the more recent literature. A second article is to contain a fuller account of the work, of the last ten years. He pointed out some seeming evidence that the supralinear system of vowels originated under Arab influence. Henry Preserved Smith reviewed Victor Rysoels The text of Micah, parti (1887). The book is one of real importance. The text of Micah’s a ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 691 prophecies is corrupt and must be corrected from the ancient versions. He also discussed the value of the Targum to Jeremiah: in seventy pas- sages, the Targum helps us to determine the text of the book of Jere- miah. In fixing our Old Testament text we must not ignore this version. W. O. Sproull holds that the native language of Abraham was Aramaic, since he emigrated from Ur of the Chaldees to the land of Canaan (Genesis, xi,31). It is probable, however, that he knew Hebrew before he came into the land of Canaan, for there is no indication that he had any difficulty in conversing with its inhabitants. A. W. Thayer calls attention to the fact that Professor Graetz, of Breslau, has prepared a revised text of the Massoretic Bible, which is now awaiting publication. PEDAGOGICS. At the fall meeting of the American Oriental Society, Francis Brown A. L. Frothingham, jr.. W. H. Green, W. R. Harper, Paul Haupt, Morris Jastrow, jr., D. G. Lyon, C. H. Toy, and W. H. Ward discussed the history of Semitic studies in this country, and offered suggestions for the future. The remarks were collected and published in Hebraica with au introduction by Morris Jastrow, jr. PERSIA, Morris Jastrow discussed the plan of the Palace of Artaxerxes Mnemon, compared it with the description of the Palace of Ahasuerus in the book of Esther, and accepts M. Dieluafoy’s conclusion, that the palace he discovered at Susa is the one described in the book of Esther, SAMARITAN. G. F. Moore described a fragment of a manuscript of the Samaritan Pentateuch deposited by Grant-Bey in the Library of Andover Sem- inary. The fragment contains Ex. viil, 16—xxx, 28; itis of the thirteenth century, and apparently a part of the codex described by Rosen, Zeit- schrift der Deutschen Morgenlindischen gesellschaft, xviii, 586. SEMITIC PHILOLOGY. KE. P. Allen answered G. F. Moore’s objections to his former paper on Semitic sounds and their transliteration. Allen’s theory is that the so- called Semitic emphatic consonants are distinguished by a combination of mouth position with the glottal catch. G. F. Moore questions the theory that the distinctive characteristic of the emphatic consonants is a combination of glottal catch with mouth articulation. 692 MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS. SYRIAC. Robert H. Beattie described the recent changes in life in Syria and the new opportunities they bring to American scholarship and industry. Syriac literature has been enriched by the discovery and description of a number of unedited texts. Isaac H. Hall described a manuscript recently acquired by the Union Theological Seminary of New York, consisting of the service of obse- quies, and introduced by the ritual of the washing of the dead, publish- ing portions of the text with translation; a manuscript of the Peshitto four Gospels, the property of Beloit College, Wisconsin, accompanied by a manuscript of the traditions of the Apostles, text and translation of which are given. R. J. H. Gottheil published a manuscript containing a fragment of a Porphyry in the Berlin Library; a Syriac geographical chart; text of Berlin manuscript tract on the Syriac conjunctions and a collation of a text of a portion of the Targums ina map or manuscript in the Library of the Temple Emanuel, New York. G. F. Moore called attention to the fact that four of the British Mu- seum Hebrew manuscripts with the Targum recently acquired from Yemen are in this same hand, and together form a complete Bible; also to the excellent character of the Targum text. The New York Tribune of August 12, 1888, gave a description of a Syrian commencement and the scenes attendant on the closing of the American College at Beirut. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ORIENTAL LITERATURE IN THE UNITED STATES DURING 1888. ADLER, Cyrus. Semitic Languages in the Encyclopedia Britannica. Proc. Amer. Phil. Assn., X1X session, pp. Xiv—Xvii. Discussion on the study of modern orientallanguages. Trans. Mod. Lang. Assn., vol. 111, p. XViil. Review of Friedr. Delitzsch, Prolegomena eines neuen hebraisch-aramiiischen Worterbuchs. American Hebrew. Jan. 20. A Babylonian Expedition. American (Philadelphia). March 24. — Announcement of a proposed complete edition of the works of Edward Hincks, with a biographical introduction and portrait of the author. Presented on behalf of the Semitic Seminary of the Johns Hopkins University. Proc. Amer. Orient. Soc. May, pp. XxXii-xxvii. Note on the collection of Oriental Antiquities in the U. S. National Museum at Washington. Proc. Amer. Orient. Soc. May, pp. Xxvli-xxviil. Note on Babylonian Inscriptions discovered at Tell-Amarna and now in the British Museum. American (Philadelphia) June 16. —— — The views of the Babylonians concerning life after death. Andover Review, July, vol. x, pp. 92-101. Assyrian verbs tertie infirm. Proc. Amer. Orient. Soc. Oct., pp. xevili-c. The U.S. National Museum exhibit of Oriental Antiquities at the recent Cin- cinnati Exposition. Proc. Amer. Orient. Soc. Oct. pp. i-ill. Note on the proposed edition of the life and writings of Edward Hincks, Proce. Amer. Orient. Soc. Oct., pp. ci-civ. mist ch» ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 693 ADLER, 8. Benedictions. Jewish Conference Papers. (New York, 1887), p. 358. ALEXANDER, JOSEPH H. Who was Melchizedek? Presbt. Quart. Jan. ALLEN, EDGAR P. Some additions and corrections to Lotz’s Tiglath-Pileser. Proc. Amer. Orient. Soc., Oct., pp. civ—evili. On the Semitic emphatic consonants. Proc. Amer. Orient. Soc., Oct., pp. eviil— exil. ALLEN, J. H. A word on Islam. Unitar. Rev., May, p. 463. AMENT, W.S. The ancient coinage of China. Amer. Journ. of Archeol., vol. Iv, pp. 284-290 and pl. xii, xiii. Anonymous. A Persian feneral. Christian Leader, May 10, p. 7. China then and now. WN. Y. LHvangelist, June 14, p. 2. Babylonian excavations. N. Y. Hvening Post, June 22. — A Mohammedan tract. Christian Intelligencer, May 16. Why am I a Moslem? North Amer. Rev., April, pp. 378-389. (Attributed to Ion Ablis). To dig in Babylon; the proposed expedition. Philada. Ledger, June 14 (ed- itorial). Wonders of Egypt; ruins of the city of Bubastis. (Cairo correspondence to the N. Y. Tribune.) Copied in the Cincinnati Commercial Gazette, June 24. A Syrian commencement ; scenes at the American College at Beirut, from an occasional correspondent. N. Y. Tribune, Aug. 12. BalLry, J. Sabbath commentary. a ORIENTAL SCIENCE IN AMERICA. 699 MasPERO, G. Syria before the invasion of the Hebrews according to the Egyptian Monuments. N. Y. Independent, Jan. 12. Egyptian Souls and their Worlds. New Princ. Rev., Jaly, pp. 23-36. MATHEWS, SHAILER. The rhetorical value of the study of Hebrew. O. Test. Stud. VU, pp. fiom McCo.iester,8.H. Delbi, India, Modern and Ancient. Christian Leader, April 26 and May 3 From Bagdad to Babylon. Christian Leader, May 24. The Nineveh of to-day. Christian Leader, June 14. MCELRONE, HuGH. The literature of America. S. S. Times, Aug. 18, p.515. An Arabian ee S. S. Times, Sept. 29, p. 611. MircHet, S. 8. Prizes from the Faiynm papyri and portraits that light up the past. N. Y. Times, July 1. Mo.LpENKE, CH. E. The tale of the two brothers. A fairy tale of ancient Egypt. Being the D’Orbiney papyrus in hieratic characters in the British Museum. To which is added the hieroglyphic transcription, a glossary, critical notes, the translation, and a list of hieratic characters with their hieroglyphic equivalents, pronunciation, determinative values, etc. Part1l. The hieratic text. New York. Moore,G.F. v is generally supposed to have been far behind its present status, espe- cially so far as this country is concerned, the excellent preparation of the specimens, their very precise labelling and perfect preservation, show Professor Baird to have been in every respect the peer of any ornithological collector of the present period. Exposed for more than thirty years to constant handling and everything that could effect their deterioration, they are still in a most excellent state of perservation, and none have lost their labels. I have never known a specimen of Professor Baird’s preparation to be attacked by insects, a statement which I am able to make regarding few other collections of which I possess the knowledge to speak. The force of these observations may be better appreciated when it is considered that probably no other collection of skins has ever received so much handling as that made by Professor Baird, every standard work on North American birds pub- lished since 1850 having been based essentially upon it, so far as eastern species are concerned. Not only are the specimens prepared and pre- served in a manner equalled by ouly the best of our living collectors, but their labels are fastened with unusual security, and contain very precise data, including scientific name (with authority), sex, age, locality, and date; and usually, on the reverse side, the total length and stretch of wings, measured before skinning. i The formation of so large and varied a collection of course in- 7) *Mr. Goode informs us that ‘‘at the time of his death, in 1872,” he “was United States, collector of internal revenue at Reading.” t This catalogue constitutes Volume I of the series of National Museum “ Register of Specimens,” now tilling twenty-one volumes, and containing more than 112,000 sep- arate entries. H. Mis. 142——45 706 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS volved such a vast amount of field work as to remove Professor Baird from the limbo of so-called ‘“ closet-naturalists.” How pleasant and instructive to him must have been his out-of-door studies of birds may be inferred from the extent of his excursions, which are thus de- scribed by Mr. Goode: “In 1841, at the age of eighteen, we find him making an ornithologi- cal excursion through the mountains of Pennsylvania, walking four hundred miles in twenty-one days, the last day sixty miles between day- light and rest.* The following year he walked more than 2,200 miles. His fine physique and consequent capacity for work are doubtless due in part to his outdoor life during these years.” Considering Professor Baird’s great interest in the study of birds, the number of his ornithological publications is astonishingly small, amount- ing to only seventy-nine different titles (see Mr. Goode’s Bibliography, pp. 250-253). It is, therefore, strikingly evident that his publications must have possessed unusual merit to earn for him so great a reputation as anornithologist. This reputation was indeed established by the first of iis separate works, usually known and quoted as ‘The Birds of North america,” though not published under this title until two years after its publication by the Government as volume 1x of the “ Report of Explo- rations and Surveys, to ascertain the most practicable and economical route for a Railroad from the Mississippi River to the Pacific Ocean.” With the publication, in 1858, of this great quarto volume of more than one thousand pages, began what my distinguished colleague, Professor Coues, has fitly termed the “ Bairdian Period” of American ornithology— a period covering almost thirty years and characterized by an activity of ornithological research and rapidity of advancement without a parallel in the history of the science. Referring to this great work, in his ‘‘ Bib-’ liographical Appendix” to “ Birds of the Colorado Valley” (page 650), Professor Couessays: ‘Itrepresents the mostimportant single step ever taken in the progress of American ornithology in all that relates to the technicalities. The nomenclature is entirely re-modelled from that of the immediately preceding Audubonian period, and for the first time brought abreast of the then existing aspect of the case. - - - The synon- ymy of the work is more extensive and elaborate and more reliable than any before presented; the compilation was almost entirely original, very few citations having been made at second-hand, and these being indicated by quotation marks. The general text consists of diagnoses or descriptions of each species, with extended and elaborate criticisms, comparisons, and commentary. - - - The appearance of so great a work, from the hands of a most methodical, learned, and sagacious naturalist, aided by two of the leading ornithologists of America (John Cassin and George N. Lawrence), exerted an influence perhaps stronger and more widely felt than that of any of its predecessors, Audubon’s * Professor Baird informed the writer that he had once, in a pedestrian contest, walked forty miles in eight consecutive hours. pies ie. F SPENCER F. BAIRD. - TOT and Wilson’s not excepted, and marked an epoch in the history of American ornithology. Thesynonymy and specific characters, original in this work, have been used again and again by subsequent writers, with various modifications and abridgment, and are in fact a large basis of the technical portion of the subsequent ‘ History of North American Birds,’ by Baird, Brewer, and Ridgway. Such a monument of original research is likely to remain for an indefinite period a source of inspira- tion to lesser writers, while its authority as a work of reference will always endure.” Thus are graphically described the distinctive features of what Mr. Leonhard Stejneger has truthfully termed the Bairdian School* of ornithology, a school strikingly characterized by peculiar exactness in dealing with facts, conciseness in expressing deductions, and careful analysis of the subject in its various bearings ;—methods so radically different from those of the older ‘* European School” that, as the esteemed member whom we have just named has already remarked,t conclusions or arguments can be traced back to their source and thus properly weighed, whereas the latter affords no basis for analysis. In other words, as Mr. Stejneger has, in substance, said, the European School requires the investigator to accept an author’s statements and conclusions on his personal responsibility alone, while the Bairdian furnishes him with tangible facts from which to take his deductions. The dominant sources of Professor Baird’s training in systematic or- nithology are not difficult to trace ; in fact, the bases of his classifications are so fully explained or frequently mentioned in his various works as to leave nothing to mere inference. He studied carefully the more ad- vanced systems of his time, and with unerring instinct selected from them their best features, and combined them, together with original ideas, jnto a Classification which was an improvement on its predecessors. Thus, the classification presented in the “Birds of North America” (1858) is based essentially upon the systems of Sundevall (“¢ Ornitholo- giskt System,” 1835 and 1843), Cabanis (“Ornithologische Notizen,” 1847), and Keyserling and Blasius (‘¢ Wirbelithiere Europas,” 13840). The nomenclature was fixed by methods adopted from G. R. Gray (List of the Genera of Birds,” ete., 1841-42), to the abandonment of which must be attributed most of the subsequent changes in generic names. In the “ Review” (186466) and “History of North American Birds” (1874), a further concession is made to the classifications of Sun- devall and Cabanis by commencing with the Order Passeres and Fam- ily Turdidw instead of the Raptores. The same systems were the foundation of Liljeborg’s “Classification of Birds,” formally adopted by the Smithsonian Institution (through Professor Baird) in 1866, by Messrs. Sclater and Salvin (with certain emendations and amplifica- “Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., vol. vir, 1884, p. 76, edo, os Oli 708 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. . tions) in 1873, and with still further modifications by the American Ornithologists’ Union, in 1886. The distinctive features of the ‘“Bairdian School” were still further developed by the publication, in 1864—66, of the “ Review of American Birds,” a work of unequalled merit, displaying in their perfection Pro- fessor Baird’s wonderful powers of analysis and synthesis, so strongly combined in his treatment of difficult problems. Unfortunately for ornithology this work was but fairly begun, only a single volume (an octavo of 450 pages) being published. The cause of its discontinuance is not definitely known to the present writer, but it may have been the intervention of the “ Ornithology of California,” * a work based on the manuscript notes of Dr. J. G. Cooper, but edited by Professor Baird, who also superintended its publication, and the “ History of North American Birds,” t material for which was already being arranged, be- sides other literary work and the increasing pressure of administrative duties. Whatever the cause, however, its discontinuance is to be regretted, since its completion would have given us an invaluable guide to the study of Neotropical birds. I have it on good authority that no single work on American ornithology has made so profound an impression on European ornithologists as Professor Baird’s ‘ heview ;” and, by the same authority, lam permitted to state that he—a HKuropean by birth and rearing—became an American citizen through its influence. In the preface to the present writer’s latest work on American ornithology t the author is proud to mention that the book was “ orgi- nally projected by Professor Spencer F. Baird, - - - whose works represent the highest type of systematic ornithology and have furnished the model from which the younger generation of ornithologists have drawn their inspiration ;” and that his friendly advice and suggestions had rendered comparatively easy the performance of a task which under less favorable auspices would have been far more difficult of accomplish- ment—acknowledgments which but faintly express the author’s obliga- tion to his tutor. *Geological Survey of California. J.D. Whitney, State Geologist. Ornithology. Vol. 1. Land Birds. Edited by 8. F. Baird, from the manuscript and notes of J. G. Cooper. Published by authority of the legislature, 1870. A royal octavo volume of 592 pages, illustrated by numerous wood-cuts, some colored by hand. tA History of North American Birds, by S. F. Baird, T. M. Brewer, and R. Ridgway. Land Birds, illustrated by 64 colored plates and 593 wood cuts. Boston: Little, Brown & Company, 1874. 3 vols., small quarto. Vol. 1, pp. i-xxviii, 1-596, 1-vi, cuts, and pll. i-xxvi; vol. 11, 3 pll. pp. 1-590, i-vi, cuts, and pll. xvii-lvi; vol. 11, 3 pll., pp. 1-560, 1 1., i-xxviii, cuts, and pll. lvii-]xix. tA Manual of North American Birds, by Robert Ridgway. Illustrated by 464 outline drawings of the generic characters. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Com- pany, 1887. Royal octavo. Frontispiece (portrait of Professor Baird), pp. i-xi, 1-631, pli. i-exxiv. The history of this work, briefly stated, is as follows: Before the printing of the ‘‘ History of North American Birds” had been completed, Professor Baird had under way a smaller but very useful work, consisting of the ana- Cr SPENCER F. BAIRD. 709 In commenting upon the value of Professor Baird’s contributions to scientific literature, Professor Goode remarks that ‘no one not living in the present can form an accurate idea of the personal influence of aieader upon his associates and upon the progress of thought in his special de- partment, nor can such an influence as this well be set down in words. This influence is apparently due not only to extraordinary skill in organ- ization, to great power of application and concentration of thought con- stantly applied, and to a philosophical and comprehensive mind, but to an entire and self-sacrificing devotion to the interests of his own work and that of others.” But it is not only through his published works and personal influence with his associates and pupils that Professor Baird was powerful in the development and advancement of ornithology in America. His position as head of the Smithsonian Institution and the National Mu- seum gave him peculiar opportunities for putting into practical shape his plans for a thorough exploration of little known portions of the continent. ‘To his influence with the Government authorities is due theexcellent field-work donein connection with nearly all the Government surveys and the Signal Service Bureau, from the first inception of the va- rious Pacific Railroad surveys to the present time.”* If the exploration of a particular field suggested itself to him, he rarely failed to find, sooner or later, means to accomplish the object in view; no opportunity for making use of, or securing the co-operation of, other departments of the Government in maintaining explorations which he had himself insti- gated or organized was ever neglected, and for such opportunities he wasconstantly alert. His success in thus promoting the cause of science was, however, by no means wholly due to the importance of his official positions, his personal zeal and influence often accomplishing what might not otherwise have been successful. The sterling qualities of mind and heart which were so conspicuous in Professor Baird’s character were as well known and as highly appre- ciated abroad as at home. As an illustration of this fact, | quote the lytical or synoptical tables of the larger work, improved and somewhat enlarged by the introduction of brief diagnoses of the nests and eggs of the different species, together with the English names, This book, of which there exists only a single copy, and that not perfect, was completed early in 1874. Its title is ‘‘ Outlines of American Ornithology, by 8. F. Baird and R. Ridgway. Part I, Land Birds.” For some reason the work was never published, and the electrotype plates were destroyed. This work, in which the present writer had some share, was the embryo which, after twelve years’ incubation, finally developed into the more comprehensive ‘‘ Manual of North American Birds,” in the preparation of which, however, Professor Baird took no active part, though it is scarcely necessary to say that he was much in- terested in its progress, even almost to the close of his life, which ended shortly after the work had been printed, but before it conld be published. It has been a matter of deep regret to the author that Professor Baird could not have had a share in the preparation of the book, and still more that he could not have lived to enjoy the satisfaction of seeing it published. * Editorial in The Auk, October, 1887, p. 358. CO BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. following obituary notice in “‘ Nature” for August 25, by Mr. R. Bowdler Sharpe, senior assistant, Department of Zoology, in the British Museum, well known as an ornithologist of eminence: ‘By Englishmen who knew Professor Baird personally, the loss must be especially felt, but there are many who never had met him in the flesh, to whom the news of his decease must come as that of a dear friend. As one of the latter class we venture to express our sympathy with our scientific brethren in America on the decease of one of their most eminent and respected colleagues. As chief of the Smithsonian Institution, Professor Baird possessed @ power of conferring benefits on the world of science exercised by few directors of public museums, and the manner in which he utilized these powers has resulted not only in the wonderful success of the United States National Museum under his direction, but in the enrichment of many other museums which were in friendly intercourse with the Smithsonian Institution. We know by experience that the British Museum is indebted beyond meas- ure to Professor Baird, and we need only to refer to the recent volumes of the ‘Catalogue of Birds’ to show how much our National Museum owes to the sister museum in America for hearty co-operation. We had only to write and express our wants, and immediately every effort was made, by Professor Baird’s instructions, to supply all the desiderata in our ornithological collection, and this without the slightest demand for an equivalent exchange, though, of course, in the case of the British Museum every effort was made to reciprocate the good feeling shown by the great American museum. There must be many private collect- ors in this country who will endorse our acknowledgments to Professor Baird for the unrivalled liberality which he has always shown in the advancement of the studies of every ornithologist who invoked his aid. - - - We may add that during an experience of twenty years we have never heard from any ornithologist, European or American, a single unkind word concerning Professor Baird, either in his public or private capacity. This is something to say in this age of jealousies and backbitings.” Indeed, it may with truth be said that so widespread, so nearly uni- versal has been his influence that few there are, if any, among his contemporaries who have not had occasion to record their sense of obli- gation for his aid, his counsel, or his noble example. We all delight to acknowledge him our great teacher, and in doing so do honor to ourselves. A very marked trait of Professor Baird’s character was his aversion to personal controversy, which was so decided that under no cireum- stances could he be drawn into one. It was his invariable rule to answer his critics by a dignified silence, no matter how great the provo- cation to reply, or how strong a case his side presented ; and in every instance known to the writer it has transpired that the ground taken or the statements made by Professor Baird have stood the test of time. “One of his striking characteristics was that he would never quarrel ot ———— er, ~~ SPENCER F. BAIRD. real and never have auything to do with the quarrels of others. He was always for peace.” * As a public officer, no man was more conscientiously devoted to his duty or faithful in its performance; and he administered the compli- cated affairs of three distinct and important establishments with an ability which commanded admiration, although it was plainly to be seen that the responsibilities were too great for any single person to bear. His capacity for work was enormous, and he was constantly oc- cupied. He enjoyed work, and it was not his industry which hurt him; but the harassing cares of his public trusts and the weight of their re- sponsibility were too much for even his powerful physique to endure, and he gave way under the strain. No man was more easily approached than Professor Baird, or greeted a new acquaintance more cordially. His reception of young persons—— especially those with an inclination for natural history, was particularly charming, at once relieving them from embarrassment and captivating them by his unassuming manners, his geniality, and frankness. Trusting that he does not introduce too prominently his own person- ality into this memoir, the writer offers the following brief outline of his personal acquaintance with Professor Baird, as being of probable interest to members of the Union, and as giving an insight into the character of his lamented friend. Until near the middle of the year 1864, the writer, then a lad in his fourteenth year, was enacquainted with the name of any living natu- ralist, or with any books on natural history except such general or superficial compilations as Goldsmith’s ‘Animated Nature,’ a history of the United States (author forgotten) which included a chapter or two on the natural history, and Goodrich’s ‘Animal Kingdom’—works which, although supplying much valuable information to the general reader, were of course wholly inadequate to the wants of a special student. A lady resident in the town learned of his difficulties, and suggested that by writing to the Commissioner of Patents in Washing- ton he might be able to obtain the correct names of birds, supplement- ing her fortunate suggestion by the gift of an envelope bearing the printed address of a former Commissioner of Patents. “Tt will not be necessary to spend much time in practising coloring, as this is rather a mechanical work, easily acquired by practice. The first object should be to obtain the highest perfection in drawing the form and in filling out minute details.” (From a letter dated Decem- ber 24, 1865.) In a letter dated January 13, 1867, he gave this valuable advice as to writing field-notes : ‘‘ Let me give you one hint in regard to making notes on the specimens. Never write on both sides of the same leaf. In this way it will be possible to cut apart your notes into slips and assort with others of same purport, so as to re-arrange systematically. Do this for your own notes as well as those you send me: You will often realize the advantage of so doing.” It is unnecessary here to go into details concerning events subse- quent to the beginning of this correspondence. Suffice it to say that in all his relations with Professor Baird the writer remembers, with deepest gratitude and reverence, his uniform great kindness of heart, his genial manners, his wise counsels, and his steadfast friendship ; and, with others who were so fortunate as to have enjoyed the privi- lege of his acquaintance, he mourns a departed friend and teacher, whose loss is irreparable. Brak fin PROCEEDINGS AT A MEETING COMMEMORATIVE OF THE LIFE AND SCIENTIFIC WORK OF SPENCER FULLERTON BAIRD, Held January 11, 1888, under the joint auspices of the Anthropological, Biological, and Philosophical Societies of Washington. INTRODUCTION. On August 19, 1887, Spencer Fullerton Baird, Secretary of the Smith- sonian Institution, Director of the U. S. National Museum, and U.S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, died at Wood’s Holl, Massachu- setts, his post of duty in the last-named office. His death at once ex- cited throughout the world feelings and expressions of profound regret. At that time nearly all of his Washington associates in scientific pursuits were absent from the city, on field duty or in vacation, and were thus unable to jointly testify to the affection and respect in which he was held by them. And especially the scientific societies of Washington, none of which meet during the summer months, were unable to immediately take any action in the matter or to give organized expression to the sentiments of their members. With the resumption of meetings, however, it was determined that such expression should be given with all ceremonial completeness, and as the senior of the Washington scientific societies, and the one with which Professor Baird had been most closely connected, the Philosoph- ical Society took the initial steps in arranging a joint meeting with the Anthropological and Biological Societies, a meeting which might enable the members and their friends to testify not only their profound respect for this foremost scientific leader, but also their affectionate regard for the man. The appended invitation and programme, which was mailed to all members of the Philosophical, Anthropological, Biological, and Chem- ical Societies, and of the Cosmos Club, sets forth the form taken in those arrangements. WASHINGTON, January 4, 1888. Str: The Philosophical Society in conjunction with the other scien- tific societies of the city will hold a meeting on Wednesday evening, January the eleventh, in commemoration of the life and services to 715 716 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. science of the late SPENCER. FULLERTON BAIRD, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, Director of the National Museum, and United States Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries. Members of the societies, and ladies and gentlemen whom they may desire to invite, will assemble in the lecture-room of the Columbian Uni- versity, on the southeast corner of H and Fifteenth streets, at a quarter past eight o’clock. Your presence on this occasion is earnestly desired. C. KE. DUTTON, ROBERT FLETCHER, J. H. KIDDER, Committee of Management. Opening of the meeting, by the president of the Philosophical Society. Professor Baird as Administrator, Mr. W. B. Taylor, of the Smith- sonian Institution. Professor Baird in Science, Mr. W. H. Dall, president of the Bio- logical Society. The Personal Characteristics of Professor Baird, Mr. J. W. Powell, president of the Anthropological Society. Mr. Garrick Mallery, president of the Philosophical Society, called the meeting to order at the time and place above named. —— 7 — RELATIONS BETWEEN PROFESSOR BAIRD AND PARTICI- PATING SOCIETIES. By Mr. GARRICK MALLERY, President of the Philosophical Society. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN: During several wiuters before 1871, a club, with commingled social and scientific purposes, used to meet in this city at the houses of its members. — ASA GRAY. 767 opinion in botanical matters he esteemed more highly than that of any of his contemporaries. In his second journey, from June, 1850, to August, 1551, he traveled through France, Germany, and Holland, and spent two months with Bentham at his home in Herefordshire, studying the plants of the Wilkes Expedition, upon which he was then working. The fourth journey, from September, 1868, to November, 1869, was undertaken at atime when he was much overworked, and he spent the winter in Egypt, that country being almost the only spot where there was nothing to tempt him to botanize, besides visiting Italy, France, Germany, and England. The event of the journey of September, 1880, to November, 1881, was a trip to Spain, a country where he obtained much relief from Botany. His last journey, on which he started in 1887, was a triumphant farewell, in which were heaped upon him honors bestowed on few naturalists. He visited friends in France, Austria, and Germany ; stopped at Geneva to see De Candolle, his life-long friend, older by four years than himself, and sorrowfully bade him what both must have felt to be a last farewell; then hurried back from the continent to receive the doctor’s degree from the three great British Universities, and to attend the meeting of the British Association at Manchester. Here he saw many old friends, and met for the first time three of Ger- many’s most distinguished botanists—Cohn, Pringsheim, and the lamented De Bary, whose untimely death was to come but a few days before his own. At Manchester he was brought into contact with a large number of young botanists, who were charmed with his genial manner, aud astonished at his well preserved vigor of body, as well as mind. He returned to America in October, apparently in perfect health, and resumed active labor on the “Flora;” but while busied with the preparation of the Vitaceew for that work, he was suddenly stricken with paralysis, on the morning of November 28, and lingered in a partially conscious condition until the evening of January 30, when he passed calmly away. By the death of Asa Gray this academy has lost a member whose activity and zeal were unceasing, and whose brilliant talents as a scien- tific writer, not surpassed by those of any of the illustrious names on our roll, added much to the reputation of the society at home and abroad. Elected a corresponding member in 1841, he became an active member in 1842, on his settlement in Cambridge, and served as corresponding secretary from 1844 to 1850, and again from 1852 to 1863, and as presi- dent from 1863 to 1873. During this long membership of more than forty years his attendance was always exemplary. The storms of winter and the inclemencies of spring, which kept younger men at home, did not prevent his coming from the remote Botanic Garden regularly to attend the meetings. Although an honorary member of most of the learned societies of this country, and of many of the most prominent societies of Europe, including the Royal Society of London, - 768 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. the French Academy, and the Imperial Academy of St. Petersburg, of which he was one of the very few Americans who bave been elected corresponding members, this Academy was the society in which he felt the greatest interest and was most at home. There are few volumes of our Proceedings which do not contain im- portant communications from his pen. One of the earliest of his works, the ‘Chloris Boreali-Americana,” was printed in the third volume of the Academy’s Memoirs, in 1846; and to subsequent volumes he contributed ‘Plante Fendleriane Novi-Mexicans,” presented in November, 1848; ‘Plante Nove Thurberiane,” and *‘ Note on the Affinities of the Genus Vavea, Benth., also of Rhytidandra, Gray,” August and October, 1854; and a group of four papers, entitled “‘ Botanical Memoirs,” in 1859, in- cluding one “On the Botany of Japan, and its Relations to that of North America ”—a remarkable essay on the geographical distribution of plants, which stamped the author as wortny to rank with the great botanists of the world. We need not enumerate his many papers which have appeared in the Proceedings of the Academy, for they alone would fill several volumes. It was his custom to embody the results of his preliminary studies on the North American flora in the form of notes on critical species, descriptions of novelties, and monographs of genera, and sometimes orders, of which by far the greater part first appeared in our Proceedings, usually under the heading of ‘ Botanical Contributions,” a long and very valuable series, dating from the paper “On some New Composite from Texas,” presented December 1, 1846, and ending with the posthumous ‘Notes upon some Polypetalous Genera and Orders,” presented April 19, 1888. Nor should we forget the many biographical notices in which he commemorated the lives and works of others with an appreciating discrimination, written in a man- ner peculiarly his own. The botanical department of Harvard University was practically created by Asa Gray. In 1805 a small botanic garden was established at Cambridge, under the auspices and by the aid of the Massachusetts Society for Promoting Agriculture, and William Dandridge Peck was appointed director and professor of botany. In 1818 he printed a “Cat alogue of American and Foreign Plants cultivated in the Botanic Gar- den, Cambridge,” in which one thousand three hundred and nine species were enumerated; but the list included some common cryptogams found everywhere, and a large number of phwenogamic shrubs and weeds, common natives of the region, hardly to be counted as legitimate mem- bers of a botanic garden. Professor Peck died in 1822, when, owing to the low state of the funds, a professor was not appointed, but Thomas Nuttall, the well-known botanist and ornithologist, was appointed curator of the garden, and later, lecturer on botany. This amiable, but very reticent naturalist—who apparently did not find his residence in Cambridge very congenial (for he describes himself as vegetating like his plants),—resigned his position in 1833, and returned to Phila- ASA GRAY. 769 delphia. The garden, such as it was, was then put under the charge of William Carter, a gardener, and the lectures oa botany were given by T. W. Harris, the well-known entomologist and librarian of the college, and Dr. A. A. Gould, of Boston. Not long before 1842, the directorship of the garden was offered to Mr. George B. Emerson, of Boston, who declined the position soon afterwards accepted by Dr. Gray in connection with the Fisher professorship. On Dr. Gray’s accession there was no herbarium, no library, only one insignificant greenhouse, and a garden all in confusion, with few plants of value. In 1844 he moved into the house which had been built for Professor Peck in the Garden, and with his characteristic energy he soon brought together an herbarium and library, and ar- ranged the Garden systematically. At the time of his marriage a small wing was added to the house, of which the lower story served asa study and herbarium until 1864. But the plants soon overran the limits of the herbarium, and finally the whole house was crammed with plants—plants in the dining-room, in the attic, in the closets, and in the bedrooms; for whatever he could spare from a salary of $1,000 at first, and $1,600 afterwards, was spent on his herbarium and library. In 1864, dreading the danger from fire to a collection kept in a wooden house, he offered to present his collections to the college, on condition that a suitable building should be erected for their reception. Through the liberality of Mr. Nathaniel Thayer of Boston, a brick building to be used as an herbarium and library was erected in 1864, at a cost of $12,000; and mainly through the agency of Mr. G. B. Emerson, a further sum of $10,000 was raised, the income of which was to be used in defraying the current expenses of the her- barium. From a letter by Dr. Gray to the president of the university, dated November 20, 1864, and a notice in the American Journal of Science, of March, 1865, we learn that the herbarium then contained at least 200,000 specimens, and the library about 2,200 botanical works, not including a good many pamphlets. There was also a set of 335 very costly illustrated works, contributed by Mr. John A. Lowell. Since 1864 the herbarium has been constantly enlarged, principally by exchanges, of which those from the Kew Herbarium especially were of very great value; so that itis now probably twice as large as in 184, and forms practically a National Herbarium, for it is by far the largest and most valuable herbarium in America, and is excelled in size by but few of the older and richer herbaria of Europe, as those at Kew, Paris, Berlin, the De Candolle Herbarium at Geneva, and possibly that at St. Petersburg. In the representation of the phenogams of North America outside the tropics, it is probably unequalled by any herbarium except that at Kew. The library at the time of Professor’s Gray’s death was roughly estimated to contain something over 5,000 volumes and 3,000 pamphlets, but these figures are probably too low. Many of the addi- tious since 1564 are the gift of Dr. Gray. In building up this vast H. Mis. 142 49 T70 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. collection, he gave not ouly much of his time and thought, but also an actual sum of money, which comes well up in the thousands, and, to crown all, manifested his devotion to the welfare and perpetuation of the collection by bequeathing to the university for its support the royalties on his publications. The Garden during his administration was improved by the addition of several greenhouses, in which were cultivated a choice selection of exotics, and the rather limited space of the Garden itself was filled with good representatives of the flora of the temperate regions, the collec- tion of composite being especially important. In the absence of a suf- ficient endowment, activity on the part of the director had to replace the want of money, and he, utilizing the means at hand, succeeded in mak- ing the Garden an exceedingly important means of exchange between foreigu establishments and our own botanists and collectors. European botanists who visited the Garden wondered how, from such a small and ill-endowed establishment, so much had been done in aid of other insti- tutions. The explanation lay in the skill and energy of Dr. Gray himself. : Gray’s work as a teacher extended over a period of more than fifty years, dating from the first lectures on botany at the Fairfield Medical School, in 1831 and 1832, and the publication of his “ Elements of Botany,” in 1836. During that period he trained up a whole race of botanists, now scattered through all parts of the United States, so that wherever he went he was greeted by those who rembered his instrue- tion with pleasure. When at Santa Barbara in 1885, an elderly man, who seemed to be about his own age, introduced himself as a former pupil in his first class at Harvard. As a college lecturer he was not seen at his best, for his somewhat hesitating manner when he spoke extempora- neously was unfavorably contrasted with the fervid, almost impetuous utterance of Agassiz, and the clear exposition and dignified address of Jeffries Wyman, his two great contemporaries at Harvard. In his public addresses he always spoke from notes, and, especially in his later years, his strikingly expressive face commanded the attention of his hearers from the start. In the class-room he was personally much liked, and he made a strong impression on the majority of students, although, in the days when every student was forced to study botany, there were of course some who would not have cared for the subject under any cir- cumstances. The instruction, as was natural, bearing in mind his own early training and the state of botany in this country at the time when he became professor at Harvard, was confined mainly to the morpho- logical study of flowering plants; for he recognized that, until some ad- vance had been made in that direction, it was out of the question deal- ing adequately with the more technically complicated subjects of his- tology, embryology, and physiology. or the instruction which he was obliged to give, the resources of the garden and the herbarium and the ordinary college lecture-rooms ; fh: ASA GRAY. ora at first sufficed, but at last it became necessary to provide a special laboratory and lecture-room at the garden. A liberal friend of Dr. Gray and the college presented a sum of money for this purpose, and in 1872 a wing was added to theherbarium. About this time the de- mand for laboratory instruction and equipment increased rapidly, and the new lecture-room and laboratory were soon found to be inadequate to meet the needs of the increasing calls for microscopic and physio- logical work, and they were at length abandoned. Itis not surprising that Dr. Gray could not foresee how great the growth in this direction was to be even in his own life. Probably no person of his age could have foreseen it. His herbarium was, at one period or another, the resort of nearly all the active working botanists of the country, and thither came many young men who were afterwards to aid in the development of botanical studies in the United States. His intercourse with them was always free and unrestrained by formalities of any kind, and he seemed more like a learned friend than a teacher. Passing to and fro from his own study to the herbarium he greeted all cordially, watching and criticising sharply but good-naturedly the work that was going on. No one en- enjoyed a hearty laugh more than he, and every now and then he would brighten the work by some anecdote from the large stock which his re~ tentive memory ever had at hand; always however for the purpose of emphasizing some point or illustrating some fact which he wished to bring out more clearly, but never allowing the attention of those about him to be distracted from their work. Life at the herbarium was in- deed a pleasure, and the more serious work was well seasoned and spiced in the days when the agile assistant, Charles Wright, skipped about like a squirrel, his diminutive body in Cambridge, his larger mind wandering away in his beloved Cuba and the Pacific islands,—when Brewer, less continent than his teacher in the matter of anecdote, saw in every plant before him some episode of his own life in camp. The ap- proach of Dr. Gray, heralded by his cheery laugh, or perhaps by a mild anathema against the gardener, who every morning, regardless of the intentions of nature, deluged the cacti placed in the corridor, we all understood to mean business, for, ifjoking was allowed, trifling was not. We learned something about botanists as well as about botany, and often wondered whether Robert Brown were really as great as he was represented ; aud, on the rare occasions of a visit from a man like Dr. Torrey or Dr. Engelmann, we asked ourselves whether there was any chance that the younger generation of botanists would bear any com- parison with the older. None who have worked under Dr. Gray at the herbarium will forget the deep personal interest he always manifested in their work and future prospects. He always encouraged and stimu- lated without holding out false hopes. To those who wished to devote themselves to botany in the years still recent, when it was scarcely possible for a botanist to live by botany alone, he used to say: “ Study le BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. medicine, and if you then still want to be a botanist, go ahead. Your medicine will keep your botany from starving.” Great as was the direct influence of Dr. Gray upon the students with whom he came in contact, his influence on the development of botany in this country through the medium of his numerous text-books and manuals was even nore important. His first text-book, ‘‘ Elements of Botany,” written when he was only twenty-six years old, shows many of the best characteristics of his later works, being written in a smooth, graceful style, with the different topics clearly and methodically arranged. The vigorous defense of the natural system of classifica- tion, which now appears superfluous, indicates that the author of 1836 was a progressive young man, who had shaken off the conservatism which prevailed among American botanists of that period. That he was young and inexperienced is ovcasionally shown, as inthe amusing statement that “the herbarium of a diligent botanist will pass so fre- quently under his observation that any very extensiveravages [by insects] ean hardly take place without his being aware of it in time to check the progress of the destroyers.” He evidently had no conception of how large his own collection would become in a few years. The “ Elements” of 1836 developed into the “ Botanical Text-Book ” of 1842, in which the portion relating to systematic botany was much more fully treated than in the earlier volume. The latter editions, which appeared at intervals until 1879, are familiar to every one, for they have been the means of opening the world of botany to more than one generation of American botanists. In 1868 the “ Lehrbuch der Botanik,” by Sachs, appeared. That work was a genuine revelation, showing the advance which had been made by experts in the science of botany, and, although somewhat above the capacity of the common student, it was destined to produce in a few years a revolution in the method of botanical instruction. Recognizing the new era which had opened in botany, Dr. Gray re- vised the plan of the “ Text-Book,” with a view of bringing it into accord with the more widely developed science of the day, and in 1879 issued the first volume of the revised work, in which he included the Mor- phology of Phenogams, Taxonomy, and Phytography, thus covering the greater part of the ground of the original ‘‘ Text-Book,” intrusting to his colleague, Professor Goodale, the volume on Physiological Bot- any, (which appeared in 1885—a worthy companion of its predecessor, ) and to the writer the volume on Cryptogams. He hoped, but hardly could have expected, to write a fourth volume, on the Orders of Phe- nogamous Plants. It is deeply to be regretted that he was never able to write this volume, for it would have enabled him to present the gen- eral views on classification derived from a long and exceptionally rich experience. No better text-book on the subject had ever been written in the English language than Gray’s “'Text-Book” in the original form ; and, although botanical instruction is now very different from what it wie. ‘ai ASA GRAY. eles used to be, it is still true that, as an introduction to the study of Pha- nograms, the group to which beginners naturally turn their attention, the later “Structural Botany,” is likely to hold its own for some time to come. In 1887, just before he started on his last European journey, he finished @ small book giving in an abbreviated form the substance of the Structural Botany, as well as some chapters on Cryptogams; and for this, his latest text-book, he revived the title of his earliest work, ‘“‘Klements of Botany. ” The “Manual of the Botany of the Northern United States,” of which the first edition appeared in 1847, needs no words of praise here. There are probably few members of the Academy who do not own, or have not at some time owned, a copy of this model work. Occasionally some overwise person has discovered that certain plants grow a few inches taller or bloom a few days earlier than is stated in the ‘ Man- ual”; but the botanist is yet to be born who could write a more clear, accurate, and compact account of the flora of any country. The only regret is that he could not have written manuals for all parts of the country. Dr. Gray had the rare faculty of being able to adapt himself to all classes of readers. With the scientific he was learned, to the student he was instructive and suggestive, and he charmed the general reader by the graceful beauty of his style, while to children he was simplicity itself. The little books, ‘‘ How Plants Grow,” and ‘*‘ How Plants Be- have,” found their way where botany as botany could not have gained an entrance, and they set in motion a current which moved in the gen- eral direction of a higher science with a force which can hardly be esti- mated, His scientific friends, especially those abroad, sometimes blamed him for spending time in popular writing; but he may have understood himself and his surroundings better than they. With him botany was a pleasure as well as a business. Few wrote as easily as he, and, so long as he spent most of his time in higher work, he cer- tainly had aright te amuse himself with writings of a popular char- acter if he chose. As it was, he interested a multitude of readers in the subjects which he had at heart, and if he was not permitted to live to see the completion of his greatest work, ‘The Synoptical Flora,” he at least was able to leave the work at a point where it could be con- tinued by a trusted friend in sympathy with all his plans. As a reviewer he was certainly extraordinary. Someof his reviews were in reality elaborate essays, in which, taking the work of another as a text, he presented his own views on important topies in a masterly manner. Others were technically critical, while some were simply concise and very clear summaries of lengthy works. Taken collectively, they show better than any other of his writings the literary excellence of his style, as well as his great fertility and his fairness and acuteness as a critic. Never unfair, never ill-natured, his sharp criticism, like the rire! BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. surgeon’s knife, aimed not to wound, but to cure; and if he sometimes felt it his duty to be severe, he never failed to praise what was worthy. The number of his reviews and notices written during his connection with the American Journal of Science as editor and assistant editor for over thirty years, and for the North American Review, the Nation, the Atlantic Monthly, and numerous other journals, is enormous, and it almost seems as if he must have written notices of the greater part of all the botanical works he had ever read. Those intimately acquainted with him more than half believed that he was able to write good notices of books written in languages which he could not read. He was able, as if by instinct, to catch the spirit and essence of what he read, without any exertion on his part. One who wrote so much might have become monotonous. but he was never prosy, and his style was so easy and flowing, and so constantly enlivened by sprightly allusions and pleasing metaphors, that one could read what he wrote for the mere pleasure of the reading. His was one of the rare cases where Science had appro- priated to herself one who would have been an ornament to any purely literary profession. It would be presumption were we to express an opinion onthe posi- tion of Gray as a scientific botanist. Fortunately for us, it is unnec- essary. The greatest living systematic botanist, Sir J. D. Hooker, the one by his attainments and positicen fitted above all others to speak with authority on the subject, has already recorded his opinion in the following words: When the history of the progress of botany during the nineteenth century shall be written, two names will hold high positions: those of Prof. Augustin Pyrame De Candolle and of Prof. Asa Gray. - - - Hach devoted half a century of unremitting labor to the investigation and description of the plants of continental areas, and they founded herbaria and libraries, each in his own country, which have become per- manent and quasi-national institutions. - - - There is much in their lives and works that recails the career of Linnaeus, of whom they were worthy disciples, in the comprehensiveness of their labor, the ex- cellence of their methods, their judicious conception of the limits of genera and species, the terseness and accuracy of their descriptions, and the clearness of their scientific language. The accuracy of the resemblance of Gray and De Candolle, so admi- rabiy and justly expressed by Hooker, will be recognized by all botan- ists. Gray was the De Candolle of America, whose mission it was to bring together the scattered and crude works of the earlier explorers and botanists and the vast unwrought material of his own day, and to combine them with his surpassing skill into one grand comprehensive work which should fitly describe the flora of a continent. But while recognizing the resemblance between De Candolle and Gray in their mode of work and the purpose for which they strove, we can only mar- vel how it was possible for a poor farmer’s boy in America, without a university education, to become the peer of one of Europe’s best trained botanists. . A een ee ee ASA GRAY. CL From his training and early surroundings we might have expected him to be energetic and original, but we should not have expected to find him highly polished and cultured. His associates at Fairtield and Clinton were persons of scientific tastes, and, even if their attainments were not of the highest quality, they encouraged his fondness for nat- ural history. But it is not easy to see how he obtained the literary training which enabled him to write with the ease and elegance found even in his earlier works, for although aman may by nature be a good ob- server of natural objects, a finished stvle comes only with training and experience. From his teacher, Avery, he could not have received much in the way of training; for Dr. Gray himself says that he did not give him the sharp drilling and testing which was needed. His residence with the Torrey family in New York first placed him in a society where literary excellence as well as scientific knowledge was prized ; and while he profited by the accuracy and strict scientific methods of Dr. Torrey, then the foremost Aimerican botanist, the frequent conversations and kindly criticism of Mrs. Torrey made good many of the literary defi- ciencies of his early training. He was also aided while in New York by the criticisms and suggestions made on some of his earlier manuscripts by the cultured botanist, Mr. John Carey. But he must have been an apt pupil, for, while still with Dr. Torrey, he showed that in point of clearness and accuracy he was not much inferior to his highly respected teacher, and in the second volume of the ‘‘Flora” he proved himself to be quite his equal. The plan of the * Flora of North America” originated with Dr. Torrey; but when his pupil went to Cambridge to assume the duties of his new position, neither of them suspected the magnitude of the task which they had undertaken, nor the modifications which the plan must ulti- mately undergo. The pupil was now in a more fortunate position than his teacher, for Gray was henceforth able to devote himself to his fa- vorite science, while Dr. Torrey could only employ his leisure hours in botany. The two volumes of the original Torrey and Gray ‘“ Flora” will always remain a memorial of the unbroken friendship of America’s two greatest botanists, alike in the spirit which animated their work and in the reverent simplicity of their characters. The greater part of Gray’s scientific work during the thirty-five years following the completion of the second volume of Torrey and Gray’s * Vlora,” in 1543, had a more or less direct bearing on the contemplated revision and enlargement of that work. Besides the papers printed in the Academy’s publications, he wrote a very large number of mono- graphs and notes on points connected with the determination and de- scription of new and doubtful species. They are scattered through the proceedings of different learned societies, and the columns of the Amer- ican Journal of Science, the Torrey Bulletin, Botanical Gazette, the Naturalist, and other American as well as European journals. One of his most important works was ‘“ Genera Flore Americxe Boreali- 776 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Orientalis Iustrata” (1848-49), in which he intended to figure and describe all the genera of the Eastern States, with the aid of the artist, Mr. Isaac Sprague. Of this work only two of the proposed volumes were ever published, owing to the expense entailed. Other important papers were “ Plante Wrightianz Texano-Neo-Mexicane,” in the Smith- sonian contributions of 1852 and 1853; ‘‘ Plante Lindheimeriane,” written in connection with Dr. Engelmann; ‘‘ Reports on the Botany of the 32d, 38th, 39th, and 41st Parallel Expeditions,” in connection with Dr. Torrey ; Gamopetale in Watson’s Flora of California, ete. An ex- amination of the complete list of his works, which will soon be printed in the American Journal of Science, would alone convey an adequate idea of his extraordinary fertility as a writer and the wide range of his investigations. After this long preparation of thirty-five years, the first part of the ‘ Synoptical Flora,” including the Gamopetale after Composite, ap- peared, in 1878. It formed the first part of the second volume ; for, on ‘the revised plan, the first volume was to include the Polypetale and Gamopetale through Composite, and the second volume the remaining Exogens and the Endogens. ~~ ee ew ASAD GRAY<—- 787 A Manual of the Botany of the Northern United States, from New England to Wisconsin and south to Ohio and Pennsylvania, inclusive (the Mosses and Liver- worts by Wm. 8. Sullivant), arranged according to the Natural System. Boston and Cambridge, 1848, Svo, pp. Ixxii, 710. [Later editions are given under dates of pub- lication. } 18-49. Plante Fendlerianwe Novi-Mexicanz: An account of a Collection of Plants made chiefly in the Vicinity of Santa Fé, New Mexico, by Augustus Fendler. Proc, Am. Aead., 11, 5-9 [abstract]; Mem. Am. Acad., Iv, 1-116. On some plants of the order Compositw# from the Sandwich Islands. Proc. Am. Assoc., 11, 397, 398. On the composition of the plant by phytons, and some applications of phyllo- taxis. Proc. Am. Assoc., U1, 438-444. Note on the genus Thelesperma, Lessing. Hook. Jour. Bot., 1, 252. 1850. Plante Lindheimerianz, Part II. Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., v1, 141-233. 1851. Characters of some Gnaphalioid Composite of the division Angianthew. Hook. Jour. Bot., m1, 97-102, 147-153, 172-178. Characters of a new genius (Dissothrix) of Composite-Eupatoriacex, with re- marks on some other genera of the same tribe. Hook. Jour. Bot., 111, 223-225. 1852. Account of Argyroxiphium, a remarkable genus of Composite, belonging to the mountains of the Sandwich Islands. Proc. Am. Acad., 1, 159, 160. Characters of three new genera of plants of the orders Violacew and Anonacexe discovered by the naturalists of tbe United States Exploring Expedition [Agatea, Isodendrion, Richella]. Proc. Am. Acad., 11, 323-325. Plante Wrightianw Texano-Neo Mexicane: An account of a Collection of Plants made by Charles Wright, A. M., in an expedition from Texas to El Paso, New Mexico, in the summer and autumn of 1849. Part L. Smithsonian Contributions, 111, 1-146, tt. 10. Remarks on Menodora, Humb. and Bonpl., and Bolivaria, Cham. and Schlecht., Am. J. Sci., Il, x1v, 41-45. Note on Tetratheca. Hook. Jour. Bot., rv, 199-200. Characters of some Southwest Australian Composite, principally of the subtribe Gnaphaliex. Hook. Jour. Bot., 1v, 225-232, 266-276. Plantie Wrightianzee Texano-Neo Mexican. Part II. An account of a collec- tion of plants made by Charles Wright, A. M., in western Texas, New Mexico, and Sonora, in the years 1851 and 1852. Smithsonian Contributions, v, 1-119, tt. 4. Brief characters of some new genera and species of Nyctaginacee, principally collected in Texas and New Mexico. Am. J. Sci., II, xv, 259-263, 319-324. On the discovery of two species of Trichomanes in the State of Alabama, one of which is new. Am. J. Sei., II, xv, 324-326. Characters of Tetraclea, 1 new genus of Verbenacewe. Am. J. Sci., II, Xv1, 97-98. Note on the parasitism of Comandra umbellata, Nutt. Am. J. Sei., I], xvi, 250- 251. [Ann. Nat. Hist., x11, 365-366. ] G@haracters of some new genera of Plants, mostly from Polynesia, in the collection of the United States Exploring Expedition under Captain Wilkes, Proc. Am. Acad., 111, 48-54, 127-129. 188 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. On the age of the large tree recently felled in California. Am. J. Sci., II, xvu, 440-443. Note on the genus Buckleya. Am. J. Sci., I, xvi, 98-100. Plante Nove Thurberianwe, The characters of some New Genera and Species of Plants in a Collection made by George Thurber, Esq., of the late Mexican Boundary Commission, chiefly in New Mexico and Sonora. Mem. Am. Acad., n. s., Vv, 297-328. On the Affinities of the Genus Vaviea, Benth.; also of Rhytidandra, Gray. Mem. Am. Acad., n. s., V, 329-336. [Hook. Jour. Bot., v1, 189-190. ] United States Exploring Expedition, during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U. 8. N. Vol. xv. Botany. Phanerogamia. With a folio Atlas of one hundred plates. Part I. Philadelphia, 1854. 4to, pp. 775. Mammoth Trees of California. Am. J. Sci., IJ, xv, 286-287. 1855. The Smithsonian Institution. Am. J. Sci., II, xx, 1-21. Botanical Report, by John Torrey and Asa Gray, upon the Collections made by Captain Gunnison, Topographical Engineers, in 1853, and by Lieutenant E. G. Beckwith, Third Artillery, in 1854. Pacific R. R. Surveys, u, 115-132, with ten plates, Report on the Botany of the Expedition [under Captain John Pope], by John Torrey and Asa Gray. Pacific R. R. Surveys, 1, 157-178, with ten plates. Note on the Development and Structure of the Integuments of the Seed of Mag- nolia. Hook. Jour. Bot., vu, 243-245; viii, 26. 1856. A Manual of the Botany of the Northern United St:‘os: Second edition; includ- ing Virginia, Kentucky, and all east of the Mississippi; arranged according to the Natural System. (The Mosses and Liverworts by Wm. 8. Sullivant.) With fourteen plates, illustrating the genera of the Cryptogamia. New York, 1856. 8vo, pp. xxiii, 739. Note on Obolaria virginica Z., Jour. Linn. Soe., 1, 129-130. For what purpose were plants created? (Addressed to Prof. Dana). Am. J. Sci., II, xx1r, 428, 429. Statistics of the Flora of the Northern United States. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxi, 204- 232; xxi, 62-84, 369-403. Wild Potatoes in New Mexico and Western Texas. Am. J. Sci., IJ, x x11, 284, 285. 1857. Centrostegia, Pacific R. R. Surveys, vit (Botany), 19. List of Dried Plants collected in Japan, by 8. Wells Williams, esq., and Dr. James Morrow. Narrative of the Expedition of an American Squadron te the China Seas and Japan, performed in the years 1852, 1853, and 1854, under the com- mand of Commodore M. C. Perry, 11, 303-329. Report of the Botany of the Expedition [under Lientenant A. W. Whipple]. (By John Torrey. The Composite, Plantaginacee, Orobanchacee, Scrophulariacee, and Bignoniacee, by Asa Gray). Pacific R. R. Surveys, Iv, 95-115, 117-122, with eight plates. General Catalogue of the Plants collected on the expedition [under Lieut. R. 8. Williamson and Lieut. H. L. Abbot]. (By J. S. Newberry. Ivesia, Composite, Hemitomes (and Monotropex), Scrophulariacee, Hydrophyllacew, and Gentianacez, by Asa Gray). Pacific R. R. Surveys, V1, 72,73, 76-87, with six plates. ———— ASA GRAY. T89 First Lessons in Botany and Vegetable Physiology. New York, 1857. 8vo, pp. 236. [There are later issues.] Revised Aug., 1868. On the age of a large Californian coniferous tree. Proc. Am. Acad., 111, 94-97. 185s. A short exposition of the structure of the ovule and seed-coats of Magnolia. Jour. Linn. Soe., 1, 106-110. How Plants Grow: a simple introduction to Structural Botany. With a popular Flora. New York, 1858. 8vo, 233. Note on the coiling of tendrils of plants. Proc. Am. Acad., tv, 98,99. [Ann. Nat. isha rir olS OU4 AIM en SCley Ll, KVL 2772705] Notes upon some Rubiacew, collected in the South Sea Exploring Expedition under Captain Wilkes. Proc. Am. Acad., IV, 33-50, 306-318. Action of foreign Pollen upon the Fruit. Am. J. Sci., II, xxv, 122, 123. 1859. Neviusia,, a new genus of Rosacex. Mem. Am. Acad., vi, 373-376, with plate. Diagnostic characters of new species of phixnogamous plants, collected in Japan by Charles Wright, botanist of the United States North Pacific Exploring Expedition. With observations upon the relations of the Japanese Flora to that of North America, and of other parts of the Northern Temperate Zone. Mem. Am. Acad., V1, 377-452. [ Bibl. Univ. Archives, 1x, 32-43; Canadian Naturalist, rv, 296, 207) VAM. SCle Lie XXVIII, 187-200. ] On the genus Croomia, and its place in the Natural System. Mem. Am. Acad., V1, 453-457, with plate. Characters of Ancistrophora, a new genusgof the order Composite, recently de- tected by Charles Wright. Mem. Am. Acad., vi, 457, 458. Notes upon some Polynesian plants of the order Loganiacew. Proc. Am. Acad., Iv, 319-324. Diagnoses of the species of Sandal-wood (Santalum) of the Sandwich Islands. Proc. Am. Acad., Iv, 326, 327. A revision of the genus Forestiera. Proc. Am. Acad., Iv, 363-366. Report of the United States and Mexican Boundary Survey made under the direc- tion of the Secretary of the Interior, by William H. Emory. Vol. 11, Part I. Botany of the Boundary. (Note on Synthlipsis, Composite, Scrophulariacex, note on Datura, conspectus of the genera of Nyctaginacee and the species of Mirabilis and Oxyba- phus, by Dr. Gray), pp. 34, 73-107, 110-121, 154, 172-175, with five plates. Lists of Plants collected by Emanuel Samuels, in Sonoma County, Cal., in 1856. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., vir, 142-145. List of a collection of dried plants made by L. J. Xantus, at Fort Tejon and vicinity, California, near lat. 35° and long. 119°, 1857-58. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., vu, 145-149. Manuel of the Botany of the Northern United States. Revised [Third] Edition; including Virginia, Kentucky, and all east of the Mississippi; arranged according to the Natural System. With six plates, illustrating the Genera of Ferns, etc. 1859, pp. XXIV, 635. British National Museums of Natural History. Am. J. Sci., II, xxv, 277. Trichomanes radicans, Swartz. Am. J. Sei., xxvii, 410, 441. 18G0. Catalogue of Plants collected East of the Rocky Mountains. Pacific R. R. Sur- veys, XII, part 2, 40-49, with three plates. * Report upon the Colorado River of the West, explored in 1857 and 1858 by Lieut. Joseph C. Ives. Part IV. Botany (the orders preceding Verbenacew, excepting the Cactacew, by Professor Gray), pp. 1-20. 790 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Potamogeton crispus, L.; Marsilea quadrifolia, L. Am. J. Sei., II, xxx, 139, 140. Discnssion between two readers of Darwin’s Treatise on the Origin of Species. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx, 226-239. [Design versus Necessity. Discussion between two readers of Darwin’s Treatise on the Origin of Species, upon its natural theology. Darwiniana, pp. 62-86. ] 1861. Note on the species of Nissolia. Jour. Linn. Soc., v, 25, 26. Characters of some Composit in the collection of the United States Sonth Pacific Exploring Expedition under Captain Wilkes; with observations, ete. Proc. Am.Acad., v, 114-146. Notes on Lobeliacez, Goodeniacee, etc., in the collection made by the South Pa- cific Exploring Expedition. Proc. Am. Acad., v, 146-152. Enumeration of a collection of dried plants made by L. J. Xantus, at Cape San Lucas, etc., in Lower California, between August, 1859, and February, 1860. Proc. Am. Acad. v, 153-173. A cursory examination of a collection of dried plants made by L. C. Ervendberg around Wartenberg, near Tantoyuca, in the ancient province of Huasteca, Mexico, in 1858 and 1859. Proce. Am. Acad., v, 174-190. Note on the genus Graphephorum Desv., and its synonymy. Proc. Am. Acad., v, 190,191; Ann. Bot. Soc. Canada, 1, 55-57. Notes upon a portion of Dr. Seemann’s recent collection of dried plants gathered in the Feejee Islands. Proc. Am. Acad., v, 314-321. Characters of new or obscure species of plants of Monopetalous orders in the col- lection of the United States Pacific Exploring Expedition; with occasional remarks, ete. Proc. Am. Acad., v, 321-352; vi, 37-55. Heath (Calluna vulgaris) in North®America. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx, 290, 291; XXXVIII, 122-124; 428, 429; xxxrx, 228; xn, 128, 129. [Calluna atlantica Seem.; also Seemann’s Jour. Bot., v, 84, 85.] Aira caryophyllea in the United States. Am. J. Sci., I], xxxu, 291. 1862. Plantsz Vitienses Seemanniane, Remarks on the Plants collected in the Vitian or Fijian Islands by Dr. Berthold Seemann. Bonplandia, x, 34-37. Enumeration of the Plants of Dr. Parry’s collection in the .Rocky Mountains in 1861. Am. J. Sei., Il, Xxx, 2387-243, 404-411; xxxiv, 249-261, 330-341. Notes upon the ‘Description of New Plants from Texas by S. B. Buckley.” Proc. Phila. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1862, 161-168. A Report upon Mr. S. B. Buckley’s “Description of Plants, No. 3, Graminex.” Proc. Phila. Acad., 1862, 332-337. Additional note on the genus Rhytidandra. Proce. Am, Acad., VI, 55,56. Synopsis of the genus Pentstemon. Proc. Am. Acad., v1, 56-76. Revision of the North American species of the genus Calamagrostis, sect. Deyeuxia. Proc. Am. Acad. v1, 77-80. Fertilization of Orchids through the Agency of Insects. Am. J. Sci., I], xxxIv, 420-429, 18638. Darlingtonia Californica, Torr. Am. J. Sei., II, xxxv, 136, 137. Botanical Collections in the Rocky Mountains. Am. J. Sei. II, xxxv, 137. Species considered as to Variation, Geographical Distribution and Succession. Ann. Nat. Hist., x1, 81-97. [Darwiniana, pp. 178-204. ] Enumeration of the species of plants collected by Dr. C. C. Parry and Messrs. Elihu Hall and J. P. Harbour, during the summer and autumn of 1862, on and near the Rocky Mountains, in Colorado Territory, lat. 369-419. Proc. Phila. Acad. Nat. Sei., 1863, 55-80. ” ASA GRAY. 791 Structure and fertilization of certain Orchids. Am. J. Sei., IL, xxxv1, 292-294. Manuel of the Botany, ete. Fourth revised Edition. To which is added Garden Botany, an Introduction to a knowledge of the common cultivated Plants. With twenty-two plates, illustrating the Grasses, Ferns. Mosses, etc. New York, 1863, pp. ci, 743. Synopsis of the species of Hosackia. Proc. Acad. Phila., 1863, 346-352. 1864. On Streptanthus Nutt., and the plants which have been referred to that genus. Proc. Am. Acad., vi, 182-188. A revision and arrangement (mainly by the fruit) of the North American species of Astragalus and Oxytropis. Proc. Am. Aead., v1, 188-236. On scientific nomenclature. Am. J. Sci., I], xxxvur, 278-281. [Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., x11, 517-520; Seemann’s Jour. Bot., 11, 188-190. ] Radicle-ism. Am. J. Sci., XxxXvitl, 125-126. New Scirpi of the Northern United States: S. Canbyi, S. Clintonii. Am. J. Sci., II, XXXVIII, 289-290. 1865. Najas major, Ruppia maritima, etc., discovered at Salina, N. Y. Am. J. Sci., II, XXxIx, 106-107. Harvard University Herbarium. Am. J. Sci. II, xxx1rx, 224-226. Story about a Cedar of Lebanon. Am. J. Sci., II], xxx1x, 226-228. New or little known Polynesian Thymeleze. Seemann’s Jour. Bot., m1, 302-306. The Tennessee Yellow-Wood (Cladrastis lutea). Am. J. Sci., II, xn, 273. Characters of some new plants of California and Nevada, chiefly from the collee- tions of Prof. William H.- Brewer and of Dr. Charles L. Anderson, with revisions of certain genera or groups. Proc. Am. Acad., v1, 519-556. 1866. Professor Tredwell’s Improvements in constructing Cannon: Address of tfie presi- dent of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences (Prof. Asa Gray) upon the presentation cf the Rumford Medal to Professor Tredwell, November 15, 1865. Proe. Am. Acad., vil, 44-51; Am. J. Sei., I, x11, 97-103. Scolopendrium officinarum in western New York. Am. J. Sci., I], xt, 417. A new Fijian Hedyecaria: H. dorstenioides. Seemann’s Jour. Bot., Iv, 83-34. Note on a regular dimerous flower of Cypripedium candidum. Am. J. Sci., UJ, Xiu, 195. [Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xvi, 341-342; Seemann’s Jour. Bot., 1v, 378-379. ] 1867. An innovation in nomenclature in the recently issued volume of the Prodromus. Am. J. Scei., I, xii, 126-128. [Seemann’s Jour. Bot., v, 81-84. ] Manual of the Botany of the Northern United States, including the district east of the Mississippi and north of North Carolina and Tennessee, arranged according to the Natural System. Fifth edition, with twenty plates, illustrating the Sedges, Grasses, Ferns, ete. New York, 1867. 8vo, pp..701. A second issue in 1868 has four pages of addenda. Morphology ofstamens and use of abortive organs. Am. J. Sci., I], XXL1,275-274. Botanical Notes and Queries. On Sambucus Canadensis, Robinia hispida, and Clerodendron Thompson. Am. Nat., 1, 493-494. May apples in Clusters; Invasions of Foreign plants. Am. Nat., 1, 494-495. 1868. Botanical Notes and Queries. On Tillandsia usneoides; Robinia bispida. Am. Nat., I, 673-674. - Monstrous Flowers of Habenaria fimbriata; The Elder (Sambucus Canadensis) as (92 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. a native plant; German Ivy, so-called, flowering under peculiar circumstances. Am. Nat., U1, 38-39. Descriptions of eleven new Californian plants. Proc. Calif. Acad., 111, 101-103. Characters of new plants of California and elsewhere, principally of those collected by W. H. Brewer and H. N. Bolander. Proc. Am. Acad., vil, 327-401. q Shortia Torr. § Gray and Schizocodon Sieb. § Zuce., identical. Am. J. Sci., Il, XLV, 402-403. Remarks on the laws of botanical nomenclature. Am. J. Sci., Il, xivi, 74-77. Planera aquatica, the Planer-tree. Am. Nat., 11, 441. Saxifraga Virginiensis. Am. Nat., 11, 448. Field, Forest, and Garden Botany. A simple introduction to the common plants of the United States east of the Mississippi, both wild and cultivated. New York, 1868, 8vo, pp. 386. A second revised issue, 1870. Bound with the ‘ Lessons,” this forms the “School and Field-book of Botany.” 1870. a revision of the Eriogoner. By Asa Gray and J. Torrey. Proc. Am. Acad., VIII, 145-200. ; Dialysis with Staminody in Kalmia latifolia. Am. Nat., Iv, 373, 374. Botanical Contributions. 1. Reconstruction of the Order Diapensiacee. 2. Revis- ion of the North American Polemoniacexe. 3. Miscellaneous Botanical Notes and Characters. Proc. Am. Acad., vill, 243-296. IUS743 be On hypocotyledonary gemmation. Am. J. Sci., III, 1, 63. [Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., VIII, 220. ] Arrangement for Cross-fertilization of the flowers of Scrophularia nodosa. Am. J. Sci., III, 1, 150, 151. Characters of a new genus (Eophyton) consisting of two species of parasitic Gen- tianes: E. tenellum, E. Lobbii. Jour. Linn. Soe., x1, 22-23. A new species of Erythronium: E. propullans. Am. Nat., v, 298-300. [Canadian Naturalist, Vv, 465, 466. ] Anthers of Parnassia. Am. J. Sci, III, 1,366. [Am. Nat., v, 649-650. ] Baptisia perfoliata: The arrangement of morphology of its leaves. Am. J. Sci., III, 11, 462-463. [Seemann’s Jour. Bot., x, 84-85. ] Drosera (Sundew) as a Fly-eatcher. Am. J. Scei., III, 11, 463-464. Siar Dismissal of the late Botanist of the Department of Agriculture. Am. Nat., VI, 39-45. [Am. J. Sci., II, v, 315-318.] Botany for Young People. Part 11.—How Plants Behave; how they move, climb, employ insects to work for them, ete. New York, 1872. Small 4to, pp. 46. Plant Dryers. Am. Nat., v1, 107-108. New parasitic plant of the Mistletoe family: Arceuthobinm minutum. Am. Nat., vi, 166-167. Botanical Contributions. 1. Notes on Labiate. 2. Determinations of a collection of Plants made in Oregon by Elihu Hall during the summer of 1871, with characters of some New Species and various Notes. Proc. Am. Acad., vil, 365-412. Rumex Britannica. L. Seemann’s Jour. Bot., x, 211-212 (from Proc. Am. Acad., vit, 399). Address before the American Association at Dubuque, Iowa, August, 1872. Am. J. Sci., III, rv, 282-298; Am. Nat., v1, 577-596 (‘‘ Sequoia and its history ”’) ; Trimen’s Jour. Bot., X (1872), 309-313 (extract, ‘Origin of the Flora of Atlantic North Amer- ica”); Proc. Am. Assoc., XX1, 1-31 (with corrections and appendix). [Sequoia and . ASA GRAY. 193 its history ; the relations of North American to Northeast Asian and to Tertiary Veg- etation. Darwiniana, pp. 205-235. ] Wild Double-flowered Epigiea repens. Am. Nat., VI, 429. Acer nigrum with Stipules. Am. Nat., v1, 767. The Horse Disease. Am. Nat., vil, 167. Gelsemium has dimorphous flowers. Am. J. Sci., ITT, v, 480. Noteon apples which are half like one and half like another species. Am. Nat., Vil, 236. Fly-catching in Sarracenia. Am. J. Sei., III, v1, 149, 150; 467, 463; vit, 440-442, Botanical Notelets. Equisetum arvense; Cypripedium acaule; Acer nigrum; Anemone nemorosa or trifolia; Dimorphism in Forsythia. Am. Nat., Vil, 422,425. Dionea. Am. J. Sci., III, vi, 150. Plante Texan: a list of the Plants collected in Eastern Texas in 1872, and distributed to subscribers by Elihu Hall. Salem, 1873. 4vo, pp. 29. Rubus deliciosus Zorr.; Spiranthes Romanzoviana. Am. J. Sci., II, vi, 389, 390. Characters of new genera and species of plants. Proc. Am. Acad,, vill, 620-631, Notes on Composite and characters of certain genera and species, etc. Proc. Am. Aead., vill, 631-661. Cleistogenous Flowers in Oxybaphus nyetagineus, Am, Nat., VI, 692. Note on movements of leaves of Drosera and Dionwa. Am. Nat., VIL, 738, 789. Yucea gloriosa; Arundo Donax in Virginia; Trichomanes radicans in Kentucky. AMM eI SCl.. LIL, VAT, 65: How Trees grow tall. New York Semi-weekly Tribune, Feb. 20, Mar. 6, Mar. 13. Insectivorous Plants. Nation, No. 457; pp. 216,217; No. 458, pp. 232-234. [Dar- winiana, pp. 289-307. ] Notes on Composit and characters of certain genera and species. Proc. Am. Acad., 1x, 187-218. Were the Fruits made for Man, or did Man make the Fruits? Am. Nat., vi, 116- 120. (Reprinted from the ‘ Horticulturist.” ) Spheralcea acerifolia in Illinois. Am. J. Sci., II, vit, 239. Pachystigma Canbyi. Gray; Woodsia Ilvensis, why so named? Villars and Villar- sia. Am. J. Sci., III, vu, 442, 443. Insectivorous Plants, additional investigations. New York Semi-weekly Tribune, June 5. Note on the origin of ‘May Apples.” New York Semi-weekly Tribune, June 12. A Vegetable Steel-trap. New York Semi-weekly Tribune, Nov. 6. The Office of Leaves. N. Y. Semi-weekly Tribune, Nov. 27. Do Varieties wear ont ur tend to wear out? New York Semi-weekly Tribune, Dec. 8. [Am. J. Sei., III, 1x, 109-114; Darwiniana, pp. 334-355. Noticed in Am, Nat. IX, 53.) Contributions to the Botany of North America.—l. A Synopsis of the North Amer- ican Thistles. 2. Notes on Borraginacew. 3. Synopsis of North American Species of Physalis. 4. Characters of various New Species. Proc. Am. Acad., X, 39-78. Johnson’s New Universal Cyclopedia. Botany, 1, 566-571. Leaf, 11, 1694. Morphol- ogy, UI, 627. 1875. Revision of the Genus Symphoricarpus. Jour. Linn. Soc., xtv, 9-12. » Note on Nemacladus Nutt. Jour. Linn. Soc., xiv, 28, 29. A conspectus of the North American Hydrophyllacew. Proc. Am. Acad., X, 312- 332. 7194 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Aistivation in Asimina. Am. J. Sei., III, x, 63. Note on peas from mummies and clover from greensand marl. Nation, No. 523, p. 27. The Potato Rot; Slitting down the Bark of Fruit Trees in Early Summer. Am. Agriculturist, July, pp. 262, 263. A Pilgrimage to Torreya. Am. Agriculturist, July, pp. 266, 267. The Box-Huckleberry (Gaylussacia brachycera Gray). Am. J. Sci., III, x, 155. Spontaneous Generation of Plants. Am. Agriculturist, Oct. 4Kstivation and its Terminology. Am. J. Sci., III, x, 339-344. [Trimen’s Jour. Bot., X1v, 53-58. } Menyanthes trifoliata; Botrychium simplex, with pinnated divisions to the sterile frond. Am. Nat., rx, 468. The Botanic Garden. The Harvard Book, 1, 313-315. 1876. Miscellaneous Botanical Contributions. Proc. Am. Acad., x1, 71-104. Burs in the Borage Family. , Am. Nat. x, i-4. Plantain. Am. Agriculturist, Jan., p. 19. How Flowers are Fertilized. American Agriculturist. Art. I. Campanulas or Bell Flowers, Jan., p. 22; Art. II. Compound Flowers, Feb., p. 62; Art. III. Clero- dendron and Fire-weed, Apr., pp. 142-143; Art. 1V. Houstonia and Partridge-berry, May, p. 182; Art. V. Dicentra or Bleeding-hearts, June, p. 222; Art. VI. Laurel, July, p. 262; Art. VII. False Indigo and Red Clover, Aug., p. 303; Art. VIII. Beans and other Flowers of the Pulse Family, Oct., pp. 382,383; Art. IX. Ground-nut or Apios, Jan. 1877, pp. 22,23; Art. X. The Busy Bee, Feb., pp. 62,63; Art. XI. The Good of Cross-fertilization, Mar. p. 102; Art. XII. How Cross-fertilization benefits, May, p. 182; Art. XIII. Lady-slippers, June, pp. 222, 323. Cheilanthes Alabamensis; Dichogamy in Epilobium angustifolium ; Dimorphism in Claytonia. Am. Nat., x, 43, 44. Comparative Zoology, Structural and Systematic. Nation, No. 578, p. 63, 64. Seeds that float in water; Use of the hydrometric twisting of the tail to the car- pels of Erodium. Am. J. Sci., II, x1, 157, 158. Our Wild Gooseberries. Am. Nat., x, 270-275. Tolmizea Menziesii. Am. Nat., x, 300. Botany of California. Saxifragacexe and Gamopetale by Asa Gray ].—Vol. 1, 192- 208, 277-622. Darwiniana: Essays and reviews pertaining to Darwinism. New York, 1876. 8vo, pp. 396. Schenolirion Torr. Am. Nat. x, 426, 427, 552, 55: Anthers in Trillium. Same, x, 427, 428. Notes on Acnida [Trimen’s Jour. Bot., xiv, 310-312]; Large Elm; Calluna vul- garis, the Ling or Heather, rediscovered in Massachusetts. Am. Nat., x, 487-490. Sedum reflexum, L. Am. Nat., x, 553. Nyimphea flava, Leitner. Am. J. Sci., III, x1, 416. Heteromorphism in Epigea. Am. J. Sci., III, x11, 74-76 [Am. Nat. x, 490-492}. Contributions to the Botany of North America.—l. Characters of Canbya (n. gen.) and Arctomecon. 2. Characters of New Species, etc. Proc. Am. Acad., x11, 51-84, with two plates. e Subradical solitary Flowers in Scirpus, Relation of Coloration to Environment. Am. J. Sci., II, xm, 467. (ay) DUS A Fic Date of Publication of Elliott’s Botany of South Carolina and Georgia. Am. J. Sci., ILI, x11, 81, 392. Homogone and Heterogone (or Homogonous and Heterogonous) Flowers. Am. J. Sci., IIT, x11, 82,83. [Am. Nat., x1, 42.] > es ASA GRAY. 795 Notice of Darwin on the Effects of Cross and Self Fertilization in the Vegetable Kingdom. Am. J. Sci., IL, x1it, 125-141. Dextrorse and Sinistrorse. Am. J. Sci., ILL, x11, 236, 237, 391. Fertilization of Gentiana Andrewsii. Am. Nat., x1, 113. On some remarkable specimens of Kalmia latifolia, L. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., XIx, 75,76 [Am. Nat., x1, 175]. Characters of some little-known or new genera of plants. Proc. Am. Acad., XI, 159-165. Notes on the History of Helianthus tuberosus, the so-called Jerusalem Artichoke. By J. H. Trumbull and Asa Gray. Am. J. Sci., II, xm, 347-352; x1v, 428, 429. The Jerusalem Artichoke once more. Am. Agriculturist, p. 142. [Gardeners’ Chronicle, n. ser., VII, 472. ] The Germination of the genus Megarrhiza Torr. Am.J. Sci., III, xry, 21-24 [Bot. Gazette, 11, 130-132]. Orchis rotundifolia Pursh. Am. J. Sei., III, x1v,72. | Am. Nat., x1, 431. ] Athamantha Chinensis, L. Am. J. Sci., If, x1v, 160. Saxiffaga Virginiensis. Am. Nat., XI, 366. Three-flowered Sanguinaria. Am. Nat., x1, 431. Fertilization of Browallia elata. Proc. Phil. Acad., xxrx, 11,12. 1878. Plants May Thrive on a Meat Diet. Am. Agriculturist, Apr., p. 131. ‘The two wayside Plantains. Bot. Gaz., 11, 41, 42. Contributions to the Botany of North America. 1. Elatines Americans. 2.Two New Genera of Acanthacee. 3. New Astragali. 4. Miscellanex. Proc. Am. Acad., XIII, 361-374. Synoptical Flora of North America. Vol. 1.—Part 1. Gamopetal# after Com- posits. New York, May, 1878. Roy. 8vo, pp. viii, 402.—Second Edition [with Sup- plement, etc., in connection with vol. 1, Part 2]. New York, January, 18¢6. Roy. 8vo, pp, viii, 494. Reissued, with corrections, April, 1888, as Smithsonian Miscella- neous Collections, vol. XXXI. Early Introduction and Spread of the Barberry in Eastern New England. Am. J. Scei., III, xv, 482, 483. Forest Geography and Archeology: a lecture delivered before the Harvard Uni- versity Natural History Society, April 18, 1878. Am. J. Sei., III, xvi, 85-94, 183-196. [Géographie et Archéologie forestiéres de l’Amerique du Nord (a French translation by Ch. Nandin). Ann. Sci. Nat., VI, vu, 126-163. ] Classification of the Botanical Collection made during the San Juan Reconnaissance of 1877, in Colorado and New Mexico. Annual Report of the Chief of Engineers for 1878. Appendix SS, pp. 1833-1840. Some Western Plants. Bot. Gaz., 11, 81. Dr. Newcomb and the Uniformity of Nature. By a Country Reader. Independent, No. 1558, p. 1. Letters on the same subject in No. 1555, p. 16, and No. 1564, p. 15. The Animal Poison of the Far West—‘‘ Loco” or ‘‘ Crazy-weed.” Am. Agricultur- ist, Oct., pp. 380, 381. Does Nature forbid Providence? By ‘‘ Country Reader.” Independent, xxx, No. 1562, pp. 1-3. What is a Sweet Potato? Am. Agriculturist, Nov., p. 423. On a form of Scirpus supinus, L. Trimen’s Jour. Bot., xvi, 346, Shortia galacifolia rediscovered. Am. J. Sci., III, xvi, 488-485. [Bot. Gaz., rv, 106-108. ] Note sur le Shortia galicifolia et Revision des Diapensiacées. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot., VI, vil, 173-179, with plate. Diclytra, Dielytra, Dicentra; Sporting Trillium grandiflorum. Bull. Torr. Bot, Club, vi, 277, 278. 796 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. L379. Gerardia tenuifolia, Vahl, var. asperula. Bot. Gaz., Iv, 153. Bentham on Nomenclature. Same, tv, 158-161. Notes upon ‘ Notes of a Botanical Excursion into North Carolina” (by J. H. Red- field). Bull. Torr. Bot Club, v1, 331-338. Kpipactis Helleborine, var. viridens (LZ. viridiflora, Reichenbach), a North Ameri- cap plant. Bot. Gaz., Iv, 206. Roots and ‘“ Yarbs.”—In the Mountains of North Carolina. Am. Agriculturist, Sept., p. 337, 338. Botanical Contributions.—1l. Characters of some new Species of Compositie in the Mexican Collection made by C. C. Parry and Edward Palmer, chiefly in the Province of San Lonis Potosi, in 1878. 2. Some New North American Genera, Species, etc. Proc. Am. Acad., Xv, 25-52. Pertinacity and predominance of Weeds. Am. Jour. Sci., III, xvi, 161-167. On the Self-fertilization of Plants. Bot. Gaz., rv, 182-187. Who finds White Partridge-berries? Bot. Gaz., rv, 190. Duplicate Corolla of Campanula. Bot. Gaz., tv, 207. Scutia ferrea and Reynosia latifolia. Bot. Gaz., rv, 208. Nomenclature in Atlantic U. S. Polypetale. Bot. Gaz., rv, 210. The beheading of flies by Mentzelia ornata; The Dichogamy of Spigelia Marilan- dica; The most Arctic timber; ‘“ Carniverous Plants.” Bot. Gaz., rv, 213-215. The Gymnospermy of Conifere. Bot. Gaz., rv, 222-224. Vaccinium macrocarpou, var. intermedium; Common and Troublesome Weeds near Santa Barbara, Cal. Bot. Gaz., 1v, 226. On the Genus Garberia. Proc. Acad. Phila., 1879, 379, 380. I SISKO) The Flora of Bostou and its vicinity, and the changes it has undergone. Winsor’s Memorial History of Bosten, I, 17-22 (with autograph). Tennessee Plants. Bot. Gaz., v, 3. Littorella and Schiziea in Nova Scotia. Bot. Gaz., v, 4. [Gard. Chron., x11, 4. ] Note on trapping of moths or butterflies by certain plants. Am. Nat., xtv, 50. Natural Science and Religion: Two lectures delivered to the Theological School of Yale College. New York, 1880. 12mo, pp. 111. The Genus Leavenworthia; Automatic Movement of the Frond of Asplenium Trichomanes. Bot. Gaz., v, 25-27. Flora of Kerguelen’s Land. Bot. Gaz., v, 39. Notule exigue. Bot. Gaz., v, 53, 63, 75, 87, 88. Ona point of botanical nomenclature. Trimen’s Jour. Bot., xvut, 186 (from Am. J. Sci., [1], xrx, 420). Meanwhile, what should be done and how? Independent, xxx11, No. 1652, p. 1. Action of Light on Vegetation. Am. J. Sci., II, xx, 74-76. Contributions to North American Botany.—1l. Noteson some Composite. 2. Some Species of Asclepias. 3. A New Genus of Gentianacew. 4. Miscellanee of the North American Flora. Proc. Am. Acad., xvi, 78-108. Mesembrianthemum, not Mesembryanthemum. Trimen’s Jour. Bot., Xvi, 243 (from Bot. Gaz., V, 89). Botany of the Black Hills of Dakota. Report on the Geology and Resources of the Black Hills of Dakota, by H: Newton, E. M., and W. P. Jenney, E. M. [U. 8. G. G. Survey R. M. R.], pp. 529-537. 18s. The Vegetation of the Rocky Mountain Region and a Comparison with that of other Parts of the World. By A. Gray and J. D. Hooker. Bull. U.S. Geol. and , Geogr. Survey of the Territories, v1, 1-77. — ASA GRAY. A9T A Chinese puzzle by Linneus. Trimen’s Jour. of Bot., xix, 325, 326. Review of the North American climbing species of Clematis, with compound leaves and thick or thickish erect sepals. Curtis’s Botanical Magazine, cvil, under plate 6594. 18Ss2. Chrysogonum Virginianum, var. dentatum. Bot. Gaz., vu, 31,32. Githopsis. Bot. Gaz., vil, 40. Plucbeas. Bot. Gaz., vil, 45. Ranunculus. Bot. Gaz., vil, 47. The Relation of Insects to Flowers. The Contemporary Review, xt, 598-609. [Eclectic Magazine, Xxxv, 732-739. ] The citation of botanical authorities. Trimen’s Jour. Bot., xx, 173, 174. Contributions to North American Botany.—l. Studies of Aster and Solidago in the Older Herbaria. 2. Novitiw Arizonice, etc.; Characters of the New Plants of cer- tain. Recent Collections, mainly in Arizona and adjacent Districts, ete. Proc. Am. Acad., XVII, 163-230. Parishella Californica. Bot. Gaz., vir, 94,95. Evolution versus Evangelical Religion. Boston Evening Transcript, Sept. 13, 1882. Note on the Musaratic Chapel of the Cathedral of Toledo. Nation, No. 884, p. 482 Mimulus dentatus, Nutt.; Linnea borealis. Bot. Gaz., v1, 112. Remarks concerning the ¥ lora of North America. Am. J. Sci., III, xx1v, 321-331. [Reprinted in part in Bot. Gaz., vil, 129-135, 139-143. ] Note on the Lignified Snake. Bull. Torr. Bot. Clu b, rx, 152. Synopsis of species of Nama. Godman & Salvin, Biologia Centrali-Americana; Botany, U1, 360-365. 1883. The Lignified Snake from Brazil. Am. J. Sci., III, xxv, 79-81. [Bot. Gaz. (in part), vill, 153, 154. ] Natural Selection and Natural Theology. Nature, xx vit, 291, 292, 527,528; xxvIII, 7) Reports as Director of the Herbarium of Harvard University. Annual Reports of the President and Treasurer, 1852-’83, p. 114, 116; 1883-84, p. 136; 1884~85, p. 142, 143; 1885-86, p. 118-119; 1886-87, p. 123. Gonolobus Shortii. Bot. Gaz., vir, 191. Hibiscus Moscheutos and H. roseus ; Stipules in Saxifragacee ; Vincetoxicum. Bot. Gaz , Vill, 244, 245. Condurango. Bot. Gaz., vir, 260. Lonicera grata. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, x, 94-95; x1, 76. Rhododendron (Azalea) Vaseyi. Bot. Gaz., viii, 282. Aquilegia longissima. Bot. Gaz., Vull, 295. Contributions to North American Botany. 1. Characters of New Composite, with Revisions of certain Genera, and Critical Notes. 2. Miscellaneous Genera and Species. Proc. Am. Acad., x1x, 1-96. Letter on publication of a letter by Dr. Torrey, etc. Bot. Gaz., vat, 317. 1884. Antirrhina prehensilia. Bot. Gaz., 1x, 53-54. Lonicera grata. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, x1, 76. A revision of the North American species of the Genus Oxytropis, DC. Proc. Am. Acad., xx, 1-7. Moner ou - Movements of the Andrescium in sunflowers. Proe. Acad. Philad., 1884, 287-28 798 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Synoptical Flora of North America. Vol. 1, Part 2. Caprifoliacew—Composite. New York, July, 1884. Roy. 8vo, pp. 474. Second edition [with supplement, ete., in connection with vol. 11, Part 1]. New York, January, 1886. Roy, 8vo, pp. 480. Re- issned, with corrections, April, 1888, as Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, vol. EXOXEXGT Notes on some North American Species of Saxifraga. Proc. Am. Acad., Xx, 8-12. Veatchia, noy. gen. Anacardiacearum. Bull. Calif. Acad., 1, 4-5. Gender of Names of Varieties. Am. J. Sei., II], xxvit, 396-398. Breweria minima. Bot. Gaz., 1x, 148. Hypopitys or Hypopithys? Am.¥J. Sci., III, xxvii, 238, 239. Characteristics of the North American Flora: An address to the botanists of the Brit. Assoc. for the Adv. Sc. at Montreal. Am. J. Scei., III, xxvii, 323-340; Rep. Brit. Assoc., 1885. The name Trilisa, Am. J. Sci., III, xxvii, 402. 1885. The Scientific Principles of Agriculture. Science, v, 76. Notes upon the Plants collected on the Commander Islands (Behring and Copper Islands) by Leonard Stejneger. Proc. U. S. Nat. Museum, vil, 527-529. Pine needles. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, x11, 102. Contributions to the Botany of North America, 1, A Revision of some Borragine- ous Genera. 2. Notes on some American Species of Utricularia. 3. New Genera of Arizona, California, and their Mexican Borders, and two additional species of Ascle- piadaceze. 4. Gamopétalie Miscellanew. Proc. Am. Acad., Xx, 257-310. The Monterey Pine and Cypress. Science, v, 433-434. How to reach the Grand Cafion. Science, v, 516-517. Circular Letter to American Botanists. Published separately, Nov. 19, 1885. Report of the International Polar Expedition to Point Barrow, Alaska. [By Lieut. P. H. Ray.] (Plants. By Asa Gray. pp. 191, 192.) 1886. Notes on Myosurus. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, x11, 1-4. Anemone nudicaulis. Bot. Gaz., x1, 17. Anemonella thalictroides, Spach. Bot. Gaz., x1, 39. Contributions to American Botany. 1. A Revision of the North American Ranun- culi. 2. Sertum Chihnahuense. 3. Miscellanea. Proc. Am. Acad., xxi, 363-413. The Genus Asimina. Bot. Gaz., x1, 161-164. Tiarella cordifolia. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, xr, 100, 101. Vancouveria. Bot. Gaz., x1, 182, 183. Corydalis aurea and its allies; The Arillusin Asimina. Bot. Gaz., x1, 188-190. Essay towards a revision of Dodecatheon. Bot. Gaz., x1, 231-234. Letter to the Botanical Club of the A. A. A. S. Bot. Gaz., x1, 245, 246. Memorando of a revision of the North American Violets. Bot. Gaz., X1, 253-256, 289- 293. Ambrosia bidentata x trifida. Bot. Gaz., x1, 338. Note on Shortia. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx, 473. [Note to Prof. Sargent’s article on Journey of André Michaux. ] 1887. The Genus Iris. Bot. Gaz., x11, 16,17. Delphinium, an attempt to distinguish the North American Species. Bot. Gaz., XI, 49-54. Contributions to American Botany. 1. Revision of some Polypetalous Genera and Orders precursory to the Flora of North America. 2. Sertum Chihuahuense ; appen- dix. 3. Miscellanea. Proc. Amer. Acad., x x11, 270-314. _ ASA GRAY. 799 Capitalization of Botanical Names. Amer. Florist, 11, 294. List of Plants collected by Dr. Edward Palmer in the State of Jalisco, Mexico, in 1886 [Gamopetale, by Dr. Asa Gray]. Proc. Am. Acad., xxi1, 416-446. The elements of Botany for Beginners and for Schools (based upon First Lessons in Botany). New York, 1887. 8vo., pp. 226. Coptis, section Chrysocoptis. Bot. Gaz., xii, 296, 297. Annotations. [Nelumbo lutea and Nemavaulis.] Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. xry, 228, 229. Botanical Nomenclature. Britten’s Journal of Botany, XXv, 353-355. isss. New or Rare Plants. Bot. Gaz., x1, 73. Contributions to American Botany. Notes upon some Polypetalous Genera and Or- ders. Proc. Amer. Acad., XXIII, 223-227. II.—BorTanicaL NOTICES AND Book REVIEWS. 184.1. Botanical Notices. W. Griffith, Report on Tea Plant of Upper Assam; M. Guille- min, Report on Expedition to Brazil to obtain information on culture of the Tea- plant; Meyen, report on Progress of Vegetable Philosophy for 1837; Hooker’s Journal of Botany; Hooker’s Flora Boreali-Americana; Endlicher’s Gencra Plantarum; Mo- quin-Tandon, Enumoratio Chenopodearum; Stendel’s Nomenciator Botanicus ; Kunze Caricography ; J. E. Bowman, Fossil Infusoriain England. Am. J.Sci., x, 165-176. Botanical Notices. Horsefield, Bennett and Brown, Plant# Javyanice Rariores; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, part 7; Linnea, vol. x1, nos. 4, 5, 6; Wikstrém, on the Progress of Botany. Ai. J. Sci., XL, 391-393. Botanical Notices. William Darlington, Discourse on Gramineze; ‘Teschemacher, Address to Boston Natural History Society, May, 1841; A. de St. Hilaire, Legons de Botanique; Endlicher, Genera Plantarum; E. T. Steudel, Nomenclator Botanicus; Kunze,Supplements der Riedgriiser (Carices) zu Schkuhr’s Monographie; Hooker and Arnott’s Botany of Capt. Beechey’s Voyage; A. Moquin-Tandom, Elémens de Téra- tologie Végélale; John Darby, Manual of Botany, adapted to the productions of the Southern States. Am. J. Sci., xii, 365-376. Botanical Notices. Endlicher, Enchiridion Botanicum exhibens Classes et Ordines Plantarum; Lindley, Flora Medica ana Elements of Botany; Laura Johnson and A. Eaton, Botanical Teacher for North America; Hooker’s Journal of Botany ; Schom- burgk, on the Urari or Arrow-poison of the Indians of Guiana; Archiv fiir Naturge- shichte; J. F. W. Johnston, Lectures on the Applications of Chemistry and Geology to Agriculture. Am. J. Sci., x“, 182-191. Botanical Notices. H. E. Richter, Caroli Linnwei Systema, Genera, Species Plan- tarum uno volumine; H. W. Buek, Genera, Species, et Synonyma Candolleana; Kunth, Enumeratio Plantarum, vol. 111; Loudon’s Arboretum et Fruticetum Britan- nicum abridged; Steudel’s Nomenclator Botanicus, 2d ed.; Torrey & Gray’s Flora of North America, vol. 11, part 2; Nuttall’s edition of Michaux’s Sylva Americana, Am. J. Sci., XLII, 375-377. 1842. Botanical Notices. New edition of Michaux’s North American Sylva; Loudon’s Encyclopedia of Trees and Shrubs; Ledeboar, Flora Rossica; London Journal of Botany; Kunze, Supplemente der Riedgriiser (Carices) zn Chr. Sehkuhr’s Mono- graphie, etc. Am. J. Sci., xii, 188-189. Botanical Notices. Ward, On the Growth of Plants in closely glazed cases; Hooker’s London Journal of Botany. Am. J. Sei., XLUI, 383-386. SOO BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Botanical Notices. Nuttall, The North American Sylva; Choisy, de Convolvu- laceis dissertatio tertia complectens Cusentarum, etc.; Spring, Monographie de la Famille des Lycopodiacées; Endlicher, Mantissa Botanica; Hooker’s British Flora. Am. J. Sei., xxiv, 194-199. 184.3. Botanical Notices. Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, vol. 1, new series; Tuckerman, Enumeratio methodica Caricum quarundam; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 1. Am. J. Sci., XLV, 214-218. Botanical Notices. Notice of Botanical Collections; Brand, Iodine in Phanero- gamic Plants and Mosses; Wiegmann and Polsdortf, Disengagement of Carbonic Acid by the Roots of Plants. Am. J. Sci., XLV, 225-227. Botanical Notices. Wm. Darlington, Reliquiw Baldwiniane; A. de Jussieu, Cours élémentaire de Botanique; F. Unger, Grundzuge der Botanik; G. W. Bischoff, Lehrbuch der Botanik ; G. Fresenius, Grundriss der Botanik; Buek’s Index generalis et specialis ad A. P. DeCandolle Prodromum Syst. Nat. Reg. Veg., ete. ; Ledebour’s Flora Rossica; C. C. Babington, Manual of British Botany; Kunze’s Supylemente der Reidgraser (Carices) zur Schkuhr’s Monographie; Botanische Zeitung. Am. J. Sci., XLVI, 192-208. 1844, Botznical Notices. DeCandolle, Prodromus, vol. vii; G. G. Walpers, Repertorium Botanices Systematice; C. 8. Kunth, Enumeratio Plantarum, ete.; Endlicher, Mantissa Botanica; R. B. Tiinds and G. Bentham, Botany of H. M. 8. Sulpbur in 183 -42; H. B. Fielding and G. Gardiner, Sertum Plantarum, ete.; A. de Jussieu, Cours Elémentaire de Botanique; H. F. Link, Jahresbericht fiir Physiologische Botanik, 1841, and Anatomia Plantarum Iconibus Illustrata. Am. J. Sci., xiv1, 198-205. Botanical Notices. J. D. Hooker, Botany of the Antarctic Voyage of H. M. Ships Erebus and Terror in 1839-43, and Species Filicum, parts 1 and 2; E. C. Macut, Legons Elémentaires de Botanique; Martius, Systema Materis Medicxw Veg. Brasil- iensis. Am. J. Sci., XLVI, 204-208. 184.5. Botanical Notices. A. Lasegue, Musée Botanique de M. B. Delessert ; DeCandolle’s Prodromus, vol. rx, and Théorie elementaire de la Botanique. Am. J. Sci., XLIX, 171-176. 1846, Review of ‘‘ Explanations; a sequel to the Vestiges of the Natural History of Creation.” N. A. Review, April, 1846, 465-506. Botanical Notices. Vegetable Physiology ; Unger, Distribution of the Vestiges of Palms in the Geological Formations: Analogy between the Flora of Japan and that of the United States; Unger, Conspectus of the Fossil Flora. Am. J. Sci., I, 0, 133-136. Botanical Notices. D. J. Browne, The Trees of America; A. Henfrey, Outlines of Structural and Physiological Botany; Delessert, Icones Selecta Plantarum, etc. Am. J. Sci., I, 1, 442-445. 184.7. Botanical Notices. F. E. L. Fischer et C. A. Meyer, Sertum Petropolitanum, ete. ; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 6; Trautvetter, Plantarum Imagines et Descriptiones Floram Russicam Ilustrantes; Hooker, Species Filicum; S. Moricand, Plantes Nouvelles ou Rares @’Amerique, fase. 1-8; Ledebour, Flora Rossica, fase. 7. Am. J. Sei, II, 11, 146-148. 3 ASA GRAY. sOl Botanical Notices. L. Agassiz, Nomenclator Zoologicus; Ruprecht, 3 papers in Beitrige zur Pflanzenkunde des Russischen Reiches; G. B. Emerson, Report on Trees and Schrubs of Massachusetts; Bot. Magazine for 1847. Am. J. Sci., II, 111, 302-310. 1848. Botanical Notices. DeCandolle’s Prodromus; Trans. Linn. Soc., xx, Botanical Papers by J. D. Hooker, Falconer, ete. ; HE. Tuckerman, Synopsis of Lichenes of New England; A. Young, A Fiora of Maine; Ledebour, Flora Rossica, fasc. 8; Hooker’s London Journal of Botany, No. 73. Am. J. Sci., Il, v, 449-459. 184.9. Botanical Notices. A. DeCandolle, Prodromus. Am. J. Sci., I, vir, 309-311. Botanical Notices. _ Feudler’s Botanical Collections in New Mexico; Hooker’s Journal of Botany, papers in Nos. 1, 2,3; W. Griffith, Posthumous Papers. Am. J. Sci., il, vir, 452-454. Notice of Dr. Hooker’s Flora Antarctica. Am. J. Sei., II, vir, 161-180. Botanical Notices. DeCandolle’s Prodromus Reg. Veg., vol. xiii; T. G. Lea, Cata- logue of Plants near Cincinnati collected in 1834-1844; A. de Jussieu, Elements of Botany, transl. by J. H. Wilson; J. H. Balfour, Manual of Botany. Am. J. Sci., IT, vill, 300-303. 1850. Memorials of John Bartram and Humphrey Marshall, with notes of their Botanical Contemporaries, by Wm. Darlington, LL.D. Am. J. Sci., I, rx, 85-105. Botanical Notices. Endlicher, Genera Plantarum, part 2, and Synopsis Conifera- rum. Am. J. Sci., I, rx, 148-149. 1S52, Botanical Notices. [In the form of a letter to one of the Editors.] De Candolle’s Prodromus; Kunth, Enumeratio Plantarum, Vol. v; Fenzl and Endlicher, Genera Plantarum; Unger, Die Urwelt in ihren Verschiedenen Bildungsperiod; Martius, on Palms; von Esenbeck and Spinner, Genera Flore Germanic Iconibus Illustrata; changes in Professorships in German Universities; Fries, Summa Vegetabil. Scandi- navi and Monograph of Hieracium; Ledebour, Flora Rossica; Webb, Phytographia Canariensis; Weddell, Monograph of Cinchona, and Balanophorew vs. Raftlesiace: ; M. Decaisne at Jardin des Plantes; Botany of the Voyage of the Bonité and the As- trolabe and Zelée; Botanists at the Jardin des Plantes; M. C. Gay, Historia Fisica et Politica de Chile; Richard, Botany in de la Sagra’s Histoire Physique, ete., of Cuba; Boissier, Diagnoses Plantarum Orientalium; work of Choisy, Duby, Godet, Shuttleworth, Lehmann, Blume, De Vriese, Dozy, Molkenbger, Hooker, Babington ; W. Hooker, Species Filicum, Icones Plantarum and Victoria Regia; J. D. Hooker, Rhododendrons of Sikkim Himalaya, Flora Indica, Novie-Zealandiw, Tasmanize; Ben- tham, Niger Flora; Webb, Spicilegia Gorgonica; Trans. Linn. Soc. of London, xx, part 3, Botanical papers; Cryptogamic Botany, works by Kunze, Gottsche, Linden- berg, and yon Esenbeck, Miiller, Giimbel, Schimper, Kiitzing, Agardh; Harvey, Phy- -cologia, Britannica, Manual of British Algze, ete.; Schierer’s work on Lichens. Am. J. Sci., TL, x11, 42-53. _ Botanical Notices. Kunze, Supplemente der Riedgriiser (Carices) zu Chr. Schkuhr’s Monographie, etc.; Pritzel, Thesanrus Literature Botanic:e; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 10. Am. J. Sci., II, xi, 421—425. Nereis Boreali-Americana; or Contributions to a History of the Marine Aleve of North America, by Wm. Henry Harvey, M.D. Am. J. Sci., II, x1v, 1-8. ' Botanical Notices. Junghuhn and De Vries, The Camphor-Tree of Sumatra; W. ‘Hooker, Chinese Rice-Paper Plant; H. W. Ravenel, Fungi Caroliniani Exsiceati; H. Mis. 142——51 802 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Antonio Bertoloni, Miscellanea Botanica, parts 1-10; A. Henfrey, Vegetation of Europe. Am. J. Sci., II, xtv, 113-116. Botanical Notices. De Candolle’s Prodromus, Vol. xu1. Am. J. Sci., II, x1v, 291. Botanical Notices. J. D. Hooker, Botany of the Antarctic Voyage, II, Flora of New Zealand; Seemann, Botany of the Voyage of the Herald. Am. J. Sci., II, xtrv. 427, 428. Botanical Notices. J. G. Agardh, Species, Genera et Ordines Algarum, Vol. 1; L R. Tulasne, Monographia Podostemacearum ; Seemann, Botany of the Voyage of the Herald, part 2; Walpers, Ann. Bot. Syst., Tom. 1. Am. J. Sei., Il, xv, 131-133. Botanical Notices. Mohl, Grundziige der Anatomie and Physiologie der Vegetabi- lischen Zelle; Schacht, Die Pflanzenzelle; Lindley, Folia Orchidacea. Am. J. Sci., II, xv, 279-280. Botanical Notices. Wm. Darlington, Flora Cestrica; H. W. Ravenel, Fungi Caro- liniani Exsiccati; Lindley’s Folia Orchidacea, parts 2-4; Mohl, Cellulose in Vege- table Membranes; Hoffmann, Circulation of Sap; Criiger, observations on certain Monocotyledone Epigyne; W. Hofmeister, on Development of Zostera; Wichura, Winding of Leaves; Horsfield, Plante Javanice Rariores; Hooker, Species Filicum, part6; N. B. Ward, Growth of Plants in tight cases. Am. J. Sei., II, xv1, 129-138. Botanical Notices. Harvey, Nereis Boreali-Americana; J. Torrey, Plante Fre- montiane, on Darlingtonia Californica, on Batis maritima of Linneus; A. Gray, Plante Wrightiane Texano-Neo-Mexicane, part 2; J. Leidy, Fauna and Flora within living animals; M. J. Berkeley and M. A. Curtis, Exotic Fungi from the Schweinitzian Herbarium. Am. J. Sci., I], xvi, 422-426. Botanical Notices. Salad for the Solitary, by an Epicure; Lindley, The Vegetable Kingdom; De Candolle’s Prodromus. Am. J. Sci., I], xv, 132-133. Introductory Essay, in Dr. Hooker’s Flora of New Zealand, Vol. I. Am. J. Sei., II, XVI, 241-252, 334-350. Botanical Notices. E.G. Steudel, Synopsis Plantarum Glumacearum, fase. 1; Lind-~ ley’s Folia Orchidacea, part 5; A. de Jussieu, Letters of Linnzwus to B. de Jussieu. — Am. J. Sci., II, xvi, 443-444. : Botanical Notices. J. W. Griffith and A. Henfrev, Micrographie Dictionary; B Seemann, Botany of the Voyage of the Herald; Dr. Hooker’s Flora of New Zealand, — part 5; A. Gray, Botany of Wilkes’s Exped., Phanerogamia. Am. J. Sei., I, xvii, ~ 131-133. Botanical Notices. Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, Vol. X; J. D. Hooker’s Flora d New Zealand, part 6; von Esenbeck et al., Genera Plantarum Flores Germanic, ete.,— Flore Danice Supplementi fasciculus 1; Griffith and Hentrey, Micrographie Dic-— tionary, part 2; Linnea, Vol. xxvii; Bot. Zeitung and Bonplandia; Annales des — Sciences Naturelles, etc., Vol. Xx, Botanical papers. Am. J. Sci., I], xvii, 284-286. Botanical Notices. J. F. Allen, Victoria Regia; Miquel, De Vriese et al., Planta Junghuhniane, fase. 3; Steudel, Synopsis Plantarum Glumacearum, fase. 3; See mann’s Botany of the Voyage of the Herald, part 5: De Vriese, Pandanee. Am. J. — Sci., II, xv111, 428-429. = 1855. Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 12; Boussingault on non-assimilation of Nitrogen by Plants; M. Personne on Lupulin; Hofmeister, The Fertilization of | Ferns; Payer, Traité d’Organogénie Végétale Comparée, livr. 1-4; Griffith and Hen- frey, Micrographie Dictionary, parts 3-5. Am. J. Sci., Il, x1rx, 128-130. i Botanical Notices. Hooker’s Flora of New Zealand, parts 7 and 8; Seemann’s | Botany of the Voyage of the Herald, part 6; Tulasne, on the Uredinex and Ustilaginex I i | ASA GRAY. 803 I. A. Lapham, Grasses of Wisconsin; H. G. Reichenbach, De Pollinis Orechidearum Genesi ac Structura, etc.; Micrographic Dictionary on Ergot. Am. J. Sci., II, x1x, 439-443. Botanical Notices. M. J. Schleiden, Poetry of the Vegetable World; De Vriese and Harting, Monographie des Marattiacées; Pritzel,[conum Bot. Index Locupletissimus ; J. Darby, Botany of the Southern States; Dunal et al., Wheat from Agilops. Am. J. Sci., II, xx, 129-135. Botanical Notices. Thuret, Sexual Reproduction in the Lower Cryptogamia; Tré- cul, Formations Secondaires dans les Cellules Végétales; Mohl on Chlorophyll; Miers, Seeds of Magnolia; Bertoloni, Miscellanea Botanica, fase. 13 and 14; Decaisne on the Wellingtonia of Lindley; Darwin, Does Sea-water kill Seeds? Am. J. Sei., II, xx, 276-284. 1856. Botanical Notices. A. De Candolle, Géographique Botanique Raisonné; J. D. Hooker and T. Thomson, Flora Indica. Am. J. Sci., II, xxi, 134-137. Botanical Notices. E.G. Steudel, Synopsis Plantarum Glumacearum, parts 1 and 2; J. D. Hooker, Flora of Tasmania; F. A. W. Miquel, Flora van Nederlandsch In- dié; Griffith and Henfrey, Micrographie Dictionary; A. Braun, Aloarum Unicellula- rium Genera Nova et minus Cognita. Am. J. Sci., [I], xx1, 282-284. - Botanical Notices. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc., Vol. I, no. I, 1856, Botanical Papers by C. J. F. Bunbury, C. F. Meisner, R. Kippist, and Zoological Papers; Schacht, Mohl et al., on the Origin of the Embryo in Plants; Pringsheim, Reproduction in Alge; Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 15. Am. J. Sci., II, xxi, 134-137. Botanical Notices. A. De Candolle, Géographique Botanique Raisonnée, etc.; Radl- kofer, Origin of the Embryo in Plants; Bentham, Notes on Loganiacew ; M. Neisler, The Flowers of the Pea-Nut; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 16 and 17; L. R. Tulasne, Mo- nographia Monimiacearum. Am. J. Sci., I], xxi, 429-437. 1857. Botanical Notices. De Candolle’s Prodromus, xtv, part 1; W. A. Bromfield, Flora Vectensis, edited by W. J. Hooker and T. B. Salter; Seemann’s Botany of the Voyage of the Herald, parts 7 and 8; G. Engelmann, Synopsis of the Cactacex of the United States Am. J. Sci., II, xx, 126-129. Botanical Notices. A. Henfrey, Origin of the Embryo in Plants. Am. J. Sci., II, XXIII, 278-279. Botanical Notices. W. S. Sullivant et L. Lesquereux, Musci Boreali-Americani, etc. Am. J. Sci., Il, xx111, 438-439. Botanical Notices. J.M.Berkeley. Introduction to Cryptogamic Botany ; H. Hoff- mann, Witterung und Wachsthum; C. Lehmann, Revisio Potentillarum [conibus Li- lustrata ; R. Caspary, Conspectus Systematicus Hydrillearum ; Ad. Chatin, on Val- lisneria spiralis, L. Am. J. Sei, II, xxrv, 151-155. Botanical Notices. Journ. of Proc. Linn. Soc. Vol. I, No. 4, Botanical Papers by Berkeley, Currey, Bennett, Seeman, Masters, Lindley, Oliver; Vol. 11, No. 5, contain- ing Higgins on the Cultivation of Mosses; Bentham, Synopsis of the Genus Clitoria ; Hooker and Thomson, Preecursores ad Floram Indicam ; G. Bentham, on the Principles of Generic Nomenclature ; C. Mueller and Walpers, Synopsis Plantarum Phanero- gamicarum, ete.; Bertolom, Miscellanea Botanica, fase. 15 and 16; Harvey, Phycologia Australica; Niesler, Indigofera Caroliniana. Am. J. Sci., II, xx1v, 281-288. Botanies! Notices. A. Henfrey, an Elementary Course of Botany ; Naudin’s Re- searches on t’.e Genus Cucurbita. Am. J. Sci., II, xxiv, 434-443. 185s. Botanical Notices. De Candolle’s Prodromus, Vol. x1v, part 2; Hooker’s Flora of Tasmania; Journ. Proc, Linn. Soc., No. 6, papers by Thomson, Hooker and Thomson ; De Vriese, Plant Indix Bataviw Orientalis. Am, J. Sci., I, xxv, 290-293, 804 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Botanical Notices. F. Boott, Illustrations of the Genus Carex ; Journ, Proc. Linn. Soc., 11, No. 7, papers by Henslow, Gray, Wood, Moore, ete.; Lindley, List of Orchids from Cuba; Andersson Salices Boreali-Americane ; Grisebach, Vegetation der Karai- ben; J. Wallman, Essai d’une Exposition Systématique de la Famille des Characées ; Parlatore’s Eulogy on F. B. Webb; Agricultural Botany in the Western States. Am. J. Scei., II, xxv, 135-139. Botanical Notices. H. A. Weddell, Monographie de la Famille des Urticées; Miquel’s Flora van Nederlandsch Indié; Walpers, Ann. Bot. Syst., 2d fasc.; Pring- sheim, Jahrbiicher, Vol. I, part 1, papers by Pringsheim and Hofmeister ; Radlkofer, Fecundation in the Vegetable Kingdom ; Bowerbank, Natural History of the Spong- iadx; Seeman’s Botany of the Voyage of the Herald, parts 9 and 10; J. D. Hooker, Structure and Affinities of Balanophoree ; Roussingault, Researches on the part of nitrogenous matters in vegetation, and the nitrates in soils; J. Decaisne, Structure and Development ot Flower and Fruit of Pear. Am. J. Sci., II, xxv, 109-124. Botanical Notices. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc., No. 8, Botanical papers by Miiller, Hooker and Thomson, Barter, Fée, Bennett; Flora of Australia. Am. J. Sci., II, SSW 5 Ueki, : Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 18-20; Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc,, No. 9, Jameson on Pseudocentrum; E. Tuckerman, Lichenes Americe Septentrionalis Ex- siccati, fasc. 5 and 6; Nylander, Synopsis Methodica Lichenum, etc., fasc. 1; Miers, Illustrations of S. American Plants, Vol. 11; Bentham, Handbook of the British Flora. Am. J. Sci., II, xxvi, 412-416. 1859. Botanical Notices. W.H. Harvey, Nereis Boreali-Americana. Am. J. Sci., II, xxvu, 142-146. Botanical Notices. Wm. Darlington, American Weeds and Useful Plants; Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc., No. 10; papers by Bentham on Legnotidee ; Spruce on Asteranthos: Miieller on Eucalypti of Australia ; Berkeley on Tuberiform Vegetable Productions from China: Grisebach on Abuta; Dickie on Arctic Plants; No. 11 of same, papers by Miiller, Bentham and Henfrey ; Walpers, Ann. Bot. Syst., Vol. 1v; E. Regel, on Parth- enogenesis; L. Vilmorin, Notices sur l’Amelioration des Plantes par Je Semis, ete. Am. J. Sei., I], Xxvil, 437-442. : Botanical Notices. Non Martius, Eulogy on Robert Brown; F. Mueller, Frag- menta, Phytographiwe Australie, Vol. 1, fase. 1-4; Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc., Nov. 12, papers by Henfrey, Ralph, Oliver, Spruce, Mitten ; R. B. Van der Bosch, Synopsis Hymenophyllacearum: Parry, Torrey and Engelmann, Botany of the Mexican Bound- ary; Catalogue of Phenogamous and Cryptogamous Plants inGray’s Manual. Am. J. Sci., I], xxvii, 290-293. Botanical Notices. G. Engelmann, New Genera of Dicecious Grasses of U. S.; W. H. Harvey, Thesaurus Capensis, Vol. 1; Grisebach’s Outlines of Systematic Botany ; Henfrey, Structure and Growth of Rootlets; E. Davy, on the taking of arsenic by plants. Am. J. Sei., Il, xxvii, 439-444. 18GO0. Botanical Notices. C. Wright, Collections of Cuban Plants; G. Englemann, the Genus Cuscuta; J. G. Cooper, Distribution of the Forests and Trees of N. Ainerica. Am. J. Sci., 11, xx1x, 127-129. Review of Darwin’s Theory on the Origin of Species by means ef Natural Selec- tion. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxrx, 153-184. [The Origin of Species by means of Natural Selection. Darwiniana, pp. 9-16. ] Botanical Notices. C. J. Maximowicz, Primitia Flore Amurensis; Harvey’s The- saurus Capensis, No. 2; Hooker’s Species Filicum, Vol. m1, part 1; Journ. Proe. Linn. Soc. No. 14, Botanical Papers by Anderson and Spruce; No. 15 of same, papers by (CMe. ASA GRAY. S05 Cocks, Hooker and Thomson; No. 16 of same, papers by Babingtou, Caruel, Oliver, Spruce, Moore, and Hoge; Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 18, 23, and 21; J.D. Hooker’s Flora Tasmania; Ogston, Poisoning of Plants by Arsenie. Am. J. Sei., II, xx1x, 436-441. _A free examination of Darwin’s Treatise on the Origin of Species. Atlantic Monthly, July, Aug., Oct., 1360. Reprinted in 1861 as a separate pamphlet of 55 pages. [Natural Selection not inconsistent with Natural Theology. Darwiniana, pp. 87-177. ] Botanical Notices. A. W. Chapman, Flora of the Southern United States; G. Bentham, Synopsis of Dalbergiew; G. Suckley and J. G. Cooper, Reports on Natural History, etc., of Minnesota, Nebraska, Washington, and Oregon Territories. Am. J. Sei., If, Xxx, 137-139. Botanical Notices. M. A. Curtis, Geological and Natural History Survey of North Carolina; Thwaites, Enumeratio Plantarum Zeylanice, parts 1 and2; Walpers. Ann. Bot. Syst.; Bnek, Index ad De Cand. Prodromum, ete., part 3. Am. J.Sei., Il, xxx, 275-276. 1861, Botanical Notices. W.H. Harvey, Thesaurus Capensis, No.4; W. H. Harvey and O. W. Sonder, Flora Capensis, Vol. I; A. H. R. Grise bach, Flora of the British West Indies, parts 1 and 2, and Plantw Wrightianze e Cuba Orientali; D. C. Eaton, Filices Wrightian et Fendleriane ; T. J. Hale, Additions to Floraof Wisconsin ; J.S. New- berry, Catalogue of Flowering Plants and Ferns of Ohio; E. W. Hervey, Catalogue of Plants of New Bedford, Mass.; E. Tatuall, Catalogue of Phienogamous and Fili- coid Plants of Newcastle Co., Delaware; H. W. Ravenel, Fungi Caroliniani Exsiceati, fase. 1-5 ; A. Braun, Uber Polyembryonie und Keimung von Cielebogyne ; F. Boott, Il- lustrations of the genus Carex. Am. J. Sci., I], xxx1, 122-132. Botanical Notices. L. Lesquereux, Botanical and Paleontological Report on the Geol. State Survey of Arkansas. Am. J. Sci., I], xxxt, 431-435. Botanical Notices. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. No. 18, papers by Bentham, Crocker, Hooker, Mitten, ete.; J. Phillips, Life on the Earth, its Origin and Succession ; C. R. Bree, Species not Transmutable nor the Result of Secondary Causes. Am. J. Sei., II, Xxx1, 443-449. Botanical Notices. G. Bentham, Flora Hongkongensis; Ann. Bot. Soc. Canada, Vol. 1, part 1, papers by Blackie and others; Journ. Proce. Linn. Soe. No. 19, papers by Mitten, Hooker and Thomson; A. Wood, Class-Book of Botany. Am. J. Sei., Il, xxxu, 124-130. Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 25-28; H. Carsten, Flore Columbiz, ete., tom. 1, fase. 1; Journ. Proce. Linn. Soc. No. 20, papers by Hooker and Thomson, Welwitsch, Oliver, Bentham. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxx1r, 280-290. 1862. Botanical Notices. H. A. Weddell, Mémoire sur le Cynomorium coccineum, ete. ; KE. Regel, Monographia Betulacearum hnuensque cognitarum; Miiller, Ann. Bot. Syst., vols. lv, v, and vr; F. A. W. Miquel, Journal de Botanique Neerlandaise; E. G. Squier, Tropical Fibres; A. Gray, Mexican’ Boundary Carices; Musci Gubenses Wrightiana, coll. 1856-1858; C. C. Parry, Rocky Mountain Flora; Aroidex by Dr. Schott; Journ. Proc. Linn. Soe., no. 21, Botanical Papers by Hooker, Masters, Col. Munro and others. Am. J. Sei., Il, xxxim, 139-143, Botanical Notices. D. Candolle’s Prodromus,vol xv, part 1; I°. Boott, Illustrations of the Genus Carex; Thwaites’ Enumeratio Plantarum Zeylaniie, part 3; Ann Bot. Soc. Canada, part 3. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxx111, 430-432. Botanical Notices. C. Darwin, on the Various Contrivances by which Orchids are fertilized ; J. D. Hooker, Outlines of the Distribution of Arctic Plants, and on the Cedars of Lebanon, Taurus, Algeria, and India; Weddell’s Chloris Andina, vol. I. ‘Am. J. Sci., II, xxxtv, 138-151. 806 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Autherology; Review of Oliver’s ‘‘Note on the Structure of the Anther.” Am. Journ. Sci., IT, xxxrv, 282-284. Botanical Notices. Oliver, on the wood-cells of Hamamelidex : Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc., nos. 22, 23, papers by Munro, Bentham, C. Darwin, Lindley and Grisebach; Bentham’s Presidential Address to the Linnean Society, May, 1862; Botany of North- eastern Asia; C. DeCandolle, on the Production of Cork; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 29 and 30; Grisebach, Flora of the British West Indian Islands, parts tv and v. Am. J. Sci., II, xxxiv, 284-288. Botanical Notices. C. Darwin, Dimorphism in the Genitalia of Flowers. Am. J, Sci., Il, xxxtv, 419-420; Seemann’s Journ. Bot., 1, 147-149 (with corrections). 1863. Mémoires et Souvenirs de Augustin-Pyramus DeCandolle, Ecrits par luiméme et Publiées par Son Fils. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxxv, 1-16; Seemann’s Journ. Bot., 1, 107-120 (abridged, with corrections by the author). Notice of Boussingault ‘‘On the Nature of the Gas produced from the Decomposi- tion of Carbonic Acid by Leaves exposed to the Light.” Am. J. Sci., II, xxxv, 121- 123. Botanical Notices. Bentham and Hooker’s Genera Plantarum, vol. 1, part 1; Hooker’s Species Filicum, parts 13, 14. Am. J. Sci., II, xxxv, 134-136. Botanical Notices. A new character in the Fruit of Oaks, DeCandolle; Review of DeCandolle’s ‘‘ Species, considered as to Variation, Geographical Distribution and Succession ”; Harvey and Sonder’s Flora Capensis, vol. 11; Abbe Provancher’s Flore Canadienne; The Tendrils of the Virginia Creeper; Durand’s Vites Boreali-Ameri- cane; Vegetable Productions of the Feejee Islands; Gray’s Manual. Am.J.Sci., II, XXxXv 430-449. Botanical Notices. Notice of Trans. St. Louis Acad., vol. 11, part 1; Hall and Har- bour’s Rocky Mountain Plants; Paullinia sorbilis and its products; Aerial rootlets on the stems of Virginia Creeper (Ampelopsis quinquefolia) ; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 31, 32 (note); Dr. C. W. Short; Wm. Darlington. Am. J. Sci., II, xxxvi, 128-139. Botanical Notices. Dimorphism in the Flowers of Linum, Review of a paper by Darwin; Variation and Mimetic Aualogy in Lepidoptera; Bentham and Miiller’s Flor Australiensis; Oliver’s Notes on the Loranthacewe, with a synopsis of the Gen- era; Parthenogenesis in Plants. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxxvi, 279-294. Botanical Notices. Origin of Varieties in Plants; Review of Memoirs et Souve- nirs de Agustin Pyramus DeCandolle; Hooker on Welwitschia, a new genus of Gnetacee ; American Tea-Plant. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxxvi, 432-439. 1864. Botanical Notices. Annales Musei Botanici Lugduno-Batavi for 1863; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 33-35; Agardh’s Species Genera et Ordines Algarum; Harvey’s Phycologia Australica and Thesaurus Capensis, vol. 11, no. 1; Miiller’s, The Plants indigenous to the Colony of Victoria ; Brunet’s Plantes de Michaux; Botany of N. W. America along the British Boundary; Ink-Plant (Coriaria thymifolia). Am. J. Sci., II, xxxvu1, 281-288. Botanical Notices. Prior’s Popular Names of British Plants ; Saint Pierre’s Flore des Euvirons de Paris; Vilmorin-Andrieux’s Des Fleurs de Pleine Terre; Kindberg’s Monographie Generis Lepigonorum; Andersson’s Botany of the Galapagos Islands; Tuckerman’s Lichenes Insulz Cube. Am. J. Sci., I, xxxvil, 433-436. Botanical Notices. Olivier’s (Henslow’s) Lessons in Elementary Botany ; Gothe’s Essay on the Metamorphosis of Plants; Milde’s Equisetacee ; Brown on Marsilia and Pilularia. Am. J. Sci., II, xxxvuil, 124-127. Botanical Notices. DeCandolle’s Prodromus; Mitten’s Bryolegy of British N. W. America; Sullivant’s Icones Muscorum. Am. J. Sci., I., xxxviu, 290-291. Botanical Notices. Sullivant’s Icones Muscorum. Ath. J. Sci., Il, xxxviu, 429. =. ee ty ASA GRAY. 807 1865. Botanical Notices. Scott’s Functions and Structure of the Reproductive Organs in the Primulacexe; Mohl’s Observations upon Dimorphous Flowers; Naudin and Godron’s Essayson Hybrids; Grisebach’s Flora of the British West Indian Islands; Bentham’s Florula Australiensis. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx1x, 101-110. Botanical Notices. DeCandolle’s Prodromus, vol. xvi, part 1; Hooker’s Hand- book of the New Zealand Flora, part 1; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 36-38 ; Journ. Linn. Soc., no. 31, articles on Dimorphism and Trimorphism of Plants. Am. J. Sei. I, XXXIX, 359-362. Botanical Notices. Thwaites’ Enumeratio Plantarum Zelaniw ; Harvey and Son- der’s Flora Capensis, vol. 111; Dr. Torrey, Ammobroma Sonor:e ; Harvey’s Thesaurus Capensis; Annales Botanices Systematic, tom. vi; Child’s Production of Organ- isms in closed vessels. Am. J. Sci., I, xu. 125-127. Botanical Notices. Welwitschia mirabilis, Hook. fil.; Darwin’s Movements and Habits of Climbing Plants. Am. J. Sci., II, xx, 273-282. 1866. ~ Botanical Notices. Darwin’s Movements and Habits of Climbing Plants; Paine’s Catalogue of Plants found in Oneida County [New York] and vicinity; Bentham and Hooker's Genera Plantarum, part 2. Am. J. Sci., I, xi. 125-132. Botanical Notices. Daubeny’s Essay on the Trees and Shrubs of the Ancients. Am. J. Sci., II, x11, 268. Botanical Notices. Bentham’s Address on Natural History Transactions and Journals; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 39, 40; Eichler on the Morphology of the An- drozcium in Fumariacex ; Seemann’s Flora Vitiensis; Botany of Australia; Miiller’s Analytical Drawings of Australan Mosses, fase. 1; Miiller’s Vegetation of the Chatham Islands; Bunge’s Revision of the genus Cousinia; Krok, Monogaph of Valerian ; Musci Boreali-Americani, Sullivant and Lesquereux. Am. J. Sci., Il, xu, 410-418. Botanical Notices. Boussingault’s Researches on the action of Foliage; Engel- mann’s Revision of the North American Species of Juncus; Lessingia germanorum ; Curtis’ Illustrations of the Esculent Fungi of the U. 8.; The International Horti- cultural Exhibition. Am. J. Sei., II, xLts, 126-132. : Botanical Notices. Fournier on Crucifere ; Salisbury’s Genera of Plants; Gray’s Hand-book of British Water-Weeds or Algee. Am. J. Sci., IJ, xLu, 277-281. Botanical Notices. De Candolle’s Prodromus, vol. xv; E. Boissier, cones Euphor- biarum. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxi, 427. 1867. Botanical Notices. The Miscellaneous Botanical Works of Robert Brown; J. Mueller on Nature of Anthers; Mémoire sur la Famile des Pepéraciées by DeCandolle. Am. S. Sci., II, xu, 125-128. Botanical Notices. Salices Europese Wimmer; Le Specie dei Cotoni descritte da Filippo Parlatore ; Tree-labels for arboretum ; Ozone produced by Plants, Daubeny’s article in Journ. Chem. Soc. Am. J. Sci., II, xi, 272-273. Botanical Notices. Grisebach’s Catalogus Plantarum Cubensium; Flora Austra- liensis, Vol. 11. Am. J. Sei., If, xii, 409-410. Botanical Notices. KE. Bossier, Flora Orientalis; Catalogue des Végétaux Ligneux du Canada, by VAbbé Brunet: Rep. of Proceedings of the International Horticultural Exhibition, 1866: Collections of Dried Plants of California. Am. J. Sci., II, XLiv, 122-123. Botanical Notices. N. J. Andersson, Monographia Salicum; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 42 and 43; De Candolle, Lois de la Nomenclature; Miquel, Sur les Affinitiés de la Flora du Japan avec celles de |’Asie et de ’Amerique du Nord; Tall Trees in Aus- 808 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. tralia; Report on destruction of Trees in Wisconsin, by I. A. Lapham and others; Annales Musci Botanici Lugduni Batavi, Tom. I-III, fase. 4. Am, J. Sei., LI, xrv, 420-425, 1868. Review of Darwin’s Variation of Animals and Plants under Domestication. Nation, No. 142, pp. 234-236. Botanical Notices. Miocene Flora of the Polar Regions; Les Fleurs de Pleine Terre, 2™¢ 6d; The Great Dragon Tree of Orotava, Teneriffe; Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey of California, Part m1, Botany; Bentham and Hooker’s Genera Plantarum ; Boott’s Illustrations of the genus Carex. Am. J. Sci., Il, xLv, 269-272. Botanical Notices. IF. A. G. Miquel, Prolusio Flore Japonice ; Genera Plantarum, Vol. 1; Traité Général de Botanique descriptive et analytique, Le Maout and De- eaisne; Gray’s Marual, fifth e.lition. Am. J. Sci., Il, xiv, 403-409. Botanical Notices. The book of Evergreens, by Josiah Hoopes; Botanical Works of Robert Brown; Jourr. Linn. Soc., Botany, Nos. 42 and 43; Théorie de la Feuille, by C. De Candolle. Am. J. Scei., 11, xuvi1, 270-272. 2 Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, DeCandolle’s Prodromus, ete. Am. J. Scei., II, xivi, 408-409. 1869. Botanical Notices. J. F. Watson’s Index to the Native and Scientific Names of In- dian Plants, ete. Am. J. Sci., Il, xtvu1, 143. Botanical Notices. Botanical Notabilia. Bentham’s Presidential Address, [ Areas of Preservation, Am. Naturalist, rv, 44]; Robert Brown’s Works; Master’s Vegetable Teratology; Memoir of Harvey; Genera of South African Plants; Flora Australi- ensis; Oliver’s Flora of Tropical Africa, and First Book ot Indian Botany; Seemann’s Flora Vitiensis; Baker on the Geographical Distribution of Ferns; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum; Mitten’s Musci Austr-Americaniin Vol. x11, Journ. Linn. Soc.; Andersson on Palms; Munro’s Monograpk of Bambusacew ; Appendix to French edition of Dar- win’s Fertilization of Orchids; Baillon’s Adansonia and Traité du Development de la Fleur et du Fruit; Bureaun’s Monographie des Bignoniacées ; De Candolle’s Prodro- mus, Vol. Xv1; Flora Danica, 47th part; Cirsted on Classification of Oaks; Lange on the Pyrolexe and Monotropex of Mexico and Central America; Bunge’s Monograph of the Astragali of the Old World; Ammobroma Sonore; Braun’s Monograph of Anstralian Isoetes; Pritzel’s Iconum Botanicarum Index Locupletissimus; Flora Bra- siliensis, fase. 44-46; Rudolph’s Atlas des Pflanzengeographie; Pursh’s Journal of a Botanical Excursion in N. Y. in 1807. Am. J. Sci., II, XLix, 120-129. : Botanical Notices. Johnson’s How Crops Feed; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 48; Dick- son on Development of Flower of Pinguicula; Geographical Handbook of Ferns, by K. M. Lyell; Bulletin of Torrey Botanical Club, Nos. 1 and 2; Notes relating to Vege- table Physiology, etc. Am. J. Sci., II, xirx, 403-410. Botanical Notices. ‘‘ Miscellaneous Botanical Notices and Observations.” De Candolle’s Code of Botanical Nomenclature ; Baillon’s Histoire des Plantes; Hincks on the Arrangement and Nomenclature of Ferns; Bennett-on the Genus Hydrolea ; Tampico Jalap; Prof. Babington’s Revision of the Flora of Iceland; Dr. Ogle on Fer- tilization of Flowers by Insects; Brunet’s Eléments de Botanique; Von Martius’ Herbarium; The Michaux Grove Oaks; Beckler on Scirpee ; Bunge’s Genesis Astra- gali Species Gerontogew pars altera; Flora Caucasia, by Ruprecht; Bentham’s Pres- idential address; Hookers Student’s Flora of the British Islands; The ‘‘American Entomologist.” Am. J. Sci., II, L, 274-283: Botanical Notices. Professor Lawson on Oxford Botanists; Hasskar’s Monograph of Indian Commelynacex ; Revision of the Genera and Species of Herbaceous Capsu- ASA GRAY. 809 lar, Gamophyllous Liliacew, by J. G. Baker; Clark on Commelynacexw of Bengal: Dickie’s Notes on Algw from North Atlantic Ocean ; Absorption of Moisture by Leaves ; Henfrey’s Elementary Course of Botany. Am. J. Sci., II, 1, 425-429. Botanical Notices. Hohenbiihel-Heutler on the Linnean Hypothesis of the Deriva- tion of Species; Lawson’s Monograph of Canadian Ranunculacew ; CGirsted on char- acters furnished by the styles in Cupuliferse and Juglandew, etc. Am. J. Sei., II, 1, 147-149. Botanical Notices. Rhododendrewe Asi:e Orientalis, by Maximowiez; Flora Aus- traliensis, Vol. V; Braun’s revision of Marsiliz and Pilularize. Am. J. Sci., II], 1, 222--223. Botanical Notices. Von Mohl on Sciadopitys verticillata; Austin’s Musci Appa- lachiani. Am. J. Scei., III, 1, 306-307. . Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 50; Prior’s Popular Names of British Plants, 2d ed.; Vilmorin-Andrieux, Les Fleurs de Pleine Terre, 3d ed.; Baker’s Syn- opsis of Known Lilies; Hiern on the Distribution of Batrachium Section of Ranun- culus; E. S. Rand on the Rhododendron and American Plants. Am. J. Sci., ILI, 1, 475-476. * Botanical Notices. Maximowicz on Diapensiacex ; Lange on Form and Structure of Seeds. Am. J. Sci., II, 11, 62-63. Botanical Notices. Bretschneider on Chinese Botany; Gaeppert on Plants killed by Frost. Am. J. Sci., ILI, 11, 221-222. Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 51-54; Baillon’s Histoire des Plants; Borodin on changes in position of grains of Chlorophyll under Sunlight; Dehérain on Evaporation of Water, etc. Am. J. Sci., II, 1, 460-465. Darwin’s Descent of Man. Examiner, Vol. 1, 594-600. Botanical Notices. Friderici Welwitschii Sertum Angolense; Hooker’s Icones Plan- tarum, III, part 1; Van Tieghem on the Structure of the Pistil in Primulacez, on the Anatomy of the Flower of Santalacee, on Comparative Anatomy of Cycadace, Con- iferee, and Gnetacex, on the Mistletoe; Botany of Clarence King’s Survey; Oliver’s Flora of Tropical Africa, Vol. Il; Heer, Flora Fossilis Arctica. Am. J.Sci., ILI, 11, 58-64. Botanical Notices. Miers, Contributions to Botany ; S. Watson, Botany of Clarence King’s Survey; Hall, Plants of Oregon; Saunders’ Refugium Botanicum; Warming, Inflorescence or flower in Euphorbia. Am. J. Sci., ILI, 111, 147-152. Botanical Notices. Scheutz, Prodromus Monograph Georum; Baillon, Histoire des Plantes. Am. J. Sci., III, 111, 306-308. Botanical Notices. Bentham, Revision of the genus Cassia; Delpino, on the Fer- tilization of Conifer; J. Miiller, on the Cyathium of Euphorbia; Maximowiez, Ac- tion of Pollen on Fruit of Fertilized Plant; Grisebach, Die Vegetation der Erde nach ihrer Klimatischen Anordnung; correction to Note on Baptisia. Am. J. Sci., IIT, 1, 376-381. Botanical Notices. Calletet on Absorption of Water by leaves; change of Habit of a Parasite; Peck’s report on Botany before Albany Institute; Cooke, Hand-book of British Fungi; News of Botanists; Journal of Botany; Fossil Flora of Great Britain; ‘‘The Garden.” Am. J. Sci., ILI, 11, 472-476. Botanical Notices. Mare Micheli, Recent Researches in Vegetable Physiology; M. T. Masters, Botany for Beginners; C. F. Austin, Musci Appalachiani. Am. J. Sei., III, 1v, 72-77. Professor Babington on Anacharis. Am. Nat., v1, 297. Botanical Notices. Robert Brown’s first Botanical Paper; Prantl’s Memoir upon Inuline; Cooke and Peck, Erysiphei of the United States; Kan-Sun, a Chinese Vege- table; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 55. Am. J. Sei., III. 1v, 149-151. $10 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Botanical Notices. ‘Tuckerman, Genera Lichenum; Hooker, Flora of British India; Grevillea; Linnwa, Vol. 111; Flera Brasiliensis, fase. 57-59: News of Botanists; Her- barium of the late Dr. Curtis. Am. J. Sei. III, tv, 420-422. Botanical Notices. Decaisne’s Monograph of the Genus Pyrus; Botanical Supple- ment to Fifth Annual Report of Geol. Survey of Territories for 1871. Am. J. Sci., III, rv, 489-495. 1873: Botanical Notices. Brongniart on the Theoretical Structure of the Cone in Coni- fer ; Zizania aquatica not tuberiferous ; Calcareous encrusted Chari ; Origin of the Weeping Willow. Am. J. Sci., III. v, 75. Botanical Notices. Boissier, Flora Orientalis. Vol. 11; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, IU, Vol. 1, part 1; Journ. Linn, Soc. no. 68; Journal of Botany, Dec., 1872; Discharge of the seeds of Witch hazel; Chlorodictyon, by Agardh ; Braun on Marsilia and Pilu- laria; Baillon, Histoire-des Plantes; Triana. Les Mélastomacées. Am. J. Sci. III, v, 142-145. Seemann’s Flora Vitiensis. Trimen’s Journ. Bot., x1. 181-182. Review of Bentham and Hooker’s Genera Plantarum, Vol. 1, part 1. The Acad- emy, IV, 230-231. Botanical Notices. Hildebrand, Fertilization in Grasses. Am. J. Sci., III, v, 316. Botanical Notices. Van Tieghem on the Cotyledon of Graminew, etec.; Infelix Lolium ; H. C. Wood, Fresh-water Algie of North America. Am. J. Scei., III, v, 389-391. Botanical Notices. Van Tieghem, on Nervation of Coats of Ovules and Seeds; Sup- posed American Origin of Rubus Ideus [repr. in Amer. Nat., vl, 421-422]; a New Textile Plant; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, Vol. 1, part 2; Bentham and Hooker, Genera Plantarum, Vol. 1, part 1; Wm. S. Sullivant. Am, J. Sci., II. v, 479-481. Notice of A. De Candolle’s Histoire des Sciences et des Savants. Nation, No. 418, p- 12. Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 60,61; W. P. Hiern, a Monograph of Ebenacee ; E. Regel, Animadversiones de Plantis vivis nonullis Hort, Bot. Imp. Petropolitani. Am. J. Sci., Ill, vi, 75-77. Botanical Notices. LeMaout and Decaisne’s Descriptive and Analytical Botany; : Crépin’s Primitiz Monographie Rosaram. Am. J. Sci., III, vi, 147-151. Botanical Notices. Bentham, Notes on Composite; Cirsted, System der Pilze, Lichenen und Algen; A. H. Curtiss, Catalogue of Phenogamous and Vascular Cry pto- gamous Plants of Canada and the Northeastern portion of the United States; A. Pol- lock, Index to Medicinal Plants. Am. J. Sci., II, v1, 230-231. Anniversary Address of the President [Bentham] to the Linnean Society, May 24, 1873. Am. J. Sci., III, vi, 241-254. Botanical Notices. Hanbury on Pareira Brava. Am. J. Sci., III, vi, 315. Botanical Notices. Bornet on the Composition of Lichenes; Hybridation in Mosses, etc., Philibert. Am. J. Sci., III, v1, 388-390. The Attitude of Working Naturalists towards Darwinism. [Review of De Can- dolle’s Histoire des Sciences et des Savants, of Bentham’s Presidential Address be- fore the Linnean Society, of Bentham’s Notes on Composite, of Flower’s Evidence of Modification of Animal Forms, of Dawson’s Story of the Earth and Man.] Nation, No. 433, pp. 248-261. [Darwiniana, pp. 236-251. ] Botanical Notices. Bennett on Movements of the Glands of Drosera; Engelmann, Notes on the Genus Yucca. Am. J. Sci., ILI, v1, 467-470. 187-.. Notices of the Cessation of De Candolle’s Prodromus. Nation, No. 446, p. 42. Evolution and Theology. [Review of Rey. G. Henslow’s Theory of Evolution; of C. Hodge’s Systematic Theology, and of J. Le Conte’s Religion and Science.] Nation, No. 446, pp. 44-46. [Darwiniana, pp. 252-265. } “ ASA GRAY. S1i Botanical Notices. Contributions to American Botany, Sereno Watson; Charac- ters of New Ferns from Mexico, D. C. Eaton; Botanical Contributions, by Asa Gray, Noy. 18, 1873; Bentham’s Flora Australiensis, Vol. v1; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 62; Musée Botanique de Leide, Vol. 1; DeCandolie’s Prodromus, Vol. xvi1. Am. J. Sci., III, vit, 63-68. Botanical Notices. Dr. Regel on Vitis; Hepaticee Boreali-Americane, C. F. Aus- tin; Ilysanthes gratioloides ; Synopsis Generis Lespedezew, C. J. Maximowiez. Am. J. Sci., III, vir, 152-154. - What is Darwinism? [ Review of C. Hodges’s What is Darwinism ?, of A. Winchell’s Doctrine of Evolution, of G. St. Clair’s Darwinism and Design, and of C. Kingsley’s Westminster Sermons.] Nation, No. 465, pp. 348-351. [Darwiniana, pp. 266-282. ] Botanical Notices. Parthenogenesis in Ferns; Hooker’s Flora of British India; New views on Lichenes and Gonidia ; Decaisne on Eryngium, species with parallel- veined leaves. Am. J. Sci., III, vir, 440-444. Botanical Notices. Revision of the North American Chenopodiacee, Sereno Wat- son; J. F..Mellichamp on Sarracenia variolaris.. Am. J. Sei., III, vil, 599-600. Owens College Essays and Addresses. [Review of Essays and Addresses by Pro- fessors and Lecturers of Owens College, Manchester.] Nation, No. 474, pp. 76-77. Botanical Notices. Dr. Shawon Changes in the Character of Vegetation Produced by Sheep-grazing ; McNab and Dyer on the Perigynium and occasional Seta in Carex ; Maximowicz, Dass Plantarum Japoniz, etc.; Botanical Contributions by Mee Gray, in Proc. Am. Acad., Vol. 1x; J. G. Cooper on Influence of Climate and Topogra-- phy on Trees around San Francisco Bay; O. H. Willis, Catalogue of Plants near New Jersey. Am. J. Sci., III, vu, 69-72. Manual of Geology, by Jas. D. Dana. Nation, No. 469, pp. 415-416. Botanical Notices. A. De Candolle on Physiological Groups in the Vegetable King- dom; W. C. Williamson, Primeval Vegetation in its relation to the Doctrines of Natural Selection and Evolution; J. W. Dawson, Annual Address of the President of the Natural History Society of Montreal, May, 1874; R. Shuttleworth and his collee- tions. Am. J. Sci., III, vim, 147-156. Notes on the Rtdresees of the Presidents of the English, French, and American As- sociations for the Advancement of Science. Nation, No. 481, p. 188. Note on Prof. Tyndall’s estimate of Aristotle. Nation, No. 482, p. 204. Note on igre. s Address on ‘* The Theory of Atoms in the Gener: ” Conception of the Universe.” Nation, No. 482, p. 204. Notes on Dr. Hookevr’s antec as President of a section of the British Association on Insectivorous Plants. Nation, No. 483, p. 219. Notice of the American Naturalist for Oct., 1874. Nation, No. 485, p. 250. Miscellaneous Notices. Baker’s Revision of the Genera and Species of the Tulipex; A Sexual Growth from the Prothallus of Pteris cretica, by Farlow; Botany of 8. Pa- cific Exploring Expedition under Admiral Wilkes, ete, Am. Journ. Sci., III, vin, 320-322. Botanical Notices. J. D. Hooker on the Carnivorous Habits of some Plants; Lin- nean Society of London; Professorship of Botany at the Jardin des Plantes. Am. J. Sci., III, vir, 395-398. Botanical Notices. Note on the use of the word Cyclesis. Am. J. Sci., III, vi, 469-470. Notice of the Address of the President of the Michigan Pomological Society. Na- tion, No. 493, p. 382. Botanical Notices. J. Scott, Notes on the Tree-Ferns of British Sikkim; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 53, 64; Journ. Linn. Soe., No. 77; Trans. and Proc. Bot. Soe. Edinburgh, Vol. x1; Florida plants for sale; American Naturalist, Vol. vi. Am, J. Sci., II, rx, 65-69. Notice of De Candolle’s Memorial of Agassiz. Nation, No. 504, p. 135. 812 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Notice of Sir John Lubbock’s British Wild Flowers considered in relation to Insects. Nation, No. 509, pp. 229-230. Botanical Notices. Fliickiger and Hanbury, Pharmacographia; Fries, Hymenomy- cetes Europi; Saporta, Miocene Fossil Plants of Greece; Mace. Am. J. Sci., II, IX, 153-154. Bentham, on the recent Progress and present State of Systematic Botany. Am. J. Sei., II, rx, 346-355. Botanical Notices. W.S. Sullivant, Icones Muscorum; Attar of Roses; Sir J. Lub- bock, British Wild Flowers considered in relation to Insects. Am. J. Sci., III, rx, 323-326. Notice of Sach’s Text-Book of Botany. Nation, No. 519, p. 400. Botanical Notices. Bentham. Revision of the Suborder Mimosexe; J. D. Hooker, Flora of British India; Miers, on the Lecythidacee; Hooker and Baker, Synopsis Filicum; Grisebach, Plants Lorentzian; A. Gray, North American Hydrophylla- cex ; S.Watson, Revision of the Genus Ceanothus and Synopsis of the Western Species of Silene; W. G. Farlow, List of the Marine Algw of the U.S. Am. J. Sei., III, rx, 471-476. Botanical Notices. M. C. Cooke, Fungi, their Nature and Uses. Am. J. Sci., III, x, 62-63, Notice of M. C. Cooke’s Fungi: their Nature and Uses. - Nation, No. 525, p. 62. A Beginner in Botany. [Review of Ruskins’ Proserpina.] Nation, No. 528, pp. 103-104. Botanical Notices. C. B. Clarke, Commelynacee et Cyrtandracere Bengalenses. Am. J. Scei., II, x, 154-155. German Darwinism. Nation, 1875, pp. 168-170. Notice of Emerson’s Trees and Shrubs of Massachusetts. Nation, Oct. 8, 1875. Botanical Notices. J.L. Stewart and D. Brandis, Forest Flora of N.W. and Central India; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 66; De Candolle on Different Effects of same tempera- ture upon same plants under different latitudes; Dr. J. E. Gray’s Publications. Am. J. Sci., III, x, 236-239. Botanical Notices. Rostafinski on Hematococcus lacustris, ete.; E. Tuckerman, Catalogue of Plants growing without cultivation within thirty miles of Amherst Col- lege; L. Radlkofer, Serjania Sapindacearum Genus monographice descriptum., Am. J. Sei., III, x, 309-311. Botanical Notices. The formation of Starch in chlorophyll-grains; G. B. Emerson, Report on the Trees and Shrubs of Mass.; W. T. Dyer, On the Classification and Sexual Reproduction of Thallophytes; F. Buchenau, Monographie der Juncaceen vom Cap. Am. J. Sci., III, x, 392-395. Botanical Notices. J. Decaisne, Memoire sur la Famille des Pomacées; J. G. Baker. Elementary Lessons in Botanical Geography. Am. J. Scei., II, x, 481-484. Review of Emerson’s Trees and Shrubs of Massachusetts. American Agriculturist, Dec., p. 451. 1876. Review of Darwin’s Insectivorous and Climbing Plants. Nation, No. 549, pp. 12-14; No. 550, pp. 30-32. [Darwiniana, pp. 308-337. ] Botanical Notices. Karl Koch, Vorlesungen iiber Dendrologie; C. Darwin, In- sectivorous Plants and Movements and Habits of Climbing Plants, 2d ed.; Haeckel’s Ziele und Wege der heutigen Entwickelungsgeschichte. Am. J. Sci., III, x1, 69-74. Botanical Notices. Naudin on the Nature of Heredity and Variability in Plants ; Rev. H. Maemillan, First forms in Vegetation, 2d ed. Am. J. Sci., II, x1, 153-157. Botanical Notices. Geo. Engelmann, Notes on Agave; J. Duval-Jouve, Structure of the Leaves of Grasses; B. Renault, Botryopteris Forensis; Brongniart, Silicified fossil Fruits or Seeds; Mayer and Wolkoff, Respiration of Plants; Bornet, Classifica- tion of Nostochine ; Gymnocladus in China; Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 68. Am. J. Sci., III, x1, 235-239. : ASA GRAY. 813 Botanical Notices. Botanical Contributions in Vol. XI of the Proc. Amer. Acad., New species and genera from California, by A. Gray, and on the Flora of Guadalupe Island by S. Watson. Am. J. Sci., III, x1, 325. Botanical Notices. Bulletin of the Bussey Institution, part 5, containing Farlow’s Disease of Orange and Olive Trees of California, American Grape-vine Mildew, Fungi near Boston, The Black Knot, and Report of the Director of the Arnold Arboretum. Am. J. Sci., II, x1, 414-415. Botanical Notices. C. S. Sargent, Tree-planting, Prizes for Arboriculture; A. Blytt, Essay on Immigration of Norwegian Flora during Rainy and Dry Periods; Bentham and Hooker, Genera Plantarum, Vol. 11; Botany of California, Vol. 1, Poly- petal, by Brewer and Watson ; Gamopetalw, by A. Gray. Am. J. Sei., III, x1, 73-79. Notice of A. Koehler’s Practical Botany, Structural and Systematic. Nation, No. 579, p. 80. Botanical Notices. George Engelmann, The Oaks of the United States; M. Gus- tave-Adolphe Thuret, Equisse Biographique, by M. E. Bornet; F. de Mueller, Frag- menta Phytographice Australi, Vol. x1; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 62 and 69; J. W. Beal, The Forest-products of Michigan at the Centennial Exposition; G. C. Arthur, Contributions to the Flora of Iowa. Am. J. Sci., III, xu, 153-156. Botanical Notices. C. De Candolle, Structure and Movement of Leaves of Dionwa muscipula; P. B. Wilson, Diatoms in Wheat-straw ; Hance, An Intoxicating Grass ; Crépin, Primitiz Monogrophixw Rosarum ; A. De Candolle, on the Influence of the age of a Tree on the time of Leafing; A. Kehler, Practical Botany, Structural and Sys- tematic; T. S. Brandegee, Flora of Southwestern Colorado. Am. J. Sci., Ill, xu, 232-235. Botanical Notices. J.D. Hooker, Flora of British India, part 4; A. B. Clarke, Compostx Indice; Proc. Am. Assoc., 24th meeting, 1875, Botanical articles by Meehan on Insect fertilization of Flowers ; Beal on Carnivorous Plants, Inequilateral Leaves and the Venation of a few odd Leaves; T. B. Comstock on Utricularia vul- garis; J. Hyatt on Periodicity in Vegetation. Am. J. Sci., III, x11, 397-398. Botanical Notices. Baillon, Dictionnaire de Botanique, fasc. 1; T. Caruel, Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano, Vol. vir; E. Boissier, Flora Orientalis; J. Miers, On the Barringtoniaceex ; G. Vasey, Catalogue of the Forest Trees of the United States. Am. J.Sci., II, x11, 468-469. S77. Botanical Notices. T. Comber, Geographical Statistics of the European Flora; J. Sprague and G. L. Goodale, The Wild Flowers of America. Am. J. Sci., ILI, xin, 83-85. Botanical Notices. Baillon, Dictionnaire de Botanique, fasc. 2 and 3; O. Heer, Flora Fossilis Arctica; Proc. and Trans. Nova Scotia, Inst. Nat. Sci. Vol. rv, part 2; containing notes by Lawson on Calluna vulgaris, notes on Rhododendron maximum, and a Catalogue of the Plants of the Province by Sommers. Am. J. Sci., II], xu, 320-321. Botanical Notices. C. De Candolle, Observations sur Venronlement des Vrilles; W. G. Farlow, Onion-Smut; G. Bentham, Classification and Terminology in Mono- cotyledons; C. Darwin, Various Contrivances by which Orchids are fertilized by Insects. Am. J. Sci., ILI, x111, 391-395. Botanical Notices. O. Beccari, Organogeny of the Female Flower of Gnetum Gnemon L.; C. Martius, Paleontological Origin of trees and shrubs of South of France which are sensitive to Frost in cold winters. Am. J. Set. I, x1, 469-471. Botanical Notices. W.G. Farlow, C. L. Anderson, D, C. Eaton, Algwe Exsiccate Americ Borealis, fasc. 1; Am. J. Sci., III, x1v, 72. Botanical Notices. A. Cogniaux on Botanical Nomenclature; G. C. W. Bohn- ensieg, Repertorium Annuum Literature Botanic periodic, Am, J. Sci,, ILI, xiv, 158-161. 814 _ BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Botanical Notices. W. G. Farlow, Notes on Common plant diseases caused by Fungi; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 70; J. Macoun, Botany of British Columbia and Northern Rocky Mountains; 8S. Kurz, Sketch of the Vegetation of the Nicobar Islands, etc.; A Lavallée, Arboretum Segrezianum; J. G. Baker, Systema Ividacéarum. Am. J. Sci., III. xrv, 426-429, Botanical Notices. I. Sprague and G. L. Goodale, The Wild Flowers of America, part 11; Cleistogamy in Impatiens; O. R. Willis, Catalogue of Plants of New Jersey ; Sir J. D. Hooker’s voyage to America. Am. J. Sci., III, x1v, 497-499 1378. Cook’s Lectures on Biology. New Englander, xxxvu, 100-113. Botanical Notices. C. Darwin, The Different Forms of Flowers on Plants of the same Species; D. C. Eaton, Ferns of North America; G. E. Dayenport, Notes on Botrychium simplex. Am.J. Sci., II, xv, 67-73. Notice of C. S. Sargent’s paper on tree-planting in Twenty-fifth Report of the Mass. Board of Agriculture and Hon. B. G. Northrop’s Economic Tree-Planting. Nation, No. 665, p. 215. Phytogamy. Review of Darwin’s Different Forms of Flowers on Plants of the same Species, Various Contrivances by which Orchids are fertilized, Effects of Cross and Self-Fertilization in the Vegetable Kingdom. Nation, No. 667, pp. 246-248. Botanical Notices. F. Parkman, The Hybridization of Lilies; Thuret’s Garden: Englemann’s Papers in Trans. Acad. Sci., St. Louis, vol. 11; Wibbe on new range for two Orchids. Am. J. Sci., II], xv, 151-153. Botanical Notices. Lesquereux, Contributions to the Fossil Flora of the Western Territories. Am. J. Sci., IlI, xv, 219. Botanical Notices. Supplementary Note to the Review of Darwin’s Forms of Flowers; J. Smith, Historia Filicum; D. C. Eaton, Ferns of North America, part 2 W. G. Farlow, List of Fungi found near Boston; Journ. Linn. Soc.; Crépin, Guide ; du Botaniste in Belgique; I. J. Isaman, Insect-fertilization in Trichostema. Am. J. Sci., III, xv, 221-225. Botanical Notices. D.C. Eaton, Ferns of North America, parts 4 and 5; Baillon, Dictionnaire de Botanique, fase. 8; A. E. Caracas, Vargas consideratio como Botanico, ete. Am. J. Sci., III, xv, 483-484. This Life and the Future. [Review of Dean Church’s Human Life and its Condi- tions.] Independent, June 20th, p. 10. Botanical Notices. Oliver, Flora of Tropical Africa, vol. 111; D. C. Eaton, Ferns of North America, part 3; L. Lesquereux, Report on Fossil Plants of Gravels of Sierra Nevada; E. M. Holmes, Catalogue of Museum of Pharmaceutical Soc., Great Britain ; Thuret’s Garden at Antibes. Am. J. Sci., III, xvi, 318-320. Botanical Notices. A. Gray, Synoptical Flora of N. A.; Sereno Watson, Biblio- graphical Index to North American Botany; M. T. Masters, On the Morphology of Primulacex; G. Henslow, On the Origin of Floral stivations; M. M. Hartog, Floral Structures and Affinities of Sapotacex ; Curtis, North American Plants; Cata- logue of Plants within thirty miles of Yale College. Am. J. Sei., III, xv, 400-402, 404. Botanical Notices. T. Meehan, Native Flowers and Ferns of the U. 8.; S. O. Lindberg, Monographia Metzgerie and Bryineew Acrocarpe; A. Fendler, Ferns of Trinidad; Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 73. Am. J. Sci., Xvi, 72-75. Botanical Notices. J. Williamson, Ferns of Kentucky; J. Robinson, Ferns in their homes and ours; J. Macoun, Catalogue of Plants of Canada; Meehan, Native Flowers and Ferns of the U.S. Am. J. Sei., III, xvi, 155-157. Botanical Notices. Bentham and von Mueller, Flora Australiensis, vol. vir: J. G. Baker, Flora of Mauritius and the Seychelles; Kurz, Forest Flora of British Burma; J. Miers, The Apocynacex of South America; J. D. Hooker, Students’ Flora of the British Islands; Botany of Kergnelen Ids.; D. C. Eaton, Ferns of North America, parts6 and 7. Am. J. Sci., LI, xvi, 237-240. > ASA GRAY. . 815 Botanical Notices. A. et C. DeCandolle, Monographi# Phanerogamarum Prodromi nune continuatio, nunc revisio; J. D. Hooker, Flora of British India, part 5; A. W. Kichler, Flower-diagrams; G. Bohnensieg et W. Burck, Repertorium Annuum Litera-. ture Periodic, tome iv; J. G. Baker, Synopsis of Genus Aquilegia. Am. J. Sci., III, XVI, 325-327. Botanical Notices. Todaro, Relazione sulla Cultura dei Cotoni in Italia, sequita da una Monographia del Genere Gossypium; T., Meehan, Native Flowers and Ferns of U.S. Am. J. Sci., ITI, xv1, 403-404. Botanical Notices. A.S. Wilson, Sugar in Nectar of Flowers; D. C. Eaton, Ferns of N. A., parts 8 and 9; Note on a Monstrous Sarracenia purpurea. Am. J. Sci., III, XVI, 485, 487, 48d. Epping Forest and how best to deal with it, by A. R. Wallace in Fortnightly Re- view. Nation, No. 704, p. 400. Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 75-78 ; Heer, Flora Fossilis Arctica, tome v; A. R. Wallace, Epping Forest. Am. J. Sci., III, xvi, 69-71. Hooker and Ball’s Tour in Maroeco. [Review of Hooker and Ball’s Journal of a Tour in Marocco and the Great Atlas.] Nation, No. 718, pp. 232-233. Botanical Notices. W. T. Thistleton-Dyer, On Plant-Distribution as a field for Geographical research ; C. I’. Nyman, Conspectus Flor Europwee. Am. J. Sci., UI, Xvi, 176-177. Notices of A. Wood’s and J. D. Steele’s Fourteen Weeks in Botany, and Arabella B. Buckley’s Fairy-Land of Science. Nation, No. 723, p. 324. Botanical Notices. Strasburger. Ueber Polyembryonie: Bentham, Notes on Euphorpiacee ; J. D. Hooker, Journal of a Tour in Marocco and the Great Atlas ; Eaton’s Ferns of North America, parts 12 and 13; Farlow, Anderson and Eaton, Alge Amer. Bor. Exsiccate, fasc, 3; Am. J. Sci., III, xvu, 334-339. Botanical Notices. Guides for Science-Teaching, Goodale and Hyatt ; L. Errera on the Function of the Sterile Filament in Pentstemon ; Revue Mycologique, No. 1; Meehan’s Native Flowers and Ferns of the United States; F. B. Hine, Observations upon Saprolegniex; V. Rattan, Popular California Flora. Am. J. Sci., IIL, xvu, 410-413. Botanical Notices. L. Errera on Number of digestive glands in Dionwa; T. F. Allen, Characex American ; O. Beccari, Malesia; G. Henslow, On the Self-fertiliza- tion of Plants [ Bot. Gazette, iv, 182-187]. Am. J. Sci., III, xvi, 488-494. Concerning a Few Common Plants. [Review of Prof. Goodale’s Primer with the above title.] American Agriculturist, July, p. 256. Botanical Notices. J.T. Rothrock, Botany in vol. v1 of Report of U. S. Geogr. Survey west of 100th meridian ; Flora of British India, part v1; Reichenbach, Refu- gium Botanicum, vol. 11, fase. 1; Trans. and Proc. of Botanical Soc. of Edinburg, x1; Botanical Papers in Journ. Linn. Soe. Bot., xvir; F. Darwin, on Nutrition of Drosera; Balfour on the Genus Pandanus; E. Lockwood on the Mahwa Tree, ete. ; G. Henslow, Floral dissections illustrating typical Genera of British Natural Orders. Am. J. Sei., II, xvi, 154-158. Botanical Notices. J. Ball, on the Origin of the Flora of the European Alps; von Mueller, Native Plants of Victoria, parti. Am. J. Sci., III, xvii, 236-238. Notice of S r Jobn Lubbock Scientific Lectures. Nation, No. 746, p. 262. Instinct and Reason, by F. C. Clark. Am. Nat., x1, 317-318. Plant Archeology (Notice of Saporta’s ‘‘Le Monde des Plants avant Apparition de /Homme” ). Nation, 1879, 195-196, 212-213. ‘ Botanical Notices. L. Celakovsky, the Gymnosnermy of Conifers, by Geo. Engel- mann and A. Gray [Bot. Gazette, tv, 222-224]; Contributions to American Botany, Ix, by S. Watson; Musci Fendlerini Venezuelenses; Baillon, Dictionnaire de Botan- ique, vol. 11, part 1; Trans, Linn. Soc, Lond., vol. 1; Nouveile Archives du Museum, 816 . BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. II, vol. 1; F, Delpino, Revista Botanica dell’Anno, 1878. Am. J. Sci., IIL, xvmu, 3li-317. Botanical Notices. Kunkel on Electrical Currents in Plants; C. J. Maximowiez, Adnotationes de Spirwaceis ;. Boissier, Flora Orientalis, vol. 1v. Am. J. Sci., III, XvilI, 414-116. Botanical Notices. Von Mueller, Eucalyptographia; A. et C. DeCandolle, Mono- graphie Phanerogamarum Prodromi, etc.; C. DeCandolle, Anatomie Comparée des Feuilles chez quelques Familles de Dicotylédones; Bentham and Hooker’s Genera Plantarum, Vol. m1, part1l. Am. J. Sci., III, xvii, 485-488. Instinct and Reason, by F. C. Clark. Am. Nat., x1, 317-318. 1880. Brazil, The Amazons and the Coast. By H. H. Smith. Nation, No. 766, pp. 181-182. Aroideew Maximilianw. Harv. Coll. Library Bulletin, II, 47. Notice of T. W. O’Neill’s Refutation of Darwinism, and the Converse Theory of Development. Nation, No. 766, p. 182. Review of G. F. Wright’s Logie of the Christian Evidences. Nation, No. 771, p. 273. Botanical Notices. Coulter’s Botanical Gazette. Am. J. Sci., III, xix, 157-158. Botanical Notices. C. De Candolle and R. Pictet, Seeds endure extreme Cold; Heer, The Genus Gingko; W. H. Gilbrest, Floral Development of Helianthus annuus and Morphology of Vegetable Tissues; J. Peyritsch, Aroidew Maximiliane; R. Schom- burgk, Naturalized Weeds and other Plants of South America; A. T. Drummond, Canadian Timber-trees; E. L. Sturtevant, Indian Corn. Am. J. Sci., III, xrx, 328- 301. Botanical Notices. Bentham and Hooker, Genera Plantarum, Vol. 1; R. C. A. Prior, Popular Names of British Plants. Am. J. Sci., II], x1x, 418~421. Botanical Notices. G. Englemann, Revision of the Genus Pinus; O. Kuntze, Methodik der Speciesbeschreibung, und Rubus. Am. J. Sci., III, x1x, 491-493. Notice of D. C. Eaton’s Ferns of North America. Literary World, x1, 296. Botanical Notices. De Candolle’s Phytography; D. C. Eaton, Ferns of North America, completion ; F. de Mueller, Index perfectus ad Caroli Linnzei Species Plan- tarum, etc.; A. Rau and A. B. Hervey, Catalogue of North American Musci ; Botani- cal Explorations of the little known West India Islands. Am. J. Sci., III, xx, 150- 159. Botanical Notice. De Candolle’s Phytography. Am. J. Sei., ILI, xx, 241-250. Botanical Notices. Thomas Meehan, the Native Flowers and Ferns of the United States; C. E. Bessey, Botany for High Schools and Colleges; O. Enenth, Manual of Swedish Pomology; Bidrag till Europas Pomona vid des Nordgriius. Am. J. Sci., III, xx, 336-338. SUSIS IL. The Power of Movement in Plants. By Charles Darwin, assisted by Francis Dar- win. Nation, No. 810, pp. 17-18. The British Moss Flora. By R. Braithwaite. Bot..Gaz., v1, 185. Botanical Notices. C. Darwin and F. Darwin, Power of Movement in Plants. Am. J. Sci., III, xx1, 245-249. Botanical Notices. De Candolle, Monographie Phzenogamarum, Vol. m1; A. Lavallée, Arboretum Segrezianum; R. Braithwaite, The British Moss-Flora. Am. J. Sei., Ili, x x11, 235-238. Botanical Notices. John Earle, English Plant Names from the Tenth to the Fifteenth Century; E. Warming, Familien Podostemacex. Am. J. Sci., III, xxi, 491-492. 18s2. Botanical Notices. J. Veitch & Sons, A Manual of the Conifere; G. C. W. Bohnenzieg, Repertorium Annuum, ete.; A. W. Kichler, Jahrbuch des Kéniglichen ASA GRAY. 817 Botanischen Gartens zu Berlin; Engler’s Botanische Jahrbiicher; Hooker’s [cones Plantarum, Vol. Iv, part 1. Am. J. Sci., III, xxi, 69-71. The Creed of Science. The Independent, Feb. 2, pp. 9-11. (Notice of Graham’s “Creed of Science” and Cellariens’s ‘‘ New Analogy.’) Lyell’s Life and Letters. The Literary World, xu, 53-54. Botanical Notices. Zool. Soc. of France, Natural History Nomenclature; Max- imowiez, de Coriaria, Ilice et Monochasma, etc. ; Torsion of Leaf in Compass-plant. Am. J. Scei., III, xxu1, 157-160. Botanical Notices. Bentham, Notes on Gramine ; Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 83, 84; C. J. Maximowicz, Diagnoses Plantarum novarum Asiaticarum, tv; F. Darwin, Re- lation of leaves to direction of light [Bot. Gaz., vu, 45-47]; W. W. Bailey, Botani- cal Collector’s Handbook; Greenland Flora, edited by J. Lange. Am. J. Sci., ILI, XXIII, 244-247. Botanical Notices. W. Turner, The Names of Herbes. Am. J. Sci., III, xx11, 326. Botanical Notices. H. Baillon, Monographie des Composées ; L. F. Ward, Guide to the Flora of Washington and vicinity ; Vilmorin-Andrieux, Les Meilleurs Blés, etc.; H. Devries, The Office of Resinous Matters in Plants; V. Rattan, Popular California Flora, 3ded. Am. J. Sci., III, xx, 492-495. Botanical Notices. T. F. Allen, Characee Americane Exsiccats distributew; A. Engler, Versuch einer Entwicklungsgeschichte der Pflanzenwelt insbesondere der Florengebiete seit der Tertiiirperiode; G. Englemann, The Genus Isoétes in North America; A. Clavaud, Flore de la Gironde. Am. J. Sci., III, xxiv, 72-73. Botanical Notices. S. O. Lindberg, European and North American Peat-mosses. Am. J. Sei., III, xxiv, 156-157. Botanical Notices. G. Briosi, Sopra un Organo finora non avertito di aleuni Em- brioni Vegetali ; Van Tieghem and G. Bonnier, Latent Vitality of Seeds; S. Watson, Contributions to American Botany, X; A. Gray, Contributions to North American Botany, Proc. Am. Acad., xvi1; Journ. Linn. Soc., Nos. 120, 121. Am. J. Sei., LII, XXIV, 296-299. Botanical Notices. Trees and Tree-Culture, papers by H. W. S. Cleveland and R. Ridgway on Trees, etc.; Am. Journal of Forestry; E. Warming, Familien Podoste- maces. Am. J. Sci., III, xx1v, 400, 401. A Dictionary of the Popular Names of Plants which furnish the Wants of Man. By John Smith. Literary World, x11, 380. Botanical Notices. J. Smith, Dictionary of Popular Namesof Plants. Am. J. Sci., III, xxiv, 476-477. 1883. Botanical Notices. Brendel, Flora Peoriana. Am. J. Sci., III, xxv, 81, 82. Botanical Notices. C. F. Nyman, Conspectus Flore Europ ; Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 86, 47, 88; J. D. Hooker and C. B. Clarke, Flora of British India, part 9. Am. J. Sci., III, xxv, 162, 163. Botanical Notices. Marquis de Saporta, Apropos des Algues Fossiles; Vilmorin, Andrieux & Cie, Les Plantes Potagéres ; Grant Allen, the Colors of Flowers. Am. J. Sci., III, xxv, 235-237. Review of De Candolle’s Origin of Cultivated Plants; with annotations upon cer- tain American species. By Asa Gray and J. Hammond Trumbull, Am. J. Sci., III, XXV, 241-255 ; 370-379; xxv1, 128-138. Botanical Notices. A Lavallée, Arboretum Segrezianum, fase. 5,6. Am. J. Sei., MT eexexve S12. Botanical Notices. A. Engler, Essay on Development of the Vegetable Kingdom ; A. G. Nathorst, Bidrag till Japans Fossila Flora. Am. J. Sci., III, xxv, 394-397. Botanical Notices. Schréter, Morphology of the Andrecium of Malvacew; Chap- man, Flora of the Southern United States; Bentham and Hooker, Genera Plantarum, Vol. 1, part 2; A. et C. De Candolle, Monographix Phanerogamarum, Vol, ty, Am, J. Sci., III, xxv, 480-481. H. Mis, 142——52 818 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Macloskie’s Elementary Botany. Science, 1, 13-14. Review of Bentham and Hooker’s Genera Plantarum. Nation, No. 942, pp. 62, 63. A revision of the genus Fraxinus, by Th. Wenzig. Bot. Gazette, vit, 264-265. Botanical Notices. E. Hiickel, Monographia Festucarum Europearum; E. Cosson et G. de Saint Pierre, Atlas de la Flora des Environs de Paris; E. Cosson, Compen- dium Flore Atlantice, and Illustrationes Florz Atlantic, fasc. 1; F. von Miiller, Systematic Census of Australian Plants. Am. J. Sei., III, xxvi, 77-79. Bentham & Hooker, Genera Plantarum. Nation, July 19, 1883. [Am. J. Sci., III, XXVI, 245-247, ] Botanical Notices. Itinera Principum §S. Coburgi; Notice Biographique sur M. Joseph Decaisne, par Edouard Bornet. Am. J. Sci., Ill, xxvi, 247, 248. Botanical Notices. G. Vasey, The Grasses of the United States; S. Watson, Con- tributions to American Botany, XI; H. Miiller, The Fertilization of Flowers, Transl. by D. W. Thompson. Am. J. Sci., III, xxvi, 322-325. Some Points in Botanical Nomenclature ; a Review of ‘‘ Nouvelles Remarques sur la Nomenclature Botanique, par M. Alph. de Candolle.” Am. J. Sei., xxvi, 417-437. Botanical Notices. O. Kunze, Phytogeogenesis; J. Jackson, Catalogue of Phi- nogamous and Vascular Cryptogamous Plants of Worcester Co., Mass. Am. J. Sci., III, xxvi, 426-488, 1ss4. The Borderland of Science and Faith. [Review of Goodwin’s Walks in the regions of science and faith and Drummond’s Natural Law in the spiritual world. Science, III, 131-133. Key to North American Birds, Elliott Coues. Literary World, xv, 216. Flowers and their Pedigrees. By Grant Allen. Nation, No. 979, p. 304. Notice of Brook’s ‘‘The Law of Heredity.” Andover Review, I, 208-214. Review of Dean Church’s Francis Bacon. Nation, No. 982, p. 368-370. Notice of Sophie Herrick’s Wonders of Plant-Life under the Microscope. Nation, No. 982, p. 370. W. A. Kellerman, Elements of Botany and Plant Analysis. Nation, No. 991, p. 558. Notice of N. D’Anvers’ Science Ladders and John Babcock’s Vignettes from Invis- ible Life. Literary World, xv, 167. Botanical Notices. C. J. F. Bunbury, Botanical Fragments; Bush & Son, Cata- logue of American Grape-Vines ; W. K. Brooks, The Law of Heredity. Am. J. Sci., III, xxvui, 155-157. Botanical Notices. O. Beccari, Malesia, part 4; T. Caruel, Thoughts upon Botan- ical Taxonomy. Am. J. Sci., III, xxvu, 241-242. Botanical Notices. Carpenter’s Tendency in Variation. Am. J. Sci., III, xxv, 326-328. Botanical Notices. Bull. California Acad. Sci., No. 1, Botanical Papers by A. Gray on Veatchia Cedrocensis; Behr and Kellogg on Anemone Grayi; Kellogg on Astra- galus insularis and Phacelia ixodes., etc., etc. ; N. Shepard, Darwinism stated by Darwin himself; I. Sprague and G. L. Goodale, Wild Flowers of America; D. F. Day, of Plants near Buffalo. Catalogue Am. J. Sci., II, xxvu, 413-415. Botanical Notices. A. Lavallée, Clematides Megalanthes, Les Clématites a Grand Fleurs ; Porto Rico plants; V. B. Wittrock, Erythrew Exsiccate. Am. J. Sci., II, XXVII, 494-496. Notice of Sir John Lubbock’s Chapters in Popular Natural History and J. Straub’s Consolations of Science. Literary World, xv, 217-218. Biogen, A Speculation on the Origin and Nature of Life. By Prof. Elliott Cones. Nation, No. 992, p. 20. Botanical Notices. C. B. Clarke, E. Indian Species of Cyperus; C. C. Parry, Re- vision of the genus Chorizanthe. Am. J. Sci., Il], xxviul, 75-76. Notices of Lesquereux and James, Manual of the Mosses of North America, and Baldwin’s Orchids of New England, Nation, No. 999, pp. L63-164. ASA GRAY. $19 Botanical Notices. L. Lesquereux and tT. P. James, Manual of the Mosses of North America; H. H. Behr, Synopsis of the Genera of Vascular Plants near San Francisco ; Boissier’s Flora Orientalis, Vol. v, part 2; J. Ball, Contributions to the Flora of North Patagonia. Am. J. Sci., II], xxv, 155-158. Botanical Notices. [Gray’s Synoptical Flora of North America, part 2]; H. Bald- win, The Orchids of New England; J. D. Hooker, Students’ Flora of the British Islands. Am. J. Sci., ITI, xxvii, 237-238. Notice of John Fiske’s Destiny of Man viewed in the light of his Origin. Nation, No. 1011, p. 426. Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fase. 93; F. Parlatore, Flora Italiana, Vol. vi, part 1; G. Vasey, Agricultural Grasses of the U. 8.; L. M. Underwood, Cata- logue of North American Hepatic. Am. J. Sci., III, xxvu, 402-404. Botanical Notices. W. Upham, Catalogue of the Flora of Minnesota; G. C. W. Bohnensieg, Repertorium Annuum, ete.; J.U. Lloyd and C. G. Lloyd, Drugs and Med- icines of North America. Am. J. Sei., III, xxvui, 472-474. 1885. Botanical Notices. C.S. Sargent, Report on the Forests of North America; Ma- coun’s Catalogue of Canadian Plants, part 2, Gamopetale; A. De Candolle, Histoire des Sciences et des Savants depuis deux Siecles, etc.; A. W. Kichler. Jahrbuch der Koniglichen botanischen Gartens zu Berlin, u1; A.de Candolle, Origin of Cultivated Plants. Am. J. Sci., II], xxix, 264-267. Botanical Notices. C. 8. Sargent, Woods of the United States: F. von Miiller, Eucalyptographia; Marquis de Saporta, Organismes Problématiques des Anciennes Mers; E. Koehne, Lythracex of the U. 8.; O. Kuntze, Monographie der Gattung Clematis; A. Gravis, Recherches Anatomiques sur les Organes Vegetatifs de l’Urtica dioica; J. Fowler, List of Plants of New Brunswick; H. N. Patterson, Check-list of N. American Gamopetale ; C. E. Cummings, Check-list of N. American Mosses and Hepatice; J. H. Oyster, Catalogue of Phenogams and Vascular Cryptogams of N. America. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx, 82-85. Notices of Bower and Vines’ Course of Instruction in Botany, Chapters on Plant Life, Baileys Talk’s Afield, and Palmer’s Charts of Mushrooms of America. Nation, No. 1050, pp. 138-139. Botanical Notices. A. Pailleux et D. Bois, Le Potager d’un Curieux; 8. Watson, Contributions to American Botany, xu, 1n Proc. Am. Acad., xx; L. H. Bailey, jr., Talks Afield about Plants. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx, 164-167. Botanical Notices. Levier, Plantes &4 Fourmis; Lloyd’s Drugs and Medicines of North America; Trans. and Proce. New Zealand Inst., xvi11; N. L. Britton, Revision of N. A. Species of the genus Scleria; P. Zipperer, Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Sarra- ceniaceen. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx, 245-247. Insular Floras. [A Review of Vol. 1, Botany, of the Challenger Reports.] Science, VI, 297-298. Botanical Notices. J.W. Behrens, The Microscope in Botany, translated by A. B. Hervey and R. H. Ward; Bull. California Acad. Sci., No. 3, Botanical Papers, by Harkness, Mrs. Curran, E. L. Greene, ete.; H. Trimen, Catalogue of Flowering Plants and Ferns. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx, 319-322. Botanical Notices. Botany of the Challenger Expedition, Vol. 1. Am. J. Sei., III, xxx, 40/-403. Botanical Notices. Beccari, Malesia; Cosson, Illustrationes Flore Atlantic ; G. L. Goodale, Physiological Botany; K. G. Limpricht, Rabenhorst’s Kryptogamen- Flora von Deutschland. Am. J, Sci., III, xxx, 487-489. 1886. Botanical Notices. J. M. Coulter, Manual of the Botany of the Roeky Monntain Region; Sir Joseph Hooker and the Royal Gardens at Kew. Am. J. Sci., ILf, xxx1, 76-78, 820 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. Botanical Notices. Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 95; T. F. Wood, Sketch of the Botani- cal Work of the Rev. Moses A. Curtis. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx, 158-159. A. De Candolle on the Production by selection of a race of Deaf-Mutes in the United States. Nation, No. 1081, pp. 239-240. ; Botanical Notices. J. Ball, Contributions to the Flora of the Peruvian Andes; J. C. Lecoyer, Monographie du Genre Thalictrum ; Nathorst, Nomenclature for Fossil Leaves, etc.: Wittrock, Erythee Exsiccate, fase. 2; F. Buchenau, Synopsis of European Juncacere; F. Pax, on genus Acer; R. Spruce, Hepatic Amazonice et Andinex. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx1, 231-238. Sylvan Winter. By Francis George Heath. Nation, No. 1085, p. 326. Botanical Notices. J. B. Lloyd, Drugs and Medicines of North America, Vol. 1; H. de Vries, Leerbek der Planten-physiologie; Baillon’s Dictionnaire de Botanique, fasc. 19; Baillon’s Historie des Plantes, Vol. vit; J. Lamie, Plants Naturalized in the Southwest of France. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx1, 313-316. Botanical Notices. Arthur, Barnes, and Coulter, Handbook of Plant Dissection ; Maximowicz, Diagnosis Plantarum Novarum Asiaticarum, fasc. 6; G. Lagerheim, American Desmidiew. Am. J. Sci., III, Xxx1, 477-479. Botanical Notices. Saint Lager, Histoire des Herbiers; Journ. Linn. Soe., Vol. XXII, containing papers by Ball, Bolus, Henslow, F. Darwin, Ridley, Clark, Masters ; XXIII, papers by Forbes and Hemsley; Strashurger on Heterogeneous Grafting. Am. ApgisKtins 1006 70:60:66 78 ell ke Botanical Notices. H. Bolus, Sketch of the Flora of South Africa; W.B. Hemsley, Catalogue of North’s Paintings of Plants; Guide to the Museums of Economic Botany, Kew; T. Caruel, Filippo Parlatore, Flora Italiana, Vol. v1, part 3; Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 96; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, Vols. xvi and xvu. Am. J. Sci., II, Xxx11, 164-166. Botanical Notices. Lloyd’s Drugs and Medicines of North America; Cypripedium arietinum in China; Index to the Botanical Gazette; W. K. Dudley, the Cayuga Flora, part 1; Catalogue of Plants in Herbarium of College of Science, Tokio. Am. J. Sci., IIT, xxx, 244-245. Florida Fruits, and How to Raise Them. By Helen Harcourt. Nation, No. 1110, p. 297. Botanical Notices. Hooker’s Flora of British India, part 13; Vilmorin, Notice Biographique sur Alphonse Lavalée. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx11, 325-326. Botanical Notices. Sir John Lubbock, Flowers, Fruits, and Leaves; S. H. Vines, Lectures on the Physiology of Plants; L. H. Bailey, Synopsis of North American Carices. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx, 411-412. Botanical Notices. Lamarck’s Herbarium; Kamel’s Drawings of Manilla Plants; Saint Lager on Botanical Nomenclature ; Sir John Lubbock, Phytobiological Observa- tions; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, Vol. XVI, part 2. Am. J. Sei., II, xxx, 485. 1887. Botanical Notices. Bulletin of the Congress of Botany and Horticulture at St. Petersburg, containing Notes on the Genus Lilium, by H. T. Elwes; Lynch on Culti- vating Aquatic Plants; Baillon on Fertilization of Ovules; Lynch on Tubers of Thla- diantha dubia; Wilkins on Peach-stones; Maw’s Monograph of the genus Crocus ; Jahrbuch des Kénigl. bot. Gartens zu Berlin, bd. 1v; J. C. Arthur, History and Biol- ogy of the Pear-blight; Acta Horti Petropolitani, Tom. 1x, fase. 2; Sir Joseph Hook- er’s Primer of Botany; etc., ete. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx, 80-83. Botanical Notices. N. Loew, Beobachtungen iiber den Blumenbesuch von Insecten und Frielandpflanzen des Botanischen Gartens zu Berlin; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, Vols. XVI and XVII; Journ. Roy. Hort. Soe., vir, No. 2; Macoun’s Catalogue of Canadian Plants, part 3, Apetale. Am. .J. Sci., III, xxx, 162-164. Botanical Notices. Baillon’s Dictionnare de Botanique, fase. 21; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, Vol. xvu, part 3; H. N. Patterson, Check-list of North American Plants ; ASA GRAY. 821 Delpino, Prodromo @’ una Monografia delle Piante Formicarie; Silphium albiflorum in Bot. Magazine; A. De Candolle on Origin of Cultivated Species of Vicia, Triticum, ete. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx, 244-245. Botanical Notices. Warming, Entomophilus Flowers in Aretic Regions; Flora Brasiliensis, fasc. 98, 99; Hooker’s Icones Plantarum, Vol. v1, part 3; Bentham’s Handbook of the British Flora, fifth ed.; V. Rattan, Key to West Coast Botany ; Wood and McCarthy, Wilmington Flora; Cal. State Board of Forestry, First Report; Dr. Artbur on Pear Blight, ete.; Sympetaleia and Loasella; Index to Plant Names. Am. J. Sei., II, xxxiu1, 318-321. Botanical Notices. Penhallow on Tendril Movements in Cucurbita; A Redwood Reserve; J. Ball, Notes of a Naturalist in South America; E. L. Greene, Pittonia, a Series of Botanical Papers, Vol. 1, part 1; A. Gattinger, The Tennessee Flora; Bull. de la Soe. Bot. de France, Vol. xxx111; Gray, Botanical Contributions, corrections ; K. Goebel, Outlines of Classification and Special Morphology of Plants, translated by Ki. F. Garnsey, revised by I. B. Balfour. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx, 425-428. Notice of Sachs’ Lectures on the Physiology of Plants. Nation, No. 1161, p. 259. Notice of Garnsey’s Translation of De Bary’s Comparative Morphology and Biology of the Fungi, Mycetozoa, and Bacteria. Nation, No. 1160, p. 239. Darwin’s Life and Letters. [Review of Francis Darwin’s Life and Letters of Charles Darwin.] Nation, No. 1168, pp. 399-402; No. 1169, pp. 420-421. Botanical Notices. J. E. Planchon, Monographixw Phanerogamarum Prodromi, Vol. V, part 2; Report on Botanical Work in Minnesota for 1886; Bower and Vines, Prac- tical Instruction in Botany; W. J. Beal, Grasses of N. A.; Radlkofer, Serjania Sapin- dacearum Genus monographice descriptum; Braithwaite’s British Moss Flora; E. L. Greene, Pittonia; A. B. Langlois, Catalogue des Plantes de la Basse Louisiana; D. H. Campbell, Development of the Ostrich Fern. Am. J. Sci., II], xxx1v, 490-494. IIJ.—BioGRAPHICAL SKETCHES, OBITUARIES, NECROLOGICAL NOTICES, ETC. 184.2, Botanical Necrology, etc. Notices of the deaths of Lambert, Guillemin, Vogel, Amos Eaton, etc. Am, J. Sci., XLI, 214-216. 1843. Notice of the Life and Labors of De Candolle, extracted [and translated] from the address delivered before the Royal Botanical Society of Ratisvbon at its meeting on the 28th of November, 1841, by the President, Professor von Martius. Am. J. Sci., XLIV, 217-239. 1852. Botanical Necrology for 1849~50~51. Link, Kunth, Hoffmansegge, Hornschuch, Bernhardi, Koch, Sturm, Schauer, Kunze, Ledebour, Wahlenberg, B. Delessert. Am. J. Sei., II, x11, 44, 45, 48. 1853. Botanical Necrology for 1852~53. A. de Jussieu, M. A. Richard, Presl. Am. J. Sci., II, xvi, 426-427. Obituary Notices of Dr. Wallich and Professor Reinwardt. Am. J. Sei., I, xvi, 133. Botanical Necrology for 1854. Fischer, Moricand, P. B. Webb, King of Saxony. Am. J. Sci., II, xviii, 429, j 822 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. 1855. Botanical Necrology. Winterbottom, Stocks, Bischoff. Am. J. Sei., II, xrx, 129. Botanical Necrology for 185455. Dr. Molkenboer and C, A. Meyer, Am. J. Sci., II, xx, 135. 1856. Obituary Notice of Francois André Michaux, Am, J. Sei., I, xxu, 137-138. 1857. Botanical Necrology for 1856. Wikstrém, von Steudel, Don, Bojer, Dozy, Leib- mann, Dunal. Am. J. Sci., Il, xxi, 279. 185 00) Botanical Necrology for 1857. C.G.de Buzareingues, A. N. Desvaux, E. Desvaux, F. W. Wallroth, Targioni-Tozetti, W. G. Tilesius, L. W. Dillwyn, H. D. A. Ficinus, M. Graves, Madame de Jessieu, Mrs. Griffiths, J. F. Royle. Am. J. Sci., I, xxv, 293-294. Obituary of Robert Brown. [In part from the Atheneum of June, 1858.] Am. J. Sci., II, xxvi, 279-283. 1859. Botanical Necrology for 1858. 5. Biasoletto, A. Bonpland, R. Brown, G. A. Eisengrein, H. Galeotti, W. T. Gumbell, Mrs. Loudon, E. H. F. Meyer, C. F. A. Morren, J. B. Mougeot, C. G. Nees von Esenbeck, D. Townsend, D. Turner, C. Zeyher. Am. J. Sci., II, xxvu, 442-443. Obituary Notice of Nuttall and Dr. Horsfield. Am. J. Sci., HW, xxviu, 444. 1860. Botanical Necrology for 1859. C. A. Agardh, A. Henfrey, T. Horsfield, A. L, 8. Le- june, T. Nuttall. Am. J. Sci., II, xxrx, 441-442. 1862. Botanical Necrology for 1861. F. Deppe, A. E. Fiirnrobr, H. von Donnersmarck, J. S. Henslow, Prince Salm-Dyck, M. Tenore, J. M. C. Marquis de Tristan, G. W. F. Wenderoth, R. B. Van den Bosch, W. H. DeVriese, C. L. Blume, E. James. Am. J. Sci., II, xx xu, 427-4287 1863. Botanical Nereology, 1862. Blytt, Borrer, Mackay, von Kieser, Steetz, Tweedie, Benj. D. Greene, Asahel Clapp, M. C. Leavenworth, C. W. Short. Am. J. Sci., IL, XXXV, 449-451. 1864. Botanical Necrology for 1863. Martens, von Steven, Moquin-Tandon, Francis Boott, Jacques Gay. Am. J. Sci., II, XxxviI, 288-292. 1866. Sir William Jackson Hooker. Am. J. Sci., II., xx1, 1-10. Botanical Necrology for 1864 and 1865. Lessing, Turezaninow, Criiger, Junghuhn, Treviranus, Schacht, Scheele, Sturm, Falconer, Schomburgk, Schott, Paxton, Rich- ardson, Cuming, Bridges, Hooker, Lindley, Riddell, Montague. Am. J. Sci., I, XxVI, 263-268. Botanical Necrology. William Henry Harvey, Robert Kaye Greville. Am. J. Sci., II, XL, 273-277. . ASA GRAY. 823 LSsG6s. Botanical Necrology for 1867. H. P. Sartwell, Chester Dewey, Mettenius, von Schlechtendal, Kotschy, Gasparrini, Berg, Mandon, C. H. Schultz, Danbeny. Am. J. Sci.. II, XLtv, 121-124, 272-273. : Obituary Notice of N. B. Ward and G. A. W. ane Am. J. Sci., Il, xivI, 273. 1869. Botanical Necrology for 1868. G. A. Walker-Arnott, Nathaniel B. Ward. Edward Poeppig, Dr. Schnitzlein, Frangois Delessert, Horace Mann. Am. J. Sci., I], xtvu, 140-143. SZ @- Botanical Necrology for 1869. Antonio Bertoloni, Guiseppe Moris, J. E. Purkinje. JST Ae [Siailgy IS asd oe 4g) Obituary Notice of Prof. Francis Unger. Am. J. Sci., II, xirx, 410. LS72. Botanical Necrology, 1870-1871. Unger, Lévéille, Perottet, C. Miiller, Ruprecht, von Hugel Anderson, Miquel, Lantzius-Beninga, ‘Senate. Schultseneein Wilson, Hartweg, Rohrbach, Milde, de la Sagra, Lecoq, Reissek, Sowerby, Seqnneah. Lenor- mand. Am. J. Sei., IL, 11, 151-154, 1873. Botanical Necrology for 1872~73. M. A. Curtis, A. F. Spring, Hugo von Mohl, de Brebisson, R. Wight, Reuter, Oersted, Gris, Welwitsch. Am. J. Sci., III, v, 391-397. _ John Torrey; A Biographical Notice. Proc. Am. Acad., rx, 262-271. [Am. J. Sei., III, v, 411-421. ] ; Obituary Notice of John Torrey. Naticn, No. 403, p. 197. William S. Sullivant; A Biographical Notice. Proc. Am. Acad., 1x, 271-276, [Am. J. Sci., II, v1, 1-6.] Obituary Notice of Elias Durand. Am. J. Sei., III, vi, 316-317. Louis Agassiz. Nation, 1873, 404-405. 187-2. Botanical Necrology for 1873. John Torrey, W. 8S. Sullivant, E. Durand, J. L. Russell, H. J. Clark, I. F. Holton. Am. J. Sci., III, vir, 239-240. Notice of death of Joshua Hoopes. Am. J. Sci., II, vu, 600. Death of Prof. C. F. Meissner. Am. J. Sci., III, vu, 72. Obituary. Death of Prof. Jeffries Wyman. Am. J. Sci., III, vu, 323-324. Jeffries Wyman. Memorial Meeting of the Boston Society of Natural History, October 7, 1874. Address of Prof. Asa Gray, pp. 9-37. [Am. J. Sei., III, 1x, 81-93, 171-177.] Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. Obituary Notice of Jeffries Wyman. Nation, No. 480, p. 170. Charles Robert Darwin. Amer. Nat., vir, 475-479. 1875. Botanical Necrology for 1674. Geo. Aug. Pritzel, Rey. R. T. Lowe, Mrs. Hooker, J.T. Maggridge. Am. J. Sci., IIT, 1x, 68-69. - Obituary of Daniel Hanbury. Am. J. Sci., III, 1x, 476. Obituary of Gustav Thuret. Am. J. Sei., IL, x, 67. John Edward Gray. An Obituary Notice. Am. J. Sci., III, x, 78-80. 824 BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIRS. 1876. Botanical Necrology for 1875. I. A. Lapham, F. G. Bartling, A. Bureau, J. E. Gray, J. C. M. Grenier, D. Hanbury, R. F. Hohenhacher, Lieut. Gen. Jacobi, E. F. Nolte, Gustav Thuret, A. Brongniart. Am. J. Sci., III, x1, 326. 1877. Botanical Necrology for 1876. A. T. Brongniart, J. J. Bennett, C. G. Ehrenberg, L, Fiiekel, E. Newman, J. Carson, W. Hofmeister. Am. J. Sci., II], X11, 237, 238. Obituary Notices of Lady Smith and Joseph de Notaris. Am. J. Sci., Il], x11, 321-322. Obituary of Alexander Braun. Am. J. Sci., HI, xu, 471-472. Obituary Notice of H. A. Weddell and P. Parlatore. Am. J. Sci., III, xiv, 429. Obituary Notice of George Hadley. Am. J. Sci., III, x1v 499. 1878. Botanical Necrology for 1877. Mrs. M. E. Gray, Pleasance Smith, G. de Notaris, W. Hofmeister, A. Braun, E. Bourgeau, T. Lestibudois, H. A. Weddell, F. Parlatore, J. Darby. Am. J. Sci., III, xv, 225. Obituary Notice of Elias Magnus Fries, Am. J. Sci., II, xv, 320. Obituary Notice of Dr. Thomas Tomson. Ai. J. Sei., Ill, Xv, 484. Biographical Notices. Charles Pickering, Elias Magnus Fries. Proc. Amer. Acad., Xi, 441-454. Biographical Memoir of Joseph Henry, prepared in behalf of the Board of Regents. Smithsonian Report for 1878, pp. 143-158; Congressional Record, March 4, 1879, 3-10. Botanical Necrology for 1878. E. M. Fries, L. Pfeiffer, A. Murray, A. Bloxam, F. V. Raspail, 8. Kurz, M. Durieu, Charles Pickering, M. Seubert, T. Thomson, G. Zanardini, R. de Visiani, B. C. DuMortier, E. Borszezow, J. McNab, 8. T, Olney, J. W. Robbins, J. Bigeiow. Am. J. Sci. III, xvi, 177-180. Dr. Jacob Bigelow. Am. J. Sci. III, xv, 263-266. Obituary Notices of Reichenbach, Itzigsohn, Angstrém, Buek, Schimper, Grisebach, Koch, Moore, Bigelow, Robbins. Am. J. Sci. IlI, xvii, 158. 18so. Botanical Necrology for 1879. W.T. Feay, J. Bigelow, J. W. Robbins, H. Itzig- sohn, J. Angstrom, H. W. Buek, H. G. L. Reichenbach, H. R. A. Grisebach, T. Imm- isch, E. Spach, K. Koch, D. Moore, EK. Fenzl, J. Miers. Am. J. Sci. III, x1x, 76-78. Botanical Necrology for 1879, Additions. F. Lindheimer, C. H. Godet. Am. J. Sci. III, x1x, 158. Obituary Notice of General Munro. Am. J. Sci., III, x1x, 331-338. Botanical Necrology for 1850. John Carey, Coe F. Austin. Am. J. Sci., III, x1x, 421-423. 1iss2. Charles Darwin. Proc. Amer. Acad., xv, 449-458. [Am. J.Sci., III, xxiv, 453-463; Literary World, 1882, 145-146 (abstract). ] Biographical Notices. Thomas Potts James, John Amory Lowell, Charles Darwin, Joseph Decaisne. Proc. Amer. Acad., xvi, 405-406, 408-411, 449-459. Botanical Necrology. Thomas Potts James, Joseph Decaisne, Coe F. Austin, Wm. Philip Schimper, Nils J. Andersson, Wm. Munro, Dominique Alexander Godron, 8. B. Mead, W. Lauder Lindsay, Ernst Hampe, Alphonso Wood, Gottlieb Ludwig Raben- horst, Matthias Jacob Schleiden, Theodore Schwann. AmeJ. Sci., III, xx111, 330-333, ASA GRAY. 825 1883. Some North American Botanists. John Eatton LeConte. Bot. Gazette vit, 197-199. 18s. Botanical Necrology in part for 1880, 81, 82,83. C.F. Austin, C. C. Frost, J. Carey, S. B. Mead, A. Wood, T. P. James, E. Hall, J. S. Tommasini, Gen. Wm. Munro, W. P. Schimper, E. Hampe, N. J. Andersson, R. Fortune, L. Rabenhorst, M. J. Schleiden, M. P. Edgeworth, H. C. Watson, P. G. Lorentz, O. W. Sonder, J. Decaisne, G. H. K. Thwaites, C. Darwin, S. Cesati, O. Heer, C. F. Parker, Geo. Engelmann. Am. J. Sci., III, xxvu1, 242-244. George Bentham. Science, Iv, 352-353. Biographical Notices. George Engelmann, Oswald Heer. Proc. Amer. Acad., XIX, 516-522, 556-559; Am. J. Sci. II, xxviii, 61-69. Obituary Notice of Alphonse Lavallée. Am. J. Sci., II, xxvii, 5-76. Obituary Notice of George Bentham. Nation, No. 1005, p. 2917. 1885. Memorial of George Bentham. Am. J. Sci., III, xxrx, 103-113. Botanical Necrology for 1884. Augustus Fendler, George Engelmann, S. B. Buek- ley, J. Williamson, J. H. Balfour, H. R. Geppert, George Bentham. Am. J. Sci., III, xxrx, 169-172 : Obituary Notice of Charles Wright. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx, 247. Obituary Notice of Hon. George W. Clinton. Am. J. Sci., ITI, xxx, 322. 18s6cé. Botanical Necrology for 1885. Charles Wright, G. W. Clinton, E. Boissier, J. A. C. Roeper. Am. J. Sci., IJ, xxx, 12-22. Botanical Necrology tor 1885. Jean-Etienne Duby, L. R. and C. Tulasne. Am. J. Sci., III, xxx1, 312-315. Louis Agassiz. Andover Review, Jan., 38-44. 1887. Botanical Necrology for 1886. E. Morren, Rev. W. W. Newbould, W. Hillebrand, H. F. Hance, T. G. Orphanides, J. W. A. Wigand, E. Tuckerman. Am. J. Sci., III, XxXxI, 164-165. Obituary Notice of W. F. Tolmie. Am. J. Sci., III, xxxuir, 244-245. Obituary Notice of A. W. Eichler. Am. J. Sci., II, xxx, 427. 1sss. Botanical Necrology for the year 1887.—W. E. Tolmie; John Goldie; Albert Kel- logg; William Boott; Ezra Michener; Henry William Ravenel. Am. J. Sci., III, XXXKV, 260-263. : iy ith = A. Page Abbe, Cleveland, on recent progress in Meteorology...-...-..--- E cepeeees yoaeee 355 Accessions to the Museum for the year....-...--......--...- etoate see oe 2 52 recent, to the Museum, great extent of ...... ..............- eae 50 Accounts of Bureau of Ethnology, discussion on.......-...---- Noaseae aoe xii examined and approved by executive committee.-............---- XXxi otsexchan ges). 2o-- 1-7. == bo060 685500 64858 joRqogan SAaSeU Hes aEe pESCoS LOVIN A) Museum should be settled directly with Treasury Department.. xii Acting Secretary, Dr. G. B. Goode appointed as ...-..------ Wietefeys eae sae eels xiii, 4 Act of Congress accepting Grant relics .-.--- FOS Soo ees BESO Car Cones XXXiV appointing commission on historical manuscripts..---..---- 2 XxXxvi Regents Smithsonian Institution... xxxili, xxxv, xxvi, xli making appropriations ...-..-..----- 2 S:O:d VN pO:O:9 hpeO:4750.0:9-4'9 |, ll 9d hi to purchase General Shields’s swords for Museum ...--..---- XXxvi relative to Cincinnati Exposition ...--- ASOSCOAScHaD XXXVIi, XXxix, 59 Marietta Exposition .-...-.-..------ sa sbe= KV RSI Minin'eapolisee xp OSitlOMs se acl atere tose ore Siler eto XXXVI SMITLHSOMAnTelCe sac sel was eases seen Keser XXxxiii TOLLE Le MOfs SemMoOnvo aCHesde | CO ces.cen'= spss Ses saci ceseiaa since xli requiring Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution to make detailed reporisiofhexpenditures=- =. 2-\.22< 0-1-5525 --55 xl Adler, Dr. Cyrus, honorary assistant curator of Oriental antiquities. .....--- 57 on the progress of oriental science in America. -....---..--- 675 Alaska, ethnologic investigations in, by Ensign A. P. Niblack...---.-.-- soon 21 America, derivation of the name, by Jules Marcou ...--....--..----.------- 647 American Historical Association, a bill to incorporate the ....---.---..---- 5 47 Amerigho Vespucci, and the name America, by Jules Marcou..-----..----. -- 647 Amerriques, Amerigho Vespucci, and America, by Jules Marcou ...-....---- 647 pupal SaMiGs B., icts.0f, as Regent... --2.5..-.-- 26 sa--00 -sceuccee pane oer ke eV appointed Regent by resolution of Congress- .--- ---- eae XXXV motion to appropriate income ----.--.------ SESE A Sch Bck XV that Executive Committee prepare resolution rela- tive to death of Dr. Peter Parker.....-......--.. : Xvi Animals, collection of, for Zoological Park. .....-.--- sigma een Nee an ane ame 42 Department of living, organization of...--....---. Buse cerdaoée 4 Sa 57 Annual meeting of the Regents .---- seesae SERA SOee SSN HOOSE AoEooDa oes Soe 4 report for 1887-88, contents of ......-.-..-.------- ABER Ce R Lee abs 4 reports of the Institution -.......-- ee rare ies wes Sea o See Ce LUE Anthropology, bibliography of, for 1887 and 1888................------.---- 524 progress in, for 1887 and 1888, by O. T. Mason ..........--.-. 974 Antiquities, collection of Assyrian and Babylonian... --- Me ela clue pees ae 57 AD HONOUR EO ENOLA Wr one seem as cies: tesa id Sm alee wen Fea ase SOS SOO Sines AIC 123 ODIGCINOf 2-5: s-< =~ SSO Bese ey HO BPO SISO ae SED eso cee 124 he CCLOURY WN LOMOE Geicd vive wine eclce~ a dwecas Dawa SAPP ee te See 95 828 INDEX. Page. Appropriations pDy.© ONC LESS Eaese- ee eee eee eee ee ese XXXI11, 1V, V, V1, Xl, xli, 59 for the Gmemnat Exposition =] =se se =- eee 59 for exchangest2 .2-issnsea- Ltee se eee ee ee xxii should be disbursed and controlled by the Institution-....-. xii ATIZONASIMVES tO VtLONS NN sae ee tee eae oe eee ae ee jeisesehe 2 66 © Armory building, material stored in, and other places....--..-..---..---.-- 51 joint occupancy of, with Fish Commission .....----...-.- 13 Ant collections, semarks, in regard'to {2-2 2: a2see.-sleoee ee nar See 45 and miscellaneoussubjects considered\=-= 22-22 4 sses eee eee eee eae eoee 45 Assyrian and Babylonian antiquities, casts of.............-.---------------- 57 Astronomical Journal, subscription to, by the Institution -....-........-.-- 48 AS PTONOM Ys DIDO STAD MY Ol ORs CSS es === eee ee eee eee eee ee eee 194 progress in, for 1887 and 1888, by W. C. Winlock ...-.-.. ....---- 125 Auk oreat: collection of bones Ole 2 nose a-5 eae eee ce eee eee 56 B. Babylonian and Assyrian antiquities, casts of ............--2.+-2--- -------- 57 Bache Semon, eet C Or ach LOT.Le Mei Oke eense el eee eee ae eee eee ee xii Baird, Mrs. 8. F., bill for compensation for services of Fish Commissioner 1 SPW eC MESA SS nS Mi Doe ae eR i ea aaa Se eA ea eat GA hi xiii Baird; Prot.) spencer F. action in rezard to death of------csss-- 02 see = eee 4 arrangenients! for interment of. 4-254 22+. s--2ecee xi bill for bronze statue of, and action of Board....-.- xiv memorial of, by William El. Dall. 32-22-.22-5/25- 26 731 Dr G-ebrown Goodesssessss-se aes 79-89 Garrick Malleny= <== sesh eee eeoe 717 Jia WerPowellyictiaeneeeecrsecer ene 739 Robertihidowiaylesenes eee 703 WB Taylors: secyoses tees 721 obituary notice Olea s2-) soos ee eee 77 relative to new building tor Museum and Geological SULVCY 2 coe clciees oes ecco nalceie es Seelam jae XiV remarks onitheideabhh Oba ee cent eee eee eee 1 resolutions by Regents on the death of....--.-.-.---- 77 Batrachians of North America, work on, by Prof. E. D. Cope. .----.--------- 20 Beck, Senator James B., bill introduced by, for Zoological Park.......----- 42 Beckham,(©.W.., Geath'of: -2 7-3 < seach a2 -eocc ec emee eee Ree eee ee 92 Bequestiof james) Hamilton)... coo =e - 1 saen nase seine ieaeee ne ee eee O91 C/ Simeon Habel -.52.. ge: s25- seselocss sctsee has abises so cen eee eee dO 57) James: Smithson: =<... 2-2 sem cece cee sae ae tee eee eee eee 3S: 7/ Bessels; (Dre kimil; notice: of, by DraDall oo. seme eee eee eee 92 Beyer, Dr. H. G., honorary curator of the Materia Medica, transfer of ...-.- 57 Bibliography of Drs Asa Gray’s writing's)-)-- 2-2 4---- see eee e eee eee 785 anthropology, fordées7 and Lees ness. see ee eee eae 524 astronomy for 1888). 22c.ce0 see= oe ooo csc eee eee 194 N. A. palzontology for 1887 and 1888 ---...2-2. ------ 222-7. 310 oriental literature in United States during 1888 .........--- 692 petrosraphy tor 1887 andelsess eases e et eee eee 340 Bill to establish a Zoological Park, introduced by Senator Morrill...--.. ..--. 43 incorporate the American Historical Association -..----..-----.----- 47 introduced by Senator Morrill and passed by Senate, for the erection of an additional fire-proof museum building...-.....--.---.---------+- 15 introduced by Senator Morrill, and passed by the Senate, making the west end of the Smithsonian building fire-proof ........--.----.- ae 17 . INDEX. 829 Page Biographical memoirs..---...-. seceediedeasa SAME Once ee anes Ambo HEA NA 703 Birds, collection of, in the National Museum..-.-- SUS Sra eta te ap ee TS 51 OALeOt Ee KOMiStMEC UNOS Oleseas- ore sace ase. orn = ais asniaelmaiee eee leneens xi, Xvii, 4 Blackford, Eugene G., valuable contributions by, to Zoological Park... --.- 46 Bologna, University of, eighth centenary of the...-- Bee ene ae 47 Booksirecerveduorthelibrany of Congress. .--s=- --.2 «.-- 22 oscc ceee ones wees 40 Botany, progress in, for 1887 and 1888, by F. H. Knowlton......-.....-...----- 475 iBbLoyler,John. revision by, or Dakotan texts -=---...c2--- <2 -c-ssess se cces esce 7 Buffaloes presented to the Zoological Park by E.G. Blackford. ...........--. 44 Building, expendituresfor ..........-- SGohb Se gb AG Ogden OUN Ope soem COs Cee XXi for Museum, plans submitted tu Congress....-.-..-....----- Boe 15 new, for Museum and Geological Survey..-. --- Soe wisi a eaeersice sg Xiv none to be placed on Smithsonian grounds except for Smithsonian nk aweeotecsas 2135) GOB N Soa ESATO OSC Re ko Omen Seer XV repairs of Smithsonian building, appropriation and expenditures. - XXV Smithsonian building, appropriation for urgent repairs.......---. XXXV Senate bill for fire-proofing west end ...--. 17 BullewMsomounemN ation aleMuseuMersay- ea s-cersec.ccie cidein oseios sesies wee eemeee 24,101 appropriation for printing ..............-- xli Bureau of Ethnology (see Ethnology). Bushotter, Mr., collection by, of Dakotan legends, etc....-.-.....-.--------- 70 C, Cash received by Smithsonian Institution.-....---- See eens SSeewoaneees: Xxii Capellini, Prof. S.,of the Bologna University, request by, for representation of the Institution at its eighth centenary......---.-..---- SO OHUD AAAS OBO 47 Catlin Indian gallery, paper on, by Thomas Donaldson....-.....--.---------- 55 Central America, natural history of, investigated by C. H. Townsend ..-...--- 21 Chancellor of the Institution, announcement by, of appointment of Mr. G. B. Goode as Acting Secretary ..-:--.-.--- Beta aes see cei ees xiii . announcement by, of death of Dr. Peter Parker.-.-.-.....- scioodcoc Xvi Chie IusticeswWraiter CeavuniOk, sce) s26 asec cs oe ees oe selec ose XVI HECOSSLUVEOISCLECULOMEOLGe ey eer tetera ae ae cic eas Ses ae eeleeeeer XVil remarks of, on printing for the Institution ....-.......-....-----. xiii oni bheldeabh Of. -— 1. Bde aah, Ste COR AC oe acoee oe 1 resolutions of Board relative to death of .---......-....--...---- XViil views as to forbidding placing of any building on Smithsonian grounds except for exclusive use of Smithsonian...--.--..----- XV views of, relative to accounts ..-....--..-..-- Be ee ee eee xii, xiii on use of Smithsonian grounds for Columbian celebration XV Chancellor pro tem, election of Justice S. I’. Miller as .....-.--..-----.----- xix Chronolosy of the Human period, by J. W. Davis....-----.-------.-.-.----- Sieh Chemistry, progress in, for 1287 and 1888, by F. W. Clarke ......-.---..----- 425 Cherokees, northern, examination of dialect of ......---..----..------.----- 69 Cincinnati Exposition, act of Congress for. ........------ -- BAS ee oe ee XXXVii, XXXiX CO-OpelanlOnsOr LUStipublOUN. =o. a ci> sale a 59, 61 GincularsMespecuin capemlOCiC als es seen ienc otis Se fos ainiem alo eiet:s-nipaisje cinco eeeeee 117 Cissel, D. T., awarded contract for stone, brick, and wood-work in fire-proof- ing the west corridor of Smithsonian building .----...---..-......----.--.- 18 Clarke, F. W., on progress in chemistry for 1887 and 1888 ..........-.-..-.-.- 425 Cluss and Schulze, architects for fire-proofing the west corridor of the Smith- SOMA PON Omen G DOUUEO Deemer en eon Sc ocr 2c scucee cai cancm us eaine 18 Collections, increase of, in the National Museum...-.....-..-.-..--.---+--<-- 51 tabular statement showing extent and character of.....---.---- 52 830 INDEX. Page Columbianvcelebration"nylS925<2cece en 4 eee eee sles eee eee XV Columbus and Amerigho Vespucci (see America).......---.----- pee ai fence es 647 Commission appointed by Congress, on historical manuscripts..---..----.-- XXXVI Committee to examine sanitary condition of Museum building ..--.....---. 49 Congress (see Acts; see also Bills.) resolution of, to print extra copies of the Annual Report.-..--.-..-. li respectin@ public: documembsee ee - seen eee 114 Regents asking for change of form of appropriations. - xiil Congressional ccmmission on historical manuscripts..---..------.----.------ XXXvVi Cope, Prof. E. D., work on North American Batrachians--...-..-.-.-...-.-- 20 Coppée, Prot. Henry, acts of as Regent: access assesses eee ee Xi, Xvii re-appointed, Regxenbysesfeeciacs aaa eee ee eee ae XXXliL remarks on examination of acceunts of Bureau of Eth- NOLO Pye ae tek eis crepes a Sas oie cists ea Se se oe eee xii Contents of che Annual Report.----. odelsie Sense nes See ais s Bae See ee eee Vv Museum! report <2). tase Gas ec setisse soso eee 55 Contributionsito/knowled ge-7- 2:0.) = crs = swine esse see aaa eee 215,99 Convention of American and European nations concerning international ex- GL Ie TR e ee pasar olenas Gan Coe matin Roman rSene ce Hecsenoues Sasameatuae cea as 111 Cox, Hon. S:,8.,,acts ofas Regent. - 5. - 226-6). 5- sae eae se iene eee xi, XVii appointed: Repent... .-- 252 <, 28 oleae semspieeee pecs eens xi, 4 motion by, to accept report of Secretary and transmit it to Congress). 2s oc 652 ysis eee whee een eset eae eee ees sae xiii Cox, W. V., chief clerk of National Museum, preparation of exhibit by, for Minneapolis.E:xposition):---3- 5: sacacece cent ee else se 2 ae ee eee eae 58 Cullom; Hons M.; actsiot as Regent--++-5-raea sees ci Nas, AORN XVil motion to elect Justice S. F. Miller as Chancellor pro tem- xIbe 1D} Dall, William H., memoir by, on Professor Baird in science...-.....--.----- 731 notice of death by, of Dr. Emil Bessels_--.--..-.-..------ 92 Dana, Edward §., on progress in mineralogy for 1887 and 1888 ...--.-.--. eee 455 Dana, James D., biographical memoir of Asa Gray +.---. .-22-. =2--+2 -------- 745 Davis, J. Woodbridge, chronology of the Human period...-.-..-------.---- 583 Death of Chief-Justice Waite, Chancellor of the Institution.............--- xvil Dr. Peter: Parker; late: Recent 252 = j..0.aasiess ae eee ee see aes Xvi. Spencer F. Baird, Secretary of the Institution -----.-..---.------- Aa Deaths of Chancellor, Regent, and Secretary .-222-- .s282— soc oe ee 1 Density of the earth, determination of, by pendulum principle, by J. Wilsing. 635 Deposit of all money received by Smithsonian Institution with Treasurer of United States...--- Tatinetd siacyas URES SEAMEN ase ee te oan ane eee Xxii Detailed statements of expenditures required by Congress...--..----.-- eee xl Dives, Isaac; death: Of 2. Saeed ce es cee eee oe ee ee erecta 92 Disbursing officer's statements of balances=-- 2.2295 se oe eee ee eee eee ee XXX1 Disbursement of appropriations by Congress to be changed from Interior De- partment to. Smithsonian=.. .'s: a> fees eee eee ee rece eee eee eee xiii Distribution of publications .2-.-- 5-22-1026 = =<. eae eee eer 24 Donaldson, Thomas, paper by, on the Catlin Indian gallery ....-..----.----- 55 Dorsey, J. Owen, translation of Dakotan Indian texts.....--... .--.-..----- 70 Dunnington, Capt. C."W. C., déath oft2scll- sien s eee eee ete 92 E. Earth, mean density of, determined by pendulum principle .........- Pees 635 Kaster Island, collection of valuable specimens from. ..---..--------+------ 57 oe INDEX. 831 Page. Edmunds, Hon. George F., bill introduced by, to pay widow of Professor i Baird for his services as Fish Commissioner...--....-..---.---2-----e2--- xiii Electrical service for Museum, appropriations for... -- Sanat XXVI, XXXIV, XXXvV, xl Hmployes: of the Institution, conditions of .... .--. 65.225 woe ese cee ene e cesens 48 Entries, number of, in catalogues of the Museum for the year ...-- oye 52 Estimated cost of new Museum building..---.-.-...-- aie sta Soe Seeeeeooe 17 Estimates for appropriations by Congress to be sent direct by the Institution xili to Congress, how sent ......-.- 5¢ pécd seecsoocHsee seBoD Sore HaobeS xii for increased expedition in international exchanges......---. ...- 3i submitted to Congress for expenses of exchanges --....---...---- 12 Ethnology, appropriations by Congress for..+-...----..----- XXXIi, XXXV, XXXVi, xl contributions of valuable specimens from Easter Islands to- ..-. 57 Bureau of, accounts not examined by executive committee. --_- xii discussion in Board of Regents relative to examina- tion of accounts of.---.---- oScbaceccegéecons caeSec xii In eharee Of Mal. JW OWOLE Joc cce).acasc sess oa ne - 20,62 publicationsybyeecsere sess esas = see eee 74 North American, appropriation and expenditures .-...-...--.---- xiii estimate submitted to Congress for........-- Ae 13 Bpnnolopical Bureat, Held WOOL Of ioe seca a= can woe me ~ one == === 2 comin Secs se 62 Gil COiWOlksO feet ease Mice eerie ani =.s- ee isoee 69 researches, appropriation for the year...--...-....---....----. 7 Exchanges, international, appropriations and expenditures .-...--.---.--- 3 xii appropriation for the year...........-...-...---.-- 7 European convention concerning ..-..--.--- See 111 HON RON, Gan5 SAS CERO SB AEO Os ae BE SSISASe ees abise 103 requiring larger appropriations ...--..---- eerie 29 appropriations for U. S. Geological Survey ....-..-..---..----. xl INGivalsODSCLVQbOL Yi eicnsrseeie eisai >: S: QUE 6:6: 175 od Smithsonian system ...--..-...----. XXXIli, Xxxv, xl Wie DepalLbMenbiescmecteisee er menteem eee XXxXili, xl estimate for coming fiscal year for....---..----.- soao, cosa denooc 29 MMCreasedle SPEC lu O UMM semen seats ele eel ee : 31 submitted to Congress for expenses of-.-..---.---- --- - 12 expense for fiscal year for ...--...----.---- BRA saotdnonc Sigkadse 29 lists revised and inecreased’..--...--.-.--.... Saba eeapaqueoU ase 33 payments for, by Smithsonian Institution -.......---.----.---- : XXil TGV ENELIGIN OF Sade nasSadiadacee sea ponccounTode Sue 5 Peonee enaisae 26 table of amount and cost of foreign ..........-..-----.---- Seene 28 Executive Committee to advise Secretary as to expenditure of income..--. : XV Teportior, accepted ..----.-.--...-.- pce ec rete ects cess xili for year ending June 30, 1888 ........----- Sern xxi resolutions by, relative to death of Dr. Peter Parker-- Xvi and Secretary to act for Board of Regents in reference tostabueor erotessor Baird. -------- sem. == eee 5 xiv Exhibitions, local, applications to contribute to.....--.-.--.--------------- : 57 Expenditures for exchanges, etc...-.--..---- Toe ee ee aaelos Xxili, xxiv, xXvi, 29 of Smithsonian Institution, 1887-88. --.-.-.--.-------- Sees Rg REL Explorations encouraged and promoted by the Institution..----.----.-.----- 20 Exposition, Cincinnati, act of Congress ..---.-.---.-- By spies SSA NO aoe TKK, SK Marietta, act of Congress...--...---. ---------- ---------------- XXXIX Minneapolis, act of Congress ....---.-. ---+----- «+--+ ---++++++: XXXVi 832 INDEX. 1. Page. Farlow, William.—Biographical memoir by, of Asa Gray ..-.-------....--.. 763 Hinances of the Institutions account Ofesse beens assess eee ge eee eee 5 Fire-proofing west corridor of building completed... --..-.....---.-------- 17 end of building, Senate bill passed for -----....-.....--. 17 Fish Commission, relations(of, to the Institution 2. ---o---> ---. sees eseeieeee 3 lint Draw. Mo curatoriot Materia Medicacsss: ase eeese re eeere eee aneeeee 57 Funds administered by Smithsonian, 1887—’88............---.-----.--------- LOSE CONGIIONOR saespeea oe ae se are wea eee eee eee eee eee 5 Furniture and fixtures for Museum, appropriations fore eenece XXVll, XXXIV, XXXKV, xl for Smithsonian Institution, expenditures fones-ceem see ose eeee Soul G. Gardine, Dr. C., appointed representative to centenary of Bologna University 47 Gatschet, A. Ss, on Indian: vocabularies;-- = 5. se. 2a) ecole ieee Sao eee eee 69, 70 Geological Survey, appropriations for exchanges..-... ...-...-------.------ xl building for ...--. Besar Fae Cotes doc sooner Sa Su clon Saotrs= Xiv desires opinion of Board as to new building...-..-...--- XV Geology, progress in, for 1887 and 1888, by W. J. McGee ....----.-..----..- 217 Gibson; Hou. Randallcie appointed *Recemte- =... sc. ese see cee ee ere sal 2 Goode, G. Brown, appointed Acting Secretary by the Chancellor, December 2, TBST ak tc ac acetate oa ayer ee eres xiii, 4 representative of Smithsonian Institution to the Cincinnati Exposition .--.2-.2222..----- 61 appointment by President as Fish Commissioner..-......- 3 MGM OIL Dy, Oli Soy Ew AUCs ere etree aeecles eateries 79-89 Gore, J. Howard, translation by, of Wilsing’s article on determining mean density ofthe earth by pendulum principle: ---—- 2-2 e-em eee ee 639 (GOIN EDONEVNGI (ko Geo desi oo esos case coca5e noce cosegacone caso cases 113 efiected by the Institution. -2- ose eee ae == eee s 27 Grant, Mrs. Julia Dent, resolution of Congress relative to ......----..--.--. XXxXiV Grant, U. S., President, resolution of Congress accepting relics of.......-.-- XXXIV Grants:and subseriptions bysbhe Instromtlonos a) ee ete ele eee 48 Graphic) arts, propressOrsecCulOn Oli oes rec. = eam mem a6 ea eee 57 Ghai Ushi Chu ROG Bis MECN Soe on Sane son 4oacrn o6bd coc odoscaccoscedorecs: xi announcementbtot death Obes: sees -seeee -eieeeeen = sen ee eee ee ee 1 biographical memoir of, by James D. Dana.-.---..----.----- satan 745 biographical memoir of, by William G. Farlow ..-..-..-..--..----- 763 death of and remarkagrelativelt0 sees soc a-- =o) ae eee 89 listrot, the wrrbingslof 22e sent ae eee eee eiae eerie eee 75 TKDE Oy COMMU MEYERS) MN Gace See eS oo eaoo Goes cocooo pong seoneaneaes* XXXili “Great Auk,” collection of bones of, and other collections ...-...-----.----. 56 Grounds, Smithsonian, no building except for Smithsonian use..---.-.--.---- XV Gulf of St. Lawrence, exploration of the islands of...-.....-..-.--5- ....-5- 21 Tele Haibels Simeon), WeQMeSt Olcacs ce ecco steel slenesetiee aaa oats ieee aaenen-O-3 185.) Hamiltoul James; bequestiotsosscace vssces =o oeise oe seals sein eee eee eoerae ply Harkness, William, on the progress of science as exemplified in the art of Yiied Nanie AHN RTE RIDA ee coe ene peo Bats bboono sconcoweodos USE LoSosss 597 Haupt, Dr. Paul, appointment of, as honorary curator of Oriental antiquities. 57 Heating, Rens ete., for National Museum, appropriations for-. xxviii, XXXiv, XXxVv Henshaw, H. W., on the linguistic families of North American Indians.....- > 69 INDEX. Historical manuscripts, Secretary of Smithsonian on commission to report on. Hitchcock, Romyn, temporary work of, in Japan...............---..------ Hoar, Hon. G. F., bill introduced in Senate by, to incorporate the “‘ American EAR UBEIO RARE OCT AULO Lee pono ain oe oe rose nice sou Stee bewe ve bis boeaeebe tee S Hofiman, W. J., examination by, of pictographs in Minnescta and Wisconsin. Holmes, W. H., investigation by, of antiquities in New Mexico.......--....- House of Representatives, privilege of the floor of..................-...---- Hornaday, Wi. L-, collection of living animals by.-.-..-.-----..=....-.---.- curator of department of living animals........---..--.-- Human period; thechronology of, by J. W. Davis.......--.-...5.2..0---0-- I. MilNsUrat ONSICOMRCPONtMIISb Ole omc cittt ae fe ncr-s fee se atie s sewsis oct Scnnce as MBCOMOLAV ALLL DLertOnal SO6— 169 aca) = she cece ae Sec be eoaancer cin ce ca secee nv alls GON ONE pac Olpas herent 2. ees -5 sae Se sees oe sceaccee elected’ chairmaniof/Board) se. 52-2 ece: 0-22 eo eeienee Insects, collection of, in the National Museum..............<.. ..---+------ Interior Department, letter from, to the Secretary relative to the disburse- MENT POLeMUSeUM ONS eee eeta te a Pee el eee eee PLuNLinoe by tor Smibhsoniants. ss-see sees se eae settlement of accounts of Museum, made by..-.-..----- International exchanges, appropriations, and expenditures of ...-....---.-- (See exchanges. ) J. ' Joint resolution of Congress, declaring intent and meaning of act approved May 28, lisileh Seabee se Weed See SS anaes boSS in regard to Wenneralie Industrial Benin VeunnawOmpoard.oL Regentss.-- a2 +-Ges.. Go sede cece toca se fe ress eee e- cs Kidder, Dr. J. H., appointed curator of exchanges BAetaieetlctomerd tetera cnes ci Knowlton, F. H., on progress in botany for 1887and 1888, by ..--...------- collections of plants, rocks, and ores, made by .-.---.----- Kor hilenasg hy, uCuraborOmGnrapbiG ARGS secs. aces sics teed cmee celoe cece cekiee cx - Gabels number of, printed for the Museum ~~~ 252.222. ss006 --eeee nee angley,.5. ©-, annual report of, to Regents......--. .---2: .-sse0cesse0. appoiuted on committee to express sense of Board mae to Pea Gh WHAT CEMOL WAILE 65 nein Sone coon seh ccs odlomnes election by Regents as Secretary of Institution ........--.-. (See Secretary.) Lecture Hall, used by scientific societies - ee Aasts s Glorefcai ocean ieee Letter of Secretary of the Institution to ae opriation Gomantes of C ongress, relative to disbursement of Museum funds ...-..-.-....-. submitting Annual Report of Institution .....---....--- Letter of Hon. William F. Vilas, Secretary of the Interior, to the Institution, relative to the disbursement of Museum funds ........---..-.--.---.----- Library of Congress, books received for, sent weekly..-...-.----.-----.-.-- SUM BONONTAT GROUU Ol amt ea cel os le wi ulamdileinis nj a 4 due lw ertesic= CURTAINS) Ty hee pe Mere acre rsa Gr COED Onc Buc aac H. Mis. 142——53 D-¢ | $34 INDEX. Page. Lighting Museum, appropriations for -...--..--.-..----..--. XXViil, XXXIV, XXxv, xl Histotallustrations: to the Report 2222s. =e see ee aa teenie eee cree viil periodicals for exchange, new lists made out..-...--..-----.---.---- 34 WAPUTDOA COE EIQ in Jesh (Cup eee 656 55 poShee Soeecan osSssc Soom oo ece 7385 Lithology, progress in, for 1887 and 1888, by G. P. Merrill. ......-..--.------ 327 M. McGee, .W. J., on progress in geology for 1887 and 1888 ..........-.---.--.. 217 Maclean JOM sle=2PpPOlMbede Eve Se Ni tre eet sis are teto tatters le teeta ete tate XXxxlil Maine; examination of Indian pictooraphs imls---. 2-2. ete eee = =i 68 Mallery, Garrick, examination by, of pictographs in weneconernt Nova Scotia, AGL MIEN) peoseososScg cscecosneeo secs boDasosoesss cons 68 remarks on the relations of Prof. S. F. Baird to the scien- vinie) societies! of Washing tone] oe ne eee naeoeer eee 717 Manuscripts, historical, Secretary of Smithsonian to report on..---.-------- XXXVI Marcou, Jules, on Ameriques, Amerigho Vespucci, and America ..---..----- 647 Marietta Exposition, act of Congress for..-----:--------------. .----- XXXVilil, XXXiX Mason, Otis T., on progress in anthropology for 1887 and 1888..-..---.----- 497 Material, amount of, sent to Cincinnati Exposition by Institution .-......... 61 Maxey, Senator S. B., expiration of term of, as Regent..---..-------------- 4 Measuring and weighing, in the progress of science, by W. Harkness..--.. - 597 Meeting, special, of the Board of Regents.-.......----..-----.------------- 4 Stated, Olabhe boardion ve COMGS ee = eee mae tate rete eats etl otele (tte 4 Mcetings of Beard, expenditures for....----...---..----..----- -----------= Xxil Meigs, M. C., acts of, as Regent ...-.-..---- ---- ---- ---- s2c0- -- 2200 een e oes xi, Xvii Appoimbe CARES ON be aso ee ieee ae lol ata ee ae eer ee Xxxiii remarks on examination of accounts of Bureau of Ethnology - xii report of executive committee, 1887—88.......-.....-.-... -..- XXxi Members, ex officio, of the Smithsonian establishment.--...---..------------ ix Memorial services of the scientific societies of Washington in commemora- iMG Gye peer it, IIb Cane ee aGn os esoea7 cocees Hace aeacousscnhe cons ecce 715 WilSenores Orn UGH Ones) qaeeou cee ceeraes bees es codedD Coemon caus adeses cooada sass 745, 763 Spencers Eb ard sacs as soar eee ee eke eee COWS dele folgioe Meteorology, recent progress in, by Cleveland Abbe....-..- gis Maeerosleaineees 355 Merrill, G. P., collection of minerals by, for distribution.....-....---------- 55 on progress in petrography for 1887 and 1888 ...--..----.---- 327 Miller, Justice, Samuel F., acts of, as Regent ....-___-..----.---------------- XVil elected Chancellor pro tem ...-....---- ---------<-- xix, 4 remarks by relative to death of Chancellor Waite - xix Mindeleft, Cosmos, exploration and plotting of pueblos --....-...----------- 67 Mindeleff, Victor, investigations by, in Arizona and New Mexico ..-..-.----- 66 Mineralogy, progress in, for 1887 and 1888, by Edward S. Dana ...--...----.-- 455 Minneapolis Exposition, act of Congress....--...--.---. .------+ +--+ +----+-- XXXVI co-operation of Institution in ----.----------------- = 58 Minnesota, examination of pictographs in.-....--.....---.----..----: ------ 67 Mitchell, Dr. S. Weir, appointed representative to the eighth centenary of Bologna University -.----.-:-----.----- ee! Mae ePID celts ici Se 49 Miscellaneous Goll GetlOmS aa oe says) tea eect ele aset eee ttear ete ete feller 22, 99, 100 not to include Museum publications. ..-.....---.-- 26— ne im the: Report. 2 asec ane ee cone ener Ree Se eee 583 Mitchell, Dr. S. Weir. letter in reference to eighth centennial anniversary of the Univ mete OfsBoloo nas: ss seceet eee tee ie ene ee oie ee eee ee 48 Mollusks, collection of, in the National Museum. ......-.-------..----- peeet 51 Mooney, James, examination by, of dialect of northern Cherokees ...-.-..----- 69 | ——— eS INDEX 835 Page. Morrill, Hon. J.S., acts of as Regent.. EAstee Pade: -O.0-0 170 5:6:6.4 9: 55-d hl Erinting annual reports: delays) a-sser- eee ee oe eae eee eee xiii of the Institution should be done outside of the Government Printing OMCe ie B eae elas eae tie oo ee ae ee xiii of the National Museum done through the Department of Interior... Xili for National Museum, appropriations for...........----.---------- xl proceedings ofthe Nationals Museen ese eee eee oe ee 24,55, 101 Appropriations forsee ee eee eee xli Progress of science in the art of weighing and measuring.-......--....----- 597 for the: years 1887. andM 808 © 25. 2 sneer 125 Pueblos wexamination Of .20.055.% Sc suc see ocean ee eee oe ee eee 64, 66, 67 Publicationsiof Smithsonian: Instiiutionse see eeeee eee eee eae 21,99 Payments fOr. Ws ccse coe see cee See XXii sales Ofess.02 5. oe eee ee eee ees eee XXil for the year: jcs-6 2th sae noe eee oe 99 annualireportsiof the Institution==2> cece sees eee eee 22,101 bulletins and proceedings of National Museum.............-.- 24,101 contributions) to) knowledse-eesssees- no eee eee eee eee PA Gh) INDEX. 837 ; Page. Publications, distribution of .....-. Bere Sete aes saat en ence sents ns ate 24 listof, by the Bureau of Ethnology. .----...c22.------ ---><6 74 MISCEANGOUSICOMOCTIONS yan- ecole aa.-mie ce cle eeele one ae oeenree ee 22, 99, 100 MUMberOt, 10 Cdl OPUDLALY:<2<<\-'s (seis sine coc ce os cael cee eclne ence 56 OttnepNaviOnaeNvlUSeUIMy =a) exec aces = Sania cis oe comer 24,101 not to be included hereafter in the mis- cellaneous collections.............. 26 R. Rau, Dr. Charles, curator of prehistoric antiquities, death of ...-.......---- 57, 91 Receipts of Smithsonian Institution, 1887-’83..............-.-.-. 260-2200 XK Ke REcOrdsolsclonceMmOn woos ANC LOSS anise cer am = Saieialsiaels = sce == 5 == sane ne ses 125 Regents of the Institution ...................-. whee atecleaks ©) c(sisis paid sisinistee ce 56 authorize Executive Committee and Secretary to act in relation to Biatue Of LrOressOVPD ALG Ss -.. Ly, i ‘ i, uhh M; i ii fh " i rth wd at Asal a vy f rg ue Vii) Ln If aah mainte ifhak Mae ae Sir i i oe ; | | Caen ee fe ‘ rf wir \ : 7 - : i : . . ae | | ; ae rs y Wi Patt mf TAY mii Nn i he an ih 7 i “ oS SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES HONEA 3 9088 01421 6527